SPECIFICATIONS for HAMPTON INN & SUITES

SPECIFICATIONSfor

HAMPTON INN &SUITES

1305 Buckley RoadSalina, New York

May 26, 2015

ARCH. JOB #: 214041

30 North Forest Road Williamsville, New York 14221 (716) 631-9949 T (716) 631-0521 F

www.mussachioarchitects.com

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY ARCH. JOB # 214041

TABLE OF CONTENTS

BIDDING REQUIREMENTSSection 00100 - Instructions to Bidders

00300 - Bid Form

CONDITIONS OF CONTRACTSection 00700 - General Conditions

00720 - Supplementary General Conditions

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTSSection 01010 - Summary of Work

01040 - Statement of Special Inspections 1 of 2 01040# - Statement of Special Inspections 2 of 201220 - CAD Conversion &Transmission Fee01300 - Submittals01300# - Submittal Cover Sheet

DIVISION 2 - SITE WORKSection 02010 - Subsurface Investigation

02011 - GeoTechnical Report May 12, 2015 02100 - Site Preparation02140 - Dewatering02200 - Earthwork02500 - Asphalt Paving02515 - Stamped Concrete02520 - Concrete Paving and Curbs02830 - Fencing02930 - Landscaping Work - Lawns02950 - Landscaping Work - Planting

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETESection 03200 - Concrete Reinforcing

03220 - Welded Wire Fabric03260 - Anchors and Inserts03265 - Waterstops03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete03410 - Precast Concrete Hollow Core Planks

03545 - Gypsum Cementitious Underlayment

DIVISION 4 - MASONRYSection 04200 - Concrete Masonry Unit

04210 - Brick Masonry

P:\2014\214041 Hampton I&S Salina\Correspondence\Specification\01 Contents.wpd

Page 1 of 4


DIVISION 5 - METALSSection 05300 - Metal Deck

05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing05500 - Misc. Metal Work05513 - Alternating Steel Stairs

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICSSection 06220 - Rough and Finish Carpentry

06400 - Architectural Casework and Millwork06650 - Solid Polymer Fabrication Countertops06651 - Cultured Granite/Marble Countertops

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTIONSection 07100 - Membrane Waterproofing

07200 - Insulation07201 - Thermal Batt Insulation07240 - Outsulation Plus MD System 07272 - Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barrier07273 - Backstop Moisture and Air Barrier07501 - Monolithic Adhered Roofing and Flashing System07620 - Flashing and Sheet Metal

07721 - Smoke Vents07726 - Roof Hatch Type SS-HAMPTON07727 - Roof Hatch Safety Rail - HAMPTON07920 - Caulking and Sealants

DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASSSection 08105 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

08111 - Aluminum Doors and Frames (Swinging)08165 - Metal Mirror Closet Door System HAMPTON08200 - Wood Doors08305 - Access Doors08360 - Overhead Doors08400 - Entrances and Storefronts

08462 - Automatic Door Operation (Sliding Doors)08520 - Aluminum Windows Wojan 4500 Series 08710 - Finish Hardware08810 - Glass and Glazing

DIVISION 9 - FINISHESSection 09255 - Gypsum Wallboard & Gypsum Sheathing

09310 - Tile (Ceramic/Quarry)09510 - Acoustical Ceilings09590 - Resilient Flooring09685 - Carpeting09770 - FRP Panels (Kemlite)09900 - Painting and Finishing


Page 2 of 4


DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIESSection 10155 - Toilet Room Partitions

10200 - Louvers and Vents10260.1 - Wall Corner Guards10300 - Pre-Manufactured Fireplace Direct Venting - Gas 10350 - Flagpoles10400 - Railing10426 - Signage10500 - Lockers10520 - Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories10655 - Operable Partitions Wood Frame Glass 10800 - Toilet Accessories10914 - Closet Accessories10914# - Miscellaneous Specialties - Knox Box

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT Section 11175 - Linen Chutes

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTIONSection 13153 - Indoor Salt Water Swimming Pool & Spa

13915 - Fire Protection General13916 - Automatic Sprinkler System13975 - Stand Pipe

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMSSection 14210 - Traction Elevator

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL - PLUMBING & HVACSection 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions

15050 - Basic Materials & Methods15250 - Insulation15400 - Plumbing15700 - Heat Transfer15701 - Make-Up Air Units15738 - Split System Air Conditioners15751 - Indoor Pool Dehumidification Unit15767 - Unit Heaters15800 - Air Distribution15822 - Power Roof Exhausters15950 - Testing, Adjusting & Balancing for HVAC


Page 3 of 4


DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICALSection 16010 - Electrical General Provisions

16075 - Identification for Electric Systems16100 - Basic Materials & Methods16200 - Service & Distribution16300 - Lighting16390 - Grounding16400 - Communication & Fire Alarm System16455 - Motor & Circuit Disconnects16500 - Wiring Mechanical Equipment


Page 4 of 4

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY BIDDING REQUIREMENTS

ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 CONDITIONS OF WORK

Each bidder must inform himself fully of the conditions relating to the construction and labor underwhich the work is now or will be performed; failure to do so will not relieve a successful bidder of hisobligation to furnish all material and labor necessary to carry out the provisions of the contractdocuments and to complete the contemplated work for the consideration set forth in his bid.

1.02 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS

In determining the qualifications of a bidder, the Owner will consider his record on the performanceof any contracts for construction work into which he may have entered with the Owner or with publicbodies; and the Owner expressly reserves the right to reject the bid of such bidder if such recorddiscloses that such bidder, in the opinion of the Owner, has not properly performed such contractsor has habitually and without just cause, neglected the payment of bills or has otherwise disregardedhis obligations to sub-contractors, material-men or employees, or who has delayed in the executionof his part of the work. The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary todetermine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the Owner allsuch information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the rightto reject any bid if the evidence submitted by or investigation of such bidder shall fail to satisfy theOwner that such bidder is qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete thework contemplated herein, conditional bids will not be accepted.

Each bidder agrees to waive any claim it has or may have against the Owner, the Architect/Engineer, and the respective employees, arising out of or in connection with theadministration, evaluation, or recommendation of any bid.

1.03 ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS

No interpretations of the meaning of the plans, specifications, or other contract documents will bemade to any bidder orally. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing addressed toMussachio Architects P.C., 30 North Forest Road, Williamsville, New York 14221, and to be givenconsideration must be received at least five (5) days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids,and all such interpretations and any supplemental instruction will be in the form of written addendato the specification, which, if issued, will be mailed to all prospective bidders (at the respective addres-ses furnished for that purpose) not later than three (3) days prior to the date fixed for the opening ofbids. Failure of any bidder to receive any such addendum or interpretation, shall not relieve anybidder from obligation under his bid submitted. All addenda will be numbered and dated, and a listof such addenda may be obtained by contacting the Architect's office. No article, paragraph, orsentence of the Specifications or drawings is omitted, unless expressly so stated in the Addenda orAmendments. It is the contractors responsibility to bring any conflict between drawings and, or writtennotes and specification to the Architect immediately. If not brought to the attention of the Architect inwriting it will be assumed that the more expensive of the items is being provided.

00100 - 1 of 4



1.04 CONTRACT FORM

The Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor AIA. Document A-101 LatestEdition will be submitted by Owner to the successful bidder for proper signatures.

1.05 OBLIGATION OF BIDDER

At the time of the opening of bids, each bidder will be presumed to have inspected the site and tohave read and to be thoroughly familiar with the Plans and Contract Documents (including alladdenda). The failure or omission of any bidder to receive or examine any form, instrument or docu-ment shall in no way relieve any bidder from any obligation in respect of his bid. All quotations are to be based on existing plans and specifications. Any “Value engineering” itemsare to be listed separately with a description on the VE item and pricing for each VE item. List theseitems on a company letterhead accompanying the bid form.

1.06 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS

"EQUIVALENTS: Where, in these specifications, one certain kind, type, brand or manufacture ofmaterial is named, it shall be regarded as the required standard of quality. Where two or more arenamed, these are presumed to be equal, and the Contractor may select one of those items. If theContractor desires to use any kind, type, brand or manufacture of material other than those namedin the specifications, he shall indicate on the Substitution Sheet what material, equipment, or methodis offered as equal and when requested, submit information describing wherein it differs from basespecifications in specific detail and other information as required by the Owner."

The acceptable standard of quality of all equivalent items shall be determined by the Architect withthe burden of proof of the equivalency of such items a responsibility of the bidders, and to be sub-mitted through the prime bidder's office, and shall be acceptable to the prime bidder.

1.07 REIMBURSEMENT OF ARCHITECT'S COSTS

In the event substitutions are proposed to the Architect, the Architect will record all time used by himand by his consultant in evaluation of each such proposed substitution.

Whether or not the Architect approved a proposed substitution, the Contractor shall, upon receipt ofthe Architect's billing, promptly reimburse the Architect at the rate of two and one-half times the directcost of the Architect and his consultants for all time spent by them in the evaluation of the proposedsubstitution.

1.08 MATERIAL/EQUIPMENT AVAILABILITY REPORT

Instructions: After the Owner and Architect have determined the successful bidder, he will be notifiedby phone, then in writing. Within 48 hours after notification the successful bidder shall complete aMaterial/Equipment Availability Report and hand carry it to the Architect's office. No mailing accepted. Time is of the essence.

00100 - 2 of 4



A. This form is to assist the Architect in producing the progress schedule for the project. All

items must be filled in, no blank spaces allowed. Fill in "N.A." (non-applicable) if item cannotbe filled in. This form will be given to all successful Contractors after determining thesuccessful bidder. It will be his responsibility to xerox and distribute this blank form to hissubcontractors for processing and resubmitting it back to the Contractor. The Contractor willevaluate it and sign it.

This form will make it possible to commence with the contract, coordinate all trades basedon lead times, and terminate the contract on schedule. It is imperative these forms beforwarded to the Construction Manager and/or Architect 48 hours after the Contractor isselected and notified.

B. Required Information: Supplier/Subcontractors NameShop Drawing Submittal DateMaterial Delivery/Start DateCompletion Date

Note that immediate shop drawings are required and must be submitted as indicated onprogress form which will be filled in by the successful Contractor. The Architect willdetermine if submitted date is appropriate or whether date shall be moved forward. This willbe determined by the Architect and when required, the Contractor(s).

C. Contractors and their subcontractors shall not select manufacturers, vendors, suppliers, whocannot perform or deliver supplies, equipment, etc., which will allow the contract to beterminated as indicated on the Bid Form. Contractor shall also confirm his subcontractor willsupply required amounts of manpower to perform concurrent operations.

1.09 LIST OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS

The Bidders, if requested, shall submit a complete list of subcontractors he proposes to use not laterthan 48 hours after receipt of Proposals.

Subcontractor list shall be delivered to the Architect.

Execution of the contract by the Owner without objection to any name on said list shall constitute anacceptance of the same. Should the Owner request that a different subcontractor be proposed forany phase of the work, the Bidder shall comply with such requests until a subcontractor acceptableto the Owner is proposed. No subcontractor approved by the Owner may be replaced unlessreplacement is approved by the Owner.

1.10 ITEMS PROVIDED BY OWNER Installed by Contractor.

A. Furniture: (ALL) Add: Decorative Framed Mirrors, Provided by Owner, Installed byContractor.

00100 - 3 of 4



1. All furniture for pool, guestrooms, lobby, staff lounge, fitness room, pantry, meetingroom, laundry room, business center, vestibule, office work areas and breakfast areaas required per the Brand Standards. This includes but is not limited to the free-standing pieces of furniture located in the pantry for the breakfast tables, chairs,beds, bedding, television armoire, night stands, desks, artwork, plants, etc. Refer toarchitectural drawings for more furniture locations. The Plumbing Contractor will berequired to provide the vanity sink and coordinate with the supplier of the vanity tops.

2. Guestroom Equipment:a. Hair Dryersb. Under counter Microwave/Refrigeratorc. Coffee Makerd. Carpet & Pade. Counter topsf. Ceramic Tileg. Painth. Vinyl Wall Coveringi. VCTj. Vanity Tops

B. Equipment: 1. Commercial Laundry Machines2. Kitchen Equipment3. Food Prep Equipment (Refrigerator, Freezer, Coffee Brewer, Juicer)4. Kitchenette Equipment (Range, Dishwasher, Etc)5. Guest Laundry Machines6. Laundry Carts7. Fitness Equipment8. Vending Machines9. Ice Machines10. Wheel Chair Lift11. Staff Lounge Equipment (Refrigerator & Microwave)12. Televisions (Exercise Room/Lobby/Guestrooms)13. Satellite Dish & Systems (Installed by Owner’s Vendor)14. Computer Equipment, Including but not Limited to; Monitors, Printers, Scanners,

Servers, Etc (Installed by Owner’s Vendor)15. Office Equipment, Including but not Limited to; Copiers, Fax Machine, Safe, Etc.16. Telephone/Intercom System; Including Cabling17. Security System; Including Cabling18. Sound System (Installed by Owner’s Vendor)19. Lockers20. PTAC Units 21. Light Fixtures; Sconces, Chandeliers, Flooring. See Fixture Schedule on Electrical

Drawings for the other Owner provided Light Fixtures. 22. Keyless Entry Hardware23. Phone and Data lines (Contractor provide Conduit & Box)

- End of Section -

00100 - 4 of 4


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 00300 - BID FORM

ALL BIDDERS NOTE: Three signed copies of this bid form must be submitted formally to the Owner listedbelow. However, follow mailing instruction outlined in Section 00100 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS.

TO: Carmen Emmi Jr.Emmi LLC/Mangano LLC275 Elwood Davis RoadLiverpool, NY 13088

Pursuant to and in compliance with the Advertisement for Bids and/or the Instructions to Bidders, relatinghereto, the undersigned hereby offers to furnish all, labor, materials, supplies, equipment, and other facilitiesand items necessary and proper for, or incidental to, the Work as required by the plans and specifications asprepared by Mussachio Architects, P.C., and all the following addenda issued by the Architect and faxedand/or mailed to the Undersigned prior to the opening of bids.

The bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:

Addendum No. Dated Addendum No. Dated Addendum No. Dated Base Bid (tax and fees are to be included): ($ ). Contractor Firm Name:

Preparer's Name (printed):

Preparer's Phone No. & Email

Date Prepared

00300 - 1 of 4



BID BREAKDOWN:

The Undersigned agrees that upon request of the Owner, the amounts listed above will be broken down intoseparate prices, as requested by the Architect.

SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETIONS: The work proposed under this contract will be substantially completed in

consecutive calendar days (consecutive calendar days include Saturdays, Sundays, and

Holidays) or consecutive calendar weeks, from the date authorization to proceed is granted.

ALTERNATES:

Description Add or Deduct

l. $

2. $

3. $

4. $

5. $

6. $

7. $

8. $

9. $

10. $

00300 - 2 of 4



SUBSTITUTIONS:

The following spaces have been allotted for manufacturer's products that are considered equal to the materialspecified and the Addition or Deduction from the Base Bid. NOTE: Base Bid will contain cost of items, written on the specifications, the substitution items and pricequotations listed below may or may not be accepted by the Owner. Item Manufacturer Add/Deduct

l. $

2. $

3. $ 4. $

5. $

6. $

7. $

If written notice of the acceptance of this Bid is mailed or delivered to the undersigned within thirty (30) daysafter the opening of Bids, or any time thereafter before this Bid is withdrawn, the undersigned will, within five(5) days after the date of such mailing or delivering of such notice, execute and deliver a Contract in theStandard Form of Agreement of the American Institute of Architects.

By submission of this bid, each Bidder and each person signing on behalf of any Bidder, and in the case ofa joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best ofhis knowledge and belief:

(l) The prices in this Bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation,communication or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matterrelating to such prices with any other Bidder or with a competitor;

(2) Unless otherwise required by law, the prices which have been quoted in this Bid have notbeen knowingly disclosed by the Bidder, and will not be knowingly disclosed by the Bidderprior to opening, directly or indirectly, to any other Bidder or to any competitor.

(3) No attempt has been made or will be made by the Bidder to induce any person, partnershipor corporation to submit or not to submit a Bid for the purpose of restricting competition.

00300 - 3 of 4



This bid may be withdrawn at any time prior to the scheduled time for the opening of bids or any authorizedpostponement thereof.

FIRM

BY (signature)

PRINT NAME

TITLE

ADDRESS (Corporation Seal if Applicable)

If a corporation, give the State of Incorporation using the phrase, "A corporation organized under the laws ofthe State of New York".

If the partnership, give names of partners, using also the phrase, "Co-partners trading and doing business

under the firm name and style of .

If an individual, give the individual's name, using also the phrase "An individual doing business under the firm

name and style of .

*****End of Section*****

00300 - 4 of 4

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

REFERENCE:

The American Institute of Architects

A.I.A. Document A-201

General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

Latest Edition

is hereby made a part of the Contract Documents

by reference.

*******************************

00700 - 1 of 1


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 00720 - SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS

PART I - GENERAL

1 .01 CONTRACT

The Form of Agreement Between the Owner and Contractor (Stipulated Sum), AIA Document A101,Standard Form of the American Institute of Architects, 2007 edition, pages 1 through 7, shall be usedas the contract and shall form a part of these bidding documents.

This document is kept on file in the Architect's office and may be examined upon request by any ofthe bidders.

1 .02 EXECUTION, CORRELATION, INTENT OF DOCUMENTS

Make no changes from Contract Documents without first receiving written permission from theArchitect. Where detailed information is lacking, before proceeding with work, refer matter toArchitect for information.

If work is required in manner to make it impossible to produce first class work, or shoulddiscrepancies appear among Contract Documents, request interpretation before proceeding withwork. If Contractor fails to make such request, no excuse will thereafter be entertained for failureto carry out work in satisfactory manner. Should conflict occur in or between drawings andspecifications, interpretation shall be given preference in the following order, with later dates takingprecedence over earlier dates:

A. Addenda

B. Amendments (SK Drawings) to the Drawings

C. Amendments to the Specifications

D. Specifications

E. Drawings:1. Schedules and piping and wiring diagrams take precedence over other data shown on

the drawings.2. Notes take precedence over other data shown on the Drawings, except schedules and

piping and writing diagrams.3. No article, paragraph, or sentence of the Specifications or drawings is omitted, unless

expressly so stated in the Addenda or Amendments. It is the contractors responsibilityto bring any conflict between drawings and, or written notes and specification to theArchitect immediately. If not brought to the attention of the Architect in writing it will beassumed that the more expensive of the items is being provided.

4. Omissions from the drawings or specification, or the misdescription of details for workwhich are manifestly necessary to carry out the intent of the drawings and specifications,or which are customarily performed, shall not relieve the Contractor from performingsuch omitted or misdescribed details of the work; but they shall be performed tocomplete the work as it is intended, without any gaps between the various subdivisionof work or between the work of the Contractor and all subcontractors, as if fully andcorrectly set forth and described in the drawings and specifications.

00720 - 1 of 3



1 .03 REPRODUCTION OF DOCUMENTS

Contractor/Owner shall compensate Architect for reproduction of Instruments of Service, includingelectronic copies of drawings produced at Architect’s office as follows:

A. Prints, e-files in .dwf & .pdf format 6 sq. ft. = $2.75, 8.75 sq. ft. = $3.75

B. Reproducible Original 6 sq. ft. = $18.50, 8.75 sq. ft. = $23.00

C. Electronic files of individual drawings in .DWG (cad) format.1. 1 $150.002. 2-5 $150.00 first drawing plus $135.00 each additional drawing3. 6-10 $850.00 first 5 drawings plus $115.00 each additional drawing4. 11-20 $1,350.00 first 10 drawings plus $85.00 each additional drawing5. >20 $2,115.00 first 20 drawings plus $50.00 each additional drawing

1 .04 SUBCONTRACTORS

(Amend Article 5.2.1 of the General Conditions by the addition of the following):

Within 10 days after awarding of the contracts, the prime Contractors shall submit a list ofsubcontractors he(she) will employ in the construction of the project for approval to the Architect.

1 .05 CHANGES IN THE WORK - Construction Change Directives

(Add the following Subparagraph 7.3.6.1):

7.3.6.1 The allowance for overhead and profit combined in the total cost to the Owner, shall bebased on the following schedule:

.1 For the Contractor, for any Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, fifteenpercent (15%) of the cost.

.2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's subcontractor, ten percent(10%) of the amount due the subcontractor.

.3 Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance withSubparagraph 7.3.7.

.4. In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, exceptthose so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied bya complete itemization of costs, including labor, materials and subcontract. Labor andmaterials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items aresubcontracts, they shall be itemized also.

(Amend subpargraph 7.3.7 of the General Conditions by the addition of the following):

In the third sentence change to read ...amount for overhead and profest as set forth in the Agreementor Supplementary General Conditions of the Project Specification, or if not such amount is set for thein the Agreement, a ...

00720 - 2 of 3



1 .06 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION


Payments will be made on the basis of progress and will be made one monthly. Application forPayment Form shall be submitted to Architect in triplicate on AIA Standard Form Document G702on or before the first (1st) of each month for payment by the thirtieth (30th) of the month. Progresspayments shall be made upon monthly requisitions from the contractor in the amount of ninetypercent (90%) of the contract sum allocated to labor and materials for that monthly period.


Substantial completion is defined as the point of time when the Owner is able to use the facility in itsentirety as intended by the Construction Documents.

1 .07 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

(Amend Article 10.1 of the General Conditions by the addition of the following):

All items of work required for the protection of public, workmen, site and construction operation asrequired by the General Conditions and/or laws or regulations shall be completed before the workis started on the project.

- - - END OF SECTION - - -

00720 - 3 of 3

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL

This project consists of the construction of a (5) five story hotel Building to be located at 1305 BuckleyRoad, Salina, NY. All work is to be performed in strict compliance with the “Building Code of New YorkState”, latest edition.

1. 02 CONTRACTS

A. This is a Single Contract project with combined contracts as follows:1. General Construction2. Sitework3. Plumbing4. HVAC5. Electrical

B. All Contractors, General or sub, are directed to cooperate and coordinate their work with eachother, especially scheduling which will be the ultimate responsibility of the General Contractor. The lack of such coordination not be an acceptable excuse for delays.

C. Any conflicts between a General Contractor and/or subcontractors which will cause delay inconstruction, must be brought to the attention of the Architect and Owner, in writing, within twenty-four (24) hours.

D. All contracts shall include the Instructions to Bidders, Form of Bid, General Conditions,Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements.

E. Extent of Operation: The Contractors shall provide all items, articles, materials, operation ormethods listed, indicated, mentioned, or scheduled on the drawings and/or in the specifications,including all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals, necessary and required for theircompletion and installation in the project

1. 03 EXAMINATION OF SITE, DOCUMENTS, ETC.

Each bidder shall visit the site of the proposed work and fully acquaint himself with the conditions asthey exist so that he may fully understand the facilities, difficulties, and restrictions attending theexecution of the work under the Contract. Bidders shall also thoroughly examine and be familiar withthe drawings and the specifications. The failure or omission of any Bidder to receive or examine anyform, instrument, or document, or to visit the site or acquaint himself with conditions there existing shallin no way relieve the Bidder from any obligation with respect to his Bid.

1. 04 PERMITS

The General Contractor is responsible for obtaining and paying for all necessary permits as requiredby laws and ordinances, for work required to construct the project, including utility fees, connectioncharges, etc. unless specifically noted in the Bid Form as not being included.

01010 - 1 of 12



1. 05 REFERENCES

References to known standard specifications shall mean and intend latest edition of such specificationsadopted and published at date of invitation to submit proposals.

Reference to technical society, or organization or bodies is made in the specifications in accordancewith the following abbreviations: AA Aluminum AssociationAAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's AssociationAASHO American Association of State Highway OfficialAASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation OfficialsACI American Concrete Institute

AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction

AISI American Iron and Steel InstituteANSI American National standard InstituteAPA American Plywood Association

ASA American Standard Association ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning EngineersASME American Society of Mechanical EngineersASTM American Society for Testing and MaterialsAWI American Woodwork InstituteAWPI American Wood Preservers InstituteAWS American Welding SocietyAWSC American Welding Society CodeBIA Brick Institute of AmericaCRCI Concrete Reinforcing Steel InstituteCS Commercial Standards

CSI Construction Specifications Institute FGMA Flat Glass Marketing AssociationFM Factory Mutual SystemFS Federal Specification IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NBS National Bureau of StandardsNEC National Electric CodeNEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's AssociationNFPA National Fire Protection AssociationNYSDOT New York State Department of TransportationNYSDPW New York State Department of Public WorksOSHA Occupational Safety & Health AdministrationPCI Precast Concrete InstitutePEI Porcelain Enamel InstituteSAM Scientific Apparatus Makers AssociationSDI Steel Deck InstituteSJI Steel Joist Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractor's National AssociationSSPC Structural Steel Painting CouncilUL Underwriter's Laboratories

01010 - 2 of 12



1. 06 ITEMS PROVIDED BY THIS CONTRACTOR/OWNER

A. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain all temporary facilities, such as water,electrical services, telephone and toilets. The General Contractor is also to provide a temporaryfield office.

B. Toilet facilities shall be provided and maintained by the General Contractor.

C. Telephones for the Contractors, workmen and Owners use for business purposes shall beprovided by the General Contractor. Telephones must be capable of receiving incoming calls andmaking outgoing local calls.

D. General Contractor will provide email service and the capability of sending and receiving emailsas well as the ability to print min. 8-1/2" x 11" emails.

E. Water is available at the site by the Owner.

1. 07 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. All arrangements for all temporary utilities and telephone service shall be made by the Contractorat his expense

B. Temporary Toilets: The Contractor shall provide, install, maintain, and pay for toilet accommoda-tions for all persons employed or engaged in the Project. At completion of the Project, theContractor is to remove the toilet facility and thoroughly clean and disinfect the area. The toiletshall be of chemical type, placed in a location approved by the Owner, and maintained in sanitarycondition at all times.

C. Temporary Water will be installed by the Plumbing Contractor and any meter charged to theGeneral Contractor along with any hoses, lines, equipment, etc. necessary for construction. Theyshall all be removed at completion of project.

D. Temporary Heat: The Contractor shall provide temporary heat as required when work under theircontrol is being carried on during cold weather and to prevent damage to the work. Heat shallbe furnished when and as directed by the Architect, by means of portable or fixed units. EachPrime Contractor shall provide and pay for all fuel used in the temporary facilities and shallprovide proper smoke pipes or other means to prevent smoke or smudge from marking up walls,ceilings, or other parts of equipment.

E. Temporary Light and Power:1. The Contractor shall furnish and install all wiring and other equipment within the building

for temporary lighting and power as specified below.2. All temporary lighting and power shall be installed immediately upon award of Contract,

following the building construction, so that service will be available when required by eachContractor. Facilities are to be maintained and keep in good working order by theContractor for the life of the Project. The wiring shall be complete and ready for use,including all feeds, connections, fuses, etc. required for system use.

01010 - 3 of 12



3. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all temporary wiring for lighting andpower, in a safe condition and in accordance with the requirements of the New York StateLabor Code, Federal Department of Labor Standards, Contractor's Safety Manual, OSHA,NFPA, Latest Edition of the National Electrical Code, etc. for the life of the project, includingreplacement of lamps and fuses.

4. The installation shall conform to safe practice and the National Electrical Code. All partsof the system shall be protected and plainly marked as to voltage characteristics. Workinstalled in such as manner as to interfere with construction of the building shall berelocated as required without extra charges. Consult with other contractors and theArchitect/Engineer so as to have minimum of interference and changes, and so as to havethe service available as required.

5. Any extension required for switches, panels, or outlets specified shall be at the expenseof the contractor requiring same.

6. Wiring for temporary lighting and single power shall in general consist of three-wire,120/240 volt feeder in the building, with branch circuits of three-wire sized as required. Each branch circuit shall be equipped with lampholders and grounding type outlets for 120and 240 volt, single phase power. Lampholders shall be approved weatherproof type withlamp guards. The 120 and 240 volt power outlets shall consist of an approved box withweatherproof cover containing "GFI" type outlets as approved or conventional outlets fedfrom "GFI" breakers in panelboard. The total load of each branch circuit (lighting andpower) shall not exceed the load permitted in the N.E.C. for each branch circuit size.

7. A green grounding wire of size as required shall be installed with each feeder and branchcircuit. All 120/240 volt power outlets shall be grounded in an approved manner throughthe equipment grounding wire. The green equipment grounding wire shall be grounded inaccordance with National Electrical Code requirements.

8. The Contractor shall furnish and install all lamps and fuses for the temporary lighting andsingle phase power.

9. Should a change in location of any temporary equipment herein specified be necessary inorder for the work to progress properly, the Electrical Contractor shall remove and relocatesuch equipment as directed without additional cost. When directed by the Archi-tect/Engineer and no longer required, the temporary equipment specified shall be removed.

10. The Contractor shall extend sufficient circuits from temporary panel as required for allconstruction purposes.

1. 08 FIELD OFFICE FOR CONTRACTORS

A. The Contractor will have a field office with a telephone which will be a trailer. Sheds or shantiesare prohibited. The trailer location will be as approved by the Owner. Exact location of alltemporary utilities shall be preapproved by the Architect and the Owner.

. Telephones for the Contractors, workmen and Owners use for business purposes shall be provided by theGeneral Contractor - Telephones must be capable of receiving incoming calls and making outgoing local calls.

1. 09 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

The Contractor is to provide a sufficient amount of fire extinguishers to satisfy all applicable laws. Theyshall be in good operating condition and be easily accessible to the workmen. The General Contractorshall have not less than three.

01010 - 4 of 12



1. 10 MEASUREMENTS. LINES, LEVELS, AND GRADES

A. The General Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels, and dimensions as shown ondrawings, and he shall report any errors or inconsistencies in the above to the Architect beforecommencing work.

B. As the work progresses, the General Contractor shall lay out on the floor the exact location of allpartitions and doors as a guide to all grades.

C. All work shall be maintained and completed level, true to line and plumb.

1. 11 EXISTING DRIVES, WALKS, AND FREE AREAS

Contractors may use existing drives, walks, and free areas during process of work; however, they mustminimize interference and/or interruption of Owner's operations. Upon completion of work, immediatelyclear all work materials and refuse from all drives, walks, and free areas.

1. 12 FIELD MEETINGS

A. Regular field meetings shall be held as directed by the Architect.

B. Representatives of each Contractor shall attend these meetings and have authority to act for theContractor in all matters concerning the construction program.

C. Minutes of meetings shall be taken by Architect and all decisions indicated in these minutes shallrequire compliance by the contractors affected.

D. Subcontractors and/or suppliers shall attend meetings when directed by the Architect.

1. 13 USE OF SITE

A. The Owner shall continuously occupy the building and site during construction and use of areas,scheduling, etc. shall be coordinated with his personnel.

B. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for the Owner's site, structures, and equipment duringconstruction. All damage by the Contractor and not indicated to be repaired or replaced underthe Contract Documents shall be returned to conditions existing at start of construction at no costto Owner.

C. The Contractor shall assume full charge of space for the storage of materials for all trades,allotting same to the various materials in such a manner as will facilitate the work, prevent frictionbetween contractors, and maintain order and tidiness. Allocation of space shall be approved byArchitect.

1. 14 STORAGE AND PARKING AREAS

A. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain a temporary area at the site suitable forvehicular parking and for the stockpiling and storage of equipment and materials. These facilitiesshall be for the use of personnel for all trades of the project.

01010 - 5 of 12



B. The General Contractor shall keep such area free of debris, obstructions, standing water andprovide necessary barricades.

C. Construction parking or delivery shall not interfere with or obstruct Owner's use of site. Fire lanesand access shall not be obstructed or restricted.

D. Parking shall be as directed by Owner.

1. 15 GUARANTEES

A. Whenever within one (1) year of beneficial occupancy any of the Contractors is notified in writingby either the Architect or the Owner, that any item of equipment, material and/or workmanshiphas proved defective or is not in any way meeting the specification requirements, he shallimmediately replace, repair or otherwise correct the defect or deficiency without cost to theOwner.

B. The General Contractor's liability for defects in materials and labor shall not be limited to less thanthe legal limit of liability in accordance with the laws of the State of New York.

C. The Contractor shall submit all guarantees, warranties, bonds and operating manuals to theArchitect prior to receipt of final payment for all work, materials and equipment provided undertheir contract.

1. 16 AVAILABILITY OF MATERIALS

A. The Contractor shall review the availability of the materials specified and/or shown on drawingsand must notify the Architect of any materials that will cause any delays in the construction of theproject.

B. The delivery times, plus a list of alternate materials proposed including additions or deductionsin cost, must be submitted in writing to the Architect for his review within two weeks after theaward of the contract.

C. All materials must be provided as specified unless approved equal by the Architect.

1. 17 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS

A. The General Contractor shall bear the sole responsibility for the care and protection of hisrespective materials and work installed in the building, and materials stored on the site for whichpayment has been made, and for the restoration of damaged or stolen materials, at no additionalcost to the Owner.

B. The Contractor may be responsible for areas in which their work is proceeding and shall erectsuch guards or fencing as may be required to fully protect his work and to afford reasonable andadequate protection against injury to persons at the site thereof.

C. Contractor shall provide a fence around the construction site.

01010 - 6 of 12



1. 18 LISTS AND SCHEDULES

The General Contractor shall furnish a list of his subcontractors and a schedule of construction, inaccordance with the General and Supplementary General Conditions of these Contract Documents.They shall also provide a shop drawing schedule, indicating the type of shop drawings that will besubmitted and the anticipated submission date.

1. 19 REQUIRED INSURANCE

A. Before commencing the work, the General Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a certificate orcertificates of insurance in form satisfactory to the Owner, showing that he has complied with thegeneral conditions.

B. The kinds and amounts of insurance are as follows:1. Workmen's Compensation Insurance a policy covering the obligations of the Contractor

in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 41 as amended in the Workmen’sCompensation Law, covering all operations under the contract, whether performed by himor by his subcontractors.

2. Liability and Property Damage Insurance limits of not less than: $ 500,000.00 Each Person $1,000,000.00 Each Accident $2,000,000.00 Aggregate

for all damages arising during the policy period, shall be furnished in the following types. a. Contractor's Liability Insurance: Issued to and covering the liability for damage

imposed by law upon each subcontractor with respect to all work performed by saidsubcontractor under the contract.

b. Contractor Protective Liability Insurance: Issued to and covering the liability fordamages imposed by law upon the Contractor with respect to all work under the con-tract performed for the Contractor by subcontractors.

c. Protective Liability Insurance: Issued to and covering the liability for damagesimposed by law upon the Owner.

d. Completed Operations Liability Insurance: Issued to and covering the liability fordamages imposed by law upon the Contractor between the date of final cessationof work and the date of final acceptance thereof.

e. Automobile Liability Insurance: Covering all vehicles owned and hired in the amountof $500,000.00/$1,000,000.00 bodily injury and $1,000,000.00 property damage.

f. All Risk-Builders Risk Insurance provided in the amount equal to the total amountof the Bid.

1. 20 NON-ASSIGNABILITY OF CONTRACT

Each Contractor is hereby prohibited from assigning, transferring, conveying, subletting or otherwisedisposing of this contract, or of his right, title or interest therein, or his power to execute such contractto any other person, company, or corporation, without previous consent in writing of the Owner. If theContractor shall, without previous written consent herein provided for, assign, transfer, convey, sublet,or otherwise dispose of same, or his right, title, or interest therein, or his power to execute suchcontract to any other person, company or other corporation, the Owner shall revoke and annul saidcontract, and the Owner shall thereupon be relieved and discharged from any and all liability andobligations, growing out of this contract to the Contractor and the person, company or other corporationto whom he shall assign, transfer, convey, sublet or otherwise dispose of same, and the Contractor

01010 - 7 of 12



and his assignees, transferees or sublessees, shall forfeit and lose all money theretofore earned undersaid contract, except so much as may be required to pay his employees; provided that nothing hereincontained shall be construed to hinder, prevent, or affect an assignment by the Contractor for thebenefit of his creditors made pursuant to the statutes of the State of New York.

1. 21 LAYOUT OF THE WORK

The General Contractor shall verify all lines, levels and dimensions as shown on the drawings and heshall report any errors or inconsistencies to the Architect before commencing work.

1. 22 INQUIRIES

The Owner will not be responsible for any explanations or interpretations of the ConstructionDocuments. All inquiries are to be directed to the office of Mussachio Architects.

1. 23 COMPLIANCE WITH FEDERAL, STATE AND MUNICIPAL ORDINANCES

A. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in this contract shallbe deemed to be inserted herein and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though it wereincluded therein, and if through omission or otherwise any such provision is not inserted, or it isnot correctly inserted, it shall be physically amended to make such insertion.

B. These Contract Documents, and the joint and several phases of construction hereby

contemplated, are to be governed, at all time, by applicable provisions of the Federal law(s),including, but not limited to those statutes referred to elsewhere in this contract and the latestamendments there to.

1. 24 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE

A. The General Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to life and property due to hisoperations. He shall be responsible for all parts of his work, both temporary and permanent, untilthe work under this contract is accepted by the Owner.

B. The General Contractor shall protect, indemnify, save harmless and defend the Owner and

Mussachio Architects, P.C. from suits, actions, damages and costs of every name anddescription, resulting from the work under this contract, and the Owner may retain sufficientmonies from the amount due or to become due the Contractor as may be necessary to satisfyany claim or damages filed against the Owner.

C. The General Contractor shall be responsible for damages to work of other Contractors which arethe result of his operations. Should the Contractor believe that the work shown by the drawingsor specifications is not calculated when executed to procure safe and substantial results, or if anydiscrepancy appears, it is his duty to immediately notify the Architect in writing, stop work onsame and await the written instructions of the Architect.

01010 - 8 of 12



1. 25 DEFECTIVE WORK AND MATERIALS

A. Any material or work found on inspection to be defective or not in strict conformance withrequirements of drawings and specifications, or defaced or injured through the acts of fire orelements or any other cause shall be removed immediately from the premises and satisfactorymaterials or work or both, substituted therefore without delay.

B. If the Contractor does not remove such work or materials condemned by the Architect within thetime limit fixed by written notice, the Owner may cause the same to be done and may store allmaterials at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the expense of suchremoval within ten (10) days written notice, sell such materials at auction, or at a private sale andshall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all costs and expenses that shouldhave been borne by the Contractor.

C. No previous inspection or certificates of payment shall be held as an acceptance of defectivework or materials, or to relieve the Contractor from the obligations to furnish sound materials andperform satisfactory work in accordance with contract requirements.

1. 26 SHORING

Provide as required, shoring, braces, supports, etc. to adequately support construction materials,equipment, etc. until permanent construction is complete.

1. 27 SECURITY

The Contractor shall make provisions to keep the building secure at all times.

1. 28 COOPERATION

The Contractor shall fully cooperate with the other contractors on the site.

1. 29 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Drawings: Maintain a white-print set (blue line or black line) of Contract Drawings andshop drawings in clean, undamaged condition, with mark-up of actual installations which varysubstantially from the work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable ofshowing "field" condition fully and accurately; however, where shop drawings are used for mark-up, record a cross-reference at corresponding location in other colors to distinguish betweenvariations in separate categories of work. Mark-up new information which is recognized to be ofimportance to Owner, but was for some reason not shown on either Contract Drawings or shopdrawings. Give particular attention to concealed work, which would be difficult to measure andrecord at a later date. Note related change order numbers where applicable. Organize recorddrawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print suitabletitles, dates and other identification on cover of each set.

B. As Built Drawings: All subcontractors shall have prepared and submit at the completion of theproject "As Built" drawings for their work reflecting any existing conditions or new work that wascompleted that differs from information shown on Construction Documents. They will besubmitted to Architect as follows:

a. One (1) set of white prints at the subcontractors’ expense.

01010 - 9 of 12



C. Maintenance Manuals: Organize maintenance and operating manual information into suitablesets of manageable size, and bind into individual binders properly identified and indexed (thumb-tabbed). Include emergency instructions, spare parts listing, copies of warranties, wiringdiagrams, recommended "turn-around" cycles, inspection procedures, shop drawings, productdata, and similar applicable information. Bind each manual of each set in a heavy-duty 2", 3-ringvinyl-covered binder, and include pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark identificationon both front and spine of each binder.

1. 30 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION (G704) AND DATE OF FINAL COMPLETION

A. A contract shall be deemed to be "substantially complete" when all work has been satisfactorilycompleted except for "punch list" items and those of a minor nature which may be, at the presenttime, beyond the Contractor's control, or delayed in completion with the concurrence of the Owneror Architect.

B. Final Application and Certificate for Payment (G702 & G703) will be issued when punch list itemsof final inspection are complete, with the exception of items that cannot be completed at oncethrough no fault of the Contractor, his subcontractors or vendors, or when certain pieces ofpunch list work are held up at Owner's or Architects request. If such items are, in the opinion ofthe Architect, substantial in nature, an amount sufficient to cover the reasonable cost of theircorrection as determined by the Architect, may be withheld from payment due under the finalApplication and Certificate for Payment until they have been corrected and subsequentlyapproved by the Architect. If work delineated on the punch list is not completed within areasonable time, the Owner may complete that work with his own forces as outlined in AIA A201-General Conditions and deduct the cost thereof from Final Payment to the Contractor.

1. 31 CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY

A. The General Contractor, prior to and before turning the building over to the Owner, shall applyfor, and obtain a Certificate of Occupancy.

B. All required inspections for Certification of Occupancy by governmental agency shall be theresponsibility of the General Contractor.

1. 32 RIGHT OF OCCUPANCY

The Owner shall have the right to take possession of any portion of the project after the Certificate ofSubstantial Completion and Certificate of Occupancy by the local building officials have been issued.

1. 33 CLEAN-UP

A. Periodic Cleaning: The subcontractor shall at all times, during construction, keep the site freefrom the accumulation of waste materials and rubbish, resulting from their respective work. Removal of waste materials and rubbish must be done at least once a week.

B. Final Clean-Up:1. Upon completion of the project the subcontractors shall clean the interior and exterior of

the building, so all areas are ready for occupancy by the Owner without need for furthercleaning.

01010 - 10 of 12



2. Provide final cleaning of the work, at time indicated, consisting of cleaning each surfaceor unit of work to normal "clean" condition expected for a first-class building cleaning andmaintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instruction for cleaning operations. The following are examples, but not by way of limitation, of cleaning levels required:a. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels.b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and window/door glass, to a polished

condition, removing substances which are noticeable as vision-obscuring materials. Replace broken glass and damaged transparent materials.

c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes, to a dirt-free condition,free of dust, stains, films and similar noticeable distracting substances. Except asotherwise indicated, avoid disturbance of natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to original reflective condition.

d. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment clean.e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited-access spaces.f. Vacuum clean carpeted surfaces and similar soft surfaces.g. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains including those

resulting from water exposure.h. Clean project site (yard and grounds), including landscape development areas, of

litter and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas to a broom-clean condition;remove stains, petrochemical spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds whichare neither planted nor paved, to a smooth, even textured surface.

C. Damaged Work: Any damages to building materials, finishes or equipment, shall be repaired or

replaced by the subcontractor to the satisfaction of the Architect without cost to the Owner.

1. 34 UNLOADING AT SITE

Materials shall be unloaded at the site at the expense of the Contractor furnishing such materials,unless otherwise specified.

1. 35 OBLIGATION OF CONTRACTOR

At the time of awarding contracts, each Contractor will be presumed to have inspected the site and tohave read and to be thoroughly familiar with the Plans and Contract Documents (including alladdenda). The failure or omission of any Contractor to receive or examine any form, instrument ordocument shall in no way relieve any Contractor from any obligation in respect of his contract.

1. 36 ACCEPTANCE OF PRECEDING WORK

Before starting any operation, the General Contractor shall examine work performed by others to whichtheir work adjoins or is applied and shall report to the Architect any conditions that will preventsatisfactory accomplishment of their contract. Failure to notify the Architect in writing of deficienciesor fault in preceding work will constitute acceptance thereof and waive any claim of unsuitability.

1. 37 ARCHITECTS IDENTITY SIGN

The General Contractor shall be responsible for the erection and removal of the Architects Identitysign. The Architect shall provide the signage and erection materials and a location map. The GeneralContractor will be responsible for contacting the Architect and coordinating any required movementof the sign as dictated by sitework. A charge of $500.00 will be billed to the General Contractor should

01010 - 11 of 12



the sign be lost or destroyed. No signs or other advertisements shall be permitted at the project site,except for Architect's and General Contractor’s identification sign.

1. 38 SUB-SURFACE DATA

Sub-surface soil investigations have been made and results are included in Division 2, Section 02010.Data shown is for general information of bidders and is not guaranteed. Bidders are expected toexamine the site and record of investigations and then decide for themselves the character of thematerials to be encountered.

1. 39 DEMOLITION

A. Furnish all labor and equipment necessary for or incidental to the removal and demolition workrequired as shown or herein specified.

B. Provide, erect, and maintain all bracing, shoring, warning signs, and guards necessary forprotection. Remove protection at completion of work.

C. Provide all temporary enclosures and barriers required for protection against spread of dust andthe elements to parts of building not affected by demolition work.

D. Remove excess debris as it accumulates from demolition operations. Do not store or permitdebris to accumulate on site.

E. Execute demolition work to insure adjacent property against damages which might occur fromfalling debris or other causes.

F. Provide temporary shoring, struts bracing, and take all precautions to prevent settlement,movement of walls, floors, or other existing framing of existing structures. Verify locations ofexisting bearing wall construction.

G. Repair damage done to Owner’s property or property of any other person or persons on or offpremises by reason of required work without additional cost to the Owner or ConstructionManager.

H. Any utility line, cable or pipe damaged during construction shall be repaired and left in completeworking condition. Plug or cap any lines no longer required. Any repair to damaged work shallbe performed by skilled workmen.

I. All materials removed from existing work in the execution of this contract shall become theproperty of the Contractor.

J. It shall be the responsibility of the subcontractor to protect from damage and store all items notedto be reused.

K. Strict coordination with building occupants shall be conducted by the subcontractor. Security andmaintenance of business shall be coordinated with the building occupants.


01010 - 12 of 12

1

STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTION

Name of Project: Hampton Inn & Suites

Address of Legal Description: 1305 Buckley Road, Salina, NY

Owner’s Name: Emmi LLC/Mangano LLC

Owner’s Address: 275 Elwood Davis Road, Liverpool, NY 13088

Authority Having Jurisdiction: Town of Salina

This Statement of special Inspections is submitted as a condition for permit issuance in accordance with the Special

Inspections requirements of the Building Code. It includes a Schedule of Special Inspection Services applicable to

this project as well as the name of the Special inspector and the identity of other approved agencies intended to be

retained for conducting these inspections.

The Special inspector shall keep records of all inspections and shall furnish inspection reports to the building

Official, Structural Engineer and Architect of Record. Discovered discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate

attention of the Contractor for correction. If such discrepancies are not corrected, the discrepancies shall be brought

to the attention of the Building Official, Structural Engineer and Architect of Record. The Special Inspection

program does not relieve the Contractor of his or her responsibilities.

Interim reports shall be submitted to the Building Official, Structural Engineer and Architect of Record.

Job Safety and means and methods of construction are solely the responsibility of the Contractor.

Interim Report Frequency:

I, as the owner, or agent of the owner (contractors may not employ the special inspector), certify that I, or the

architect/engineer of record, will be responsible for employing the special inspector(s) as required by Building Code

Section 1704 for the construction project located at the site listed above.

Signed: ____________________________________

I, as the Architect of record, certify that I have prepared the following special inspection program as required by

Building Code Section 1704 for the construction project located at the site listed above.

Printed Name: ______________________________

Design Professional Seal

2

SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES

List of work required special inspection:

Soils Compliance Prior to Foundation Inspection

Structural Concrete Over 2500 PSI

Structural Masonry (LBW)

Structural Steel

Spray Fire Resistant Materials

Wood Construction

Exterior Insulation & Finish System

Smoke Control

Wall Panels and Veneers

Special Cases

Name(s) of individual(s) or Firm(s) responsible for special inspections listed above (Subject to

Approval by the Code Enforcement Official):

A. _________________________________________________________________

B. _________________________________________________________________

C. _________________________________________________________________

DUTIES OF SPECIAL INSPECTIORS

SOIL COMPLIANCE:

1. Site preparation: Prior to placement of the prepared fill, the special inspector shall determine that

the site has been prepared in accordance with the approved soils report.

2. During fill placement: During placement and compaction of the fill material, the special

inspector shall determine that the material being used and the maximum lift thickness comply with

the approved report, as specified in §1803.4.

3. Evaluation of in-place density: The special inspector shall determine, at the approved frequency

that the in-place dry density of the compacted fill complies with the approved report.

STRUCTURAL CONCRETE:

1. Periodic inspection of reinforcing steel, including pre-stressing tendons, and placement.

2. Continuous inspections of bolts to be installed in concrete prior to and during placement of

concrete where allowable loads have been increased.

3. Periodic verification of use of required design mix.

4. Continuous sampling fresh concrete & performing slump, air content & determining the temp of

fresh concrete at the time of making specimens for strength test.

5. Continuous inspection of concrete placement for proper application techniques.

6. Periodic inspection for maintenance of specified curing temperature and technique.

7. Continuous inspection of prestressed concrete. a. Application of prestressing forces.

b. Grouting of bonded prestressing tendons in the seismic-force-resisting system. 8. Periodic inspection of erection of pre-cast concrete members.

9. Periodic verification of in-situ concrete strength, prior to stressing of tendons in post-tensioned

concrete and prior to removal of shores and forms from beams and structural slabs.

STRUCTURAL MASONRY:

1. Periodic inspection to ensure compliance of proportions of site-prepares mortar.

2. Periodic inspection to ensure compliance of construction of mortar joints.

3

3. Periodic inspection to ensure compliance of location of reinforcement and connectors and

prestressing tendons and anchorages.

4. Periodic inspection to ensure compliance of grade and size of prestressing tendons and anchorages.

5. Periodic verification of size and location of structural elements.

6. Periodic verification of type, size and location of anchors, including other details of anchorage of

masonry to structural members, frames or other construction.

7. Periodic verification of specified size, grade and type of reinforcement.

8. Continuous verification of welding of reinforcing bars.

9. Periodic verification of protection of masonry during cold weather (temps. <40°F) or hot weather

(temps. >90°F)

10. Periodic verification of application and measurement of prestressing force.

11. Periodic verification of clean grout space prior to grouting.

12. Periodic verification of placement of reinforcement and connectors and prestressing tendons and

anchorages prior to grouting.

13. Periodic verification of proportions of site-prepared grout and prestressing grout for bonded tendons

prior to grouting.

14. Periodic verification of construction of mortar joints prior to grouting.

15. Continuous verification of grout placement and grouting of prestressed bonded tendons to ensure

compliance with code and construction document provisions.

16. Continuous observations of the preparations of any grout specimens, mortar specimens and/or

prisms.

17. Periodic verification for compliance with required inspection provisions of the construction

documents and approved submittals.

STRUCTURAL STEEL:

1. Periodic material verification of high-strength bolts, nuts and washers.

2. Periodic inspections of bearing type high-strength bolting connections.

3. Continuous inspection of slip-critical high-strength bolting connections.

4. Continuous inspection of complete and partial penetration groove welds in structural steel.

5. Continuous inspection of multi-pass fillet welds in structural steel.

6. Continuous inspection of single-pass fillet welds greater than 5/16” in structural steel.

7. Periodic inspection of single-pass fillet welds less than 5/16” in structural steel.

8. Periodic inspection of floor and deck welds in structural steel.

9. Periodic verification of weld-ability of reinforcing steel other than ASTM A 706

10. Continuous inspection of reinforcing steel-resisting flexural and axial forces in intermediate and

special moment frames, and boundary elements of special reinforced concrete shear walls and

shear reinforcement.

11. Continuous inspections of reinforcing steel shear reinforcements.

12. Periodic inspection of other reinforcing steel.

13. Periodic inspection of steel frame joint details for compliance with approved construction

documents.

EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM:

1. Special inspections shall be required for all EIFS applications.

2. Inspection of all flashing systems related to the EIFS

3. Special coatings.

EXCEPTIONS: 1. Special inspections shall not be required for EIFS applications installed over a water-resistive

barrier with a means of draining moisture to the exterior.

2. Special inspections shall not be required for EIFS applications installed over masonry or

concrete walls.

SPECIAL INSPECTIONS - HAMPTON INN SUITES, SALINA, NY ARCH. JOB#: 214041

Seismic Quality Assurance Plan 1705

Wind Quality Assurance Plan 1706

Soil Compaction of Fill Materials X Specs, 1704.7 X

Soil Bearing at bottom of footing excavations X Specs X

Soil / Rock Bottom of Caissons 1809

Caison Driving records, tip & cutoff elevations 1704.8, 1807,1808

Caison Load Test Specs, 1807.2.8.3

Reinf. Bars Size & placement in foundations X ACI, Specs X

Piers Size & placement of Reinf. Bars X 1704.9 X

Concrete Ready-mix Plant quality control X Specs X

Concrete Mix design tests and certificates X Specs, 1704.4.1 X

Reinf. Steel Shop drawings of reinforcing steel X Specs X

Reinf. Steel Placement of reinforcing steel X 1704.4 X

Reinf. Steel Welding X 1704.4 X

Formwork Design, placement & shoring X 1906.1 X

Formwork Removal and reshoring X 1906.2 X

Concrete Test cylinders X 1704.4, 1905.6 X

Concrete Mix proportions & Mix on Delivery Tickets X 1704.4 X

Concrete Slump test X 1704.4 X

Concrete Placement procedures X 1905.9, 1905.10 X

Concrete Curing temperatures & techniques X 1905.11 X

Prestressed Prestressing procedures & forces 1704.4

Prestressed Shop drawings of prestressed units Specs

Precast Quality control of manufacturer 1704.2

Precast Shop drawings of precast Specs

Precast Erection of precast x 1704.4

Precast Inspection of Connections x 1704.4

Anchors Anchors cast in concrete X 1912.5 X

Vapor Barrier Placement of material and thickness X X

MATERIAL/ACTIVITY TYPE OF INSPECTION REFERENCEREQ'D

THIS

PROJ?A/E OWNER'S

PROJ INSP

OWNER'S

TEST LAB

INSPECTION / TEST BY

QUALITY ASSURANCE

FOUNDATIONS

CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

CONTRACTOR

/ SUPPLIER



THIS

PROJ?A/E OWNER'S

PROJ INSP

OWNER'S

TEST LAB


CONTRACTOR

/ SUPPLIER

Inspection Level Indicate Level of Inspection Required (1, 2, na) X 1704.5.2, 1704.5.3 X

Quality Assurance Indicate Level of Quality Assurance Required (1, 2, 3, na) X 1708.1 X

Clay Masonry Certificates, Tests & technical data 1704.5, 1708.1

Concrete Masonry Certificates, Tests & technical data X 1704.5, 1708.1 X

Reinf. Steel Shop Drawings X Specs X

Reinf. Steel Condition, Size, Location, Spacing of Reinf Steel X 1704.5 X

Anchors Manufacturer's Data X 1704.5 X

Accessories Manufacturer's Data X Specs X

Mortar & Grout Mix design and data X 1704.5 X

Masonry Panel Masonry Strength 1708.1

Mortar & Grout Field samples and testing 1704.5

Foundations Tolerance inspection X Specs X

Masonry Placement of units, mortar & accessories X 1704.5 X

Masonry Protection of masonry work X 1704.5 X

Anchorage Placement of devices X 1704.5 X

Seismic Reinforcing (Seismic Design Category "C") 1708.2, 1708.3

Fabricator Quality control inspection of shop X 1704.2 X

Fasteners Mfr's Certificate of Compliance X 1704.3 X

Struct. Steel Mfr's Certificate of Compliance X 1704.3 X

Weld Matl's Mfr's Certificate of Compliance X 1704.3 X

Details Shop drawings review X Specs X

Erection Installation of High-strength Bolts X 1704.3.3 X

Erection Welding X 1704.3.1, 1707.2 X

Erection Steel Framing and Connections X 1704.3.2 X

Seismic Structural Steel X 1707.2, 1708.4 X

Seismic Cold-formed Framing - Connections X 1707.4 X

Components Storage Racks & Access Floors (SDC = D) 1707.5

Components Architectural Exterior Cladding (SDC = D) 1707.6

Components Mechanical & Electrical - Anchorage (SDC = C) 1707.7

STEEL CONSTRUCTION

ADDITIONAL SEISMIC INSPECTIONS

MASONRY CONSTRUCTION



THIS

PROJ?A/E OWNER'S

PROJ INSP

OWNER'S

TEST LAB


CONTRACTOR

/ SUPPLIER

Fabrication Quality control inspection of shop 1704.2

Wood Grade stamp Specs

Wood Fastening per code and drawings Specs

Trusses Shop drawings Specs

Trusses Truss placement & fastening and anchorage Specs

Laminates/ lintels Shop drawings Specs

Laminates/ lintels Identification per shop drawings Specs

Plywood Grade stamp Specs

Construction fastening of seismic/ shear force resisting system 1707.3

FIREPROOFING

Spray-on Manufacturer's data Specs

Spray-on Surface Conditions 1704.11.1

Spray-on Application 1704.11.2

Spray-on Thickness 1704.11.3

Spray-on Density 1704.11.4

Spray-on Bond Strength 1704.11.5

GWB Fireproof Manufacturer's data Specs

GWB Fireproof Placement of materials Specs

Firewall Ass'y Manufacturer's data Specs

Firewall Ass'y Placement of materials Specs

Materials Manufacturer's data X Specs X

Preparation Condition of substrate X Specs X

Application Methods, proportions & thickness of installation X Specs X

Vapor/Air Barrier Methods, proportions & thickness of installation X Specs X

WOOD CONSTRUCTION

EXTERIOR INSULATION and FINISH SYSTEMS (EIFS)



THIS

PROJ?A/E OWNER'S

PROJ INSP

OWNER'S

TEST LAB


CONTRACTOR

/ SUPPLIER

Material Manufacturer's data X Specs X

Preparation Condition of Substrate X Specs X

Application Methods, proportions & thickness of installation X Specs X

NOTES:1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6. Special Inspection firm shall have expertise in fire protection engineering, mechanical engineering,

and certification as an air balancer.

Contractor/supplier shall submit manufacturer's certificates of compliance for the

materials/products.

Reviews records and test results for conformance with requirements.

Observes placement and erection of materials during jobsite visits.

recognized national standards organization for that product.

b. The plant maintains an agreement with an independent inspection or quality assurance

agency to conduct periodic in-plant quality assurance inspections. The frequency of these

inspections shall not be less than one every six months.

c. The plant has an in-shop quality assurance inspection program by an independent testing

or quality assurance agency for the work/product to be provided on this project.

A/E shall review fabricator/supplier/producer certificates for conformance with appropriate

standards of practice and quality assurance.

a. The plant is a certified production plant meeting the quality assurance standards of a

WATERPROOFING

Fabricator, supplier, ready-mixed plant or other production plants shall provide certificates from an

approved independent inspection, testing or quality assurance agency attesting that the plant

meets at least one of the following criteria:


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 01220 - CAD CONVERSION & TRANSMISSION FEES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS

The drawings, Instructions to Bidders, Form of Proposal, General Conditions, SupplementaryGeneral Conditions, and Division 1 are included herein and govern work under this Section.

1.02 EXECUTION

A. Contractor may submit a request for conversion and transmission of a drawing into anelectronic CAD file for informational use only. Conversation and transmission ofelectronic CAD drawing files is contingent upon the Contractor's review and acceptanceof the transmission costs and conditions of use outlined in this Specification Section.

B. Conversion and transmission of CAD drawing files in ".DWG" format. Allows thelicensee/transferee the ability to open and use A/E CAD Drawing files at their facilitieswith CAD compatible software.

C. Conversion and transmission of CAD drawing files in ".PDF" format. Allows thelicensee/transferee the ability to open, view, and print A/E CAD Drawing files at theirfacilities.

1.03 SCHEDULE OF FEES

AA.. Fee Schedule for the conversion and transmission of CAD files in ".DWG" format shall beas follows:1. 1 sheet $150

2-5 sheets $ 150 first file + $135 ea.6-10 sheets $ 690 first 5 files + $ 115 ea11-20 sheets $1,350 first 10 files + $85ea>20 $2,115 first 20 files + $50 ea

B. Fee Schedule for the conversion and transmission of CAD files in ".PDF" format shall be$2.75 per sheet.

C. Transfer Costs and Payment Requirements for CAD Conversion1. Fee payment shall be made by certified check, made payable to Mussachio

Architects, PC.2. Transfer costs are based on email transmission.3. Transfer by any other means shall be at cost plus a 15% administrative fee.

1.04 REQUESTING ELECTRONIC CAD FILES

A. All requests for CAD files must come through the General Contractor by executing aLetter Agreement provided by Architect. Contact Mussachio Architects at (716) 631-9949or a email to [email protected] to receive the Letter Agreement forElectronic Transfer

01220 - 1 of 3

mailto:[email protected]



B. Prepare a list specific drawing sheets being requested.

C. Identify version of Autocad Software along with email address CAD files are to be sent to.

1.05 PROCESSING AND SHIPPING/SENDING

A. Mussachio Architects, PC shall forward an “Electronic Media Agreement” to be completedby requestor.1. Requests by businesses shall be signed by an officer of the company.2. Requests by individuals shall be signed by that individual

B. Architect reserves the right to receive compensation prior to shipping files.

1.06 CONDITION OF USE OF LICENSE TRANSFER FOR USE OF ELECTRONIC CAD FILES

AA.. Files shall only be used on the project for which the documents were created. Theperson(s) or business entity requesting files is solely responsible for their use. TheArchitect does not accept and is not liable for authorized or unauthorized use of the filestransmitted.

B. Mussachio Architects, P.C. ("MA") stands by the accuracy of the sealed drawingsrepresented by these electronically recorded data files. Digital files are not the sealeddrawings that constitute MA's work product for which MA takes professional responsibility.

CC.. Under no circumstances shall transfer of drawings and other instruments of service onelectronic media for use by the licensee/transferee be deemed a sale by MA. Digital filesare being supplied to the licensee/transferee at the direction of MA’s client. MA retainstitle, ownership and copyrights of the electronically recorded data files recorded on theoriginal disc copy(ies) and all subsequent copies of the electronically recorded data filesor derivative works, regardless of the form or media in or on which the original and othercopies may exist.

D. Disclaimer of warranty: except as stated specifically below, MA makes no warranties,express or implied, with respect to the electronically recorded data files or their quality,performance, merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. The electronicallyrecorded data files are transferred, licensed and delivered "as-is". All warranties of anysort, express or implied are hereby disclaimed; including, but not limited to, fitness for aparticular purpose or merchantability.

EE.. Limitation of liability: in no event will MA be liable for any direct, incidental, indirect, specialor consequential damages in connection with or arising out of the existence, furnishing,failure or use of the electronically recorded data files, by anyone even if MA has beenadvised of the possibility of such damages.

01220 - 2 of 3



F. The sealed drawings are our work product. Data stored on electronic media candeteriorate or be modified without our knowledge. Therefore, the submitted electronicdata files shall be considered accurate as submitted and any use or reuse of theseelectronic data files and any drawings or information derived therefrom is at thelicensee/transferee's full legal responsibility. We cannot assume responsibility or liabilityfor any modifications or reuse by others to such electronic data, digital, or CAD fileswithout our written verification for the specific purpose for a separate consideration. Thistransfer is not such a written verification.

G. Indemnification: Further, to the fullest extent allowed by law, the licensee/transferee ofthe data files hereby agrees to indemnify and hold harmless MA, from any damage,liability or cost, including reasonable attorney's fees and costs of defense, arising from; or,claimed to arise from, any use of, changes, additions, or modifications of any type, madeby anyone other than MA; or, from any reuse of the "drawings" and data contained inthese electronic data files.

H. The licensee/transferee will not use or permit anyone else to use any of the datacontained in these electronic data files on any other project than the one identified in thefiles.

II.. Copy Restrictions: the electronically recorded data files and the accompanying writtenmaterials are copyrighted. Unauthorized copying is expressly forbidden. You may beheld legally responsible for any copyright infringement that is caused or encouraged byyour failure to abide by the terms of this license. You may not copy the disk(s), diskcontents, or accompanying printed material to sell or distribute to others.

J. Should any of these conditions be found to be unenforceable by a court of competentjurisdiction, all other conditions shall be given effect.

----------END OF SECTION----------

01220 - 3 of 3


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL

A. All submittals shall be in reference to their applicable specification section. Mussachio Architects,P.C. (MA) makes no provisions as to the subdivision of subcontractors trade(s)/responsibilities. Submittals classified under varying specification section(s) shall be submitted in accordance withtheir respective section and include separate cover pages.

B. CAD files of Architect’s drawings MUST BE PURCHASED. See Section 00720 - SupplementaryGeneral Conditions.

1. 02 DESCRIPTION

A. Submit to the General Contractor [Construction Manager] for the Architect/Engineer's review,shop drawings, product data and samples required by the specification section.

B. Availability of Electronic CAD Drawing Files: Upon Request by the Contractor, Electronic CADdrawing files may be obtained for informational purposes only, in keeping with the requirementsindicated under Section 01220 - CAD Conversion and Transmission Fees.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2. 01 PRODUCT DATA

A. Original drawings, prepared by contractor, subcontractor, supplier or distributor, which illustratesome portion of the work showing fabrication, layout, setting or erection details.1. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail numbers shown on shop drawings.2. Sheet size, multiple for 8-1/2 by 11 inches, not to exceed size of contract drawings when

unfolded.

B. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts and otherstandard descriptive data.1. Modify product data to delete information which is not applicable to project.2. Supplement standard to provide additional information applicable to project.3. Clearly mark each copy to identify applicable materials, products or models.4. Show dimensions and clearances required.5. Show performance characteristics and capacities.6. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.

C. Samples: Physical examples to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and toestablish standards by which completed work is judged.1. Office samples to be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate:

(1) Functional characteristics of product or material, with related parts and method ofattachment.

(2) Full range of color samples.2. Field Samples and Mock-Ups

(1) Erect at project site at location acceptable to General Contractor.(2) Construct samples or mock-up complete, including work of all trades required in

finish work.

01300 - 1 of 6



2. 02 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractor is responsible for reviewing each section to determine required submittals.

B. Do not start, fabricate or install work requiring submittals until submittals meeting Contract Requirements have been returned to the Contractor.

C. Review, approve, stamp and sign shop drawings, product data and samples prior to submission.Note all discrepancies from construction documents and or items that need clarification.

D. Verify1. Field measurements.2. Field construction criteria.3. Catalog numbers and other data.

E. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of Work and Contract Documents.

F. Contractors’ responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by GeneralContractor's or Architect/Engineer's review of submittals.

G. Contractors’ responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documentsis not relieved by General Contractor's or Architect/Engineer's review of submittals unlessArchitect/Engineer gives written acceptance of the specific deviations.

H. Notify General Contractor and Architect/Engineer in writing, at time of submission of deviationsin submittals from requirements of Contract Documents.

I. After General Contractor and Architect/Engineer's review, Contractor is to distribute copies of submittals to parties requiring same for coordination of work.

J. Make required copies for distribution of shop drawings and product data that have been stampedand signed by the Architect/Engineer.

2. 03 ARCHITECT RESPONSIBILITY

A. Review design concept of Project.

B. Review of separate items does not constitute review of an assembly in which item functions.

C. Stamp and initial or sign certifying to review of submittal.

D. Explanation of Architect/Engineer's Stamp1. NO EXCEPTION TAKEN: No corrections, no marks.2. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED: Minor amount of corrections; all items can be fabricated

at Contractor's risk without further correction; checking is complete and all corrections areobvious without ambiguity.

3. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Minor amount of corrections; noted items must not befabricated without further correction; checking is not complete; details of items noted bychecker are to be further clarified; items not noted to be corrected can be fabricated atContractor's risk under this stamp.

01300 - 2 of 6



4. REJECTED: Drawings are rejected as not in accordance with the Contract, too manycorrections, or other justifiable reason. The drawing must be corrected and resubmitted. No items are to be fabricated under this stamp.

5. SUBMIT SPECIFIED ITEM: Item is not as specified. Submit named manufacturer.

E. Return submittals to General Contractor for distribution.

PART III - EXECUTION 3. 01 SHOP DRAWINGS/SUBMITTALS (hard copies) A. Contractor shall submit a list of all scheduled shop drawings prior to beginning of construction,

for review. This list should also indicate the order of submittal to the Architect.

B. All submissions to Architect shall include the standard Submittal Cover Sheet found at the endof Section 01300 - Submittals, filled out in its entirety. A description of items being submittedalong with reference to other related components should be included.

C. Schedule submissions to allow ten (10) working days for review. Architect shall examine shopdrawings and issue corrected copies within a minimum of ten (10) working days.

D. After reviewing and marking up any submittals that do not comply with Construction Document intent, the General Contractors shall provide the Architect with copies of all necessary shopdrawings and information as may be required for the execution of the work.1. Submittals will be in either of the following formats:

a. Three (3) copies of all architectural submittals that can later be photocopiedb. Four (4) copies of all items submittals that can later be photocopied related to

Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing or Structural aspects of the Project l submittalsc. Two (2) originals and one (1) reproducible if the original cannot be photocopied ord. Five (5) copies of any submittal that cannot be readily reproduced in a typical office

2. The Contractor shall submit a minimum of three (3) each non-reproducible submittals, suchas color or other physical samples of materials.

3. Catalog cuts shall be submitted in triplicate. 4. FAXED OR COPIES OF FAXED SHOP DRAWINGS/SUBMITTALS ARE NOT

ACCEPTABLE.5. Photographic reproductions or copies of contract drawings will not be accepted as shop

drawings and will be rejected.6. Submittals sent via email or electronic delivery received after the end of normal business

hours as determined by MA’s date and time stamp(s) shall be processed as “received” thefollowing business day.

E. Shop drawings or submittals that are received without proof of Contractor or ConstructionManager’s review and edit will be REJECTED and returned to submitter until such documenta-tion accompanies the same. Contractor will bear responsibility for any delays cause by therejection.

F. Reproductions of Contract Documents for use as shop drawings for materials specified and/or

shown, WILL NOT be permitted.

01300 - 3 of 6



G. Each shipment of drawings/catalog cuts must be accompanied by a letter of transmittal providing:1. a detailed explanation of what/why the submittal is being made 2. giving the name of GC and Sub Contractor3. a list of items included in the submission, with each drawing marked with the name and

location of project and each series of drawings numbered consecutively.

H. The manufacture or fabrication of any material or the performance of any work prior to approvalof shop drawings will be entirely at the risk of the Contractor.

I. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect with such promptness as to cause no delay in hiswork or in that of any other Contractors employed on this work, copies of all shop or settingdrawings/catalog cuts required for the proper execution of the work herein specified

J. All shop drawings and samples shall be thoroughly checked by the Contractor for compliance withthe Contract Documents before submitting them to the Architect for approval. The intent of theprocedure is to identify and short circuit the processing of submittals that do not comply with thedesign intent of the Construction Documents, not to simply show that they passed thru theContractor’s office. All shop drawings and submittals shall bear the Contractor's stamp ofapproval certifying that they have so been reviewed. Any shop drawings submitted without thisstamp of approval and certification, and submittals which, in the Architect's opinion, areincomplete contain numerous errors or have not been checked or only checked superficially willbe returned unchecked by the Architect for resubmission by the Contractor. In reviewing shopdrawings and submittals, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions and field conditions and shallcheck and coordinate the shop drawings of any Section or trade with the requirements of all otherSections or trades whose work is related thereto, as required for proper and complete installationof the work.

K. Shop drawings shall be submitted in the order and time required for construction. Shop drawingssubmitted ahead of time required for construction will be held by the Architect for checking in theorder as above set forth.

L. Under no condition will any claim for delay in the completion of contracts due to shop drawingsbeing held by the Architect for the necessary and proper time for checking be recognized.

M. If it is found necessary to make changes in shop drawings, one (1) print and the markedreproducible copy will be returned to the Contractor, who, after making correction indicated, shallfurnish, without charge, one (1) new reproducible copy plus two (2) new prints. The Contractorshall continue to furnish prints as above mentioned until all prints are satisfactory to the Architect,who, however, will not be responsible for their accuracy.

N. If, during the checking and return of checked reproducible copies, the Contractor makes any

additional changes or corrections on the original shop drawings, he shall call attention to eachmarking on the prints by a letter written to the Architect.

O. It is understood that the term NO EXCEPTION TAKEN of any shop drawings by the Architect in

no way relieves the Contractor from assuming the responsibility for the accuracy of same, nordoes it relieve the Contractor from any of the required conditions as set forth in thesespecifications or accompanying drawings.

P. Shop Drawings without the appropriate stamp indicating review by the Architect will not be

permitted on the premises. Actual fabrication of the work will not proceed until these shopdrawings have received the approved stamp of the Architect.

01300 - 4 of 6



Q. Shop Drawings shall consist of, but not be limited to, fabrication, erection and setting drawings,schedule drawings, manufacturer's scale drawings, wiring and control diagrams, cuts or entirecatalogs, pamphlets, descriptive literature and performance and test data. Prior to submissionof shop drawings on mechanical and electrical work, the Contractor shall submit lists of suchequipment as required, for approval. Where practical, drawings shall be submitted in the formof a reproducible print, along with one set of white prints.

3. 02 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

A. Shop Drawings1. Revise initial drawings as required and resubmit as specified for initial submittal.2. Indicate on drawings changes which have been made other than those requested by the

Architect/Engineer.

B. Product Data and Samples1. Submit new data and samples as required for initial submittal.

3. 03 ELECTRONIC SUBMITTALS

A. All drawings and data transmitted by Mussachio Architects, P.C. on electronic media or emailincluding but not limited to .PDF, .MSG, .DWG, .DWF files, computer discs, online FTP or othertransfer sites and bulletin boards are only for the convenience of the Recipient and anydiscrepancy between the electronic files and the governing printed Construction Documents isthe full responsibility of the Recipient. Recipient shall report any discrepancy between theelectronic files and the governing printed Construction Documents shall be reported in writing toMussachio Architects within ten (10) days of receipt. The recipient agrees to be fully responsiblefor any differences between this data and final Construction Documents or field conditions andshall hold harmless Mussachio Architects, P.C. for any such differences.

B. Electronic submittals shall be accepted by Mussachio Architects, P.C. (MA) in an Adobe PDF(.pdf) format only and shall be required to adhere to all applicable provisions within this Sectionwithout cause.

C. All shop drawing submittals shall be emailed to; [email protected] Submission to any other source or person(s) does not constitute a successful transmission.1. Upon receipt of electronic shop drawings the administrator will reply to notify the contractor

of successful receipt. 2. If no receipt is received the contractor is responsible for following up with Mussachio

Architects to organize a successful submission without impact the project schedule, orprocessing times.

D. Architect reserves the right to request any submittal(s) in hard copy form in accordance with thisSection with no impact to the submittals processing time. 1. Submittal(s) in which hard copies are required will be returned as “Not Reviewed” until such

time as the hard copies(s) have been received. Processing times for submittals where hardcopies have been requested will commence from date of reception of said hard copies byMA.

01300 - 5 of 6



E. Electronic packages shall be received as a single packaged .pdf file including the contractorscover page (in accordance with 1.09 of this Section)1. Mismatched / Loose / Individual files or submittals with or without cover pages will be

returned as “Not Reviewed” citing nonconformance with the submittal requirementsoutlined in this Section.a. Exception(s) - Samples / Color Selections

F. In embarking in the electronic submittal process the contractor is accepting the provisions madewithin this Section and general conditions.

G. Samples / Color Selections shall not be permitted as part of the electronic submittal process. Hard copy format(s) only shall be acceptable and shall be in accordance with requirements “1.07Samples” of this Section.

H. All electronic Submittals shall be required to conform with all provisions within this SpecificationSection. Omissions of data / required material(s) will result in items not accepted by MA and willbe promptly returned citing nonconformance with this Section.

3. 04 CONTINUITY OF DIGITAL VS. HARD COPY DOCUMENTS

Documents submitted in either electronic or hard copies format and their subsequent re-Submittals (ifany) are to retain the same submittal format as the original submittal. Electronic responses to hard copymarkups, hard copy letters in response to digital review comments, or any provision(s) bridging the twoseparate processes(es) shall not be accepted by MA and will be returned citing nonconformance with this section.

3. 05 CONTRACTOR'S DISTRIBUTION OF SUBMITTALS

A. Distribute copies of shop drawings and product data which carry the General Contractor andArchitect/Engineer stamp to:1. Contractors’ file.2. Job site file.3. Record Document file.4. Other Contractors, as required for coordination.5. Subcontractors, as required for coordination.6. Supplier.7. Fabricator.

3. 06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Upon completion of the Work of this Section, Contractor shall submit to the General Contractor all required closeout documents.

B. Contractor shall submit a marked-up set of drawings indicating any changes made duringconstruction to the General Contractor.

C. Upon completion, submit to the General Contractor, a Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debtsand Claims, and Release of Liens.

D. Refer to General Conditions for additional requirements.- - - END OF SECTION - - -

01300 - 6 of 6

SUBMITTAL COVER SHEET

SUBMITTED BY:

Submitter Name:

Company Name:

Address:

Phone:

Email:

GENERAL CONTRACTOR (GC) / OWNER:

Project Manager:

Construction Manager:

Address:

Phone:

Email:

1) Technical Spec Section(s):

2) Drawing Reference(s):

3) Is the submitted product the specified model/type and manufacturer indicated in the

drawings & sepcs? (if no, please identify the reason below)

Shop Drawing(s)

Color Chart(s)/Samples

Sample(s)

Product Data / MSDS

Manufacturer Data

Test Reports

Record Documents

Other (please explain):

Yes No Cost GC/Owner Requirement Availability Bid Issue Other (please explain):

5) Has this submittal been reviewed and approved of by the General Contractor and/or Owner prior to submission?

Project Name:

Project Location:

Arch Project #:

Date Issued:

THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO FILL OUT ALL PORTIONS OF THIS FORM IN THEIR ENTIRETY. INCLUDE THIS FORM WITH YOUR HARD COPY SUBMITTAL OR INSERT THIS PAGE INTO YOUR DIGITAL SUBMISSION AS THE FIRST PAGE AND EMAIL TO: [email protected]

PROJECT INFORMATION:

SUBMITTAL INFORMATION:

Submittal #:

Date Received:

Notes:

(FOR OFFICE USE ONLY)

Yes No

6) Please indicate the parties having approved of the product specified for this specific project.

Owner GC

(FOR OFFICE USE ONLY)

4) Type of Submittal: (check all that

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK

ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 02010 - SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION

1 .01 SUB-SURFACE DATA

A. A number of test borings were taken in the vicinity of the work. The locations of theseborings are indicated herein or on the Drawings.

B. Logs of the test borings referred to above are included in the Contract Documents; but arenot part of the Contract Documents. The availability of these borings is not intended torelieve Bidders of their obligation to make a thorough investigation of conditions below thesurface of the ground and neither additional payment nor an extension of time will be madeto the contractor because of borings referred to above that do not accurately represent thetrue nature of the subsurface conditions.

C. Bidders and prospective Bidders are hereby advised and put on notice that the boringsreferred to above were made for design purposes only. They were not made for thepurpose of informing bidders as to subsurface conditions in the area of the work coveredby this Contract and are not, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, sufficient or extensiveenough to provide any accurate or reliable indication of subsurface conditions which mightbe encountered in the performance of the Contract.

D. Neither the Owner nor the Architect/Engineer has made any investigation of subsurfaceconditions in the area covered by the work to be performed under this Contract other thanthe borings referred to above, and in bidding on this contract, each Bidder acknowledgesthat he has made whatever investigation of subsurface conditions he had deemednecessary for the purpose of bidding. Permission for making borings of subsurfaceconditions will be arranged for by the Architect upon receipt of a written request therefore.

E. Refer to individual boring logs for dates borings were made.


02010 1 of 1

Geotechnical and Environmental Consulting Engineers

BARRON & ASSOCIATES, P.C. 10440 Main Street

Clarence, New York 14031

Tel: (716) 759-7821 www.barronandassociatespc.com Fax: (716) 759-7823

May 12, 2015 Job No: 15-534 Prima Terra Properties, LLC 1275 Elwood Davis Road Liverpool, New York 13088 ATTN: Mr. Carmen Emmi RE: Geotechnical Engineering Report Proposed 5-Story Hampton Inn Hotel & Suites 1305 Buckley Road (County Route 48) Town of Salina, Onondaga County, New York Gentlemen: This report presents the findings of the subsurface investigation program and geotechnical engineering

recommendations for the above referenced project. The geographic orientation of the project site is

illustrated on the U.S. Geologic Survey (USGS) site location map in Figure No. 1. The project site is

illustrated in Figure No. 2, entitled "Test Boring and Groundwater Observation Well Location Plan",

which includes: the approximate locations of ten test borings that were drilled and two groundwater

observation wells that were installed by Buffalo Drilling Company, Inc. (BDC); ground surface

elevations; and additional site details. The boring locations were field located with stakes by the client

(see Note 4. on Figure No. 2). The ground surface elevations of the two observations wells were

measured by the client’s design representative, while the remaining test boring ground surface

elevations were estimated (see Notes 3. and 5. on Figure No. 2).

EXPLORATION METHODS

Sampling Method: An ATV-mounted CME-55 rotary drill rig was used to drill the ten borings to depths

of approximately ten to 25 feet below the ground surface by using 2-1/4 inch inside diameter (ID),

continuous flight hollow stem augers. Samples were recovered by driving a standard split-spoon

sampler (2-foot long by 1-3/8 inch inside diameter) 24 inches with a 140-pound hammer falling 30

inches per blow per the American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard D1586. The

number of blows from six to 18 inches of penetration is defined as the Standard Penetration Test (SPT)

N-value. N-values of greater than 100 and auger refusal, which may infer the top of bedrock, were

encountered at several boring locations. Spoon refusal and/or auger refusal may also reflect a boulder

and/or cobble-laden formation.

Job No: 15-534

2

Any encountered groundwater conditions are documented in the field on the driller’s logs for each test

boring. If indicators of groundwater are observed on the sampling equipment, the depth to

groundwater is also checked and measured through the hollow stem augers at the completion of the

sampling efforts.

Groundwater observation wells were installed at borings B-2 and B-4, in general accordance with

ASTM Method D5092. The observation wells were constructed with one-inch inside diameter, flush

joint threaded, schedule 40 PVC screen and riser pipe. The well screen was a number 10 slot (i.e.,

0.010 inch wide) and backfilled with a uniformly graded silicon sand (i.e., Ricci No. 00N) that was

placed to about one foot above the top of screen. Each well was sealed with a four-foot minimum

thickness of bentonite chips. The remaining borehole annulus was sealed with auger cuttings to the

ground surface at both borings. A locking J-plug was inserted in the top of each well. A schematic of

the observation well construction details is presented in Appendix C. For convenience, the boring/well

combination will be referred to as boring or well B/OW-2, as a typical example.

Classification/Identification: The retrieved soil, fill, and weathered bedrock samples were initially

logged in the field by the driller, and a portion of each sample was placed and sealed in a glass jar.

The boring logs, which are included in Appendix A, were based upon the field logs and a second visual

classification of recovered samples in the laboratory by a geologist. Classification/identification of

samples, as noted on the boring logs, is based on the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) in

ASTM D2487/D2488. Schematics of the observation well construction details, which includes the

pertinent data from Appendix A, for borings B/OW-2 and B/OW-4 are presented in Appendix B. Refer

to Appendix C entitled, "Geotechnical Reference Standards", for an explanation of the terminology that

is used for soil and rock descriptions.

Laboratory Testing: Laboratory soil testing was undertaken on several retrieved split spoon samples.

The overall laboratory testing program consisted of the following test methods:

• Particle Size Analysis of Soils ASTM D422

• Water (Moisture) Content of Soil ASTM D2216

• Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils ASTM D4318

Table No. 1 presents the tabulated results of the physical/soil index properties. The associated

graphical illustrations of data are included in Appendix D.

SITE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

General: The project is located on approximately 5.6 acres of land that is addressed as 1305 Buckley

Road (County Route 48) in the Town of Salina, Onondaga County, New York. As shown in Figure No.

Job No: 15-534

3

2, an existing two-story Ramada Inn hotel is currently within the northern half of the project site.

Existing easements are located within the southern section of the site and a/near the southeastern

property line near Buckley Road. An off-site easement also exists along the northeastern property line

that is abutted by the New York State Interstate Route 90. Elmwood Davis Road abuts the

southwestern property line. The remainder of the project site is predominately covered by asphalt and

concrete paved areas, as well as landscaped grass/vegetated areas. Isolated lines and clusters of

trees and brush are present throughout the site. The site topography is relatively level, but slopes

slightly downward from the northern to the southern directions across the project site.

Subsurface Soil Conditions: In general, subsurface conditions, underlying topsoil and asphalt

pavement veneers, were noted to consist of apparent pockets of granular fill, natural clay and silt soil,

and natural silty sand soil that are atop naturally deposited silty clay and clay-silt glacial tills over

variably thick weathered shale bedrock fragments on an apparent firm shale bedrock surface. The

asphalt pavement thicknesses generally ranged from approximately four inches (at boring B-10) to six

inches (at borings B-7, B-8, and B-9), while a three inch thickness (at boring B-6) was also present.

The asphalt pavement was the thickest in front (on the southern side) of the existing Ramada Inn hotel.

The topsoil thickness ranged from four to five inches thick and is expected to vary across the project

site for development. The fill and natural soil types been differentiated to the extent possible in this

investigation.

Beneath the asphalt veneer in the southeastern part of the project site (at borings B-7 and B-8),

apparent one and one-half foot thick pockets of granular fills were encountered and extended to

approximately two feet below the ground surface. The granular fills consisted of a non-plastic, sand-

sized to gravel-sized bedrock fragments and were likely the subbase gravel base layer beneath the

asphalt pavement. The relative density of the granular fills ranged from the mid-level loose to mid-level

medium dense states. The mid-level medium dense and poorer states of the granular fill can be

improved with compaction. These granular fills are considered suitable for on-site reuse as approvable

granular fills, as long as they are segregated by material type (if present), properly sorted of deleterious

materials and oversized fractions (if present), dried, and blended prior to use. The moisture content of

the granular fills was in a moist state. Based upon the gradations and constituents, these granular fills

are considered to have no expansion potential and are highly permeable.

In general, fill materials are typically placed in uncontrolled and uncompacted manners. As such, the

variable strengths and erratic material characteristics, both vertically and laterally at and below the

proposed foundation bearing grades, make them questionable to unsuitable in providing reliable direct

supporting media for footings/shallow foundations. Surficial and, if encountered beneath the fills,

Job No: 15-534

4

buried woody vegetation and organic laden materials (e.g., buried topsoil layer) are also unsuitable for

load bearing conditions.

Beneath the topsoil (at borings B-1 and B-3) and the asphalt pavement (at borings B-5 and B-6), an

apparent pocket or lense of a naturally deposited cohesive soil was encountered and extended to

approximately two feet (at boring B-1) to four feet below the ground surface (at test borings B-3, B-5,

and B-6). These borings are located in the northwestern section of the project site and at the proposed

hotel location. This cohesive soil consisted of a slightly plastic clay and silt with lesser amounts of fine-

sized to coarse-sized sand and gravel. The consistency of this natural cohesive soil ranged from the

medium stiff states (at borings B-1 and B-6), which are at/near proposed footing bearing grades, to a

mid-level stiff state (at the two to four foot depth at boring B-5). If encountered, upper-level stiff states

are considered marginally suitable and mid-level stiff and poorer states are generally considered

unsuitable in providing a reliable direct supporting media for shallow foundations. These upper-level

stiff and poorer cohesive soils would either be removed and replaced with a compacted approved fill or,

for upper-level stiff and better soils, would be properly conditioned (i.e., dried and blended) and

thoroughly compacted. This moist cohesive soil is generally considered to have essentially no

expansion potential by itself and, with an impermeable ground cover, would make this soil behave like

one with no expansion potential. This clay and silt soil is considered to be in the semi-impermeable to

impermeable states.

Beneath the topsoil (at borings B-2 and B-4), the granular fill (at boring B-8) and the natural clay and

silt soil (at boring B-3), an apparent two to four foot thick pocket or lense of a naturally deposited

granular soil was encountered and extended to approximately four to six feet below the ground surface.

This granular soil appears to be present along the proposed southeastern hotel building wall line (at

borings B-2 to B-4). This natural granular soil consisted of a non-plastic silty fine-sized sand with

lesser amounts of gravel and coarse-sized to medium-sized sand and a trace amount of clay. The

relative density of this silty sand was in the low-level to mid-level medium dense states. Low-level

medium dense and poorer states are unsuitable for direct footing load bearing purposes, but can be

improved with compaction. The existing granular soil also qualifies as an approvable fill, as long as it is

segregated by material type (if present), properly sorted of deleterious materials and oversized

fractions (if present), dried, and blended prior to use. Based upon the gradation and constituents, this

moist silty sand soil is considered to have no expansion potential and be in the permeable to semi-

permeable states.

Beneath the asphalt veneer (at borings B-9 and B-10) and the apparent pockets of granular fill, natural

clay and silt soil and natural silty sand soil (at the remaining borings), approximate four foot (at boring

Job No: 15-534

5

B-10) to 16 foot (at boring B-1) thick naturally deposited cohesive glacial tills were encountered. These

tills extended the full depth of drilling in the north-northeastern section of the project site (at borings B-1

to B-3, B-6, and B-7). The moist cohesive glacial tills consisted of slightly to moderately plastic, silty

clay that is inter-mixed with slightly plastic clay and silt (also referred to as clay-silt), which both contain

lesser amounts fine-sized to coarse-sized sand and gravel. The sand content increased in the lower

part of this unit at the southwestern side of the proposed hotel (at borings B-3 and B-4). The

consistency of the cohesive tills was in the low-level stiff to low-level very stiff states at depths

approximately one-half foot to four feet below the ground surface. At the four to eight foot depth range

(that is, at/just below footing bearing grade), the consistency levels broadly range from the low-level

stiff to very hard states with the low-level stiff state, in particular, at the four to six foot depth (at boring

B-9) at a future building. Below the eight foot depth and extending the full depth of the cohesive glacial

tills, upper-level stiff to very hard states were present with an apparent pocket of medium stiff state at

the eight to ten foot depth range boring B-1. If encountered, upper-level stiff states are considered

marginally suitable and mid-level stiff and poorer states are generally considered unsuitable in

providing a reliable direct supporting media for shallow foundations. These upper-level stiff and poorer

cohesive tills would either be removed and replaced with a compacted approved fill or, for upper-level

stiff and better tills, would be properly conditioned (i.e., dried and blended) and thoroughly compacted.

Spoon refusal (i.e., N-values of 50+ to 100+) and/or auger refusal conditions were encountered in the

natural cohesive glacial tills and may reflect a boulder/cobble condition. The ability to auger, with the

drill rig, to these levels would suggest that the upper cobbles-boulders or weathered bedrock can be

removed with conventional excavating equipment (e.g., backhoes, excavators, caisson/drilled pier drill

rigs). These cohesive tills are generally considered to have essentially no expansion potential and be

semi-impermeable.

Weathered Bedrock/Bedrock: Beneath the natural cohesive glacial till in the western and southern

sections of the project site (at borings B-4, B-5, and B-8 to B-10), very hard drilling and spoon refusal

(i.e., N-values of 50+ to 100+) conditions were encountered. A variably thick layer of mid-level dense

to very dense, non-plastic, sand-sized to gravel-sized weathered shale bedrock fragments was

encountered and extended the full depth drilled at these five borings. The thickness of the moist

weathered bedrock ranged from approximately three feet (at boring B-5) to 12 feet (at boring B-9). A

very thin zone of this layer is suspected to be present in the northernmost section of the project site (at

borings B-1 to B-3 and B-6). This layer reflects the upper moderately weathered bedrock condition and

appears to increase in thickness from the northern to the southern directions across the project site.

Auger refusal, which is generally inferred to be the top of the apparent firm bedrock surface, was

encountered beneath the natural cohesive glacial till in the northern section of the project site (at the

Job No: 15-534

6

borings B-1 to B-6). The depth to the top of the apparent bedrock surface ranged from approximately

16 feet (at boring B-5) to 22 feet (at boring B-4) below the ground surface (elevations of 421.5 to 415.5

feet). Beneath the proposed five-story Hampton Inn & Suites hotel, the apparent bedrock surface

elevations were relatively level with a range of 421.5 to 419.0 feet, except for an elevation of 415.5 feet

(at boring B-4); which is located at the southern proposed building corner near the existing pool. Based

upon the regional geology, the shale unit of the Vernon Formation is expected to be the bedrock type

beneath the project site.

Groundwater: No appreciable amounts of groundwater were encountered at the test borings during or

at the completion of the subsurface explorations.

Groundwater observation wells (refer to Figure No. 2) were installed at the northeastern corner of the

proposed hotel (at boring/well B/OW-2) and at the southwestern corner of the proposed hotel (at

boring/well B/OW-4). As illustrated in Appendix B, these wells were screened in the lower part of the

natural cohesive glacial till to the top of apparent bedrock surface at boring/well B/OW-2 and from the

lower part of the natural cohesive glacial till through the weathered shale bedrock fragments to the top

of apparent shale bedrock surface at boring/well B/OW-4. Note that the weathered shale bedrock

fragments are suspected to be present in the lowest part of boring/well B/OW-2. The measured high

groundwater levels were 15.5 feet at boring/well B/OW-2 and 17.2 feet at boring/well B/OW-4 below

the ground surface (elevations of 422.2 and 420.6 feet, respectively). The predominate source of

water at these wells is believed to be from the upper fractured shale bedrock surface. At the project

site, the static groundwater level is believed to be at a depth of greater than approximately 15 feet

below the ground surface (elevation of 423 feet or lower) and within the lowermost natural cohesive

glacial till and weathered shale bedrock units. The regional groundwater flow direction is expected to

be from the north to the south towards the terminus of Ley Creek at Onondaga Lake.

Note that the groundwater readings were taken at the completion of drilling efforts and, therefore, an

adequate amount of time for the groundwater level to recharge to static conditions was probably not

allowed. Fluctuations in the groundwater level may occur due to other factors than those present

during field operations.

EARTHQUAKE/SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS

Site Class Definition: For the given site conditions, the most applicable site definition is Site Class C,

as listed in Table 1613.5.2 of the Building Code of New York State, 2010.

Liquefaction Potential: For the Site Class C, the design spectral response acceleration parameters

SDS, at 0.2 seconds, and SD1, at one second, are 0.11g and 0.061g (g = 32.2 feet/sec2), respectively,

Job No: 15-534

7

for this part of Onondaga County, New York (see Appendix E). These values have a two percent

probability of being exceeded in 50 years. Based upon the above conditions and an approximate

magnitude 6.0 earthquake on the Richter Scale, the potential for liquefaction or settlement of Site

Class C soil is considered extremely low.

FOUNDATION DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION RECOMMENDATIONS

General: This section will present and discuss recommendations on foundation design and

construction, placement of controlled fills, and subgrade and base layer requirements for concrete floor

slabs/pads, paved parking and roadway areas.

The proposed site development is to consist of a five-Story Hampton Inn Hotel & Suites building. As

shown in Figure No. 2, the proposed slab-on-grade hotel has approximately 19,128 square feet in total

building footprint area and will be located in the central to northern parts of the project site for

development. A porte cohere is proposed to be located to the southeast of the central section of the

southeastern hotel building wall line. The existing Ramada Inn swimming pool and enclosure will

remain as a part of the proposed hotel. A proposed storage and trash enclosure will be located near

the northern corner of the project site. Ingress and egress to the proposed hotel is to be provided

through Buckley Road (County Route 48) to the southeast and Elwood Davis Road to the southwest.

As shown in Figure No. 2, two proposed dry swales, stormwater forebay, and permanent stormwater

pool will be located in the central to western sections of the project site. Three future buildings may

also be under consideration at the three test boring B-8, B-9, and B-10 locations.

The existing ground surface is relatively level, but slopes slightly downward from the northern to the

southern directions across the project site being investigated. For the purposes of this report, the top

of finish first floor is assumed to be at an elevation of 438.85 feet for the proposed hotel. The final

grade is assumed to be at a relative elevation that is approximately one-half foot or lower below

finished floor; which is also used for bearing capacity purposes. The maximum design bearing wall and

column loads are not expected to exceed ten kips per lineal foot and 250 kips, respectively. The

maximum live floor load is taken as 100 pounds per square foot.

Site Preparation and Earthwork: General site preparation will include the demolition and complete

removal of any encountered foundations and floor slabs, and removing all unsuitable surficial material

(i.e., asphalt pavement, concrete, brick, expansive slag, organic or topsoil layer, and construction and

demolition-like fill) to a depth where firm, naturally occurring soils or fills are encountered. It is

recommended, particularly in the location of the proposed structures, that any slag and/or cinder/ash

containing material, if encountered, should be tested to determine the expansion and corrosion

characteristics (where applicable for direct or potential contact with foundation elements and buried

Job No: 15-534

8

utilities) of these materials prior to their use on-site. Any rubble-like and brick fill, boulders, or wood fill

in particular, if encountered, will require undercutting/removal. The proposed building and paved areas

are to be proof rolled with a fully loaded ten-wheel dump truck. All encountered soft and disturbed

zones should be undercut and stabilized with granular fill that is placed in compacted lifts prior to

placement of additional fill materials above. Refer to Appendix F entitled "General Earthwork

Specification" for definition of the fill types and gradations, recommended minimum compaction

requirements for various site developments, and placement and compaction methods. The NYS

Department of Transportation (NYSDOT) specification numbers for typical aggregate subbase/base

course components that are included in the select granular fill category are as follows: Item No. 304.12

(Metric) Subbase Course, Type 2 (< 2 inch maximum size), which is preferred; or Item No. 304.14

(Metric) Subbase Course, Type 4 (< 2 inch maximum size).

As shown in Figure No. 2, the project site for development is currently occupied by an existing two-

story Ramada Inn building that covers approximately one-third of the northwestern section of the

proposed hotel building footprint. Since cavities (from the footings, foundation walls, basements, and

tanks, as encountered) would remain, backfilling in compacted lifts with several feet of controlled select

granular fill, such as a number two crusher run stone or with suitable stripped and approved on-site fill

material, is required.

It is unknown if any former residential/commercial structures existed on the proposed project site. It is

unknown if any former footings and foundation walls may be buried at the proposed site. Septic tank

and system locations and the abandonment conditions or practices are normally unknown. If

encountered during site development, it is recommended that any tanks and systems should be

properly removed/treated/remediated relative to the proposed development and under the applicable

local and state regulations. The remaining cavities, from the aforementioned items, should be

backfilled with select/approved granular fill that is placed in thin lifts and compacted to the minimum

recommendation, as presented in this report, for the proposed development at that cavity location.

Shallow Foundation: The recommended foundation type is shallow footings. Exterior footings would

bear at a relative elevation of four feet or lower below final grade. A four foot minimum footing depth

(as required by local or New York State code) is required to provide adequate protection from frost for

exterior footings.

The presence of the varying strengths of the natural silty sand soil, natural clay and silt soil, and natural

silty clay and clay and silt glacial tills that are at and just below footing bearing grade are factors that

create varying to unsuitable (e.g., test borings at zero to two foot depth for proposed hotel) direct

Job No: 15-534

9

bearing conditions for the proposed foundations. The exterior and interior footings are recommended

to bear at the same elevation and on the following conditions as depicted in Appendix E page 1 of 10:

• �� for direct footing bearing on the very stiff or better/thoroughly compacted natural clay and silt soil or on the very stiff or better/thoroughly compacted natural silty clay or clay and silt glacial tills; or

• �� for direct footing bearing on the low-level medium dense or better/thoroughly compacted natural silty sand soil; or

• �� for direct footing bearing on the mid-level very stiff or better/thoroughly compacted natural clay and silt soil or on the mid-level very stiff or better/thoroughly compacted natural silty clay or clay and silt glacial tills; or

• �� for direct footing bearing on the mid-level medium dense or better/thoroughly compacted natural silty sand soil; or

• �� for footings bearing on a one foot minimum thickness of thin layers of thoroughly compacted (minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density by ASTM D 1557) select/approved granular fill that is placed over the very stiff or better/thoroughly compacted natural clay and silt soil, on the very stiff or better/thoroughly compacted natural silty clay or clay and silt glacial tills, or on the low-level medium dense or better/thoroughly compacted natural silty sand soil.

As needed during construction or upon encountering unapprovable natural soil/fill conditions (e.g., two

to four foot depth range at boring B-6), footings would bear on a variable (one-half foot minimum) or

additional layers of thoroughly compacted (minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density by

ASTM D 1557) select/approved granular fill that is placed on the preceding approved conditions. The

approvable natural silty sand soil that is removed from the trenches and undercut beneath the footings

can be reused beneath the footings within these undercuts. Alternatively, interior footings are

recommended to bear at two and one-half feet or lower below finish first floor and on a two foot

minimum thickness of thoroughly compacted select/approved granular fill that is upon the same

approved subgrade conditions as defined in the last condition �� above for the exterior footings.

Undercut areas beneath proposed foundations must extend laterally beyond each vertically projected

edge of the foundation by a minimum distance equal to one-half the total depth of the undercut or

equating to a slope of two vertical to one horizontal from the bottom foundation corner at the edge of

the foundation. The undercuts and placement of compacted select/approved granular fill would ensure

a suitable and more uniform bearing media for the footings and would prevent unacceptable differential

settlements.

Wall footings should have a minimum two-foot width and column footings should have a minimum

three-foot width. Based on the above described conditions at the proposed hotel, the recommended

maximum net allowable foundation bearing pressure is 2,500 pounds per square foot (psf) of bearing

area for condition �� above and 3,250 psf of bearing area for condition �� above. If condition �� is used

in the design of the exterior footings, then this maximum net allowable foundation bearing pressure will

Job No: 15-534

10

also apply to the interior footings that bear on the two foot minimum thickness of thoroughly compacted

select/approved granular fill. For the three future buildings, the maximum net allowable bearing

capacities and bearing conditions, which are similar to the proposed hotel, are tentatively (since these

buildings are not defined/specified) recommended on page 3 of 10 in Appendix E. All footings for each

proposed building/structure are recommended to be designed near the same contact pressure. The

recommended maximum net allowable foundation bearing pressure is based on generally accepted

design methods for cohesionless and cohesive soil conditions. Based on the provisions of the above

recommendations and estimated design requirements and utilization of proper construction procedures

and experienced field supervision and testing personnel, total and differential settlements are estimated

to be less than one inch and 3/4's inch, respectively. Refer to the engineering computations, which are

included as Appendix E, for additional foundation design and construction details.

Additional Foundation Considerations: In addition to the above, the following recommendations will

provide additional assurances with regard to proper foundation construction.

a) All fill placed beneath, adjacent, or above foundations must comply with the "General Earthwork Specification", included as Appendix F.

b) Backfill of foundations with approved select granular fill must be completed prior to placement of substantial superstructure loads, except for basement walls or substructure areas that may additionally require superstructure loads and possibly internal bracing.

c) The upper silty materials may rut and “pump” if exposed to excessive surface water and repeated construction traffic. Proper site management and fill placement operations are needed to minimize costly undercuts and subgrade repairs prior to placement of concrete slabs and asphalt pavement. It is noted that construction during wet/rainy and/or Fall and Spring conditions may require added precautions and possibly a thicker base layer to maintain a stable subgrade condition.

d) Step footings, if utilized, should have a rise to run ratio of 1:2, with a two-foot maximum rise and a four-foot minimum run between steps or as recommended by the design structural engineer.

e) The recommended at rest (rigid wall), active, and passive static earth pressure coefficients for unsaturated, select granular sandy gravel fill against an earth retaining structure/wall are 0.76, 0.24, and 2.8 (with an ultimate value of 4.2), respectively. The respective equivalent static lateral fluid pressures are recommended to be 90, 30 and 330 (with an ultimate value of 500) pounds per square foot (psf) per foot depth (as included in Appendix E), which are based upon a moist, compacted unit backfill weight of 120 pounds per cubic foot (pcf). The at rest value would account for the average expected compaction induced stresses and/or the potential influences of hydrostatic pressure. If a moist, compacted granular sandy silt or silty sand fill is used, the recommended active and passive static earth pressure coefficients are 0.33 and 2.0 (with an ultimate value of 3.0) and the equivalent static lateral fluid pressures are 45 and 270 (with an ultimate value of 405) psf per foot depth, which is based upon a unit backfill weight of 135 pcf. The static lateral fluid pressures can be directly proportioned for other unit weights.

Stabilization of Excavations: The trench/excavation sidewall stability concerns can be addressed with

the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) requirements as set forth in Subpart P of 29 CFR Part

1926, Sections 1926.650 to 1926.652. In lieu of a properly designed shoring system, side slopes of the

Job No: 15-534

11

trench excavation should be one on one (vertical to horizontal distance) or flatter in cohesive soils or

one on one and one-half or flatter in the granular materials, as required by OSHA.

Water must not be allowed to accumulate or pond on exposed foundation bearing grades. Surface

water and groundwater from within the excavation must be either pumped, diverted or channelized by

gravity flow to effectuate the construction of the proposed foundation.

Concrete Floor Slabs-on-Grade/Pads: For the most part and based on test results for similar soils/fills,

slightly to moderately plastic cohesive natural soils/fills may be slightly difficult to compact in a

controlled manner considering the varying soil plasticity and natural moisture contents that are at to just

wet of optimum, at the time of this investigation. Excavated and approvable cohesive natural soil/fill

types are expected to be available in varying quantities at the proposed swale, stormwater forebay, and

stormwater permanent pool areas. These soils/fills may be expected to be suitable for re-use as

general fill with the implementation of uniformly applied soil conditioning (i.e., drying and blending) and

compaction methods, if additional volume of soil for backfill is needed.

Excavated and approvable granular (i.e., sand or gravel and non-plastic silt and sand) soil/fill are not

expected to be available in any reasonable quantities, except possibly beneath the existing building

floor slab and exterior concrete and asphalt paved areas. For the most part, granular (i.e., sand or

gravel) soil/fill is expected to be acceptable for on-site re-use, as general/ordinary fill without substantial

reworking and/or modification, while silty fine-sized sand to non-plastic sandy silt may first require

drying and blending.

Dissimilar excavated materials should not be commingled prior to their use on-site, unless designated

for a green/vegetation area. General fill material is also recommended to be placed on prepared and

approved subgrade and in accordance with previous recommendations.

A geotextile fabric (such as, Mirafi 600X or equal) that separates the subgrade and the approved/select

granular base layer may be needed and is particularly recommended for sensitive cohesive/fine-

grained/silty subgrade soil/fills. This approach will stabilize and provide a workable building pad

condition with minimal required repairs.

The approved subgrades will most likely consist of the upper level medium dense or better/thoroughly

compacted (i.e., minimum 92 percent of the maximum dry density by ASTM D 1557) existing non-

plastic natural silty sand soil/approvable granular base layer fill, very stiff or better/thoroughly

compacted natural clay and silt soil/glacial till, and/or thoroughly compacted, select/approved imported

granular fills. Above the approved subgrade(s), a minimum eight-inch thick select granular fill (i.e.,

Job No: 15-534

12

number two crusher run stone or equal) layer is recommended as the base course for the proposed

building concrete floor slab. The NYSDOT specification numbers for typical aggregate subbase/base

course components are Item No. 304.12 (Metric) Subbase Course, Type 2 (< 2 inch maximum), which

is preferred, or Item No. 304.14 (Metric) Subbase Course, Type 4 (< 2 inch maximum). This select

granular base layer would be compacted to a minimum 95 percent of the maximum dry density by

ASTM D 1557. The floor slab for the proposed building is recommended to have a minimum four-inch

thickness or as determined by the design structural engineer. The floor slab reinforcement should be

provided through placement of wire mesh or plastic fibers and is also as determined by the design

structural engineer.

At the discretion of the design architect, a vapor barrier may also be considered for use in the proposed

structure. The use of a thin gravel cushion, as a capillary break, or a thin sand cushion over a vapor

barrier that is placed beneath the concrete slab is at the discretion of the design architect/engineer or

as required by local code. Gradations of gravels that are satisfactory capillary breaks include 1 ¼-inch

or ¾-inch crushed stone or aggregate per the ASTM D2321 Types IA, IB and II with less than 5 %

fines. A number two crusher run stone may also be applicable, but the gradation and material property

specifications must qualify.

At the assumed final site grades and based upon the character of the underlying fills and natural soils,

the recommended composite subgrade modulus at the top of the granular aggregate base layer for a

concrete floor slab bearing on a minimum eight-inch thick compacted base layer (i.e., minimum 95

percent compaction) and prepared soil/fill approved subgrade (i.e., minimum 92 percent compaction) is

recommended not to exceed 150 pounds per cubic inch (pci) with a Poisson Ratio of 0.40 for design

purposes. The soil subgrade modulus at the top of subgrade is not to exceed 100 pci for design

purposes. Based upon the subgrade modulus and concrete slab mechanical properties and thickness,

the design structural engineer may accordingly adjust the granular aggregate base thickness. Isolation

of the floor slabs from the footings-piers-columns and walls do appear to be warranted.

Exterior Concrete Slabs-on-Grade/Pad/Parking and Roadway Facilities: The characteristics of the silt

and clay natural soils/fills and the known frost penetration in Central New York requires that specific

attention is provided to the design and construction of paved roadway and parking areas. Depending

upon the final grading plan, individual sections of the existing pavement may need to be evaluated

relative to removal and reconstruction of new pavement sections or to utilizing a short term/periodic

treatment with thin asphalt overlays. Pavement removal at transitional areas, between existing

pavement and the proposed pavement, may also be expected.

Job No: 15-534

13

For new pavement sections, isolated pockets of surficial silty/cohesive/fine-grained soil/fill may be

encountered and may be too soft and wet in the proposed parking and roadway areas. These types of

soil/fill may be adequately conditioned (i.e., dried and blended) and compacted (i.e., minimum 90

percent compaction) to support necessary construction equipment and normal pavement section.

Otherwise, the removal/undercutting of the silty/cohesive/fine-grained soil/fill to a firm, approved

subgrade and subsequent placement and compaction of select or approved granular fill will be required

in order to accommodate the recommended pavement sections.

For new pavement sections, it is recommended that the subgrade surface is adequately graded and/or

underdrains are installed to prevent water accumulation. Above the approved subgrade surface (i.e.,

minimum 90 percent compaction), a minimum eight-inch thick select granular layer is recommended as

the base course for slabs-on-grade/pads not subject to automotive traffic and for lightly traveled

roadway and parking areas (standard duty section). A geotextile filter and strength fabric (such as,

Mirafi 600X or equal) on silty/cohesive/fine-grained soil/fill subgrades and minimum 12-inch thick base

course are recommended for all truck routes and heavily traveled roadways (heavy duty section). If

“pumping” of the silty/cohesive/fine-grained soil/fill subgrade occurs or is difficult to stabilize during

construction, an increase in the base thickness to that of the heavy duty section and/or a geotextile

filter and strength fabric is recommended to be placed on the prepared and approved subgrade for the

standard duty section. The NYS Department of Transportation (NYSDOT) specification numbers for

typical aggregate subbase/base course components are Item No. 304.12 (Metric) Subbase Course,

Type 2 (< 2 inch maximum size), which is preferred, or Item No. 304.14 (Metric) Subbase Course, Type

4 (< 2 inch maximum size). The granular aggregate base layer is recommended to be compacted to at

least 95 percent of maximum dry density by ASTM D1557.

The thickness of top and binder course layers should be determined in accordance with AASHTO

methods. In summary, the minimum recommended asphalt thicknesses for the heavy duty section and

standard duty section are four inches and three inches, respectively. The top and binder course layers

are recommended to be designed and constructed in accordance with New York State Department of

Transportation Standard Specification.

Portland cement concrete slabs should have minimum thicknesses of four inches for lightly loaded

slabs-on-grade/pads not subject to automotive traffic, five inches for the standard duty section, and six

inches for the heavy duty section or as determined by the design structural engineer. The maximum

composite subgrade modulus at the top of the granular aggregate base layer for concrete slab design

purposes is recommended not to exceed 150 pounds per cubic inch (pci), with a Poisson Ratio of 0.40.

The soil subgrade modulus at the top of subgrade is not to exceed 100 pci for design purposes. As

Job No: 15-534

discussed for the interior concrete floor slabs-on-grade, the design civil/structural engineer may also

accordingly adjust the granular aggregate base thicknesses relative to the subgrade modulus, traffic

loading conditions, and slab mechanical properties and thicknesses.

Limitations, Field Inspections. and Monitorino: This repo( is based on the preliminary information that

is provided by project representatives and the subsurface conditions that were encountered at the test

boring locations. Due to the nature of the investigation method, test pit excavation will provide a

greater level of delineation of the subsurface soil/fill/rock conditions than can be defined by the test

boring data alone. As detailed in Appendix G "Limitations", modification regarding proposed

building/structure locations and other site developments can result in changes to provided

recommendations. lt is recommended that the geotechnical engineer be provided the opportunity to

generally review the final detailed design and contract specifications. Required earthwork and

foundation construction should be done under the supervision of experienced construction personnel

and in a manner consistent with proven methods. All site work should be carefully monitored and

tested by experienced geotechnical personnel to assure compliance with earthwork and foundation

construction specifications.

Thank you for the opportunity to assist on this poect. lf questions should arise, please call the

undersigned at your earliest convenience.

Very truly yours,BARRON & ASSOCIATES, INC.

LLING COMPANY. INC.

S. Barron, P.E.PresidenUGeotechnical Engineer

Carmen M. PanuccioGeotechnical Engineer

Z:\Reporc\Geotech. & Sp. Insp. Reports\Wpp15\15-534.d0c

www.barronandassociatesDc.com

##hw

14

ZB.,^

E%z

\

1}

5, ,rLr,, o,sirawooo , -t^ oq

-

;-a

Ga;.'Y.| . ...".

BARRON AASSOCIATES, P.C, &AUFFALO OR]LLING COMPANY

E! ",*'f^'38\fli."'liE

".."i^,llisi;ii.i:?^ros6dRhiNo6socaEsrc

@M

CLIENT: PRIMATERM PROPERTIES, LLC275 ELWOOD DAVIS ROADLIVERPOOL, NEW YORK 13088

USGS SITE LOCATION PLANSYRACUSE WEST, N.Y, QUAD

2013

1305 BUCKLEY ROAD (COUNTY ROUTE 48)TOWN OF SALINA, ONONDAGA CO,, NY 13212

IOB NO.: 15-534 SCALE: 1" = 2000' +ORAWN: DAN KASPROWICZ DATE: 412312015 FIGURE NO. 1

B&A JOB NO: 15-534CLIENT: Prima Terra Properties, LLC

PROJECT: Proposed 5-Story Hampton Inn Hotel & Suites1305 Buckley Road (County Route 48)Town of Salina, Onondaga County, New York

ASTM D2216

ASTM D2974 ASTM D2166 ASTM

D2166ASTM D2487 / ASTM D2488 *

Gravel Sand Silt Clay LL PL PI

(ft.) (%) (%) (psf) (pcf) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) ( - )

B-1 S-1 0-2 12.9 - - - - - - - 22 17 5 CL

S-2 2-4 14.4 - - - - - - - - - - CL-Till

S-3 4-6 18.0 - - - - - - - 30 22 8 CL-Till

S-4 6-8 19.8 - - - - - - - - - - CL-Till

S-5 8-10 17.2 - - - - - - - - - - CL/CL-ML Till

S-6 10-12 22.2 - - - - - - - - - - CL-Till

S-7 14-16 20.7 - - - - - - - - - - CL-Till

S-1 0-2 10.8 - - - - - - SM

S-2 2-4 10.3 - - - - - - SM

S-3 4-6 15.9 - - - - - - - 23 16 7 CL/CL-ML Till

S-4 6-8 13.1 - - - - - - - - - - CL/CL-ML Till

S-5 8-10 15.2 - - - - - - - 30 22 8 CL-Till

S-6 10-12 14.0 - - - - - - - - - - CL-Till

S-7 14-15.9 12.4 - - - - - - - - - - CL-ML Till

S-8 19-21 15.1 - - - - - - - - - - WEATHERED SHALE

B-7 S-1 0.5-2 5.7 - - - - - - - - - - GP-Fill

S-2 2-4 13.5 - - - - - - - - - - CL-ML Till

S-3 4-6 16.7 - - - - - - - - - - CL-ML Till

S-4 6-8 15.8 - - - - - - - - - - CL-ML Till

S-5 8-10 13.2 - - - - - - - - - - CL-ML Till

B-8 S-1 0.5-2 6.4 - - - - - - - - - - GP-Fill

S-2 2-4 11.1 - - - - - - - - - - SM

S-3 4-6 15.0 - - - - - - - 20 15 5 CL-ML Till

S-4 6-8 16.9 - - - - - - - - - - CL-ML Till

S-5 8-10 12.9 - - - - - - - - - - CL-ML Till

S-6 10-12 15.6 - - - - - - - - - - CL-ML Till

S-7 14-15.3 10.3 - - - - - - - - - - WEATHERED SHALE

S-8 19-20.3 11.1 - - - - - - - - - - WEATHERED SHALE

B/OW-4

Wet Density

CURRENT LABORATORY PHYSICAL SOIL TEST RESULTSUnconfined Compressive Strength

Atterberg LimitsGrain Size Analysis USCS Soil

Classification

TABLE NO. 1

* Soil classification based on visual identification and soil classification of adjacent samples (as applicable).

ASTM D422 ASTM D4318

Depth Moisture Content

Organic Matter

Content

Boring No.

Sample No.

18.8 46.9 24.3 10.0

FAX (716)759-7823(716)759-7821

www.barronandassociatespc.com

1 0 4 4 0 M A I N S T R E E T C L A R E N C E , N . Y . 1 4 0 3 1

( 7 1 6 ) 7 5 9 - 7 8 2 1 F A X ( 7 1 6 ) 7 5 9 - 7 8 2 3

BARRON & ASSOCIATES, P.C. &

BUFFALO DRILLING COMPANY, INC.

e-mail: [email protected] [email protected]

APPENDIX A

TEST BORING LOGS

435

430

425

420

415

410

405

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

2346141298

9121214

8121412

3346

3588

11111214

S-1 : 0.0'- 2.0'

S-2 : 2.0'- 4.0'

S-3 : 4.0'- 6.0'

S-4 : 6.0'- 8.0'

S-5 : 8.0'- 10.0'

S-6 : 10.0'- 12.0'

S-7 : 14.0'- 16.0'

7

21

24

26

7

13

23

80

85

60

45

55

55

45

Topsoil (4")Dk. brown, m. stiff CLAY and SILT, little f/c Sand, little Gravel, sl. plastic,moist (CL-ML)Red/brown, v. stiff CLAY, some Silt, little f/c Sand, little Gravel sl. to mod.plastic, moist (CL-Till)

Same as S-2

Same as S-2

...grade: m. stiff, sl. plastic (CL/CL-ML Till)

...grade: stiff, sl. to mod. plastic (CL-Till)

...grade: v. stiff

Depth to Bottom of Hole: 18.0 feet

BARRON & ASSOCIATES, P.C. &BUFFALO DRILLING COMPANY, INC. TEST BORING LOG

10440 MAIN STREETCLARENCE, NEW YORK 14031 JOB No.: 15-534 BORING No.: B-1(716) 759-7821 FAX: (716) 759-7823

PROJECT: Proposed 5-Story Hampton Inn Hotel & Suites1305 Buckley Road (County Route 48), Town of Salina, Onondaga Co., NY 13212

DRILLER: J. Gardner TYPE OF DRILL RIG: CME 55 (ATV)SAMPLING METHODS: ASTM D1586 SIZE AND TYPE OF BIT: 2 1/4" I.D. H.S.A.DATE STARTED: 4/23/15 SURFACE ELEVATION (ft.): 438.3 est.DATE COMPLETED: 4/23/15 GROUNDWATER DEPTH (ft.): None

(measured at completion unless indicated below)

Logged by: B. Smith

Elevation/Depth(feet)

Soil SymbolsSampler SymbolsField Test Data

SampleNo. : Range

N-Value

% REC(RQD) Soil and Rock Description / Remarks

435

430

425

420

415

410

405

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

2378991014

113150/5"

12253229

10283747

63250/5"

43050/4"

S-1 : 0.0'- 2.0'

S-2 : 2.0'- 4.0'

S-3 : 4.0'- 5.4'

S-4 : 6.0'- 8.0'

S-5 : 8.0'- 10.0'

S-6 : 10.0'- 11.4'

S-7 : 14.0'- 15.3'

10

19

81+

57

65

82+

80+

60

10

75

80

55

45

55

Topsoil (5")Dk. brown, m. dense f. SAND, some Silt, little Gravel, little c/m Sand, tr.Clay, non-plastic, moist (SM)Same as S-1

Red/brown, hard CLAY, some Silt, little f/c Sand, little Gravel, sl to mod.plastic, moist (CL/CL-ML Till)

Same as S-3

Same as S-3

Same as S-3

Same as S-3





DRILLER: J. Gardner TYPE OF DRILL RIG: CME 55 (ATV)SAMPLING METHODS: ASTM D1586 / D5092 SIZE AND TYPE OF BIT: 2 1/4" I.D. H.S.A.DATE STARTED: 4/24/15 SURFACE ELEVATION (ft.): 437.7DATE COMPLETED: 4/24/15 GROUNDWATER DEPTH (ft.): None


Logged by: B. Smith



SampleNo. : Range

N-Value


435

430

425

420

415

410

405

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

146841069

41097

7788

10121626

10161820

7173040

S-1 : 0.0'- 2.0'

S-2 : 2.0'- 4.0'

S-3 : 4.0'- 6.0'

S-4 : 6.0'- 8.0'

S-5 : 8.0'- 10.0'

S-6 : 10.0'- 12.0'

S-7 : 14.0'- 16.0'

10

16

19

15

28

34

47

60

65

70

75

60

50

50

Topsoil (4")Brown, stiff CLAY and SILT, little f/c Sand, little Gravel, sl. plastic, moist(CL-ML)...grade: v. stiff

Brown, m. dense f. SAND, some Silt, little Gravel, little c/m Sand, tr. Clay,non-plastic, moist (SM)

Red/brown, v. stiff CLAY, some Silt, little f/c Sand, little Gravel sl. to mod.plastic, moist (CL/CL-ML Till)

Same as S-4

...grade: hard

...grade: some f/c Sand







Logged by: B. Smith



SampleNo. : Range

N-Value


435

430

425

420

415

410

405

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

141114234650/3"

57911

144350/3"

3213039

9314750

5144050/5"

6162530

S-1 : 0.0'- 2.0'

S-2 : 2.0'- 3.3'

S-3 : 4.0'- 6.0'

S-4 : 6.0'- 7.3'

S-5 : 8.0'- 10.0'

S-6 : 10.0'- 12.0'

S-7 : 14.0'- 15.9'

S-8 : 19.0'- 21.0'

15

96+

16

93+

51

78

54

41

90

55

80

55

75

60

75

55

Topsoil (5")Dk. brown, m. dense f. SAND, some Silt, little Gravel, little c/m Sand, tr.Clay, non-plastic, moist (SM)...grade: v. dense

Red/brown, v. stiff CLAY and SILT, little f/c Sand, little Gravel, sl. plastic,moist (CL/CL-ML Till)

...grade: hard

...grade: some Silt, sl. to mod. plastic (CL-Till)

Same as S-4

...grade: and f. Sand, sl. plastic, (CL-ML Till)

Red/brown, dense Sand to gravel sized WEATHERED SHALE fragments,moist (WEATHERED SHALE)





DRILLER: J. Gardner TYPE OF DRILL RIG: CME 55 (ATV)SAMPLING METHODS: ASTM D1586 / D5092 SIZE AND TYPE OF BIT: 2 1/4" I.D. H.S.A.DATE STARTED: 4/24/15 SURFACE ELEVATION (ft.): 437.8DATE COMPLETED: 4/24/15 GROUNDWATER DEPTH (ft.): None


Logged by: B. Smith



SampleNo. : Range

N-Value


435

430

425

420

415

410

405

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

555661618

11162126

9242419

58912

8101217

550/3"

S-1 : 0.5'- 2.0'

S-2 : 2.0'- 4.0'

S-3 : 4.0'- 6.0'

S-4 : 6.0'- 8.0'

S-5 : 8.0'- 10.0'

S-6 : 10.0'- 12.0'

S-7 : 14.0'- 14.8'

10

22

37

48

17

22

50+

30

65

75

50

55

60

50

Asphalt (5")Brown, stiff CLAY and SILT, little f/c Sand, little Gravel, sl. plastic, moist(CL-ML)...grade: v. stiff, tr. Gravel

Red/brown, hard CLAY, some Silt, little f/c Sand, little Gravel, sl. plastic,moist (CL/CL-ML Till)

Same as S-3

...grade: v. stiff

Same as S-5

Red/brown, v. dense Sand to gravel sized WEATHERED SHALEfragments, moist (WEATHERED SHALE)







Logged by: B. Smith



SampleNo. : Range

N-Value


435

430

425

420

415

410

405

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

2323433

36912

4111822

56714

1311715

11292538

S-1 : 0.5'- 2.0'

S-2 : 2.0'- 4.0'

S-3 : 4.0'- 6.0'

S-4 : 6.0'- 8.0'

S-5 : 8.0'- 10.0'

S-6 : 10.0'- 12.0'

S-7 : 14.0'- 16.0'

5

7

15

29

13

18

54

35

55

55

60

40

40

50

Asphalt (3")Brown, m. stiff CLAY and SILT, little f/c Sand, little Gravel, sl. plastic, moist(CL-ML)Same as S-1

Red/brown, v. stiff CLAY, some Silt, little f/c Sand, little Gravel, sl. to mod.plastic, moist (CL/CL-ML Till)

Same as S-3

...grade: stiff

...grade: v. stiff

...grade: hard







Logged by: B. Smith



SampleNo. : Range

N-Value


435

430

425

420

415

410

405

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

3435633

1568

56910

7101114

S-1 : 0.5'- 2.0'

S-2 : 2.0'- 4.0'

S-3 : 4.0'- 6.0'

S-4 : 6.0'- 8.0'

S-5 : 8.0'- 10.0'

7

9

11

15

21

30

70

25

75

80

Asphalt (6")Gray, loose sand to gravel sized Rock fragments, moist (GP-Fill)

Red/brown, stiff CLAY and SILT, little f/c Sand, little Gravel, sl. to mod.plastic, moist (CL/CL-ML Till)

Same as S-2

Same as S-2

...grade: v. stiff







Logged by: B. Smith



SampleNo. : Range

N-Value


435

430

425

420

415

410

405

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

59111612109

4455

3122530

10151616

4111718

53550/3"

381950/3"

S-1 : 0.5'- 2.0'

S-2 : 2.0'- 4.0'

S-3 : 4.0'- 6.0'

S-4 : 6.0'- 8.0'

S-5 : 8.0'- 10.0'

S-6 : 10.0'- 12.0'

S-7 : 14.0'- 15.3'

S-8 : 19.0'- 20.3'

20

22

9

37

31

28

85+

69+

30

75

80

20

80

50

65

60

Asphalt (6")Gray, m. dense sand to gravel sized Rock fragments, moist (GP-Fill)

Dk. brown, m. dense f. SAND, some Silt, little Gravel, little c/m Sand, tr.Clay, non-plastic, moist (SM)

Red/brown, stiff CLAY and SILT, little f/c Sand, little Gravel, sl. plastic,moist (CL-ML Till)

...grade: hard

Same as S-4

...grade: v. stiff


Same as S-7







Logged by: B. Smith



SampleNo. : Range

N-Value


430

425

420

415

410

405

400

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

4864898

5101212

291924

8666

251527

3162615

3162626

7294227

S-1 : 0.5'- 2.0'

S-2 : 2.0'- 4.0'

S-3 : 4.0'- 6.0'

S-4 : 6.0'- 8.0'

S-5 : 8.0'- 10.0'

S-6 : 10.0'- 12.0'

S-7 : 14.0'- 16.0'

S-8 : 19.0'- 21.0'

S-9 : 23.0'- 25.0'

14

17

22

28

12

20

42

42

71

65

40

40

45

55

60

50

50

60

Asphalt (6")Red/brown, stiff CLAY and SILT, little f/c Sand, little Gravel, sl. plastic,moist (CL-ML Till)...grade: v. stiff

Same as S-2

Same as S-2

...grade: stiff

...grade: v. stiff

Red/brown, dense Sand to gravel sized WEATHERED SHALE fragments,moist (WEATHERED SHALE)

Same as S-7

...grade: v. dense







Logged by: B. Smith



SampleNo. : Range

N-Value


435

430

425

420

415

410

405

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

68788916

73650/5"

104650/4"

16364650/3"

63250/5"

S-1 : 0.5'- 2.0'

S-2 : 2.0'- 4.0'

S-3 : 4.0'- 5.4'

S-4 : 6.0'- 7.3'

S-5 : 8.0'- 9.8'

S-6 : 10.0'- 11.4'

15

17

86+

96+

82

82+

55

60

60

60

50

70

Asphalt (4")Red/brown, v. stiff CLAY and SILT, little f/c Sand, little Gravel, sl. plastic,moist (CL-ML Till)Same as S-1


Same as S-3

Same as S-3

Same as S-3







Logged by: B. Smith



SampleNo. : Range

N-Value




( 7 1 6 ) 7 5 9 - 7 8 2 1 F A X ( 7 1 6 ) 7 5 9 - 7 8 2 3




APPENDIX B

GROUNDWATER OBSERVATION WELL SCHEMATICS

435

430

425

420

415

410

405

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

Locking J-Plug1" I.D. Sch. 40 PVC RiserAuger Cuttings Backfill

Bentonite Seal

Sand Pack

1" I.D. Sch. 40, 0.010 SlotPVC Screen

S-1

S-2

S-3

S-4

S-5

S-6

S-7

10

19

81+

57

65

82+

80+

60

10

75

80

55

45

55

Topsoil (5")Dk. brown, m. dense f. SAND, some Silt, littleGravel, little c/m Sand, tr. Clay, non-plastic, moist(SM)Same as S-1

Red/brown, hard CLAY, some Silt, little f/c Sand,little Gravel, sl to mod. plastic, moist (CL/CL-MLTill)Same as S-3

Same as S-3

Same as S-3

Same as S-3


BARRON & ASSOCIATES, P.C. & TEST BORING / OBSERVATION WELL SCHEMATICBUFFALO DRILLING COMPANY, INC.

10440 MAIN STREETCLARENCE, NEW YORK 14031 JOB No.: 15-534 BORING No.: B/OW-2(716) 759-7821 FAX: (716) 759-7823


DRILLER: J. Gardner TYPE OF DRILL RIG: CME 55 (ATV)SAMPLING METHODS: ASTM D1586 / D5092 SIZE AND TYPE OF BIT: 2 1/4" I.D. H.S.A.DATE STARTED: 4/24/15 SURFACE ELEVATION (FT): 437.7DATE COMPLETED: 4/24/15 GROUNDWATER DEPTH (FT): 15.7 (See Notes 1 & 2)


1. Dry before setting well. Groundwater level at 16.0 ft. below ground surface (BGS) on 4/24/15 a measured by BDC.2. As measured by TDK Engineering Associates, PC and provided in a 4/28/15 email, groundwater level at 15.5 ft. BGSon 4/27/15 and 15.7 ft. BGS on 4/28/15.

Observation Well InstallationDetails

Elevation/Depth


SampleNo.

N-Value


435

430

425

420

415

410

405

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

Locking J-Plug1" I.D. Sch. 40 PVC RiserAuger Cuttings Backfill

Bentonite Seal

Sand Pack

1" I.D. Sch. 40, 0.010 SlotPVC Screen

S-1

S-2

S-3

S-4

S-5

S-6

S-7

S-8

15

96+

16

93+

51

78

54

41

90

55

80

55

75

60

75

55

Topsoil (5")Dk. brown, m. dense f. SAND, some Silt, littleGravel, little c/m Sand, tr. Clay, non-plastic, moist(SM)...grade: v. dense

Red/brown, v. stiff CLAY and SILT, little f/c Sand,little Gravel, sl. plastic, moist (CL/CL-ML Till)

...grade: hard

...grade: some Silt, sl. to mod. plastic (CL-Till)

Same as S-4

...grade: and f. Sand, sl. plastic (CL-ML Till)

Red/brown, dense Sand to gravel sizedWEATHERED SHALE fragments, moist(WEATHERED SHALE)


BARRON & ASSOCIATES, P.C. & TEST BORING / OBSERVATION WELL SCHEMATICBUFFALO DRILLING COMPANY, INC.

10440 MAIN STREETCLARENCE, NEW YORK 14031 JOB No.: 15-534 BORING No.: B/OW-4(716) 759-7821 FAX: (716) 759-7823


DRILLER: J. Gardner TYPE OF DRILL RIG: CME 55 (ATV)SAMPLING METHODS: ASTM D1586 SIZE AND TYPE OF BIT: 2 1/4" I.D. H.S.A.DATE STARTED: 4/24/15 SURFACE ELEVATION (FT): 437.8DATE COMPLETED: 4/24/15 GROUNDWATER DEPTH (FT): 17.3 (See Notes 1 & 2)


1. No groundwater present on 4/24/15.2. As measured by TDK Engineering Associates, PC and provided in a 4/28/15 email, groundwater level at 17.2 ft. belowground surface (BGS) on 4/27/15 and 17.3 ft. BGS on 4/28/15.

Observation Well InstallationDetails

Elevation/Depth


SampleNo.

N-Value




( 7 1 6 ) 7 5 9 - 7 8 2 1 F A X ( 7 1 6 ) 7 5 9 - 7 8 2 3




APPENDIX C

GEOTECHNICAL REFERENCE STANDARDS



( 7 1 6 ) 7 5 9 - 7 8 2 1 F A X ( 7 1 6 ) 7 5 9 - 7 8 2 3




APPENDIX D

LABORATORY TEST RESULTS

Job No: 15-534Project: Proposed 5-Story Hampton Inn Hotel & Suites

1305 Buckley Road (County Route 48)Town of Salina, Onondaga County, New York

Boring Sample Depth LL PL PINo. No. (ft.) (%) (%) (%)

B-1 S-1 0-2 22 17 5

B-1 S-3 4-6 30 22 8

B-4 S-3 4-6 23 16 7

B-4 S-5 8-10 30 22 8

B-8 S-3 4-6 20 15 5

Plasticity Chart ASTM D4318 & D2487

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110LIQUID LIMIT (LL) (%)

PLA

STIC

ITY

IND

EX (P

I) (%

)

7

16

4B-8; S-3

B-4; S-5

FAX (716)759-7823(716)759-7821

B-1; S-1

B-4; S-3B-1; S-3

Job No: 15-534Project: Proposed 5-Story Hampton Inn Hotel & Suites

1305 Buckley Road (County Route 48)Town of Salina, Onondaga County, New York

CC= 2.59 CU= 62.2 LL= NA PL= NA PI= NA USCS= SM

18.8 % Gravel

D60= 0.25546.9 % Sand

D30= 0.052

24.3 % Silt

D10= 0.0041

10.0 % Clay

Date Tested: Boring No.: B-4 Sample No.: S-1 & S-2 Composite Depth:Note: Sample weight tested was less than required by ASTM D-422. Therefore, this grain size distribution may not accurately represent actual conditions.

0 to 4 ft.May 4, 2015

GRAIN SIZE ANALYSIS ASTM D-421/D-422

U.S. STANDARD SIEVE SIZE

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

0.0010.010.1110100GRAIN SIZE IN MILLIMETERS

PER

CEN

T FI

NER

BY

WEI

GH

T

3/4 in. No.4 No.10 No.40 No. 2003 in.

GRAVEL SAND

COARSE FINECOBBLES CLAY

COARSE MEDIUM FINESILT

FAX (716)759-7823(716)759-7821



( 7 1 6 ) 7 5 9 - 7 8 2 1 F A X ( 7 1 6 ) 7 5 9 - 7 8 2 3




APPENDIX E

ENGINEERING COMPUTATIONS, SCHEMATICS, AND PROFILES

!no(-mo-

r!oo(t:o

I;oY'<U'*qE<AP

oo5F-F7a=9fiioaa=Poo

!)too2

N

trn8z

oloi>ao=oz,U'1-.lmNU'Hl'ioPFbtDnCtn 'tl

6i:''oZOtll v

6=DC,

t=q!z

=o

ELEVATION (feet)lrr!l+5oo

I

lr

i-Ir

rt .",r]

,l (

: s ,krs a a i t io' o .io . T 5 ? TLll lt I li llll'+ll lr

(reat) ruottvnl-1=

; *a=isl:$teFEiriEi:I .1 iiqS{ *i .-o 3-'e; ',; sii PRad=i s ioldi'.

=F=eHi I rBSEi i

Hfllgg$igisEB$:FEit1i=a;93:i?i€glrcir

ed=9*i -x=l=i i

d

- i;-^_|.'.'E ::; i{: a i9:s*: I i-r:"

I

-.1

?l

.66 i

?:9=Ier>$

o E"

D

<;l

o9.O. (yO ,Q,.; tt I n ) . -\r a"i.;;,."*'ii::iO r:: i -,- -r I " i l' ;d j

i: 9'i : .. i a i !i rsi :Ji i:-t' : I rv,-" !:tS_^,N,nf,:i ji;: ";:;S5\v l\ N: -c 3 " l')l-Nr,r\'tS 3 lbr 5 - i,') r

? T : i '{ -.:(li'' 'rF \ n3 i i't , i ; I."J > r"'uf I o '''r'

> -\ ':: * ;::ll.iri i ill {; r} I.; $ : '':' : Irr-i - a

o'1.\

^ ., 1^ !;

i'L

:!volrl-m

lii

]

E ='dt -=Et 99=EflE!$,iFF .F fF[3 63; Eq Bjffi *;s:::i!*= P; F; rd;lgi'lo'r'lqtonzo@-

b

l?t l:,rt!.

i.r larlil]: 1.,li; ItttI'i

i:aJ

-': ,9tr

:.-?it):zldri an:tt-.*

'..isl

r.\

-c \)

r'1 |

o>6mz

@!<f--.{

m

P.

!?o3.{o19l|('

!'n.aC)

cmz9

90or@3zo

!

Lmo-

r!ooor ro

oY'<a*9;<AP

oo5R-cE7o=too@IPo

!)

o

NN

zo90

EA=*,P5z;U'I-{mnomP:rOPF>IDnC,m 'rl

AiZg

6=IOxo5=33

z

zo

ELEVATION (feet)

dno.Tl

t-mo.r1u,onzoa

irl s 5

-N$'.16tl;

'r :l:ill;q*irt;iit;{;aal .

- i ""ti1l;; E-"rllitiEl!i i

,K

c/J (/)(,oqo- o n:Aa: coo* 9 o:-rl

; dt=F aSrqjisii*r[:i8,,I iL:: "qu?,? q l=:J5,;t '3 n A9:;l,i l*"F=1i.,-3=@:r d i'o : i

t-i

s s ,,f'o s s i "

sr'l I'N

r,,rlll:'ll

a * -i-i.r-.q.^n: gee=r g

5 5 $iBs; 1H Aa[--Hea 5-'9*l:: *e*]s" *n"

=X;t4'fi A.s=-

- sy:Fgs3$EiE:E

; rt-=i3ga:riE6f,-'= -^3=!+--*X

:lq4 -i - d;

<93

6

3

tl'1:

E3?=K3dFqlfiid=* ;fr €3# Efi H+": a

o

;

(reol) ttOttvnlrr

Nr -0o>emz

:.

<T''o-l{m

3::=YlQ('

'o 'Tlirdc

mzo

('IDRzo

tvLm

-r!

o- Itr<o*9,6<AP

F=-

oo5R:._F:v,t=ooog

o

!,

o

tN

@

z3r.l>ao

z;atl-{mnofil-:ro9i>utm'l1

^>rrb1o

<trozvaxot=3X

z

=

ELEVATION (feet)II

s|.:.\l\!! -: 1-

'; ,,!" -.l rnr'.-c,;"1,i!,r.- : - | l:L--.os -} .

€)

i; I ^6 r -

rNrlr\lA-v\--]

(--" !-, {

\-"..i -lr:D ..--

r rl r r r r I r r r-r I r-l.t ti, Q, I sJA:

5 5 n',1 r,.1 5 1t3 3 ::l-'1 8ir:-r.i iF ' -rF.';" r' s-l f-

| ! u iiz-icnro=ori>i-i;Eegig:Ei.tilP"b'a?Ei;ri=pa4.r-:-', 1Y: = -ta, I: E6d 1: :

- l -r -r f f r

=E q'd

>5 k =r9.a9qh g t

?6 6A@-> a @

3 33+;g +$ gss; :attoL9ai, i,,i, #:oE

a:5't..-l'\):-; '

t

(, \r :_

Nt^/

??5 EEdEqEFg9? -l= "'r!4(,s:; fr 6"rHgi

o E" "6

-x

u,onzoa

'_\ l-

Q>\-l

I

^- -+z I':l l'-l: ?i ::'.. 1' lr;i,l1l.l:'\ .': >:-.l:. 1 .\>i :\ l

-1 .\ -

Es t i 3 i ts N i i ji:

q?=;3fiXqd I * * 4 q,eaS*edid:'.* Pi4-Pl3d3 i p E e dEaBli5i*.-1,1 i"ii"iaX i 3 6 ; !oAa"o;:=:.{n -+ ;d e: | . '^ a o r;!ce:

='ai(o- 4 qn :^ i 4 = 3 SL==ia;t,'rU 4o e; I i ==4==1i i-

A F ,Kqf q [q e- i ;I I i I i '-l 'a | |

(root) No|Ivn3-lg

t^

\o

U I 3 ' i N i 3 i i:_

r it;E ; ; qF r : iigg$E aE:Eii3?:iE =itli !+"{*iri i

-efi f i

<r!s6emzI

@!<1-"o--{{m

P8e3lslilq(h

r, 'tl66cmz

90ot tDtz

B&A JOB NO.:

DATE:

PAGE: 4 of 10

15-534

05/04/15

INSTALL PERIMETER 4" I.D. MIN.SLOTTED/PERFORATED DRAIN PIPESYSTEM, PROTECTED BY UNIFORMLY

GRADED GRANULAR MEDIA AS BEDDINGAND 6" MIN. THICKNESS TOWARD

BACKFILL SIDES COVERED BY GEOTEXTILE

FILTER FABRIC (FOR COHESIVE/SILTY SOILS),

LEADING TO A SUMP PIT FORBASEMENT/SUBSTRUCTURE CONDITIONS

(E.G., LOADING DOCK) AND FOR ASEASONALLY HIGH GROUND WATERTABLE, IF STATED IN REPORT

G

f _

FINAL GRADE

[NOTE: FOR NARROW BUILDING SPANS, INTERIOR FOOTINGS MAY NOT BE REQUIRED.]

> 1/1 COHESIVE MEDIA> 1.5/1 GRANULAR MEDIA

__

CRUSHER RUN #2 ORSELECT/APPROVEDORDINARY/GENERAL

FILL, COMPACTEDTO 90% MIN. OF

ASTM D1557

IN 12" MAX. LIFTS

INSIDE BUILDING LIMITS

_B > 2 FT.WALLIF ADDEDB

IF ADDEDB_B > 3 FT.

FTG. COLUMN

B

G

NEEDED_B > 2 FT.WALL

VAPOR BARRIER/RETARDER WITH GRANULAR CAPILLARY BREAKABOVE/BELOW BARRIER/RETARDER

SLAB ISOLATION FROM WALLS/COLUMNS/FTGS.

AS DIRECTED BY STRUCTURAL ENGINEER:

BUT 9 0 % MIN.C

FINAL PAVED GRADE

SELECT GRANULAR AGGREGATE

(E.G., NYSDOT #304.12 TYPE 2,

CRUSHER RUN #2 OR EQUAL)BASE, COMPACTED TO 95% MIN. OF

ASTM D1557 MAX. DRY DENSITY

B+D MIN. (TYP.)f

B+D (TYP.)f

5 FT. MIN.

D > 2.5 FT.

INTERIORf _

UNHEATED

STRUCTURES

& ALTERNATIVE

AS RECOMMENDED

D > 4 FT.

(SHOWN)

OR LOCAL

CODE

EXTERIOR

f_

8" MIN. THICK UNDER 4" MIN. THICK SLAB/12" MIN. THICK UNDER 6" MIN. THICK SLAB

SELECT GRANULAR AGGREGATE BASE (E.G., NYSDOT

#304.12 TYPE 2, CRUSHER RUN #2 OR EQUAL)

COMPACTED TO 95% MIN. OF ASTM D1557 MAX. DRY DENSITY

C

GEOTEXTILE STRENGTH & FILTER FABRIC (E.G., MIRAFI 600X OR EQUAL)UNDER LOWER OF GRANULAR BASE OR SUBBASE, IF USED, ON

COHESIVE/SILTY SOIL SUBGRADES

D

STRIP TOPSOIL, ORGANICS & UNSUITABLE/UNAPPROVABLE NATURALSOIL/FILL; GRADE TO LEVEL ELEV.; COMPACT, PROOFROLL & APPROVE

E

F

1

> 1 TO 3

TO STABILIZE

SLOPE

SPREAD/SQ.FTG. SIMILAR

CONTACT SURFACES (TYP.): APPROVED

UNDISTURBED NAT'L. SOIL/BEDROCK

SUBGRADE AT BEARING GRADE[NO OVER EXCAVATION; FOR

MINOR DISTURBANCE OF CONTACTSURFACES UNDER FTG., COMPACTSOIL COMPACTED TO 92% MIN. OF

ASTM D1557 MAX. DRY DENSITY/USECONCRETE TO LEVEL BEDROCK, AS NEEDED].

APPROVABLE FILL CONDITIONS SHALL BE

AS RECOMMENDED IN REPORT OR AS DIRECTED

IN THE FIELD BY GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER/AUTHORIZED BY CLIENT B

MATCH FTG. DEPTH OF LATERAL ADDITION

WHERE IT ABUTS EXISTING STRUCTURE FTG.

FOR FTGS. ON BEDROCK, SEE

GENERAL NOTES PAGE

FTG. AT RECOMMENDED MIN. DEPTH BELOWEXISTING GRADE, UNLESS EXISTING SOIL/FILLWITHIN THIS DEPTH RANGE IS RECOMMENDED

TO BE PROPERLY DRIED, BLENDED, COMPACTEDTO 95% MIN. OF ASTM D1557 MAX. DRY DENSITY

AND APPROVED

AS

IMPERVIOUS/

SEMI-IMPERVIOUSCAP/BARRIER

BENEATH TOPSOIL

SLOPE (H/V) TEMPORARY

WALL/STRIP/CONTINUOUS

FTG. IS SIMILAR

TYPICAL SCHEMATICS OF RECOMMENDED SHALLOW WALL AND COLUMN FOOTINGS ON NATURAL CONDITIONS AND SLAB SYSTEMS

IFBADDED

D > 2 FT.

ALL BASEMENT

EXT. & INT. &BELOW FROST DEPTH

BC

FROSTDEPTH

NOT TO SCALE

B

B

C C C C

4" MIN. THICK SLAB IN OFFICE/LIGHTLY LOADED AREAS6" MIN. THICK SLAB IN DOCK/WAREHOUSE/HEAVILY LOADED AREAS

D ASRECOMMENDED

(TYP.)

E , F BUT 90%

MIN. COMPACTION

GRANULAR AGGREGATE SUBBASE, IF RECOMMENDED IN REPORT,

COMPACTED TO 92 % MIN. OF ASTM D1557 MAX. DRY DENSITY/ , IF ADDED

AS NEEDED, UNDERCUT & BACKFILL , EXCEPT COMPACT TO 95 %

MIN. OF ASTM D1557 MAX. DRY DENSITY BELOW FTG. BEARING GRADE

THIN LIFTS OF SELECT/APPROVED ORDINARY/GENERAL FILL COMPACTED TO 92 % MIN. OF ASTM D1557

MAX. DRY DENSITY IN 12" MAX. LIFTS ABOVE FTG. BEARING GRADE & FOUNDATION BACKFILL AREA/ZONE

B

B

FAX (716)759-7823(716)759-7821

FAX (716)759-7823(716)759-7821

Z:\Reports\Seismic and Engineering Sheets\99eng-4 (version1.2) Created By: Carmen M. Panuccio (Feb. 2009)

B&A JOB NO.:

DATE:

PAGE: 5 of 10

15-534

05/04/15

f _

FINAL GRADE

[NOTE: FOR NARROW BUILDING SPANS, INTERIOR FOOTINGS MAY NOT BE REQUIRED.]

> 1/1 COHESIVE MEDIA> 1.5/1 GRANULAR MEDIA

__

INSIDE BUILDING LIMITS

_B > 2 FT.WALLIF ADDEDB

IF ADDEDB_B > 3 FT.

FTG. COLUMN

B

G

NEEDED_B > 2 FT.WALL

VAPOR BARRIER/RETARDER WITH GRANULAR CAPILLARY BREAK

ABOVE/BELOW BARRIER/RETARDER

SLAB ISOLATION FROM WALLS/COLUMNS/FTGS.

AS DIRECTED BY STRUCTURAL ENGINEER:

BUT 9 0 % MIN.C

FINAL PAVED GRADE

B+Z MIN.

(TYP.)

D > 2.5 FT.

INTERIORf

_

D > 4 FT.

(SHOWN)

OR LOCAL

CODE

EXTERIOR

f_

1

> 1 TO 3

TO STABILIZE

SLOPE

SPREAD/SQ.FTG. SIMILAR

CONTACT SURFACES (TYP.): APPROVED

UNDISTURBED NAT'L. SOIL/BEDROCK

SUBGRADE AT BEARING GRADE

[NO OVER EXCAVATION; FOR

MINOR DISTURBANCE OF CONTACTSURFACES UNDER FTG., COMPACT

SOIL COMPACTED TO 92% MIN. OF

ASTM D1557 MAX. DRY DENSITY/USE

CONCRETE TO LEVEL BEDROCK, AS NEEDED].

APPROVABLE FILL CONDITIONS SHALL BEAS RECOMMENDED IN REPORT OR AS DIRECTED

IN THE FIELD BY GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER/

AUTHORIZED BY CLIENT

AS

IMPERVIOUS/

SEMI-IMPERVIOUSCAP/BARRIER

BENEATH TOPSOIL

SLOPE (H/V) TEMPORARY

WALL/STRIP/

CONTINUOUS

FTG. IS SIMILAR

TYPICAL SCHEMATICS OF RECOMMENDED SHALLOW WALL AND COLUMN FOOTINGS ON APPROVED FILL MEDIA AND SLAB SYSTEMS

IFBADDED

NOT TO SCALE

D > 2 FT.

ALL BASEMENT

EXT. & INT. &

BELOW FROST DEPTHBC

A1

2TYP.

AA

B+Z MIN.

(TYP.)

H

CRUSHER RUN #2 OR

SELECT APPROVEDORDINARY/GENERAL

FILL, COMPACTED

TO 90% MIN. OF

ASTM D1557

IN 12" MAX. LIFTS

INSTALL PERIMETER 4" I.D. MIN.SLOTTED/PERFORATED DRAIN PIPE

SYSTEM, PROTECTED BY UNIFORMLY

GRADED GRANULAR MEDIA AS BEDDING

AND 6" MIN. THICKNESS TOWARDBACKFILL SIDES COVERED BY GEOTEXTILE

FILTER FABRIC (FOR COHESIVE/SILTY SOILS),LEADING TO A SUMP PIT FOR

BASEMENT/SUBSTRUCTURE CONDITIONS

(E.G., LOADING DOCK) AND FOR A

SEASONALLY HIGH GROUND WATERTABLE, IF STATED IN REPORT

G8" MIN. THICK UNDER 4" MIN. THICK SLAB/

12" MIN. THICK UNDER 6" MIN. THICK SLAB

SELECT GRANULAR AGGREGATE BASE (E.G., NYSDOT

#304.12 TYPE 2, CRUSHER RUN #2 OR EQUAL)

COMPACTED TO 95% MIN. OF ASTM D1557 MAX. DRY DENSITY

GRANULAR AGGREGATE SUBBASE, IF RECOMMENDED IN REPORT,

COMPACTED TO 92 % MIN. OF ASTM D1557 MAX. DRY DENSITY/ , IF ADDED

C

GEOTEXTILE STRENGTH & FILTER FABRIC (E.G., MIRAFI 600X OR EQUAL)

UNDER LOWER OF GRANULAR BASE OR SUBBASE, IF USED, ON

COHESIVE/SILTY SOIL SUBGRADES

D

STRIP TOPSOIL, ORGANICS & UNSUITABLE/UNAPPROVABLE NATURAL

SOIL/FILL; GRADE TO LEVEL ELEV.; COMPACT, PROOFROLL & APPROVE

E

AS NEEDED, UNDERCUT & BACKFILL , EXCEPT COMPACT TO 95 %

MIN. OF ASTM D1557 MAX. DRY DENSITY BELOW FTG. BEARING GRADE

F

THIN LIFTS OF SELECT/APPROVED ORDINARY/GENERAL FILL COMPACTED TO 92 % MIN. OF ASTM D1557

MAX. DRY DENSITY IN 12" MAX. LIFTS ABOVE FTG. BEARING GRADE & FOUNDATION BACKFILL AREA/ZONE

B

SELECT GRANULAR AGGREGATE

(E.G., NYSDOT #304.12 TYPE 2,

CRUSHER RUN #2 OR EQUAL)

BASE, COMPACTED TO 95% MIN. OF

ASTM D1557 MAX. DRY DENSITY

UNHEATED

STRUCTURES

& ALTERNATIVE

AS RECOMMENDED

Z Z

ZH

H NO GEOTEXTILE

STRENGTH & FILTER

FABRIC (E.G., MIRAFI

600X OR EQUAL) (TYP.)

SELECT/APPROVED GRANULAR AGGREGATE (E.G., NYSDOT #304.12 TYPE 2, CRUSHER RUN # 2 OR EQUAL)COMPACTED TO 95 % MIN. OF ASTM D1557 MAX. DRY DENSITY IN 12 IN. MAX LIFTS, OR ALTERNATIVELY, AS

RECOMMENDED IN REPORT, CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM) WITH VERIFIED 200 PSI MIN.

28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH THAT IS POURED IN MAX. 3 FT. SET LIFTS, OR LEAN CONCRETE WITH

VERIFIED 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 1,000 PSI MIN. ON SOIL OR EQUAL/BETTER THAN FOOTING

CONCRETE STRENGTH ON BEDROCK

A

B+Z MIN.

(TYP.)

FROST

DEPTH

MATCH FTG. DEPTH OF LATERAL ADDITION

WHERE IT ABUTS EXISTING STRUCTURE FTG.

FOR FTGS. ON BEDROCK, SEEGENERAL NOTES PAGE

FTG. AT RECOMMENDED MIN. DEPTH BELOW

EXISTING GRADE, UNLESS EXISTING SOIL/FILL

WITHIN THIS DEPTH RANGE IS RECOMMENDEDTO BE PROPERLY DRIED, BLENDED, COMPACTED

TO 95% MIN. OF ASTM D1557 MAX. DRY DENSITY

AND APPROVED

Z IS MIN. DEPTH: AS RECOMMENDED IN THE

REPORT, EXCAVATE/UNDERCUT TO APPROVEDNATURAL SOIL/BEDROCK UNLESS APPROVABLE

STATES ARE ENCOUNTERED, DOCUMENTED &

CONFIRMED AT SHALLOWER DEPTHS; TO BACKFILL

TO GRADE OF OPENINGS/CAVITIES/BASEMENT

AREAS; TO RAISE GRADES; OR IN UNACCEPTABLECONDITIONS UP TO THE GREATER DEPTH OF 4 FT.

OR FOOTING WIDTH (B) BELOW FTG. TO AN

APPROVABLE STATE

B

B

B

C C C C

B

4" MIN. THICK SLAB IN OFFICE/LIGHTLY LOADED AREAS

6" MIN. THICK SLAB IN DOCK/WAREHOUSE/HEAVILY LOADED AREAS

D ASRECOMMENDED

(TYP.)

E , F BUT 90%

MIN. COMPACTION

FAX (716)759-7823(716)759-7821


B&A JOB NO.:

DATE:

PAGE: 6 of 10

-

-

-

-

-

-

- Theoretical net allowable bearing capacity for non-plastic granular soils/fills with a F.S. = 3 and three examples below.

- For B = 2 ft. ext. wall footing, Df = Dw = 4.0 ft., and (N1) 60 = 30: q allow NP = 7,127 psf

- For B = 3 ft. ext. wall footing, Df = Dw = 4.0 ft., and (N1) 60 = 30: q allow NP = 7,607 psf

- For B = 6 ft. int. sq. footing, Df = 2.5 ft., Dw = 4.5 ft., and (N1) 60 = 30: q allow NP = 6,922 psf

TABLE: Net allowable soil pressure (q allow 1") based on 1 inch total settlement in granular soil (P,H&T, pg. 309).

- Footing groundwater correction factor: Cw = 0.5 + 0.5 { Dw / ( Df + B )}

- q allow 1” = C w x [Value from Appropriate Df / B Chart below using Chart N = (N1) 60] x 2,000 lb./ 1 ton

Non- Df ext./ Df int. (feet) min. = 1.5 / 2.0 3.0 / 2.5 3.5 / 2.5 4.0 / 2.5 5.0 / 2.5

Winter Dw ext./ Dw int. (feet) = 1.5 / 2.0 3.0 / 3.5 3.5 / 4.0 4.0 / 4.5 5.0 / 5.5

Condition (N1) 60 = 30 30 30 40 50 30 40 50 30

γm (pcf) = 125 125 125 130 135 125 130 135 125

Nγ / Nq = 46 / 38 46 / 38 46 / 38 76 / 54 122 / 73 46 / 38 76 / 54 122 / 73 46 / 38B exterior = 2 feet Cw = 0.714 0.800 0.818 0.833 0.857

q allow 1" (psf) = 2,713 4,480 4,581 6,380 8,834 4,665 6,664 8,996 4,803

3 feet Cw = 0.667 0.750 0.769 0.785 0.812

q allow 1" (psf) = 3,735 4,800 4,922 6,613 8,305 5,024 6,751 8,478 5,197

6 feet Cw = 0.600 0.666 0.684 0.700 0.727

q allow 1" (psf) = 3,840 4,267 4,378 5,882 7,387 4,480 6,020 7,560 4,653

B interior = 6 feet Cw = 0.625 0.706 0.735 0.765 0.823q allow 1" (psf) = 4,000 4,518 4,704 6,321 7,938 4,896 6,579 8,262 5,267

For an unheated building during winter, interior footings are to be at same depth/elevation as exterior footings.

(Df = depth of footing below final grade (fg) / ff : Dw = depth of water below fg / ff ; α = 0.5 for wall ftgs.; = 0.4 for sq. ftgs.)

At bottom of the excavation, thoroughly compact and approve natural soils and fills to ensure compaction of the subgrade prior

to the subsequent placement and compaction of the select/approved granular fill that is beneath the footing.

Assume the compacted granular layer thickness is two times min. of the footing width (B) for computational purposes.

NET ALLOWABLE BEARING CAPACITY FOR CONCENTRICALLY LOADED WALL AND SQUARE FOOTINGS ON COMPACTED

SELECT/APPROVED GRANULAR FILL WITH DESIGN GROUNDWATER LEVEL AT EXTERIOR FOOTING BEARING GRADE

All footings for the same building/structure should be designed to nearly the same design contact pressure.

Shallow footing conditions (Peck, Hanson & Thornburn, page 311).

Final grade assumed to be 0.5 feet below finished floor elevation ( ff ).

q allow NP = {({[γm - 62.4 pcf] x { B + Df - Dw] + [ γm ] x {Dw - Df]} / B x α x Nγ ) + ( γm x { Nq - 1 } x D f / B )} x B / F.S.

15-534

05/04/15

Assume footing thickness = 1.0 foot min.

q a l l 1 ” f o r S h a llo w Fo o t in g s o n S a n d

D f / B = 1 . 0 ( P, H , & T , p g . 3 0 9 )

0 1 2 3 4

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

N = 5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 5

1 0

5

SO

IL P

RE

SS

UR

E,

q a

ll 1

” ,

(to

ns /

sq

. ft

.)

W ID T H O F FO O T IN G , B (f t . )

q a l l 1 ” f o r S h a l lo w Fo o t in g s o n S a n d

D f / B = 0 . 5 ( P, H , & T , p g . 3 0 9 )

0 1 2 3 4

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

N = 5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 5

1 0

5

SO

IL P

RE

SS

UR

E,

q a

ll 1

” , (

tons /

sq

. ft

.)

W ID T H O F FO O T IN G , B ( f t . )

q all 1” for Shallow Footings on Sand

Df / B = 0.25 ( P,H,&T, pg. 309)

0 1 2 3 4 5

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

N = 50

40

30

20

15

10

5

SO

IL P

RE

SS

UR

E,

q a

ll 1

” ,

(to

ns

/ sq

. ft

.)

WIDTH OF FOOTING, B (ft.)

FAX (716)759-7823(716)759-7821


B&A JOB NO.:

DATE:

PAGE: 7 of 10

a)

b)

c)

d)

e)

f)

g)

h)

i)

*

*

*

j)

k)

l)

*

*

*

-

-

-

-

m)

n)

o)

p)

q)

15-534

05/04/15

During winter construction, foundations are to be protected from freezing during the curing period and, thereafter, properly

backfilled to the required compaction specifications, as specified by the architect/design engineer.

In the event that any shallow drilled piers, tanks, foundation walls, strip or spread footings, and/or concrete slabs-on-grade from

any existing, former or previously unknown on-site structures are encountered during excavation, the following demolition

conditions will apply, unless indicated otherwise in the schematics of the foundation system:

Water must not be allowed to accumulate or pond in foundation trench bottom. Adequate drainage is to be provided.

Bottom of exterior foundations are to bear at a minimum depth below the final exterior grade that is greater than the frost depth as

defined by local or State building codes.

Bottom of foundation trench excavation is to be inspected by experienced geotechnical personnel and, especially, prior to any

placement and compaction of crusher run stone, select granular fill, approved general granular fill, or other approved fill.

GENERAL NOTES

All areas of the foundation trench bottom which are concluded to be unacceptable must be over excavated from the bottom of

footing/foundation elevation or, if recommended, from the bottom of the minimum depth of the undercut for the compacted select

granular fill layer, upon which the bottom of footing/foundation will bear, to the top of the approved fill or natural soil, for less than

a four foot depth or the footing width (whichever is greater), and backfilled with approved compacted granular fill.

Over-excavated/undercut areas must extend laterally beyond each vertically projected edge of the foundation by a minimum

distance that is equal to one-half the total depth of the undercut or equating to a slope of two vertical to one horizontal. Side

slopes of the trench excavation should be one on one (vertical to horizontal distance) or flatter in cohesive soils or one on one

and one-half or flatter in the granular materials, as required by OSHA.

Where recommended, a geotextile strength and filter fabric will line the bottom and side slopes, up to the foundation bearing

elevation at a minimum, of the excavation/undercut. Overlap unsewn seams as per the manufacturer's recommendations.

All foundations shall bear on approved dense/very stiff natural soil/weathered rock, if supported by the calculations, or thoroughly

compacted select/approved granular fill, with a minimum thickness as determined by the calculations [see c) also], unless very

stiff-hard/dense-very dense natural soil/fill/rock conditions are encountered and approved at a shallower depth.

Any slag, cinder and/or ash fill shall be verified to have very low potential for expansion and/or corrosion characteristics, where

applicable for direct or potential (via leachate) contact with foundation elements and buried utilities or as directed by the design

engineer/architect.

In the event that boulders and/or bedrock are encountered during excavation, the following conditions will apply:

removal down to three feet below final grade in the parking lot & driveways, {unless the slab-on-grade is in structurally sound

condition & is approved for use as a part of the pavement system}, (Note that complete removal is optional.) and

complete removal in and near the proposed building/structure foundation area (except if the foundations and slab-on-grade are

to be tied into any existing buildings/structures which are to remain),

removal down to three feet below final grade in green/grassed areas. (Note: complete removal is optional.)

If tree, shrub, or other vegetative root systems or organic deposits are encountered, the removal conditions in h) above apply.

To the extent practical, the entire site is to be proof rolled and stabilized, as needed, prior to placement of base/subbase stone

layer beneath the floor slab and asphalt/concrete paved areas.

apparent top of bedrock and/or boulders that are one-half or greater of the min. footing width will not be located within a depth

equal to the footing width, at a min., from the bottom of the footing.

remove any suspected subsurface boulder and/or bedrock obstructions, that meet the preceding depth criteria.

as/if indicated/directed by engineer in schematics of the foundation system:

At the locations of the demolished structures in i), vegetative/organic deposits in j), slag, cinder and/or ash fil in k) or bedrock

and/or boulders in l) above, place and compact the select/approved fill, if needed, to the elevation of the bottom of the pavement

base/subbase stone layer or as required in c) above for the proposed building/structure foundation.

subgrade is to be adequately probed/tested, at spaced intervals, along the footing line or building/tank/other structure pad in

order to confirm the absence of boulders and/or bedrock within these depths.

apparent top of bedrock and/or boulders that are two feet or greater in size/max. dimension will not be located within a depth

of four feet, at a min., from the bottom of the building/tank/other structure pad.

remove boulders that are one-quarter (1/3 in drumlins) or greater of the min. footing width, at the exposed footing subgrade.

remove boulders that are one foot or greater in size/max. dimension, at the exposed pad subgrade.

The top and/or walls/sides of shallow depth subsurface structures (such as, basement, tank, vault, basin, pool, pipe, culvert,

conduit, etc.), which would contain voids at times, or a trench/excavation, or retaining structure, is considered to be subject to

loads from a shallow foundation, if it is within a horizontal distance of two times the narrowest dimension/width of the foundation,

and must be properly evaluated and designed.

Geotextile strength and filter fabric is recommended beneath the base/subbase layer and atop the subgrade under the

building/structure floor slab and in the heavily traveled asphalt paved areas at a minimum, if cohesive/silty/non-plastic fine sandy

soils/fills & during wet weather/seasons.

Cohesive natural soils/fills will be pre-approved by geotechnical engineer prior to any on-site use in load bearing areas.

FAX (716)759-7823(716)759-7821


B&A JOB NO.:

DATE:

PAGE: 8 of 10

a)

b)

a)

b)

c)

d)

e)

f)

For the upper cohesive fills/natural soils and lower natural cohesive soil layers that exist, the N values of these layers indicate a

slightly to highly overconsolidated state or effective preconsolidation pressure (p'c). [Also refer to ASCE/USACE No. 9, Design

Guide "Settlement Analysis," pg. 5 for p'c estimation.]

If bearing capacity differences exist for approved natural soils/fills at the building center/core and the wings, add control joints, at

a min., between the building center/core and the start of each building wing.

For foundations on the potentially high bedrock condition, limit total settlement and differential settlement < 3/4 inch.

The deeper hard glacial till and bedrock layers are assumed to be incompressible relative to applied loads. Unless stated or

calculated otherwise, consolidation settlement of the underlying cohesive fill and natural soil layers are also not considered to be

a concern for the foundation loads, due to the slightly to highly over-consolidated state of these fills/natural soils. Based upon the

allowable load per footing width, total and differential settlements are expected to be within acceptable limits and are generally not

likely to exceed 1.0 and 0.5 to 0.75 inches, respectively (per P,H&T, page 309), if all compacted granular fills and/or natural

cohesive soils (per P,H&T, page 273).

If a compacted select/approved granular fill layer is placed in an undercut area (under wall footings and/or interior footings), the

settlement occurs immediately and is proportioned by the thickness of the layer (if < 2 x B for wall footings and if < B for

square/rectangular footings) and the q allow 1” of settlement. The magnitude of this settlement is generally less than 0.5 inch.

The approved granular (non-plastic silt, silty sand and sandy gravel) natural soils/fills that exist on-site and are beneath a

recommended undercut depth, where applicable, below the footings should be properly compacted and inspected prior to

placement and compaction of the select/approved granular fill and the footing construction. Most of the settlement will occur

immediately and the magnitude of the settlement, which is evaluated in concert with the soil conditions in a) above, is estimated

to be less than approximately 1.0 inch.

The approved cohesive natural soils/fills that exist on-site and are beneath the undercut depth, where applicable, below the

footings should be properly compacted, as needed, and inspected prior to placement and compaction of the select/approved

granular fill and footing construction. The magnitude of settlement is evaluated in concert with the conditions in d) below.

FOOTING SETTLEMENT

In order to bear at the min. frost depth, some rock excavation may be required. Alternatively, for footings that bear atop an

approved limestone, dolomite or hard shale rock that is less than the frost depth, hooked #4 or #5 rebars/dowels may be grouted

to a 48 inch min. depth into approved rock at a four foot center to center spacing or within each massive block of fractured rock.

The structural requirements for the rebars/dowels shall be as specified by the design engineer.

15-534

The net allowable bearing capacity is generally = 10,000 psf, if used for all building foundations. However, differential settlement

is a concern for footings of the same building that bear on media (i.e., soil and rock) with different strength-settlement properties.

The net allowable bearing capacity of the weaker strata will generally need to be reduced to limit the allowable differential

settlement.

GENERAL NOTES: FOOTINGS ON TOP OF APPROVED SLIGHTLY WEATHERED/SOUND/COMPETENT BEDROCK

05/04/15FAX (716)759-7823

(716)759-7821


B&A JOB NO.:

DATE:

PAGE: 9 of 10

a)

b)

c)

d)

e)

f)

* equivalent N-value in a dense state: (N1)60 = 40 blows/foot

* friction angle: φ ' = 38 degrees {Teng, pg. 12}

* average in-place densities: moist - γm = 120 pcf

saturated - γsat = 132 pcf submerged - γ ' = ( γsat - γw ) = 70 pcf

g)

fs =

h)

* at rest pressure coefficient - K 0 = 1 - sin (φ ' ) = 0.38

* effective lateral pressure of soil - γ 'l = Ko x γ ' = 26.6 pcf

* hydrostatic pressure - γw = 62.4 pcf

* equivalent fluid pressure with water level - γeo = γ 'l + γw = 89 pcf (say 90 pcf)

at the top of the grade at the wall

* equivalent fluid pressure with compaction γeo = 2 x Ko x γm = 91 pcf (say 90 pcf)

induced lateral stress increase (W&F, pg 409)

* active pressure case - K a = [1 - sin ( φ ' ) ] / [ 1 + sin ( φ ' ) ] = 0.24

γea = K a x γm = 29 pcf (say 30 pcf)

* passive pressure case - K p = [1 + sin ( φ ' ) ] / [ 1 - sin ( φ ' )] = 4.2

γep = K p x γm = 504 pcf ( say 330 pcf with a F.S. = 1.5)

Thoroughly Compacted ⇒⇒ Uniformly Graded & Clean Non-Plastic Silty Sand

Coarse Sand or Sandy Gravel Fill or Sandy Silt Fill

USE: Earth Pressure Coefficient Static Active = 0.33

Static At-Rest = 1.00

Static Passive = 2.00 (with F.S. = 1.5)

Static Passive = 3.00 (with F.S. = 1.0)

USE: Equivalent Fluid Pressure Static Active = 30 pcf

Static At-Rest = 90 pcf (for rigid walls)

Static Passive = 330 pcf (with F.S. = 1.5) [ 500 pcf with (with F.S. = 1.0)]

USE: Simplified Model for Earthquake Lateral Load/Ft. Wall Length Hbw = Earth Height Behind Wall (feet)

@ 0.6 Hbw above base. Loads for Non-Yielding Wall.

Reduce load by 33% for Yielding Wall (active case) = ( 6.8 psf / foot) x Hbw 2 (NYS, Sds = 0.25 g)

( γ m = 120 pcf for S ds value. Add to Static At Rest/ = (13.5 psf / foot) x Hbw 2 (NYS, Sds = 0.50 g)

Active Pressure/Load for unsaturated backfill case ) = (17.5 psf / foot) x Hbw 2 (NEern NYS, Sds ≤ 0.65 g)

[Above for Site Class C to E soils. Interpolate for other Sds values.

Use 1.75 x values for walls on Class B/A rock or on rigid foundation base. (FEMA NEHRP Guidelines)]

Saturated/Liquified Soil During Earthquake = 132 pcf

(Equivalent Fluid Pressure. Add to inertial hydrodynamic pressure, not presented here.)

{For looser/denser backfills, adjust above pressures by the ratio = new density / 120 pcf or / 132 pcf (for saturated case)}

USE: Coefficient of Friction Against Sliding ( fs ) = 0.45 (on compacted NYSDOT Item #304.12 or #304.14 gravels)

(use lowest fs with no underlying weaker layers) = 0.35 (on compacted granular soil & non-plastic silt)

= 0.20 (slab-on-grade on polyethylene on granular fill)

[with a F.S. = 1.0] = 0.60/0.50 (on clean, rough, & sound bedrock/smooth bedrock)

Min. Factor of Safety Against Sliding = 1.5 [Rev.9-30-09]

15-534

05/04/15

Use equivalent fluid pressure design approach {Hough, pg. 249 and NAVFAC pg. 7-10-9}:

0.24

Waterproof earth side of wall, as is customarily provided in practice.

Drainage pipes are connected to an appropriately designed collector pipe, conveyance, and/or sump pump system as is applicable for

the intended purpose of the wall and as customarily provided/installed in practice.

For potential groundwater table conditions above the top of the basement slab-on-grade condition, install continuous waterstops (with no

joints in stop) at wall and floor construction joints, as is customarily provided in practice. Interior intermediate drainage pipes beneath

the slab, that are spaced on-center and in both directions, do appear to be needed.

Assume a uniformly graded, clean coarse sand or sandy gravel backfills:

Assume at base of wall/footing, coefficient of friction against sliding (fs ) at base of wall (Refer to Teng, pg. 320-1):

LATERAL EARTH PRESSURE ON GENERIC BLOCK FOUNDATIONS FOR SIGNS, FREE-STANDING RETAINING WALLS, OR

BELOW GRADE/BASEMENT/TANK/POOL RETAINING WALLS (Less Than 20 Feet High)

0.76

2.80

4.20

[For earthquakes, structural engineer may elect to use the above Static Passive case instead of the below

Earthquake Lateral Load for Non-Yielding Wall movement into the soil backfill.]

Where recommended, a geotextile filter fabric will protect the gravel filter media from the earth backfill. Overlap unsewn seams as per

the manufacturer's recommendations.

Porous filter media, in contact with the basement/below grade foundation wall or retaining walls, protects and is in contact with a

minimum 4 inch diameter perforated drainage pipes at the footing/base of the foundation/structural wall (exterior backfill side and interior

basement side) and/or weep pipes through the wall, as needed and as applicable.

tan ( 0.58 x φ ' ) = 0.40 (AREA silty soil to silty coarse-grained soil)

FAX (716)759-7823(716)759-7821


DATA INPUT BY: Carmen M. Panuccio 10 of 10

B&A JOB NO.: 15-534

CLIENT: Prima Terra Properties, LLC

PROJECT: Proposed 5-Story Hampton Inn Hotel & Suites

1305 Buckley Road (County Route 48)

Town of Salina, Onondaga County, New York

BUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE © - 2010: USGS 2008 ACCELERATIONS at 2% IN 50 YEARS CALCULATED BY LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE

Site Latitude (○) = Seismic Site Class = C

↑

Site Longitude (○) = Building/Structure with Shallow Foundation

Ss = 0.2 sec acceleration value for Class B (in g's) S1 = 1.0 sec acceleration value for Class B (in g's)

Acceleration Values Below are Ss Acceleration Values Below are S1

LONG. = -76.2000 -76.1722 -76.1500 LONG. = -76.2000 -76.1722 -76.1500

LAT. = LAT. =

43.0500 0.14031 0.14106 43.0500 0.05298 0.05321

+43.0951 0.14157 0.14203 0.14240 +43.0951 0.05332 0.05345 0.05356

43.1000 0.14171 0.14255 43.1000 0.05335 0.05360

Only residential buildings in Town of Amherst, Erie Co., N.Y.

SEISMIC SITE CLASS Sds = 0.114 g Seismic Design Category = A

Fa Sds = 0.6667 * Fa * Ss Fv Sd1 = 0.6667 * Fv * S1

A 0.8000 0.0758 g 0.8000 0.0285 g

B 1.0000 0.0947 g 1.0000 0.0356 g

C 1.2000 0.1136 g 1.7000 0.0606 g <<------- USE THESE VALUES FOR SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS

D 1.6000 0.1515 g 2.4000 0.0855 g

E 2.5000 0.2367 g 3.5000 0.1247 g

F 2.5000 0.2367 g 3.5000 0.1247 g

NOTE: Fa and Fv values are linearly interpolated, for the above Ss and Ss values, respectively, within the appropriate range of the mapped spectral response accelerations.

(Gridded data at 0.05 degree increments from: http://earthquake.usgs.gov/research/hazmaps/products_data/2008/data/)

-76.1722

+43.0951

Site Coefficient and Design Spectral Response Acceleration Values

0.2 Second 1.0 Second

FAX (716)759-7823(716)759-7821

Z:\Reports\Seismic and Engineering Sheets\USGS 2008 Seismic g's (Job version 1.0) Created By: Carmen M. Panuccio



( 7 1 6 ) 7 5 9 - 7 8 2 1 F A X ( 7 1 6 ) 7 5 9 - 7 8 2 3




APPENDIX F

GENERAL EARTHWORK SPECIFICATION

EW_Bend1 10/26/2001 1

Barron & Associates, P.C. GENERAL EARTHWORK SPECIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SITE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 1.1.1 Overview

This specification is included as a courtesy to the clients of Barron & Associates, P.C, and addresses earthwork site preparation. Additions and modifications are necessary to create a job-specific specification. This specification may serve as a basis for the development for a technical specification under Division 2, Site Work.

1.1.2 Site Conditions

The site-specific conditions are described under separate cover or may be available from the OWNER. 1.1.3 Subsurface Conditions

The site-specific subsurface conditions are described under separate cover or may be available from the OWNER.

1.2 REFERENCES

American Standard for Testing and Measurement (ASTM):

ASTM C136 Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM C2922 Density for Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods

ASTM D422 Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils

ASTM D1140 Amount of Material in Soils Finer Than the No. 200 Sieve

ASTM D1557 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lb/ft3)

ASTM D2216 Test Method for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock

ASTM D2487 1990 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes

ASTM D4318 Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils.

1.3 DEFINITIONS 1.3.1 Unacceptable Material

Soil material containing debris, wood, scrap material, vegetation, refuse, soft unsound particles, and other organic, frozen, deleterious, or objectionable materials. Contaminated soils shall be properly documented and removed or remediated on site. If necessary, remediation procedure will be defined by the OWNER.

1.3.2 Unsuitable Material

Brown, organic topsoil and underlying soft pockets of organic silt or wet, reworked silty clay. 1.3.3 Ordinary Fill

Friable soil containing no stone greater than two-thirds loose lift thickness and no unacceptable or unsuitable materials. In general, existing random fill is expected to be acceptable for reuse as ordinary fill given proper sorting, blending, drying, and controlled placement methods.

EW_Bend1 10/26/2001 2

Barron & Associates, P.C.

GENERAL EARTHWORK SPECIFICATION

1.3.4 Granular Fill

Ordinary fill meeting the designation of ASTM D2487 classification of GW with a maximum of 10 percent by weight passing ASTM D1140, No. 200 sieve.

1.3.5 Select Granular Fill

Clean, uncoated soil which contains no unacceptable materials and conforms to the gradation requirements defined in Table A: Select Granular Fill.

Table A: Select Granular Fill Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight

2/3 of the loose lift thickness 100

No. 10 30 - 95

No. 40 10 - 70

No. 200 0 - 15

1.3.6 Sand and Gravel

Clean, hard, durable, uncoated particle of sand and gravel, free from lumps of clay, containing no unacceptable matter, and conforming to gradation requirements of Table B : Sand and Gravel

Table B: Sand and Gravel

Sieve Percent Finer by Weight

* 100

No. 4 50 - 85

No. 10 --

No. 40 10 - 35

No. 100 --

No. 200 0 - 8 * Job-Specific. To be determined by the ENGINEER

1.3.7 Crushed Stone

Clean, durable, sharp-angled fragments of rock or crushed gravel stone of uniform quality, containing no unacceptable matter, free from coatings, and conforming to gradation requirements of Table C: Crushed Stone

Table C: Crushed Stone

Percent Passing

Sieve Size ¾-inch Stone 1 ¼-inch Stone

1 ½-inch __ 100

1 ¼-inch __ 85-100

1- inch 100 __

¾-inch 90-100 10-40

5/8-inch __ __

½-inch 10-50 0-8

3/8-inch 0-20 __

#4 0-5 __

EW_Bend1 10/26/2001 3

Barron & Associates, P.C.

GENERAL EARTHWORK SPECIFICATION 1.3.8 Flowable Fill

Also known as Controlled Low Strength Material – Controlled Density Fill (CLSM-CDF), this material is available under a variety of producer names (e.g., K-Krete©, M-Crete, Flash Fill©, Flowable Mortar, Unshrinkable Fill, etc.). This non-settling backfill mixture is most commonly used for its flowable characteristics, its support strength under traffic loads, and its removability at a later date. The material may be produced on-site or off-site. In either case, the producer of such materials and the product must meet certain certification criteria. Such information is beyond the scope of this specification and will be considered on a site-specific basis. Flowable fill may be acceptable for use as a backfill for utility trenches of other low-lying areas which require a compacted granular fill. Its use and warranty of performance is left to the CONTRACTOR in such applications. The use of flowable fill under load-bearing structural components in place of properly placed and compacted granular fill is NOT common and is questionable. The localized use of such material may have profound affects on the performance of a foundation system. Site-specific conditions and the extent of anticipated use of flowable fill must be examined by geotechnical engineer. Cost of such consultation shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR unless specifically directed by the OWNER to seek such consultation. Without such consultation, warranty of performance for such use is left to the CONTRACTOR.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

The following submittals shall be provided in accordance with approved submittals procedures. 1. Fill Source: Provide name and source locations of fill material. 2. Field Test Reports: Field tests will be performed by OWNER’s Representative as needed.

CONTRACTOR may be required to perform such tests on proposed off-site fill materials. a. Fill material grain size analyses per ASTM C136, D422, D1140, D2487 b. Moisture/Density test results per ASTM D2216 c. Liquid limit, plastic limit, and plasticity index per ASTM D4318 d. Compaction/Density test results per ASTM C2922 and D1557

3. Sample: Geotextile fabric

PART 2 PRODUCTS Geotextile Fabric: Mirafi 600X or equal. (Also referred to as synthetic fabric). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION 3.1.1 General

Manner of excavation shall minimize disturbance of underlying natural ground. If deemed necessary by the Engineer, alter construction procedures to reduce subgrade disturbance. Excavate areas which have been excessively disturbed to firm ground and backfill with properly compacted granular fill.

3.1.2 Roads and Walks

Keep roads and walks free of dirt and debris at all times.

EW_Bend1 10/26/2001 4


3.1.3 Trees, Shrubs, and Existing Facilities

Protect from any damage all vegetation and facilities identified to remain. 3.1.4 Utility Lines

Locate all utilities within the area of disturbance prior to the start of work. Show locations on initial plans. Protect utility lines from damage. Notify the ENGINEER immediately of damage to or an encounter with an unknown utility. Damage to utility lines are to be repaired by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost. The CONTRACTOR shall have underground utility owners stake out utility locations prior to the start of clearing and excavation operations.

3.2 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS/PROOF-ROLLING

Prior to placement of the initial layer of fill over the natural ground, proof-roll the exposed natural ground above the groundwater table elevation by making two passes with a fully-loaded ten-wheel truck. Excavate unstable areas detected by this process and replace with compacted granular fill.

3.3 PREPARATION 3.3.1 Surface Preparation

Within the site limits indicated on the drawings, excavate all unsuitable material to firm natural ground in the manner specified herein. Follow a construction procedure which permits visual identification of firm natural ground. In the even that groundwater is encountered, the ENGINEER may require that the size of the open excavation be limited to that which can be handled by open pumping to allow visual inspection of the excavation bottom and the performance of backfill operations to be conducted in a dry state. Excavation of unsuitable material shall be limited to the greater of the following: • A distance of 5 feet beyond building lines or • The area defined by a one-horizontal to one-vertical line sloping down from the outside bottom edge of

exterior footings to firm natural ground. 3.4 PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION 3.4.1 General

Place fill in accordance with Table D: Compaction Alternatives. These alternatives are provided as minimum

compaction standards only and in no way relieve the CONTRACTOR of his obligation to achieve any specified degree of compaction by whatever means may be necessary. Grade to provide positive drainage and a smooth surface which will readily shed water. To the extent practicable, compact each layer to the specified density on the same day placed. Place fill in horizontal layers. Where horizontal layers meet a natural slope, key layer into slope by cutting a bench. Fill that is too wet for proper compaction: Disc, harrow, or otherwise dry to proper moisture content for compaction to the required density. Fill that is too dry for proper compaction: Uniformly apply water over the surface of the loose layer in sufficient quantity to allow compaction to the required density.

EW_Bend1 10/26/2001 5


Table D: Compaction Alternatives

Maximum Loose Lift Thickness (inches)

Maximum Number of Passes

Compaction Method

Max. Stone Size

Below Structure

and Pavements

Less Critical Areas

Below Structure

and Pavements

Less Critical Areas

Hand operated vibratory plate of light roller in confined areas 3 4 4 4 4

Hand operated vibratory drum rollers weighing at least 1,000 pounds in confined areas 4 6 8 4 4

Loaded 10-wheel truck or D-8 crawler 6 10 12 4 2

Light vibratory drum roller; Min. weight at drum 8,000lbs; Min. dynamic force 10,000lbs.

8 12 12 6 2

Minimum vibratory drum; Min. weight at drum 10,000lbs; Min. dynamic force 20,000lbs.

8 18 18 6 4

3.4.2 Dewatering

Provide adequate pumping and drainage facilities to keep excavated areas sufficiently dry of groundwater and surface run-off. Dewatering shall avoid adversely affection construction procedures or causing excessive disturbance of underlying natural ground. Drain all pumped water in such a manner as to avoid damage to adjacent property. If requested by the ENGINEER, place a 6-inch to 12-inch layer of sand and gravel or crushed stone over the natural underlying soil to stabilize area which have been disturbed due to groundwater seepage pressures and to expedite dewatering operations. Particular attention shall be given areas under proposed foundations.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.5.1 Compaction Requirements

Allow the ENGINEER sufficient time to make necessary observations and tests. Base the degree of compaction on maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557. The minimum degree of compaction for placed fill shall be as indicated in Table E: Compaction Requirements.

Table E: Compaction Requirements

Area Minimum Degree of Compaction (%)

Below foundation 95

Pavement and building subbase and base courses 95

Below building slab base course and above bottom of foundation 92

Below pavement subbase and base courses 90

Trench backfill outside of building 90

Trench backfill inside of building Refer to one of the above-listed categories

Ordinary fill within 5 feet of grade 90

Vegetated areas below 5 feet of grade 85

3.5.2 Testing

Site work should be monitored and tested by geotechnical ENGINEER or his representative and in accordance with requirements of the design team to assure compliance with earthwork and foundation construction specifications.

EW_Bend1 10/26/2001 6


The owner will retain a geotechnical ENGINEER or his representative to perform on-site observations and testing during this phase of construction operations. The geotechnical ENGINEER or his representative will: • Observe excavation and dewatering of building and controlled fill areas; • Observe backfill and compaction within building and controlled fill areas; • Laboratory test and analyze fill material; and • Observe construction – and performing water content, gradation, and compaction tests. On a timely basis, the CONTRACTOR will receive copies of test results submitted to the OWNER. In addition, during construction the geotechnical ENGINEER will advise the OWNER and CONTRACTOR in writing of conditions which fail to conform to the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall take immediate action to remedy indicated deficiencies. The geotechnical ENGINEER or his representative will not supervise or direct the actual work of the CONTRACTOR or employees and representatives of the CONTRACTOR. The presence of, observations by, and testing performed by the geotechnical ENGINEER or his representatives shall not excuse the CONTRACTOR from defects discovered in the work.



( 7 1 6 ) 7 5 9 - 7 8 2 1 F A X ( 7 1 6 ) 7 5 9 - 7 8 2 3




APPENDIX G

LIMITATIONS


( 7 1 6 ) 7 5 9 - 7 8 2 1 F A X ( 7 1 6 ) 7 5 9 - 7 8 2 3




LIMITATIONS

1. This report is based on the data that was obtained from the subsurface explorations and on the

design of the proposed structures as submitted to the geotechnical engineer. A geotechnical engineer, who is experienced in foundation construction and earthwork, should be engaged to review the final design and specifications in order to determine whether any change in concept may have any effect on the validity of the conclusions presented herein, and whether these conclusions have, in fact, been implemented in the design and specifications.

2. The subsurface conditions, including thicknesses, between the exploration locations are

approximate and simplified representations of the strata and transitions. There is the possibility that variations in soil and rock conditions and boundaries will be encountered during construction. In order to permit correlation between the exploratory soil data and the actual soil conditions encountered during construction and so as to assess conformance with the plans and specifications as originally contemplated, it is recommended that a geotechnical engineer, who is experienced in foundation construction and earthwork monitoring, should be retained to perform continuous construction review during the site preparation and foundation construction operations.

3. The subsurface exploration logs and subsurface conditions may aid in estimating material

quality and quantities, such as topsoil/organic matter, fills, natural soils, and rock, but are not to be relied upon as the exclusive means for bid preparation purposes. It is the responsibility of the contractor to perform any additional site examinations and explorations and to prepare an accurate bid.

4. Disclaimers:

a. In the event that any changes in the nature, design or location of the proposed structures are planned, the conclusions that are contained in this report shall not be considered valid unless the changes are reviewed and the conclusions of this report are modified or verified in writing.

b. The geotechnical engineering report has been prepared for this project by Barron & Associates, P.C. This report is for assistance in design only and is not a sufficient basis on which to prepare an accurate bid.

c. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of Prima Terra Properties, LLC, of Liverpool, New York, their entities, and their designated design representatives for specific application to the development of the proposed slab-on-grade 5-Story Hampton Inn Hotel & Suites building, with approximately 19,128 square feet in total building footprint area, and storage and trash enclosure on approximately 5.6 acres of land that is addressed as 1305 Buckley Road (County Route 48), and abuts Elmwood Davis Road on the southwestern property line, in the Town of Salina, Onondaga County, New York and in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practice. No other warranty, expressed or implied, is made.

Z:\Reports\Limitations Pages\Carmen's Limitations Pages\LIMITGEN1.doc


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 02100 - SITE PREPARATION

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL

The drawings, Instructions to Bidders, Form of Proposal, General Conditions, Supplementary GeneralConditions, and Division 1 are included herein and govern work under this section.

1. 02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment to complete the clearing of site as shown and/orherein specified.1. Tree removal and protecting existing trees to remain2. Clearing, grubbing, stripping, and stockpiling topsoil3. Removing designated site improvements4. Layout, line levels, and field checks.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:1. Earthwork - Section 022002. Site Drainage - Section 027123. Blacktop Paving - Section 025004. Landscaping Work - Lawns - Section 029305. Landscaping Work - Sodding - Section 029206. Landscaping Work - Planting - Section 02950

1. 03 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Perform site preparation work before commencing site construction.

B. Locate, protect, and maintain active utilities and site improvements to remain.

C. Provide necessary barricades, coverings, and protection to prevent damage to existingimprovements indicated to remain.

D. Provide and install a silt fence as per the erosion control plan.

E. Restore to original grades and conditions, areas adjacent to site disturbed or damaged as aresult of site preparation work.

F. Contracor shall contact dig safely new york at 1-800-962-7962 orhttp://www.dissafelynewyork.com to identify all underground facilities at least two days prior tothe start of any excavation work.

PART II - PRODUCTS

Not applicable

02100 - 1 of 5



PART III - EXECUTION

3. 01 CLEARING

A. Existing utilities and underground structures shown on drawings for the convenience of theContractor and exact locations are not guaranteed. Verification of location of and protectionof these and other utilities and structures not shown, if any, is the responsibility of thecontractor.

B. Before proceeding with excavation or rough grading work, check with all utility companies forlocation of underground services.

C. If existing active sewer, water, gas, electric or other utilities are encountered, require protectionor relocation, request Site Engineer in writing for determination, decision.

D. Replace without cost to Owner, utilities and services still in service, indicated or not indicated,damages as a result of work of this contract.

E. When encountered in work, whether or not indicated, remove cap or plug or otherwisediscontinue existing inactive utilities which interfere with work execution.

F. All agencies, service utilities, etc. having jurisdiction shall be notified, and work performed shallbe as per their requirements.

3. 02 STRIPPING TOPSOIL

A. Strip topsoil in areas not previously stripped, full depth, within contract limit lines.

B. Stockpile topsoil in a location acceptable to and approved by the Architect.1. Stockpiled topsoil shall be free from trash, brush, stones over 2" diameter, and other

extraneous matter.2. Grade and slope stockpiles for proper drainage and to prevent erosion. Maximum slope

to be 3:1.3. No topsoil shall be removed from the site.4. Stockpile location not to occur in an area where existing trees are noted to remain.

C. Protect all areas which are not to be resurfaced or regraded, and adjacent areas outside of thecontract limits from damage due to site preparation work.

D. Remove promptly from site and legally dispose of all trees, logs, stumps, brush, vegetation,rubbish, stones, boulders and other objectionable or perishable materials within grading limitsto 18" below finish grade.

3. 03 LAYOUT, LINES, LEVELS AND FIELD CHECKS

A. Employ a professionally licensed surveyor or engineer to stake out all horizontal and verticaldatum, prior to commencing any work operations. Accurately locate and maintain location ofall buildings, roads, paved areas, features, etc.

B. Set building corner, offset corner, and grade stakes where spot elevations shown, at breaksin grade, and as otherwise required.

02100 - 2 of 5



C. Run lines from existing buildings, monuments, and features shown on drawings. Establishbase lines. Mark well and protect during construction. Run levels from benchmarks. Verifybenchmark elevations. Advise Architect and Site Engineer of results before commencing work.

D. Do not remove any trees until the project has been adequately staked. Notify Site Engineerupon completion of staking so that he may determine if there are to be changes in the clearingwork.

3. 04 PROTECTION

A. Barricade all open excavations. Maintain lanterns as required for safety.

B. Protect existing site features, utility lines to remain and adjacent properties.

C. Remedy if Damaged: Restore to a condition equal or similar to that existing before damageor injury by repairing, rebuilding, or replacing damaged items at contractor's expense. NotifySite Engineer of any existing damage to "items to remain" prior to commencing work.

3. 05 PROTECTING TREES DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Protect existing trees scheduled to remain against injury or damage, including cutting, breaking,or skinning of roots, trunks or branches; smothering by stockpiled construction materials,excavated materials or vehicular traffic within branch spread.

B. Trees to be preserved should be protected with fences. Fences protect trees from cutting,breaking, skinning, and bruising of tree roots, bark and branches. Fencing recommended foruse is the fluorescent orange, construction safety fence, four (4) feet in height. Protectivefencing must be installed before any construction activities begin and should remain in placeuntil final grading and seeding operations are performed. Trees should be fenced so as toencompass the entire tree canopy. In no case should the fencing be less than two (2) feet fromthe edge of the tree.

C. Interfering branches of trees scheduled to remain may be removed when acceptable to theLandscape Architect or Site Engineer.

D. Repair trees scheduled to remain and damaged by construction operations in a manneracceptable to the Landscape Architect or Site Engineer. Repair damaged trees promptly toprevent progressive deterioration caused by damage.

E. Replace trees scheduled to remain and damaged beyond repair by construction operations,as determined by the Landscape Architect or Site Engineer, with trees of similar size and species. Cost for tree replacement shall be determined in accordance with the TreeEvaluation Formula as described in "A Guide to the Professional Evaluation of LandscapeTrees, Specimen Shrubs, and Evergreens", published by the International Society ofArboriculture.

F. Repair and replacement of trees scheduled to remain and damaged by construction operationsor lack of adequate protection during construction operations shall be at Contractor's expense.

02100 - 3 of 5



G. In order to prevent smothering of the tree root system, construction, excavation materials andtopsoil must not be stockpiled under a tree’s canopy.

H. In order to avoid soil and root zone compaction, vehicles and construction equipment must notbe parked over any tree root system.

I. Construction equipment must not be left idling under a tree’s canopy.

J. As much as possible, avoid digging under a tree’s canopy.

K. If digging is unavoidable within the root zone, tunneling is preferable to trenching. Tunnelsshould be located according to the following table:

TREE DIAMETER MINIMUM DISTANCE OF TUNNEL MINIMUM DEPTH

(DBH) FROM TREE TRUNK (FT) OF TUNNEL (FT)

less than 10" 6 2 ½

10" to 14" 10 3

15" to 19" 12 3 ½

20" and greater 15 4

L. Where tree root cutting is conducted, it must be with sharp cutting tools. Exposed tree rootsmust be backfilled as soon as possible. If roots must be exposed for a long period of time, theyshould be covered with burlap to prevent excessive loss of moisture. When burlap is used, itmust be kept wet until the roots can be re-buried. There is no need to paint or treat the cut rootends.

M. Where extensive cutting of a tree root system has occurred, it is essential the tree root systemreceive between ½ inch and 1 inch of water on a weekly basis. When weather conditions areconsistently dry and when less than ½ inch of rain has fallen during any given week, thedeveloper/contractor needs to apply at least ½ inch of water on the tree root system.

N. Care should be taken to avoid any permanent changes in the surface level of soil under the treeas a result of construction. When the grade level is changed by removing soil from the top ofthe roots or by adding soil over the top of the roots, the tree has difficulty obtaining requiredamounts of air, water and minerals. Minor filling (6 inches of less in depth) will not harm mostspecies of trees if the fill is good topsoil, high in organic matter and loamy in texture. Majorgrade changes require that air be supplied to the roots. This may be done by welling arounda tree or installing a layer of gravel and a system of drain tiles over the roots of the tree.Protecting a tree from lowered grade can be achieved by terracing or building a retaining wall,if necessary.

02100 - 4 of 5



3. 06 TREE REMOVAL

A. Tree removal is to be done in a manner which will not harm or affect any items in a closeproximity of the removal. Larger trees should be trimmed to a size which will allow theirremoval without endangering surrounding trees or utilities etc. After ground extraction thelumber is to be removed from the site.

B. No stumps are to be left after "removal". The stumps and roots of sizeable magnitude shall alsobe removed.

C. Any holes left by tree removal shall be filled with solid fill.

3. 07 SITE ELEMENTS

A. Existing Utilities:

1. Information of the drawings relating to existing utility lines and services is from the bestsources presently available. All such information is furnished only for information andis not guaranteed. Excavate test pits as required to determine exact location of existingutilities.

2. Coordinate utility work with electrical work performed under Division 16 - Electrical.

B. Sawcut and remove existing concrete curb for new curb cut. Remove curb to depth as allowedby Municipality and/or NYSDOT. Sawcut existing pavement a sufficient distance to permitforming and installation of new work.

C. Cut existing pavement (for utility work) in neat, straight lines to provide uniform, even transitionfrom new adjacent existing work.

3. 08 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS

A. Stockpile, haul from site, and legally dispose of waste materials and debris. Accumulation isnot permitted.

B. Maintain disposal routes clear, clean and free of debris.

C. On-site burning of combustible cleared materials is not permitted.

3. 09 CLEANING

Upon completion of site preparation work, clean areas within contract limits, remove tools andequipment. Provide site clear, clean and free of materials and debris and suitable for site workoperations.


02100 - 5 of 5


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 02140 - DEWATERING

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL


1. 02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Dewatering consists of performing all work necessary to remove surface water and/or control thegroundwater levels and hydrostatic pressures in order to permit all excavation and construction underthis Contract to be performed in the dry. The control of all ice and snow shall be considered as partof the work under this item.

B. Installation, operation, maintenance, supervision, supply, dismantling, and removal from the site ofthe dewatering equipment.

C. The Contractor must familiarize himself with the potential for excessive rainfall, the site conditions,and the groundwater conditions.

D. Drainage of the Site: At all times the Contractor shall maintain and operate adequate surface andsubsurface drainage methods to the satisfaction of the Architect in order to keep the construction sitedry and in such condition that placement and compaction of fill may proceed unhindered by saturationof the area. During construction, the surface of the backfill area shall be left in such condition thatprecipitation and/or surface water will run off without ponding.

PART II - PRODUCTS

Not Applicable


3. 01 METHOD

A. The control of all surface and subsurface water, ice, and snow are part of the dewateringrequirements. Maintain adequate control so that the stability of excavated and construction slopesis not adversely affected by water, that erosion is controlled, and the flooding of excavations ordamage to structures does not occur. Drain surface water away from the excavation.

B. Dispose of all water removed from the excavation in a manner that will not endanger public health,property, or portions of the work under construction or completed. Dispose of water in a manner thatwill cause no inconvenience whatsoever to the Owner or the others engaged in work at the site.

C. Dewatering systems shall be so designed as to prevent removal of soil fines from the site during thedewatering operation.

02140 - 1 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 02140 - DEWATERING

3. 02 DEWATERING REQUIREMENTS

A. The bottom of the excavation shall be in a suitable condition to the extent required to maintain thesubgrade in a stable condition.

B. If excavation encounters the ground water table, the Contractor must lower the ground water table,prior to excavation, a minimum of two (2) feet below the final subgrade using a method approved bythe Architect. The Contractor must submit his proposed dewatering method for approval prior toperforming any dewatering work.


02140 - 2 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL

The drawings, Instructions to Bidders, Form of Proposal, General Conditions, Supplementary GeneralConditions, and Division 1 are included herein and govern work under this Section.

1. 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment to complete the earthwork as shown and/or hereinspecified.1. Excavation2. Filling and Backfilling3. Rough grading4. Geotextile Fabric5. Geotextile Fabric for Soil Stabilization / Separation6. Testing

1. 03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Section 02011 - Geotechnical Report

B. Section 02140 - Dewatering.

C. Section 02500 - Asphalt Paving.

D. Section 02520 - Concrete Paving and Curbs.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2. 01 MATERIALS

A. Earth: Approved, free from frost, trash, stumps, trees, roots, sod, heavy mud, etc. If excavatedmaterial is insufficient to meet fill requirements, furnish approved earth at Contractor's expense,subject to approval by the Geotechnical Engineer.

B. Crusher Run Stone:1. Conform to NYSDOT Section 304 Item 304.05.

a. Clean, hard, sound, durable, uniform in quality and free of any detrimental quantity of soft,friable, thin, elongated or laminated pieces, disintegrated material, organic matter, oil alkalior other deleterious substances.

b. Sizes: 100 percent passing 2" sieve, 30-65 percent passing 1/4" sieve, 5-40 percent passingNo. 40 sieve, 0-10 percent passing No. 200 sieve.

C. Gravel: (Contractor's Option)1. Comply with NYSDOT, Section 304, Item 304.02 or 304.05.2. Clean, hard, sound, durable, uniform in quality and free of any detrimental quantity of soft, friable,

thin, elongated or laminated pieces, disintegrated material, organic matter, oil alkali or otherdeleterious substances.a. Type 1, size: 100 percent passing 3" sieve, 30-65 percent passing a 1/4" sieve, 5-40 percent

passing No. 40 sieve, 0-10 percent passing No. 200 sieve.

02200 - 1 of 6



D. Concrete Sand:1. Comply with NYSDOT, Section 703-07.2. Clean, sharp sand, free from clay, 100 percent passing 3/8" sieve, 90-100 percent passing No.

4 sieve, 75-100 percent passing No. 8 sieve, 50-85 percent passing No. 16 sieve, 25-60 percentpassing No. 30 sieve, 10-30 percent passing No. 50 sieve, 1-10 percent passing No. 100 sieve0-3 percent passing No. 200 sieve.

E. Stone Rip-Rap: Shall be round carbonate stone or fragmented carbonate rock, dense, sound anddurable. Minimum size permitted, approximate weight 50 lbs.; maximum size permitted, approximateweight, 75 lbs. An allowance of 15% by weight for inclusion of quarry spalls will be permitted.

F. Geotextile Fabric: As manufactured by Tensar Manufacturing in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations, and in compliance with ASSHTO M-288-96, minimum 24 mil. Verify andcoordinate fabric required with Section 02010 Geotechnical Report and any recommendations showntherein by the soils engineer.

G. Geotextile Fabric for Soil Stabilization / Separation: As manufactured by TenCate equal to Mirafil500X high tenacity polypropylene yarns woven into a stable network such that the yarns retain theirrelative position. Textile shall be inert to biological degradation and resistant to naturally encounteredchemicals, alkalis and acids. Verify and coordinate fabric required with Section 02010 GeotechnicalReport and any recommendations shown therein by the soils engineer.

H. Fine Stone Fill:1. Comply with NYSDOT, Section 620, Item 620.02.2. Clean, free from clay 90-100 percent smaller than 200 mm, 50-100 percent larger than 75 mm,

0-10 percent smaller than 2.0 mm.


3. 01 INSPECTION AND QUALITY CONTROL

A. A testing agency will be employed by the Owner and approved by the Architect to inspect and test allbackfill and subgrade preparation.

B. The service of this testing agency is intended for the Owner's verification and shall in no way relievethe Contractor of his responsibility to be in compliance with the requirements of the ContractDocuments and to provide his own inspection and quality.

C. The Architect shall have the testing laboratory make such tests as deemed necessary.

D. The following minimum tests shall be made. ASTM Designations specified refer to the latestpublication.1. Grain Size Analysis 9 ASTM C117.2. Maximum Density and Optimum Moisture Content (9 ASTM D1557) or other appropriate test

determined by the Geotechnical Engineer where material gradation does not permit use of ASTMD1557.

3. Soundness Test (9 ASTM C88).4. Plasticity Index (ASTM D423 and ASTM D424).5. Elongated particles (NYSDOT Standard Specifications, January 2, l981, Section 304-2. 02).6. In place density (ASTM D1556 or ASTM D2922).7. Moisture Content.

02200 - 2 of 6



E. Tests 1 - 5 shall be performed before acceptance and delivery of fill to the site. Any change in thesource of material or change of quality of the material will require a new series of tests of determinedacceptability.

F. Delivery and compaction of fill material shall be made during the presence of the GeotechnicalEngineer's representative and shall be subject to his approval. This inspection by no means absolvesthe Contractor from responsibility of compaction as specified.

G. Acceptance and rejection of fill placed in accordance with 95% and 90% (as specified) of maximumdensity attainable by the Modified Proctor Method of Compaction (ASTM D1557) shall be based uponthe following in place density test result requirements for each lift, and all other requirements asstated in these Specifications.1. Requirements for 95% of Maximum Density (ASTM D1557): The results of all in place density

tests must meet the following requirements.a. The average of any three consecutive tests shall be equal to, or greater than 95% of the

maximum density.b. No more than one in four consecutive tests shall be less than 95% of the maximum density.c. No test result shall be less than 94.0% of the maximum density.

2. Requirements for 90% of the Maximum Density (ASTM D1557): The results of all in place densitytests must be greater than or equal to 90% of the maximum density.

H. An alternative appropriate density test procedure shall be determined by the Geotechnical Engineerto obtain the maximum density where material gradations do not permit use of ASTM D1557 todetermine the maximum density requirement will be based.

I. All earthwork shall be performed by personnel experienced in these operations. It is the responsibilityof the Contractor to provide such personnel.

3. 02 LAYOUT

A. Employ licensed engineer or surveyor to stake out both horizontal and vertical control for all work priorto commencing any work operations. Accurately locate and maintain location of all structures, pavedareas, feature, etc. Advise Architect of any discrepancies, prior to commencing work.

B. Maintain benchmarks, monuments and other reference points. Re-establish benchmarks if disturbedor destroyed at no cost to Owner.

3. 03 PROTECTION

A. Stockpile building materials away from trees. Do not run heavy equipment over root systems. Maintain minimum trench widths near root systems to avoid unnecessary injury. Provide staked snowfence around trees noted to be protected with fence to follow vegetation drip line or as dimensionedon drawings.

B. Contractor shall take measures as required to protect excavation against frost and freezing untilconcrete work can be performed.

C. Adjacent building, pavements, utilities, and grades shall be protected by sheeting and/or shoring andbracing during excavation as required or as shown on drawings.

D. Protect existing structures and site features noted to remain, against damage from equipment andvehicular traffic as required.

02200 - 3 of 6



E. Protect all aerial or underground utility lines to ensure uninterrupted service. Repair any damageincurred by Contractor.

3. 04 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION

A. All excavation shall be unclassified. This shall be understood to mean that provided soil testing isperformed, this Contractor is responsible for the excavation and removal of any and all materials oritems encountered during excavation, including but not limited to rock, boulders, hidden foundation,etc. Without soil testing, the Owner shall be responsible for unclassified excavation beyond thatshown on Construction Documents.

B. The Contractor shall report any unsatisfactory bearing conditions or any other unusual conditions tothe Architect, and perform all additional excavation as directed by the Architect, at no additional costto the Owner.

C. If for any reason, excavation is carried below the required levels, either as a result of GeotechnicalEngineer's directive, or through error, the Contractor shall provide lean concrete or engineered fillunder foundations and footings and suitable fill under slab on grade, to the indicated levels as directedand approved by the Geotechnical Engineer, in order to ensure proper bearing. This shall be at noadditional cost to the Owner.

D. Cut to exact elevations and grade. Remove excavated materials from site.

3. 05 COMPACTION OF GRADE PRIOR TO FILLING

The surface within the proposed building area and all areas to receive asphalt paving, shall bethoroughly compacted, using a pneumatic-tired roller weighing at least 25 tons, a depth of at least 8"below stripped grade and to a dry density. This compaction requirement may be waived, if in thejudgement of the Geotechnical Engineer, such compaction will disturb otherwise acceptablefoundation soils. Any subgrade soils which weave excessively under the weight of the compactionequipment, shall, at the direction of the Geotechnical Engineer, be removed and replaced withcompacted clean granular fill as specified below.

3. 06 FILLING AND BACKFILLING

A. Preparation:1. All subgrades must be approved by the Geotechnical Engineer before placing fill and/or backfill.

Do not backfill against foundation wall until examined and approved by the GeotechnicalEngineer.

2. Remove all debris from excavations before placing fill and/or backfill.3. Place Geotech fabric after proof rolling in all building areas prior to filling, per manufacturer's

recommendations.

B. Materials:1. Earth:

a. Fill and backfill exterior side of site structures to subgrade where no slab on grade, nopavement, and no foundation drains occur.

b. Site fill where no pavement occurs.c. Fill and backfill to subgrade at site trenches where no slab on grade or pavement occurs.d. Fill and backfill in areas not specifically specified.

2. Crusher Run Stone (Engineered Fill):a. All footings shall bear on suitable bearing or engineered fill.

02200 - 4 of 6



b. and backfill beneath foundations (minimum of 6" required) or substitution of a lean concrete"mud" mat as approved by the Architect, or his representative.

c. Fill and backfill beneath porous base material specified for slab-on-grade construction andpavement.

d. Underslab porous base material if demonstrated porous, as stated. e. at site trenches where pavement occurs.f. Fill and backfill to subgrade where demolition is required; place in 8" lifts and compact to 95%

maximum dry density.3. Gravel (Contractor's Option):

a. Fill and backfill beneath porous base material specified for slab on grade construction andpavement. Material to extend 24" beyond edge of asphalt pavement and 6" beyond edge ofconcrete pavement.

b. Backfill at site trenches where pavement occurs.4. Bedding Sand: Bedding as detailed for mechanical and electrical utility trenches shall be concrete

sand (2.01D).5. The Contractor may propose alternate materials with similar engineering properties for

consideration by the Geotechnical Engineer. Such materials shall be proposed only wheresubstitution results in a credit to the Owner.

6. Placement of fill materials: Place after areas have been examined and approved by GeotechnicalEngineer or his representative.

7. Frost: No fill material shall be placed when either the fill material or the previous lift or subgradeon which it is to be placed is frozen. In the event that any fill which has been placed or thesubgrade shall become frozen, it shall be scarified to break up all frozen material andrecompacted, or removed to the satisfaction of the Geotechnical Engineer or his representativebefore the next lift is placed. Any soft areas resulting from frost shall be removed or recompactedto the satisfaction of the Geotechnical Engineer before new fill is placed over the area.

8. Open Areas: The fill shall be spread evenly by mechanical or manual means, in approximatelyhorizontal layers of six (6) to eight (8) inches maximum loose thickness.

9. Limited Access: Where large compaction equipment cannot work, the fill material shall be placedin nearly horizontal layers, having a maximum loose thickness of four (4) to six (6) inches.

10. Underslab fill and backfill shall be placed and compacted before installation of under-floormechanical lines. Underslab porous base material shall be installed after underslab mechanicallines have been led, backfilled, and compacted.

11. Moisture Control: At the time of compaction, the material in each layer of fill shall have a moisturecontent within +/-2 percent of optimum moisture content for compaction, as determined by ASTMD1557 procedure for determining the moisture density relationship of the fill material. If, in theopinion of the Geotechnical Engineer or his representative, the fill material is too wet, it shall bedried by a method approved by the Geotechnical Engineer prior to commencing or continuing thecompaction operation. Likewise, if, in the opinion of the Geotechnical Engineer, the fill materialis too dry for proper compaction, the fill shall be moistened by a method approved by theGeotechnical Engineer prior to commencing or continuing the compaction operation. TheGeotechnical Engineer, at his discretion, may permit a larger variation of moisture content then+/-2 percent, if the fill can be placed properly within the new limits, or may require a smallervariation of moisture content than +/-2 percent, if it is necessary to properly control the fill.

12. The Contractor will avoid routing of heavy construction equipment including loaded trucks oversubgrade areas or compacted fill areas on the site to avoid adverse affects under the load ofsuch equipment. Should routing of heavy equipment occur over such areas, the Contractor shallbe responsible for any adverse effects incurred.

02200 - 5 of 6



C. Compaction of Fill:1. Uniformly spread each layer, moisten or dry as required for optimum moisture content, and then

compact so density of the compacted material meets or exceeds the specified percentage belowthe maximum dry density as determined in the laboratory and as approved by the GeotechnicalEngineer in accordance with the Modified Proctor Method of Compaction, ASTM designationD1557.

Percentage of Maximum Dry Density Location ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

95 Beneath all foundations, above foundations, and below slab on grade construction (inside and

outside buildings) and pavement areas.

90 Non-loaded grassed areas, as shown.

2. Any lift, or portion thereof, which is not compacted in accordance with the Specifications shall berecompacted or removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the Geotechnical Engineer. Thedegree of compaction of each lift shall be checked by the Geotechnical Engineer or hisrepresentative, and each successive lift shall not be placed, or compacted until the previous liftis inspected, tested, and approved by the Architect. This fill is to be compacted to the lines andgrades specified, and the slopes shall at all times be maintained by the Contractor.

3. 07 ROUGH GRADING

A. Subgrade: Depth below finished grade as required for topsoil or pavement.

B. Accuracy: Set grade stakes where spot elevations shown, at breaks in grade, along drainage"swales" and as otherwise required to correctly grade the area according to elevations shown onplans.

C. Completion of Rough Grading: Obtain Architect's approval before spreading topsoil or preparingpavement subgrade.

D. Subgrade Rolling: All paved areas. In areas inaccessible to roller, use mechanical tamps.

3. 08 TIMING

Install drainage system prior to or concurrent with building excavation to prevent flooding of the buildingexcavation, to allow trench settlement and general fill settlement through course of job, and to allowinstallation of base materials for construction.

- - END OF SECTION - -

02200 - 6 of 6


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 02500 - ASPHALT PAVING

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL


1. 02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. In general, the items of work to be performed under this heading shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Constructing full depth asphalt pavement per detail 2. Patching and matching existing pavement 3. Pavement sealer 4. Pavement marking

1. 03 PROTECTION OF EXISTING WORK

Verify location and depths of existing utilities, mark out extremities of work, verify meeting of grades toexisting pavement. Damages by this Contractor to buildings, roads, curbs, walks, pipes and otherstructures above or below the ground shall be repaired or replaced at this Contractor's expense to thesatisfaction of the Architect/Owner.

1. 04 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

Grades shall be smooth, draining grades parallel to finish grades and to proper subgrade elevations. Nohumps or hollows. Roll with approved 10-ton roller until no movement occurs. Do above operationsconcurrently. Subgrade smooth, hard and dry.

PART II - PRODUCTS 2. 01 FOUNDATION

A. Foundation Course: (Contractor's Option)1. Clean, crusher run stone, well graded from coarse to fine and free from organic or other

deleterious materials, conforming to NYSDOT Section 304-2, Gradation Type 1 or 2. 2. Clean, crusher run blast furnace slag, well graded from coarse to fine and free from organic or

other deleterious materials, conforming to NYSDOT Section 304-2, Gradation Type 1 or 2.

B. Primer: Medium curing liquid asphalt, conforming to NYSDOT Section 702, Type 702-20.

C. Asphalt Cement - Tack Coat: Asphalt emulsions conforming to NYSDOT Section 702, Type 702-3401or 702-3601, or cationic asphalt emulsion, conforming to NYSDOT Section 702, Type 702-4501.

D. Asphalt Binder Course: Conforming to NYSDOT Section 401-2 and 403, binder type 3 (Table 401-1).

E. Asphalt Top Course: Conforming to NYSDOT Section 401-2 and 403, Top Type 6 (Table 401-1).

F. Pavement Sealer: Jennite J-16 asphalt surface treatment by Maintenance, Inc., Koppers PavementSealer by Koppers, Inc., Playtime Pavement Sealer by Playtime U.S.A., Spec-Seal by NortheastSealcoat Co. or approved equal.

02500 - 1 of 3



2. 02 SOIL STABILIZER

A. Where required to stabilize soil conditions as shown on drawings:1. Mirfi, 600X, Celanese Fibers Marketing Co., or approved equal.2. Weight: 4 oz./sq. yd.3. Average thickness: 25 mils

PART III - EXECUTION 3. 01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION (See Section 02920)

Proof roll cut areas in accordance with NYSDOT Specification 203-3.14. 3. 02 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE (Asphalt) PAVEMENT

A. All Courses: Place and roll each course on accordance with NYSDOT Specification Section 304-3and 401-3.

B. Foundation Course: 1. Place on dry subgrade in lifts from minimum 6" to maximum 12". Remove all subgrade material

churned or mixed with foundation course and replace as necessary at Contractor's expense. 2. Compaction for foundation course shall be 99 percent of standard proctor maximum density. 3. Grades for foundation course shall be +/- .25" of required grades.

C. Primer: Apply with approved pressure distributors at the rate of .2 to .5 gals. per sq. yd., as requiredby surface conditions. Required on foundation course prior to placing bituminous course(s).

D. Tack Coat: 1. Apply in accordance with NYSDOT Section 407-3. 2. Required where bituminous pavement abuts curbs, concrete walks, drives and pads, existing

pavement and/or overlays existing pavement. Apply a tack coat of asphalt cement to contactsurfaces prior to placing bituminous courses.

E. Bituminous Concrete Courses:1. Install in two courses, binder and top, to compacted thicknesses as detailed, per NYSDOT

Specification Sections 401-3 and 403. 2. After placement and compaction of binder course, binder shall be proof-rolled in presence of

testing agent to determine that no displacement or deflection occurs. 3. Top course compaction shall be minimum 95% of laboratory specimen density.4. Form or cut all pavement edges to clean, sharp lines of dimensions, alignment, or radius

indicated.

F. Pavement Sealer:1. Preparation Work - Asphalt surface must be cured as per pavement sealer manufacturer's

instructions, and must by free form dirt, oil and other foreign matter. Just prior to application ofsealer, fog spray the pavement surface with clean, fresh water.

2. Pavement sealer shall not be applied when weather is rainy or foggy, or when ambienttemperature is below 45 degrees F.

3. Application - Apply two coats of sealer uniformly at .09 gal./sq. yd. per coat. Apply in accordancewith manufacturer's Specifications.

4. Minimum of 24 hours should be allowed for curing prior to testing sealed pavement fortrafficability.

02500 - 2 of 3



3. 03 PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT

A. Traffic Marking paint, Pro Park Series, by Sherwin Williams: Traffic Marking Paint by Pratt andLambert, Inc.: Hi-Hide Plexicolor Line Paint by California Products Corp., or approved equal.

B. Color: White.

C. Apply one coat 4" wide as indicated on site plan, with brush or zone marking equipment, over clean,dry bituminous pavement, following application and curing of sealer.


02500 - 3 of 3


ARCH. JOB: #: 214041 SECTION 02515 - STAMPED CONCRETE

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL


1. 02 DESCRIPTION

A. All work in this section shall be indicated in the contract drawings as "Designer Crete" (cobblestone,brick, etc.), as manufactured from a monolithic concrete slab on the job site. The work shall includeall labor, materials, and equipment required to provide and install "Designer Crete".1. Preparation work includes fine grading, setting of forms and screeds, installing reinforcing wire

or rebar.2. SELECT PATTERN: As shown on drawings, refer to both architectural and civil.

B. Additional work provided by the "Designer Crete" contractor shall include:1. Provide materials; concrete, color, curing sealing compound.2. Place concrete.3. Provide and apply special forming tools.4. Perform final clean-up of concrete, to allow for proper curing and sealing.5. Apply curing/sealing compound.

1. 03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

A. All applicable standards shall be the latest edition without regard to the edition date of the followingspecifications (ASTM, ACI). See Division 5 for additional applicable specification items (ConcreteTesting).1. Method of Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexure Test Specimens in the Field

C31.2. Specifications for Concrete Aggregates C33.3. Method of Tests for Compressive Strength of Molded Concrete Cylinders C39.4. Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete C94.5. Weight per cubic foot, yield and air content (gravimetric) of concrete C138.6. Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete C143.7. Specification for Portland Cement Air Entraining Portland Cement C150.8. Method of Making and Curing Concrete Compressive and Flexure Test Specimens in the

Laboratory C192.9. Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete C260.10. Chemical Admixtures for Concrete C494.11. Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction ACI 302.

PART II - PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS

A. Cement: Portland Cement, ASTM C150.

B. Water: Clean, free from injurious amount of oils, acids, alkalies, organic materials, or otherdeleterious substances, as furnished by the local facilities for human consumption.

C. Aggregates:

02515 - 1 of 3



1. Fine Aggregates: Consist of sand having clean, durable uncoated grains free from deleterioussubstances, range in size from fine to coarse.

2. Coarse Aggregates: Crusher stone or gravel, screened coarse aggregates graded between limitsspecified; conform to requirements prescribed in ASTM Standards C33, Table 11.

3. All aggregates stored and handled to preserve gradation and cleanliness of material. Segregatesand/or contamination are cause for rejection and deficient materials shall be removed andreplaced.

D. Air Entraining: Air content obtained by use of Air Entraining admixture conforming to ASTMrequirements. Water reducing agent at Contractor's option.

E. Concrete Quality, Design, and Control:1. Design Admixtures: Concrete designed in accordance with ACI 613 (latest edition) to attain

following properties of strength, slump, and entrained air content, waterproofing, and submittedto Architect for approval. All concrete to be a minimum six-bag mix.a. Use: Design Creteb. Class: #3c. 28-Day P.S.I.: 4,000d. Aggregate Size: 1" maximume. Air: 6-8%f. Slump: 4" maximum.

2. Batching of Materials: In conformance to requirements of ASTM C94.

F. Joint Filler: Bituminous fiber cane conforming to ASTM D1751 83.

G. Curing Membrane: Liquid-type membrane curing compound complying with ASTM C309, Type I,Class A; acrylic based.

H. Reinforcing Bar: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed.

I. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185.

J. Integral Color: Colors shall be as selected by architect and owner.

2. 02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

See Section 02200 - Earthwork for requirements.


3. 01 INSTALLATION PROCESS

A. Concrete mix shall be placed and screeded to the proper grade and floated to a uniform surface inthe normal manner.

B. Apply release agent in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.

C. While concrete is still in the plastic stage of set, the special forming tools shall be applied to make thedesired surface. Control and/or isolation joints shall be installed during this process.

D. After a minimum of twelve (12) hours, release agent shall be removed to an extent to leave tracesof highlight on the stamped concrete.

02515 - 2 of 3



E. When surface is thoroughly dry, apply curing compound according to manufacturer's instructions.

F. Apply second sealing/antispalling coat to surfaces prior to October.

3. 02 TESTING

A. This Contractor shall pay for all costs involved in testing by the testing laboratory.

B. Test cylinders on random batches shall be made under contract by an independent testing and/orinspection laboratory approved by the Architect. This service shall include sampling of concrete,preparing, and handling of test specimen, preparing of test reports. A qualified Contractor'srepresentative (Grade I technician) may conduct field tests of concrete.

C. The laboratory shall furnish copies of all tests as follows:1. Architect's Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 copies2. General Contractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 copies3. Concrete Supplier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 copy

D. Tests for Fresh Concrete: At least one (1) test of (sampling, slump, air content, cylinders [set ofthree], and temperature) fresh concrete for every 50 yards placed or fraction thereof. Pours of five(5) yards or less in one (1) day do not require testing.

E. Tests of Hardened Concrete: Compressive strength tests in accordance with ASTM Method of TestC78.

F. Age of Strength Test: Test at seven (7) and 28 days. Seven (7) day breaks may be used todetermine acceptance provided a relation between seven (7) and 28-day strengths is established formaterials and proportions used.


02515 - 3 of 3


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 02520 - CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL



Work Included: Furnish all labor, material and equipment necessary to complete all concrete pads, walks,ramps, curbs, wheel stops, and related work as shown and/or specified.

1. 03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Section 02050 - Demolition.

B. Section 02200 - Earthwork.

C. Section 03100 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1. 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Comply with New York State Department of Transportation (NYS DOT) Specifications except as otherwisespecified herein.

1. 05 SUBMITTALS

Test Reports: Submit three (3) copies of Concrete Mix Design to Architect for each batch. 1. 06 COOPERATION

Examine drawings and specifications for all Contracts, to determine nature of proposed construction. Perform work to conform with construction called for in such a manner as not to interfere or delay workof other contractors.

PART II - PRODUCTS 2. 01 CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURB MATERIALS

A. Foundation Course: (Contractor's Option) 1. Clean, crusher run stone, well graded from coarse to fine and free from organic or other

deleterious materials, conforming to NYS DOT Section 304-2, Gradation Type 1 or 2..2. Clean, crushed gravel, well graded from coarse to fine and free from organic or other deleterious

materials, material requirements conforming to NYS DOT Section 703-02. "Crushed Gravel"gradation requirements conforming to NYS DOT Section 304-2, Gradation Type 1 or 2.

B. Concrete: As specified under Section 03100 - "Cast-in-Place Concrete". Minimum compressivestrength 4000 psi at 28 days, 6 percent (plus or minus 1 percent) air-entrained.

C. Reinforcing: As specified under Section 03200 - "Concrete Reinforcing".

02520 - 1 of 3



D. Expansion Joint Material: 1. Filler - Preformed expansion joint filler conforming to ASTM D1752, 1/2" thickness.2. Sealant - Meeting requirements of Federal Specification TT-S-00227E, compatible with filler

used, Type 1, Class "A" for horizontal joints - Type 2, Class "A" for vertical joints (curbs). Color: Gray.

2. 02 PRECAST CONCRETE WHEEL STOPS

Reinforced precast concrete, 4000 psi concrete at 28 days, conforming to indicated detail.

PART III - EXECUTION 3. 01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION (See Division 2 - Site Work)

Proof roll cut areas in accordance with NYS DOT Specification 203-3.14.

3. 02 CONCRETE PAVEMENT (Utility and Dumpster Pads)

A. Foundation Course:1. Place and roll in accordance with NYS DOT Specification Section 304-3.2. Place on dry subgrade in lifts from minimum 6" to maximum 12". Remove all subgrade material

churned or mixed with foundation course and replace as necessary at contractor's expense. 3. Compaction for foundation course shall be 95 percent of standard proctor maximum density. 4. Grades for foundation course shall be +/- .25" of required grades.

B. Placing, Curing, and Protection: See Section 03100.

C. Reinforcing: As specified under Section 03200, and as indicated on Plans.

D. Finishing and Sealing: See Section 03200. Screed to grade and wood float, edge all sides, fine broomfinish (except where otherwise indicated) and seal.

3. 03 CONCRETE PAVEMENT (Walks and Entrance Pads)

A. Foundation Course:1. Place and roll in accordance with NYS DOT Specification Section 304-3.2. Place on dry subgrade in maximum 6" lifts. Remove all subgrade material churned or mixed with

foundation course and replace as necessary at contractor's expense. 3. Compaction for foundation course shall be 95 percent of standard proctor maximum density. 4. Grades for foundation course shall be +/- .25" of required grades.

B. Placing, Curing, and Protection: See Section 03100.

C. Reinforcing: As specified under Section 03200, and as indicated on Plans.

D. Expansion Joints:1. Provide expansion joints, with filler and sealant, between concrete walks/pads and buildings,

walls, steps, curbs and other structures, and at maximum of every 150 sq.ft. of walks/pads,except that maximum dimensions between joints in a linear walk to be no more than 30 ft.

02520 - 2 of 3



2. Top of filler to be 1/4" below finished surface of walks/pads.3. Remainder of joint to be filled, to flush with finished surface of walks/pads, with joint sealant per

manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Control Joints: 1. Score walks/pads at approximately 5 ft. on center, unless otherwise noted on Plans.2. Use tool which produces "V" joint not over 1/4" wide and 1/2" deep.

F. Finished grade of walk to have a minimum of 1/8" per foot cross-slope, pitched toward low pointswhere possible.

G. Finishing and Sealing: See Section 03200. Screed to grade and wood float, edge all sides, fine roomfinish (except where otherwise indicated) and seal.

3. 04 CONCRETE CURBS

A. Foundation and Backfill: Place foundation course material, well compacted, to indicated dimensions.

B. Placing, Curing, and Protection.

C. Reinforcing: As specified under Section 03200 and as indicated on Plans.

D. Expansion Joints: 1. Provide expansion joints, with filler and sealant at maximum intervals of 30' on enter, and at all

beginning of curb radius and ending of curb radius. Match as closely as possible abutting walkexpansion joints.

2. Top of filler to be 1/4" below finished top and face of curb.3. Remainder of joint to be filled, to flush with finished face and top of curb, with joint sealant per

manufacturer's recommendations.4. Provide slip bars, as detailed, at all expansion joints.

E. Scored Joints:1. Score curbs at approximately 5 ft. on center. Match as closely as possible abutting walk score

joints.2. Use tool which produces "V" joint no over 1/4" wide and 1/2" deep.

F. Finishing and Sealing: See Section 03200. Provide fine broom finish and seal.

3. 05 PRECAST CONCRETE WHEEL STOPS

Construct as detailed. Pin in place with steel anchor pins. Center one wheel stop in each parking space,where indicated.


02520 - 3 of 3


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 02830 - FENCING

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL


1. 02 SCOPE OF WORK

Furnish all labor, materials and equipment to complete stockade fence installation, replacement or repairshown on drawings and/or herein specified.


A. Acceptable Manufacturers: One which is regularly engaged in the manufacture of stockade fencingand its components for at least five (5) years.

B. Erector Qualifications: Completion of ten (10) equivalent installations.

1. 04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication and installation.

B. Manufacturer's Literature:1. Descriptive data of installation methods and procedures.2. Standard drawings of fence and gate installation.

C. Certificates: Manufacturer's certification that materials meet specification requirements.

1. 05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials with manufacturer's tags and labels intact.

B. Handle and store so as to avoid damage.

1. 06 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. The following Federal Specification listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation only,form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the reference thereto:1. RR-F-00191e (GSA-FSS) - Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal (and Gates, Chain-Link Fabric and

Accessories).

PART II - PRODUCTS

2. 01 GENERAL

A. Fence components shall be galvanically compatible.

B. Where extending or modifying existing fences, match the sizes, gauges of materials and constructionof the existing fence construction.

02830 - 1 of 4



C. The procedures proposed for the accomplishments of salvage and demolition work shall be submittedfor approval. The procedures shall provide for safe conduct of the work, careful removal anddisposition of materials specified to be salvaged, coordination with other work in progress, and timelydisconnection of utility services. The procedures shall include a detailed description of the methodsand equipment to be used for each operation and the sequence of operations. Care shall be takento prevent damage to existing lawns and plantings.

D. Materials shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements below.

2. 02 STOCKADE FENCING

A. Fence Panels: Fence panels shall be cedar wood beveled panels attached to cedar 2x5 horizontalmembers as shown and noted on drawings.

B. Line posts shall be galvanized 3" diameter steel posts (with caps) spaced, plumbed, leveled, and setin concrete as shown and noted on the drawings.

C. Stockade fence panels shall be secured with 3/8" stove bolts, nuts, and washers to the line posts asshown and noted on the drawings.

D. Concrete: 3000 psi concrete to set posts.

2. 03 ACCESSORIES

A. Accessories: Fed. Spec. RR-F-191, Part I, Class 6, except 6, except as modified herein.1. Sliding Gates: Sliding gate up to 45 ft. wide for 8 ft. high fabric and including three (3) strands

of barbed wire. Sliding gate up to 30 ft. shall be single slide type and shall be engineered by themanufacturer to assure its proper functioning. Shop drawings shall be submitted for approval. Operation may be by means of enclosed top roller section of top and bottom roller wheels androller tracks on gate. Gates over 30 ft. wide shall be double bi-parting type contileveredconstruction.

2. Reinforcing Wire: Minimum tensile strength of 80,000 lbs. per sq.in.3. Tie Wire: Aluminum alloy of 0.144" dia. for attaching fabric to top rail and to intermediate posts.

Preformed clips of 6 ga., zinc-coated steel wire may be used for attaching fabric to intermediateposts.

4. Hog Rings: Aluminum wire of 0.110" dia. for attaching fabric to top and bottom reinforcing wires.5. Post Braces and Truss Rods: For each gate, corner, pull, or end post. Truss rods shall be

provided with turnbuckles or other equivalent provisions for adjustment.6. Post Caps: Galvanized steel to match material used on vertical support members.

PART III - EXECUTION 3. 01 INSPECTION

A. Verify that final grading in fence location is completed without irregularities which would interfere withfence installation.

B. Do not commence work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

02830 - 2 of 4



3. 02 PREPARATION

A. Measure and lay out complete fence line.

B. Measure parallel to surface of ground.

C. Locate and mark position of posts.

D. Locate line posts at equal distance spacing, not exceeding 10 ft. centers.

E. Locate corner posts at positions where fence changes direction more than 10 degrees.

3. 03 HARDWARE INSTALLATION

A. Posts:1. Minimum post hole diameter three times outside post diameter.2. Minimum post hole depth 4" below post bottom.3. Place concrete in hole to depth of post bottom. 4. Set post plumb to 1/4" in 10 ft. 5. Fill hole with concrete to 2" above grade. 6. Crown surface of concrete to slope away from post.7. Install post caps as required.

B. Fence Fabrics: 1. Stretch fabric tight between terminal post. 2. Position bottom of fabric approximately 1" to 2" above ground level at each post. 3. Cut fabric to form one continuous piece between terminal posts. 4. Attach fabric to terminal post using tension bars and tension band:

a. Thread tension bars through fabric. b. Tension band spacing not to exceed 15" o.c.

5. Attach fabric to line post using wire ties or clips, spacing not to exceed 15" o.c.6. Attach top edge of fabric to top rail using wire ties or clips, spacing not to exceed 24" o.c. 7. Attach bottom edge of fabric to bottom tension wire using wire ties or clips, spacing not to exceed

24" o.c.

C. Gates: Attach cedar fence panels securely to gate frame and hinge to end posts or terminal arms inaccordance with manufacturers instructions.

D. Barbed Wire: Pull wire taut and install securely to extension arms and secure to end post or terminalarms in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3. 04 LOCATION INSTALLATION

around dumpster pad as shown and detailed on the drawings.

02830 - 3 of 4



3. 05 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Adjust brace rails and tension rods for rigid installation.

B. Tighten hardware, fasteners, and accessories.

C. Remove excess and waste materials from project site.


02830 - 4 of 4


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 02930 - LANDSCAPING WORK - LAWNS

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL


1. 02 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Included1. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete all lawns as shown and

specified. Includes all areas within Contract limits where buildings and paving do not occur,unless indicated otherwise.

2. Contractor to furnish topsoil from on-site stripping or other approved source. Work to alsoinclude finish grading, seed bed preparation, seeding and maintenance of areas as shown onPlan.

1. 03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a list of proposed sources from which seed will be obtained. List must be approved by theArchitect prior to shipping materials to the job site.

B. Submissions - Certification: Seed analysis.

1. 04 AREA

To include all exterior ground areas shown on Plan within the Contract limit line, except surfaces occupiedby paving and except areas indicated to be undisturbed, shall be seeded.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2. 01 TOPSOIL

Furnish from topsoil stripped from site. If insufficient quantity is available from stripping, furnish fromapproved off site sources at Contractor's expense, if required. Topsoil to be natural, fertile, friablegranular soil characteristic of productive soils in vicinity, uniform in composition and texture. Clean, freefrom subsoil, clay lumps, stones, weeds, stumps, roots, toxic substances, and debris or similar substance2" or more in greatest dimension.

2. 02 FERTILIZER

Commercial fertilizer, partially organic, containing by weight 5 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorousand 5 percent potash. Material - uniform in composition, dry and free flowing and shall be delivered tothe site in original unopened containers, each bearing manufacturer's guaranteed analysis.

2. 03 WEED AND FEED

Commercial weed and feed, partially organic, containing by weight 20 percent nitrogen, 6 percentphosphorous, and 4 percent potash. Material - uniform in composition, dry and free flowing and shall bedelivered to the site in original unopened containers, each bearing manufacturer's guaranteed analysis.

02930 - 1 of 4



2. 04 LAWN SEED

A. General: Seed shall be fresh, clean, new crop, delivered in original packages, unopened and bearingthe guaranteed analysis.

B. Seed Mixtures: Proportion Min. Min. Lbs./1000 By Weight Purity Germination sq.ft.

Type 1 - For General Lawn Usea. Bensun (A34)

KY Bluegrass 25% 90% 85% 1.5 b. Penn Lawn Red

Fescue 67% 95% 80% 4.0 c. Manhattan

Perennial Rye 8% 95% 90% .5 6.0

2. 05 MULCH

Stalks of oats, wheat, rye, or other approved crops, free of noxious weeds, "U.S. Sample Grade" or otherlow grade acceptable.


3. 01 SPREAD TOPSOIL

A. Spread and compact topsoil to a minimum compacted thickness of 4" for seeded areas to smoothdraining grades true to indicated elevations. All grading must provide drainage of areas with nopuddling or low areas. Required: Entire area within Contract limits, except paved areas, and otherareas if specially excluded.

B. Excess Topsoil: Topsoil remaining after all requirements of this Contract are met, shall be removedfrom the site.

3. 02 FINE GRADING

A. Disc, harrow or otherwise completely pulverize to a depth of 3" where topsoil has been spread andto a depth of 6" where topsoil has not been stripped. All stone and other undesirable material over1" greatest dimension shall be removed.

B. The entire area shall be fine graded by machine, or wood handraking, prior to sowing of grass seed.

C. All swells and depressions shall be raked level and cleaned of stone, roots and rubbish.

D. Tops and bottoms of slopes shall be carefully rounded off in each transition curve. The borders ofthe area of ground disturbed shall be merged with surrounding surface by compacting or othermeans, to permit water run-off and to present a uniform slope.

E. Clean and clear all obstructions from drainage structure ditches, swales, as may be necessary toprovide a clean, open, free running passageway for all surface water.

02930 - 2 of 4



3. 03 SEEDING, FERTILIZING AND MULCHING (For Conventional Method)

A. Time of Seeding: Seeding shall be done between April 1 and June 1, or between August 1 andOctober 15. When delays in operations carry the work beyond the seasons specified, or whenconditions of high winds, drought, excessive moisture or ice are such that satisfactory results are notlikely to be obtained at any stage of the work, the work will stop and it shall be resumed only whenthe desired results are likely to be obtained or when approved corrective measures and proceduresare adopted.

B. Quantity of Seed: Type 1 Seed - 260 lbs. per acre.

C. Fertilizing: Spread and evenly distribute at a rate of 25 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. and work into top 3" of soilby dicing or other approved method. In areas inaccessible to power equipment, Contractor to usehand tools. Adjacent to existing trees, the depth shall be adjusted to avoid disturbance of roots.

D. Method of Seeding: Mechanical drills or seeders shall place the seed to a depth not exceeding 1/4". Two passes of seeder shall be made over each area, the second pass being made at right anglesto the direction of the first, one-half of the required amount of seed being sown in each pass. Broadcast seed shall be covered to a depth not exceeding 1/4" by raking, brush or chain harrowing,or other approved method. Broadcast seeding shall not be done during windy weather. After sowing,the seeded areas shall be lightly rolled, and watered with fine spray. Rollers for firming the seed bedbefore and after seeding shall weigh not more than 65 lbs. per ft. of width. Cultipakes or similarequipment may be used in one operation to cover the seed and firm the seed bed after seeding.

E. Mulching: Mulch all seed areas with 2-tons of mulch per acre, or about one bale per 1000 sq. ft. togive a 1/2" cover. Hand or machine spread immediately after seeded areas have been rolled andwatered. Remove wind-swept mulch piles as necessary to prevent damage to grass stand.

3. 04 MAINTENANCE FOR SEEDED AREAS

A. Maintenance period shall begin immediately after seeding is completed for each area designated onPlan, and shall continue until all lawn areas have been fully accepted.

B. Maintenance shall include watering, weeding, fertilizing, disease and insect pest control, mowing,replacement of unacceptable material, and any other procedures to insure normal, vigorous, andhealthy growth.

C. Contractor to provide water for lawn as weather conditions dictate. During drought conditions, watershall be applied at a rate of 500 to 750 gals. per 1000 sq. ft. of lawn, once a week and all wateringshall be done in the late afternoon or early evening hours. Water shall be from Owner's source. Contractor shall provide and maintain at his expense, adequate connections, hoses, sprinklers, etc.with minimum leakage. Where use of hoses is not practical, Contractor shall water with a tank truckfilled at Owner's source. When Owner's water source is not available, Contractor shall include costof water from off site source in base bid.

D. Grass shall not be allowed to grow more than 4" in height during the maintenance period. Mowingheight to be set at l-3/4" to 2" unless otherwise directed.

E. Pick up of grass clippings shall be required during or immediately after each mowing, if clippings arean average of 1" or longer in length.

02930 - 3 of 4



F. Fertilizing shall occur at a rate of l75 lbs. per acre (4 lbs./1000 sq. ft.) after the second mowing, usingweed and feed mixture as specified. Weed and feed to be applied once during each consecutivegrowing season during maintenance period.

G. Contractor to repair bare or thin areas as required or replace sod as necessary. Restore bare areasby 1/4" to 1/2". Apply seed at a rate of 2 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. Roll with a light roller and cover with a1/2" mulch or pre-moistened peat moss.

H. Contractor will provide such barricades, temporary fencing, signs or policing as may be necessaryto eliminate or minimize damage to lawn. Contractor is responsible for all damage that occurs unlessdamage is beyond Contractor's control, Contractor will submit request for change order and providereasonable proof of damage.

3. 05 FINAL ACCEPTANCE FOR SEEDED AREAS

A. Final acceptance shall occur as determined by Architect after all lawn areas have had a minimum ofthree cuttings.

B. All provisions of this Specification shall be done to the complete satisfaction and approval of theArchitect before final acceptance.

C. Satisfactory stand of grass shall be required. All areas must be completed in coverage and vigorousin growth. All miscellaneous stones must be removed in order to not become a hazard during futuremowing before being acceptable to the Architect.


02930 - 4 of 4


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 02950 - LANDSCAPING WORK - PLANTING

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL


1. 02 SCOPE

Furnish all labor, material and equipment necessary to complete all planting as herein specified and/orshown on the Drawings.

1. 03 SUBMITTALS

Submit a list of proposed nurseries, from which plant materials will be obtained, and plant list within 60days of Contract Award by Owner. List must be approved by the Architect prior to shipping materials tothe job site.

1. 04 PLANT GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT

A. Plants shall be guaranteed and maintained for a period of one (1) year, beginning on the date whenall planting has initially been accepted. Initial acceptance shall occur at the end of a planting season. In addition, for a one (1) year period from the time of replacement.

B. Plant material shall be replaced in the same location only twice and then the Architect will determinewhether the plant material shall be relocated or deleted from the Contract, at no added cost to theOwner.

C. The time for replacing unsatisfactory plants shall be determined by the Architect, or no later than thenext succeeding planting season. Plants that are dead or that are in unhealthy or unsightly conditionor that have lost their natural shape due to dead branches, excessive pruning or inadequate orimproper maintenance, as determined by the Architect, shall be removed from the site and replacedwith plants as originally specified, at no cost to the Owner.

D. Where it is determined by the Architect that wildlife or storm damage has occurred to the trees orshrubs, the Contractor shall not be held responsible for the replacement of plant material damageddue to these conditions, except as noted in Part 3 of these Specifications.

1. 05 PLANT MATERIAL STANDARDS

A. Plant materials shall conform to American Association of Nurserymen and be planted in accordancewith methods specified in the NYSDOT Standard Specifications, Section 611.

B. Plant materials shall be of standard quality true to name and type and first class representative of theirspecies and variety.

C. Plant Type and Quality: 1. Plant material will be subject to inspection by the Architect for quality, size and color. Plants

lacking compactness or proper proportions, and plants which have thin and weak appearancewill not be accepted. Plants cut back from larger grades to meet specified requirements will berejected. Right is reserved by the Architect to reject plants as unsatisfactory.

02950 - 1 of 6



2. Plant material shall have normal, well-developed branches and a vigorous root system. Plantsshall be healthy, vigorous plants free from defects, decay, disfiguring roots, sunscald injuries,abrasions of the bark, plant disease, insect pest, eggs, borers and all other forms of infestations.

3. Deciduous shade trees shall be straight and symmetrical with a crown having a dominant mainleader. Where a clump is specified, a plant having a minimum of three (3) stems originating froma common base at the ground-line shall be furnished.

4. Diameter of trees less than 4" in caliper shall be measured 6" above ground level. Height ofcentral leader, measured from ground line shall be not less than specified.

1. 06 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions will not be permitted unless proof is submitted that specific plants or sizes areunobtainable after all resources have been exhausted.

B. Contractor will submit proposal for substitution(s), for Architect's approval, to be considered fornearest size or variety with equitable adjustment to Contract price.

1. 07 COOPERATION

Examine drawings and specifications for all Contracts to determine nature of proposed construction. Perform work to conform with construction called for in such a manner as not to interfere or delay workof other Contractors.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2. 01 TOPSOIL

Natural, fertile, granular soil, characteristic of productive soils in vicinity, uniform in composition andtexture, clean and free from subsoil, stones, weeds, stumps, roots, toxic substance and debris or similarsubstance 2" or more in greatest dimension.

2. 02 SOIL CONDITIONERS

A. Organic Material: Peat moss, acid reaction 4 to 5 pH, low in content of woody material and free frommineral matter harmful to plant life, water absorbing capacity 1100 to 2000 percent, moisture content30 percent, natural, shredded or granulated.

B. Fertilizer: Commercial fertilizer, partially organic, containing by weight 5 percent nitrogen, 20 percentphosphorous and 20 percent potash. Material uniform in composition, dry and free flowing and shallbe delivered to the site in original unopened containers, each bearing manufacturer's guaranteedanalysis.

C. Bone Meal: Bone meal shall be finely ground commercial raw bone meal with a minimum of 4percent nitrogen and a minimum of 20 percent phosphoric acid.

2. 03 GUYING MATERIALS

A. Stakes: 2" x 2" x 8 ft., uniform hardwood stake.

B. Hose: For bark protection, new or used two-ply fiber bearing rubber garden hose, not less than 1/2"inside diameter, 3/4" outside diameter.

02950 - 2 of 6



C. Wire for Tree Support: Not less than 11 gauge pliable galvanized wire for trees up to 3-l/2" caliper.

D. Turnbuckles: 5/l6" x 3" long, galvanized - for trees 2-l/2" caliper to 3-l/2" caliper.

2. 04 WRAPPING MATERIAL FOR TREE TRUNKS

Waterproof, equal to 30-30-30-Krinklecraft, in 4" wide strips.

2. 05 TREE PAINT (Contractor's Option)

A. Ortho Pruning Sealer as manufactured by Chevron.

B. Treekote Tree Wound Dressing as manufactured by Walter E. Clark and Son.

2. 06 MULCH

A. Peat Moss

B. Hardwood Mulch

2. 07 PLANT MATERIALS

A. Plant materials furnished by Contractor shall mean trees, shrubs, vines and plants of all descriptions,in accordance with Plans and as specified. All plant material will be inspected and approved by theArchitect prior to planting.

B. Plant materials shall comply with State and Federal laws relating to inspection for diseases and insectinfestation.

C. Substitutions will not be permitted unless proof is submitted that specific plants or sizes areunobtainable. Contractor will submit proposal for Architect's approval, to be considered for nearestsize or variety with equitable adjustment to Contract price.


3. 01 PLANTING PROCEDURE

A. Time of Planting: 1. Planting operations shall not occur at a time when:

a. Soil or backfill is frozen.b. Soil is saturated.

2. Planting seasons shall be as follows: a. Deciduous -March l5th to May 20th

October 1st to November 1st b. Evergreen -March l5th to May 20th

September 1st to November 1st

B. Contractor to stake out locations for all trees and outlines of planting bed areas for approval by theArchitect, prior to commencing with work.

02950 - 3 of 6



C. Planting Pits: 1. Pits to be dug as detailed on Drawing. Excavated soil from pits and beds shall be disposed of,

off-site by Contractor, unless otherwise directed by the Architect.2. Where surface or subsurface conditions (such as rock, underground construction work, tree

roots, etc.) prevent digging an individual pit to specified dimensions, notify Architect immediatelyfor further direction.

3. Where plant material is massed together, the whole planting area as outlined on Plan, shall beexcavated as detailed on Plan.

D. Planting Soil: Mixture of three (3) parts topsoil, onr (1) part manure and one (1) part peat by volume. Mix 10-6-4- fertilizer with prepared planting soil at a rate of 2 lbs. per cubic yard.

E. Delivery and Temporary Storage of Plants: When possible, all plant material shall be planted on theday of delivery. When this is not possible, the Contractor shall protect the stock not planted. Plantmaterial shall be protected from sun and drying winds, and shall be kept well watered.

F. Planting: 1. The Contractor is responsible for planting to correct grades and alignment and all plants shall be

set so that, when settled, they will bear the same relation to finished grade as they did beforebeing transplanted. No filling will be permitted around trunks or stems.

2. When the tree or shrub has been properly set, the pit shall be backfilled with the planting mixturespecified, in layers around the roots or ball. Each layer shall be carefully tamped in place in amanner to avoid injury to the roots or ball or to avoid disturbing the position of this plant. Eachplant should be thoroughly watered when the hole is two-thirds filled with soil, allowing soil tosettle around roots. After the water has been absorbed, the remainder of planting soil shall beplaced and tamped lightly to grade. Any settlement shall be brought to grade with planting soil. Prior to placing mulch, apply fertilizer as follows: a. Shade Tree - 2 lbs. per inch of caliper b. Ornamental Tree - 1 lb. per inch of caliper c. Deciduous Shrub - 1/4 lb. per foot height or spread d. Evergreen Tree and Shrub - 1/8 lb. per foot height spread respectively

For individual pits, a ring as detailed shall be formed around edge. For planting beds, a ringas detailed shall be formed around perimeter of bed.

3. 02 STAKING, GUYING AND WRAPPING

A. Shade, ornamental and evergreen trees to be supported and protected immediately after planting,as detailed and specified. The trunks of all deciduous trees greater than 6 ft. in height shall bewrapped from the ground line up to the lowest main branch. Overlap of wrapping shall be 1-1/2". Securely tie wrapping with twine in at least five places including top, middle and bottom.

B. Above (or Below) Grade Staking: 1. Bottom of stake to be set minimum l8" into undisturbed ground below plant pit. 2. Deciduous trees, greater than 1" caliper and/or 6 ft. height, and maximum 2-1/2 caliper and/or

l2 ft. to l4 ft. height: two (2) stakes, set opposite each other, one-line prevailing winter wind: noturnbuckles required.

3. Deciduous trees greater than 2-l/2" caliper to 6" caliper: three (3) stakes, set at equal angles,two (2) set on prevailing winter windward side: turnbuckles required for above ground staking.

4. Evergreen trees, up to a maximum 8 ft. height: two (2) stakes, set opposite to each other, andon line with prevailing winter wind: no turnbuckles required.

02950 - 4 of 6



3. 03 MULCHING

A. Ground cover to be mulched with peat moss or hardwood mulch.

B. Shrub pits and beds shall be mulched with 2" min. layer of mulch as specified, spread neatly and leftwith a uniform flat surface.

C. Tree pits shall be mulched with a 3" min. layer of mulch as specified, spread neatly and left with auniform flat surface.

D. After leveling mulch, soak to full depth.

E. When practicable, mulch shall be applied within two (2) days after planting.

3. 04 PRUNING AND REPAIR

Upon completion of planting, all shrubs and trees shall have been pruned and injuries repaired. Theamount of pruning shall be limited to the minimum number of cuts necessary to remove dead or injuredtwigs and branches. Prune approximately one-third of the total number of branches to compensate forthe loss of roots from planting. In no case, should the main leader be cut. Pruning shall be done in sucha manner as not to change the natural habit or shape of the plant. All cuts shall be made flush, leavingno stubs. Paint all cuts over 3/4" in diameter with tree paint as specified.

3. 05 PROTECTION

Contractor shall protect all adjacent trees, shrubs and lawns from damage at all times. If damage occurs,trees, shrubs or lawns shall be replaced or treated as necessary by the Contractor at his own expense.

3. 06 PLANT MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance shall commence immediately after planting is accomplished and shall continue for theguarantee period as specified.

B. Watering of plants is required during maintenance period as weather dictates.

C. Contractor shall control insects, fungus, and other diseases as often as required by means ofspraying with an approved insecticide or fungicide. Cultivation and removal of weeds is required inall planting beds, trenches and individual planting pits, and shall be done every two (2) weeks duringthe growing season. Under no circumstances are weeds and grass to be allowed to attain more than4" of growth. The cost of maintenance is to be included in the bid price.

D. Where known conditions exists regarding prevalent wildlife damage, the Contractor shall take thefollowing precautions during the guarantee period: 1. All shrubs shall be sprayed with "Thiram" as manufactured by Hopkins Agricultural Chemicals Co.

or "Hot Sauce" as manufactured by Miller Chemical Co. or approved equal. Spray shall beapplied to dormant or woody material only. Contractor shall periodically inspect the shrubsthroughout the winter to determine if re-spraying is required.

02950 - 5 of 6



2. In the fall, all deciduous trees great than 6 ft. in height, shall have the trunk wrapped from theground line up to the lowest main branch, with a vinyl tree wrap, as manufactured by Ross TreeWrap or approved equal. The vinyl tree wrap is to be placed over the paper tree wrap specified. Overlap of wrapping shall be 1-1/2". Securely tie wrapping with twine in at least five (5) placesincluding top, middle and bottom. The vinyl tree wrap shall be removed in the spring.

E. Contractor is required to prune as necessary and to re-adjust stakes, anchors and wires as necessaryduring the guarantee period.

F. Contractor shall fertilize all planting beds, trenches and individual planting pits with fertilizer specified. Refertilization shall occur once within a planting season. 1. For fall planting, refertilization will not be required until the following spring. 2. For spring planting, refertilization will be required for the fall.

G. If any tree or shrub is changed from its proper elevation or position, it shall be shifted, or raised to theproper level and not merely filled in with additional topsoil.

3. 07 CLEAN-UP OPERATIONS

A. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall clear the site of all debris and superfluous materialsand equipment, to the satisfaction of the Owner and Architect.

B. At the completion of the guarantee/maintenance period, all tree wrappings, stakes, guy wires,watering saucers, etc. shall be removed by the Contractor unless otherwise directed in writing by theArchitect.


02950 - 6 of 6

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE

ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 03200 – CONCRETE REINFORCING

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1. 02 SUMMARY

AA.. Work includes all Concrete Reinforcing required by the Contract, and, in general, includes thefollowing items:1. Reinforcing and accessories for cast-in-place concrete.22.. Submittals.

B. Related Sections (the following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section)1. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete pavement and walks.

1. 03 SUBMITTALS

A. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, preparedaccording to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade,bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concretereinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.

B. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

C. Material Data: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies withrequirements:1. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.

1. 04 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Work under this Section shall conform to the following, except as modified herein.1. American Concrete Institute, ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete,

Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), Manual of Standard Practice.3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), Standard Specifications and Methods for

Testing.4. Specifications for Structural Concrete, ACI 301.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."

PART II - PRODUCTS

2. 01 MATERIALS

A. Steel bar reinforcing, deformed billet steel bars conforming to ASTM A 615 Grade 60, or of thegrade indicated on the drawings.

B. Steel mesh reinforcing, welded fabric of cold drawn steel wire, ASTM A 185.

03200 - 1 of 3



C. Reinforcing accessories, of suitable types and adequate size to support reinforcing and preventdisplacement during concrete placing.1. Reinforcing accessories including chairs, high chairs, slab bolsters, spacers, screeds, etc.,

which are in contact with form surfaces where the concrete will be exposed or painted, shallbe all plastic or have preformed plastic tips of a color compatible with the color of theconcrete. Richmond Screw Anchor Corp., Dayton-Superior.

D. Wire for tying, not less than 16 gauge annealed cold drawn, ASTM A82. Galvanized for pours atexterior locations.

E. Steel cross wire clips, welded to 2 continuous longitudinal tie wires, for wrapping structural steelflanges. Reed Clips #040 rigid type by Richmond Screw Anchor Corp. or equal.

F. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length withends square and free of burrs.


3. 01 REINFORCING INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before

placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and supportreinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossingreinforcing bars.1. Shop- or field-weld reinforcement according to AWS D1.4, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimizesagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing.

F. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlapswith wire.

G. Steel reinforcement is to be formed and installed as shown, specified or required. Straightening orrebending at the site is prohibited.1. Position reinforcement accurately and secure rigidly against displacement.2. Support reinforcement to keep away from exposed surfaces of the concrete.3. Furnish and properly place all bolsters, ties, spacers, chairs, supports and all other required

devices and accessories.

H. The minimum concrete covering reinforcing is to be as specified in ACI Building Code.Requirements for Reinforced Concrete as follows:

1. Footings and structural members in which concrete is deposited against the ground, not lessthan 3".

03200 - 2 of 3



2. Concrete surfaces exposed to weather or in contact with the ground, not less than 2" for barslarger than No. 5, and 1-1/2" for No. 5 and smaller bars.

3. Concrete surfaces not exposed directly to weather or in contact with ground, not less than3/4" for slabs and walls not less than 1-1/2" for beams, girders and columns.

I. The minimum clear distance between parallel bars except in columns, shall not be less than thenominal diameter of bar, 1-1/3 times maximum size of aggregate or 1".

J. Splices to conform to ACI 318.1. The minimum lap splice lengths as per appropriate CRSI latest issue of

Reinforcing Bar Splices.2. Fabric lapped splices shall be made so that the overlap measured between outer most cross

wires of each fabric sheet is not less than the spacing of the cross wires plus 2 inches.3. All splices securely wire tied.

K. Dowels from walls to slabs may be installed straight and field bent provided ACI bend radius ismaintained. Straightening and rebending of dowels is prohibited.

L. Reinforcing reviewed by this Contractor prior to placing concrete.

M. Electrical conduit which has to be placed in concrete slabs shall be installed after and abovebottom reinforcing, but before and under the top reinforcing.1. Cross-over of conduit, where necessary, locate so that reinforcing is not displaced from its

specified position.2. Conduit or outlet boxes shall not be placed in concrete columns.

N. Slabs and topping, unless otherwise shown on drawings, shall be reinforced with not less than 6 x6 - W1.4 x W1.4 welded wire mesh.


03200 - 3 of 3

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 03220 - WELDED WIRE FABRIC

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL


1. 02 SUMMARY

A. The following items are specifically included without limiting the generality implied by thesespecifications and the drawings. 1. Furnish and install welded wire fabric as described in Contract Documents for use in

reinforcing slabs other than interior elastomer grade.


A. Welded steel wire fabric in flat sheets for concrete reinforcement meeting requirements of ASTMA185-88, "Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement".1. Style: 6x6 - W1.4 x W1.4.


03220 - 1 of 1


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 03260 - ANCHORS AND INSERTS

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL


1. 02 SUMMARY

Products furnished but not installed under this Section: Concrete anchors and inserts not specifiedelsewhere.

1. 03 SUBMITTALS

Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation recommendations for each item.

PART II - PRODUCTS 2. 01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. The Burke Company, San Mateo, California.

B. Dayton Superior Corporation, Miamisburg, Ohio.

C. Gateway Engineering Company, Chicago, Illinois.

D. Richmond Screw Anchor Co., Inc., Fort Worth, Texas.

PART III - EXECUTION 3. 01 INSTALLATION

A. Space supports as required to prevent sagging of rebar and/or weld wire mesh.

B. Install according to manufacturer's instructions.


03260 - 1 of 1


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 03265 - WATERSTOPS

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL


1. 02 SUMMARY

Products furnished but not installed under this Section: Furnish PVC waterstops for foundation footingsand walls as described in Contract Documents.

1. 03 SUBMITTALS

Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation recommendations for each item.


Extruded from elastomeric polyvinychloride to meet requirements of U.S. Corps. of EngineersSpecification C-572-63.

2. 02 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. A-H PVC Waterstop by Anti-Hydro Co., Newark, New Jersey.

B. Durajoint by Electrovert, Inc., Mt. Vernon, New York.

C. Plastigrip by Progress Unlimited, Inc., New York, New York.

D. Vinylex Waterstop by Vinylex Corp., Knoxville, Tennessee.

E. Sealtight by W.R. Meadows, Inc., Elgin, Illinois.


03265 - 1 of 1

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 03300 – CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE

03300 - 1 - of 15

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL The drawings, Instructions to Bidders, Form of Proposal, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 are included herein and govern work under this section. 1.02 SCOPE A. This Section is subject to applicable requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Work includes all Cast In Place Concrete required by the Contract, and, in general, includes

the following items:

1. Cast-in-place concrete for the building, plain and reinforced, as shown, indicated and specified

2. Minor hand excavation, trimming, cleaning and tamping required for setting forms and placing concrete.

3. Build into concrete items furnished under other sections. 4. Concrete recess at refrigerator units as shown. 5. Formwork. 6. Miscellaneous concrete. 7. Concrete floor topping. 8. Non-slip aggregate concrete surfaces. 9. Submittals. 10. Vapor retarder

C. Related Work: 1. Machine excavation, under the Section for Earthwork. 2. Hand excavation, under the Section for Concrete Formwork.

3. Concrete curbs and walks, under Division 2. 4. Concrete foundations for mechanical equipment, under Division 15 or 16, unless specified under Scope above. 5. Leveling plates and anchor bolts for structural steel framing, furnished under the section for structural steel, installed under the Section for Concrete Formwork.

6. Perimeter insulation furnished and installed under Section for Building Insulation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Test reports of all test specified to be transmitted to Engineer, with copies to the Owner. B. Concrete mix designs for each type of concrete to be used including special mixes for

concrete to be pumped. C. Certified sieve analysis of fine and each class of coarse aggregate submitted to Engineer

for review prior to use. All cost at the expense of the Contractor.


03300 - 2 - of 15

1.04 TESTING OF CONCRETE & DESIGN MIXES

A. During the progress of the work, compression test specimens shall be made and cured by a Testing Laboratory, selected by the Contractor and approved by the Owner in accordance with the "Standard Method of Making and Curing Compression and Flexure Test Specimens in the Field" (ASTM C31). Not less than four (4) specimens, two (2) for seven day and two (2) for twenty-eight day tests, shall be made for each test, nor less than one (1) test for 50 cubic yards of concrete of each class or fraction thereof placed in one (1) day.

B. Specimens shall be cured under laboratory conditions except that when, in the opinion of

the Architect, there is a possibility of the surrounding air temperatures falling below 40 degrees F. and may require additional specimens to be cured under job conditions.

C. Specimens shall be tested in accordance with the Standard Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Molded Cylinders (ASTM C39).

D. Slump tests and entrained air tests shall be conducted by the General Contractor for

every truck load and/or as frequently as may be required to assure that no concrete shall have more that the specified slump and contain the specified allowable air content. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Architect or his representative and each test shall be made by the same representative of the Contractor.

E. All cylinders, air content tests and slump tests shall be made by qualified personnel

acceptable to the Architect.

F. The standard age test shall be 28 days, but day tests may be used provided that the relation between seven (7) day and twenty-eight (28) day strengths of the concrete is established by tests for the materials and proportions used.

G. If the average strength of the laboratory cured field cylinder for any portion of the structure

falls below the compressive strengths called for on the plans, the Architect shall have the right to require conditions of temperatures and moisture necessary to secure the required strength and may require tests in accordance with "Standard Methods of Securing Pre-Strengths" (ASTM C42) or order load tests to be made on the portions of the building so affected.

H. If the average strength of the laboratory cured field cylinders falls below the compressive

strength called for, the concrete covered by these tests shall be assumed as inadequate for the structures and the Architect may require that load tests be placed on the member of the structure in question. Loading shall be in accordance with Section 228.1R-89 of the ACI Building Code. Requirements for reinforced concrete and the method of loading and conducting the test shall be submitted in advance to the Architect for his approval. If the tested portion of the structure does not fulfill the requirements of the test, it shall be deemed to have failed and shall be removed and replaced. The Architect reserves the right to reject substandard concrete work as indicated by hardened concrete field cylinders regardless of the results of the load tests.


03300 - 3 - of 15

I. When job cylinders have been required by the Architect and the average strength of the

job cured cylinders falls below the required strength, the Architect shall have the right to require conditions of temperature and moisture necessary to secure the required strength and may require tests in accordance with the "Standard Methods of Securing, Preparing and Testing Specimens of Hardened Concrete for Compressive Flexural Strengths" (ASTM C42) or order load tests to be made on the portions of the building so affected.

J. All costs of all concrete testing, load tests and core tests shall be borne by this Contractor

whether or not the portion tested meets the test requirements.

K. The laboratory shall furnish copies of all tests as follows: Architect's Office 2 copies Architect's Structural Engineer 1 copy General Contractor 2 copies Concrete Supplier 1 copy

L. At the end of each week, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect, a record showing the results of all slump and air tests made during the previous week. This record shall indicate the location in the project where this particular concrete was used

1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Store materials properly to prevent damage, deterioration, and inclusion of foreign matter.

Aggregate shall be stockpiled in a well-drained location. Separate each gradation and pile to prevent segregation of sizes within gradation.

B. Packaged materials shall be delivered in original unopened containers and stored in a

weatherproof enclosure. C. Damaged or deteriorated materials are not acceptable and shall be removed from site. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. No concrete shall be placed when the temperature is below 40 degrees F except to

complete a pour already begun, unless protection is provided as specified for cold weather protection.

1.06 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Work under this Section shall conform to following, except as modified herein: 1. American Concrete Institute, ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced

Concrete. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), Standard Specifications and

Method of Testing. 3. Specifications for Structural Concrete, ACI 301.

4. Specifications for hot weather concreting, ACI 305R. 5. Specifications for cold weather concreting, ACI 306R.


03300 - 4 - of 15

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Portland cement, approved standard brand, ASTM C150, Type I. Specified cement shall conform to all tests.

1. All cement for site mixing is to be delivered to the site in sacks bearing name and brand of the manufacturer.

2. One brand and color of cement is to be used for all concrete work exposed in the structure.

B. Air entraining admixture, ASTM C260.

C. Fine aggregate is to be clean, sharp, uncoated grains of natural sand, free from loam, clay, organic impurities, frozen material, in compliance with ASTM C 33. After approved, no change is to be made in source of supply without written approval of Engineer. Grading as follows: Passing 3/8" Sieve 100% Passing No. 4 Sieve 95 to 100% Passing No. 8 Sieve 80 to 100% Passing No. 16 Sieve 50 to 85% Passing No. 30 Sieve 25 to 60% Passing No. 50 Sieve 10 to 30% Passing No. 100 Sieve 2 to 10%

D. Coarse aggregate is to be hard, clean, crushed limestone, free from adherent coatings,

friable pieces, organic impurities, in compliance with ASTM C 33. After approval, no change in source of supply without written approval of Engineer. Gravel meeting above specifications is acceptable. Grading as follows:

Nom.Size 2" 1-1/2" 1" 3/4" 1/2" 3/8" No.4 No.8 1-1/2" 100 95-100 35-70 10-30 0-5 3/4" 100 90-100 20-55 0-10 0-5 1/2" 100 90-100 40-70 0-15 0-5 E. Abrasive aggregate for non-slip finish, A-H Emery Grits of A-H Products, Non-slip

Aggregate of Euclid Chemical Co., Frictex of Sonneborn-Comtech. F. Water shall be potable, clean, free from oil, acids, vegetable matter, alkalies, salts or other

injurious substances. G. Surface hardener and dustproofing compound shall be Lapidolith of Sonneborn, Armortop

of A-H Products, Saniseal of Master Builders.


03300 - 5 - of 15

H. Joint filler shall be remolded, resilient non-extruding type, 1" thick unless shown otherwise, full depth of concrete section, in compliance with ASTM D994.

I. Paper for concrete curing and protection shall comply with ASTM C171. J. Curing compound, clear or translucent with fugitive dye, ASTM C309, Type 1. The

compound of type shall not stain or discolor finish concrete surfaces or make surface unsatisfactory for paint finish or resilient floor adhesion. Kure-N-Seal of Sonneborn-Comtech, 3-way Sealer of Anti-Hydro, Masterseal of Master Builders.

K. Leveling material for leveling concrete slabs shall be latex based, No. 180 Chemical Set

Underlayment Cement of Armstrong Cork co., Levelite-Latex of Selby Battersby & Co., Dependable Crack Filler of Dependable Chemical Co.

2.02 PROPORTIONS OF CONCRETE A. Concrete shall be composed of standard Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse

aggregate, water and approved admixtures. B. Required specified strength (f'c) at 28 days as follows: Maximum Class Agg. Size f'c 1 1-1/2" 3,000 psi 2 3/4" 3,000 psi 3 3/4” 4,000 psi 4 1/2” 3,000 psi 5 ¾” 5,000 psi C. Proportions of concrete ingredients shall be established on basis of C1, C2, or C3 as follows: 1. Selection of Concrete Proportions by Field Experience. Where the concrete

production facilities has a record, based on at least 30 consecutive strength tests representing similar materials and conditions to those expected, the strength used as the basis for selecting proportions shall exceed the required f'c by at least:

400 psi if the standard deviation is less than 300 psi

550 psi if the standard deviation is 300 to 400 psi 700 psi if the standard deviation is 400 to 500 psi 900 psi if the standard deviation is 500 to 600 psi Strength data for determining standard deviation shall be considered to comply with the foregoing stipulations if they represent either a group of at least 30 consecutive tests or the statistical average for two groups totaling 30 or more tests. The tests used to establish standard deviation shall represent concrete produced to meet a specified strength or strengths within 1,000 psi of that specified for the proposed work. Changes in materials and proportions within the population of background tests shall not have been more closely restricted than they will be for the proposed work. If the standard deviation exceeds 600 psi or if a suitable record of strength


03300 - 6 - of 15

test performance is not available, proportions shall be selected to produce an average strength at least 1200 psi greater than the required f'c.

2. Selection of Concrete Proportions by Laboratory Trial Batches.

Laboratory trial batches may be used as a basis for selecting concrete proportions provided a water cement compressive strength curve is established with at least three points representing batches which produce strengths above and below that required. Each point on the curve shall represent the average of at least three specimens tested at 28 days or an earlier age when approved by the Engineer. The slump and air content of the batches shall be the maximums permitted by this specification.

3. Maximum Permissible Water Cement Ratios for Concrete (when strength data from trial batches or field experience are not available)

Specified Compressive

Strength Concrete f'c, psi

Maximum Permissible Water-Cement Ratio

Non-Air Entrained Concrete Air Entrained Concrete

Absolute Ratio by Weight

U.S. gal. Per 94 lb. bag of cement

Absolute Ratio By Weight

U.S. gal. Per 94 lb. bag of cement

3000 0.58 6.6 0.46 5.2 4000 5000

0.44 0.42

5.0 4.7

0.35 0.32

4.0 3.8

4. Cement content, except as specified under paragraph for "Admixtures", as follows: a. 3,000 psi concrete, not less than 5-1/2 sacks or 517 pounds of cement. b. 4,000 psi concrete, not less than 6 sacks or 564 pounds of cement. c. 5,000 psi concrete, not less than 6-1/2 sacks or 611 pounds of cement.

5. Cement at a temperature in excess of 140 degrees F shall not be used in mixing

concrete. a. Slump of concrete mixes as follows:

Type of Construction Maximum Slump Minimum Slump

Reinforced foundation wall and footings 4" 2" Slabs 4" 3"

Topping 3” 2”

b. For pumped concrete, the specified slumps above are to be measured at the discharge end.


03300 - 7 - of 15

2.03 TRIAL MIXES A. Trial mix batches, made by Contractor, all costs at expense of Contractor. 1. Two test cylinders shall be made from each mix and broken at seven days. No

concrete shall be placed on job until tests have shown 70 percent of design strength at seven days.

2. No changes allowed on received mix design. Re-submittals are required for any changes.

2.04 MIXING CONCRETE A. Measurements of cement, fine and coarse aggregate, shall be made separated by weight,

upon suitable devices, accurate to 1% of net load being weighed. Weighing equipment shall be arranged to permit making compensation for changes required due to moisture contained in aggregate.

1. Water shall be measured by a device, accurate to 1% plus or minus, of the total amount of water required per batch.

2. Water in the aggregate shall be included in quantity specified and subtracted from the amount added to the mixture. Moisture determinations shall be made on representative samples at least once each day and when appearance of aggregate or mixed concrete indicates a change.

3. Volumetric measurement of aggregate is not permitted except for small amount of concrete.

B. Machine mix all concrete at site, conforming to ASTM C 94. 1. The Contractor is responsible for production of concrete having the specified slump

for each pour. Concrete failing to conform to this requirement shall be rejected. 2. Concrete showing any evidence of setting up in the mixer or rotating container shall be rejected. 3. Water used for washing out the truck mixer after unloading, must be discharged and

is not permitted for use in wetting next batch. C. Rejected concrete may not be reworked and must be removed from the site.

D. Site mixed concrete by a batch mixer not smaller than one cubic yard capacity, mixed not

less than one minute after all materials are in the drum. 1. Rotation of the drum shall be between 190 and 210 peripheral feet per minute.

Speeding up the rotation of the drum is not acceptable for a reduction in time. 2. Raw materials are not permitted to enter drum until preceding batch has been

entirely discharged. E. Ready-mixed concrete shall be completely discharged within 1-1/2 hours, or before the

drum has revolved 300 revolutions, whichever comes first. The starting time shall be considered to be the time at which the mixing water is introduced to the cement aggregate mixer. 1. In hot weather or under conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete, prevent premature drying in accordance with ACI Standard 305. 2. When a truck mixer is used for complete mixing of concrete, mixer operation shall begin within 30 minutes after cement intermingled with aggregate.


03300 - 8 - of 15

2.05 ADMIXTURES A. An air entraining admixture shall be included for all concrete used for walls, piers and

footings. All concrete which is exposed to the weather shall also be air entrained including slabs and stairs. Mix in proportions as recommended by manufacturer.

1. The air entraining admixture, where specified or approved for use, shall produce a total entrained air content between 4% and 6% by volume, as determined by direct

measurement or by test method ASTM C 138. B. Admixtures for plasticizing and densifying, may be used provided the concrete shall have a

compressive strength at seven and twenty eight days not less than those specified and also provided it complies with water-cement ratio requirements. If admixtures are used, they shall be included in the mix design.

1. Admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494. Plastiment of Sika Chemical Corp., Pozzolith of Master Builders.

2. The cement content of concrete having the admixture, except for integral waterproofed concrete may be reduced as follows:

a. 3,000 psi concrete, from 5-1/2 to 5 sacks of cement. b. 4,000 psi concrete, from 6 to 5-1/2 sacks of cement. c. 5,000 psi concrete, from 6-1/2 to 6 sacks of cement. 3. Submit acceptable documentary data with the material submitted for review, with

evidence that the admixture increases the durability of concrete when subject to freezing, thawing, and corrosion, and that the admixture has been used in similar work for not less than five years.

2.06 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Expansion Joint Filler: Thermosetting plastic with closed cell construction of thickness

shown on plans. B. Expansion Joint Sealer: One component elastomeric butyl caulking compound. C. Vapor Retarder: Vapor Block – VBLP15, Low Perm 15mil Co-Extruded Polyolefin, ASTM

E1745-96 (Class B) as manufactured by Raven Industries or equivalent. D. Floor Weatherproofing: Apply to new and existing concrete slab. Penetrating Sealer #40

V.O.C. as manufactured by L. Sonneborn & Sons, Inc. E. Crack Sealer: Epolith-P as manufactured by L. Sonneborn Building products. F. Spauling Concrete: Sono-Patch as manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products. G. All products are to be installed per manufacturers recommendation and be verified that

each is compatible with material it will be in contact with. PART III – EXECUTION


03300 - 9 - of 15

3.01 INSPECTION A. Forms and reinforcing inspected by the Contractor prior to placing any concrete. 3.02 PREPARATION A. All equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned before each run. Discharge the wash water

outside of the forms. B. Before placing any concrete, check the reinforcing, accessories and sleeves, for position.

Forms shall be properly oiled and free of debris and water. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A. Convey, transport and place the concrete as rapidly as practical, without segregation or loss

of ingredients and without unnecessary handling, to produce a monolithic structure free from pits, honeycombed areas and visible lines of juncture.

1. The formwork is to be free of ice and snow. 2. Deposit the concrete continuously in horizontal lifts not over 18" deep in a manner to

prevent displacement of reinforcing. Avoid accumulating concrete on the reinforcing and forms above the level of fresh concrete.

3. Place each section of concrete in a single, complete and continuous pour. 4. Use chutes and trunks of sufficient number and variable lengths so that concrete

does not free fall over 4'-0". Keep the surface of the concrete practically level at all times. Flow the concrete over 4'-0" from the point of deposit.

5. Vibrate concrete for slabs and floors to a solid mass and screed to carefully leveled grounds using a straight edge. Place concrete in order to allow finishing in daylight.

6. Spade and work coarse aggregate away from forms, work concrete around reinforcing to avoid air pockets, voids and honeycomb sections.

7. The use of a vibrator is recommended, applied directly to concrete, to cause the concrete to settle into place. Duration of vibration, not excessive to cause segregation of mix. Flowing the concrete more than four feet with a vibrator is prohibited. Supplement vibration by hand spading in corners and angles of forms and along form surfaces.

B. Use Class I concrete for footings and mass concrete, formed and reinforced as shown.

Check the setting of anchor bolts for base plates. The anchor bolts shall be accurately set and held in place with templates. Hold the top surface of concrete 1" below the bottom of the base plate for grout.

C. Use Class 2 concrete for walls including under walls and slabs on ground. The top

surface is to be true, uniform and level, without pockets, depressions, lumps, ridges or waves.

1. Slabs on grade are to have 6 mil. or greater vapor retarder with 6” lap joints. Place vapor retarder on sand bead to reduce risk of vapor retarder penetration.

2. Concrete slabs which are supported on steel beams and joists, place and screed to a level and true finished elevation compensating for dead load deflection of supporting steel members or forms. Contact Engineer for approximate dead load deflection of the floor system.


03300 - 10 - of 15

3. Pitched slabs evenly to floor drains where indicated. 4. Accurately set screeds and remove before the initial set. 5. Slabs which are to receive ceramic tile, terrazzo or concrete topping shall be

screeded to level surface. 6. Slabs which are to receive wood floor finish shall be wood floated to smooth level

finish within tolerance of 1/8" in a 10'-0" radius. All discrepancies in level shall be corrected by grinding or other methods.

7. Finish concrete floors in spaces and areas indicated on Room Finish Schedule to be concrete, resilient tile, carpeting or thin set ceramic tile by mechanically floating and trowelling as specified for Concrete Floor Finishes.

8. Each pour of slabs on grade shall be limited to approximately 900 square feet and not more than 35'-0" in the longest dimension. Try to locate joints in slabs under partitions.

9. Do not sprinkle dry cement or a mixture of dry cement and sand on the surface to absorb moisture and to stiffen the mix.

D. Use Class 3 concrete for outside ramps and platforms and where indicated on drawings. E. Use Class 4 concrete for topping of slabs. 1. Clean the slab surfaces thoroughly of all dust and dirt immediately before placing

the topping. Slush all surfaces with neat Portland cement grout to insure good bond.

2. Tamp and spade topping to a solid mass. Screed the top surface to carefully leveled grounds, finish as specified for Concrete Floor Finish.

F. Use Class 5 concrete for deep beams along col. Lines 5.1, 6 and 8 where shown on drawing between 2

nd and 3

rd floor levels.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide for test cylinders, from each pour of 50 cubic yards or less, and more frequently if

required by the Owner. 1. For each set of four cylinders, two shall be broken at 7 days and two at 28 days. 2. The sampling method shall be in compliance with ASTM C 172. 3. The marking and curing of specimens shall be in compliance with ASTM C 31. 4. The testing method shall be in compliance with ASTM C 39. 5. Laboratory tests will be reviewed by the Engineer. All costs will be borne by the

Owner. B. If any of test cylinders show low results, cored samples will be required for retesting.

All costs for removal, replacement, and testing of the faulty work shall be borne by the Contractor with no additional cost to the Owner.

3.05 CONSTRUCTION AND CONTROL JOINTS A. Place the concrete so as to minimize the number of construction joints. The type, number

and location of construction joints in each member, unit or section of the structure are subject to the review of the Engineer prior to placing the concrete.

1. No horizontal construction joints will be permitted except at top of the footings.


03300 - 11 - of 15

2. Construction joints shall be made watertight, poured with a key, and caulked or where detailed provide water stops. Water stops shall be spliced and installed as recommended by manufacturer.

3. Reinforcing shall be as shown or specified, continuous through all construction joints.

4. Construction joints in slabs, beams, or girders shall be located near the center of the span. For girders receiving beams near the center of span, the construction joint shall be located a distance equal to twice the beam width.

5. Prior to continuing placing concrete at joints, the concrete shall be roughened, thoroughly cleaned, wetted, and spread with neat Portland cement grout.

B. Control joints shall be provided where required by drawings, consisting of V-shaped

moldings secured to forms each face to provide V-notch in concrete wall. C. Construction Joints: Located by contractor with Architect's approval, except where specifically located on plans. 1. No horizontal joints in walls. 2. Before continuing a pour at a joint, remove all laitance, thoroughly soak old concrete, and slush with 1.1 grout. 3. Reinforcing continuous across joint. 4. Provide keyways in all construction joints. D. Maximum length of pour between construction joints: Slabs on ground 40 feet Slabs above grade 40 feet E. Expansion Joints: As located and shown on drawings, 30 ft. maximum length of pour between expansion joints. 1. Use Burke Keyed Kold Joint (or Architect approved equal) installed per manufacturer's recommendation. 2. Caulk using expansion joint sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Control Joints: Maximum distance between joints: Slabs on ground 20 feet, either direction Slabs above grade 20 feet, either direction Control joints may be tooled (or saw cut) one quarter of slab depth.

3.06 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES A. Float all floor slabs which require finishing while the concrete is still green but hardened

sufficiently to bear the finisher's weight using a metal disc power machine. 1. No floating will be permitted while surface is wet, soft or sloppy. 2. Care shall be exercised and the operation of the machine controlled to prevent

overworking the finish and drawing excess mortar and water to surface. 3. The finishing machine shall be used for compaction and elimination of any voids.

Repeated operation over a given area other than to secure the necessary compaction is to be avoided.

4. For areas of slabs which cannot be mechanically floated, use wood or cork hand float.


03300 - 12 - of 15

5. Finish float surfaces to true uniform plane. Test the surface with a straight edge to detect high and low spots which shall be eliminated.

B. After floating, steel trowel the concrete to a smooth hard surface. 1. Provide second and subsequent trowellings as required to bring the surface to a

smooth, hard, and impervious surface free from marks and blemishes. C. For exterior slabs, platforms and where indicated, provide a broom finish. 1. Trowel the slab before broom finishing. Draw the broom across slab surface, slightly

overlapping previous passes. Corrugations in concrete shall be uniform and not over 1/8" deep.

2. Use a push broom or floor broom, at least 18" wide, with good quality fiber or rattan bristles at least 4" long. The broom handle shall be longer than 1/2 width of the slab.

3. Brooming shall be completed before the initial set of the concrete to prevent tearing or undue roughening of the surface.

D. Unless horizontal exposed edges and corners are indicated to have a curb bar nosing, finish

them with edging tool to form smooth rounded surface. 1. After floating and finishing slabs and platforms and before the concrete has reached

its initial set, tool all edges at forms, joints and corners. Finish to smooth true line free from tool marks.

E. Apply a minimum of three coats of hardener and dustproofing compound specified to

exposed concrete floors, applied as recommended by the manufacturer of compound used. The completed application shall be guaranteed to remain hard and dustproof for a period of three years after application.

F. Finish all concrete floors to a true, smooth and level surface or pitched to drains as required.

The surfaces shall be true to the designed datum plane within a tolerance of 1/8" in 10 ft. as determined by a 10 ft. straight-edge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction. All variations below this tolerance shall be leveled with latex cement as specified, mixed and installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions.

G. For concrete floors which will receive a waterproofing membrane, float finish to a true and

level or sloped surface as required. H. Provide non-slip aggregate concrete floor surfaces for ramps, stair treads, landings, and

where indicated. Apply abrasive aggregate in the amount of 25 lbs. Per 100 square feet of surface area. Apply as directed by manufacturer of aggregate.

3.07 CONCRETE FINISHES OTHER THAN FLOOR SLABS A. Unexposed vertical concrete surfaces shall have all metal ties removed back from the

surface at least 1". Depressions left from removed ties, fins, holes, water and air pockets, and honeycomb, etc., shall be pointed and patched with mortar of proportion to match the color of the concrete, but shall not be richer than one part Portland cement to three parts of sand.


03300 - 13 - of 15

B. Exposed vertical concrete surfaces in occupied areas shall have all metal ties removed.

Depressions shall be pointed and patched as specified above. 1. As soon as pointing and patching has set sufficiently, and not more than 24 hours

after the removal of the forms, exposed exterior surfaces shall be thoroughly wet and rubbed with No. 16 carborundum brick or other abrasive to provide smooth, even, uniform surface. Rub to final finish with No. 30 carborundum brick. No plastering or other coating will be allowed.

2. Exposed interior surfaces shall be pointed and patched as specified above, no rubbing required.

3. Concrete slabs other than finish floor slabs shall be screeded and floated to a smooth level or pitched surface as indicated.

C. Interior surfaces of the concrete swimming pool tank shall receive a medium rough

bushhammer finish. 3.08 EXTERIOR CONCRETE A. Install all curbs, slabs and sidewalks in accordance with the drawings. B. Repair and replace all curbs, sidewalks, slabs and other concrete work damaged in the execution of this contract. All to be done to match the existing or adjacent materials unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. C. All Concrete Work: 1. Thoroughly set subgrade before placing concrete. 2. Base course (where required): Place and compact. Thoroughly wet before placing concrete. 3. "Re-tamping" of mix not permitted. 4. Cure as soon as practical after finishing. Place curing paper and secure by weighing down with overlapping joints. Cure for five (5) days minimum. 5. Install no concrete after October l5 or before April unless other approved by Architect. D. Concrete Walks: 1. Place concrete over subgrade to exact finish grades shown. 2. Concrete slabs shall be minimum 4" unless specified elsewhere.

3. Expansion joints at 30 feet on center maximum: Install expansion joint filler between concrete walk and building, walls and curbing. Top of filler shall be 1/2" below finish surface of walk with expansion joint sealer filling remainder of joint flush with walk surface.

4. Control joints: Install saw cut (or tooled) joints one-quarter of slab depth (for slabs up to 4" deep. All control joints shall extend from edge to edge of concrete or to the face of all structures. 5. Finish: Screed to grade with wood float. Edge all sides. Broom finish in one direction.


03300 - 14 - of 15

3.09 PROTECTION AND CURING

A. Protect the concrete from injurious action of sun, rain, flowing water, frost, mechanical injury and premature drying.

B. Cure all surfaces to prevent early loss of moisture in the mixture and to develop the full

anticipated strength and durability of the concrete. 1. The horizontal surfaces of floors, slabs, platforms, etc., covered completely with

waterproof paper, joints lapped and sealed. Apply in strict accordance with directions of manufacturer of the waterproof paper used. The paper is to remain in place for seven days minimum.

2. Vertical surfaces shall be completely coated with the curing compound specified. C. Cold weather protection shall be provided by the Contractor for any concrete placed during

freezing weather. 1. Provide all necessary equipment for heating and protecting the concrete during

freezing and near freezing weather. 2. No frozen materials or materials containing ice or frost will be used. 3. The temperature of the concrete when deposited shall not be less than 50 degrees

F nor above 70 degrees F. 4. The temperature of the concrete shall be maintained above 50 degrees F for not less than five days after placing. For slabs, maintain heat for seven days after placing.

5. Keep the housing, covering and other protection in place for twenty four hours after the heating is discontinued.

6. Salt, chemicals, or other materials shall not be allowed to be mixed with the concrete to prevent freezing.

7. Methods of heating and protection shall conform to ACI 306R. 8. When concrete is placed in severe cold weather, the Engineer may require job

stored test cylinders cured under identical conditions be tested before supporting forms and shores are remove, in accordance with ACI Standard 306.

D. Hot weather protection which is provided by the Contractor for concrete placed during hot,

dry weather shall be in accordance with ACI Standard 305. E. Repairing and Patching: 1. Concrete not properly formed, showing defective surfaces when forms are

removed, or otherwise not in conformance with the drawings and specifications shall be entirely replaced or repaired. Plastering over the defects will not be allowed. Defective areas must be chipped out. The Architect shall decide whether to repair or replace, and shall be the judge as to whether or not repairs are satisfactory.

2. Remove bulges and projections by chipping or grinding. Honeycombed and other defective areas must be chipped out to solid concrete, the edges cut as straight as possible and at right angles to the surface or slightly undercut to provide a key at the edges of the patch.

3. Fill shallow patches with non-shrinking mortar of a type which will not rust or stain. Finish to match the surrounding concrete by floating, rubbing or tooling, or on formed surfaces, by pressing the form material against the patch while the mortar is still plastic.


03300 - 15 - of 15

4. Large deep patches may be filled with concrete held in place by forms. Such

patches shall be reinforced and dowelled to the hardened concrete. 5. Provide an approved bonding compound in holes before filling with mortar or

concrete. 6. Cure patches well, starting as soon as possible to avoid early drying. Prop wet

burlap against the patch for retention of water of hydration in the patch. Continuously moist cure all patches for seven (7) days minimum.

3.10 EXTRA CONCRETE WORK A. For concrete work added or concrete work omitted, Contract Price will be adjusted up or

down using the unit prices quoted or as specified in Contract Documents. 3.11 CLEAN UP A. Upon completion of work under this Section, remove all equipment, tools, excess materials,

rubbish and debris from site.

- - - END OF SECTION -

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 03410 - PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOWCORE PLANKS

03410 - 1 of 10

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes structural precast, prestressed concrete, including the following:

1. Hollow-core slab units

B. Related Sections (the following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section)

1. Cast-in-Place Concrete - Section 03300 2. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for joint filler

materials for fire-resistance-rated construction. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric joint sealants and sealant backings.

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide precast structural concrete units and connections capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Provide precast structural concrete units and connections capable of withstanding the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Dead Loads: self weight of precast plank and topping. 2. Live Loads: as noted on plans. 3. Earthquake Loads: per NYS Building Code of 2002

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix.

C. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of precast structural concrete units. Indicate member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, cross sections, openings, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement. 1. Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail loose and cast-in hardware, inserts, connections, and joints, including accessories. 2. Indicate locations and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in other construction.

3. Design steel plank support headers when such headers are determined necessary by the manufacturer’s engineer.

4. Comprehensive engineering analysis signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation, registered in the state that the project is located in.

a. Include calculated fire-resistance analysis. b. All dead, live and other applicable loads used in the design.

D Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. Welder

qualifications in accordance with AWS D1.1.


03410 - 2 of 10

E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of the following for compliance with requirements indicated. Material test reports are not required from PCI-Certified plants. However test reports must be retained for audit.

F. Approvals: Submit 6 copies of erection drawings for approval prior to fabrication.

Fabrication not to proceed prior to receipt of approved drawings.

G. Design Deviations: 1. Design deviations will be permitted only after the Architect/Engineer’s written approval

of the manufacturer’s design supported by complete design calculations and drawings.

2. Design deviations shall provide installation equivalent to the basic intent without incurring additional cost to the owner.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications and standards, except as otherwise indicated.

1. ACI 301 "Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete". 2. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete".

3. PCI MNL 116, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Precast Concrete Products".

4. ASTM Specifications as referred to in Part 2 – products of this specification. B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed precast structural concrete work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that complies with the following requirements and is experienced in manufacturing precast structural concrete units similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Assumes responsibility for engineering precast structural concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional Engineer.

2. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of precast structural concrete that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

3. Participates in PCI's Plant Certification program and is designated a PCI-certified plant for Group C, Category C4.

4. Has sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the work.

D. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and the design recommendations of PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook--Precast and Prestressed Concrete." E. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality control recommendations, and camber and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 116, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products."


03410 - 3 of 10

F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel"; and AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."

G. Calculated Fire Resistance: Where indicated, provide precast structural concrete units whose fire resistance has been calculated according to ACI 216.1/TMS 0216.1, "Standard Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Concrete and Masonry Construction Assemblies," and is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide precast structural concrete units that comply

with the following requirements: 1. Fire-resistance-rated assemblies, which are indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory," from ITS's "Directory of Listed Products," or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency, are identical in materials and construction to those tested per ASTM E 119. G. Test Reports: Test reports on concrete and other materials shall be submitted upon

request.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Deliver precast concrete units to the project site in such quantities and at such times to

assure continuity of installation. Store units at the project site to ensure against cracking,

distortion, staining, or other physical damage, and so that markings are visible. Lift and

support units at designated lift points. Deliver anchorage items that are to be embedded

in other construction before start of such work. Provide setting diagrams, templates

instructions and directions as required for installation.

1.07 SEQUENCING

Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.

PART II – PRODUCTS

2.01 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM @615, Grade 60 or ASTM A706 weldable, unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Wire: Cold Drawn Steel: ASTM A82

C. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters,

chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing,

complying with CRSI recommendations.

2.02 PRESTRESSING STRANDS

A. Uncoated, 7-wire stress-relieved strand complying with ASTM A416. Use grade 250K or

270K, Low-relaxation strand.


03410 - 4 of 10

2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or Type Ill, of same type, and source.

B. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single

source for exposed concrete.

C. Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330.

D. Water: Potable or free from foreign materials in amounts harmful to concrete and

embedded steel.

E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with

other required admixtures.

F. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.

G. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B.

H. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.

I. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.

J. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G.

K. Plasticizing Admixture: ASTM C 1017.

L. Fly Ash Admixture: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.

M. Metakaolin Admixture: ASTM C 618, Class N.

N. Silica Fume Admixture: ASTM C 1240.

2.04 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS

A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Carbon-Steel Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold finished; AWS D1.1, Type A or B, with arc shields. C. Malleable Steel Castings: ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M). D. Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496 or ASTM A 706/A 706M. E. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. F. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel

structural bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.


03410 - 5 of 10

G. Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of nongalvanized steel items, except those surfaces to be embedded in concrete, according to requirements in SSPC-SP 3 and shop-apply lead and chromate free, rust-inhibitive primer, complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 25 according to SSPC-PA1. H. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. I. Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, plastic shims, and other accessories required to install precast structural concrete units. 2.05 BEARING PADS

A. Provide bearing pads for precast structural concrete units as follows: 1. Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100 percent

polychloroprene (neoprene) elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet, 50 to 70 Shore A durometer, minimum tensile strength 2250 psi (15.5 MPa) per ASTM D 412. Pads shall be non-leaching and support construction loads with no visible overall expansion.

2.06 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Normal-Weight Concrete: Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa). 2. Release strength: Minimum of 3,000 psi. 3. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40.

4. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal- weight concrete at point of placement having air content as follows, with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent: a. Air Content: 6 percent for 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) nominal maximum

aggregate size. 5. Use of calcium chloride or admixtures containing chlorides is not permitted.

2.07 GROUT MATERIALS

Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type 1, and clean, natural sand, ASTM

C 144. Mix at ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3 parts sand, by volume with minimum water

required for placement and hydration. Joints shall be completely filled without seepage over

adjacent surfaces. The grout shall achieve a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,000 psi.

Any Grout that seeps from the joint shall be completely removed before it hardens. 2.08 FABRICATION

A. Formwork: Accurately construct forms, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to concrete-placement operations and temperature changes and for pretensioning and detensioning operations. Maintain formwork to provide completed precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances.

1. Coat surfaces of forms with bond-breaking compound before reinforcement is placed. Provide commercial-formula, form-coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair

subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.


03410 - 6 of 10

2. Unless forms for precast, prestressed concrete units are stripped before detensioning, design forms so stresses are not induced in precast concrete units because of deformation or movement of concrete during detensioning.

B. Built-in Anchorages: Accurately position built-in anchorage devices and secure to

formwork. Locate anchorages where they do not affect position of main reinforcement or concrete placement. Do not relocate bearing plates in units unless approved by Architect.

C. Cast-in openings larger than 10 inches (250 mm) in diameter or 10 inches (250 mm) square according to Shop Drawings. Smaller holes may be field cut by trades requiring them, as approved by Architect. D. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy the bond with concrete. 2. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete-placement operations. Locate and support reinforcement by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required. 3. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverage for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

4. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

E. Prestress tendons for precast structural concrete units by either pretensioning or post tensioning methods. Comply with PCI MNL 116.

1. Delay detensioning until concrete has reached at least 70 percent of its compressive strength as established by test cylinders cured under the same conditions as concrete. 2. If concrete has been heat cured, detension while concrete is still warm and moist to avoid dimensional changes that may cause cracking or undesirable stresses. 3. Detension pretensioned tendons either by gradually releasing tensioning jacks or by heatcutting tendons, using a sequence and pattern to prevent shock or unbalanced loading.

F. Mix concrete according to PCI MNL 116 and requirements in this Section. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added. G. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in precast concrete units. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 116 for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. H. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 116. I. Comply with ACI 306.1 procedures for cold-weather concrete placement. J. Comply with ACI 305R recommendations for hot-weather concrete placement.


03410 - 7 of 10

K. Identify pickup points of precast concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint casting date on each precast concrete unit on a surface that will not show in finished structure.

L. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 116, by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. M. Product Tolerances: Fabricate precast structural concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and corners precise and true so each finished unit complies with PCI MNL 116 product tolerances. N. Finish formed surfaces of precast structural concrete as indicated for each type of unit, and as follows:

1. Standard Finish: Normal plant-run finish produced in forms that impart a smooth finish to concrete. Small surface holes caused by air bubbles, normal color variations, form joint marks, and minor chips and spalls will be tolerated. Major or unsightly imperfections, honeycombs, or structural defects are not permitted.

2. Commercial Finish: Remove fins and large protrusions and fill large holes. Rub or grind ragged edges. Faces are to be true, well-defined surfaces.

O. Recess prestressing tendons a minimum of 1/2 inch (13 mm), fill recesses with grout, and

apply a sack finish to vertical ends of precast concrete units.

2.09 HOLLOW SLAB UNITS

A. Precast prestressed concrete units, 48” wide (unless noted otherwise), with open voids

running full length of slabs, produced under a rigid factory-inspected process acceptable

to Architect.

B. Furnish units which are free of voids or honeycombs, with straight true edges and

surfaces.

C. Provide "Standard Finish" units unless otherwise indicated.

D. Manufacturer units of concrete materials which will provide a minimum 3500 psi

compressive strength at time of initial prestress and a 28-day compressive strength of

5000 psi.

E. Adequately reinforce slab units to resist transporting and handling stresses.

2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Strength of precast concrete units will be considered deficient if units fail to comply with

PCI MNL 116 requirements, including the following: 1. Units fail to comply with compressive-strength test requirements. 2. Reinforcement and prestressed tendons of units do not comply with fabrication requirements.

B. Testing: If there is evidence that the strength of precast concrete units may be deficient or

may not comply with PCI MNL 116 requirements, Owner will employ an independent testing agency to obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine compressive strength according to ASTM C 42.


03410 - 8 of 10

1. A minimum of three representative cores will be taken from units of suspect strength, from locations directed by Architect. 2. Cores will be tested, after immersion in water, in a wet condition per ACI 301 if units will be wet under service conditions. 3. Cores will be tested in an air-dry condition per ACI 301 if units will be dry under service conditions.

4. Strength of concrete for each series of 3 cores will be considered satisfactory if the average compressive strength is equal to at least 85 percent of the 28-day design compressive strength and no single core is less than 75 percent of the 28-day design compressive strength.

5. Test results will be made in writing on the same day that tests are performed, with copies to Architect, Contractor, and precast concrete fabricator. Test reports will include the following:

a. Project identification name and number. b. Date when tests were performed. c. Name of precast concrete fabricator. d. Name of concrete testing agency. e. Identification letter, name, and type of precast concrete unit or units represented by core tests; design compressive strength; type of break; compressive strength at break, corrected for length-diameter ratio; and direction of applied load to core in relation to horizontal plane of concrete as placed.

C. Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast concrete units comply with requirements, clean and dampen core holes and solidly fill with precast concrete mix that has no coarse aggregate, and finish to match adjacent precast concrete surfaces. D. Dimensional Tolerances: Units with dimensions smaller or larger than required and not complying with tolerance limits may be subject to additional testing.

1. Precast concrete units with dimensions larger than required will be rejected if the appearance or function of the structure is adversely affected or if larger dimensions interfere with other construction. Repair or remove and replace rejected units, as required, to comply with construction conditions.

E. Defective Work: Precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including strength, manufacturing tolerances, and finishes, are unacceptable. Replace with precast concrete units that comply with requirements.

PART III – EXECUTION

3.01 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING

A. Delivery and handling:

1. Hollowcore plank shall be lifted and supported during manufacturing, stockpiling,

transporting and erection operations only at the lifting or supporting points

designated by the manufacturer.

2. Transportation, site handling and erection shall be performed by qualified

personnel with acceptable equipment and methods.

B. Storage:

1. Store all units off ground on firm level surfaces with dunnage placed at bearing points.

2. Place stored units so that identification marks are discernable.


03410 - 9 of 10

3. Separate stacked units by dunnage across full width of each plank.

3.02 INSPECTION

Erector must examine supporting structure and conditions under which precast concrete

work is to be erected, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper

and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Erector. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Site access: Erection access suitable for cranes and trucks to move unassisted from

public roads to all crane working areas as required by erector, or otherwise indicated

herein, will be provided and maintained by the general contractor. Obstructing wires shall

be shielded or removed and, when applicable, snow removal and winter heat will be

provided by the general contractor.

B. The general contractor shall be responsible to provide true, level, bearing surfaces on all

field-placed bearing walls and other field-placed supporting members. Masonry wall

bearing surfaces shall be bond beams with properly filled and cured concrete.

A. After precast concrete units have been placed and secured, grout open spaces at

connections and joints with Cement Grout.

B. Bearing Pads: Install bearing pads as precast concrete units are being erected. Set pads on true, level, and uniform bearing surfaces and maintain in correct position until precast concrete units are placed.

C. Install precast structural concrete. Shore and brace precast concrete units to maintain location, stability, and alignment until permanent connections are installed. Members shall be properly aligned. Variations between adjacent members shall be reasonably leveled out by jacking, bolting or any other feasible method as recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Welding: Perform welding in compliance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.4, with qualified welders.

1. Protect precast concrete units and bearing pads from damage by field welding or cutting operations and provide noncombustible shields as required. 2. Repair damaged metal surfaces by cleaning and applying a coat of galvanized repair paint to galvanized surfaces. 3. Repair damaged metal surfaces by cleaning and repriming damaged painted surfaces.

E. Fasteners: Do not use drilled or powder-actuated fasteners for attaching accessory items to precast, prestressed concrete units unless approved by Architect. F. Erection Tolerances: Install precast concrete units level, plumb, square, and true, without exceeding the recommended erection tolerances in PCI MNL 127, "Recommended Practice for Erection of Precast Concrete."


03410 - 10 of 10

G. Grouting Connections and Joints: After precast concrete units have been placed and secured, grout open spaces at keyways, connections, and joints as follows:

1. Provide forms or other approved method to retain grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it hardens.

3.04 CLEAN UP

A. Remove rubbish and debris resulting from hollowcore plank work from premises upon completion.

3.05 SAFETY

A. The general contractor shall provide and maintain all safety barricades, rebar caps and opening covers required for plank in accordance with current industry standards.

3.06 ACCEPTANCE

A. All defective units shall be repaired by the Precast supplier to meet satisfaction of the

Architect/Engineer.

B. Units deemed "not repairable" shall be removed form the site and replaced at the cost of

the precast manufacturer.



ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 03545 - GYPSUM CEMENTITIOUS UNDERLAYMENT

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL


1. 02 SCOPE

Furnish all materials, labor and accessories to complete installation for Gyp-Crete Floor Underlayment inmultifamily housing.

1. 03 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Gyp-Crete gypsum cement.

B. Maxxon Floor Primer

C. Maxxon Overspray

1. 04 QUALITY INSURANCE

Installer's Qualifications: Installation of Gyp-Crete shall be by an applicator authorized by the MaxxonCorporation using Maxxon approved mixing and pumping equipment.

1. 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

General Requirements: Materials shall be delivered in their original, unopened packages, and protected fromexposure to the elements. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the premises.

1. 06 SITE CONDITIONS

Environmental Requirements: Before, during and after installation of Gyp-Crete, building interior shall beenclosed and maintained at a temperature above 50 F. (10 C.).o o

PART II - PRODUCTS

2. 01 MATERIALS

A. Gypsum Cement: Floor underlayment Gyp-Crete gypsum cement as manufactured by the MaxxonCorporation, Hamel, MN. All others must receive prior approval.

B. Sand Aggregate: Sand shall be 1/8" (3 mm) or less, washed masonry or plaster sand, meetingrequirements of Maxxon Corporation Sand Specifications 101.

C. Mix Water: Potable, free from impurities.

D. Subfloor Primer: Maxxon Floor Primer

E. Sealer: Maxxon Overspray

03545 - 1 of 3



2. 02 MIX DESIGNS

General Requirements: Mix proportions and methods shall be in strict accordance with product manufacturerrecommendations.


3. 01 PREPARATION

A. Condition and Cleaning of Subfloor: Subfloor shall be structurally sound. General Contractor shallclean subfloor to remove mud, oil, grease, and other contaminating factors before the arrival of theGyp-Crete underlayment crew.

B. Leak Prevention: Fill cracks and voids with a quick setting patching or caulking material whereleakage of Gyp-Crete could occur.

C. Priming Subfloor: Prime the subfloor using the Maxxon Floor Primer. Priming instructions may varyaccording to the type of substrate, multiple coats may be necessary.

D. Expansion Joints: Allow joints to continue through the Gyp-Crete at the same width.

3. 02 APPLICATION OF CEMENTITIOUS FLOORING

A. Scheduling: Application of Gyp-Crete shall not begin until the building is enclosed, including roof,windows, doors and other fenestration. Install after drywall installation unless tenant finishrequirements identify partitioning after the pour.

B. Application: Place Gyp-Crete at 1" (19 mm) minimum over wood frame, 3/4" (13 mm) minimum overplank or poured in place concrete. Spread and screed Gyp-Crete to a smooth surface. Except atauthorized joints, place Gyp-Crete as continuously as possible until application is complete so thatno Gyp-Crete product slurry is placed against Gyp-Crete product that has obtained its initial set.

C. Drying: General Contractor shall provide continuous ventilation and adequate heat to rapidly removemoisture from the area until the Gyp-Crete is dry. General Contractor shall provide mechanicalventilation if necessary. To test for dryness, tape a 24" x 24" (609 mm by 609 mm) section of plasticor high density rubber mat to the surface of the underlayment. After 48-72 hours, if no condensationoccurs, the underlayment shall be considered dry. Perform dryness test 5-7 days after pour.

3. 03 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OF GLUE DOWN FLOOR GOODS

A. Sealing: Seal all areas that receive glue down floor goods with Maxxon Overspray according to theMaxxon Corporation's specifications. Any floor areas where the surface has been damaged shall becleaned and sealed regardless of floor covering to be used. Where floor goods manufacturers requirespecial adhesive or installation systems, their requirements supersede these recommendations.

B. Floor Goods Procedures: See the Maxxon Corporation's "Procedures for Attaching Finished FloorGoods to Maxxon Underlayments" brochure for guidelines for installing finished floor goods. Thisprocedure is not a warranty and is to be used as a guideline only.

03545 - 2 of 3



3. 04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Slump Test: Gyp-Crete mix shall be tested for slump as it's being pumped using a 2" x 4" (50 mmby 101 mm) cylinder resulting in a patty size of 8" (203 mm) plus or minus 1" (25 mm) diameter.

B. Field Samples: At least one (1) set of three (3) molded cube samples shall be taken from each day'spour during the Gyp-Crete application. Cubes shall be tested as recommended by the MaxxonCorporation in accordance with modified ASTM C472. Test results shall be available to architectand/or contractor upon request from applicator.

3. 05 PROTECTION

Protection From Heavy Loads: During construction, place temporary wood planking over Gyp-Crete whereverit will be subject to heavy wheeled or concentrated loads.


03545 - 3 of 3

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 4 – MASONRY

ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 04200 – UNIT MASONRY

04200 - 1 of 16

PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of each prime contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concrete unit masonry. 2. Reinforced unit masonry. 3. Insulation in masonry walls. 4. Masonry waste disposal.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division-3 Section "CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE” 2. Division-7 Section "BUILDING INSULATION” 3. Division 7 Section "FLASHING AND SHEET METAL". 4. Division 7 Section "JOINT SEALANTS". 5. Division 10 Section "LOUVERS AND VENTS".

C. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include the following:

1. Dovetail slots for masonry anchors installed under Division 3 SECTION "CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE."

D. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include the following:

1. Steel lintels for unit masonry specified in Division 5 Section "METAL FABRICATIONS."

2. Wood nailers and blocking built into unit masonry specified in Division 6 Section "ROUGH CARPENTRY."

3. Composite Sheet Waterproofing over masonry units is specified in Division-7. 4. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing specified in Division 7

Section "FLASHING AND SHEET METAL." 5. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings specified in Division 8 Section

"STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES." 6. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings specified in Division 8 Section

"DETENTION DOORS AND FRAMES."


A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (f'm) at 8 days.

1. For Concrete Unit Masonry: As follows, based on net area: a. f'm = 1500 psi.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division-1 specification Sections.

B. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product

indicated.



04200 - 2 of 16

C. Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete reinforcing" and ACI 530 showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars and arrangement of masonry reinforcement.

D. Material certificates for the following signed by manufacturer and Contractor certifying

that each material complies with requirements. 1. Each different cement product required for mortar and grout including name of manufacturer, brand, type and weight slips at time of delivery. 2. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars. 3. Each type and size of joint reinforcement. 4. Each type and size of anchors, ties and metal accessories.

E. Cold or Hot weather construction procedures evidencing compliance with requirements

specified in referenced "Unit Masonry Standard".

F. Results from tests and inspections performed by testing agency will be reported promptly and in writing to Owner and Architect/Engineers. Tests include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Compressive strength. 2. Modulus of rupture. 3. Twenty-four hour cold water absorption. 4. Five hour boiling water absorption. 5. Saturation coefficient. 6. Initial rate of absorption. 7. Efflorescence. 8. Weather classification.


A. Unit Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 "Specifications for Masonry Structures", except as otherwise indicated.

B. Inspecting Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for employment in performing tests and

inspection specified in this Section, an independent testing laboratory must demonstrate to Architect/Engineers’ satisfaction, based on evaluation of laboratory-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM C 1093, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated without delaying the progress of the work.

C. Fire Performance Characteristics: Where required by the Construction Documents

prepared by the Architect and previously approved by the Owner, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform

texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces.

E. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform

quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. Obtain standard mortars from a single manufacturer and different colored mortar from a single manufacturer.



04200 - 3 of 16

F. Special Inspection: This project shall be subjected to Special Inspection. The Contractor shall give three days advance notice to schedule the special inspections. 1. The following items shall be inspected continuously:

a. From the beginning of masonry construction, the following shall be verified to ensure compliance: i. Grout space prior to grouting. ii. Placement of grout.

b. The inspection program shall verify: i. Type, size and location of anchors, including other details of

anchorage of masonry to structural member frames or other construction.

ii. Protection of masonry during cold weather (temperature below 40 degrees F) or hot weather (temperature above 90 degrees F).

c. Preparation of any required grout specimens, mortar specimens and/or prisms shall be observed.

2. The following items shall be inspected periodically: a. From the beginning of masonry construction, the following shall be

verified to ensure compliance: i. Proportions of site-mixed mortar and grout. ii. Placement of masonry units and construction of mortar joints. iii. Placement of reinforcement and connectors.

b. The inspection program shall verify: i. Size and location of structural elements. ii. Specified size, grade and type of reinforcement.

c. Compliance with required inspection provisions of the construction documents and the approved submittals shall be verified.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition.

B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contami- ants, corrosion and other causes. If units become wet, do not place until units are in an air – dried condition.

C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover and in dry location.

D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and

contamination avoided.

E. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day’s work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least three (3) days and concentrated loads

for at least seven (7) days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately any grout, mortar and soil that come in contact with such masonry.



04200 - 4 of 16

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with

painted and integral finishes from mortar droppings.

D. Cold-Weather Construction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard for cold-weather construction and the following: 1. Do not lay masonry units that are wet or frozen. 2. Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions. 3. Perform the following construction procedures while the work is progressing.

Temperature ranges indicated below apply to air temperatures existing at time of installation except for grout. For grout, temperature ranges apply to anticipated minimum night temperatures. In heating mortar and grout materials, maintain mixing temperature selected within 10°F (6°C). a. 40°F (4°C) to 32°F (0°C):

i. Mortar: Heat mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40°F (4°C) and 120°F (49°C).

ii. Grout: Follow normal masonry procedures. b. 32°F (0°C) to 25°F (-4°C):

i. Mortar: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar tem-peratures between 40°F (4°C) and 120°F (49°C); maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing.

ii. Grout: Heat grout materials to 90°F (32°C) to produce in place grout temperature of 70°F (21°C) at end of work day.

c. 25°F (-4°C) to 20°F (-7°C): i. Mortar: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar tem-

peratures between 40°F (4°C) and 120°F (49°C); maintain tem-perature of mortar on boards above freezing.


iii. Heat:both sides of walls under construction using salamanders or other heat sources.

iv. Use windbreaks or enclosures when wind is in excess of 15 mph. d. 20°F (-7°C) and below:

i. Mortar: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar tem-peratures between 40°F (4°C) and 120°F (49°C).


iii. Masonry Units: Heat masonry units so that they are above 20°F (-7°C) at time of laying.

iv. Provide enclosure and auxiliary heat to maintain an air tem-perature of at least 40°F (4°C) for 24 hours after laying units.

v. Do not heat water for mortar and grout to above 160°F (71°C). 4. Protect completed masonry and masonry not being worked on in the following

manner. Temperature ranges indicated apply to mean daily air temperatures ex-cept for grouted masonry. For grouted masonry, temperature ranges apply to anticipated minimum night temperatures. a. 40°F (4°C) to 32°F (0°C): Protect masonry from rain or snow for at least

twenty-four (24) hours by covering with plastic sheets or other weather-resistive membrane.

b. 32°F (0°C) to 25°F (-4°C): Completely cover masonry with weather-resis-tive membrane for at least twenty-four (24) hours.

c. 25°F (-4°C) to 20°F (-7°C): Completely cover masonry with weather-re-sistive insulating blankets or similar protection for at least twenty-four (24) hours, and cover for at least forty-eight (48) hours for grouted masonry.



04200 - 5 of 16

d. 20°F (-7°C) and below: Maintain masonry temperature above 32°F (0°C) for twenty-four (24) hours using enclosures and supplementary heat, electric heating blankets, infrared lamps or other methods proven to be satisfactory.

e. For grouted masonry maintain heated enclosure (using similar methods) to 40°F (4°C ) for forty-eight (48) hours.

5. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried out, but not less than 7 days after completion of cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Construction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and standard

industry practice for masonry construction in extreme hot weather. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Comply with referenced "Unit Masonry Standard" and other requirements specified in this

Section applicable to each material indicated. 2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. General: Comply with referenced standards and requirements indicated below applicable to each form of concrete masonry unit required by the Construction Documents prepared by the Architect and previously approved by the Owner. 1. Provide special shapes as follows: 2. For lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other

special conditions. 3. Bullnose units for outside corners at all interior locations. Provide double

bullnose units for ends of walls and unframed openings. 4. Square-edged units for outside corners at exterior locations, except where

indicated as bullnose. 5. Special angled blocks for 45° corners and other angled conditions. Do not cut

blocks in the field for installation in non-right angle corners; provide blocks manufactured with the special angle.

6. Provide block finished on two sides (front and side) for special type units (e.g. ground face block, split face block, etc.) at outside corner locations; do not provide factory- or field-cut mitered units.

7. Size: Provide concrete masonry units manufactured to specified dimensions of 3/8" less than nominal widths by nominal heights by nominal lengths indicated on drawings, unless noted otherwise. Provide blocks nominal 8" x 16" long (7-5/8" x 15-5/8" actual) x nominal thickness indicated, unless noted otherwise.

8. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units. 9. Exposed Faces: Submit color samples for review in accordance with Division 1

section “SUBMITTALS”. B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows:

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength indicated below: a. 1900 psi (13.1 MPa).

2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 3. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units. 4. Exposed Faces: Exposed faces matching color, pattern, and texture of samples

previously approved by the Owner.



04200 - 6 of 16

C. Integral Water Repellent: Exterior concrete masonry units exposed to the exterior or in-stalled in contact with earth or soils provide units produced with liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive according to ASTM E 514, with test period extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of the test specimen. Do Not Provide Integral Water Repellent when an Exterior Vapor Barrier is being provided or if CMU is being provided for an interior location, such as elevator shafts.

1. Acceptable Products include, but are not limited to, units made with "Dry-Block" by W.R. Grace & Co.

For below grade line, block shall be Grade "A" standard loadbearing hollow units

with sand and gravel aggregate conforming to current ASTM Specs.

Furnish all shapes and sizes as required. Load bearing, hollow units for walls above grade shall be a lightweight aggregate concrete block,

conforming to ASTM C90_66. Furnish shapes required for corners, jambs, etc. Furnish face type as indicated on drawings.

Lightweight aggregate shall be "Waylite", "Haydite" approved with medium fine texture, conforming to Fed.

Spec. No. SS-C-621 and ASTM C331_64T for all block except that below grade and the following weights (adjust weights for l2" units):

4 x 8 x l6 solid 24# 4 x 8 x l6 regular 20# 6 x 8 x l6 21# 8 x 8 x l6 31# 10 x 8 x l6 41# D. Fire-rated block to be used in firewalls shall be normal weight semi-solid units conforming

to ASTM C33.

E. Non_load bearing hollow units for interior walls and partitions shall conform to ASTM C129_64_T.

F. Moisture content of blocks before laying shall be not more than 40% of total absorption

average of face blocks. G. No cinder block shall be allowed. H. Curing: All masonry units to be adequately cured before delivery to insure uniform color

and strength. I. Color: Gray

J. Provide Masonry sealer when using Arch. Block exposed to exterior.

2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide color(s) as previously approved by the Owner in accordance with Division 1, Section “SUBMITTALS”.



04200 - 7 of 16

B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.

C. Mortar Cement: U.B.C. Standard No. 21-14.

D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

E. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207.

F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch, use aggregate

graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.

G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

H. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars.

I. Ready-Mixed Mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate complying with

requirements specified in this Article; combined with set-controlling admixtures to produce a ready-mixed mortar complying with ASTM C 1142.

J. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying

with ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

K. Water-Repellent Admixture (for exterior mortar and mortar in contact with the earth or

soils): Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMU, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.

L. Water: Potable.

M. Mortar and Grout Mixes:

1. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated above. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

2. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar indicated below: a. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to Portland cement-lime. b. Use Type S for below-grade masonry, for masonry in contact with earth. c. For exterior, above-grade load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and

parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions, and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

2.04 REINFORCING STEEL

A. General: Provide reinforcing steel complying with requirements of referenced unit masonry standard and this article.

B. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615 and Grade 60.

2.05 JOINT REINFORCEMENT



04200 - 8 of 16

A. Provide joint reinforcement complying with requirements of referenced masonry standard and this Section, formed from hot-dipped galvanized carbon steel wire, coating class as required by referenced masonry standard for application indicated.

B. Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and

plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10'-0", with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below: 1. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483" (9 gauge). 2. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483" (9 gauge). 3. For single-wythe masonry provide ladder design type with single pair of side rods

and with perpendicular cross rods spaced at 8” on center for walls to be grouted unless otherwise noted on the drawings (1’-4” max. on center spacing).

4. For multiwythe masonry provide type as follows: a. Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced at 8” on center for

walls to be grouted unless otherwise noted on the drawings (1’-4” max. on center spacing) and number of side rods as follows:

b. Number of Side Rods for Multiwythe Concrete Masonry: One side rod for each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4" in nominal width plus one side rod for each wythe of masonry 4" or less in nominal width.

c. Tab design with single pair of side rods and rectangular box-type cross ties spaced at least 1'-4"; with side rods spaced for embodiment within each face shell of backup wythe and ties extended to engage the outer wythe by at least 1-1/2". Duro-O-Eye adjustable

C. Coating requirements per ASCE/ACI 530.1 are as follows:

APPLICATION ASTM REQUIREMENT Joint reinforcement, interior walls ASTM A 641 Class 1 (.40 oz. per sq. ft.) Wire ties or anchors in exterior ASTM A 641 Class 3 walls completely embedded in (80 oz. per sq. ft.) mortar or grout Wire ties or anchors in exterior ASTM A 153 Class B2 walls not completely embedded (1.50 oz. per sq. ft.) in mortar or grout. Joint reinforcement in exterior ASTM A 153 Class B2 walls or interior walls exposed (1.50 oz. per sq. ft.) to moist environments (e.g. natatoria and food processing Sheet metal ties or anchors ASTM A 153 Class B2 exposed to weather (1.50 oz. per sq. ft.) Sheet metal ties or anchors ASTM A 525 Class G60 completely embedded in mortar (.60 oz. per sq. ft.) or grout

2.06 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL

A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements for metal and size of referenced unit masonry standard and of this article.



04200 - 9 of 16

B. Galvanized Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, coating class as required by referenced unit masonry standards.

C. Metal Mesh Ties: Minimum 3" x 12" x 16 gauge hot dipped galvanized mesh ties. Equal

to Dur-O-Wal D/A WMT.

D. Type for Masonry Where Coursing Between Wythes Align: Unit ties bent from one piece of wire.

E. Dur-o-eye adjustable ties at CMU walls with masonry veneer.

2.07 RIGID ANCHORS

A. Provide straps of form and length indicated, fabricated from metal strips of following minimum width and thickness: 1. 1-1/2" wide by 1/4" thick.

2.08 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Anchor Bolts: Provide steel bolts with hex nuts and flat washers complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM C 153, Class C in sizes and configurations indicted.

2.09 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Copper/Paper Flashing: 3-oz. copper sheet laminated between two (2) sheets of bituminous impregnated creped Kraft paper or saturated fabric. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Afco Products, Inc.; "Cop-A-Bond Duplex". b. Phoenix Building Products; "Duplex Cop-R Flash". c. York Manufacturing, Inc.; "Cop-R-Tex Duplex". d. Sandell Manufacturing Co.; "Copper Fabric Flashing"

B. Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Nonmetallic Expansion Joint Strips: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Type 2 (closed cell), Class A (cellular rubber and rubber-like materials with specific resistance to petroleum base oils), Grade 1 (compression-deflection range of 2-5 psi), compressible up to 35%, of width and thickness indicated, formulated from the following material: 1. Polyvinyl

B. Preformed Control Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard

sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall. C. Polyvinyl Chloride: ASTM D 2287, General Purpose Grade, Type PVC-65406.

D. Bond Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,

Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).



04200 - 10 of 16

E. Weep Hole: Rectangular Plastic Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches. 2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate (1/2- cup dry measure) and laundry detergent (1/2-cup dry measure) dissolved in one gallon of water.

2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other ad-mixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of

mortar indicated below: 1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to Portland cement-lime. 2. All mortar to be Type S.

C. Colored Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to

produce color to match adjacent masonry. 1. Color 1 – Match CMU (Color 1) 2. Color 2 – Match CMU (Color 2)

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. Use grout of consistency indicated

or, if not otherwise indicated, of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement that will completely fill spaces intended to receive grout. 1. Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 2 inches in horizontal dimension. 2. Use coarse grout in grout spaces 2 inches or more in least horizontal dimension.


A. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type, class, and grade of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested by qualified independent testing laboratory for strength, absorption, and moisture content per ASTM C 140.

PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry.

B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections

prior to installation.

C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with referenced "Unit Masonry Standard" and other requirements indicated applicable to each type of installation included in Project.



04200 - 11 of 16

B. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated.

C. Build chases and recesses as shown or required to accommodate items specified in this

and other Sections of the Specifications. Provide not less than 8" of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses.

D. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After

installation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening.

E. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut

units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without cutting where possible.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and arises, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, nor 3/8 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum.

B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal

grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, nor 1/16 inch within width of a single unit.

C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of

columns, walls, and partitions, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet, nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more.

D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from

dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4 inch nor plus 1/2 inch. E. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from bed-joint thickness indicated by

more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary bed-joint thickness from bed-joint thickness of adjacent course by more than 1/8 inch. Do not vary from head-joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary head-joint thickness from adjacent head-joint thickness by more than 1/8 inch. Do not vary from collar-joint thickness indicated by more than minus 1/4 inch or plus 3/8 inch.

3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units.

B. Lay up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately

spaced and coordinated with other construction.

C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in running bond pattern; do not use units with less that nominal 4" horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.



04200 - 12 of 16

D. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2". Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4" horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

E. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rake back one-half-unit length for one-

half running bond or one-third-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry; wet clay masonry units lightly (if required) and remove loose units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.

F. Built-In Work: As construction progresses, build-in items specified under this and other

specification Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar. 2. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24") under

bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items.

G. Intersecting Load-Bearing Walls: If carried up separately, provide rigid steel anchors at not more than 2'-0" o.c. vertically. Form anchors of galvanized steel not less than 1-1/4" x 1/8" x 2'-0" long with ends turned up not less than 2" or with cross pins. If used with hollow masonry units, embed ends in mortar-filled cores.

H. Security Walls: Follow requirements of intersecting load-bearing walls.

3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers,

columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.

3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells.

4. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to be concealed or to be covered by other materials. Cut joints concave for exposed masonry.

B.. Mortar Beds: 1. Lay units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical joints in all courses. 2. Provide sufficient mortar on ends of units to fill head joints. 3. Rock closures into place with head joints thrown against two adjacent units in

place. 4. Do not pound corners or jambs to fit stretcher units after setting in place. 5. Where adjustment to corners or jambs must be made after mortar has started to

set, remove mortar and replace with fresh mortar. C.. Joint Types: Tooled. 1. All exterior horizontal and vertical joints - concave. 2. All interior horizontal and vertical joints - flush.

D.. Sealant Joints: Retain sealant joints around outside perimeters of exterior doors, window frames, and other wall openings.

1. Uniform depth: 3/4" 1. 2. Uniform width: 3/8"

3.06 STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTIWYTHE MASONRY

A. Use continuous horizontal joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints for bond tie between wythes.

B. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at corners, unless

otherwise shown.



04200 - 13 of 16

C. Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement at corners using prefabricated 'L'

units, in addition to masonry bonding.

D. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, provide same type of bonding specified for structural bonding between wythes and space as follows: 1. Provide individual metal ties. 2. Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement using prefabricated 'T' units.

E. Nonbearing Interior Partitions: Build full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof

structure above and install pressure-relieving joint filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.

3.07 CAVITIES/AIR SPACES

A. Keep cavities/air spaces clean of mortar droppings and other materials during con-struction. Strike joints facing cavities/air spaces flush.

B. Tie exterior wythe to backup with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing.

C. Install vents in vertical head joints at the top of each continuous cavity/air space. Space

vents and close off cavities/air spaces vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated.

D. Install dampproofing on the outside face of the interior wythe of all exterior cavity walls,

full height, as per manufacturers' recommendations. 3.08 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls, 1/2" elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6".

B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated 'L' and 'T'

sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and similar conditions.

3.09 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1" in width between masonry and structural

member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in ma-sonry joints and attached to structure.

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 2'-0" vertically and 3'-0" o/c. horizontally.

3.10 MOVEMENT (CONTROL AND EXPANSION) JOINTS

A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build in related items as the masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement.



04200 - 14 of 16

B. Provide vertical masonry control joints where and as indicated. Joints shall carry from top of foundation continuously to top of wall. Stop reinforcing each side of control joints and install breaker paper vertically. Fill with mortar to form key as indicated. Space control joints maximum of 30 ft. apart in continuous exterior walls.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry by installing preformed control joint gaskets

designed to fit standard sash block.

C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows: 1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4" in

direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints, if any.

2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated expansion joint units into masonry. 3. Build in joint fillers where indicated. 4. Form open joint of width indicated but not less than 3/8" for installation of sealant

and backer rod specified in Division-7 Section "JOINT SEALANTS". Maintain joints free and clear of mortar.

D. Build in horizontal pressure-relieving joints; construct joints by either leaving an air space

or inserting nonmetallic 50% compressible joint filler of width required to permit installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division-7 Section "JOINT SEALANTS". Locate horizontal pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry veneer and attached to structure behind masonry veneer.

3.11 FLASHING/WEEP HOLES

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at lintels, ledges, other obstructions to the flow of water in the wall and where indicated.

B. Prepare masonry surfaces so that they are smooth and free from projections that could

puncture flashing. Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive/sealant/tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer before covering with mortar.

C. Install flashings as follows:

1. At lintels, extend flashing a minimum of 4" into masonry at each end. Extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4", and through the inner wythe to within 1/2" of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through the inner wythe and turn up approximately 2”.

2. At heads and sills, extend flashing as specified above unless otherwise indicated but turn up ends not less than 2" to form a pan.

3. Install flashing in veneer walls as specified but carry flashing up face of sheathing at least 8" and behind air infiltration barrier/building paper.

4. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashings by overlapping ribs at least 1-1/2" or as recommended by flashing manufacturer and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements of Division-7 Section "JOINT SEALANTS”.

5. Turn down sheet metal flashings at exterior face of masonry to form drip. 6. Cut off flashing flush with wall face after masonry construction is completed.

D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry

immediately above embedded flashings and as follows: 1. Form weep holes with product specified in Part 2 of this Section. 2. Form weep holes by keeping head joints free and clear of mortar. 3. Space weep holes 16" o/c.



04200 - 15 of 16

E. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where shown to be built into masonry.

3.12 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY

A. General: Install reinforced unit masonry to comply with requirements of referenced unit masonry standard.

B. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced

masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make

sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained

sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Do not exceed the following pour heights for fine grout:

a. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3/4 inch or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 2 inches, pour height of 12 inches.

b. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2 by 3 inches, pour height of 60 inches.

c. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches, pour height of 12 feet.

d. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 3 inches, pour height of 24 feet.

2. Do not exceed the following pour heights for coarse grout: a. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 1-1/2 inches or for minimum grout

space of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 3 inches, pour height of 12 inches. b. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches or for minimum grout

space of hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches, pour height of 60 inches. c. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches or for minimum grout

space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 3 inches, pour height of 12 feet. d. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3 inches or for minimum grout

space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 4 inches, pour height of 24 feet. 3. Provide cleanout holes at least 3 inches in least dimension for grout pours over

60 inches in height. a. Provide cleanout holes at each vertical reinforcing bar. b. At solid grouted masonry, provide cleanout holes at not more than 32

inches o.c. 3.13 LINTELS

A. Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each opening. Minimum masonry dimension between openings is 16". Where a 16" masonry separation cannot be obtained between openings, the opening shall be considered a single opening to the point where bearing requirements mentioned above can be met.

3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Frequency: Tests and evaluations listed in this article will be performed during construction for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. 1. Mortar composition and properties will be evaluated per ASTM C 780.



04200 - 16 of 16

2. Grout compressive strength will be sampled and tested per ASTM C 1019.

B. Evaluation of Quality Control Tests: In absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, masonry will be considered satisfactory if results from construction quality control tests comply with minimum requirements indicated.

3.15 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged masonry units and units that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units and in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the joint tooling, enlarge voids or holes, except weep holes, and totally fill

with mortar. Point-up all joints including corners, openings, and adjacent construction to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for sealant application.

C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is fully set and cured, clean masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave half of the panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect/Engineer’s approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or wa-terproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean brick by means of bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA "Technical Note No. 20 Revised" using a job-mixed detergent solution.

6. Clean concrete masonry by means of cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 45 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces.

D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to

Installer, that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.16 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Recycling: Undamaged, excess masonry materials are the contractor’s property and shall be removed from the Project site for his use.

B. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including broken masonry

units, waste mortar, and excess or soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in greatest dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least 2 parts specified fill material for each part

masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section "EARTHWORK." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used as

fill, as described above, and other masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property.


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 4 - MASONRY

ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 04210 - BRICK MASONRY

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL


1. 02 SCOPE

A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, scaffolding, etc. necessary or incidental to completeinstallation of all Brick Masonry work shown on the drawings or specified herein.

B. Cooperate with all trades regarding installation of embedded items.

1. 03 PROTECTION

A. All masonry materials are to be protected. Store on elevated platforms and keep under cover whennot in use. Damaged or deteriorated materials are not to be used in the work; remove from site. Wetbrick should not be used until they are dried out.

B. Protect masonry surfaces not being worked on during construction work. At such time as rain orsnow is imminent or work is discontinued at end of working day, protect work with canvas strips wellsecured with planking.

1. 04 COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS

A. Temperature: Do not erect masonry when ambient temperature has dropped below 45 degrees F.unless it is rising, at no time when it has dropped below 40 degrees F., except by permission of theArchitect. When masonry work is authorized during temperatures below 40 degrees F., makeprovisions for heating, drying materials. All protection must be kept in place and temperaturemaintained in excess of 50 degrees F. for at least 72 hours for all materials, including masonry, sand,water, mortar, etc.

B. All masonry built in cold weather that is frozen or injured by weather conditions shall be condemnedand mason contractor will be required to remove, rebuild or repair same to entire satisfaction ofArchitect without additional cost.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2. 01 BRICK MASONRY UNITS

A. Face Brick: Grade S.W. shall be Belden Brick Co., verify color with Architect.

B. Shaped Brick: Grade S.W.

C. Brick Masonry: Units shall conform to ASTM C216, Type FBX, with a minimum compressivestrength of 6000 PSI (average). Dimensions - 3-3/4" x 2-1/4" x 8", cored 75% solid.

D. Curing: All masonry units to be adequately cured before delivery to insure uniform color and strength.

04210 - 1 of 5



2. 02 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: Standard brand, ASTM C150, Type 1. Type “N”

B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type II, Huron, Brixment, Century, Blue Bond.

C. Cement Mortar: One (1) part Portland Cement, three (3) parts sand, 1/5 part lime, base on volumeof cement used. For interior masonry walls.

D. Cement and Lime Mortar: Cement and lime mortar shall be composed of one (1) part Portlandcement, one (1) part lime and six (6) parts sand, adding only sufficient water to secure the desiredconsistency. Add approved waterproofing admixture to the above, in proportions specified bymanufacturer, to increase water tightness of exterior walls. For use on exterior masonry walls.

E. General Instructions: Mix per manufacture's directions. No mortar shall be used that has stood morethan one-half hour after mixing. Do not retemper.

F. The use of prepared mortar cements shall not be considered for use on exterior walls.

G. Lime: High calcium hydrated lime, ASTM Spec. C6 magnesium or dolomite type lime may be usedif hydrated under 8 per cent by weight of unhydrated oxides, and conforms to ASTM Specs. C207,Type S.

H. Sand: Clean, sharp sand free from loam, dirt, or organic impurities, tested and approved by the NewYork State Department of Public Works, for masonry mortar, ASTM Spec. C144.

I. Water: Clean, free from injurious amount of oil, soluble salts, acids, organic impurities, deleteriousmaterials, potable.

J. Waterproofing Admixture: Approved brand of stearate compound to be added when mortar is mixedin proportions recommended by manufacturer for use on exterior walls. Waterproofer is not requiredfor interior work.

K. Mortar Coloring: Mortar to be used for laying brick masonry units shall be color as selected byArchitect. Use only coloring of pure pigments similar to true tone cement colors manufactured by theFrank D. Davis Company. Proportion as recommended by manufacturer; submit samples toArchitect for approval.

2. 03 ACCESSORIES

A. Reinforcement: Truss type, prefabricated reinforcement fabricated of 9 gauge side and truss rodsfor non-load bearing walls, 3/l6" side rods with 9 gauge truss rod for load-bearing walls, galvanizedmill type for single wythe walls, Duro-O-Eye adjustable type for faced and multi-wythed walls. Manufacturer to be "Dur-O-Wal", AA Wire Products, "BlokTrus."

B. Adjustable Wall Ties: Use the truss reinforcement specified for incorporation in concrete block wallconstruction. (2.03A) when concrete CMU is used as the brick back up. Dur-o-Eye as manufacturedDurowall.

04210 - 2 of 5



C. Adjustable Wall Ties: Two screw, 9" long x 3/8" Base and Vee Type, offset with 3/16" diametergalvanized steel. Shall be used at brick veneer on l stud wall back-up. Wire tie shall embed in brickwythe a minimum of 2" and shall be spaced at 16" o.c. vertically and horizontally. Locate ties at studlocations. Spacing at jambs and at vertical control joint shall be 8" o.c. Ties to have maximummechanical play and deformation of .05".

D. Control Joint Materials: Factory molded rubber compound with compressible neoprene compoundedge. Dur-O-Wal regular "Rapid", standard "Keyseal".

E. Weeps: A 3/8" x 3-3/8" x 2-1/2" polypropylene cell vent tested in conformation with ASTM D2240,D790B, D638, and D1238B shall be provided no further than 24" on centers by providing in thevertical joints at the bottom course of masonry, masonry veneers or cavity walls, and at bond beamsthrough wall flashings, and other water stops in the wall to collect moisture in the void and dischargeit to the exterior.

F. Fluid applied Vapor Barrier : See Division 7

G. Cavity Wall Drainage Net: Provided in conjunction with weeping system. 1" thick high densitypolyethylene or nylon open mesh material. The cavity should be no more than 1/4" wider than thedrainage net. Installation per manufacturer's recommendations. Product as manufactured by MortarNet USA.


3. 01 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Do not install cracked, broken, or chipped brick. 2. Lay masonry plumb, true to line, with level, accurately spaced courses. Break each course joint

with course below. Keep bond plumb throughout. Lay corners, reveal plumb, true. Keep allmasonry at least 1" away from roof conductors and flat side of column flanges.

3. Do not furrow bed joints. 4. Stop off horizontal run by racking back in each course; toothing in new masonry work is not

permitted. 5. Adjust units to final position while mortar is soft and plastic. 6. If units are displace after mortar has stiffened, remove, clean joints and units of mortar and relay

with fresh mortar.7. When joining fresh masonry to set or partially set masonry:

a. Remove loose brick and mortar. b. Clean and lightly wet exposed surface of set masonry prior to laying fresh masonry.

8. Tooth in to match previous coursing. 9. Do not build upon frozen work. Do not lay masonry having water, film or frost on its surfaces.

Wet before laying brick having initial rate of absorption over 0.7 ounce per minute, determinedas per ASTM C-67.

10. Provide moisture barrier over sheathing behind brick veneer.

B. Lintels: Install loose steel lintels per Section Structural Steel.

04210 - 3 of 5



C. Building In: Unless otherwise required, fill solidly with mortar spaces around metal door frames, otherbuilt in items. Built in anchors, wall plugs, accessories, flashings, work specified in other sections,as erection progresses. Use only metal wall plugs. Install all louvers furnished by heating contractor.

D. Joining: Step back unfinished work for joining with new work; toothing may be resorted to, only whenso approved. Before new work is started, remove loose mortar; expose joint; wet thoroughly at leastl2 hours before laying new work.

E. Protection: 1. Protect masonry surfaces not being worked on during construction work. At such time as rain

or snow is imminent or work is discontinued at end of working day, protect work with canvasstrips well secured with planking.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and offsets from mortar drippings or other damage during construction. 3. Remove misplaced mortar or grout immediately. 4. Protect face materials against staining. 5. Protect the door jambs and corners from damage during construction.

F. Mortar Beds: 1. Lay brick with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical joints in all courses. 2. Provide sufficient mortar on ends of brick to fill head joints. 3. Rock closures into place with head joints thrown against two adjacent bricks in place. 4. Do not pound corners or jambs to fit stretcher units after setting in place. 5. Where adjustment to corners or jambs must be made after mortar has started to set, remove

mortar and replace with fresh mortar.

G. Joints: Tooled.

H. Sealant Joints: Retain sealant joints around outside perimeters of exterior doors, window frames, andother wall openings. 1. Uniform depth: 3/4" 2. Uniform width: 3/8"

I. Control Joints: To occur in straight wall at symmetrical intervals not exceeding 30 ft. Coordinatelocation with Architect or as shown on drawings.

J. Building Felts: A poly 36" wide horizontal band of 15 lb. building felts with upper band overlapping thelower band 6" and end laps.

K. Field Constructed Mock-Ups: Prior to installation of masonry work, erect sample wall panels tofurther verify selection made for color and textural characteristics, under sample submittals ofmasonry units and mortar, and to represent completed masonry work for qualities of appearance,materials, and construction. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements:1. Locate mock-ups on site in locations as directed by Owner.2. Build mock-ups for the following types of masonry in sizes of approximately 3 ft. long x 2 ft. high

by brick thickness - typical exterior face brick wall.3. Erect panels parallel to existing surface.4. Retain mock-ups during construction as standard for judging completed masonry work. When

directed, demolish mock-ups and remove from site.

04210 - 4 of 5



3. 02 CLEANING

A. Progress work in as clean a manner as possible; remove excess material, mortar droppings daily. Remove mortar droppings on connecting or adjoining work before its final set.

B. Exposed Masonry: At completion of work, point holes in joints of exposed exterior masonry surfaces;completely fill with mortar; tool properly. After pointing has set, hardened, wet exposed masonrysurfaces; clean with solution of 10% by volume of commercial Muriatic (Hydrochloric) Acid; apply withstiff fiber brush; leave masonry clean, free of mortar daubs, with tight mortar joints throughout. Immediately after cleaning, rinse masonry surfaces with clear water.

C. Remove, replace defective material; correct defective workmanship, leave masonry clean.


04210 - 5 of 5

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 5 - METALS

ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 05300 - METAL DECK

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL


1. 02 SCOPE

A. The following items are specifically included, without limiting the generality implied by thesespecifications and the drawings: 1. Furnish and erect metal roof deck. 2. All accessories as required. 3. Molded rubber fillers (flutes).4. Shop drawings. 5. Field paint touch-up.

B. Related Work in Other Sections:1. Metal siding panels - see Section 07420.2. Installation of molded rubber fillers - see Section 06220.

1. 03 DESIGN

Sections and calculations of their properties shall conform to AISI "Specifications for the Design of LightGauge Cold Formed Steel Structural Members" and Steel Deck Institute (SDI), "Code of RecommendedStandard Practice".

1. 04 SHOP DRAWINGS

Submit checked erection plans and details for review. Review does not relieve the contractor ofresponsibility for fit or for supplying all necessary materials. Show all erection details and instructions.

PART II - PRODUCTS 2. 01 ROOF DECK

A. Roof deck shall be of sheet steel conforming to ASTM A245, Grade C, or ASTM A-446, Grade A. Standard intermediate rib deck of gauge shown on drawings, but of sufficient gauge to support alldesign live and dead loads. Depth: 1-1/2". Deflections not to exceed 1/240 span under live load. Flexural stress not to exceed 20,000 psi under total load. Deck shall be as supplied by Roof DeckInc., United Steel Deck, Wheeling Corrugating Co., Roll-Form Products or Epic Metals Corporation.

B. Shop Finish: Deck shall be thoroughly cleaned and phosphatized and shall receive manufacturer'sstandard protection paint coat.

C. Sound barriers shall be soft, rubber-like material formed to fit tightly in the deck rib voids. Same widthas partition or wall below.

D. Deck shall be continuous over at least three joist spaces whenever possible.

05300 - 1 of 3



2. 02 STEEL FORM DECK

A. Steel form deck shall be Wheeling Corrugating Co., tensilform Type 50 - 9/16" roll form products orEpic Metals Corporation, base steel conforming to ASTM A446 minimum yield strength shall be 80ksi.

B. Galvanized coating shall conform to ASTM A525 and Fed Spec QQ-S-775.

C. The section properties of the steel form deck shall be computed in accordance with the American Ironand Steel Institute Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.

D. The maximum design stress shall not exceed 36 ksi under total load.

E. Sheets shall extend over three or more supports wherever possible.

F. Steel form deck shall be galvanized, gauge and depth as noted on drawings.


3. 01 ERECTION

A. Roof deck welded directly through bottom of the rib to all structural supports and in strict accordancewith the manufacturer's printed instructions. In exposed deck area, welding of deck at edges ofsupporting steel shall be avoided in order to minimize touch-up of welds and underside of deck. Crimp or spot weld seams of deck at midspan of joist supports. Minimum weld l/2" diameter fusionweld, l2" o.c. maximum. All welding by competent welders. Touch-up top surface of weld with anapproved paint. In exposed deck areas, touch-up all abrasions and underside of all welds that showthrough.

B. Form Deck:1. Each deck unit shall be placed on supporting steel framework with edges up and ends lapped to

a minimum of 2".2. End laps shall occur over supports.3. Sheets shall be attached to supports by welding through welding washers. Minimum welding

requirements are as follows:a. End Laps - Each lap is fastened using a welding washer at each side lap plus one

intermediate weld (3 welds per sheet).b. Intermediate Supports - Weld sheet at side laps only at each intermediate support for spans

up to 4'-6", for spans from 4'-6" - 8'-0", weld at side laps and one weld at mid sheet.c. All Supports - If spans exceed 8'-0", weld should be placed so the average spacing (at all

support) is not more than 15" on center.

3. 02 STORAGE

A. Store metal deck a minimum of 6" off ground.

B. Elevate one end, 2" higher than other.

C. Cover deck with nonasphaltic material. Cover shall allow movement of air and guard againstformation of condensation.

05300 - 2 of 3



3. 03 FIELD INSPECTION

An independent testing laboratory shall approve the erection of the metal deck. The testing laboratoryshall be selected by the Contractor and be approved by the Architect. All costs incurred by the structuralinspection shall be borne by the contractor.


05300 - 3 of 3


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL

The drawings, Instructions to Bidders, Form of Proposal, General Conditions, Supplementary GeneralConditions, and Division 1 are included herein and govern work under this Section.


Furnish all labor, materials, services, and equipment necessary to complete all cold formed steelframing work shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein.

1. 03 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel.

B. Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metal Work.

C. Section 09250 - Metal Studs and Gypsum Wallboard.

1. 04 SUBMITTALS

A. The following items shall be furnished by the contractor prior to fabrication:1. Submit drawings for review which include:

a. Cross sections, plans, and/or elevations depicting component types and locationsfor each unique framing application;

b. Connection details depicting fastener type, quantity, location, and other informationto assure proper installation;

c. Contractors electing to install prefabricated/prefinished frames, shall submitdrawings depicting panel configurations, dimensions, components, locations, andconstruction sequence.

2. Submit structural calculations for review which include:a. Design criteria;b. Structural analysis for each unique framing application;c. Selection of framing components and accessories and verification of connections.

3. Certifications: Submit statements from the framing manufacturer certifying conformance withapplicable standards outlined in Part II, 2.03.

4. Literature: Submit technical literature prepared by the framing manufacturer.


A. Standards: Products and installation shall meet the requirements of the following standards:1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel

Structural Members, 1986 edition and 1989 Addendum.2. American Welding Society (AWS) Specification for Welding Sheet Steel in Structures, D1.3.3. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) "Standard Specifications and Methods":

a. A-563 Standard Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

b. C-955 Standard Specification for Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs,Runner (Track) and Bracing and Bridging, for Screw Application of Gypsum Boardand Metal Plaster Bases.

05400 - 1 of 5



B. Inspection and Quality Control: Inspections shall be performed by an independent authority tocheck conformance with the provisions of the contract.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2. 01 GENERAL

Acceptable Manufacturers/Products: When specific manufacturer, system, or products are indicatedon Drawings or in the Specifications, it is not to imply exclusive use of said manufacturer, system, orproduct unless otherwise noted. Products of equivalent quality, design, and function by othermanufacturer's may be used, subject to compliance to requirements.

2. 02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

Framing materials shall be equal to those manufactured by Marino\Ware, 400 Metuchen Road, SouthPlainfield, NJ 07080, Phone (800)-627-4661.

2. 03 MATERIALS

A. 14 and 12 gauge studs shall be formed from steel conforming to the minimum requirements ofASTM A653, Grade 50, Class 1, possessing a minimum yield of 50,000 psi.

B. 16 gauge studs shall be formed from steel conforming to the minimum requirements of ASTMA653, CQ, Grade 33, possessing a minimum yield of 33,000 psi; or ASTM A653, SQ, Grade 50,Class 1, possessing a minimum yield of 50,000 psi.

C. 18, 20, and 25 gauge studs and all track shall be formed from steel conforming to the minimumrequirements of ASTM A653, CQ, Grade 33, possessing a minimum yield of 33,000 psi.

D. Galvanized framing products shall be coated in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A924.

E. See respective Sections such as 09250, Metal Studs and Gypsum Wallboard for studapplications.

F. Resilient clip & Channels :1. Clips: Sound isolation clips specified shall be designed and Manufactured by Kinetics Noise

Control, Dublin, Ohio. Product shall be Model Iso-Max Sound Isolation Clips.Vertical Loadcapacity shall have sufficient capacity to support wall or ceiling weights as constructed. Permanufactures specifications. Design Load capacity shall minimum 2.5 times the allowablemaximum Design Load. Isolation clips shall consist of a rubber element into which a standardgalvanized steel furring channel, 7/8 in. x minimum 25 gauge, is captured. Used as specifiedon drawings or at separation on wall & ceiling from increased noise areas such as pool,laundry and mechanical rooms to sleeping rooms.

2. Channel Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) deep members designed to reducesound transmission. RC-1 Asymmetrical shape as manufactured by Marinoware. Meet ASTM645 20 gauge 50 ksi thick G40 steel.

G. Shaft Wall Supports:1. Conform to ASTM A446, Grade A, with G40 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM

A525.a. Studs: Shape: "CH", "J" or "E" or as standard with manufacturer. Gage: As

required to fulfill performance criteria, minimum 25 gage. Provide 20 gagefor jamb and lintel components.

05400 - 2 of 5



b. J runners: 24 gage, size as required for coordination with studs. Jambstruts: 20 gage with 3 inch back leg for use at elevator frames.

c. SHEETROCK brand Gypsum Liner Panels are installed vertically betweensteel J-Runners. attached to floor and ceiling. Panel edges are inserted intospecially formed C-H Studs spaced 24" on center The 2-hour shaft wall iscompleted with double-layer ½ inch thick gypsum panels and a UnitedStates Gypsum Company joint system, or with gypsum base and veneerfinish applied to one side. Where both sides of the wall must be finished,single-layer panels are applied to each side of studs. A 1 -hour assembly isobtained with single-layer 5/8 inch thick face panels. USG Cavity Shaft WallSystems have been designed and tested using accepted engineeringpractices with deflection criteria of L/120, L/240 and L/360 clear partitionheights. They are covered by three model building codes under NER 258.USG Cavity Shaft Wall Systems are approved under NER 258 for horizontalapplications to provide 1- and 2-hour fire-resistive protection to corridorceilings or the underside of stairs.


3. 01 MATERIAL STORAGE AND HANDLING

Prevent exposure to weather by impervious cover or shelter. Material shall be stored flat and in amanner to prevent distortion.

3. 02 CONNECTIONS

A. Welds:1. Welds shall be of the type, size, and location shown in the contract documents.2. Welded connections shall be performed in accordance with the AWS Specification for

Welding Sheet Steel in Structures, D1.3.3. Welders, welding operations, and welding procedures shall be qualified in accordance with

AWS D1.3.4. Consult applicable AWS Specifications for information regarding safe welding procedures.5. Welds shall be cleaned and coated with rust inhibitive galvanizing paint.

B. Screws:1. Screws shall be of the type, size, and location shown in the contract documents.2. Screw penetration through joined materials shall not be less than three (3) exposed screw

threads.3. Protective coatings.4. Contractor shall refer to installation instructions published by the screw manufacturer and

ASTM C954 for minimum spacing and edge distance requirements and torque requirements.

C. Concrete Anchors:1. Types: Anchor bolts, epoxy bolts, wedge expansion bolts, screw type concrete fasteners,

powder actuated fasteners. Shear and tension capacities of the fasteners must be verifiedfor the application in question.

2. Concrete anchors shall not be installed until full compressive strength is obtained.3. Contractor shall refer to instructions published by the anchor manufacturer for minimum

spacing, edge distance, and concrete embedment, and additional installation requirements.

05400 - 3 of 5



D. Substitutions: The contractor may substitute fasteners of equivalent specifications and loadcarrying capacities.

3. 03 INSTALLATION (GENERAL)

A. Prefabricated frames shall be square, with components attached in a manner to prevent rackingduring fabrication, transportation, and lifting. Provisions to lift the panel shall be included in theframe's design and construction.

B. Cutting of steel framing shall be by saw, shear, or plasma cutting equipment. Oxyacetylene torchcutting is not permitted.

C. Temporary bracing shall be provided and remain in place until work is permanently stabilized.

D. Insulation shall be placed in components inaccessible to the insulation contractor after theirinstallation.

E. Where splicing of track is necessary between stud spacings, a piece of stud shall be placedbetween adjacent tracks and fastened by welds or screws to each side of the track, each end.

F. Splicing of framing components, other than track, is not permitted.

G. Studs shall be spaced as shown in the contract documents or as required to meet the designrequirements and limitations of the collateral materials.

H. A sealant shall be applied to concrete or masonry surfaces prior to anchoring tracks.

3. 04 INSTALLATION (LOAD BEARING WALLS - AXIAL)

A. Studs shall be installed seated squarely against the web (within 1/16") of the top and bottom trackto assure transfer of axial load. Studs shall be plumbed, aligned, and secured to the continuousrunner tracks at each end and each side before the installation of components which induce axialload.

B. Track shall rest on a continuous bearing surface. If not provided, install full size shims belowtrack at stud locations, or set bottom track in high strength non-shrink grout.

C. Bridging, of the type and spacing described in the contract documents, shall be installed beforeloading.

D. Framed wall openings shall include headers and supporting components as shown in the contractdocuments.

E. Installation of shear wall assemblies, as shown in the contract documents shall be completedbefore the attachment of facing materials and the erection of ascending levels.

F. Where the floor or roof components do not directly align over a stud, a continuous distributionmember shall be provided at the top of the wall. Do not use the top track as a distributionmember unless specifically designed for that purpose.

05400 - 4 of 5



3. 05 INSTALLATION (JOISTS AND RAFTERS)

A. Provide web stiffeners at support locations where indicated in the contract documents.

B. Mechanical bridging, of the type and spacing described in the contract documents, shall beinstalled before loading.

C. Provide an additional joist under parallel, non-load bearing partitions when the partition lengthexceeds one-half the joist span.

D. End blocking shall be provided where joist ends are not restrained against rotation.

E. Provide additional framing around openings as shown in the contract documents when the widthof the opening exceeds the typical joist/ rafter spacing.

F. During construction, the floor/rafter system shall not be loaded beyond the limits for which it wasdesigned.


05400 - 5 of 5


ARCH. JOB #214041 SECTION 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORK

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL

The drawings, Instructions to Bidders, Form of Proposal, General Conditions, Supplementary GeneralConditions and Division 1 are included herein and govern work under this section.


A. The work covered by this section of the specifications consists of providing all equipment, materialsand labor and performing all of the work as herein specified and/or as indicated on the drawings. Allwork noted on drawings as "light iron" shall be included in this section of the specifications.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, all work shall be in accordance with standard details and practice asrecommended by the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.

C. Miscellaneous metal work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to the following:1. Loose angle lintels2. Metal railings and handrails3. Roof ladder4. All rough hardware as required to complete installation of items specified in other sections.5. Miscellaneous steel angles and other steel shapes as indicated for roof construction, expansion

joints, curbs, etc.6. Roof Hatch Safety Rails7. All other items indicated as light iron8. Angle frames around roof and floor openings9. Miscellaneous steel framing and hangers10. Trench drains with grated covers11. Safety Nosings12. Metal pan tread and closed riser stair.13. Metal plate pit cover14. Railing infill

1. 03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES

A. Submit shop, erection and large scale detail drawings in compliance with Division 1 for approval ofArchitect. Drawings shall indicate details of construction, assembly, installation quantities, materialsand finishes. All work shall be executed in strict accordance with approved drawings.

B. Samples and materials and finishes shall be submitted in triplicate for approval as requested by theArchitect. Approved samples shall become the standard of comparison for installed work.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2. 01 MATERIALS

A. All wrought iron shall comply with Fed Spec QQ-1-686a for Refined Wrought Iron Bar, Grade B.

B. All cast iron shall be tough, close grain gray iron of uniform physical character.

05500 - 1 of 5



C. All structural steel shall comply with requirements of ASTM A36. All bar steel shall be hot rolled steel(except as otherwise specified) produced in accordance with good mill practice for generalcommercial use.

D. All pipe and tubing shall be welded or seamless, full standard weight meeting requirements of ASTMA53, with copper content of not less than 0.2% and phosphorous content of not less than 0.1%.

E. All gauges shall be based on the following: U.S. for steel, A.W.A. for steel wire.

F. All exposed surfaces to be galvanized and shall be cleaned and hot dip galvanized after fabricationin accordance with Standard Specifications of the American Hot Dip Galvanizers Association, Inc.

G. All steel castings shall be made from Low Carbon Steel conforming to ASTM A27, Grade 60-30.

H. All aluminum, except as otherwise specified, shall be alloy 6063-T5, uniform in texture, hardness andappearance, free of defects. Screws and other fasteners shall be non-magnetic stainless steel unlessotherwise indicated.

2. 02 WIRE MESH FABRIC

Plain steel, .185 gauge, electrically welded at all intersections, 3" x 3" mesh. Product is based on"Weldmesh" as manufactured by McNichols Company (800-237-3820).


3. 01 CUTTING, DRILLING AND FITTING

A. Do all cutting, drilling, tapping and fitting and provide all bolts, screws, anchors, and other fittingsindicated on the drawings, directed or required for the proper assembly or attachment of the work tothe building or to the work of other trades, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install all supporting and fastening members required to connect work properly to steel, masonry andother work.

3. 02 WELDING

A. All required welding shall be done in accordance with the American Welding Society Standard Codefor ARC and Gas Welding in Building Construction, latest issue. Welders shall be certified in confor-mance with requirements specified in Section 1C.

B. Excepting sheet metal, or unless otherwise specified, welding shall be done by electric arc using onlycovered electrodes. All welds exposed in the finish shall be ground smooth.

3. 03 CASTINGS

A. All castings shall be made from accurately made patterns and shall be true to pattern, free from blowholes, sand holes, honeycombs, seams and other defects.

B. All castings shall be of sufficient thickness of metal to assure ample strength and proper workman-ship.

05500 - 2 of 5



C. All butt joints in castings shall be carefully filed off smooth and true. Remove all scale and tool off alldefects. All castings for stair work shall be machined.

D. All steel castings shall be thoroughly annealed.

3. 04 PAINTING AND FINISHING

A. All ferrous metal work except stainless steel, described in this section, shall be painted as hereinspecified, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Before leaving the shop, all work shall be thoroughly cleaned of scale, rust, grease and dirt with wirebrushes and shall be given one (1) coat of zinc chromate paint evenly spread and well worked intoall joints and open spaces. All parts inaccessible after assembling or erection shall receive two (2)coats of this paint before fastened together. A minimum dry film thickness of two mils per coat shallbe applied.

C. Approved manufacturers of zinc chromate paint are as follows: Pratt and Lambert Company, Rust-Oleum, and the Glidden Company. In lieu of zinc chromate paint, Tnemac 99-G primer may be used.

D. All galvanized surfaces indicated to be painted, shall have the surface treated to achieve the bestpossible paint adhesions. Methods and materials used are subject to approval of the Architect.

E. Painting shall be done only when the surface of the metal is perfectly dry. It shall not be done in wetor freezing weather, unless work is protected under cover.

F. All aluminum shall be cleaned of oil, grease and dirt; all surfaces shall be free of blemishes andscratches and shall receive 60 minute anodic treatment, to satin finish unless otherwise specified.

G. All aluminum contact with dissimilar materials shall be coated in accordance with recommendationsof the Aluminum Company of America, Inc.

H. All aluminum work, unless otherwise specified, shall be given two (2) spray coats of water-whitemethacrylate lacquer having a total thickness of .005 inch. Before applying the protective coating,remove all fabrication compounds, moisture, dirt and other foreign materials.

I. After installation, aluminum work shall be washed with a mild solution of non-alkali soap and water. Marred surfaces shall be refinished and badly damaged parts shall be replaced at no additional cost.

3. 05 WORKMANSHIP

A. All work executed under this Division shall be of highest standard of material and workmanship andfabricated by skilled workmen experienced in this type of work.

B. All materials shall be thoroughly straightened in the shop before being laid out or worked in any way,care being used to avoid injury to the materials.

C. All rivets, bolts, screws and other fastenings on exposed surfaces shall be countersunk. Make up allthreaded connections tightly so that thread will be entirely concealed by fittings.

05500 - 3 of 5



D. All joints, corners, copes and miters shall be accurately machined, filed and closely fitted, reinforcedon back, rigidly framed together at points of contact by brazing and welding and finished smooth sothat the joints will be practically invisible. All moldings and profiles shall be accurately matched toproduce perfect continuity of line throughout their length.

E. All joints shall be of such character and so assembled that they will be as strong and rigid as adjoiningsections.

F. Abutting bars shall be shouldered and headed, doweled, and pinned or small bars shall pass throughlarger bars and be pinned.

G. Removable members such as cover plates shall be accurately machined and fitted and secured bycountersunk tap screws.

H. Any steel reinforcing members wholly concealed within the finished construction shall be thoroughlycleaned and painted as hereinafter specified before being built in. All fastenings shall be concealedwhere possible, and all work shall be anchored to masonry or to steel in a thoroughly secure manner.

I. All exposed built-in work shall have neatly fitted joints. Set all work plumb and true and properly fittedto adjoining work. All exposed metal shall be galvanized and painted.

J. All finished work shall be true and free from twists, bends, open joints, stains, discolorations or otherdefects.

K. Provide holes, openings, etc., as required for installation of other materials such as lights, grilles,access doors, etc., including reinforcing as required.

3. 06 LOOSE ANGLE LINTELS

Furnish for installation by others, all loose angle lintels required. Unless otherwise indicated, all looseangle lintels shall have a minimum of six inches hearing at each end and be galvanized. Sizes shall beas indicated on schedule.

3. 07 FABRICATIONS

A. Window Mullion Reinforcement: Provide 1 x 1 steel reinforcement in mullions as shown on drawings.

B. Roof and Elevator Pit Ladders :1. Side bars shall be 1/4" x 1 ½" flat bar (space 16" apart)2. Rungs shall be 3/4" diameter bars spaced 12" o.c. weld to side bars.3. Provide for all required brackets and clips - wall brackets shall be 1/4" bent steel plates, bolted

to wall and welded to strings of sizes indicated.4. Ladder shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication.

C. Safety Nosings:1. Provide Super Grit type 131 safety nosings as manufactured by Wooster Products Inc. or

approved equal. Unit shall be 3" wide x 1/4" thick.2. Nosing base to be type 6063-T5 extruded aluminum.3. Anti-slip filler shall contain not less than 65% virgin grain aluminum oxide silicone carbide

abrasive.4. Provide time saver anchor, 3" from ends on approximately 12" centers.5. Color as selected by Architect.

05500 - 4 of 5



D. Roof Openings: Provide and install all angles and/or channels required to frame roof openings.

E. Steel Railings: Railings shall be 11/2" dia. (1.90" O.D.; 1.61" I.P.S.) steel pipe. All connections unlessotherwise indicated shall be welded and ground smooth.

F. Steel Ballisters: 3/4" square steel.

G. Trench Drains: Provide heavy duty trench frames with grate cover, catalog no. R-4990 BX asmanufactured by Neenah Foundry Company or approved equal.

H. Metal Pan Stair:1. 2" deep metal pan subtread and risers shall be 12 gauge steel. Nosing shall be 1" as shown on

drawings.2. Stringers shall be C12 x 20.73. Landing shall be 12 gauge metal pans 3" deep with 3" support "tees" 24" on center.4. Tread and riser support brackets shall be 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" x 3/16".5. All concrete fill to have mesh reinforcing (see Division 3).6. Pipe rail as noted and shown on drawings and herein specified.

I. Aluminum Window Railings: Railings shall be size and shape as shown on drawings. (Specifier: Verifyif required by job)


05500 - 5 of 5

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 5 – METALS ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 05513 – ALTERNATING TREAD STEEL STAIRS

05513 - 1 of 5

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

The drawings, Instructions to Bidders, Form of Proposal, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 are included herein and govern work under this section.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Fabricate and Install metal alternating tread stair assemblies in accordance with the requirements set forth in this section.

1.03 ADDITIONAL WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION

A. Field measurements of alternating tread stair installation sites and verification of vertical distance between floors and placement of structure for top support at roof level.

1.04 WORK SPECIFICALLY EXCLUDED IN THIS SECTION

The items in this section are not to be included in the metal stair contractor’s work:

A. Temporary shoring or bracing. B. Demolition and removal of existing work.

C. Clean up of site prior to installation. D. Concrete supports or other concrete work. E. Cutting; preparation of pockets; setting of plates, inserts, adapters, or other hardware of built in

items. F. Placement of wire mesh and re-bar for concrete fill. G. Temporary lights or electricity. H. Temporary safety rails. I. Protection after erection. J. Wood trim or moldings, for treads or stringers. K. Rubber treads or carpets.

L. Slip resistant concrete treatments. M. Field painting other than touch up of damaged surfaces. N. Final surface cleaning, passivation, or application of surface protectant after installation.

1.05 SUMMARY

A. Provide all material, labor, equipment and services and perform all operations necessary or required for the work of this section, in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, and including fabrication and installation of alternating tread steel stairs.


05513 - 2 of 5

B. Related work specified elsewhere includes but is not limited to:

1. Metal Fabrications in another Division 5 section. 2. Painting in Division 9.

1.06 REFERENCES American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

A. Manual of Steel Construction. B. Code of Standard Practice.

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

C. ASTM A108-99 Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality.

D. ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

E. ASTM A193/A193M-03.

F. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.

G. ASTM A500 – Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

H. ASTM A513 - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing.

. I. ASTM A563-00 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.

J. ASTM A569/A569M-91a – Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon (15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality (superseded by A1011).

K. ASTM A780-01 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Un-coated Areas of Hot-Dip

Galvanized Coatings.

L. ASTM A786/A786M-00b Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low- Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates.

M. ASTM A1011/A1011M-03 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

N. ASTM F844-00 Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use.

National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)

O. NAAMM STANDARD AMP 510-92 Metal Stairs Manual 5th Edition.


05513 - 3 of 5


A. Alternating Tread Stair Treads: shall be capable of withstanding a single concentrated 1000 pound load without permanent deformation; or 100 pounds per square foot or 300 pounds on an area of 4 square inches without exceeding the allowable working stress of the material.

B. Alternating Tread Stair Guard/Handrail: shall be capable of withstanding a single concentrated

load of 200 pounds or a uniform load of 50 pounds per linear foot applied in any direction at any point on the rail without exceeding the allowable working stress of the material.

C. Alternating Tread Stair Stringers: shall be capable of withstanding a single concentrated load of

1000 pounds at any point on the stair without permanent deformation; or a uniform live loading of 100 pounds per square foot applied in a downward direction to all tread surfaces or a 300 pound load on an area of 4 square inches without exceeding the allowable working stress of the material.

1.08 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Landings, Treads, and Mounting Base: shall be stamped and formed from single piece material. Stock shapes, hand forming, or welded remnants shall not be permitted. All stamped parts shall have integrally formed rigidizing bends and shall be spot welded to stringers of like material.

B. Welds: shall be a minimum of 6 welds per tread, and 12 welds each on the landing and mounting

base. Each weld shall be quality controlled and be capable of withstanding a minimum of 2800 lbs. in shear.

C. Pedestrian Surfaces: shall be punched through with upset non-skid openings.

D. Riser Spacing: shall be equally spaced to within 3/16" for adjacent risers and to within 3/8" for any

two non-adjacent risers on a stair.

E. Guards and Handrails: shall be contoured for body guidance and underarm support and shall be attached to the outside stringers and landings by bolting.

F. Landing Reinforcement: shall be with 1/4" steel angle notched and punched and factory welded to

the landing at the points of a guard or handrail attachment.

G. Rubber Foot Divider: shall be affixed to the central portion of the landing. A rubber bumper strip shall be attached or will be provided for field attaching to the central stringer.

1.09 DIMENSIONS

A. Alternating Tread Stair Angle: 56 or 68 degrees from horizontal as specified in the drawings.

B. Vertical Drop: the change in elevation, as shown in the drawings, between the upper finished floor surface where the top landing will be attached and the lower finished floor surface where the base of the alternating tread stair will be secured.

1.10 SUBMITTALS

A. Dimensional Prints: shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication.


05513 - 4 of 5

1.11 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Reference: AISC Code of Standard Practice, sections 6 & 7

A. Deliver materials to the job-site in good condition and properly protected against damage to finished surfaces.

B. Store material in a location and manner to avoid damage. Do not stack components. Lay out

components on firm foundation material such that bending cannot occur.

C. Store metal components in a clean dry location, away from uncured concrete, cement, or masonry products, acids, oxidizers, rain water, or any other chemical or substance that might damage the material or finish.

D. Plan work and storage locations to keep on-site handling to a minimum. E. Exercise particular care to avoid damage to material finishes or unprotected surfaces when

handling. PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER:

A. Lapeyre Stair, Inc., 5117 Toler St., Harahan, LA. 70123; 1-(800)-535-7631 or

1-(504)-570-6209. 2.02 MATERIALS:

A. Carbon Steel: 1. Treads: 13 Gauge AISI 1010/15 HRPO per ASTM A569 / A1011 grade 36 (or higher).

2. Landing & Foot Stampings: 11 Gauge AISI 1010/15 per ASTM A569/A1011 grade 36 (or higher).

3. Top Landing Support Clips: L2 x 2 x ¼” x 4” lg. with 5/8” Φ round holes and 5/8” x 1” slot holes, ASTM A569/A1011 grade 36 (or higher).

4. Stringers: a. 2" x 1 3/4" x 11 Gauge U section; AISI 1010/15 per ASTM A569/A1011 grade 36

(or higher) for 56 degree stairs under 10 vertical feet and for 68 degree stairs under 12 vertical feet.

b. 3" x 1 3/4" x 11 Gauge U section; AISI 1010/15 per ASTM A569/A1011 grade 36 or higher for 56 degree stairs over 10 vertical feet and for 68 degree stairs over 12 vertical feet.

5. Handrails: 1 1/2" OD x 0.083" AISI 1010/15 CS per ASTM A569/A1011 cold drawn, fully annealed tube per ASTM A513 grade 1008 or higher as-welded tubing or ASTM A500 Grade B.

B. Fasteners 1. Bolts: handrail to stringer; Hex Head SAE J429 Grade 5, ½” Φ x 13 TPI Landing to

structure; Carriage Head A307 or Hex Head SAE J429 Grade 5, ½” Φ x 13 TPI. 2. Nuts: ASTM A563 Grade 0. 3. Washers ASTM F844.

C. Miscellaneous Material: 1. Rubber Spine: Hollow neoprene. 2. Rubber Foot Divider: Solid neoprene.


05513 - 5 of 5

2.03 FINISHES

A. Carbon Steel: 1. Gray Primer: Powder Coat Baked Enamel or 2. Safety Yellow Paint: Powder Coat Baked Enamel or 3. Hot-Dip Galvanized: per ASTM A123.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate alternating tread steel stairs to conform with performance and construction requirements, and in accordance with approved shop drawings or dimensional prints. Fabricate and shop-assemble to greatest extent possible.

B. Carbon Steel: gas metal arc welded with treads spot welded to stringers and bolt-on handrails with

included bolts using the specified materials.


3.01 PREPARATIONS

A. Coordination: Coordinate start and installation of steel alternating tread stair with all other related and adjacent work. Installation shall not start until the construction has progressed to the point that weather conditions and remaining construction operations will not damage alternating tread stair installation.

B. Verification: Verify that dimensions and angle are correct and that substrate is in proper condition

for alternating tread stair installation. Do not proceed with installation until all necessary corrections have been made.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. If bumper has not been installed at the factory, install the bumper in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions using glue supplied with the alternating tread stair.

B. Prepare mounting holes.

C. Position alternating tread stair with top tread at same elevation as upper finished floor or roof

surface.

D. Secure alternating tread stair with not less than 2 bolts or studs at top and with not less than 2 at bottom of stair.

E. Touch up with matching paint any chipped or abraded damage to factory finish.

F. Touch up any damage to galvanized surfaces using galvanized repair paint in accordance with

ASTM A780. 3.03 CLEAN-UP

A. Leave work area clean and free of debris.


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 06220 - ROUGH AND FINISH CARPENTRY (CASEWORK HARDWARE)

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL


1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish labor and materials necessary to complete all rough and finish carpentry work andtreated exterior wood deck as indicated on drawings, and specified herein, or both, and asrequired to install and secure finish materials of other divisions. Wood treatment as specifiedin this section.

B. Provide all rough and finish lumber, decking, millwork, cabinets, grounds, nailer strips,furrings and rough hardware (if applicable), including nails, screws, bolts, anchors, hangersand other miscellaneous metal work, etc. necessary for securing wood members in place.

C. Installation shall include, but not be limited to all rough and finish lumber, decking, nailerstrips, furrings, millwork items, rough hardware, doors, insulation, trim, miscellaneousequipment, and other items not requiring installation under their respective section.

D. Provide adequate temporary wood runways over completed roof surfaces, where required,to protect same from damage by concentrated loads or traffic during construction. This isin addition to temporary protection provided under the roofing section.


A. Lumber and plywood shall bear the grade and trademark of the association under whoserules it was produced and a mark of mill identification.

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. The woodwork manufacturer and the Contractor shall be jointly responsible to make certainthat woodwork is not delivered until the building and storage areas are sufficiently dry so thatthe woodwork will not be damaged by excessive changes in moisture content.

B. Immediately upon delivery to job site, place material in area protected from weather.

C. Store materials a minimum of 6" above ground on framework or blocking and cover withprotective waterproof covering with adequate air circulation or ventilation.

D. Do not store seasoned materials in wet or damp portions of building.

1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS

Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with General Conditions

06220 - 1 of 6



PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Framing, Furring, Blocking, Headers, Cants, etc. shall be Southern Yellow Pine or WCLA"Construction Grade" Douglas Fir, air-dried and not to exceed l8% moisture content.

B. Southern Yellow Pine: 1. Two inch dimension lumber: No. 2, stress rated Fb l350. 2. Boards: No. 2, common.

C. Douglas Fir: 1. Structural lumber: 2 x 4 and larger, stress rated Fb l500. 2. 2 x 4 and less, light framing grade #2. 3. Boards: No. 2 common.

2.02 GRADING STANDARDS

American Softwood Lumber Standards PS 20-70; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; Western WoodProducts Association; D245-6.

2.03 PLYWOOD

A. Comply with PS 1-74 except as otherwise noted herein.

B. Exposed Plywood (Exterior): Provide exterior type plywood sheathing with Grade A exposedface and Grade C concealed with exterior glue.

C. Exposed Plywood (Interior): Provide interior type with Grade A exposed face and Grade Dconcealed, (l/2" thickness).

D. Where plywood is to be concealed, use interior type plywood - C-D plugged grade. If finishesare applied provide Type “B” grade smooth finish on side with applied material.

E. Panel Veneer Plywood: Provide interior cabinet grade plywood AWI Grade AA with GradeA exposed face and Grade B concealed and fibercore center with Red Oak Plain Sawn bookmatched Veneer. Where possible, provide vertical joint at vertical trim location and providebisquets at these joints to tie sheet of plywood together.

2.04 OSB SHEATHING PANELS

A. Limitations: OSB Sheathing Panels are not for unprotected exterior use. They must becovered with siding panels or other type of exterior wall cladding or roofing material. Normalexposure to weather during ordinary construction delays will not damage the panels. Additional protective measures are recommended for extended adverse weather conditions.

B. Applicable Standards: OSB Sheathing Panels comply with the following industry standardsand certifications:1. The panels conform to the Council of American Building Officials National Evaluation

Report NER 108 for APA - The Engineered Wood Association Performance Rating

06220 - 2 of 6



Standard PRP 108, and are approved under the APA Rated Sheathing Standard asfollows:a. Panels carry the APA Performance Standards for both Structural 1 and

Exposure 1 ratings.b. The panels carry the APA performance rating stamp.

C. Installation General Requirements: 1. Comply with local safety regulations when installing roof, wall, or subfloor sheathing2. Comply with the following manufacturer’s instructions and with APA’s Engineered

Wood Construction Guide, Form No. E30R/Revised January 2001.

D. Storage and Handling: 1. Store panels in clean, dry areas off the ground. If possible, store indoors. If stored

outside, cover with plastic sheets or tarps. Keep cover open and away from thesides and bottom of panels to allow for air circulation.

2. Additional protective measures may be necessary during extended adverse weatherconditions.

2.05 CASEWORK A. Countertops with high pressure laminate finish.

1. Construction: See Details. 2. Exposed surfaces (Acceptable Manufacturers)

a. Formica Corporation b. Westinghouse Appliance Sales (Micarta) c. Nevamar d. Wilsonart

3. Colors and patterns: As selected from any decorator colors or finishes. 4. Backing sheet: Clear. 5. Thickness: Horizontal surfaces 1/l6" vertical surfaces l/32"6. Adhesive: Contact type as recommended by the laminated plastic manufacturer. 7. Semi-exposed surfaces: As required by AWI quality grade.

B. Particleboard Core: 1. Medium density conforming to CS236, type 1-B2. 2. Particleboard shall not be used for shelves.

C. Cabinet Hardware and Accessories:1. Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural

woodwork, except for items specified in Division 08 - Finish Hardware.2. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135

degrees of opening, self-closing.3. Back Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.4. Pulls: Refer to millwork details.5. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.6. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. Heavy Duty Grade 1HD-100 and Grade

1HD-200, Slide mounted, full extension type, zinc plated steel ball bearing slides.Box Drawer Slides - Grade1, for drawers not more than 6 inches high and 24 incheswide. File Drawer Slides - Grade 1HD-100, for drawers more than 6 inches high or24 inches wide. Pencil Drawer Slides- Grade 2, for drawers not more than 3 incheshigh and 24 inches wide.

7. Aluminum Slides for Sliding Glass Doors: BHMA A156.9, B07063.8. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

06220 - 3 of 6



9. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.10. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies

with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. Brushed Stainless steel,(US32D) unless noted otherwise in drawings.

2.06 WOOD TREATMENTS

A. Preservative Treated Lumber: Structural framing lumber, decking, wood blocking, plywood,cant nailers, plates, and ground buried in concrete slabs or set in or on exterior concrete ormasonry or within 1'-0" of the exterior including all blocking in connection with roofing workshall be pressure treated with water borne preservative complying with American WoodPreservers Bureau LP-2. After treatment, kiln dry to a maximum moisture content of l5%. Mark each treated item to comply with the AWPB quality. Mark requirements for the speci-fied requirements. Wood in contact with roofing products shall not be treated with creosoteor pentachlorophenol. Nails, bolts and other fasteners used in connection with treated woodshall be galvanized. Submit certification by treating plant. Provide for all wood items wherecalled for as such on the drawings and for new exterior wood deck.

2.07 BLOCKING, GROUNDS AND FRAMING

A. Shall be of thickness required for intended purpose.

B. Framing: Frame, fit closely, set framing accurately to required lines, levels, secure rigidly inplace. Provide special framing or construction not indicated or specified, as required to com-plete work in best workmanlike manner. Do nailing, and fastening in a thorough manner; usenails and fasteners of ample size; l6d spikes where practicable.

C. Provide dressed wood grounds and furring where required and herein described.

D. Set grounds rigidly, in perfect alignment, true up with long straight edge.

E. Fastening: To concrete and solid masonry with expansion bolts. Fasten to hollow masonrywith toggle bolts or with nails in metal wall plugs. Fasten to metal with stove bolts and fastento metal lath with wire. The use of wood plugs will not be permitted.

F. Install rough wood blocking, rough hardware metal fastenings for proper installation of finishwork and accessories.

G. Install furring as indicated.

2.08 MOLDED RUBBER SEALS

Shall be provided to close space between top plates and/or masonry partitions and roof deck of allinterior walls which go to roof deck, to prevent air movement. Rubber seals are provided underSection 05300 and installed under this section.

2.09 FINISH HARDWARE

A. Shall be delivered from Division 8 for installation after painting.

06220 - 4 of 6



B. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Fit accurately, applysecurely and adjust carefully.

C. Check hardware manufacturer's shipping list; store hardware in locked areas set aside inbuilding. Examine hardware at work completion. Test, oil, grease, ease, adjust hardwarefor perfect operation. Handle hardware items carefully. Keep free from scratches, dents,and other defacements during progress of work by covering as necessary.

2.010 ANCHORS

Anchors for wall plates, not otherwise indicated; shall be l/2" round bolts, l0" long, 48" apart withhooked ends. Provide with washers, or per structural drawings, whichever is most restrictive.

2.011 SILL SEALS

Protecto Premium Energy Sill Sealer combined a full 3/8" closed cell polyethylene foam with anaggressive self adhesive waterproofing membrane that conforms and seals off the voids andirregularities between the top of the foundations and sill plate.


3.01 DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTALLATION

A. Hang all swinging sliding and folding doors and install finish hardware without marring,injuring work in premortised doors.

B. Fit and hang wood doors as shown on drawings. Doors should not be cut to fit openingssmaller than those for which they are manufactured. Leave approximately 3/32" clearanceon each side, l/8" clearance at top, 3/l6" over thresholds and 3/8" where there is no threshold.

C. Check hardware manufacturer's shipping lists; store hardware in locked areas set aside inbuilding. Examine hardware at work completion; test, oil, grease, ease, adjust hardware forperfect operation. Handle hardware items carefully; keep free from scratches, dents otherdefacements during progress of work covering as necessary.

3.02 GENERAL

A. All work shall be erected, plumb, true, square and in accord with manufacturer's specifica-tions.

B. All members shall be in as long pieces as practical with joints arranged to be inconspicuousas possible and so as to allow for shrinkage.

C. All work well nailed and exposed nail set.

D. Finish work to be blind nailed.

E. All corners carefully mitered.

F. Work shall be assembled at the mill insofar as practical, delivered ready for erection.

06220 - 5 of 6



3.03 LAMINATED PLASTIC

A. Furnish all laminated plastic countertops as called for on particle board core, backbandedwith clear plastic.

B. Countertops shall include all back and end splash pieces.

C. Cut out counters where sinks occur. Sink rings are furnished in Division l5. Coordinate forsize of sink opening required.

3.04 WORKMANSHIP

A. All millwork shall be done by craftsmen skilled in their trade, all work secured and rigidlyfastened to withstand the action intended of same.

B. All joints to be close fitting, tongued or rabbeted together so as to conceal any shrinkage. Joints shall be glued and clamped together.

C. All internal angles of continuous members shall be coped and external corners mitered.

D. All doors and drawers shall be properly fitted so as to open freely without binding and shallcontact wood stops on all points.


06220 - 6 of 6


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 06400 - ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK AND MILLWORK

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



A. This section subject to applicable requirements of the bidding information and Division 1.

B. Furnish all architectural woodwork shown on drawings and specified herein. Architectural woodworkincludes all woodwork exposed to view in finished building, except as exempted in paragraph Cbelow; and includes, but not necessarily limited to: 1. Plywood 2. Standing and running trim 3. Counterwork and cabinets and cabinet hardware 4. Millwork5. High pressure laminates 6. Granite Countertops

C. Work Specified in Other Sections: 1. Rough carpentry2. Finish carpentry 3. Pressure treated wood 4. Fire retardant treated wood

D. Furnish all mill-built woodwork assembled as practical for shipment, ready for installation, all as calledfor on the plans and as specified herein, complete with all hardware.


A. Comply with applicable provisions for "Custom Grade" work of the "Architectural Woodwork QualityStandards Illustrated" of the American Woodwork Institute (AWI) except as otherwise specified.

B. Mark each assembled unit of architectural woodwork with manufacturer's identification and grademark evidencing compliance with indicated AWI quality grade. Locate mark on surface which will notbe exposed to view after installation.

C. The approved woodwork manufacturer shall have a reputation for completing work on time and shallhave successfully completed comparable work.

D. Lumber and plywood shall bear the grade and trademark of the association under whose rules it wasproduced and a mark of mill identification.

E. The Architect reserves the right to approve the woodwork manufacturer selected to furnish all of thewoodwork.

F. All granite shall be as manufactured, finished and installed according to Marble Institute of America(MIA) latest standards.

06400 - 1 of 6



1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 1 - General Requirements for directions on remission of submittals.

B. Submit manufacturers descriptive literature of specialty items not manufactured by the architecturalwoodworker.

C. Samples: 1. Exposed cabinet hardware, one unit each type and finish. After approval, samples will be tagged

and incorporated in the construction. 2. Solid stock: 4 - 4" x 16" x 3/4". 3. Plywood: 4 - 12" x 16" x ½" 4. Deliver wood samples to painting contractor for preparation of finish samples.5. Granite: Min. size of 8" x 8" for general approval of product color range.

1.05 FIELD DIMENSIONS

A. The woodwork manufacturer is responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by job conditionsand shall show on his shop drawings all required field measurements beyond his control.

B. The General Contractor and the woodwork manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintainthese field dimensions.

1.06 WORKMANSHIP

A. All millwork shall be done by craftsmen skilled in their trade, all work secured and rigidly fastened towithstand the action intended of same.

B. All joints to be close fitting, tongued or rabbeted together so as to conceal any shrinkage. Joints shallbe glued and clamped together.

C. All internal angles of continuous members shall be coped and external corners mitered.

1.07 DELIVERY AND HANDLING

A. The woodwork manufacturer and the contractor shall be jointly responsible to make certain thatwoodwork is not delivered until the building and storage areas are sufficiently dry so that thewoodwork will not be damaged by excessive changes in moisture content.

B. Deliver units to job site, protected from damage and elements.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Exposed solid wood for transparent finish: to be as selected. Select Red Oak, etc.

B. Solid wood for semi-exposed members: Same as exposed members.

C. Solid wood for concealed members: Mill option hardwood.

06400 - 2 of 6



D. Exposed plywood for transparent finish: to be as selected. Select Red Oak, half round plain sliced,book matched with particleboard core.

E. Semi-exposed plywood: Same as exposed plywood.

F. Concealed plywood: At option of mill.

G. Particleboard: ANSI A 108.1, grade 1-M-1. or melamine

H. Adhesive: Type II, CS 35. No heat transfer iron-on laminate will be accepted.

I. Plastic Laminate: Comply with NEMA LD-3 for type and thickness. Color, pattern and finish asselected by Architect as manufactured by Formica, Standard Series [Wilson art, Nevamar, MOZ]manufacturer's decorator series products.

2.02 MILLWORK

A. Millwork shall include the following, but not be limited to:1. Wall Mounted Wood Bumpers:

a. Provide 2 x 10 Douglas Fir bumpers were shown on drawings.b. Lumber shall be kiln dried to 19% maximum moisture content.c. Bumpers to be installed with a double row as indicated.d. Bumpers to be finished with heavy coat of sealer and one coat of varnish.e. All exposed horizontal edges of wood bumpers to have 3/4" chamfer.f. See Division 5 for anchor requirements.

2. Chair Rail:a. Provide 1 x 6 red birch chair rail at APC carts and hamper area.b. Provide radiused ends at chair rail.c. Install chair rail 3'-1" from floor to center line of chair rail.

3. Miscellaneous Millwork:a. Red oak molding and trim.

4. Shelves for Janitor Closet:a. Provide 3/4" particle board shelving (12" wide) with plastic laminate facing on all exposed

surfaces. b. Provide No. 87 heavy-duty slotted standards with No. 186 heavy-duty slot brackets as

manufactured by Knape and Vogt Manufacturing Co. or approved equal.

2.03 CASEWORKA. Casework shall include the following:

1. Vanity Counters:a. Provide sizes and configuration as shown on drawings and specified herein (field measure

and scribe to walls). All counters to receive plastic laminate finish. b. Provide for sink cut-outs. c. Provide all hardware required. Hardware for millwork is not included in hardware Section 8. d. Provide all necessary blocking and brackets for support and attachment to walls. e. Plastic laminate shall be applied to 3/4" particle board in strict accordance with laminate

manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.f. Plastic laminate shall be as manufactured by those listed. Colors and patterns to be as

selected by Architect.2. Cabinets, Registration desk, Misc. Casework.

a. shall be custom fabricated, sizes and configurations as shown on drawings.3. Lunch Room and Alcove Cabinets:

06400 - 3 of 6



a. Cabinets shall be Laminate Raised Square as manufactured by Merillat, in sizes andconfigurations shown on drawings.

4. Plastic Laminate Window Stools:a. Plastic laminate shall be applied to 3/4" particle board in strict accordance with laminate

manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.b. Plastic laminate shall be as manufactured by Formica Corporation. Colors and patterns to

be as selected by Architect. Thickness: horizontal surfaces 1/16", vertical surfaces 1/32". Adhesive: Contact type as recommended by the laminated plastic manufacturer. Semi-exposed surfaces: As required by AWI quality grade.

2.04 CASE WORK HARDWAREA. Hardware and Accessories:

1. Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural woodwork,except for items specified in Division 08 - Finish Hardware.

2. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening,self-closing.

3. Back Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.4. Pulls: Refer to millwork details.5. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.6. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. Heavy Duty Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200, Slide

mounted, full extension type, zinc plated steel ball bearing slides. Box Drawer Slides - Grade1,for drawers not more than 6 inches high and 24 inches wide. File Drawer Slides - Grade 1HD-100, for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches wide. Pencil Drawer Slides- Grade 2, fordrawers not more than 3 inches high and 24 inches wide.

7. Aluminum Slides for Sliding Glass Doors: BHMA A156.9, B07063.8. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.9. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.10. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA

A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. Brushed Stainless steel, (US32D) unless notedotherwise in drawings.

2.05 CLOSET UNITS AND SHELVES

A. AWI quality grade: Custom.

2.06 CHAIR RAIL, PANEL MOLDING, AND CROWN MOLDING

A. AWI quality grade: Custom, continuous rail, red oak.

PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. All work shall be erected plum, true, square and in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.

B. All members shall be in as long as possible and so as to allow for shrinkage.

C. All work well nailed and exposed nails set.

D. Finish work to be blind nailed. E. All corners carefully mitered.

06400 - 4 of 6



F. Work shall be assembled at the mill insofar as practical, delivered ready erection under Section06220.

3.02 CONDITION OF SURFACES

A. Examine all grounds, stripping and blocking to secure cabinets.

B. Do not install until all defects are corrected.

3.03 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication Workmanship: Comply with Section 400 - Casework of the reference standard and flushoverlay design as shown in Architectural Woodwork Institute publication, "Architectural CaseworkDetails," except as modified:1. All edge grain of exposed and semi-exposed plywood and particle board shall be concealed. 2. Assemble all cabinet body members with Dowels and adhesive. 3. Drive all power-driven "T" head nails or staples, where permitted, on exposed surfaces with long

dimension parallel to the exposed grain. 4. Provide dust panels between drawers. 5. Comply with details shown for profile and construction; and where not otherwise shown, comply

with applicable quality standards. 6. Install plywood with vertical grain.

B. Mill Installed Accessories: Install all specified hardware, equipment and special items.

3.04 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM

A. Fabricate to dimension, profile and detail shown. Back out reverse side of trim applied to flat surface

3.05 LAMINATED PLASTIC

A. Counters shall include all back and end splash pieces as detailed. Provide end splash at wall returns.

B. Provide scribing allowance to adjoining walls.

C. Laminate to be applied using specified contact cement, no heat transfer iron-on laminate will beaccepted.

3.06 GRANITE COUNTERTOPS

A. Granite countertops shall be of Architectural Grade Granite, free from cracks, ASTM C97.

B. Thickness shall be 1-1/4" minimum with full bullnose at all exposed edges.

C. Seams where necessary shall be filled with colored epoxy of silicone.

D. Finish to be polished with flatness. Tolerance to be 1/16" in 4'-0" maximum.

E. Color to be as selected by Owner.

06400 - 5 of 6



3.07 INSTALLATION

A. Install cabinets plumb and level without distortion.

B. Shim as necessary with concealed shims.

C. Accurately scribe and closely fit all face plates, filler strips and trim strips to irregularities of adjacentsurfaces.


06400 - 6 of 6

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY D I V I S I O N 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 06650 - SOLID POLYMER FABRICATION COUNTERTOPS

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



A. Work described in this Section:1. Reception countertop2. Toilet countertops

1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Finish Carpentry.

B. Casework.

C. Plumbing.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. Applicable Standards:1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)2. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)3. Federal Specification (FS)

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, component sizes, fabrication details, attachment provisions,and coordination requirements with adjacent work.

B. Samples: Submit minimum 2" x 2" samples. Indicate full range of color and pattern variation. Approved sample will be retained as standards for work.

C. Product Data: Indicate product description, fabrication information, and compliance with specifiedperformance requirements.

D. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturers care and maintenance data, including repair and cleaninginstructions.


A. Allowable Tolerance:1. Variation in component size +/- 1/8".2. Location of openings +/- 1/8" from indicated location.


A. Deliver no components to site before areas are ready for installation. Store indoors prior toInstallation.

06650 - 1 of 3



B. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide protective coverings to preventphysical damage or staining following installation for duration of project.

1.08 WARRANTY

Provide manufacturers ten (10) year warranty against defects in materials. Warranty shall providematerial and labor to repair or replace defective materials.

PART II - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Specified Product: Corion (Avonite) Surfaces from DuPont (Avonite)Corporation.

B. Homogeneous filled acrylic; not coated, laminated or of composite construction; meeting ANSI I124.3and .6, Type 6, and Fe. Spec. WW-P-541 E/Gen.1. Material shall have minimum physical and performance properties as published by DuPont

(Avonite).2. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.010" shall be repairable by sanding and polishing.

C. Countertops: 3/4" thick Corion, (Avonite) adhesively joined with inconspicuous seams; edge detailsas shown; color to be selected by Architect. Surfaces to be unaffected by Class I reagents andrepairable after exposure to Class II reagents.

2.02 ACCESSORY PRODUCTS

A. Joint Adhesive: Manufacturers standard two-part adhesive kit to create inconspicuous non-porousjoints, with a chemical bond.

B. Sink Bowl Mounting Hardware: Manufacturers approved bowl clips, brass inserts, and fasteners forattachment of sinks.

2.03 FABRICATIONS

A. Fabrication to be performed by a certified Corion (Avonite) fabricator/installer.

B. Fabricate components in shop to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, inaccordance with approved shop drawings and Corion (Avonite) requirements.

C. Form joints between components using manufacturers standard joint adhesive. Joints shall beinconspicuous in appearance and without voids. Attach 2" wide reinforcing trip of Corion (Avonite)under each joint.

D. Provide holes and cutouts for plumbing and bath accessories as indicated on the drawings.

E. Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform finish. Rout all cutouts, then sand all edgessmooth. Repair or reject defective or inaccurate work.

F. Finish: All surfaces shall have uniform finish. Satin with a rating of 5-20.

06650 - 2 of 3



G. Cove Backsplashes: Fabricate 6" radius cove at intersection of counters and backsplashes. Formbacksplashes using 3/4" Corion (Avonite). Fabricate in shop or field.


3.01 JOB MOCK-UP

A. Prior to final approval of shop drawings, erect one full size mock-up of each component at project sitefor Architect review.

B. Should mock-up not be approved, rework or remake until approval is secured. Remove rejected unitsfrom project site.

C. Approved mock-ups shall remain as part of finished work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. install components plumb and level, in accordance with approved shop drawings and productinstallation details.

B. Form field joints using manufacturers recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finishedwork. Keep components and hands clean when making joints.

C. Adhere undermount/submount/bevel mount sinks/bowls to countertops using manufacturersrecommended adhesive and mounting hardware.

D. Adhere topmount sinks/bowls to countertops using manufacturer recommended adhesives and color-matched silicone sealant.

E. Provide backsplashes and endsplashes as indicated on the drawings. Adhere to countertops usingmanufacturers standard color-matched silicone sealant.

F. Keep components and hands clean during installation. Remove adhesives, sealants, and otherstains. Components shall be clean on date of Substantial Completion.

G. Make plumbing connections to sinks in accordance with Division 15, Mechanical.

H. Protect surfaces from damage until date of Substantial Completion. Repair or replace damaged workthat cannot be repaired to Architect’s satisfaction and invoice for the cost of repairs. Architect to pre-approve cost estimate before repairs are made.

I. Fabricator/installer is to provide the Corion (Avonite) Commercial Care and Maintenance video,review maintenance procedures, and the Corion (Avonite) warranty with the Head of Maintenanceupon completion of project.


06650 - 3 of 3


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 06651 - CULTURED GRANITE/MARBLE COUNTER-TOPSAND TUB/SHOWER SURROUNDS

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



Furnish all labor, material, etc. necessary to complete work shown on drawings or specified here inconnection with guest bath vanity countertops and tub/shower surrounds.


A. Finish Carpentry

B. Casework

C. Plumbing

1.04 REFERENCES

A. Applicable Standards:1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)2. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)3. Federal Specification (FS)

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, component sizes, fabrication details, attachment provisions,and coordination requirements with adjacent work.

B. Samples: Submit minimum 2" x 2" samples. Indicate full range of color and pattern variation. Approved sample will be retained as standards for work.

C. Product Data: Indicate product description, fabrication information, and compliance with specifiedperformance requirements.

D. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturers care and maintenance data, including repair and cleaninginstructions.


A. Allowable Tolerance:1. Variation in component size +/-1/8".2. Location of openings +/-1/8" from indicated location.

06651 - 1 of 3




A. Deliver no components to site before areas are ready for installation. Store indoors prior toinstallation.

B. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide protective coverings to preventphysical damage or staining following installation for duration of project.

1.08 WARRANTY

Provide manufacturers ten (10) year warranty against defects in materials. Warranty shall providematerial and labor to repair or replace defective materials.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Vanity Countertops: Shall be Mincey Marble Manufacturing, Inc. cultured granite with bowed front asindicated on drawings. Top to have a raised drip edge with full bullnose. Provide matching back andside splashes, and 10" skirts. Finish to be Macroon Matte.

B. Tub and Shower Surrounds: Shall be TS-DS Mincey Marble Manufacturing, Inc. cultured marble withpattern as acceptable to Brand. Surrounds are to extend to the ceiling . Coordinate with the vanitycolor and have a matte finish. Provide tub corner soap holder and Shower foot rest as shown oninterior elevations.

2.02 ACCESSORY PRODUCTS

A. Joint Adhesive: Manufacturers standard two-part adhesive kit to create inconspicuous, non-porousjoints, with a chemical bond.

B. Sink Bowl Mounting Hardware: Manufacturers approved bowl clips, brass inserts, and fasteners forattachment of sinks.

2.03 FABRICATIONS

A. Fabrication to be performed by a certified fabricator/ installer.

B. Fabricate components in shop to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, inaccordance with approved shop drawings.

C. Form joints between components using manufacturers standard joint adhesive. Joints shall beinconspicuous in appearance and without voids.

D. Provide holes and cutouts for plumbing and bath accessories as indicated on the drawings.Coordinate with fixture template.

E. Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform finish. Repair or reject defective or inaccuratework.

06651 - 2 of 3



F. Finish: All surfaces shall have uniform finish.

G. Cove Backsplashes: Fabricate ½" radius cove at intersection of counters and backsplashes.

PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 JOB MOCK-UP

A. Prior to final approval of shop drawings, erect one full size mock-up of each component at project sitefor Architect review.

B. Should mock-up not be approved, rework or remake until approval is secured. Remove rejected unitsfrom project site.

C. Approved mock-ups shall remain as part of finished work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install components plumb and level, in accordance with approved shop drawings and productinstallation details.

B. Form field joints using manufacturers recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finishedwork. Keep components and hands clean when making joints.

C. Adhere undermount/submount/bevel mount sinks/bowls to countertops using manufacturersrecommended adhesive and mounting hardware.

D. Adhere topmount sinks/bowls to countertops using manufacturer recommended adhesives and color-matched silicone sealant.

E. Provide backsplashes and endsplashes as indicated on the drawings. Adhere to countertops usingmanufacturers standard color-matched silicone sealant.

F. Keep components and hands clean during installation. Remove adhesives, sealants, and otherstains. Components shall be clean on date of Substantial Completion.

G. Make plumbing connections to sinks in accordance with Division 15, Mechanical.

H. Protect surfaces from damage until date of Substantial Completion. Repair or replace damaged workthat cannot be repaired to Architect’s satisfaction and invoice for the cost of repairs. Architect to pre-approve cost estimate before repairs are made.

I. Fabricator/installer is to provide the Commercial Care and Maintenance video, review maintenanceprocedures, and the warranty with the head of Maintenance upon completion of project.


06651 - 3 of 3

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 07100 - COLD FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



Furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete all waterproofing work indicated on the drawingsand specifications herein. Waterproofing for below grade, back-filled conditions. Provide a completepolyurethane waterproofing membrane system including all applicable sealants and elastomeric flashingsneeded to prevent water penetration at locations indicated. For specific use on all elevator pit walls, andfoundation walls where shown, prior to back filling.

1.03 SubmittalsA. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.B. Product data:

1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the

specified requirements;3. Shop Drawings or catalog illustrations in sufficient detail to show installation and interface

of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades;4. Manufacturer's current recommended installation procedures which, when reviewed by

Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation proceduresused on the Work.

5. Written documentation of applicator's qualifications, including reference projects of similarscope and complexity, with current phone contacts of architects and owners for verifica-tion.

1.04 Quality AssuranceA. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the

necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods neededfor proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Applicator qualifications:1. Applicator shall have at least three years experience in installing materials of types

specified and shall have successfully completed at least three projects of similar scopeand complexity.

2. Applicator shall designate a single individual as project foreman who shall be on site at alltimes during installation.

C. Convene a pre-installation job-site conference three weeks prior to commencing work of thisSection:1. Secure attendance by Architect, Contractor, applicator, and authorized representatives of

the membrane system manufacturer and interfacing trades.2. Examine Drawings and Specifications affecting work of this Section, verify all conditions,

review installation procedures, and coordinate scheduling with interfacing portions of theWork.

1.05 Delivery, Storage and HandlingA. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's unopened containers with all labels intact and

legible at time of use.B. Maintain the products in accord with manufacturer's recommendations with proper precau-

tions to ensure fitness of material when installed.

07100 - 1 of 5



C. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 66 00.

1.06 Substrate ConditionsA. General:

1. Provide applicator with surfaces that are broom clean, dry, sound and free of voids,bugholes, rockpockets, honeycombs, protrusions, excessive roughness, foreign matter,frost, ice and other contaminants which may inhibit application or performance of thewaterproofing membrane system.

2. Using suitable abrasive methods, remove residue of form release, curing compound,chemical retarders and other surface treatments, laitance, mortar smear, sawcuttingresidue, mill scale, rust, loose material and other contaminants from concrete, masonryand ferrous metal surfaces to receive the work of this Section.

B. Concrete: Where work of this Section will be applied to concrete, provide surfaces that aresmooth with finish equal to one that is light steel troweled followed by a fine hair broom.

C. Plywood: Where work of this Section will be applied to plywood, provide exterior gradeplywood, 5/8" thick minimum, with A-side up, fastened with ring-shank nails.

D. Decks:1. Slope deck surfaces to drains that have flanges at membrane level which are flush with

deck surfaces. 2. Rigidly install pipe, vents and other surface protrusions, properly flash them, and cover to

prevent entry of membrane materials.E. Metal flashings: Where metal flashings are substrate to waterproofing membrane, set the

flashings in continuous bedding bead of urethane sealant; install sealant S-bead betweenmetal laps and mechanically fasten to substrate along leading edges at every 4" on center,staggered linearly, to lay flat without fishmouths.

F. Joints: Configuration shall be consistent with this Section and with all other requirements ofthe Contract Documents.

1.07 WarrantyA. Deliver to the Architect signed copies of the following written warranties against defective

materials and workmanship executed for the following periods following date of completion. Warrant that installed waterproofing membrane system shall be free of defects includingadhesive failure, cohesive failure, and waterproofing failure resulting from substrate crackingup to 1/16 inch.

1. Manufacturer's standard warranty covering materials for five year period;2. Applicator's standard warranty covering workmanship for two year period.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 GeneralA. Provide a complete fluid applied elastomeric waterproofing membrane system designed for

concealed building components subject to hydrostatic head that is polyurethane, coal-tar freeand complies with ASTM C 836:1. Acceptable product:

a. TREMproof 201/60; Tremco Inc.b. or prior approved equal

2. For application to green- or surface-dry-but-damp concrete surfaces, acceptable product:a. TREMproof 250 GC; Tremco Inc.b. or prior approved equal

07100 - 2 of 5



2.02 AccessoriesA. Primer: As recommended by waterproofing membrane system manufacturer;B. Joint backing: Closed-cell, polyethylene rod as recommended by membrane manufacturer;C. Reinforcing fabric: Woven fiberglass scrim cloth;D. Elastomeric sheet flashing: 1/16 inch thick by 12 inch wide uncured neoprene sheeting;E. Elastomeric transition flashing to above-grade: polyurethane liquid-applied coating system

with ultraviolet protective topcoat.1. Acceptable product:

a. Vulkem 350/351; Tremco Inc.F. Joint Treatment:

1. Acceptable product:a. Dymeric 240FC; Tremco Inc.b. TREMproof 201/60T; Tremco Inc.c. TREMproof 250GCT; Tremco Inc. d. or prior approved equal

G. Protection course: As recommended by waterproofing membrane manufacturer.1. Acceptable product for walls:

a. Protection Mat; Tremco Inc.2. Acceptable product for slabs:

a. Tremco 2450; Tremco Inc b. 40-mil HDPE Root Barrier; Tremco Inc. c. Protection Mat; Tremco Inc.

3. Acceptable product for planters:a. 40-mil HDPE Root barrier; Tremco Inc.

H. Prefabricated Composite Drainage: Two-part prefabricated composite drainage materialconsisting of a formed polystyrene core covered on one side with filter fabric.1. For backfilled walls less than 20 feet in height, a composite drainage mat with non-woven

polypropylene filter fabric, 9 gpm/ft flow capacity per unit width and 10,800 lbs/ft² com-pressive strength. Acceptable product:a. Tremdrain; Tremco Inc.

2. For backfilled walls 20 feet or greater in height, a composite drainage mat with non-wovenpolypropylene filter fabric, 16 gpm/ft flow capacity per unit width and 15,000 lbs/ft²compressive strength. Acceptable product:a. Tremdrain 1000; Tremco Inc.

3. For slabs receiving concrete topping and for planters, a composite drainage mat withwoven monofilament filter fabric, 18 gpm/ft flow capacity per unit width and 21,000 lbs/ft²compressive strength. Acceptable products:a. Tremdrain 2000; Tremco Inc.

4. For slabs receiving pavers, a composite drainage mat with non-woven polypropylene filterfabric, 9 gpm/ft flow capacity per unit width and 30,000 lbs/ft² compressive strength.Acceptable product:a. Tremdrain S; Tremco Inc.

5. For water collection and high profile section for water flow around the perimeter of thestructure, a drainage composite with non-woven needle-punched polypropylene filterfabric, a transition section to couple with adjoining drainage mat, high profile flow capacityof 100 gpm and fitted with compatible factory-molded universal tees, universal outlets and12” corner guards. Acceptable product:a. TREMDrain Total-Drain; Tremco Inc.

2.03 Other MaterialsA. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper

installation, as selected by the Contractor and approved by the membrane system manufac-turer as compatible, subject to review of the Architect.

07100 - 3 of 5




3.01 Surface Conditions

A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the workof those trades for interface with the work of this Section.

B. Applicator shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will beperformed.1. Verify conformance with manufacturer's requirements;2. Report unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the Architect;3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 PreparationA. Surface preparation and detailing procedures to be in accord with waterproof membrane

system manufacturer's instructions and recommendations except where more stringentrequirements are indicated.

B. Clean all deck surfaces to receive membrane system in accord with manufacturer's instruc-tions; vacuum clean or blow clean with oil-free compressed air all surfaces to receivesealants, detailing materials or membranes immediately prior to installation.

C. Rout, clean, prepare and detail surface cracks in accord with manufacturer's instructions;install backer rod where required.

D. Clean metal surfaces to bright metal by wire brushing or mechanical etching; scuff-sand leadflashing and plastic surfaces.

E. Prime surfaces in accord with manufacturer's instructions.F. Install 1/4" diameter backer rod into corner of all horizontal-to-vertical junctures subject to

movement and cover with 1" detail cant of approved sealant; install 1" detail cants at projec-tions, curbs and other horizontal-to-vertical junctures.

G. Install detail coats, joint and crack treatments, elastomeric flashing and reinforcing fabric inaccord with manufacturer's instructions.

H. Allow detail applications to cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior togeneral application of membrane.

3.03 ApplicationA. General: Install waterproofing system in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and

instructions as applies to the Work except where more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Grid deck surfaces to assure proper coverage rates and verify membrane wet-film mil

thickness with gauges as work progresses.2. Retain empty product containers during course of work to aid in determining whether

completed membrane complies with required average dry-film thickness.B. Verify proper dry condition of substrate using method recommended by membrane system

manufacturer; perform adhesion checks prior to general application of membrane systemusing field adhesion test method recommended by manufacturer.

C. Mask off adjoining surfaces not to receive membrane system.D. Wipe clean all detail coats with white rags wetted with Xylene solvent; do not saturate detail

coat.E. Apply membrane uniformly and allow to cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.F. Feather terminating edge when entire area cannot be completed in one day; clean area 6"

wide along terminating edge of membrane with Xylene solvent on clean white rags prior tostartup on next working day; use interlaminary primer per manufacturer's instructions asneeded; overlap existing work by 6" with new work.

07100 - 4 of 5



G. Flood test: Follow ASTM D 5957. Plug drains on deck surfaces and use sand bags or othermeans to restrict runoff. Flood deck with water to depth of 2" (50 mm) and allow to stand atleast 48 hours.

H. Install protection course over cured membrane in accord with manufacturer's instructions. I. Install drainage material in accord with manufacturer's instructions.

3.04 Protection and Clean-UpA. Promptly remove primer or membrane system material from adjacent surfaces with MEK,

Toluene or Xylene; leave work area in broom clean condition.B. Prohibit traffic over completed work and protect against work overhead until protection course

is installed; protect from damage until protected beneath overlaying work.


07100 - 5 of 5


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 07200 - INSULATION

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



A. Provide labor and materials and everything necessary for and incidental to the complete installationof building insulation shown on the drawings and described herein.

B. The following items are specifically included without limiting the generality implied by thesespecifications and the drawings. 1. Perimeter insulation.2. Roof insulation.3. Roof insulation (tapered)4. Masonry insulation.5. Batt insulation with vapor barrier. (Refer to Spec. Section 07201)6. Rigid EPS board masonry insulation.7. Sound attenuation blanket.

1.03 CERTIFICATION The manufacturers shall submit the insulation characteristics and tests of types to be used. TheContractor shall submit a list of insulation types and thicknesses and their intended places of use with themanufacturers submittal for the Architect's approval.

PART II - PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Rigid Insulation: The insulations listed are based on products manufactured by Thermal Foams, Inc.,2101 Kenmore Avenue, Buffalo, NY 14209, or roof insulation by Carlisle Syntec Corp. Products ofother manufacturers with equal characteristics will be considered.1. Perimeter Insulation: Thermal Foams, 2" thick Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation , 1.5 lb.

density R-9.1 @ 40º F.

2. Roof Insulation: Polyisocyanurate HJP-H insulation, to have a minimum compressive strengthof 120 kPa with an acceptable facer (mineral coated glass fleece, bituminous impregnated glassfleece, felt, etc.) with sufficient delamitation strength and thickness equal to or exceeding an R-value of 24.0. This manufacturer must be compatible with the specified roofing system in Section07501 and maintain all warranties. One source supplier of roofing material is essential toobtaining warranties.

3. Roof Insulation Tapered: Polyisocyanurate HP-H tapered insulation to have a minimumcompressive strength of 120 kPa with an acceptable facer (mineral coated glass fleece,bituminous impregnated glass fleece, felt, etc.) with sufficient delamitation strength and thicknessequal to or exceeding an R-value of 30.0. This manufacturer must be compatible with thespecified roofing system in Section 07501 and maintain all warranties. One source supplier ofroofing material is essential to obtaining warranties

07200 - 1 of 3



B. Wall, Floor and Ceiling Batt Thermal Insulation: Refer to Specification Section 07201.

C. Masonry Insulation: Granular EPS insulation shall be installed in the cores of masonry units locatedin exterior walls where no drywall finish is indicated on the interior side. Masonry insulation shall beZonolite by W.R. Grace Co., or EPS Bead by ThermoFoams, Inc.

D. Masonry Insulation (Rigid): ½" thick, 1.25 lb. density, 1.93 R minimum by Thermal Foams, orArchitect approved equal.

E. Sound Attenuation Blanket: As specifically manufactured by U. S. Gypsum Corp. for SoundAttenuation Batts (SAB) or Thermafiber, LLC Soundzero Acoustic Blankets (SAB) & Thermafiber,LLC, for Sound Attenuation Fire Batt (SAFB) Insulation/Mineral Wool. 3" min. or as shown on plansto fill cavity. These products may not be substituted with standard batt insulation.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General:1. All materials shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.2. Surfaces to receive insulation with bonding adhesives shall be clean and free of protrusions. All

form release agents on concrete shall be completely removed. Bonding adhesives shall be usedin strict conformance with manufacturer's requirements.

3. Where caulk joint is shown, insulation shall be held back 3/4".4. Rigid insulation shall be neatly cut and fitted with firm contact to adjacent surfaces.5. Batt and loose insulation shall be tucked into voids of exterior walls. Care shall be taken to avoid

holes in vapor barrier.6. Maintain minimum temperatures when adhesives require curing or warm surfaces for application

is recommended by manufacturer.

B. Roof Insulation :1. Roof slope is to be 1/4" per foot with a minimum thickness of 1" at roof drains.2. Compliance: Federal Spec. HH-1-1972-2 Class 1 Factory Mutual Class 1 approved.3. Solid prime surface of deck with uniform coating of approximately 0.8-1.5 lbs. Per 100 square

feet of asphalt primer 24 hours in advance of roofing. Over all roof areas, as indicated on plans,embed roof insulation (4' x 4' maximum) in a full mopping of steep asphalt. Lay in parallelcourses. Stagger end joints in each layer with those of layer below. Butt each panel to adjoiningpanels (discard damaged panels. At concrete deck or if placing on recover board. Not neededon fully adhered or Mech. fastened )

4. Roof insulation shall be installed in compliance with the manufacturer's latest printed recommen-dations. Installation shall be approved by the manufacturer for the issue of "SpecificationWarranty" on the completed roof system installation.

5. Insulation Attachment and - Thermal insulation mechanically attacheda. Install the insulation on above underlay with end joints staggered. b. When installing two layers of insulation boards, ensure that the joints of both layers do not

coincide. c. Mechanically fix to pattern and frequency advised by manufacturer,all in accordance with

national wind uplift standards. d. Install fully in accordance with manufacturers instructions. e. Use Firestone insulation plates and fasteners or equivalent.

07200 - 2 of 3



f. Install in any one day only as much boards as can be protected by the completed roofingsystem that same day.

C. Installation of Masonry Insulation: Insulation shall be poured from the bag directly into the concreteblock core. Pours may be made at any convenient interval without bridging. Rigid 2" EPS board isto be secured to the exterior face of all exterior wall back-up masonry block.

D. Protection: All insulation to be protected and kept under cover both in transit and on job site. Materials shall not be delivered unduly long before required for proper conduct of work.

E. Inspection: Upon completion of insulation work, and prior to the application of finishing materials, thecontractor shall notify the Architect before proceeding.

F. Batt Insulation with a class I or II perm rate vapor retarder shall be installed or with an equal rated, polyethylene (poly) plastic vapor barrier or approved alternate, on the winter warm side with all jointsand/or seams sealed.


07200 - 3 of 3

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 07201 - THERMAL BATT INSULATION

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



A. Provide foil faced (kraft faced is not acceptable) glass fiber thermal insulation for exteriorwalls, floors over uninsulated spaces and ceilings as indicated in building plans.

1.03 MATERIALS PROVIDED IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. Section 07240 - Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems

B. Section 07920 - Sealants, Caulking and Seals

1.04 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).1. E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials2. E 96 Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials3. E136 Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 deg.

C.4. C177 Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of

the Guarded Hot Plate.5. C 423 Test Method for Sound Absorption and the Sound Absorption Coefficient by

the Reverberation Room Method.6. C 518 Test Method for the Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means

of the Heat Flow Meter.7. C 553 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulations8. C612 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation9. C665 Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame

Construction and Manufactured Housing.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Specification 01010 Summary of Work, Sections 1.19 and 1.20.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product literature, samples and installation instructionsfor specified insulation.


A. Protect insulation from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled or covered with iceor snow. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for handling, storage and protectionduring installation.

B. Label insulation packages to include material name, production date and/or product code.

C. Deliver and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

07201 - 1 of 4



1.07 LIMITATIONS

A. Do not use unfaced insulation in exposed applications where there is potential for skincontact and irritation.

B. Standard foil facings will burn and must not be left exposed. The facing must be installed insubstantial contact with the unexposed surface of the ceiling, wall or floor finish. Protectfacing from any open flame or heat source.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2. 01 MANUFACTURER

A. Owens-Corning, Certainteed, Johns Manville or approved equal.

2. 02 FLAME SPREAD 25 INSULATION

A. Type: FRK (foil) and PSK (white) faced glass fiber thermal insulation complying with ASTMC 655, Type III for FRK (foil) and Type II for PSK (white), Class A.

B. Size:1. Metal Frame Insulation: R value 19 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518,

thickness 6", width 16".2. Wood Frame Insulation: R value 21 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518,

thickness 5 ½", width 16".

C. Vapor Retarding Perm Rating:1. FRK facing perms maximum 0.10 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96.2. PSK facing perms maximum 0.10 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96.

D. Surface Burning Characteristics for FRK and PSK faced product:1. Maximum flame spread: 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.2. Maximum smoke developed: 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

E. Combustion Characteristics:1. Classified non-combustible by model building codes.2. Not required to be covered, may be left exposed.

F. Dimensional Stability:1. Linear shrinkage less than 0.1%.

2. 03 THERMAL BATT INSULATION

A. Type: Unfaced glass fiber thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 665, Type I and ASTME 136.

B. Type: Foil-faced glass fiber thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 665, Type III, ClassB and C.

C. Size:1. Metal Frame Insulation: R value 19 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518,

thickness 6", width 16". 2. Wood Frame Insulation: R value 21 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518,

thickness 5 ½", width 16".

07201 - 2 of 4



D. Vapor Retarder Perm Rating:1. Foil-facing perms maximum 0.50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96.2. Kraft-facing perms maximum 1.00 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96.

E. Surface Burning Characteristics:1. Unfaced insulation

a. Maximum flame spread: 10b. Maximum smoke developed: 10

2. Foil-faced Insulation:a. Maximum flame spread: 75b. Maximum smoke developed: 150

F. Combustion Characteristics:1. Unfaced insulation passes ASTM E 136 test.

G. Dimensional Stability:1. Linear shrinkage less than 0.1%.

2. 04 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Provide materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and properinstallation of the work in this section.


3. 01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be installed. Verifythat adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation. Verify mechanical andelectrical services within walls have been tested and inspected.

B. Provide written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of work in this section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3. 02 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer’s instruction for particular conditions of installation in each case.

B. Mechanical fasteners1. Apply insulation directly to the interior surface of the exterior wall with appropriate

spindle or prong-type anchors.a. Fasten anchors to wall by welding the pin to metal and then impale the

insulation or by using pre-attached heads and welding them through theinsulation.

b. Fasten anchors to wall with adhesive. Follow manufacturer’s recommenda-tions for surface preparation and adhesive pattern.

c. Impale insulation on anchor and secure with washer. Select pin lengths toensure tight fit. Protect pin tips where subject to human contact. Seemanufacturer’s diagram for impaling pin pattern.

C. Adhesive Fastening1. Apply insulation with adhesives. Follow adhesive manufacturer’s recommendations

for surface preparation and adhesive pattern.

07201 - 3 of 4



D. Furring Strips1. Install insulation between furring strips, hat channels or Z-shaped furring in areas

where finish surface will be applied.2. Contact the furring strip manufacturer for recommendations on the appropriate

fastener system to use.

E. Between Metal Studs1. Friction-fit insulation between studs after cover material has been installed on one

side of the cavity. When unfaced insulation is used and in applications without acover material or where the stud depth is larger than the insulation thickness, usewire or metal straps to hold insulation in place. When faced insulation is used, theattachment flanges may be taped to the face of metal stud prior to applying theinterior finish.a. Provide supplementary support to hold the product in place until finish

surface is applied when insulation is installed over 8 feet.

F. Between Wood Studs1. Friction-fit unfaced insulation between studs after cover material has been installed

on one side of the cavity. When unfaced insulation is used and in applicationswithout a cover material, use wire or metal straps to hold insulation in place. Whenfaced insulation is used, staple attachment flanges to face or side of stud every 8 to12 inches to prevent gaps along the edge of the vapor retarding facing.

3. 03 INSTALLATION - VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Maintain Vapor retarder integrity by tightly abutting adjacent insulation. Repair punctures ortears in vapor retarder facing by taping. Tape edges of all opening created for items such aselectrical boxes, conduits etc. Follow tape manufacturer’s application recommendations.

3. 04 MATERIAL STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Protect insulation from damage and from becoming wet before, during and after installation.

B. Attic Insulation1. If existing attic insulation between ceiling joists/trusses is equal to or above ceiling

joists/trusses, then new batt insulation being added to supplement existing atticinsulation shall be placed perpendicular to existing batts placed between ceilingjoists/trusses.

2. If existing attic insulation between ceiling joists/trusses is below the top edge ofexisting ceiling joists/trusses, then new batt insulation being added to supplementexisting attic insulation shall be placed in the same, parallel direction as existingbatts placed between ceiling joists/trusses.

3. At ends of roof trusses, where roof chord and ceiling chord intersect, the new battsshall be turned parallel to trussed and inserted to extend over the wall of room below.


07201 - 4 of 4

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 7 – MOISTURE & THERMAL PROTECTION ARCH. JOB#: 214041 SECTION 07240 - OUTSULATION PLUS

07240 - 1 of 11

PART I – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This document is to be used in preparing specifications for projects utilizing the Dryvit Outsulation System. For complete product description and usage refer to:

1. Dryvit Outsulation System Data Sheet, DS447. 2. Dryvit Outsulation System Application Instructions, DS204. 3. Dryvit Outsulation System Installation Details, DS107. B. Related Sections 1. Unit Masonry – Section 04200 2. Concrete – Sections 03300 and 03400 3. Light Gauge Cold Formed Steel Framing – Section 05400 4. Wood Framing – Section 06100 5. Sealant – Section 07900 6. Flashing – Section 07600

1.02. REFERENCES A. Section Includes

1. ASTM B 117 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6061) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

2. ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement 3. ASTM C 297 Standard Test Method for Flatwise Tensile Strength of Sandwich

Constructions 4. ASTM C 1177 Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as

Sheathing 5. ASTM C 1396 (formerly C 79) Standard Specification for Gypsum Board 6. ASTM D 968 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6191) Standard Test Methods for

Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive 7. ASTM D 2247 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6201) Standard Practice for Testing

Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity 8. ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of

Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber 9. ASTM D 4060 Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the

Taber Abraser 10. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 11. ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 12. ASTM E 119 Standard Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials 13. ASTM E 330 Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors and

Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 14. ASTM E 331 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and

Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 15. ASTM E 2098 Test Method for Determining the Tensile Breaking Strength of Glass Fiber

Reinforcing Mesh for use in Class PB Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS), after Exposure to Sodium Hydroxide Solution

16. ASTM E 2134 Test Method for Evaluating the Tensile-Adhesion Performance of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS)

17. ASTM E 2430 Standard Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Thermal Insulation Boards for use in Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS)

18. ASTM E 2485 (formerly EIMA Std. 101.01) Standard Test Method for Freeze-Thaw Resistance of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) and Water-Resistive Barrier Coatings

19. ASTM E 2486 (formerly EIMA Std. 101.86) Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Class PB and PI Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS)

20. ASTM G 155 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6151) Standard Practice for Operating-Xenon Arc Light Apparatus, for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials


07240 - 2 of 11

21. DS107, Dryvit Outsulation System Installation Details 22. DS131, Dryvit Expanded Polystyrene Insulation Board Specification 23. DS135, Specification for Outsulation System with Mechanical Fasteners 24. DS151, Custom Brick™ Polymer System Specifications for Use on Vertical Walls 25. DS152, Dryvit Cleaning and Recoating 26. DS153, Dryvit Expansion Joints and Sealants 27. DS159, Dryvit Water Vapor Transmission 28. DS204, Dryvit Outsulation System Application Instructions 29. DS456, Rapidry DM™ 35-50 or DS457, Rapidry DM™ 50-75 Data Sheets 30. DS494, Dryvit AquaFlash™ System 31. Mil Std E5272 Environmental Testing 32. Mil Std 810B Environmental Test Methods 33. UBC Std 26-4 (Formerly UBC 17-6) Multi-Story Fire Evaluation of Exterior Non Load-

Bearing Foam Plastic Insulated Wall Systems 34. NFPA 268 Standard Test Method for Determining Ignitibility of Exterior Wall Assemblies

Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 35. NFPA 285 Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of

Exterior Non Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components Using the Intermediate-Scale, Multistory Test Apparatus

36. ULC S101 Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction Materials 37. ANSI FM 4880 Evaluating Insulated Wall or Wall and Roof/Ceiling Assemblies; Plastic

Interior Finish Materials; Plastic Exterior Building Panels; Wall/Ceiling Coating Systems; Interior or Exterior Finish Systems

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Base Coat: Material used to encapsulate one or more layers of reinforcing mesh fully embedded that is applied to the outside surface of the EPS.

B. Building Expansion Joint: A joint through the entire building structure designed to accommodate

structural movement. C. Contractor: The contractor that installs the Outsulation System to the substrate. D. Dryvit: Dryvit Systems, Inc., the manufacturer of the Outsulation System, a Rhode Island corporation. E. Expansion Joint: A structural discontinuity in the Outsulation System. F. Finish: An acrylic-based coating, available in a variety of textures and colors that is applied over the

base coat. G. Insulation Board: Expanded polystyrene (EPS) insulation board, which is affixed to the substrate. H. Panel Erector: The contractor who installs the panelized Outsulation System. I. Panel Fabricator: The contractor who fabricates the panelized Outsulation System. J. Reinforcing Mesh: Glass fiber mesh(es) used to reinforce the base coat and to provide impact

resistance. K. Sheathing: A substrate in sheet form. L. Substrate: The material to which the Outsulation System is affixed. M. Substrate System: The total wall assembly including the attached substrate to which the Outsulation

System is affixed.


07240 - 3 of 11

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General: The Dryvit Outsulation System is an Exterior Insulation and Finish System, Class PB, consisting of an adhesive, expanded polystyrene insulation board, base coat, reinforcing mesh(es) and finish. Mechanically attached systems shall conform to Dryvit specification DS135.

B. Methods of Installation 1. Field Applied: The Outsulation System is applied to the substrate system in place. C. Design Requirements 1. Acceptable substrates for the Outsulation System shall be:

a. Exterior grade gypsum sheathing meeting ASTM C 1396 (formerly C 79) requirements for water-resistant core or Type X core at the time of application of the

Outsulation System. b. Exterior sheathing having a water-resistant core with fiberglass mat facers meeting

ASTM C 1177. c. Exterior fiber reinforced cement or calcium silicate boards. d. APA Exterior or Exposure 1 Rated Plywood, Grade C-D or better, nominal 12.7 mm

(1/2 in), minimum 4-ply. e. Unglazed brick, cement plaster, concrete, or masonry. f. APA Exposure 1 rated Oriented Strand Board (OSB), nominal 12.7 mm (1/2 in). g. Galvanized expanded metal lath 1.4 or 1.8 kg/m

2 (2.5 or 3.4 lbs/yd

2) installed over a

solid substrate. 2. Deflection of substrate systems shall not exceed 1/240 times the span. 3. The substrate shall be flat within 6.4 mm (1/4 in) in a 1.2 m (4 ft) radius.

4. The slope of inclined surfaces shall not be less than 6:12, and the length shall not exceed 305 mm (12 in).

5. All areas requiring an impact resistance classification higher than “standard”, as defined by ASTM E 2486 (formerly EIMA Std. 101.86), shall be as detailed in the drawings and described in the contract documents. Refer to Section 1.04.D.1.c of this specification.

6. Expansion Joints a. Design and location of expansion joints in the Outsulation System is the

responsibility of the project designer and shall be noted on the project drawings. As a minimum, expansion joints shall be placed at the following locations:

1) Where expansion joints occur in the substrate system. 2) Where building expansion joints occur. 3) At floor lines in wood frame construction.

4) At floor lines of non-wood framed buildings where significant movement is expected.

5) Where the Outsulation System abuts dissimilar materials. 6) Where the substrate type changes 7) Where prefabricated panels abut one another 8) In continuous elevations at intervals not exceeding 23 m (75 ft). 9) Where significant structural movement occurs such as changes in roofline,

building shape or structural system. 7. Terminations

a. Prior to applying the Dryvit Outsulation System, wall openings shall be treated with Dryvit AquaFlash System or Flashing Tape. Refer to Dryvit Outsulation System Installation Details, DS107.

b. The Outsulation System shall be held back from adjoining materials around openings and penetrations such as windows, doors and mechanical equipment a minimum of 19 mm (3/4 in) for sealant application. See Dryvit's Outsulation System Installation Details, DS107.

c. The system shall be terminated a minimum of 203 mm (8 in) above finished grade. d. Sealants 1) Shall be manufactured and supplied by others.

2) Shall be compatible with Outsulation System materials. Refer to current Dryvit Publication DS153 for listing of sealants tested by sealant manufacturer for compatibility.


07240 - 4 of 11

3) The sealant backer rod shall be of closed cell. 8. Vapor Retarders – The use and location of vapor retarders within a wall assembly is the

responsibility of the project designer and shall comply with local building code requirements. The type and location shall be noted on the project drawings and specifications. Vapor retarders may be inappropriate in certain climates and can result in condensation within the wall assembly. Refer to Dryvit Publication DS159 for additional information.

9. Dark Colors - The use of dark colors must be considered in relation to wall surface temperature as a function of local climatic conditions. Use of dark colors in high temperature climates can affect the performance of the system.

10. Flashing: Shall be provided at all roof-wall intersections, windows, doors, chimneys, decks, balconies and other areas as necessary to prevent water from entering behind the Outsulation System.

D. Performance Requirements 1. The Outsulation System shall have been tested as follows: a. Durability

TEST TEST METHOD CRITERIA RESULTS

Abrasion Resistance ASTM D 968 No deleterious effects after 500 liters (528 quarts)

No deleterious effects after 1000 liters (1056 quarts)

Accelerated Weathering ASTM G 155 Cycle 1 No deleterious effects after 2000 hours

No deleterious effects after 5000 hours

ASTM G 154 Cycle 1 (QUV) No deleterious effects after 5000 hours

Freeze-Thaw ASTM E 2485 (formerly EIMA 101.01)

No deleterious effects after 60 cycles

Passed - No deleterious effects after 90 cycles

ASTM C 67 modified No deleterious effects after 60 cycles


ASTM E 2485/ICC-ES Proc.; ICC ES (AC219)***

No deleterious effects after 10 cycles


Mildew Resistance ASTM D 3273 No growth during 28 day exposure period

No growth during 60 day exposure period

Water Resistance ASTM D 2247 No deleterious effects after 14 days exposure

No deleterious effects after 42 days exposure

Taber Abrasion ASTM D 4060 N/A Passed 1000 cycles Salt Spray Resistance ASTM B 117 No deleterious effects after

300 hours exposure No deleterious effects after 1000 hours exposure

Water Penetration ASTM E 331 ICC ES (AC 219)***

No water penetration beyond the inner-most plane of the wall after 2 hours at 299 Pa (6.24 psf)

Passed 2 hours at 299 Pa (6.24 psf)

Water Vapor Transmission

ASTM E 96 Procedure B Vapor permeable EPS 5 perm-inch Base Coat* 40 Perms Finish** 40 Perms

* Base Coat perm value based on Dryvit Genesis® ** Finish perm value based on Dryvit Quarzputz *** AC 219 – Acceptance Criteria for EIFS

b. Structural


Tensile Bond ASTM C 297/E 2134 Minimum 104 kPa (15 psi) – substrate or insulation failure

Minimum 132 kPa (19.1 psi)

Transverse Wind Load ASTM E 330 Withstand positive and negative wind loads as specified by the building code

Minimum 4.3 kPa (90 psf)* 16 inch o.c. framing, ½ in sheathing screw attached at 203 mm (8 inch) o.c.

* All Dryvit components remain intact – for higher wind loads contact Dryvit Systems, Inc.


07240 - 5 of 11

c. Impact Resistance: In accordance with ASTM E 2486 (formerly EIMA Standard 101.86).

Reinforcing Mesh/Weight g/m² (oz/yd²)

Minimum Tensile Strengths

EIMA Impact Classification

EIMA Impact Range

Joules (in-lbs)

Impact Test Results Joules (in-lbs)

Standard - 146 (4.3) 27 g/cm (150 lbs/in) Standard 3-6 (25-49) 4 (36)

Standard PlusTM

- 203 (6) 36 g/cm (200 lbs/in) Medium 6-10 (50-89) 6 (56)

Intermediate - 407 (12) 54 g/cm (300 lbs/in) High 10-17 (90-150) 12 (108)

Panzer® 15 * - 509 (15) 71 g/cm (400 lbs/in) Ultra High >17 (>150) 18 (162)

Panzer 20 * - 695 (20.5) 98 g/cm (550 lbs/in) Ultra High >17 (>150) 40 (352)

Detail Short Rolls - 146 (4.3) 27 g/cm (150 lbs/in) n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Corner Mesh™ - 244 (7.2) 49 g/cm (274 lbs/in) n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a *Shall be used in conjunction with Standard Mesh (recommended for areas exposed to high traffic)

d. Fire performance


Fire Resistance ASTM E 119 No effect on the fire resistance of a rated wall assembly

Passed 1 hour Passed 2 hour

Ignitability NFPA 268 No ignition at 12.5 kw/m2 at 20

minutes Passed

Full Scale Multi-Story Fire Test

UBC Std. 26-4 (formerly 17-6) 1. Resist vertical spread of flame within the core of the panel from one story to the next

2. Resist flame propagation over the exterior surface

3. Resist spread of vertical flame over the interior surface from one story to the next

4. Resist significant lateral spread of flame from the compartment of fire origin to adjacent spaces

Passed

Intermediate Multi-Story Fire Test

NFPA 285 (UBC 26-9) 1. Resist flame propagation over the exterior surface

2. Resist vertical spread of flame within combustible core/component of panel from one story to the next

3. Resist vertical spread of flame over the interior surface from one story to the next

4. Resist lateral spread of flame from the compartment of fire origin to adjacent spaces

Passed

Full Scale Multi-Story* (corner test)

ANSI FM 4880 Resist flame propagation over the exterior surface.

Passed; No height restrictions*

* Dryvit FM products must be specified

2. The Outsulation components shall be tested for: a. Fire


Surface Burning Characteristics

ASTM E 84 All components shall have a: Flame Spread < 25 Smoke Developed < 450

Passed

b. Durability


07240 - 6 of 11


Reinforcing Mesh Alkali Resistance of Reinforcing Mesh

ASTM E 2098 (formerly EIMA 105.01)

> 21dN/cm (120 pli) retained tensile strength after exposure

Passed

EPS (Physical Properties) Density Thermal Resistance Water Absorption Oxygen Index Compressive Strength Flexural Strength Flame Spread Smoke Developed

ASTM C 303, D 1622 ASTM C 177, C 518 ASTM C 272 ASTM D 2863 ASTM D 1621 Proc. A ASTM C 203 ASTM E 84

15.2-20.0 kg/m

3 (0.95-1.25 lb/ft

3)

4.0 @ 4.4 °C (40 °F) 3.6 @ 23.9 °C (75 °F) 2.5 % max. by volume 24% min. by volume 69 kPa (10 psi) min. 172 kPa (25 psi) min. 25 max. 450 max.

Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data – The contractor shall submit to the owner/architect the manufacturer’s product data sheets describing products, which will be used on this project.

B. Samples: The contractor shall submit to the owner/architect two (2) samples of the Outsulation

System for each finish, texture and color to be used on the project. The same tools and techniques proposed for the actual installation shall be used. Samples shall be of sufficient size to accurately represent each color and texture being utilized on the project.

C. Test Reports – When requested, the contractor shall submit to the owner/architect copies of selected

test reports verifying the performance of the Outsulation System.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications

1. System Manufacturer: Shall be Dryvit Systems, Inc. All materials shall be manufactured or sold by Dryvit and shall be purchased from Dryvit or its authorized distributors.

a. Materials shall be manufactured at a facility covered by a current ISO 9001:2000 certification. Certification of the facility shall be done by a registrar accredited by the American National Standards Institute, Registrar Accreditation Board (ANSI-RAB).

2. Contractor: Shall be knowledgeable in the proper installation of the Dryvit Outsulation System and shall be experienced and competent in the installation of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems. Additionally, the contractor shall possess a current Outsulation System Trained Contractor Certificate* issued by Dryvit Systems, Inc.

3. Insulation Board Manufacturer: Shall be listed by Dryvit Systems, Inc., shall be capable of producing the Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) in accordance with current Dryvit Specification for Insulation Board, DS131, and shall subscribe to the Dryvit Third Party Certification and Quality Assurance Program.

4. Panel Fabricator: Shall be a contractor experienced and competent in the fabrication of architectural wall panels and shall possess a current Outsulation System Contractor Certificate* issued by Dryvit Systems, Inc.

5. Panel Erector: Shall be experienced and competent in the installation of architectural wall panel systems and shall be:

a. The panel fabricator, or b. An erector approved by the panel fabricator or c. An erector under the direct supervision of the panel fabricator

B. Regulatory Requirements


07240 - 7 of 11

1. The EPS shall be separated from the interior of the building by a minimum 15-minute thermal barrier.

2. The use and maximum thickness of EPS shall be in accordance with the applicable building codes.

C. Certification 1. The Outsulation System shall be recognized for the intended use by the applicable building code(s). D. Mock-Up

1. The contractor shall, before the project commences, provide the owner/architect with a mock-up for approval.

2. The mock-up shall be of suitable size as required to accurately represent the products being installed, as well as each color and texture to be utilized on the project.

3. The mock-up shall be prepared with the same products, tools, equipment and techniques required for the actual application. The finish used shall be from the same batch that is

being used on the project. 4. The approved mock-up shall be available and maintained at the job site. 5. For panelized construction, the mock-up shall be available and maintained at the panel

fabrication location.


A. All Dryvit materials shall be delivered to the job site in the original, unopened packages with labels intact.

B. Upon arrival, materials shall be inspected for physical damage, freezing, or overheating.

Questionable materials shall not be used. 1. Materials shall be stored at the jobsite in a cool, dry location, out of direct sunlight, protected

from weather and other sources of damage. Minimum storage temperature shall be as follows:

a. Demandit®, Revyvit®: 7 °C (45 °F) b. Ameristone™, TerraNeo® and Lymestone™: 10 °C (50 °F)

c. DPR, PMR™ and E™ Finishes, Color Prime™, Primus®, Genesis and NCB™: 4 °C

(40 °F) d. Custom Brick™ finish: Refer to Custom Brick Polymer Specification, DS151. e. For other products, refer to specific product data sheets.

2. Maximum storage temperature shall not exceed 38° C (100 °F).

NOTE: Minimize exposure of materials to temperatures over 32 °C (90 °F). Finishes exposed to temperatures over 43 °C (110 °F) for even short periods may exhibit skinning, increased viscosity and should be inspected prior to use. C. Protect all products from inclement weather and direct sunlight.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements

1. Application of wet materials shall not take place during inclement weather unless appropriate protection is provided. Protect materials from inclement weather until they are completely dry.

2. At the time of application, the minimum air and wall surface temperatures shall be as follows:

a. Demandit, Revyvit: 7 °C (45 °F) b. Ameristone, TerraNeo and Lymestone: 10 °C (50 °F)

c. DPR, PMR and E Finishes, Color Prime, Primus, Genesis and NCB: 4 °C (40 °F)

d. Custom Brick Finish: refer to Custom Brick Polymer Specification, DS151. e. For other products, refer to specific product data sheets.


07240 - 8 of 11

3. These temperatures shall be maintained with adequate air ventilation and circulation for a minimum of 24 hours (48 hours for Ameristone, TerraNeo and Lymestone) thereafter, or until the products are completely dry. Refer to published product data sheets for more specific information.

B. Existing Conditions - The contractor shall have access to electric power, clean water, and a clean

work area at the location where the Dryvit materials are to be applied. 1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Installation of the Outsulation System shall be coordinated with other construction trades.

B. Sufficient manpower and equipment shall be employed to ensure a continuous operation, free of cold joints, scaffold lines, texture variations, etc.

1.10 LIMITED MATERIALS WARRANTY

A. Dryvit Systems, Inc. shall provide a limited warranty against defective material upon written request. Dryvit shall make no other warranties, expressed or implied. Dryvit does not warrant workmanship. Full details are available from Dryvit Systems, Inc.

B. The applicator shall warrant workmanship separately. Dryvit shall not be responsible for

workmanship associated with installation of the Outsulation System.

1.12 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance and repair shall follow the procedures noted in Dryvit Outsulation Application Instructions, DS204.

B. All Dryvit products are designed to minimize maintenance. However, as with all building products,

depending on location, some cleaning may be required. See Dryvit publication DS152 on Cleaning & Recoating.

C. Sealants and Flashings should be inspected on a regular basis and repairs made as necessary.


2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. All components of the Outsulation System shall be supplied or obtained from Dryvit or its authorized distributors. Substitutions or additions of materials other than specified will void the warranty.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: Shall be Type I or II, meeting ASTM C 150, white or gray in color, fresh and free of lumps.

B. Water: Shall be clean and free of foreign matter. C. Mechanical Fasteners (required when installing in accordance with DS135): Shall be Wind-lock’s

Wind Devil™ plates, or equivalent, used in conjunction with corrosion resistant fasteners appropriate for the substrate system.

2.03 COMPONENTS A. Flashing Materials: Used to protect substrate edges at terminations.


07240 - 9 of 11

1. Liquid Applied: An extremely flexible water-based polymer material, ready for use. a. Shall be AquaFlash and AquaFlash Mesh

2. Sheet Type: a. Shall be Flashing Tape and Surface Conditioner

1) Dryvit Flashing Tape™: A high density polyethylene film backed with a rubberized asphalt adhesive available in rolls 102 mm (4 in), 152 mm (6 in) and 229 mm (9 in) wide by 23 m (75 ft) long.

2) Dryvit Flashing Tape Surface Conditioner™: A water-based surface conditioner and adhesion promoter for the Dryvit Flashing Tape.

B. Adhesives: Used to adhere the EPS to the substrate, shall be compatible with the substrate and the

EPS. 1. Cementitious: A liquid polymer-based material, which is field mixed with Portland cement for

use over non wood-based substrates. a. Shall be Primus®, Genesis® or Genesis FM 2. Ready mixed: A dry blend cementitious, copolymer-based product, field mixed with water for

use over non wood-based substrates. a. Shall be Primus® DM, Genesis® DM, Genesis® DMS, Rapidry DM 35-50 or

Rapidry DM 50-75. 3. Noncementitious: A factory-mixed, fully formulated water-based adhesive for use over wood-

based substrates. a. Shall be ADEPS®.

C. Insulation Board: Expanded polystyrene meeting Dryvit Specification for Insulation Board, DS131. 1. Thickness of insulation board shall be minimum 19 mm (3/4 in) and shall be maintained at

all locations. Note: Dryvit recommends that a minimum of 25 mm (1 in) thick insulation board be installed to maintain the minimum thickness after rasping, reveals are installed, etc.

2. The insulation board shall be manufactured by a board supplier listed by Dryvit Systems, Inc.

D. Base Coat: Shall be compatible with the EPS insulation board and reinforcing mesh(es).

1. Cementitious: A liquid polymer-based material, which is field mixed with Portland cement. a. Shall be Primus, Genesis or Genesis FM.

2. Noncementitious: A factory-mixed, fully formulated, water-based product. a. Shall be NCB™. 3. Ready mixed: A dry blend cementitious, copolymer-based product, field mixed with water.

a. Shall be Primus DM, Genesis DM, Genesis DMS, Rapidry DM 35-50 or Rapidry DM 50-75.

E. Reinforcing Mesh: A balanced open weave, glass fiber fabric treated for compatibility with other

system materials. Note: Reinforcing meshes are classified by impact resistance and specified by weight and tensile strength as Section 1.04.D.1.c. 1. Shall be Standard, Standard Plus, Intermediate, Panzer 15, Panzer 20, Detail and Corner

Mesh.

F. Finish: Shall be the type, color and texture as selected by the architect/owner and shall be one or more of the following: 1. Standard DPR (Dirt Pickup Resistance): Water-based, acrylic coating with integral color and

texture and formulated with DPR chemistry: a. Quarzputz® DPR: Open-texture. b. Sandblast® DPR: Medium texture. c. Freestyle® DPR: Fine texture. d. Sandpebble® DPR: Pebble texture. e. Sandpebble® Fine DPR: Fine pebble texture.

2. E: Water-based, lightweight acrylic coating with integral color and texture and formulated

with DPR chemistry:

a. Quarzputz® E

b. Sandpebble® E

c. Sandpebble® Fine E


07240 - 10 of 11

3. FM: Water-based, acrylic coating with integral color and texture, formulated with PMR chemistry:

a. Quarzputz® FM b. Sandblast® FM c. Sandpebble® FM d. Sandpebble® Fine FM 4. Specialty: Factory mixed, water-based acrylic: a. Ameristone: Multi-colored quartz aggregate with a flamed granite appearance.

b. Stone Mist®: Ceramically colored quartz aggregate. c. Custom Brick: Acrylic polymer-based finish used in conjunction with a proprietary

template system to create the look of stone, brick, slate or tile. d. TerraNeo: 100% acrylic-based finish with large mica chips and multi-colored quartz

aggregates. e. Lymestone: A premixed, 100% acrylic-based finish designed to replicate the

appearance of limestone blocks. 5. Elastomeric DPR (Dirt Pickup Resistance): Water-based elastomeric acrylic coating with

integral color and texture and formulated with DPR chemistry: a. Weatherlastic® Quarzputz b. Weatherlastic® Sandpebble c. Weatherlastic® Sandpebble Fine d. Weatherlastic® Adobe 6. Medallion Series PMR™ (Proven Mildew Resistance): Water-based acrylic coating with

integral color and texture and formulated with PMR chemistry: a. Quarzputz® PMR b. Sandblast® PMR c. Freestyle® PMR d. Sandpebble® PMR e. Sandpebble® Fine PMR 7. Coatings, Primers and Sealers: a. Demandit

b. Weatherlastic® Smooth c. Tuscan Glaze™ d. Revyvit e. Color Prime f. Prymit® g. SealClear™


3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation of the Outsulation System, the contractor shall verify that the substrate: 1. Is of a type listed in Section 1.04.C.1. 2. Is flat within 6.4 mm (1/4 in) in a 1.2 m (4 ft) radius.

3. Is sound, dry, connections are tight, has no surface voids, projections or other conditions that may interfere with the Outsulation System installation or performance.

B. Prior to the installation of the Outsulation System, the architect or general contractor shall insure that

all needed flashings and other waterproofing details have been completed, if such completion is required prior to the Outsulation application. Additionally, the Contractor shall ensure that: 1. Metal roof flashing has been installed in accordance with Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers

Association (ARMA) Standards. 2. Openings are flashed in accordance with the Outsulation System Installation Details,

DS107, or as otherwise necessary to prevent water penetration. 3. Chimneys, Balconies, and Decks have been properly flashed. 4. Windows, Doors, etc. are installed and flashed per manufacturer's requirements and the

Outsulation System Installation Details, DS107.


07240 - 11 of 11

C. Prior to the installation of the Outsulation System, the contractor shall notify the general contractor, and/or architect, and/or owner of all discrepancies.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. The Outsulation materials shall be protected by permanent or temporary means from inclement weather and other sources of damage prior to, during, and following application until completely dry.

B. Protect adjoining work and property during Outsulation installation. C. The substrate shall be prepared as to be free of foreign materials, such as, oil, dust, dirt, form

release agents, efflorescence, paint, wax, water repellants, moisture, frost and any other condition that inhibit adhesion.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. The system shall be installed in accordance with the current Dryvit Outsulation System Application Instructions, DS204.

B. The overall minimum base coat thickness shall be sufficient to fully embed the mesh. The

recommended method is to apply the base coat in two (2) passes. C. Sealant shall not be applied directly to textured finishes or base coat surfaces. Dryvit Outsulation

System base coat surfaces in contact with sealant shall be coated with Demandit or Color Prime. D. When installing the Outsulation System, the notched trowel method of adhesive application shall be

used over gypsum sheathing substrates. E. High impact meshes shall be installed as specified at ground level, high traffic areas and other areas

exposed to or susceptible to impact damage.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The contractor shall be responsible for the proper application of the Outsulation materials. B. Dryvit assumes no responsibility for on-site inspections or application of its products.

C. If required, the contractor shall certify in writing the quality of work performed relative to the substrate system, details, installation procedures, workmanship and as to the specific products used.

D. If required, the EPS supplier shall certify in writing that the EPS meets Dryvit’s specifications. E. If required, the sealant contractor shall certify in writing that the sealant application is in accordance

with the sealant manufacturer’s and Dryvit’s recommendations.

3.05 CLEANING A. All excess Outsulation System materials shall be removed from the job site by the contractor in

accordance with contract provisions and as required by applicable law. B. All surrounding areas, where the Outsulation System has been installed, shall be left free of

debris and foreign substances resulting from the contractor’s work. 3.06 PROTECTION

A. The Outsulation System shall be protected from inclement weather and other sources of damage until dry and permanent protection in the form of flashings, sealants, etc. are installed.

-------------END OF SECTION--------


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 07272 - FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Materials and installation of waterproofing/air barrier over vertical above grade concrete walls,concrete masonry walls, and wall sheathing.

B. Related Sections :1. Section 03300:Cast-In-Place Concrete2. Section 04220: Concrete Unit Masonry3. Section 06220: Rough & Finish Carpentry4. Section 07240#: EIFS (OutsulationPlus)5. Section 07600: Flashing and Sheet Metal6. Section 08520: Aluminum Windows

1.02 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A. ASTM Standards1. C 297 Test Method for Tensile Strength of Flat Sandwich Constructions in Flatwise Plane2. C 1177 Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing 3. C 1396 Standard Specification for Gypsum Board4. D 522 Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings5. D 882 Test Methods for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting6. D 2247 Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity7. D 3273 Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in

an Environmental Chamber8. E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Material9. E 96 Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials10. E 119 Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials11. E 283 Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences across the Specimen12. E 330 Test method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and

Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference13. E 331 Test method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by

Uniform Static Air Difference14. E 1233 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by

Cyclic Static Air pressure Differential

B. Building Code Standards1. SBCCI PST & ESI Evaluation Guide on Floor, Wall, and Roof Systems (Testing for Moisture

Protection Barriers), Evaluation Guide 1192. UBC 26-9, Method of Test for the Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of Exterior,

Nonload-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components Using theIntermediate-Scale, Multistory Test Apparatus

3. ICBO Acceptance Criteria for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, AC 244. CCMC Technical Guide on Air Barriers

07272 1 of 7



C. Gypsum Association1. GA-600 Fire Resistance Design Manual2. GA-253 Recommended Specifications for the Application of Gypsum Sheathing3. GA-254 Fire-Resistant Gypsum Sheathing

D. American Plywood Association1. E30 Residential and Commercial Construction Guide

E. Proprietary Specifications1. 531544 Georgia-Pacific Corporation, “DensGlass Gold Exterior Sheating”®

2. AATCC (American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists), Test Method127, WaterResistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test

F. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE)1. 2001 ASHRAE Handbook--Fundamentals

1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural (Wind and Axial Loads): 1. Design for maximum allowable deflection normal to the plane of the wall: L/240

B. Moisture Control:1. Prevent the accumulation of water into or behind the exterior wall assembly.

a. Minimize condensation within the assembly.b. Drain water directly to the exterior where it is likely to penetrate components in the wall

assembly (windows and doors, for example). c. Provide flashing to direct water to the exterior in accordance with code requirements,

including, above window and door heads, beneath window and door sills, at roof/wallintersections, decks, intersections of lower walls with higher walls, and at the base of thewall.

C. Air Barrier Continuity: provide continuous air barrier system of compatible air barriercomponents.

D. Mechanical Ventilation: maintain pressurization and indoor humidity levels in accordance withrecommendations of ASHRAE (see 2001 ASHRAE Handbook—Fundamentals)

E. Compatibility:1. The product being applied must be compatible with the substrate being applied to and any

material being applied to it. It must maintain warranty and guarantees for all surfaces. Contractor should verify prior to application of materials.


A. Sto Guard Waterproofing/Air Barrier-Sto Gold Coat Performance Data® ®

07272 2 of 7



TEST METHOD CRITERIA RESULTS

1. Aging/WaterPenetrationResistance

AATCC 127(Water Column)

Resist 21.6 in (55 cm) waterfor 5 hours before and afteraging

No water penetration before and after aging

2. StructuralLoading/WaterPenetrationTesting

ASTM E 1233 /ASTM E 331

No water at exterior plane ofsheathing. (exterior gypsum,Dens-Glass Gold, plywood,OSB) after 10 cycles @ 80%design load and 75 minuteswater spray at 6.24 psf (299Pa) differential

No water penetration

3. CyclicPressure/WaterPenetrationTesting

ASTM E 283/ASTM E 331

No water penetration orevidence of elevated moisturelevels in plywood sheathingafter 10 cycles of conditioning at 299 Pa (6.24 psf) positiveand negative pressurefollowed by 75 minutes waterspray at 6.24 psf (299 Pa)pressure differential withwater spray rate of 5 gal/ft Ahr2

(3.4 L/m Amin)2

No water penetration, no elevated moisturelevels

4. WaterResistanceTesting

ASTM D 2247 Absence of deleteriouseffects after 14 day exposure

No deleterious effects after 14 dayexposure

5. Resistance toMold Growth

ASTM D 3273 No mold growth after 28 days No mold growth after 28 day exposure

6. Freeze/ThawResistance

ICBO Method(AC 24)

No visible effects (cracking,checking, delamination,erosion) when viewed at 5x

No visible deleterious effects at 5xmagnification

7. Water VaporTransmission

ASTM E 96Method B(Water Method)

Measure Sto Gold Fill : 17.3 perms ®

[994 ng/(PaAsAm )]2

Sto Gold Coat : 5.7 perms®

[327 ng/(PaAsAm )] 2

8. Air Leakage:Wall Assemblywith Sto Gold Fill& Sto Gold Coat

ASTM E 283(SBCCI PST &ESI Method)

<0.06 cfm/ft @ 1.56 psf 2

(0.00030 m /sAm @ 75 Pa)3 20.0044 cfm/ft2

(0.000022 m /sAm )3 2

9. Air Leakage:Sto Gold Fill

ASTM E 283(CCMCTechnical GuideMethod)

< 0.003 ft /minAft ) @ 1.56psf3 2

(< 0.02 L/sAm @ 75 Pa)2< 0.0002 ft /minAft3 2

(< 0.0014 L/sAm )2

10. StructuralIntegrity

ASTM E 330 2 inches (51 mm) water pressure (positive & negative)for 1 hour.

No loss of structural integrity

07272 3 of 7



11. Dry TensileStrength

ASTM D 882 20 lbs/in (3503 N/m)minimum before and afteraging

Sto Gold Fill :159 pli (27.8 kN/m) before®

aging 213 pli (37.3 kN/m after aging

12. Flexibility ASTM D 522 No cracking or delamination using 1/8” (3 mm) mandrel at14°F (-10°C) before and afteraging

No cracking or delamination before andafter aging

13. TensileAdhesion

ASTM C 297 >15 psi (103 kPa) Gypsum (ASTM C 79): >30 psi (206 kPa)Gypsum (ASTM C 1177): > 30 psi (206kPa)Exposure 1 OSB: > 50 psi (344 kPa)Exterior Plywood: > 90 psi (620 kPa)

14. SurfaceBurning

ASTM E 84 Flame Spread: <25 Smoke Developed: <450

Flame Spread: 5 Smoke Developed: 10 NFPA Class A, UBC Class 1 buildingmaterial

15. FireResistance

ASTM E 119 1 hour Meets criteria for 1 hour fire resistancerating when installed over I hour fireresistance rated sheathing

16. FirePropagation

UBC 26-9 No increase in fire hazard Pass

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s specifications, details and product data.

B. Samples for approval as directed by architect.

C. Manufacturer’s standard warranty.

D. Prepare and submit project-specific details.


A. Manufacturer Requirements1. Manufacturer of exterior wall air and moisture barrier materials for a minimum of

25 years in North America.2. ISO 9001:2000 Certified.

B. Contractor Requirements1. Knowledgeable in the proper use and handling of Sto materials.2. Employ skilled mechanics who are experienced and knowledgeable in air and

moisture barrier application, and familiar with the requirements of the specifiedwork.

3. Provide the proper equipment, manpower and supervision on the job-site toinstall the system in compliance with Sto’s published specifications and theproject plans and specifications.

07272 4 of 7




A. Deliver materials in their original sealed containers bearing manufacturer’s name andidentification of product.

B. Protect coatings (pail products) from freezing temperatures and temperatures in excessof 90° F (32° C). Store away from direct sunlight.

1.08 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient and surface temperatures above 40° F (4° C) during application anddrying period, minimum 24 hours after application of air and moisture barrier.

B. Provide supplementary heat for installation in temperatures less than 40° F (4° C) or ifsurface temperature is likely to fall below 40° F (4° C). (Note: surface temperature islower than air temperature at night).

C. Provide protection of surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from application ofmaterials.

1.09 COORDINATION/SCHEDULING

A. (The work in this section requires close coordination with related sections and trades.Sequence work to provide protection of construction materials from weatherdeterioration)

B. Coordinate installation of foundation waterproofing, roofing membrane, windows, doorsand other wall penetrations to provide a continuous air barrier.

C. Provide protection of rough openings before installing windows, doors, and otherpenetrations through the wall.

D. Provide sill flashing to direct water to the exterior before windows and doors areinstalled.

E. Install window and door head flashing immediately after windows and doors areinstalled.

F. Install diverter flashings wherever water can enter the assembly to direct water to the exterior.

1.010 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard moisture protection warranty.

07272 5 of 7



PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Sto Corp.

2.02 WATERPROOFING/AIR BARRIER

A. StoGuard1. Joint Treatment: Sto Gold Fill - ready mixed acrylic based flexible joint treatment for rough®

opening protection and joint treatment of wall sheathing.2. Waterproof Coating: Sto Gold Coat - ready mixed acrylic based waterproof coating for wall®

sheathing.

2.03 REINFORCEMENT

A. StoGuard Mesh - nominal 4.2 oz/sq. yd. (142 g/m ), self-adhesive, flexible, symmetrical,2

interlaced glass fiber fabric, with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with Sto materials(used with Sto Gold Fill to reinforce rough openings, inside and outside corners and sheathing®

joints).

B. Sto Detail Mesh - nominal 4.2 oz/sq. yd. (142 g/m ), flexible, symmetrical, interlaced glass fiber2

fabric, with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with Sto materials (used with Sto Gold Fillto reinforce rough openings, inside and outside corners, sheathing joints, and minor cracks inconcrete and masonry).

C. StoGuard Fabric – non-woven integrally reinforced fabric reinforcement (used with Sto GoldCoat to reinforce rough openings, inside and outside corners and sheathing joints). ®

2.04 MIXING

A. Mix materials with a clean, rust-free electric drill and paddle.

B. Do not dilute materials with water or add other ingredients.


3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect concrete and concrete masonry surfaces for:1. Contamination - algae, chalkiness, dirt, dust, efflorescence, form oil, fungus, grease, mildew

or other foreign substances.2. Surface absorption and chalkiness.

a. Cracks measure crack width and record location of cracks.b. Damage and deterioration.

07272 6 of 7



c. Moisture content and moisture damage - use a moisture meter to determine if thesurface is dry enough to receive the air and moisture barrier and record any areas ofmoisture damage or excess moisture.

d. Compliance with specification tolerances - record areas that are out of tolerance (greaterthan 1/4 inch in 8-0 feet [6 mm in 2438 mm] deviation in plane).

B. Inspect sheathing application for compliance with applicable requirement:1. Exterior gypsum sheathing - GA-2532. Exterior Grade and Exposure I wood based sheathing - APA E303. Glass mat faced gypsum sheathing - Georgia Pacific Publication 5315444. Cementitious sheathing - Consult manufacturer’s published recommendations

C. Report deviations from the requirements of project specifications or other conditions that mightadversely affect the waterproofing/air barrier installation. Do not start work until deviations arecorrected.

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Remove surface contaminants and replace damaged sheathing.

B. Spot surface defects in sheathing with joint treatment.

C. Repair cracks, spalls, or other damage in concrete or concrete masonry surfaces.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing/air barrier in compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions.


07272 7 of 7

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION ARCH. JOB#: 214041 SECTION 07273 BACKSTOP MOISTURE & AIR BARRIER

07273 - 1 of 7

PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This document contains all the manufacturer’s requirements for the proper design, use, and installation of the Dryvit Backstop NT - Smooth or Texture air/water-resistive barrier. This document is intended to be used in conjunction with:

B. DS300 - Backstop NT Application Instructions For Use Beneath Claddings Other Than Dryvit

EIFS C. DS806 - Backstop NT Product Data Sheet For Use Beneath Claddings Other Than Dryvit EIFS

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 297 Standard Test Method for Flatwise Tensile Strength of Sandwich Constructions B. ASTM C 1177 Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing C. ASTM C 1396 (formerly C 79) Standard Specification for Gypsum Board D. ASTM D 522 Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings E. ASTM D 2370 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Organic Coatings F. ASTM D 2247 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6201) Standard Practice for Testing Water

Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity G. ASTM E 72 Standard Methods for Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building

Construction H. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials I. ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials J. ASTM E 283 Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen K. ASTM E 331 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and

Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference L. ASTM E 1233 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain

Walls and Doors by Cyclic Air Pressure Differential M. ASTM E 2178 Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials N. ASTM E 2357 Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies O. ASTM E 2134 Test Method for Evaluating the Tensile-Adhesion Performance of Exterior

Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) P. ASTM E 2485 (formerly EIMA Std. 101.01) Standard Test Method for Freeze-Thaw Resistance

of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) and Water-Resistive Barrier Coatings Q. ASTM E 2570 Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Water-Resistive Barrier (WRB) Coatings

Used under Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) or EIFS with Drainage R. AATCC Test Method 127-2008 Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test


07273 - 2 of 7

S. Federal Specification TT-C-555B Resistance to Wind-Driven Rain

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Contractor: The contractor that applies the Backstop NT Smooth or Texture to the substrate. B. Sheathing: A substrate in sheet form. C. Substrate: The material to which the Backstop NT Smooth or Texture is applied. D. Substrate System: The total wall assembly including the attached substrate to which the

Backstop NT – Smooth or Texture is applied. E. Air/Water-Resistive Barrier Materials: A combination of Backstop NT Smooth or Texture and

Dryvit Grid Tape with AquaFlash® Liquid and AquaFlash

® Mesh or Dryvit Flashing Tape™ and

Flashing Tape Conditioner™.

1.04 DESCRIPTION A. General: Dryvit Backstop NT is available in Smooth and Texture and is a flexible polymer

based, noncementitious, protective coating used as an air/water-resistive barrier when applied over acceptable exterior substrates.

B. Design Requirements 1. Acceptable surfaces for Backstop NT include: (Refer to DS300, Backstop NT

Application Instructions For Use Beneath Claddings Other Than Dryvit EIFS for more specific requirements)

a. Exterior grade gypsum sheathing meeting ASTM C 1396 (formerly C 79) requirements for water resistant core or Type X core at the time of application.

b. Exterior sheathing having a water-resistant core with fiberglass mat facers meeting ASTM C 1177.

c. Exterior fiber reinforced cement or calcium silicate boards. d. APA Exterior or Exposure 1 Rated Plywood, Grade C-D or better, nominal 12.7

mm (1/2 in) minimum, 4-ply, installed with the C face out. e. APA Exterior Grade Fire Retardant Treated Plywood, nominal 12.7 mm (1/2 in)

minimum. f. APA Exposure 1 Rated OSB, nominal 11.1 mm (7/16 in) minimum. (See paragraph 3.03).

g. Unpainted, unsealed concrete and CMU. 2. Backstop NT is not intended to be used as waterproofing for exterior horizontal surfaces

or below grade applications. 3. The slope of inclined surfaces shall not be less than 6:12, and the length shall not

exceed 305 mm (12 in). 4. Backstop NT shall not be exposed to weather for longer than 30 days prior to being

covered. 5. Deflections of the substrate systems shall not exceed 1/240 times the span.

Test Test Method Criteria Results

Surface Burning Characteristics

ASTM E 84 ICC and ANSI/EIMA 99-A-2001 Flame Spread <25 Smoke Developed <450

Passed

Flexibility ASTM D 522 Method B No ICC or ANSI/EIMA Criteria No cracking at 2 mm diameter

Water Vapor ASTM E 96 Procedure B ICC: Vapor Permeable 7 Perms2


07273 - 3 of 7

C. Performance Requirements: Backstop NT shall meet the following performance criteria:

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data – The contractor shall submit to the owner/architect manufacturer’s product data

sheets describing products that will be used on this project. B. Samples – As required for the specific cladding specified. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Product Manufacturer: Shall be Dryvit Systems, Inc. All materials shall be

manufactured or sold by Dryvit and shall be purchased from Dryvit or its authorized distributor.

Transmission ICC ES (AC212)* No ANSI/EIMA Criteria

Freeze-Thaw Resistance ASTM E 2485/ICC-ES Procedure (AC212)*

ICC: 10 cycles No deleterious effects

1

Passed - 10 cycles: No deleterious effects

1

Water Resistance ASTM D 2247 ICC ES (AC212)*

ICC: 14 days exposure No deleterious effects

1

No deleterious effects1

after 14 days exposure Tensile Strength and Elongation

ASTM D 2370 No ICC or ANSI/EIMA Criteria Tensile strength: 160 psi Elongation: 16.8%

Wind Driven Rain Fed TT-C-555 No ICC or ANSI/EIMA Criteria No water penetration

Air Leakage ASTM E 283 No ICC or ANSI/EIMA Criteria 0.01 I/sec/m2

(0.002 cfm/ft2)

Air Permeance ASTM E 2178 No ICC or ANSI/EIMA Criteria 0.0006 l/s/m2 @ 75Pa

(1.2x10-4

cfm/ft2 @

1.6 psf)

Air Barrier Assembly ASTM E 2357 No ICC or ANSI/EIMA Criteria 0.05 l/sec m2 @300 Pa

(<0.01 cfm/ft2 @ 6.24 psf)

Structural Performance ASTM E 1233 Procedure A ICC ES (AC212)*

ICC: Minimum 10 positive cycles at 1/240 deflection; No cracking in field, at joints or interface with flashing.

Passed

Racking ASTM E 72 ICC ES (AC212)*

ICC: No cracking in field, at joints or interface with flashing at net deflection of 3.2 mm (1/8 in)

Passed

Restrained Environmental

ICC-ES Procedure ICC ES (AC212)*

ICC: 5 cycles; No cracking in field; at joints or interface with flashing

Passed

Water Penetration ASTM E 331 ICC ES (AC212)*

ICC: No water penetration beyond the inner-most plane of the wall after 15 minutes at 137 kPa (2.86 psf)

Passed 75 minutes at 299 Pa (6.24 psf)

Tensile Bond ASTM C 297/E 2134 (formerly EIMA 101.03) ICC ES (AC212)*

ICC and ANSI/EIMA 99-A-2001 Minimum 104 kPa (15 psi)

Substrates: Minimum 131 kPa (19 psi) Flashing: Minimum 2970 kPa (431 psi)

Weathering UV Exposure

Accelerated Aging

Hydrostatic Pressure Test

ICC ES Proc. ICC ES (AC212)*

ICC ES Proc. ICC ES (AC212)*

AATCC 127 ICC ES (AC212)*

ICC: 210 hours of exposure

ICC: 25 cycles of wetting and drying

ICC: 549 mm (21.6 in) water column for 5 hours

Passed

Passed

Passed

* (AC212 – Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Coatings Used as Water-Resistive Barriers over Exterior Sheathing, also referred to as ASTM E 2570

1. No cracking, checking, rusting, crazing, erosion, blistering, peeling, or delamination when viewed under 5x magnification 2. Defined as a Class III vapor retarder per the 2009 IBC and IRC


07273 - 4 of 7

a. Materials shall be manufactured at a facility covered by a current ISO 9001:2000 and ISO 14001:2004 certification. Certification of the facility shall be done by a registrar accredited by the American National Standards Institute, Registrar Accreditation Board (ANSI-RAB).

2. Contractor: Shall be experienced and competent in the waterproofing trade. B. Certification 1. Backstop NT shall be recognized for the intended use by the applicable building

code(s). 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All Dryvit materials shall be delivered to the job site in the original, unopened packages with

labels intact. B. Upon arrival, materials shall be inspected for physical damage, freezing, or overheating.

Questionable materials shall not be used. C. Materials shall be stored at the job site in a cool, dry location, out of direct sunlight, protected

from inclement weather and other sources of damage. Minimum storage temperature shall be 4 °C (40 °F).

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements 1. Application of wet materials shall not take place during inclement weather unless

appropriate protection is provided. Protect materials from inclement weather until they are completely dry.

2. At the time of application of Backstop NT, the minimum air and wall surface temperatures shall be 4 °C (40 °F) and rising. These temperatures shall be maintained, with adequate air ventilation and circulation, for a minimum of 12 hours thereafter, or until the products are dry.

B. Existing Conditions – The contractor shall have access to electric power, clean water, and a

clean work area at the location where the Dryvit Backstop NT materials are to be applied. 1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Installation of the Dryvit Backstop NT shall be coordinated with other construction trades. 1.10 LIMITED MATERIALS WARRANTY A. Backstop NT is covered by and subject to the terms and conditions of Dryvit’s expressed limited

materials warranty. Dryvit makes no other warranties expressed or implied, including implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.

1.11 DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY A. It is the responsibility of both the specifier and the purchaser to determine if a product is suitable

for its intended use. The designer selected by the purchaser shall be responsible for all decisions pertaining to design, detail, structural capability, attachment details, shop drawings, and the like. Dryvit has prepared guidelines in the form of specifications and product sheets to facilitate the design process only. Dryvit is not liable for any errors or omissions in design, detail, structural capability, attachment details, shop drawings, or the like, whether based upon the information prepared by Dryvit or otherwise,or for any changes which purchasers, specifiers, designers, or their appointed representatives may make to Dryvit’s published comments.


07273 - 5 of 7

PART II PRODUCT 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. All materials shall be obtained from Dryvit or its authorized distributors. Substitutions or

additions of materials other than those specified will void the warranty. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Air/Water-Resistive Barrier Components: 1. Dryvit Backstop NT: A flexible, polymer-based, noncementitious, water-resistive coating

available in Smooth and Texture. 2. Dryvit Grid Tape™: An open weave fiberglass mesh tape with pressure sensitive

adhesive available in rolls 102 mm (4 in) wide by 91 m (100 yds) long. B. Flashing Materials: Used to protect substrate edges at terminations. 1. Liquid Applied: An extremely flexible water-based polymer material, ready for use. a. Shall be AquaFlash

® Liquid and AquaFlash Mesh

2. Sheet Type: a. Shall be Flashing Tape and Surface Conditioner 1) Dryvit Flashing Tape™: A high density polyethylene film backed with a

rubberized asphalt adhesive available in rolls 102 mm (4 in), 152 mm (6 in) and 229 mm (9 in) wide by 23 m (75 ft) long.

2) Dryvit Flashing Tape Surface Conditioner™: A water-based surface conditioner and adhesion promoter for the Dryvit Flashing Tape.

PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to application of Backstop NT the contractor shall verify that the substrate: 1. Is of a type listed in Section 1.04.B.1. 2. Is flat within 6.4 mm (1/4 in) in a 1.2 m (4 ft) radius. 3. Gaps do not exceed 6.4 mm (1/4 in). Larger gaps shall be corrected by replacing

sheathing material. 4. Is sound, dry, connections are tight; has no surface voids, projections, or other

conditions that may interfere with the application of Backstop NT. B. Ambient and surface temperatures are minimum 4 °C (40 °F) and rising. C. The contractor shall notify the general contractor and/or architect and/or owner of all

discrepancies. Work shall not proceed until discrepancies have been corrected. D. All roof/wall intersections, decks, balconies and other attachments, as well as eves, chimneys,

mechanical equipment, signage etc. are properly flashed to divert water to the outside of the cladding.

E. All openings and penetrations are properly flashed and wrapped with the air/water-resistive

barrier to prevent water intrusion damage. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. The Backstop NT materials shall be protected by permanent or temporary means from

inclement weather and other sources of damage prior to, during, and following application until completely dry.

B. Protect adjoining work and property during application of Backstop NT.


07273 - 6 of 7

C. The substrate shall be prepared as to be free of foreign materials such as oil, dust, dirt, paint, wax, water repellents, moisture, frost and any other materials that inhibit adhesion.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Backstop NT – Smooth 1. General: Backstop NT – Smooth is used in conjunction with Dryvit Backstop NT -

Texture joint treatment and shall be applied in accordance with current, published Dryvit Backstop NT Application Instructions For Use Beneath Claddings Other Than Dryvit EIFS, DS300.

2. Backstop NT – Smooth is ready to use after an initial spin-up using a "Twister" paddle or equivalent mixing blade, powered by a 12.7 mm (1/2 in) drill, at 450 – 500 rpm. Do not add cement or any other additive.

3. Prior to Backstop NT – Smooth application, sheathing joints, including inside and outside corners, shall be treated with Backstop NT – Texture and Dryvit Grid Tape. All fastener heads shall also be spotted with Backstop NT – Texture. Refer to Backstop NT Application Instructions For Use Beneath Claddings Other Than Dryvit EIFS, DS300, for complete details. Allow to dry a minimum of 2 hours or until dry to the touch. Cool humid conditions will require longer drying time.

4. Apply Backstop NT Smooth over the entire wall surface, including previously treated fasteners and sheathing joints. Refer to the chart on the Backstop NT Product Data Sheet For Use Beneath Claddings Other Than Dryvit EIFS, DS806, or Application Instructions For Use Beneath Claddings Other Than Dryvit EIFS, DS300, for proper tools and respective coverage.

Note: Applications over OSB sheathing requires a minimum of 2 coats of Backstop NT – Smooth. Backstop NT – Texture is not recommended for the field of wall application over OSB.

5. Allow to dry a minimum of 24 hours prior cladding installation. Cool damp weather will require longer drying times. 6. Install the specified Dryvit Exterior Insulation and Finish System per published installation instructions for the specific system being used.

B. Backstop NT – Texture 1. General: Backstop NT – Texture shall be applied in accordance with current published Dryvit Backstop NT Application Instructions For Use Beneath Claddings Other Than Dryvit EIFS, DS300.

2. Backstop NT – Texture is ready to use after an initial spin-up using a "Twister" paddle or equivalent mixing blade, powered by a 12.7 mm (1/2 in) drill, at 450 – 500 rpm. Do not add cement or any other additive.

3. Apply a strip of Dryvit Grid Tape over all sheathing joints, including inside and outside corners and trowel apply a layer of Backstop NT - Texture over the Dryvit Grid Tape. 4. Depending on the substrate, Backstop NT – Texture may be applied using a trowel, roller, or spray equipment and backrolled. Refer to Backstop NT Application Instructions For Use Beneath Claddings Other Than Dryvit EIFS, DS300 for complete details. 5. Apply Backstop NT – Texture over the entire wall surface, including previously treated joints. Refer to the chart on the Backstop NT Product Data Sheet For Use Beneath Claddings Other Than Dryvit EIFS, DS806, or Application Instructions For Use Beneath Claddings Other Than Dryvit EIFS, DS300, for proper tools and respective coverage. 6. Allow to dry a minimum of 24 hours prior to cladding installation. Cool damp weather will require longer drying times.


07273 - 7 of 7


A. The contractor shall be responsible for the proper application of the Dryvit materials. B. Dryvit assumes no responsibility for on-site inspections or application of its products. C. The contractor and general contractor shall review and follow the Backstop NT Application Instructions For Use Beneath Claddings Other Than Dryvit EIFS, DS300.

3.05 CLEANING

A. All excess Dryvit materials shall be removed from the job site by the Contractor in accordance with contract provisions. B. All surrounding areas, where Dryvit materials have been installed, shall be left free of debris and foreign substances resulting from the Contractor’s work.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. The Dryvit materials and the project shall be protected from damage and inclement weather until dry.

1. The Dryvit Backstop NT – Smooth or Texture shall not be exposed for longer than 30 days prior to being covered with the specified building cladding.

------END OF SECTION---


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 07501 - MONOLITHIC, ADHERED ROOFINGAND FLASHING SYSTEM

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for and incidental to the execution andcompletion of the Monolithic Adhered Roofing and Flashing System indicated on drawings andspecified herein.

B. Furnish and install membrane roofing system in strict accordance with drawings, specifications andmanufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

C. This specification is written around the membrane roofing system as manufactured by the CarlisleSyntec Systems.


A. Apply roofing system using a roofing contractor approved by Carlisle Syntec Systems.

B. Classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as a Class A Sheathing material for use in constructionof Class A roof coverings (R8l03, Dated 3/27/81).

C. Inspection: Upon completion of the installation, an inspection shall be made by a representative ofCarlisle Syntec Systems to ascertain that the roofing system has been installed according to CarlisleSyntec Systems' published specifications and details. 1. There shall be no deviation made from this specification without prior written approval by the

manufacturer.

D. Factory Mutual I-90 classification must be provided.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings for approval. Shop drawings are required for final inspection of the warrantedroof. Shop drawings shall be made by Carlisle Syntec Systems or Carlisle Syntec Systems’Representatives. Shop drawings shall be approved and assigned a number by Carlisle SyntecSystems' Construction Materials Department. 1. Shop drawings shall include: Outline of roof and roof size, location and type of penetrations,

perimeter and penetration details, special details and Bill of Material.

B. Manufacturers Data:1. Flashing Details 2. Installation Instructions 3. Maintenance Instructions

C. Certification: Evidence of acceptance of roofing applicator.

07501 - 1 of 8



1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original unopened containers.

B. Containers labeled with manufacturer's name, brand name, installation instructions, and identificationof various items.

C. Store materials, except membrane, between 60 degrees F and 80 degrees F. If exposed to lowertemperature, restore to proper temperature before using.

D. Store materials, except membrane, in dry area and protect. Damaged materials shall be replacedat Contractor's expense.

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS (CAUTIONS & WARNINGS)

A. Do not use oil base or plastic roof cement.

B. Do not allow waste products (petroleum, grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or mineral oil, animal fat) ordirect steam venting to come in contact with Sure-Seal Roofing System.

C. Do not expose membrane and accessories to a constant temperature in excess of l80 degrees F.

D. Cements and bonding adhesives contain petroleum distillates and are extremely flammable. Do notbreathe vapors or use near fire.

E. Heptane, unleaded or white gasoline used in the splicing procedure are extremely flammable; do notuse near fire or flame or in a confined or unventilated area. Dispense only from a UL listed orapproved safety can.

F. Splicing and bonding surfaces shall be dry and clean.

G. Cold temperature will not restrict installation of Sure-Seal Roofing System. Follow specifiedprecautions for storage of materials and expose only enough cement and adhesive to be used withina four (4) hour period.

H. Roof surface shall be free of ponded water, ice, wet substrate or snow to eliminate futurecondensation problems.

I. Do not install EPDM membrane directly onto low melting point asphalt (ASTM-D313, Type 1 and 11.)

1.07 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE

A. A Carlisle Syntec Systems representative shall inspect the installation of the Universal RoofingSystem and upon approval, a twenty (20) year warranty shall be issued to the Owner.

B. Prior to acceptance of work, furnish written guarantee for twenty (20) years which covers repairsrequired to maintain roof including flashing in watertight condition.

C. Limit to ordinary wear and tear by the elements or defects due to faulty materials and workmanship.

D. Make repairs at no expense to the Owner.

07501 - 2 of 8



E. Guarantee shall be made out to the Owner and three properly executed copies delivered to theArchitect upon completion of the roofing work.

F. Wind gust up to 90 mph or per ASCE 7-05 wind speed map for project zone.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

Components to be products of Carlisle Syntec Systems or certified by Carlisle Syntec Systems ascompatible.

2.02 MEMBRANE

A. Shall be .060" thick ("FR" membrane) EPDM (Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer) compoundedelastomer (width and length determined by job condition) conforming to the following minimumphysical properties:

PROPERTY TEST METHOD SPECIFICATION Color Black Tolerance on Nominal

Thickness, % ASTM D412 +/-10 Tensile Strength Min,

PSI (MPa) ASTM D412 1305 (9) Elongation, Ultimate Min,% ASTM D4l2 350 Tear Resistance Min,

LBF/in (kN/m) ASTM D624 175 (30.6) (Die C)

Factory Seam Strength Min.Modified Membrane ASTM D816Rupture

PROPERTY TEST METHOD SPECIFICATION Ozone Resistance

Cond. after exposure to 100 pphm ASTM Dll49 No cracks

Ozone in air for 168 h at 104 deg. F. Specimen is at 50% strain

Resistance To Heat Aging ASTM D573 Properties after 4 wks. at 240 deg. F. Tensile strength min psi (MPa) ASTM D412 1200 (8.3)

Elongation, Ultimate Min,% ASTM D4l2 225 Tear Resistance Min, LBF/in (kN/m) ASTM D624 150 (26.3) Linear dimensional change max,% ASTM D1204 +/-2

Brittleness Temp. Max. deg. F (deg. C) ASTM D746 -75 (-59)

07501 - 3 of 8



Permeability, Water Vapormax, perm-mils ASTM E96 2.0

Resistance to Water Absorption ASTM D471 4% Change in mass max, after 7d immersion at 158 deg.F

Resistance To Outdoor (Ultraviolet) Weathering

Properties after 500,000 Langleys EMMAQUA:50% strain, calendar sheeting Tensile Strength min, psi(MPa) ASTM D412 1200 (8.3)

Elongation min., % ASTM D412 225 Sheet Composition

Weight % of polymer that is EPDM min, % 100 Weight % of sheet that is EPDM polymer, min,% 30

2.03 RELATED MATERIALS FURNISHED BY MEMBRANE MANUFACTURER

A. Flashing: Sure-Seal Elastoform .060" thick.

B. Bonding Adhesive: Compatible with materials to which the membrane is to be bonded.

C. Seam Tape: Minimum 3" wide.

D. Lap Sealant: Compatible with materials with which it is used, shall be trowel or gun consistency.

E. Water Cut-Off Mastic: Compatible with materials with which it is used.

F. Nite Seal: Compatible with materials with which it is used.

G. Pourable Sealer: Compatible with materials with which it is used.

H. Reinforced Universal Securement Strip (RUSS) and Fasteners: Extruded nailing strips and fasteners.

I. Walkaway Pads: 1. Provide Carlisle Sure Seal walkaway pads. See specification Section 07723.1 Roof Accessories

- Molded Walkway Pads.

2.04 OTHER RELATED MATERIALS

A. Wood Nailers: Pressure treated with salt preservatives.

B. Vapor Barrier: Self-sealing type applied over thermal barrier as specified.

07501 - 4 of 8




3.01 SUBSTRATE INSPECTION

A proper substrate shall be provided to receive new membrane.

3.02 SUBSTRATE PREPARATIONS

A. Roof Deck - Steel Deck: 1. Substrate shall be clean, smooth, free of fins, sharp edges, loose and foreign materials, oil,

grease and fresh roof cement. 2. Surface joints (including walls and substrate) shall be l/4" or less in width. Repair all joints

wider than l/4" with Sure-Seal Pourable Sealer before proceeding with installation. 3. Install insulation as specified.4. Install self-sealing vapor barrier over Dens Deck thermal barrier as specified.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Membrane Attachment:1. Position Sure-Seal .060" membrane over approved substrate without stretching. 2. Allow membrane to relax approximately one-half (½) hour prior to bonding. 3. Fold sheet back five feet so that half of the underside of the sheet is exposed. Sheet fold shall

be smooth without wrinkles or buckles. 4. Apply bonding adhesive evenly, without globs or puddles, with a 9" plastic core paint roller. DO

NOT APPLY BONDING ADHESIVE TO THE SPLICE AREA. Adhesive shall be firmly appliedto both the sheet and the substrate. One (1) gallon of bonding adhesive, applied correctly, willcover 60 square feet of finished surface at moderate temperature. Allow adhesive to dry until itis tacky, but will not string or stick to a dry finger touch.

5. Roll the coated membrane into the coated substrate while avoiding wrinkles. 6. Brush down bonded half of the sheet with a push broom to achieve maximum contact. 7. Fold back the unbonded half of the sheet and repeat the bonding procedure. 8. Install adjoining sheets in the same manner, lapping edges a minimum of 3". 9. Provide Sure Seal in-seam sealant at all seams.

NOTE: At all inside angle changes where slope exceeds 2" in one horizontal foot, Sure-Seal RubberFastening Strip is required to be installed.

B. Membrane Splicing: 1. Fold top sheet back about 12". Remove dirt and excess dust by brooming or wiping with a clean

rag or, if necessary, by scrubbing with warm soapy water and rinsing with clean water. Cleanboth of the mating surfaces at the splicing area using clean natural fiber rags or natural spongeswith HP 250 Primer.

2. After thoroughly stirring, apply splicing cement to both surfaces using a 3" or 4" wide, ½" thickpaint brush. Apply cement in the manner and at the rate specified on the container label. Brushcement on smoothly to obtain 100% coverage. Do not allow the cement to glob or puddle. Allowcement to dry until it is tacky but will not string or stick to a dry finger touch.

3. Roll top sheet toward splice area until the cemented surface is nearly touching the cement on thebottom sheet along the entire length of splice. Allow sheet to fall freely into place. Avoidstretching and wrinkling while brushing with a hand toward the splice edge.

4. Roll splice with a 2" wide steel roller, using positive pressure, toward the outer edge of the splice. 5. Provide application of all splices by the end of each working day.

07501 - 5 of 8



C. Perimeter Membrane Securement:1. Securement shall be provided at the perimeter of each roof level, roof section, curb flashing,

skylight, expansion joint, interior wall, penthouse, etc., and at any inside angle change whereslope exceeds 2" in one horizontal foot.

2. Securement shall be as follows: Reinforced Universal Securement Strip (RUSS) shall bemechanically fastened through the membrane insulation (and existing built-up roof, if present)and into the structural substrate, as shown on Carlisle's standard details, with Carlisle's Sure-SealUniversal Fasteners. a. The top of mechanical fasteners shall be set flush with the top surface of the RUSS. Space

mechanical fasteners a maximum of 12" on center starting 1" from the end of the RUSS. b. If breaks for drainage are necessary, separate the adjoining strips with 6" space. c. After mechanically fastening the RUSS it shall be flashed with Sure-Seal Flashing.

D. Flashing - Gravel Stops:1. Deck membrane shall be installed over a perimeter wood nailer to the outside fascia of the

building; membrane must extend below and be secured to the wood nailer. 2. Gravel stop shall be installed and secured through the membrane as recommended by the gravel

stop manufacturer and according to an installation detail accepted by Carlisle. Securementprovided by the contractor shall prevent buckling and prohibit metal gravel stop from pulling free.

3. Flashing of the gravel stop deck flange must extend 3" minimum past the point of securement,in all directions.

4. Flashing of the gravel stop deck flange must provide complete coverage of the flange and providea minimum 3" wide splice to the adjoining deck membrane. Use Sure Seal Water Cut-off Masticfor adhering Sure-Seal Flashing to the membrane and gravel stop deck flange.

5. See Carlisle's U-A-1 Details.

E. Flashing - Walls, Parapets, Mechanical Equipment Curbs, Sky-lights, etc.: Use the longest piecesof material which are practicable. All flashings and terminations shall be done in accordance with theapplicable Carlisle detail. 1. When using Sure-Seal flashing at a vertical surface, complete the splice between the flashing

and the main roof sheet before bonding flashing to the vertical surface. The splice shall extendat least 3" beyond the RUSS which attaches the membrane at the angle change.

2. When using a continuation of roofing membrane as flashing, bond the membrane to the surfaceto be flashed without "pig ears". a. Apply bonding adhesive evenly, without globs or puddles, with a 9" plastic core paint roller. b. Apply bonding adhesive to both the flashing and the surface to which it is being bonded, at

a rate covering approximately 60 sq. ft. of finished surface per gallon.c. After the bonding adhesive has dried to the point that it does not string or stick to a dry finger,

roll the flashing into the cemented surface. Care must be taken to ensure that the flashingdoes not bridge where there is a change of direction (e.g., where the parapet meets the roofdeck).

d. Fasten the top of the installed flashing, at least every 12" on center, under metalcounterflashing or coping cap.

e. Then install Sure-Seal flashing as required to form a continuous membrane seal in eachcorner. (See applicable detail.)

NOTE: When used as a wall flashing, the recommended vertical height of the roofing membraneshall be 24" maximum.

07501 - 6 of 8



F. Flashing - Penetrations: 1. General:

a. Flash all penetrations (pipes, round supports, soil stacks, cold vents, etc.) passing throughthe membrane.

b. The flashing seal must be made directly to the penetration through the membrane system. Where the flashing is terminated to an intermediate element (metal flashing, insulation,surface treatment, etc.), which itself could fail and admit moisture beneath the membrane,FAILURE OF THAT ELEMENT TO REPEL MOISTURE IS BEYOND THE LIMITS OF THECARLISLE SYSTEM.

2. Pipes, round supports, etc.: a. Flash pipes with Sure-Seal Molded Pipe Flashings where their installation is possible. b. MOLDED PIPE FLASHINGS CANNOT BE CUT AND PATCHED; DECK FLANGES

CANNOT BE OVERLAPPED.c. Where Molded Pipe Flashings cannot be installed, USE FIELD FABRICATED PIPE SEALS. d. See Carlisle's published details for the various methods of flashing.

3. Seamless metal posts: a. Corner radius not greater than 1/4".b. Use a field fabricated pipe seal with double vertical wrapping of Sure-Seal Flashing around

the penetration. c. Longest side of penetration shall not exceed 4".

4. Flexible penetrations: A watertight seal depends upon a stable installation detail. When a flexiblepenetration is encountered it must be enclosed is a stable "goose neck" set in Water Cut-OffMastic and secured to the deck. Use a field fabricated pipe seal to flash the goose neck.

5. Hot pipes: Performance of the membrane system is jeopardized by temperature greater than 180degrees F. In all such cases flash to an intermediate "cool" sleeve in accordance with anapproved detail.

6. Pipe clusters: Seal clusters of pipes and unusual shaped penetrations by surrounding them withSure-Seal Pourable Sealer (2" min. depth, 1" clearance). Use pourable sealer pocket as shownin Carlisle's published details. (Details U-16, Pourable Sealer Pocket.)

7. Expansion joints: Membrane must be secured on both sides of expansion joint. Due to the widevariety of expansion joint applications refer to Carlisle's U-A-3 details.

8. Roof drains:a. Provide a smooth finish on the clean mating surfaces between the clamping ring and the

drain base. b. Taper insulation around drain to prevent membrane from bridging and to provide a smooth

transition from roof surface to drain clamping ring. c. The seal between the membrane and the drain base shall be provided by Water Cut-Off

Mastic under constant, even compression as shown in Carlisle's standard details. d. Follow drain manufacture's recommended installation procedures.

G. Surface Splice: Correction of splices, tears, etc. may be accomplished by splicing a membranesection over the affected area. 1. Select repair membrane which is the same material as that to be repaired. 2. Extend the repair membrane section at least 3" in every direction from the splice, tear, etc., to be

corrected. 3. To remove field dirt, clean the splice area with soap and water, rinse with clean water, and dry. 4. Follow splicing procedures found in 3.3 "D".

NOTE: Surface splice at drain shall extend 6" onto the horizontal surface of the roof membrane.

07501 - 7 of 8



H. Daily Seal: Care should be exercised to ensure that water does not flow beneath any completedsections of the membrane system. Temporarily seal any loose membrane edge with Sure-Seal NiteSeal. 1. Mix the two components thoroughly according to the instructions on the label. 2. On existing burr, remove the gravel. The surface shall be clean and dry. 3. Apply the Nite Seal at a rate of 100 lineal feet per gallon (on smooth surface) onto the exposed

substrate surface. If necessary, use a trowel to spread material in order to achieve a completeseal. For and existing BUR surface, this coverage will be reduced according to surfacepreparation.

4. After embedding the membrane in Nite Seal, CHECK FOR CONTINUOUS CONTACT. Weightthe edge providing continuous pressure over the length of the cutoff. The recommended weightfor the continuous pressure is a 10 foot length of 2-1/2" Sure-Seal Lay Flat Tubing filled with drysand.

5. When work is resumed, pull sheet free, trim and remove membrane where Nite Seal waspreviously applied before resuming installation.


07501 - 8 of 8

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 07620 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



A. Provide labor and materials and everything necessary for, and incidental to the execution andcompletion of the flashing and sheet metal work indicated on the drawings and specifiedherein.

B. The following items are specifically included without limiting the generality implied by thesespecifications and the drawings:1. Flashing for mechanical pipes and fixtures.2. Metal cap finishing.3. Coping system (metal).4. Through wall flashing.

1.03 COOPERATION

Examine drawings and specifications to determine nature of construction. Provide items in advanceof use that are to be built into work by other trades, or may interfere with the normal installation orquality of their work.


A. Cap Flashing: Aluminum pre-finished sheet of alloy and temper recommended by thealuminum producer for the use intended. Thickness shall be .032" thick (20 gauge). Finishshall be clear anodized. Cap flashing shall be shaped to profiles shown on drawings;workmanship shall follow SMACNA standards. Field work shall provide sharp clean profilesand properly fitted joints to exclude weather.

B. Thru-Wall Flashing: 1. Furnish to mason for installation of concealed flashings over lintels of all exterior

openings, under window sills and as elsewhere indicated on the drawings orwherever flashings are set in a bed of mortar. Form around intersecting columns orother projects that occur in line of flashing. All flashings in exterior walls shall extendthrough the wall to within ½" of the exterior face and turn up 2" on the interior unlessotherwise shown on drawings.

2. All thru-wall flashing set by mason shall be set with a bed of mortar above and belowthe flashing and shall be installed in strict accordance with the plans and specifica-tions. The roofing and sheet metal subcontractor shall supervise and be responsiblefor its proper installation.

3. Shall be either Wasco Copper-Fabric flashing as manufactured by Wasco Products,Inc. or by Grace Perm-A-Barner Flashing as manufactured by Grace ConstructionProducts. Fabric shall consist of full sheet of copper weighing 3 ounces per squarefoot, bonded to and between two (2) layers of coarsely woven asphalt saturatedcotton fabric. Flashing shall be grooved with a series of parallel depressions anddrip edge.

C. Fascia System: Furnish and install formed fascia by MM Systems Corp. Formed fascia shallbe aluminum if 5005 alloy. Splice joints to have 6" wide concealed splice plates. Joints tobe caulked. Provide 12" wide aluminum flashing at all splice joints prefabricated cornersshall be shop welded. Provide continuous hold down clips. Provide Super-Cote II bakedenamel custom color to match color of brick accent bands.

07620 - 1 of 3


D. Preformed Reglet: Reglets shall be snap lock, type B as manufactured by Cheney FlashingCo. or equal product of W.P. Hickman Co., Inc., Misc. Manufacturing Co. or Frey RegletCorp. Reglets shall be furnished to mason for installation.

E. Coping System (Metal): 1. MM Systems Corp .ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Test Method RE-3 for Coping: Wind Design

Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems.The copingproduct shall be listed in current Factory Mutual Research Corporation ApprovalGuide approved for Class FM 1-90. Perma-Tite Coping: Metal coping cap withgalvanized steel anchor/support cleats for capping any parapet wall. The systemshall be maintenance free and does not require exposed fasteners. Joints shall bea butt type with concealed splice plates. Standard model is (PTC) for all sizes.Metal : .040" aluminum; 22 ga. galvanized steel with Kynar coatings; custom metalby request.Coping cap: length of 12'-0" (3.65 m), widths to 24" manufactured to jobrequirements. True radii may be built to template. Coping vertical face and back leg:2¼" to 12½" manufactured to job requirements. Concealed splice plates: 8" wide.Finish to match finish of coping cap with factory applied dual non-curing sealantstrips. Anchor/Support Cleat: 20 ga. prepunched galvanized cleat with stainless steelspring mechanically locked to cleat normally 12" (305 mm) wide @ 4'-0" (1.22 M) oncenter. Mechanically fastened as indicated and detailed. Fasteners: Shall provide aminimum pull out resistance of 240# (109 kg) per substrate application. No exposedfasteners shall be permitted. Fasteners shall be electrolytically compatible.

Finishes: Shall be [select: natural aluminum mill finish; standard pre-coated Kynar500 from manufacturer’s color list; standard post-coated Kynar 500 from industrystandard two-coat colors; non-standard Kynar 500 color with multiple coatings orprotective clear coats; anodized aluminum; post applied exterior finish process] colorshall be [insert color].

2. Furnish and install custom formed coping system as detailed and noted on thedrawings. Aluminum shall be .063. Finish shall be anodized, color to be selectedby the Architect.

3. Gutter/splice plate shall be aluminum finished to match coping. Anchor plate shallbe galvanized steel. Finish shall be Super-Cote II baked enamel.

F. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: 1. Sheet Metal: aluminum per Section 07600. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim

to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item

2. Step Flashings: Fabricate with a headlap of 2 inches (50 mm) and a minimumextension of 5 inches (125 mm) over the underlying asphalt shingle and up thevertical surface.

3. Cricket Flashings: Fabricate with concealed flange extending a minimum 24 inches(600 mm) beneath upslope asphalt shingles and 6 inches (150 mm) above the roofplane.

4. Open Valley Flashings: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding [10 feet (3 m)] with 1-inch- (25-mm-) high inverted-V profile at center of valley and equal flange widths of10 inches (250 mm).

5. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding [10 feet (3 m)] with 2-inch (50-mm)roof deck flange and 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) fascia flange with 3/8-inch (9.6-mm) dripat lower edge.

6. Pipe Flashings: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, at least 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. Provide lead sleeve sized to slip over and turn down into pipe, soldered to skirt atslope of roof and extending at least 4 inches (100 mm) from pipe onto roof.

07620 - 2 of 3


PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

Flashing shall be installed where shown on drawings. Provide cements as recommended by themanufacturer and install with laps and cemented joints as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.02 VERIFICATION OF ROOF GUARANTEE

The General Contractor shall verify and coordinate with the Cap Flashing Contractor and RoofingContractor compatibility, acceptance and written roof guarantee.


07620 - 3 of 3


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 07721 - SMOKE VENTS

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



A. The type of unit specified in this section includes the following:1. Smoke and heat vent (stairwells and elevator shafts as indicated on drawings).


Smoke and heat vent shall be single leaf fire vent "SV" by the Bilco Co. or approved equal. Fusiblelink and electric release mechanisms shall be UL listed.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications, rough-in diagram, details,installation instructions and general product recommendations.

B. Shop Drawings: Furnish for approval of Architect, three (3) complete copies of allnonreproducible submittal information in accordance with Division 1.

1.05 GUARANTEE

Manufacturer shall guarantee against defects in material or workmanship for a period of five (5) years.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Smoke and Heat Vent (at stairwells, elevator shafts, or as indicated on plans): 1. Shall be Model SV as manufactured by Bilco Co. or approved equal. Unit shall be

30" x 36". Fabricate with single aluminum cover. Covers shall be 11 ga. aluminumwith 3" beaded flange neatly welded. Insulation shall be of integral glass fiber, 1" inthickness, fully covered and protected by an 18 ga. aluminum cover liner. Curb shallbe formed of 14 ga. paint bond galvanized steel (or 11 ga. aluminum) with a 3-1/2"flange with holes for securing to the roof deck and with an integral capflashing of thesame material, full welded for weathertightness. Insulation on the exterior of thecurb

shall be rigid fiberboard 1" in thickness. All hardware shall be zinc plated andchromate sealed. Factory finish shall be red oxide primer on steel. Vent shall becompletely assembled with a Thermolatch positive hold/release mechanism, heavypintle hinges, compression spring operators, thermoplastic rubber gasket, heavyduty shock absorbers, and pull handles for inside and outside operation. It shallopen automatically when heat breaks the UL listed 165 degree F. fusible link. Alsoequip with resettable 115V a.c. electric Thermolatch positive hold/release mecha-nism for actuation by smoke detector and equip with complete hardware, includinghold open devices and independent manual release devices.

2. All units shall be automatically operating. Lifting mechanisms shall be activated bya U.L. listed fusible link and electrical solenoid release for wiring to smoke detector. Smoke detector and electrical connections shall be provided by electrical subcon-tractor.

07721 - 1 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 07721 - SMOKE VENTS

B. All units shall be factory finished in baked enamel. color shall be selected by Architect frommanufacturer's standardcolors.

C. Framing: Fabricate of the materials, with manufacturer's standard welded or sealedmechanical corner joints, including cap flashing (roofing counter flashing):1. Material: Formed or extruded 11 ga. aluminum (cover liner).2. Material: 14 ga. Zinc-coated steel (curb).

D. Curb Type: Double-wall curb construction with cant strips and 1" insulation, for mounting withheight 12" above line of roofing.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Coordinate withinstallation of roof deck and other substrates to receive smoke/vent units, and with vaporbarriers, roof insulation, roofing and flashing; as required to ensure that each element of thework performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight.1. Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates, adequate to withstand

lateral and thermal stresses as well as inward and outward loading pressures.2. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are to be installed in contact with non-

compatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, apply bituminous coatingon concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent separation.

3. Flange Seals: Except as otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in athick bed of roofing cement, to form a seal.

4. Operational Units: Test operate units with operable components. Clean andlubricate joints and hardware. Adjust for proper operation.

3.02 TESTING

Manufacturer shall provide extra fusible link for testing. Contractor shall test unit in all modes forproper triggering of release mechanisms. After testing, unit shall be reset with new fusible link andelectric release ready for normal operations.

3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal and plastic surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings.

B. Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection ofsmoke/heat vent units so that units will be without damage or deterioration, other than normalweathering, at time of substantial completion.


07721 - 2 of 2

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION ARCH JOB #: 214041 SECTION 07726 – TYPE SS ROOF HATCH

07726 - 1 of 3

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Work included: Furnishing and installing factory fabricated roof hatches. B. Related Work: 1. Section 05513 Alternating Tread Steel Stairs 2. Section 07727 Roof Hatch Safety Rail System 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 100 Bar Harbor Drive, West Conshocken, PA 19428-2959; (610) 832-9585, fax (610) 832-9555 1. ASTM A 36-93a: Standard Specification for Structural Steel 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s product data for all materials in this specification. B. Shop Drawings: Show profiles, accessories, location, and dimensions. C. Samples: Manufacturer to provide upon request; sized to represent material adequately. D. Contract Closeout: Roof hatch manufacturer shall provide the manufacturer’s Warranty prior to the contract

closeout. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. All materials shall be delivered in manufacturer’s original packaging. B. Store materials in a dry, protected, well-vented area. The contractor shall thoroughly inspect product upon

receipt and report damaged material immediately to delivering carrier and note such damage on the carrier’s freight bill of lading.

C. Remove protective wrapping immediately after installation. 1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Proposals for substitution products shall be accepted only from bidding contractors and not less than (10)

working days before bid due date. Contractor guarantees that proposed substitution shall meet the performance and quality standards of this specification.

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Verify that other trades with related work are complete before installing roof hatch(s). B. Mounting surfaces shall be straight and secure; substrates shall be of proper width. C. Refer to the construction documents, shop drawings, and manufacturer’s installation instructions. D. Coordinate installation with roof membrane and roof insulation manufacturer’s instructions before starting. E. Observe all appropriate OSHA safety guidelines for this work.


07726 - 2 of 3

1.07 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE A. Manufacturer’s standard warranty: Materials shall be free of defects in material and workmanship for a

period of five years from the date of purchase. Should a part fail to function in normal use within this period, manufacturer shall furnish a new part at no charge. Electrical motors, special finishes, and other special equipment (if applicable) shall be warranted separately by the manufacturers of those products.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER A. The BILCO Company, P.O. Box 1203, New Haven, CT 06505, 1-203-934-6363, Fax: 1-203-933-8478, Web: www.bilco.com 2.02 ROOF HATCH A. Furnish and install where indicated on plans metal roof hatch Type SS-50 (Aluminum), size: width: 2'6" (762mm) x length: 5'10" (1778mm). Length denotes hinge side. The roof hatch shall be single leaf. Provide installed Bilco safety grab bar on underside of roof hatch, complete, with integrated additional supports and framing. The roof hatch shall be pre-assembled from the manufacturer. B. Performance characteristics: 1. Cover shall be reinforced to support a minimum live load of 40 psf (195kg/m2) with a maximum

deflection of 1/150th of the span or 20 psf wind uplift. 2. Operation of the cover shall be smooth and easy with controlled operation throughout the entire arc of

opening and closing. 3. Operation of the cover shall not be affected by temperature. 4. Entire hatch shall be weathertight with fully welded corner joints on cover and curb. C. Cover: Shall be : 11 gauge aluminum with a 3” (76mm) beaded flange with formed reinforcing members.

Cover shall have a heavy extruded EPDM rubber gasket that is bonded to the cover interior to assure a continuous seal when compressed to the top surface of the curb.

D. Cover insulation: Shall be fiberglass of 1” (25.4mm) thickness, fully covered and protected by a metal liner : 18 gauge aluminum. E. Curb: Shall be 12” (305mm) in height and of: 11 gauge aluminum. The curb shall be formed with a 3-1/2”

(89mm) flange with 7/16” (11.1mm) holes provided for securing to the roof deck. The curb shall be equipped with an integral metal capflashing of the same gauge and material as the curb, fully welded at the corners, that features the Bil-Clip

® flashing system, including stamped tabs, 6” (153mm) on center, to be

bent inward to hold single ply roofing membrane securely in place. F. Curb insulation: Shall be rigid, high-density fiberboard of 1” (25.4mm) thickness on outside of curb. G. Lifting mechanisms: Manufacturer shall provide compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes

to provide, smooth, easy, and controlled cover operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing. The upper tube shall be the outer tube to prevent accumulation of moisture, grit, and debris inside the lower tube assembly. The lower tube shall interlock with a flanged support shoe for aluminum construction: welded to the curb assembly.

H. Hardware 1. Heavy pintle hinges shall be provided 2. Cover shall be equipped with a spring latch with interior and exterior turn handles 3. Roof hatch shall be equipped with interior and exterior padlock hasps. 4. The latch strike shall be a stamped component bolted to the curb assembly. 5. Cover shall automatically lock in the open position with a rigid hold open arm equipped with a 1”

(25.4mm) diameter red vinyl grip handle to permit easy release for closing.


07726 - 3 of 3

6. Compression spring tubes shall be an anti-corrosive composite material and all other hardware shall be zinc plated and chromate sealed. Springs shall have an electrocoated acrylic finish for corrosion resistance. [For installation in highly corrosive environments or when prolonged exposure to hot water or steam is anticipated, specify Type 316 stainless steel hardware].

7. Cover hardware shall be bolted into heavy gauge channel reinforcing welded to the underside of the cover and concealed within the insulation space.

I. Finishes: Factory finish shall be : mill finish aluminum.


3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that roof hatch installation will not disrupt other trades. Verify that the substrate is dry, clean, and free

of foreign matter. Report and correct defects prior to any installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Submit product design drawings for review and approval to the architect or specifier before fabrication. B. The installer shall check as-built conditions and verify the manufacturer’s roof hatch details for accuracy to

fit the application prior to fabrication. The installer shall comply with the roof hatch Manufacturer's installation instructions.

C. The installer shall furnish mechanical fasteners consistent with the roof requirements.


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 07727 – ROOF HATCH RAIL SYSTEM

07727 - 1 of 2

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Work included: Furnishing and installing factory fabricated roof hatch rail system.

B. Related Work: 1. Section 05500 Miscellaneous Metal Work. 2. Section 07726; 07727 Roof Hatches.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 100 Bar Harbor Drive, West Conshocken, PA 19428-2959; (610) 832-9585, fax (610) 832-9555 1. ASTM A123

B. Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA), 200 Constitution Avenue NW, Washington, DC 20210.

1. 29 CFR 1910.23 Fall Protection in General Industry. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s product data for all materials in this specification.

B. Shop Drawings: Show profiles, accessories, location, and dimensions. C. Samples: Manufacturer to provide upon request; sized to represent material adequately. D. Contract Closeout: Roof hatch rail system manufacturer shall provide the manufacturer’s

Warranty prior to the contract closeout. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. All materials shall be delivered in manufacturer’s original packaging.

B. Store materials in a dry, protected, well-vented area. The contractor shall thoroughly inspect product upon receipt and report damaged material immediately to delivering carrier and note such damage on the carrier’s freight bill of lading.

C. Remove protective wrapping immediately after installation.

1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Proposals for substitution products shall be accepted only from bidding contractors and not less than (10) working days before bid due date. Contractor guarantees that proposed substitution shall meet the performance and quality standards of this specification.

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Verify that other trades with related work are complete before installing roof hatch rail system(s). B. Mounting surfaces shall be straight and secure; substrates shall be of proper width. C. Refer to the construction documents, shop drawings, and manufacturer’s installation instructions. D. Observe all appropriate OSHA safety guidelines for this work.

1.07 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE

A. Manufacturer’s standard warranty: Materials shall be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of twenty-five years from the date of purchase. Should a part fail to function in normal use within this period, manufacturer shall furnish a new part at no charge. Electrical motors, special finishes, and other special equipment (if applicable) shall be warranted separately by the manufacturers of those products.

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 07727 – ROOF HATCH RAIL SYSTEM

07727 - 2 of 2

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER A. The BILCO Company, P.O. Box 1203, New Haven, CT 06505; 1-203-934-6363, Fax: 1-203-933- 8478. Internet address: http://www.bilco.com. For local representative, contact: Sweet’s Buyline 1-800-892-1165 (#0032, #0034). 2.02 HATCH RAIL SYSTEM

A. Furnish and install where indicated on plans hatch rail system Model RL-SS 30” x 70” Roof hatch size. The hatch rail system shall be field assembled and installed (by others) per the manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Performance characteristics: 1. High visibility safety yellow color shall be molded in.

2. Hatch rail system shall attach to the capflashing of the roof hatch and shall not penetrate any roofing material.

3. Hatch rail system shall satisfy the requirements of OSHA 29 CFR 1910.23 and shall meet OSHA strength requirements with a factor of safety of two.

4. UV and corrosion resistant construction with a twenty-five year warranty. 5. Self-closing gate shall be provided with hatch rail system.

C. Posts and Rails: Shall be round pultruded reinforced fire retardant yellow fiberglass treated with a UV inhibitor.

D. Hardware: Mounting brackets shall be ¼” thick hot dip galvanized steel. Hinges and post guides

shall be 6063T5 aluminum. Fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel. PART III - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Verify that hatch rail system installation will not disrupt other trades. Report and correct defects prior to any installation.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Submit product design drawings for review and approval to the architect or specifier before fabrication.

B. The installer shall check as-built conditions and verify the manufacturer’s hatch rail system details for accuracy to fit the application prior to fabrication. The installer shall comply with the ladder safety post manufacturer’s installation instructions.

C. The manufacturer shall furnish fasteners necessary for installing hatch rail system on hatch.


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 07920 - CAULKING AND SEALANTS

PART I – GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL



A. The work covered by this section of the specifications consists of providing all equipment,materials and labor, and performing all the work as required for the complete execution of caulkingand sealing as indicated. Included, but not necessarily limited to, are the following:1. Caulking all joints between masonry and steel and aluminum frames.2. Caulking all around all exterior door frames, louvers and other items built into exterior walls.3. Caulking all joints between exterior architectural metal work and other materials.4. Caulking all exterior door saddles.5. Caulking all joints between flashing and other work beneath flashings.6. Sealing at control and expansion joints.7. Sealing or caulking at all other locations where sealant or caulking is indicated.8. Firestopping.

B. The following work is specified under other divisions and/or sections of the specifications:1. Division 3 - Premolded expansion joint filler at concrete slabs.2. Division 8 - Glass and Glazing.3. Division 2 - Joint filler and sealer for sidewalks.

1. 03 GENERAL PERFORMANCE

Except as otherwise indicated, joint sealers are required to establish and maintain airtight andwaterproof continuous seals on a permanent basis, within recognized limitations of wear and aging asindicated for each application. Failures of installed sealers to comply with this requirement will berecognized as failures of materials and workmanship. All sealants and caulking shall be incompliance, meet recommendations, and be compatible to product to which it is being applied.

1. 04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications, handling, installation, curinginstructions, and performance tested data sheets for each elastomeric product required. Thissubmittal must specifically address compatibility with the materials to which they are beingapplied.

B. Certified Tests: With product data submit test reports for elastomeric sealants on agedperformances as specified, including hardness, stain resistance, adhesion, cohesion, or tensilestrength, elongation, low-temperature flexibility, compression set, modules of elasticity, waterabsorption, and resistance (aging, weight loss, deterioration) to heat and exposures to ozone andultraviolet. SWRI VALIDATION All sealants to be validated by the Sealant WeatherproofingRestoration Institute (www.SWRIONLINE.org).

C. Samples:1. Submit in duplicate, samples of all material specified herein, for approval of Architect.2. Approved samples shall be the standard for comparison of all installed work.

07920 - 1 of 5

http://www.SWRIONLINE.org)


1. 05 JOB CONDITIONS

Weather Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of liquid sealants under unfavorable weatherconditions. Install blastomeric sealants when temperature is in lower third of temperature rangerecommended by manufacturer for installation.

1. 06 WARRANTY

A. 20 year Non Stain Warranty

B. 20 year Weatherseal Warranty

PART II - PRODUCTS

2. 01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Elastomeric Sealant1. Sealant compound shall be manufactured by one of the following companies and shall comply

with specification requirements:a. Tremco Manufacturing Companyb. Pecora, Corp.c. DAP, Incd. Dow Corning

2. It shall be furnished in proper consistency for gun or knife application as required.3. Color shall be approved by the Architect.

B. Fire Stopping System1. Fire Stop System shall be manufactured by one of the following companies and shall comply

with specification requirements:a. Tremco Manufacturing Co. (Tremstop WBM)b. Specified Technologies Inc. (Spec Seal ES)c. Hilti (CP 606)

2. 02 ELASTOMERIC SEALANT COMPOUND

A. Elastomeric Sealant1. Type: Low dirt pick-up, non-staining, medium-modules, one component, pre-pigmented,

neutral-cure elastomeric silicone sealant.2. Compliance: Sealant shall meet or exceed requirements of ASTMC920, Type S, Grade NS,

Class 50, use NT, G, M, A and O.3. Sealant: Dow Corning 756,790 or 795 SMS Building Sealant as manufactured by Dow

Corning Corp. Or approved equal.

B. All elastomeric sealing compound shall be a one-part non-acid curing silicone base.

C. Sealant shall have a Shore Hardness Durometer reading of 25 to 35 as recommended bymanufacturer for specific conditions and shall withstand temperature extremes from minusdegrees F. to plus 260 degrees F.

07920 - 2 of 5


D. Sealant shall absorb movement not to exceed 100% of its applied width after ten (10) yearsexposure without loss of adhesion or cohesion.

E. Sealant must be non-staining and non-blushing after contact with masonry terra cotta, mortar, ormetal of any kind. Exterior sealants must be non-staining and non-blushing due to exposure tothe elements.

F. Color shall be selected by the Architect.

G. All elastomeric sealing compound furnished under this section shall be of the same brand unlessotherwise approved by the Architect in writing.

2. 03 JOINT BACKUP

A. Joint backup material shall be compatible with sealant used.

B. Size of backup material shall be determined by the condition and as recommended by themanufacturer.

C. One of the following brands and manufacturers shall be used providing they are compatible withsealant used:1. Aerocor PL-336 fiberglass as manufactured by Owens Corning Fiberglass Corp.2. Ethafoam as manufactured by Dow Corning Corp.3. Foam Polyethylene as manufactured by the Tremco Manufacturing Co.4. Sonofoam Backer Rod as manufactured by Sonneborn, Inc.

D. Bond breaker: Joint backing should be used to control depth of joint to the recommendedthickness and to prevent three-sided adhesion. Where joint design or depth of joint will not permitthe use of joint backing, an adhesive backed polyethylene bond breaker tape (470 tape or 481tape by 3M are acceptable) must be installed to prevent three-sided adhesion. Joint shall bebacked by round polyurethane foam, closed-cell polyethylene, non-bleeding neoprene or butyl rodinstalled under the manufacturer's recommended compression. Polyurethane foam (open-celljoint backing) is approved or used in vertical joints only. It is not approved for use in cavity wallconstruction, rain screen construction, and Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS).

2. 04 FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM

A. A UL listed Fire Stop System shall be installed in joints and through penetrations of fire ratedfloors, walls and partitions. Fire stop system shall be as tested in accordance with ASTME814,with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inch (2.49 Pa) of water and shall have an Frating and T rating of not less than the required fire resistant rating of the floor or wall penetrated.

B. Fire stop material shall be a UL listed, intumescent elastomeric specifically formulated for use inhorizontal and vertical application and shall be of the type and design recommended by thematerial manufacturer and required by Code for the specific application.

07920 - 3 of 5



3. 01 INSPECTION

Installer must examine substrates (joint surfaces) and conditions under which joint sealer work is to beperformed, and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with jointsealer work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

3. 02 TESTING

A. Prior to construction of building elements that will be in contact with sealant a adhesion test shouldbe performed on all substrates meeting manufacturers recommendation. Compatibility of sealantwith all substrates must also be verified by contractor.

3. 03 JOINT PREPARATION

A. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of gaskets, sealants or caulking compounds. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substrate which could interfere with seal ofgasket or bond of sealant or caulking compound. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces asrecommended by sealant manufacturer. Roughen vitreous and glazed joint surfaces asrecommended by sealant manufacturer.

B. Prime or seal joint surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer. Apply primer tocomply with joint sealant manufacturers written recommendations. Confine primer/sealer to areasof sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3. 04 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions except where more stringent requirements areshown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical representative directs otherwise.

B. Rake out, clean out thoroughly all joints and recesses to be caulked or sealed so as to be free ofall loose or foreign material, just prior to sealing.

C. Remove all foreign matter including methacrylate lacquer that would prohibit bond adhering tometal with a solvent recommended by manufacturer of compound.

D. Pack all joints deeper than 3/8" with joint filler to 3/8" from face of as detailed on drawings.

E. Apply manufacturer's recommended primer to concrete, masonry and stone surfaces beforesealing if recommended by manufacturer.

F. Apply compound to dry surfaces only when temperature is above 40 degrees F.

G. Fill all joints and recesses completely. Finish all compounds against stop where this is provided. Elsewhere finish to a neat uniform bevel. Finish all joints with beading tool.

H. Consistency of compound shall be such as to prevent sagging.

I. Use all possible precautions to avoid smearing any compound of finished work.

07920 - 4 of 5


J. Remove immediately all compound smeared on any adjacent surfaces, using a non-stainingsolvent recommended by manufacturer of compound.

K. Caulking and Sealant Joints:1. Minimum Caulking Joint: 1/4" x 1/4"/6mm x 6 mm; depth of joint should not exceed width of

joint for joints 1/4"/6mm wide. 2. For joints wider than 1/4"/6mm, but less than 1/2" /12mm wide, the depth of sealant should be

no more than 3/8" /10 mm. 3. For joints 1/2"/12mm to 2"/ 51mm wide, the depth of sealant should be no more than 1/2"/12

mm.4. Maximum Joint Size: Approximately 2"/51mm width by 1/2"/12 mm in depth in a single

application. Joints several inches wide have been installed in vertical walls with multipleapplications.

L. Expansion Joint Sealant:1. Minimum width of joint should be four times the anticipated movement, but not less than 1/4"

wide.2. Joint depth to be 1/4" for joints 1/4" to 1/2" in width.3. Maximum joint depth not to exceed ½".4. Maximum joint size approximately 3”" width x 1/2" depth in a single application.

3. 05 CURE AND PROTECTION

A. Cure sealants and caulking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions andrecommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surfacedurability. Advise Contractor of procedures required for cure and protection of joint sealers duringconstruction period, so that they will be without deterioration or damage (other than normal wearand weathering) at time of substantial completion.

B. All existing work shall be adequately protected from damage and staining during all caulking andsealing operations.

- - END OF SECTION - - -

07920 - 5 of 5

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS, AND GLASS

ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 08105 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERALThe drawings, Instructions to Bidders, Form of Proposal, General Conditions, Supplementary GeneralConditions, and Division 1 are included herein and govern work under this section.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORKA. Extent of hollow metal doors and frames is shown and scheduled on drawings.

B. All hollow metal frames shall be engineered type frames. No knock down frames will beacceptable.

C. Work included, but not necessarily limited to, is as follows:1. Hollow metal doors.2. Hollow metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, windows and other openings.3. Knockdown metal Frames4. Metal door louvers.5. Vision panels in hollow metal doors.6. Shop prime painting.7. Reinforcing as required and as indicated.

D. Builders hardware is specified elsewhere in Division 8.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer: Provide standard steel doors and frames by a single firm specializing in production

of this type of work.

B. Provide hollow metal doors and frames by one of the following:1. Amweld Building Products Division2. Ceco Corporation3. Fenestra4. Steel Craft Manufacturing Company

1.04 FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLIESProvide fire-rated door investigated and tested as for door assemblies, complete with type ofhardware to be used. Identify each fire door with Factory Mutual and/or Underwriters Laboratorylabels, indicating applicable fire rating of steel door and frame. Construct and install assembliesto comply with NFPA Standard No. 80, and as herein specified.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for fabrication and installation, including data

substantiating that products comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of hollow metal door and frames. Includedetails for each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at opening, details ofconstruction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, anddetails of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and

openings as those on contract drawings.

08105 - 1 of 7



C. Label Construction Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification for oversize fire-rated doorsand frames that each assembly has been constructed with materials and methods equivalent torequirements for labeled construction.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA. Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage.

B. Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired providedfinish items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the Architect; otherwise,remove and replace damaged items as directed.

C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on wood sills at least 4" high, orotherwise store on floors in manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid use of non-ventedplastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on doorbecomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4" space between stacked doors to promoteair circulation.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALSA. Steel: In U.S. standard gauges as herein specified; prime quality, cold rolled, full pickled, double

annealed, stretcher-leveled, free from scale, pitting, rust, surface or internal defects.

B. Sound Deadening: Mineral wool, fiberglass, or cord to reduce metallic ring and act as insulator. Fill in labeled door shall be in accordance with Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.

C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying withASTM A526, with ASTM A525, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less that 18 ga. galvanized sheet steel.

E. Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot-dip galvanize items to bebuilt into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A153, Class C or D as applicable.

2.02 SHOP APPLIED PAINTPrimer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, baked on, suitable as a base for specified finish paints.

2.03 FABRICATION, GENERALA. Fabricate hollow metal door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects,

warp or buckle. Whenever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearlyidentify work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure properassemble at project site.

B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from onlycold-rolled steel.

C. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings fromeither cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel (at fabricator's option).

D. Fabricate doors, panels and frames in wet areas (Exterior, Swimming Pools, Mechanical Roomsetc.) from galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part ofdoor construction or by addition of inverted steel channels.

08105 - 2 of 7



E. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads forexposed screws and bolts.

2.04 THERMAL-RATED (INSULATING) ASSEMBLIESA. Where shown or scheduled, provide door and frame assemblies and tested in accordance with

ASTM C236.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, maximum apparent U factors for thermal-rated assemblies is 0.24BTU/hr(ft2)F.

2.05 SOUND-RATED (ACOUSTICAL) ASSEMBLIESA. Where shown or scheduled, provide door and frame assemblies which have been fabricated as

sound-reducing type, tested in accordance with ASTM E90, and classified in accordance withASTM E413.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, minimum sound rating for acoustical assemblies is STC 33.

2.06 FINISH HARDWARE PREPARATIONA. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with

final Finish Hardware Schedules and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply withapplicable requirements of ANSI A 115 series specifications for door and frame preparation forhardware.

B. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied finish hardware may be done at project site.

C. Locate finish hardware as shown on final shop drawings or, if not shown, in accordance with"Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware," published by Door and Hardware Institute.

2.07 SHOP PAINTINGA. Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized

surfaces.

B. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials beforeapplication of paint.

C. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface readyto receive finish paint.

2.08 HOLLOW METAL DOORSA. Provide metal doors of types and styles indicated on drawings or schedules.

B. Type: Full-flush, of thickness and sizes as indicated.

C. Panel Plates: Made from one sheet of metal, two (2) sheets per door, connected by interlockingseams.

D. Gauge of Face Plates: 16 ga. for all exterior doors; 16 ga. and 18 ga. for interior doors asindicated on drawings.

08105 - 3 of 7



E. Construction:1. Reinforcing: Internal 20 ga. vertical reinforcing channels, spaced not over 8" on center, full

height of door, uniformly spot welded to mated pans, or equivalent construction standard withmanufacturer. Provide additional reinforcing as required in doors with glazing and in oversizedoors.

2. Stiffeners: Continuous 18 ga. channels, welded to face plates, top and bottom of all doors.3. Filler Channels: To close top of all exterior and interior doors.4. Cut-outs: For vision panels, uniformly located as indicated, integrally glazed into door.5. Moldings: Integral with and welded into door providing three (3) recessed rebates at all vision

panels. Top interior glazing stop furnished. Provide standard drip molding at bottom onoutside of exterior doors.

6. Astragals: On active leaf of all pairs of exterior doors, full height, of 12 ga. steel strip, 1-3/4"wide, standard type.

7. Labeled Doors: Provide Underwriters' Laboratories labels with fire resistance ratings foropenings as indicated.

8. Sound Deadening: Install material in all interior voids of all doors.a. Form exterior frames of hot dip galvanized steel.

9. Hardware Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement of sheet or bar steel to receivemortise type hardware. Include 9 ga. reinforcing for butts, 12 ga. for locksets and latchsetsand 14 ga. for surface applied hardware. Include reinforcement for all door closers.a. Finish after assembly, clean thoroughly, grind smooth. Apply two shop coats of baked-on

rust inhibitive primer.

F. Door Louvers: Provide sightproof stationary louvers for exterior doors where indicated,constructed of V-shaped blades formed of 24 ga. cold-rolled steel set into 20 ga. steel frame.

2.09 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES W INTEGRAL TRANSOMS AND LITES (Welded)A. Provide welded metal frames for doors with integral transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights,

windows, and other openings, of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Concealfastenings, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Type: 1. Hollow metal, 16 ga., to profiles and sizes indicated. Provide where required, rough bucks

with expansion shield anchors as indicated. Head member of frame shall be reinforced with10 ga. channel shaped reinforcing for all doors exceeding 44 inches in width.

C. Welded Unit Construction: Assemble frames in shop, weld corners, molds, returns, weld tohairline joint. Grind exposed beads smooth. Corners of frames shall be mitered.

D. Combination Frames: Shop assembled and welded units for door frames with transoms,sidelights, borrowed lights, etc. as indicated, complete with muntins, mullions, impost sections,fabricated to requirements indicated. Provide glazing stops, moldings for field assembly withcounter-sunk oval head self-tanning screws, not over 16" o.c.

E. Door Silencers: Prepare jamb rebates for rubber door silencers, as specified in Builder'sHardware Section. Locate three (3) for single doors, two (2) for pairs of doors.

F. Reinforcing: Provide concealed reinforcement to receive mortise type hardware, mortised, drilledand tapped to template. Reinforcement shall include 3/16" butt reinforcing 12 ga. lock strike, 14ga. for surface applied items. Include reinforcement for door closers.

08105 - 4 of 7



G. Anchors: Provide frames with type of anchors as indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, anchorsshall be adjustable, not less than four (4) anchors per jamb. For frames set in previously placedwalls, provide anchors and/or rough bucks, of design suitable for the purpose and secure withexpansion bolts.

H. Label: Provide Underwriters' Laboratories label for frames for labeled doors.

I. Finish: After assembly, clean thoroughly removing all dust, scale, grease, oil and rough spots. Supply two (2) shop coats of rust inhibitive primer.

2.010 HOLLOW METAL INTERIOR FRAMES : (Knock Down)A. Type: Shop Primed knocked down steel frame consisting of separate strike and/or hinge jambs

and header.

B. Construction:1. Formed from l8 ga. cold rolled steel prefinished with electrostatically applied and banked on

enamel. Color as selected. 2. Supplied with prefinished and mitered snap-on 22 ga. casing and corner pieces that maintain

a tight fit at the miters. 3. Manufactured to receive 4-l/2" x 4-l/2" square corner hinges.4. Supplied with l4 ga. zinc coated hinge reinforcement gussets premounted on hinge jambs.5. Manufactured to receive a standard 2-3/4" or 4-7/8" ANSI. strike as specified. 6. Supplied with a patented adjustable strike when the 2-3/4" strike is specified. 7. Supplied with tie straps premounted on each end of the header to provide for a correct

alignment with the jambs and also to add to the strength and dimensional stability of the joint. 8. Supplied with felt silencers.9. Frame selection is to be available with ICBO (20 minute) label in minimum wall sizes 3-3/4"

through 7-3/8" wall thickness. 10. Frame is to be available for l-3/4" door thickness.

C. General - U.L. Listed Frames: 1. Type: Prefinished knocked-down steel frame consisting of a separate strike jamb, hinge jamb

and header.2. Construction:

a. Formed from l8 ga. cold rolled steel prefinished with electrostatically applied and bakedon enamel.

b. Supplied with prefinished and mitered snap-on 22 ga. casing and corner pieces thatmaintain a tight fit at the miters.

c. Manufactured to receive three 4-l/2" x 4-l/2" square corner hinges. d. Supplied with l4 ga. zinc coated hinge reinforcement gussets premounted on hinge

jambs. e. Manufactured to receive a standard 4-7/8" A.N.S.I strike.f. Supplied with a hardware package containing (36) 1-7/8" long type "S" bugle head

screws, felt silencers, one (1) door closer reinforcement and two (2) No. l2 x 2" type "AB"sheet metal screws.

g. Supplied with tie straps premounted on each end of the header to provide for a correctalignment with the jambs and also to add to the strength and dimensional stability of thejoint.

h. Supplied with two (2) paper labels placed inside each member of the frame. Oneidentifies the piece as a knocked-down frame part and the other states the nominal size.

08105 - 5 of 7



i. Supplied with a mylar label adhered to the hinge jamb just above the center hinge.This label identifies the frame as a U.L. listed fire door frame, states the name of themanufacturer and has a serial number stamped on it.

j. Supplied with the header and upright cartons strapped together and at least five (5) U.L.carton marker labels applied to the ends and sides of the cartons.

k. U.L. Frame is designed to be used with labeled fire doors. l. All doors shall be of the size and thickness and machined as specified to fit the Frame.

Necessary hardware (other than specified above) shall be furnished by others. m. Doors and frames shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.


3.01 INSPECTIONInstaller must examine substrate and conditions under which steel doors and frames are to beinstalled and must notify Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and timelycompletion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected inmanner acceptable to Installer.

3.01 WORKMANSHIPA. General: Shop fabricated to profiles as indicated. All edges straight and sharp. Miters and other

joints tight and well formed.

B. All doors and frames to be accurately mortised for locks and hinges. All cutting, drilling, etc. to beclean and well defined with no burrs.

C. All openings in doors for lights, louvers, etc. are to be plumb and square.

D. All welding shall conform to applicable standards of American Welding Society for high gradehollow metal work. All exposed beads to be ground smooth.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. General: Install hollow doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings

and manufacturer's data, and as herein specified.

B. Placing Frames:1. Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames,"

unless otherwise indicated.2. Except for frames located at in-place concrete or masonry and at drywall installations, place

frames prior to construction of closing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position,plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wallconstruction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smoothand undamaged.a. In masonry construction, locate three (3) wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels.

Building in of anchors and grouting frames is specified in Division 4.b. At in-place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure to adjacent

construction with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices.c. Install fire-rated frames in accordance with the U.L. test procedure, machine screws and

masonry anchorage devices.d. In metal stud partitions, install at least three (3) wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike

levels. In open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchors to studs with tappingscrews.

08105 - 6 of 7



C. Door Installation:1. For hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI-100.2. Place Fire-rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80.

D. Undercutting: Doors shall be factory undercut as indicated on door schedule and as required toallow for thresholds. Install into solid blocking.

3.03 ADJUST AND CLEANA. Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand and smooth any rusted or damaged

areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer.

B. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors andframes undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.


08105 - 7 of 7

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS, AND GLASS ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 08111 - ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES (SWINGING)

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL


1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish labor and materials required for the installation of aluminum entrances shown on thedrawings and specified herein.

B. Glass and Glazing - Section 08810.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Follow instructions in General Conditions.

B. Sample of aluminum finish.

PART II - PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL

A. Doors and frames to be fabricated of aluminum extrusions AA-6063-T5 aluminum alloy withbronze duranodic finish.

B. All finish hardware for aluminum doors shall be included. Butt hinges (extra heavy, heavy

duty), three (3) per door. Thresholds, closers and weatherstripping are included in thissection. Doors and frames shall be adequately reinforced to receive all hardware. Lockcylinders in finish hardware by others.

C. Aluminum frames shall be manufactured by Kawneer Architectural Products, Series Trifab

VG-451T.

2.02 DOORS

A. Similar to Medium style series 350, Type X (Butt Hinge) with stile, rails and muntins as shownon drawings (custom).

B. Wall thickness of extruded sections shall not be less than one eighth inch (.125") normal.

C. Fastenings shall be of aluminum alloys, stainless steel or carbon steel cadmium plated.

D. All doors shall have tension rod, mortised and reinforced corner construction.

E. Doors shall be completely and continuously weatherstripped at heads and jambs.

F. Doors shall have extruded aluminum snap-in glass with vinyl insert for puttyless glazing.

08111 - 1 of 2

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS, AND GLASS ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 08111 - ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES (SWINGING)

G. All Glass doors and adjacent windows are to have opaque markings identifying therelocation. Markings are to occur in two locations 30" AFF , but not more than 36" and 60" AFF,but not more than 66"

PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ALUMINUM ENTRANCES

A. General: Aluminum surfaces in contact with masonry concrete, wood or steel shall beprotected from contact by use of neoprene gaskets or a coat of bituminous paint to preventgalvanic or corrosive action. All dimensions, elevations and slopes shall be checked toinsure proper fit and weatherstripping construction.

B. Install frame members in accordance with manufacturer's approved shop drawings, and

installation instructions. All material to be accurately cut, fitted and secured in place.

3.02 CLEANING

Clean aluminum surfaces after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to finish. Removeexcess grease and sealant components, dirt and other substances.


08111 - 2 of 2

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS, AND GLASS ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 08165 - METAL MIRRORED CLOSET DOOR SYSTEMS

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL


1. 02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Types of doors required include the following:

a. Sliding or swinging Metal 1 3/4" Closet Doors with Mirrors and all Hardware.

1. 03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of eachkind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings,requirements for factory finishing and other pertinent data.1. Submittals shall use the same designations for door and hardware numbers as shown on the

drawings.


A. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from one source.

B. Inspection: Installing contractor provide an inspection of all doors for conformance to specifications. Inspection shall include checking for fit tolerance and plumb and level, as well as proper hardwareand operation.

1. 05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with recommendations of WDMA pamphlet “How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install andMaintain Wood Doors”, as well as with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system used onShop Drawings for door, frames and hardware using temporary, removable or concealed markings.

C. Package mirror doors in vented plastic wrap with identifying marks prior to shipment. Do not removewrapper until ready to hang. After hanging, replace bags over doors to provide protection until areais free of construction traffic.1. Store in dry area off the floor minimum 3" in an upright position with spacers or corner caps

separating each door.

1. 06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete andconditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained instorage and installation areas during remainder of construction period to comply with the followingrequirements applicable to Project’s geographical location:

08165 - 1 of 3


PART II - PRODUCTS

2. 01 SLIDING OR SWING PIVOTED MIRRORED CLOSET DOORS

A. Steel framed doors with mirror finish on faces:1. “Contempra Whisper Glide”, American Mirror Door, Inc. 15 Putter Ln., Torrington, CT (860) 496-

0008

B. Materials:

1. Panel Frames:

a. Cold formed steel channel

b. Factory applied thermo-setting enamel paint finish. Color to be manufacturer’s standardwhite.

2. Roller and Guide Assemblies for sliding systems:

a. Roller Assembly:

i. Adjustable, free floating type.

ii. Roller wheels: Ball bearing type with nylon tires.

iii. Track: Factory finished steel.

iv. Roller assembly anti-jump proof retainer clip.

3. Top Guide Assembly (Wall above).

a. Guide Track: Factory finished steel with fascia.

b. Top Guide: Plastic type, fitted to track and spring loaded to prevent rattling or shaking ofdoors during operation.

4. Mirror:

a. Mirror Facing: Smooth-edged, silvered, mirrored, vinyl-backed safety glass complying with16 CFR 1201 for category II safety glass with ANSI Z97.1 test procedures; with ASTM C1036 for Type I (transparent, flat), Class 1 (clear).

b. Quality q2 (mirror) annealed float glass; with FS DD-M-411 for coating system applied tosecond glass surface; and with the following:

i. Glass Thickness: 1/8" thickness for doors up to 7'-0". 5/32" thickness for heights greaterthan 7'-0".

ii. Edge Protection: Vertical mirror edges protected by metal.

5. All Glass doors and adjacent windows are to have opaque markings identifying there location.Markings are to occur in two locations 30" AFF , but not more than 36" and 60" AFF, but not morethan 66"

08165 - 2 of 3



3. 01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions with installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerancesand other conditions affecting performance of sliding doors and the following:

1. Verify that headers are level with finished floor to within plus or minus 1/8-inch tolerance over theentire length of opening.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3. 02 INSTALLATION

A. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Hang doors and adjust for proper clearances and smooth operation without binding.

1. Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

3. 03 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not operate freely.

B. Hang sliding doors and adjust for proper clearances and operation. Hang doors so they remainstationary regardless of open position.

C. Pre-finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.

D. Clean door and dry wipe with a soft cloth.

E. After installation, protect doors from damage as recommended by manufacturer during subsequentconstruction activities. Damaged doors will be rejected and shall be replaced at no additional costto Owner.

F. Clean mirrors using cleaning compounds that will not damage mirrors, door finishes or adjacentmaterials.

G. Protect mirrors and doors from damage. Replace damaged units at no cost to Owner.


08165 - 3 of 3


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 08200 - WOOD DOORS

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

The drawings, Instructions to Bidders, Form of Proposal, General Conditions, SupplementaryGeneral Conditions, and Division 1 are included herein and govern work under this section.


A. Extent and location of each type of wood door is shown on drawings and in schedules.

B. Types of doors required include the following: molded hollow core, six-panel doors, flush wooddoors with smooth prefinished L4000 paint, standard colors. Types of doors required include thefollowing: solid core and hollow core flush wood doors with veneer faces as indicated on plans.

C. Shop priming of wood doors is included in this section.

D. Shop finishing of wood doors is included in this section.

E. Factory-fitting to frames (prefitting) and factory-preparation for hardware (premachining) for wooddoors is included in this section.

F. Louvers for wood doors, including furnishing and installation, are specified under this section.


A. NWMA Quality Marketing: Mark each wood door with NWMA Wood Flush Door CertificationHallmark certifying compliance with applicable requirements of ANSI/NWMA I.S. 1 series. Formanufacturers not participating NWMA Hallmark Program, a certification of compliance may besubstituted for marking of individual doors.

B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors with fire resistance ratings indicated or required tocomply with governing regulations and which are identical in materials and type of construction tothose used in assemblies which have been tested in compliance with ASTM E152 and are labeledand listed by Factory Mutual and/or Underwriters' Laboratory.

C. Oversize Fire-Rated Wood Doors: For door assemblies exceeding sizes of tested assemblies,provide certificate from an approved inspection agency stating that doors conform to all standardconstruction requirements of tested and labeled fire door assemblies except as to size.

D. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer to ensure uniformity in quality ofappearance and construction, unless otherwise indicated.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. Comply with the applicable requirements of the following standards unless otherwise indicated:1. ANSI/NWMA I.S. 1, "Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors" published by National

Manufacturers Association (NWMA).

08200 - 1 of 6



1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit door manufacturer's product data, specifications and installationinstructions for each type of wood door.1. Include details of core and edge construction, trim for openings and louvers (if any) and

similar components.2. Include finishing specifications for doors to receive factory-applied shop finish.3. Include certifications as may be required to show compliance with specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation ofeach kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings,requirements for factory finishing and other pertinent data.

C. Samples: Submit samples for the following:1. Transparent Finished Doors: Submit veneer sheet from each available flitch to be used for

face veneers. Also submit strips of solid wood 3" x 1'-0" of species to be used for exposededges, trim and other solid wood components.

D. Specific Product Warranty:1. Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form signed by manufacturer,

installer and contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which have warped(bow, cup or twist) or which show telegraphing of core construction below in face veneers, ordo not conform to tolerance limitations of NWMA and AWI.

2. The warranty shall also include refinishing and reinstallation which may be required due torepair or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of substantial completion.4. Solid Core Flush Interior Doors: Life of installation.

E. Product Delivery, Storage and Handling:1. Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and

deterioration. Comply with the "On-Site Core" recommendations of NWMA pamphlet "Careand Finishing of Wood Doors" and with manufacturer's instruction, and as otherwiseindicated.

2. Package doors at factory prior to shipping using method indicated: Manufacturer's standardmethod.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.2. Eggers Hardwood Products Corp.3. Weyerhauser Company4. Mohawk5. Marlite; 202 Harger Street, Dover, OH 44622. 800-377-1221 Fax (330) 343-4668, E-Mail:

[email protected] www.marlite.com

08200 - 2 of 6

mailto:[email protected]



2.02 MATERIAL AND COMPONENTS

A. General: Provide wood doors complying with applicable requirements of referenced standards forkinds and types of doors indicated and as specified.

B. Face Panels: 1. Manufacturer's standard two- or three-ply face panels, unless otherwise indicated.2. Laminate faced -thick high pressure plastic laminate:

C. Exposed Surfaces: Provide kind shown or scheduled and as further specified. Provide sameexposed surface material on both faces of each door, as well as all edges, unless otherwiseindicated.

D. Wood louvers: Door manufacturer’s standard solid wood louvers of material to match face veneer,unless otherwise indicated. Size as shown.

E. All Glass doors and adjacent windows are to have opaque markings identifying there location.Markings are to occur in two locations 30" AFF , but not more than 36" and 60" AFF, but not morethan 66"

2.03 SIZES

Height and width, refer to Door Schedule and Details.

2.04 GENERAL FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Transom Panels: Wherever transom panels of wood are shown in same framing systems aswood doors, provide panels which match quality and appearance of associated wood doors. Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces and finish as specified forassociated doors. Attach to frame with concealed fastening system: Window spring bolts - 1697by Stanley or approved equal - two (2) each side of panel. See detail.

B. Openings: Cut and trim opening through doors and panels as shown. Comply with applicablerequirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of doors required.

C. Light Openings: Factory cut openings. Trim openings for non-fire-rated doors with solid woodmoldings of profile shown.

D. Wood Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

E. Edge Strips: Two-ply hardwood, outer ply to match face veneer. Inner ply tongue and grooved tocore.

F. Finish Preparation: Belt sanded with fine grade sandpaper to receive finishes.

08200 - 3 of 6



2.05 INTERIOR PANEL FLUSH WOOD DOORS

A. All doors shall receive a transparent finish and an opaque finish, refer to door schedule.

B. Solid Core Doors with Transparent and an Opaque Finish:1. Quality: NWMA I.S. -1 premium grade face veneers of plain sliced RED OAK. Book match

(match color and grain) at veneer joints, unless otherwise indicated. Provide exposed edgesand other exposed solid wood components of same species as face veneers.

C. Core Construction: [Particleboard, ANSI/208.1, 1-LD-2 Solid core.

D. Fire-Rated Core Doors:1. Faces and AWI Grade: Provide faces and grade to match non-rated doors in same area of

building, unless otherwise indicated plain sliced red oak.2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction as required to provide fire-

resistance rating indicated.3. All fire-rated doors shall exhibit Factory Mutual or Underwriters Laboratory rating label on

hinge edge.

E. Doors - General: Flush wood doors faced with NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS (0.048 inch (1.21mm))thick high pressure plastic laminate:1. Total Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44mm).2. Facing selection: High pressure plastic laminate selected from manufacturer’s standard line of

solids, patterns or wood grains.3. Edge Banding: Matching facing laminate.

F. Non-Fire Rated Solid Core Doors1. AWI Type PC-HDPL-5 and conforming to WWDA I.S 1-A:

a. Particleboard Core - average 30 pcf (480 kg/cu m) density core, complying with ANSIA208.1 Grade LD-1.

2. Stiles and Rails: Structural composite lumber:a. Stile and Top and Bottom Rail Widths - 1-3/8 inches (35mm) before trimming.

3. Adhesive: National Casein CL1809HVJ.4. Provide factory cutouts for lights and black wood stops.

G. 20-Minute Fire Doors:1. Fire Rating: ITS (Warnock Hersey) 20-minute label.2. AWI Type PC-HDPl-5 FD1/3 and conforming to WWDA I.S 1-A.

a. Particleboard Core - Average 30 pcf (480 kg/cu m) density core complying with ANSIA208.1 Grade LD-1.

3. Stiles and Rails: Structural composite lumber.a. Stile and Top and Bottom Rail Widths - 1-3/8 inches (35MM) before trimming.

4. Adhesive: Type 1 waterproof HB. Fuller XR2859.5. Provide factory cutouts for lights. Stops are specified in separate section.

H. Fire Doors Rated Over 20 Minutes:1. Fire Rating:

a. ITS (Warlock Heresy) 45-minute label.b. ITS (Warlock Heresy) 60-minute label.c. ITS (Warlock Heresy) 90-minute label.d. ITS (Warlock Heresy) label in rating specified on drawings.

08200 - 4 of 6



2. A.I. Type FD-HDL-5:a. Core: Non-asbestos mineral composition.b. Cross-banding: 1/10 inch (2.5mm) thick 3-ply wood cross-banding.

3. Stiles and Rails: Fire retardant treated structural composite lumber.a. Stiles, 1-3/8 inches (35MM) before trimming.b. Rails:

1. Top” width.2. Bottom 2" width.

4. Adhesive: Type 1 waterproof HB. Fuller XR2859.5. Provide factory cutouts for lights. Stops are specified in separate section.

I. Edge Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated edge construction for improvedscrew-holding capability and split resistance over edges composed of a single layer of treadlumber. Exposed edge material shall match face veneer.

J. Lock Blocks: Provide lock blocks at all interior wood doors.

K. Shop Priming:4. Before delivery of doors to project site, shop-prime as follows:

a. Transparent Finish: Prime doors shown or scheduled for transparent finish with stain (ifrequired) and other required pretreatments and first coat of finish as specified in Division9 "Painting" sections of these specifications.

L. Shop Finish:5. Prefinish wood doors at factory of finish shop.6. Comply with recommendations of A.I. for factory finishing of doors, including final sanding

immediately before application of finishing materials.7. Provide finishes as shown or scheduled and as specified in Division 9 "Painting" sections of

these specifications.

M. Prefitting and Preparation for Hardware:8. Prefit and premachine wood doors at factory.9. Comply with tolerance requirements of A.I. for prefitting. Machine doors for hardware

requiring cutting of doors. Comply with final hardware schedules and door frame shopdrawings and with hardware templates and other essential information required to ensureproper fit of doors and hardware.

10. Take accurate field measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensionsand alignment before proceeding with machining in factory.

N. Astragal: Shall be provided on inactive or less active leaf in all double door situations. Astragalshall be decorative profiled wood trim to match species and finish of door.


3.01 INSPECTION

Installer must examine door frames and verify that frames are correct type and have beeninstalled as required for proper hanging of corresponding doors and notify Contractor in writing ofconditions detrimental to proper and timely installation of wood doors. Do not proceed withinstallation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

08200 - 5 of 6



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging.

B. Hardware: For installation see Division 8 "Finish Hardware" section of these specifications.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions andas shown.

D. Install fire-rate doors in corresponding fire-rated frames in accordance with requirements of NFPANo.80.

E. Job Fit Doors: Align doors to frame for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge andmachine for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.1. Bevel non-rated doors 1/8" in 2" at lock and hinge edges.2. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8" in 2" in lock edge.

F. Prefit Doors: Fit to frames and machine for hardware to whatever extent not previously worked atfactory as required for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge.

G. Clearance: 1. For not-rated doors provide clearances of 1/8" at jambs and heads; 1/8" at meeting stiles for

pairs of doors; and ½" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Wherethreshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4" clearance from bottom of door to top ofthreshold.

2. For fire-rated doors, provide clearances complying with NFPA 80.

H. Shop-Finished Doors: Restore finish on edges of shop-finished doors before installation, if fittingor matching is require at the job site.

3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely, as directed byArchitect.

B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation, as directed by Architect.

C. Protection and Completed Work: Advise Contractor of proper procedures required for protectionof installed wood doors from damage or deterioration until acceptance of work.


08200 - 6 of 6


ARCH. JOB # 214041 SECTION 08305 - ACCESS DOOR

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL


1.02 SCOPE

Furnish all labor, material, etc. necessary to complete work shown on drawings or specified hereinin connection with access doors, including but not limited to access doors.

PART II - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS DOOR

A. Model: WB (for non-rated walls, FD for rated walls), 22" x 30" (or as indicated on plans) asmanufactured by J.L. Industries, with concealed spring hinge, screwdriver activated CAM. Frame:16 gauge steel with a paintable 1" flange; Door: 2" thick, insulated 20 gauge steel with continuoushinge.

B. Model: TM for bathtub plumbing access, 12" x 12" (or as indicated on plans) as manufactured byJ.L. Industries, with concealed spring hinge, screwdriver activated CAM. Frame: 16 gauge steelwith a paintable 1" flange; Door: 16 gauge steel with continuous hinge.

C. Model: Exterior roof, 24" x 24"Model XPA (or as indicated on plans) as manufactured by J.L.Industries, with concealed hinge, screwdriver activated CAM. Frame: 16 gauge steel with apaintable 1" flange; Door: 16 gauge steel with continuous hinge insulated.

D. Finish: Gray backed enamel prime coat.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Furnish each access door assembly manufactured as a complete unit with all parts ready forinstallation.

B. Fabricate units of continuous welded steel construction, welds ground smooth and flush withadjacent surfaces.

PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

Verify that openings are correctly dimensioned to receive clean.

3.02 INSTALLATION

Install per manufacturer's recommendations.

08305 - 1 of 2


ARCH. JOB # 214041 SECTION 08305 - ACCESS DOOR


A. Adjust latching (locking) mechanism to operate smoothly.

B. Leave work area clean and free of debris.

C. Remove and replace panels or frames which are bowed or warped.


08305 - 2 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 08360 - OVERHEAD DOORS

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL


1.02 SCOPE

Furnish all labor and materials necessary for a complete installation of overhead doors.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with General Conditions.

B. Submit manufacturer's product data, and installation instructions.

1.04 GUARANTEE

Period of five (5) years on workmanship and material.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Continuous foamed-in place polyurethane insulated steel sectional upward-acting doors shallbe:1. 591 Thermacore Series insulated door as manufactured by Overhead Door

Corporation or approved equal.2. Sections shall be roll formed galvanized sheet steel no less than .016" thick

embossed with a textured pattern. Sections shall be manufactured by a continuousfoamed in place polyurethane lamination process resulting in a metal/foam/metalsandwich of homogenous polyurethane insulation. Sections shall have nominalthickness of 1-5/8" and shall incorporate a thermal break to prevent heat or coldconductivity.

3. End stiles shall be 16 ga. formed steel.4. Insulation shall be 1-5/8" nominal foamed in place polyurethane providing insulation

factors of 14.59 R value and .069 U value.5. Tracks shall be 3" galvanized steel. Vertical tracks shall be mounted on continuous

angle. Horizontal tracks shall be sized and reinforced according to door size andweight.

6. Hinges and fixtures shall be galvanized steel. Full floating ball bearing rollers shallhave hardened steel races for long cycle life. Special heavy duty springs made ofhigh tensile wire shall have a minimum spring life of 10,000 cycles.

7. Weatherseals between sections shall be patented tube seals fitted inside every jointto prevent air infiltration. Bottom weatherseal shall be a PVC bulb type stripdesigned to conform and seal at the floor surface.

8. Finish shall be baked on polyester. Special color as selected by Architect.

08360 - 1 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 08360 - OVERHEAD DOORS

9. Lock shall be pin tumbler single unit mechanism.a. Overhead doors shall have a manual operation override in case of electrical

failure.b. Operational Safety Edge: Each door shall be provided with an electric

safety edge. Upon contact with any obstruction, the edge material shallcompress the contact strips, activating the door switch which stops orreverses the door direction.

c. Glazing: All doors shall be glazed with thermal windows consisting of two(2) sheets of 1/8" thick double strength acrylic.


3.01 INSTALLATION

Install overhead doors and associated equipment and hardware in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.


08360 - 2 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 08400 - ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL


1.02 SCOPE

A. Furnish labor and materials required for the installation of aluminum entrances shown on thedrawings and specified herein. Interior door frame and borrowed lights at entry are included.

B. Glass and Glazing - Section 08810.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with General Conditions

B. Sample of aluminum finish. 1.04 MANUFACTURER

This specification is based on products manufactured by Kawneer Company. A manufacturerconsidered equal to Kawneer is Vistawall.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Doors and frames to be fabricated of aluminum extrusions AA-6063-T5 aluminum alloy with#40 Dark Bronze and #29 Black Finish.

B. All finish hardware for doors shall be included. Butt hinges (heavy duty), three (3) butt hingesper door, 1/2" high aluminum mill finish thresholds, panic devices LCN 4040 super smootheesurface closers, and sealair weatherstripping system are included in this section. Doors andframes shall be adequately reinforced to receive all hardware. Medium Style - Series 350(Kawneer) with Dor-O-Matic 1690 concealed vertical rod panic device. Provide architecturalclassic CO-9 pull.

C. Aluminum frames shall be Kawneer Trifab 451T series or Trifab 450 series.

D. Provide accessory aluminum sheet material to match, where detailed in proximity of frames.

E. All Glass doors and adjacent windows ar to have opaque markings identifying their location. Markings are to occur in two locations 30"AFF, but not more than 36" and 60"AFF, but notmore than 66".

2.02 DOORS

A. All doors shall have mortised tension rod, mortised and reinforced corner construction.

B. Doors shall be completely and continuously weatherstripped at heads and jambs. C. Doors shall have extruded aluminum snap-in glass with vinyl insert for puttyless glazing.

08400 - 1 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 08400 - ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS


3.01 INSTALLATION OF ALUMINUM ENTRANCES

A. General: Aluminum surfaces in contact with masonry concrete, wood or steel shall beprotected from contact by use of neoprene gaskets or a coat of bituminous paint to preventgalvanic or corrosive action. All dimensions, elevations and slopes shall be checked toinsure proper fit and weatherstripping construction.

B. Install frame members in accordance with manufacturer's approved shop drawings, andinstallation instructions. All material is to be accurately cut, fitted and secured in place.

C. Install sheet aluminum laminated/cemented to rigid substrate as detailed.

3.02 CLEANING

Clean aluminum surfaces after installation exercising care to avoid damage to finish. Remove excessgrease and sealant components, dirt and other substances.


08400 - 2 of 2

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS, AND GLASS ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 08462 - AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATION (SLIDING DOORS)

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL


1.02 SCOPE

A. Furnish labor and materials required for the installation, automatic door operators, whereindicated on drawings and specified herein.

B. Electrical connections under Division 16.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with General Conditions PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

The sliding panels shall be operated automatically by Magic-slide. Dura-glide Series. All electricoperators as manufactured by Stanley Door Operating Equipment, Division of Stanley Works,Farmington, CT. The solid state operator control unit junction box for connection of 115V electricalservice and the operator assembly containing linear activator, drive motor and limit switches shall befactory installed and totally self-contained in the transom bar of the entrance frame. Operator drivemechanism shall permit doors to slide manually with power off. Each sliding panel shall be fitted witha power disconnect switch to cut power to the operator when the breakaway panel is swung open.

2.02 CONTROL SWITCH

Operation of the doors shall be controlled by a rotary selector switch installed in the stile of the fixedsidelite, 5'-8" above the finished floor. The selector switch shall have four (4) positions clearlyidentified as "OFF", "HOLD-OPEN", "AUTOMATIC" and "ONE WAY".

2.03 ACTUATING CONTROLS

A. Actuating controls shall be Kawneer "Multiscan" presence sensors installed in protectivealuminum housings mounted on the vertical stiles of fixed sidelite frame and breakawaysidelite panel as required to serve traffic approaching the doorway from "One direction only".

B. Each sensor shall be capable of detecting a stationary or moving object 24" high (measuredfrom the floor), 10" wide and 6" deep within an area approximately as wide as the dooropening by five feet in depth. Each entrance equipped with "Magic-Scan" controls shall befitted with a door holding device emitting a beam of infrared light into a retro-reflector locatedacross the doorway on a horizontal line approximately 24" above the finished floor andparallel to but not more than 1-1/2" from the sliding panel. The holding device shall preventan open door from closing when the light beam is blocked. 1. Actuating controls shall be Stanley C-8 momentary contact push plate switch

mounted at a height suitable for hand operation and equipped with a time delay relayhaving adjustable settings to keep the door open from 3 to 30 seconds after theactuating signal has been removed.

2. Actuating controls shall be Stanley CU-8E explosion proof push plate switchequipped with a time delay relay having adjustable settings to keep the door openfrom 3 to 30 seconds after the actuating signal has been removed. Switch shall belisted with Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. for atmospheres containing gases orvapors equivalent in hazard to Hydrogen.

08462 - 1 of 2

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS, AND GLASS ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 08462 - AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATION (SLIDING DOORS)

3. Actuating controls shall be wall mounted three-way toggle switches to alternatelyopen or close the door by switch operation from either side of the doorway.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Entrance frame and panels, and actuating controls shall be installed in accordance withentrance manufacturer's recommendations. Operator shall be factory installed in the frametransom bar. Following the installation of electrical wiring, this contractor shall be responsiblefor having final adjustments made to operator and controls to attain normal operation of eachSLIDEMATIC-SE entrance unit.

B. Reuse three (3) existing automatic door assemblies.

3.02 WARRANTY

The entire door control and operator system shall carry an unconditional one (1) year warranty on allparts and labor.


08462 - 2 of 2

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS, AND GLASS ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS – WOJAN

08520 - 1 of 6

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

The drawings, Instructions to Bidders, Form of Proposal, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 are included herein and govern work under this section.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all necessary materials, labor, and equipment for the complete installation of aluminum

windows for this project as shown on the drawings and herein specified.

B. Furnish and install any supplementary or miscellaneous items, devices or material incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation, although such work might not be specifically indicated.

1.03 RELATED WORK (As Required)


A. General

1. Provide AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05 notice of product certification in full accordance with the following. a. Aluminum Projected Window to be Wojan Series M-85 (insulated glass).

2. Test sequence is optional except air infiltration test shall precede water resistance test and uniform load structural test shall be performed at the end of sequence.

B. Test Units 1. Perform all tests as listed below in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-

05.

C. Test Procedures 1. Air Infiltration Test – Lab Test (If required).

a. With window glazed, sash closed and locked, mounted vertically, test in accordance with ASTM E283-91 at a static pressure of 6.24 psf (50 mph). Air infiltration shall not exceed maximum 0.16 cfm per lineal foot crack of window assembly (or 0.06 cfm per square foot of window assembly area).

2. Water Resistance Test – Lab Test (If Required). a. With window glazed, sash closed and locked, mounted vertically, test in

accordance with ASTM E283-93 at the static pressure of 10.50 psf. There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage as defined in ASTM E547-93.

3. Uniform Load Test – Design Wind Load Test a. With window glazed, sash closed and locked, mounted vertically in accordance

with ASTM E330-90 b. There shall be no glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners or hardware

parts, or damage to make window inoperable when tested at a design load of positive and negative 70 psf.

4. Uniform Load Structural Test – Overload Lab Test a. With window glazed, sash closed and locked, mounted vertically in accordance

with ASTM E330-90. b. When tested positive and negative 105 psf, there shall no glass breakage,

permanent damage to fasteners or hardware parts, damage to make window inoperable, or permanent deformation of any main frame or ventilator section in excess of 0.4% of its unsupported span.

5. Field Test – AAMA Procedure 502-90 (optional) a. Prior to beginning project, install a sample of each type window with all

necessary receptors, clips and perimeter caulking. Do not install interior trim until testing is final.


08520 - 2 of 6

b. Perform air infiltration and water infiltration resistance test on all samples in

accordance with AAMA Field Test Procedure 502-90. Record all data and furnish written reports to the Architect, owner and manufacturer

1.05 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry B. Section 07920 – Sealants

1.06 REFERENCES

A. AAMA – American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05, “Standards/Specification for windows, doors, and unit

skylights”. 2. AAMA 502-90, “Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Windows and Sliding Glass

Doors”. 3. AAMA 2603-02, “Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures

for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels”. 4. AAMA 2604-02, “Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures

for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels”. 5. AAMA 2605-02, “Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures

for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels”. 6. AAMA 611-98, “Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum”. 7. AAMA 701-92 and 702-92 - “ Combined Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstripping and

Voluntary Specification for Replacement Fenestration Weatherseals”. 8. AAMA 802.3-92, “Voluntary Specifications for Ductile Back-Bedding Compound”. 9. AAMA 803.3-92, “Voluntary Specification for Narrow-Joint Seam Sealant”. 10. AAMA 804.1-92, “Voluntary Specification for Ductile Back Bedding Glazing Tapes”. 11. AAMA 805.2-92, “Voluntary Specification for Bonding-Type Back-Bedding Compound”. 12. AAMA 806.3-92, “Voluntary Specification for Bonding-Type Back-Bedding Glazing Tapes”. 13. AAMA 807.1-92, “Voluntary Specification for Oil-Extended Cured Rubber Back-Bedding

Glazing Tapes”. 14. AAMA 808.3-92, “ Voluntary Specification for Exterior Perimeter Sealing Compound”. 15. AAMA 809.2-92, “Voluntary Specification for Non-Drying Sealant”. 16. AAMA 902.9, “Voluntary Specifications for Sash Balances”. 17. AAMA 1503.1-88, “Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance of Windows, Doors and

Glazed Wall Sections”. 18. AAMA CW-10-82, “Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site”.

B. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials 1. ASTM C 1036-91, “Standard Specification for Flat Glass”. 2. ASTM C 1048-92, “Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass – Kind HS, Kind FT

Coated and Uncoated Glass”. 3. ASTM E 90-90, “Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions”. 4. ASTM E 283-91, “Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls and Doors”. 5. ASTM E 330-90, “Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference”. 6. ASTM E 331-93, “Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain

Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference”. 7. ASTM E 547-86, “Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain

Walls and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential”. 8. ASTM E 774-92, “Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units”.


08520 - 3 of 6

1.07 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. AAMA designation: FW-AW70 (Fixed).

B. Windows: 2.75” frame depth; extruded aluminum with integral structural polyurethane thermal break in frame and sash members; equal-leg frame integral (nailing fin optional); finish factory-applied; frames and sash factory-assembled.

C. Configuration: fixed.

D. Glazing: Factory-glazed with 1” insulating glass


A. Conformance to AP-HC70, AP-AW90 (Project-In Hopper); FW-HC70, FW-AW70 (Fixed) specifications in AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05 when tests are performed on the minimum test size set forth therein.

B. Design Pressure Rating per AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05, AP-HC70, AP-AW90 (Project-In Hopper); FW-HC70, FW-AW70 (Fixed), at the prescribed test size. (Manufacturer to provide test results on request).

C. Air Infiltration: per ASTM E283 at test pressure of 1.57 and 6.24 psf. (Manufacturer to provide test

results on request).

D. Forced Entry Resistance: Shall meet the requirements for ASTM E588 Grade Level 10.

E. Water Penetration per ASTM E 547 at test pressure of 10.5 psf.

F. Structural Performance per ASTM E330 at test pressure of + 105.0 psf.

1.09 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: The window manufacturer shall submit elevations, floor plans or window location chart; typical window elevations; full size details of composite members, hardware and components not in manufacturer’s data; glazing details for factory-glazed units, and complete anchorage and installation details for the architect’s approval.

B. Product data: manufacturer’s specifications, test reports from an AAMA-accredited laboratory, and standard details verifying conformance with specifications.

C. Samples: one sample of specified finish for aluminum and other samples as requested by the

architect.


A. Submit for pre-bid qualification approval ten days prior to the bid opening:

1. One sample window representing the window being bid with color being the only exception.

2. Valid test reports from an AAMA-accredited laboratory-confirming conformance to Paragraph 1.07 test results.

B. Submit bids based only on pre-qualified “equal” as confirmed in a pre-bid written addendum. C. Furnish written documentation that the windows for the project conform to AAMA/WDMA/CSA

101/I.S.2/A440-05.


08520 - 4 of 6

D. Furnish visible, permanent IGCC certification labels for the CBA rating level on dual-seal double insulating glass units.

E. Manufacturer’s warranties

1. Windows: warrant for one year against defects in material or workmanship under normal use.

2. Sealed insulated glass (IGU): warrant seal for ten years against obstruction of vision resulting from failure of the hermetic seal, excluding that caused by breakage or abuse. Warrant units containing muntin bars and/or capillary tubes for three years, and laminated glass for five years.

3. Limited warranty on aluminum finishes to meet AAMA specifications. (AAMA 2605 - 15 year limited, and AAMA 2604 - 10 year limited) warrant against chipping, peeling cracking, blistering, fading or chalking. (AAMA 2603 - 5 year limited) warrant against chipping, peeling, cracking or blistering.


A. Handle windows and accessories in accordance with AAMA CW-10.

B. Protect the windows from the elements, construction activities and other hazards until project completion.


2.01 ACCEPTABLE WINDOW MANUFACTURERS

A. Windows shall be the “M-85 Series” as manufactured by Wojan Window and Door Corporation, Coldwater, Michigan. The “M-85 Series” is an Aluminum Projected Window with thermally improved frame and sash. The specifications and materials for the “M-85 Series” are as follows:

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Windows and Components

1. Aluminum shall be of proper alloy for commercial window construction. All extruded sections shall be of 6063-T5 aluminum alloy.

2. Main frame and sash members shall be a nominal thickness as required by AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05. Mainframe shall be 2.75” in depth.

B. Hardware

1. Hardware such as locking handles, cases, keepers, latches, fasteners, etc. shall be made from material that is corrosion resistant as well as compatible with aluminum and must have proven its strength and suitability for use by being installed on test units referenced in this specification.

C. Thermal Break

1. Main frames and sash members are to be extruded aluminum with a structural thermal barrier of high-density low thermal conductivity polyurethane, poured and debridged,

Azo-Brader technology.

D. Weatherstripping 1. Materials – Only high quality materials proven to be capable of meeting the environmental

exposure and performance requirements shall be used in weather-strip applications. When the following materials are used, they should meet the specifications indicated.

2. Pile weather-strip shall conform to AAMA 701-92. 3. Weather-strip of closed cell elastomer shall meet ASTM C 509 or AAMA 702-92 4. Weather-strip of dense elastomer shall meet ASTM C 864-93 or AAMA 702-92.


08520 - 5 of 6

E. Screens 1. Screen frame shall be of hollow aluminum extrusions. Finish shall match the main frames

and sash. 2. Insect screening shall be fiberglass or aluminum wire secured with a vinyl spline.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. General 1. Fabricate and shop assembled frame and sash members into complete windows under

responsibility of one manufacturer. 2. No bolts, screws or fastenings to bridge thermal barriers or impair independent frame

movement. 3. Fabricate to allow for thermal movement of materials when subjected to a temperature

differential from –30 degrees F to +180degrees F.

B. Frame: Mainframe shall be a mechanically joined construction. Corner joints should be “seam sealed” with a quality grade of sealant meeting the requirements of AAMA 803.3. The sash shall be assembled with a corner key at each corner. All screws at joints of mainframe shall be secured into integral screw ports.

C. Sash: tubular sash rails with mitered corners that are fastened together with an aluminum corner key; corners are factory-sealed with sealant conforming to AAMA 800-92.

2.04 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIAL

A. Construction 1. Insulating glass units shall be 1” overall thickness with two panes of DS or 3/16” glass,

separated by an air space for insulation. Air space: aluminum spacer with corner keys and desiccant. Perimeter sealant: polyurethane.

2. All insulating glass units shall meet the requirements of the ASTM E 774 specification, Class A.

B. Fixed sash

1. The fixed lite shall be factory glazed with a pre-shimmed butyl tape on the exterior and a wrap around neoprene glazing wedge on the interior. Glazing stops are removable aluminum.

2. Tint: clear or tinted – verify tint color with architrect. 3. Type: Low-E, tinted, obscure, tempered, laminated, and spandrel. 4. Coating: none/pyrolytic low-E on #3 surface.

C. Performance

1. Seal durability: conformance to ASTM E 774-88; visible permanent IGCC certification label for CBA rating level.

2. Annealed glass lites: conformance to ASTM C 1036-91 3. Tempered glass lites: conformance to ASTM C 1048-91

2.05 FINISH

A. Application: on clean extrusions free from significant surface blemishes or scratches on exposed surfaces visible when the installed window’s operating sash is closed.

B. Coatings shall meet the requirements of AAMA 2603-02 for Pigmented Organic Coating on Extruded Aluminum, AAMA 2604-02 for High Performance Organic Coatings, AAMA 2605-02 for Superior Performing Organic Coatings; and AAMA 611-98 for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.

C. Color: Standard colors available are Bronze - electrostatically-applied baked-on polyester meet or

exdeed AAMA 2603. Bronze (70% Kynar®) - high performance fluoropolymer meet or exceed

Bronze Anodized (anodic coatings) meet or exceed AAMA 611.


08520 - 6 of 6


3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that openings are within tolerance, plumb, level, clean, and provide a solid anchoring

surface, and are in accordance with approved shop drawings.

B. Correct defective openings as required before installation.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install windows using only skilled mechanics with experience in this trade, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and approved shop drawings.

B. Provide required support and securely fasten frames. Units shall be installed plumb, level and

square without twist or bow.

C. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at assembly perimeter to maintain continuity of the thermal barrier.

D. A non-hardening sealant compatible with aluminum shall be provided by the installer and applied

in sufficient quantity at joints and intersections to provide a weathertight seal between the window and surrounding construction. Wipe off excess and leave exposed sealant surfaces clean and smooth.

E. Remove and legally dispose of existing windows and other materials generated by the installation

of the new windows.

3.03 FIELD TESTING (VERIFY OPTION PRIOR TO BIDDING)

A. Conduct on-site tests of installed units in conformance with AAMA 502-90 for air and water infiltration with representatives from the window manufacturer, contractor and owner or architect present.

B. Select test units as directed by the owner’s or architect’s representative.

C. Conduct tests with an AAMA-accredited laboratory provided by the owner, architect or contractor.

3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust frames, sash and hardware after installation, as necessary, to ensure smooth and watertight operation.

B. Leave windows clean and free of labels and dirt.


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 8 – DOORS & WINDOWS ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 08700 – FINISH HARDWARE

SECTION 08700 -1

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes furnishing and installation of door hardware for doors specified in

“Hardware Sets” and required by actual conditions. Including screws, bolts, expansion shields, electrified door hardware, and other devices for proper application of hardware.

B. Where items of hardware are not specified and are required for intended service, such omission, error or other discrepancy shall be submitted to Architect fourteen calendar days prior to bid date for clarification by addendum.

C. Products supplied but not installed under this Section:

1. Hardware for aluminum doors will be furnished under this Section, but installed under Division 08 Openings

2. Final replacement of cylinder cores to be installed by Owner. 3. Hold open wall magnets.

D. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. E. Related Divisions:

1. Division 08 Openings 2. Division 26 Electrical 3. Division 28 Fire Detection and Alarm

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute/Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI): 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 Butts & Hinges (2006) 2. ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Bored & Preassembled Locks & Latches (2011) 3. ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Exit Devices (2008) 4. ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Door Controls – Closers (2008) 5. ANSI/BHMA A156.5 Cylinders and Input Devices for Locks (2010) 6. ANSI/BHMA A156.6 Architectural Door Trim (2010) 7. ANSI/BHMA A156.7 Template Hinge Dimensions (2009) 8. ANSI/BHMA A156.8 Door Controls – Overhead Stops and Holders (2010) 9. ANSI/BHMA A156.12 Interconnected Locks & Latches (2005) 10. ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Mortise Locks & Latches (2005) 11. ANSI/BHMA A156.14 Sliding & Folding Door Hardware (2007) 12. ANSI/BHMA A156.16 Auxiliary Hardware (2008) 13. ANSI/BHMA A156.17 Self Closing Hinges & Pivots (2010) 14. ANSI/BHMA A156.18 Materials & Finishes (2006) 15. ANSI/BHMA A156.21 Thresholds (2009) 16. ANSI/BHMA A156.22 Door Gasketing Systems (2012) 17. ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Continuous Hinges (2006) 18. ANSI/BHMA A156.28 Keying Systems (2007) 19. ANSI/BHMA A156.36 Auxiliary Locks (2010) 20. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames

(2006) 21. ANSI/BHMA A156.115W Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel

Frames (2006)


SECTION 08700 -2

B. International Code Council/American National Standards Institute (ICC/ANSI)/ADA: 1. ICC/ANSI A117.1 Standards for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 2009 2. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire Test of Door Assemblies 2. UL 1784 Air Leakage Test of Door Assemblies 3. UL/ULC Listed

D. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI):

1. DHI Publication – Keying Systems and Nomenclature (1989) 2. DHI Publication – Abbreviations and Symbols 3. DHI Publication – Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware 4. DHI Publication – Sequence and Format of Hardware Schedule (1996)

E. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA)

1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 2011 2. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protective’s 2010 3. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 2012 4. NFPA 105 Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies 2010

F. Building Codes

1. IBC International Building Code 2012 2. Local Building Code

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Administrative Requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Hardware schedule shall be organized in vertical format illustrated in DHI

Publications Sequence and Formatting for the Hardware Schedule. Include abbreviations and symbols page according to DHI Publications Abbreviations and Symbols. Complete nomenclature of items required for each door opening as indicated.

2. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of hardware.

3. Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), as certified by DHI, who shall affix seal attesting to completeness and correctness, shall review hardware schedule prior to submittal.

C. Submit manufacturer’s catalog sheet on design, grade and function of items listed in

hardware schedule. Identify specific hardware item per sheet, provide index, and cover sheet.

D. Coordination: Distribute door hardware templates to related divisions within fourteen days of receiving approved door hardware submittals.

E. Closeout Submittals: Submit to Owner in a three ringed binder or CD if requested.

1. Warranties. 2. Maintenance and operating manual. 3. Maintenance service agreement.


SECTION 08700 -3

4. Record documents. 5. Copy of approved hardware schedule. 6. Copy of approved keying schedule with bitting list. 7. Door hardware supplier name, phone number and fax number.


A. Hardware supplier shall employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) as certified by DHI and a member of the seal program who shall be available at reasonable times during course of work for Project hardware consultation.

B. Door hardware shall conform to ICC/ANSI A117.1. : Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks and operating devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist.

C. Fire Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Fire Door Inspection: Prior to receiving certificate of occupancy have fire rated doors inspected by an independent certified Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI), as certified by Intertek (ITS), a written report shall be submitted to Owner and Contractor. Doors failing inspection shall be adjusted, replaced or modified to be within appropriate code requirements. Use for buildings under IBC 2009

E. Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke and draft control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

F. Door hardware shall be certified to ANSI/BHMA standards as noted, participate and be listed in BHMA Certified Products Directory.

G. Substitution request: Substitution request shall include the reason for requesting the substitution, clear catalog copy(s) highlighting the proposed product and options, compliance statement, technical data, product warranty and lead time, to show how the proposed product can meet or exceed established levels of design, function and quality. Approval of request is at the discretion of the owner, architect and their designated consultants.

H. Pre-installation Meeting: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “Project Meetings.” 1. Convene meeting seven days before installation. Participants required to attend:

Contractor, installer, material supplier, manufacturer representatives, electrical contractor, security consultant and fire alarm consultant.

2. Include in conference decisions regarding proper installation methods and procedures for receiving and handling hardware.

3. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware, inspect, and discuss electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, installer’s personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.


SECTION 08700 -4

I. Within fourteen days of receipt of approved door hardware submittals contact Owner with representative from hardware supplier to establish a keying conference. Verify keyway, visual key identification, number of master keys and keys per lock. Provide keying system per Owners instructions.

J. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in performing installation of this Section and shall

have five years minimum documented experience.

K. Hardware listed in 3.07- Hardware Schedule is intended to establish a type and grade.


A. Provide a clean, dry and secure room for hardware delivered to Project but not yet installed.

B. Furnish hardware with each unit marked and numbered in accordance with approved finish hardware schedule. Include door and item number for each type of hardware.

C. Pack each item complete with necessary parts and fasteners in manufacturer’s original packaging.

D. Deliver permanent keys, cores and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to Owner shall be established at “Keying Conference.”

E. Waste Management and Disposal: Separate waste materials for reuse or recycling in accordance with Division 1.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Owner may have under provisions of the Contract Documents and

shall be an addition and run concurrent with other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract documents.

B. Special Warranty: Warranties specified in this article shall not deprive Owner of other

rights. Contractor, hardware supplier, and hardware installer shall be responsible for servicing hardware and keying related problems. 1. Ten years for manual door closers. 2. Five years for mortise, auxiliary and bored locks. 3. Five years for exit devices. 4. One years for electromechanical door hardware.

C. Products judged defective during warranty period shall be replaced or repaired in accordance with manufacturer’s warranty at no cost to Owner. There is no warranty against defects due to improper installation, abuse and failure to exercise normal maintenance.

D. Maintenance Tool and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner’s continued adjustment, maintenance, removal and replacement of door hardware.


SECTION 08700 -5

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 HINGES

A. Hinges shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty.

B. Standards: Products to be certified and listed by the following: 1. Butts and Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 2. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI/BHMA A156.7 3. Self-Closing Hinges: ANSI/BHMA 156.17

C. Butt Hinges: 1. Hinge weight and size unless otherwise indicated in hardware sets:

a. Doors up to 36” wide and up to 1-3/4” thick provide hinges with a minimum thickness of .134” and a minimum of 4-1/2” in height.

b. Doors from 36” wide up to 42” wide and up to 1-3/4” thick provide hinges with a minimum thickness of .145” and a minimum of 4-1/2”” in height.

c. Width of hinge is to be minimum required to clear surrounding trim.

2. Base material unless otherwise indicated in hardware sets: a. Interior Doors: Steel material. b. Fire Rated Doors: Steel or 304 Stainless Steel materials. c. Stainless Steel ball bearing hinges shall have stainless steel ball bearings. Steel

ball bearings are unacceptable.

3. Quantity of hinges per door unless otherwise stated in hardware sets: a. Doors up to 60”in height provide 2 hinges. b. Doors 60” up to 90” in height provide 3 hinges.

4. Hinge design and options unless otherwise indicated in hardware sets:

a. Hinges are to be of a square corner five-knuckle design, flat button tips and have ball bearings unless otherwise indicated in hardware sets.

b. Out-swinging exterior and out-swinging access controlled doors shall have non-removable pins (NRP) to prevent removal of pin while door is in closed position.

c. When full width of opening is required, use hinges that are designed to swing door completely from opening when door is opened to 95 degrees.

d. Provide mortar boxes for frames that require any electrically modified hinges if not an integral part of frame.

e. When shims are necessary to correct frame or door irregularities, provide metal shims only.

5. Acceptable Manufactures: Standard Weight Heavy Weight a. Hager Companies BB1279 BB1168 b. Bommer BB5000 BB5004 c. McKinney TA2714 T4A3786

2.02 CONTINUOUS HINGES

A. Continuous hinges shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty.


SECTION 08700 -6

B. Standards: Products to be certified and listed by the following: Continuous Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1

C. Continuous Geared Hinges: 1. Determine model number by door and frame application, door thickness, frequency of

use, and fire rating requirements according to manufacturer’s recommendations. a. Length of hinge shall be 1” less door height unless otherwise stated in hardware

sets.

D. Material and Design: 1. Base material: Anodized aluminum manufactured from 6063-T6 material, unexposed

working metal surfaces shall be coated with TFE dry lubricant 2. Bearings:

a. Vertical loads shall be carried on Lubriloy RL bearings for non Fire Rated doors. b. Continuous hinges shall have a minimum spacing between bearings of 2-9/16”.

Typical door from 80” to 84” in height to have a minimum of 32 bearings. 3. Options:

a. When full width of opening is required, use hinges that are designed to swing door completely from opening when door is opened to 95 degrees.

b. Fire rated hinges shall carry UL certification, up to and including 90-minute applications for wood doors and up to 3-hour applications for metal doors.

E. Acceptable Manufactures:

Heavy Duty 1. Hager Companies 780-224HD 2. Bommer FM120HD 3. Zero 914A

2.03 FLUSH BOLTS AND COORDINATORS

A. Flushbolts shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty.

B. Standards: Manufacturer to be listed by the following: Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.16

C. Labeled openings: Provide automatic or constant latching flush bolts per hardware schedule for inactive leaf of pairs of doors. Provide dust proof strikes for bottom bolt.

D. Non-Labeled openings: Provide two flush bolts for inactive leaf of pairs of doors per

hardware schedule. Top bolt shall not be more than 78” centerline from floor. Provide dust proof strike for bottom bolt.

E. Acceptable Manufactures: Manual Flush Bolt Auto Flush Bolt Dust Proof Strike 1. Hager Companies 282D 292D 280X 2. Rockwood 555 1942 570 3. Trimco 3917 3815 3911

F. Coordinators: Provide for labeled pairs of doors with automatic flush bolts or with vertical rod exit device with a mortise-locking device per hardware schedule. Provide filler piece to extend full width of stop on frame. Provide mounting brackets for closers and special preparation for latches where applicable.


SECTION 08700 -7

G. Acceptable Manufactures: Coordinator Bracket Bracket for stops greater than 2-1/4” 1. Hager Companies 297 297M 297N 2. Rockwood 1600 1601AB 1601C 3. Trimco 3094 3095 3096

2.04 LOCKS AND LATCHES (PUBLIC AREAS)

A. Locks and latches shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty.

B. Standards: Product to be certified and listed by following: 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Series 4000 Certified to Grade 1. 2. ANSI/BHMA A250.13 Certified for a minimum design load of 1150lbf (100psf) for

single out swinging doors measuring 36” in width and 84” in height and a minimum design load of 1150lbf (70psf) for out swinging single doors measuring 48” in width and 84” in height.

3. UL/cUL Labeled and listed for functions up to 3 hours for single doors up to 48” in width and up to 96” in height.

4. UL10C/UBC 7-2 Positive Pressure Rated. 5. ICC/ANSI A117.1.

C. Lock and latch function numbers and descriptions of manufactures series as listed in hardware sets.

D. Material and Design: 1. Lock and Latch chassis to be Zinc dichromate for corrosion resistance. 2. Keyed functions to be of a freewheeling design to help resists against vandalism. 3. Non-handed, field reversible. 4. Thru-bolt mounting with no exposed screws. 5. Levers shall be Zinc cast and plated to match finish designation in hardware sets. 6. Roses shall be of wrought Brass or Stainless Steel material.

E. Latch and Strike: 1. Stainless Steel latch bolt with minimum of ½” throw and deadlocking for keyed and

exterior functions. Provide ¾” latchbolt for pairs of fire rated doors where required by door manufacture. Standard backset to be 2-3/4” and faceplate shall be adjustable to accommodate a square edge door or a standard 1/8” beveled edge door.

2. Strike is to fit a standard ANSI A115 prep measuring 1-1/4” x 4-7/8” with proper lip length to protect surrounding trim.

F. Acceptable Manufactures:

1. Hager Companies: 3400 Series. 2. Schlage: ND Series. 3. Best: 93K series

2.05 LOCKS AND LATCHES (GUEST ROOM RESTROOMS)


B. Standards: Product to be certified and listed by following: 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Series 4000 Certified to Grade 2.


SECTION 08700 -8

2. ANSI/BHMA A250.13 Certified for a minimum design load of 860lbf (80psf) for single out swinging doors measuring 36” in width and 84” in height and a minimum design load of 860lbf (50psf) for out swinging single doors measuring 48” in width and 84” in height.

3. UL/cUL Labeled and listed for functions up to 3 hours for single doors up to 48” in width and up to 96” in height.

4. UL10C/UBC 7-2 Positive Pressure Rated. 5. ICC/ANSI A117.1.

C. Lock and latch function numbers and descriptions of manufactures series as listed in

hardware sets.

D. Material and Design: 1. Lock and Latch chassis to be Zinc dichromate for corrosion resistance. 2. Keyed functions to be of a freewheeling design to help resists against vandalism. 3. Non-handed, field reversible. 4. Thru-bolt mounting with no exposed screws. 5. Levers shall be Zinc cast and plated to match finish designation in hardware sets. 6. Roses shall be of wrought Brass or Stainless Steel material.

E. Latch and Strike:

1. Stainless Steel latch bolt with minimum of ½” throw and deadlocking for keyed and exterior functions. Standard backset to be 2-3/4” and faceplate shall be adjustable to accommodate a square edge door or a standard 1/8” beveled edge door.



1. Hager Companies: 3500 Series 2. Schlage: AL Series 3. Best 73K series

2.06 LOCKS AND LATCHES (EXTERIOR)


B. Standards: Product to be certified and listed by following: 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Series 1000 Certified to Grade 1 for Operational and Security. 2. UL/cUL Labeled and listed up to 3 hours for single doors up to 48” in width and up to

96” in height. 3. UL10C/UBC 7-2 Positive Pressure Rated. 4. ICC/ANSI A117.1.


hardware sets.

D. Material and Design: 1. Lock cases from fully wrapped, 12 gauge steel, Zinc dichromate for corrosion

resistance. 2. Non-handed, field reversible without opening lock case. 3. Break away spindles to prevent unlocking during forced entry or vandalism. 4. Levers are to be Zinc cast and plated to match finish designation in hardware sets. 5. Sectional Roses are to be of solid Brass or Stainless Steel material and have a

minimum diameter of 2-7/16”.


SECTION 08700 -9

6. Armor fronts are to be self-adjusting to accommodate a square edge door or a standard 1/8” beveled edge door.

E. Latch and Strike:

1. Stainless Steel latch bolt with minimum of ¾” throw and deadlocking for keyed and exterior functions.


3. Deadbolts to be 1-3/4” total length with a minimum of a 1” throw and ¾” internal engagement when fully extended and made of Stainless Steel material.


1. Hager Companies: 3800 Series. 2. Best: 45 series 3. Sargent: 8200 Series

2.07 LOCKS AND LATCHES (PUBLIC AREA SINGLE STALL RESTROOMS)


B. Standards: Product to be certified and listed by following: 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.12 Series 5000 Certified to Grade 2. 2. UL/cUL Labeled and listed for functions up to 3 hours for single doors up to 48” in

width and up to 96” in height. 3. UL10C/UBC 7-2 Positive Pressure Rated. 4. ICC/ANSI A117.1.


hardware sets.

D. Material and Design: 1. Lock and Latch chassis to be Zinc dichromate for corrosion resistance. 2. Keyed functions to be of a freewheeling design to help resists against vandalism. 3. Non-handed, field reversible. 4. Levers are to be Zinc cast and plated to match finish designation in hardware sets. 5. Roses are to be of solid Brass or Stainless Steel material and have a minimum

diameter of 2-1/2”.

E. Acceptable Manufactures: 1. Hager Companies: 3700 Series. 2. Schlage: S200 Series. 3. Sargent: 7500 Series

2.08 DEADBOLTS (GUEST ROOMS)

A. Deadbolts shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and

consideration of warranty. B. Standards: Manufacturer to be certified by the following:

1. Auxiliary Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.5 Grade 1 2. UL/cUL listed for functions up to 3 hours for “A” label 3. UL10C/UBC 7-2 Positive Pressure Rated

C. Deadbolt function numbers and descriptions of manufactures series as listed in hardware

sets.


SECTION 08700 -10

D. Material and Design:

1. Latch bolt 1”throw, material brass with concealed harden steel roller to prevent sawing or cutting.

2. Non-handed, field reversible.

E. Acceptable Manufactures: 1. Hager Companies: 3200 Series 2. Best: 72T Series 3. Schlage: BC100 Series. 4. Sargent: 470 Series

2.09 EXIT DEVICES

A. Shall be touch pad type, finish to match balance of door hardware. Exit Devices shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty.

B. Standards: Manufacturer to be certified and or listed by the following: 1. BHMA Certified ANSI A156.3 Grade 1 2. UL/cUL Listed for up to 3 hours for “A” labeled doors 3. UL10C/UBC 7-2 Positive Pressure Rated 4. UL10B Neutral Pressure Rated 5. UL 305Listed for Panic Hardware

C. Material and Design:

1. Touch pad shall extend a minimum of one half-door width. Freewheeling lever design shall match design of locks levers. Exit device to mount flush with door. 2. Latchbolts:

a. Rim device – ¾” throw, Pullman type with automatic dead-latching, stainless steel b. Surface vertical rod device – Top ½” throw, Pullman type with automatic dead-latching, stainless steel. Bottom ½” throw, Pullman type, held retracted during door swing, stainless steel.

3. Fasteners: Wood screws, machine screws and thru-bolts.

D. Lock and Latch Functions: Function numbers and descriptions of manufacturer’s series and lever styles indicated in door hardware sets.


1. Hager Companies: 4500 Series 2. Von Duprin: 99 Series 3. Sargent: 80 Series

2.10 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. Cylinders shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration

of warranty.

B. Standards: Manufacturer shall meet the following: 1. Auxiliary Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.5 2. DHI Handbook “Keying systems and nomenclature” (1989)

C. Cylinders:

1. Manufacturer’s standard tumbler type, seven-pin IC core


SECTION 08700 -11

2. Shall be furnished with cams/tailpieces as required for locking device that is being furnished for project.

D. Keying: 1. Copy of Owners approved keying schedule shall be submitted to Owner and

Architect with documentation of which keying conference was held and Owners sign-off.

2. Provide a bitting list to Owner of combinations as established, and expand to twenty five percent for future use or as directed by Owner.

3. Keys to be shipped to Owner’s representative, individually tag per keying conference. 4. Provide visual key control identification on keys. 5. Provide interchangeable cores with construction cores as required per hardware

schedule.

E. Acceptable manufactures: 1. Hager Companies 2. Schlage 3. Sargent

2.11 PUSH/PULL PLATES AND BARS

A. Push and pull plates shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and

consideration of warranty. B. Standards: Manufacturer to be certified by the following:

1. Architectural Door Trim: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 2. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).

C. Push Pull Bar Sets: 3/4” round bar stock with 2 ½” clearances from face of door. Center to center size should be door width less 1 stile width.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Hager Companies: 3L/13L 2. Rockwood 3. Trimco

2.12 CLOSERS (EXTERIOR)

A. Shall be product of one manufacturer. Unless otherwise indicated on hardware schedule, comply with manufacturer’s recommendation for size of closer, depending on width of door, frequency of use, atmospheric pressure, ADAAG requirements, and fire rating.

B. Standards: Manufacturer to be certified and or listed by the following:

1. BHMA Certified ANSI A156.4 Grade 1 2. ADA Compliant ANSI A117.1 3. UL/cUL Listed up to 3 hours. 4. UL10C Positive Pressure Rated 5. UL10B Neutral Pressure Rated


1. Provide cast iron non-handed bodies with full plastic covers. 2. Closers shall have separate staked adjustable valve screws for latch speed, sweep speed, and backcheck. 3. Provide Tri-Pack arms and brackets for regular arm, top jamb, and parallel arm mounting. 4. One-piece seamless steel spring tube sealed in hydraulic fluid.


SECTION 08700 -12

5. Double heat-treated steel tempered springs. 6. Precision-machined heat-treated steel piston. 7. Triple heat-treated steel spindle. 8. Full rack and pinion operation.

D. Mounting:

1. Out swing doors shall have surface parallel arm mount closers except where noted on hardware schedule.

2. In swing doors shall have surface regular arm mount closers except where noted on hardware schedule.

3. Provide brackets and shoe supports for aluminum doors and frames to mount fifth screw.

4. Furnish drop plates where top rail conditions on door do not allow for mounting of closer and where backside of closer is exposed through glass.

E. Size closers in compliance with requirements for accessibility (ADDAG). Comply with

following maximum opening force requirements. 1. Interior hinged openings: 5.0 lbs. 2. Fire rated and exterior openings shall have minimum opening force allowable by

authority having jurisdiction.

F. Fasteners: Provide self-reaming and self-tapping wood and machine screws and sex nuts and bolts for each closer.

G. Acceptable manufactures: 1. Hager Companies: 5100 Series 2. LCN: 4040 Series 3. Sargent: 281 Series

2.13 CLOSERS (INTERIOR)

A. Shall be product of one manufacturer. Unless otherwise indicated on hardware schedule, comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for size of closer, depending on width of door, frequency of use, atmospheric pressure, ADAAG requirements, and fire rating.

B. Standards: Manufacturer to be certified by the following: 1. BHMA Certified ANSI A156.4 Grade 1 2. ADA Complaint ANSI A117.1 3. UL/cUL Listed up to 3 hours 4. UL10C Positive Pressure Rated 5. UL10B Neutral Pressure Rated


1. Provide aluminum non-handed bodies with full plastic covers. 2. Closer shall have separate staked adjustable valve screws for latch speed, sweep speed, and backcheck. 3. Provide Tri-Pack arms and brackets for regular arm, top jamb, and parallel arm mounting. 4. Double heat-treated steel, tempered springs. 5. Precision machined, heat-treated steel piston. 6. Triple heat-treated steel spindle. 7. Full rack and pinion operation.


SECTION 08700 -13

D. Mounting: 1. Out swing doors shall have surface parallel arm mount closers except where noted

on hardware schedule. 2. In swing doors shall have surface regular arm mount closers except where noted on

hardware schedule. 3. Provide brackets and shoe supports for aluminum doors and frames to mount fifth

screw. 4. Furnish drop plates where top rail conditions on door do not allow for mounting of

closer and where backside of closer is exposed through glass.

E. Size closers in compliance with requirements for accessibility (ADDAG). Comply with following maximum opening force requirements. 1. Interior hinged openings: 5.0 lbs. 2. Fire rated and exterior openings shall have minimum opening force allowable by

authority having jurisdiction.

F. Fasteners: Provide self-drilling and tapping wood screws, machine screws and sex nuts and bolts for each closer.

G. Acceptable manufactures: 1. Hager Companies: 5200 Series 2. Norton 8000 Series 3. Sargent: 1330 Series

2.14 PROTECTIVE TRIM

A. Size of protection plate: Single doors, size two inches less door width (LDW) on push side of door, and one inch less on pull side of door. For pairs of doors, size one inch less door width (LDW) on push side of door, and ½ inch on pull side of door. 1. Kick Plates 8” high or sized to door bottom rail height 2. Mop Plates 4” high.

B. Standards: Manufacturer shall meet requirements for:

1. Architectural Door Trim: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 2. UL

C. Material and Design: 1. 0.050” gage stainless steel 2. Corners shall be square. Polishing lines or dominant direction of surface pattern shall

run across the door width of plate. 3. Bevel top, bottom and sides uniformly leaving no sharp edges. Edges shall be de-

burred. 4. Countersink holes for screws. Screws holes shall be spaced equidistant eight inches

CTC, along a centerline not over ½ inch in from edge around plate. End screws shall be a maximum of 0.53 inch from corners.

D. UL label stamp required on protection plates when top of plate is more than 16 inches

above bottom of door on fire rated openings. Verify door manufactures UL listing for maximum height and width of protection plate to be used.

E. Acceptable Manufactures: 1. Hager Companies: 194S 2. Trimco 3. Burns


SECTION 08700 -14

2.15 STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Wall Stops: Provide door stops wherever necessary to prevent door or hardware from striking an adjacent partition or obstruction. Provide wall stops when possible. Door stops and holders mounted in concrete floor or masonry walls shall have stainless steel machine screws and lead expansion shields.

B. Standards: Manufacturer shall meet requirements for: 1. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.16

C. Acceptable Manufactures: Convex Concave 1. Hager Companies 232W 236W 2. Rockwood 3. Burns

D. Overhead Stops and Holders: Provide overhead stop and holders for doors that open against equipment, casework sidelights and other objects that would make wall stops/holders and floor stops/holders inappropriate. Provide sex bolt attachments for mineral core wood door applications.

E. Standards: Manufacturer shall be certified by the following:

1. Overhead Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8 Grade 1

F. Acceptable Manufactures: Heavy Duty Surface 1. Hager Companies 7000 SRF Series 2. Glynn Johnson 90 Series 3. Sargent 590 Series

2.16 ELECTROMAGNETIC HOLDERS

A. Shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of

warranty.

B. Standards: Manufacturer shall meet requirements for: 1. ANSI 156.15 Grade 1 2. UL/ULC listed 3. California State Fire Marshall listed (CSFM) 4. City of New York MEA approved

C. Material and Design: 1. Provide electromagnetic holders where self-closing fire doors and smoke barrier doors are required to be held open. Electromagnetic holders to be fail safe, when electrical current is interrupted, doors release to close automatically. Holding force shall be 25-40 pounds.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Hager Companies: 380 Series 2. LCN 3. Rixson


SECTION 08700 -15

2.17 DOOR GASKETING AND WEATHERSTRIP

A. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing where indicated on hardware schedule. Provide non-corrosive fasteners for exterior applications. 1. Perimeter gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 2. Meeting stile gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are in

closed position. 3. Door bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold or floor when

door is in closed position. 4. Sound Gasketing: Cutting or notching for stop mounted hardware not permitted. 5. Drip Guard: Apply to exterior face of frame header. Lip length to extend 4” beyond

width of door.

B. Standards: Manufacturer shall meet requirements for: 1. Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems: ANSI/BHMA A156.22 2. Shall be BHMA certified for door sweeps, automatic door bottoms, and adhesive

applied gasketing. (738)

C. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Comply with NFPA 105 listed, labeled, and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control indicated. 1. Provide smoke labeled gasketing on 20 minute rated doors and on smoke rated

doors.

D. Fire-Rated Gasketing: Comply with NFPA 80 listed, labeled, and acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated.

E. Refer to Section 08 1416 Wood Doors for Category A or Category B. Comply with UBC

7-2 and UL10C positive pressure where frame applied intumescent seals are required. Provide Hager # 720 for single and 720 x 724 for a pair of doors.

F. Acceptable Manufactures: 1. Perimeter Gasketing:

Adhesive Applied Stop Applied a. Hager Companies: 738S 881S b. K. N. Crowder c. Reese d. DHSI: 105 (GUEST ROOMS)

2. Meeting Stile Weatherstrip: a. Hager Companies: 802S B b. K. N. Crowder c. Reese:

3. Door Bottom Sweeps: a. Hager Companies: 750S b. K. N. Crowder c. Reese: d. DHSI: CS36 x AMU (GUEST ROOMS)

4. Overhead Drip Guard

a. Hager Companies: 810S b. K. N. Crowder c. Reese:


SECTION 08700 -16

2.18 THRESHOLDS

A. Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical openings in full bed of sealant with lead expansion shields and stainless steel machine screws complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants”. Notched in field to fit frame by hardware installer. Refer to Drawings for special details.

B. Standards: Manufacturer to be certified by the following:

1. Thresholds: ANSI/BHMA A156.21 2. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).

C. Acceptable Manufactures:

1. Hager Companies: 412S/413S 2. K. N. Crowder 3. Reese 4. DHSI: FT-2.75 (GUEST ROOMS)

2.19 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE

A. Sliding Door Hardware: Provide complete sets of rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated.

B. Standards: Manufacturer shall conform to: 1. Sliding Door Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.14 C. Bypassing Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to 150 lbs. D. Barn Door Track: Rated for doors weighing up to 298 lbs. 1. Provide Barn Door Track and hardware for doors. Provide all required hardware.


1. Richelieu: WEBKIT1000159 – Provide Soft Close Hardware at All Barn Doors

2.20 DOOR VIEWER

A. Shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty.

B. Standards: Manufacturer shall conform to: 1. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.16 for L033221 C. Design: 1. Adjustable for use on doors 1-3/8” to 2-1/8” thick doors, 9/16” hole required. 2. One way 200 degree view 3. Tamper resistance with a privacy flap. 4. 90 min. fire rating D. Acceptable Manufactures:

1. Hager Companies 1759 2. Rockwood 3. Trimco


SECTION 08700 -17

2.21 PRIVACY DOOR LATCH (PDL)

B. Shall be of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty.

B. Standards: Manufacturer shall conform to: 1. UL Classification as Fire Door Accessory 2. NFPA 80 2. ICC/ANSI A117.1 C. Design: 1. Allows visitor identification, cannot be used to keep door ajar 2. Does not allow door to be held open D. Acceptable Manufactures:

1. Hager Companies: 227D 2. Pemko PDL

2.22 SILENCERS

A. Where smoke, light, or weather seal are not required, provide three silencers per single door frame, two per double door frame and four per Dutch door frame.

B. Standards: Manufacturer shall meet requirements for: 1. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.16


Hollow Metal Frame 1. Hager Companies: 307D 2. Rockwood: 3. Trimco:

2.23 KEY CABINET

A. Provide key cabinet, surface mounted to wall. B. Key control system:

1. Include two sets of key tags, hooks, labels, and envelopes. 2. Contain system in metal cabinet with baked enamel finish. 3. Capacity shall be able to hold actual quantities of keys, plus 25 percent. 4. Provide tools, instruction sheets and accessories required to complete installation.


1. MMF Industries 2. Lund Equipment 3. Telkey Incorporated 4. Key Control

2.24 FINISHES

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if within range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved Samples.


SECTION 08700 -18

B. Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by ANSI/BHMA A156.18 designations in hardware schedule.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware per manufacturer’s instructions and in compliance with: 1. NFPA 80. 2. NFPA 105. 3. ICC/ANSI A117.1. 4. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames 5. ANSI/BHMA A156.115W Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel

Frames 6. DHI Publication – Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware 7. UL10C/UBC7-2 8. Local building code. 9. Approved shop drawings. 10. Approved finish hardware schedule.

B. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates

involved. Set unit level, plumb and true to line location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.


A. Material supplier to schedule final walk through to inspect hardware installation ten business days before final acceptance of Owner. Material supplier shall provide a written report detailing discrepancies of each opening to General Contractor within seven calendar days of walk through.

3.04 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING AND DEMONSTRATING

A. Adjustment: Adjust and check each opening to ensure proper operation of each item of finish hardware. Replace items that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for application at no cost to Owner.

B. Cleaning: Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Clean finished hardware per manufacturer’s instructions after final adjustments has been made. Replace items that cannot be cleaned to manufacturer’s level of finish quality at no cost to Owner.

C. Demonstration: Conduct a training class for building maintenance personnel demonstrating the adjustment, operation of mechanical and electrical hardware. Special tools for finished hardware to be turned over and explained usage at this meeting.


SECTION 08700 -19

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Leave manufacturer’s protective film intact and provide proper protection for all other finish hardware items that do not have protective material from the manufacture until Owner accepts Project as complete.

3.06 HARDWARE SET SCHEDULE

A. Guide: Door hardware items have been placed in sets which are intended to be a guide of design, grade, quality, function, operation, performance, exposure, and like characteristics of door hardware, and may not be complete. Provide door hardware required to make each set complete and operational.

B. Hardware schedule does not reflect handing, backset, method of fastening and like characteristics of door hardware and door operation.

C. Review door hardware sets with door types, frames, sizes and details on drawings. Verify suitability and adaptability of items specified in relation to details and surrounding conditions.

3.07 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

HEADING 1

Door Numbers: 101B, 104A, 104B, 147B Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 1 ea. Continuous Hinge 780-112HD CLR 1 ea. Card Reader Exit Device By owner 1 ea. Cylinder 3900 IC Series US26D 1 ea. IC Core 3969 US26D 1 ea. Closer 5100 PAR HDCS ALM 1 ea. Threshold 413S MIL 1 ea. Door Sweep 750S N MIL 1 set Weatherstripping By aluminum door/frame manufacturer

HEADING 2 Door Numbers: 118 Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 2 ea. Cylinder 3900 IC Series US26D 2 ea. IC Core 3969 US26D Note: Remainder of hardware by aluminum sliding door manufacturer; verify with supplier cylinder type and quantity required.


SECTION 08700 -20

HEADING 3 Door Numbers: 129B Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 2 ea. Continuous Hinge 780-112HD CLR 1 ea. Card Reader CVR Exit Device By owner 1 ea. CVR Exit Device By owner 1 ea. Cylinder 3900 IC Series US26D 1 ea. IC Core 3969 US26D 2 ea. Closer 5100 PAR HDCS ALM 1 ea. Threshold 413S MIL 2 ea. Door Sweep 750S N MIL 1 set Weatherstripping By aluminum door/frame manufacturer

HEADING 4 Door Numbers: 101A, 147A Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 1 ea. Continuous Hinge 780-112HD CLR 1 ea. Dummy Rail Exit Device x Trim By aluminum door manufacturer 1 ea. Closer 5100 PAR HDCS ALM 1 ea. Door Sweep 750S N MIL 1 set Weatherstripping By aluminum door/frame manufacturer

HEADING 5 Door Numbers: 102, 133, 145, 221, 321, 421, 521 Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 1 ea. Continuous Hinge 780-224HD CLR 1 ea. Card Reader Lock Set By owner US26D 1 ea. IC Core 3969 US26D 1 ea. Closer 5200 ALM 1 ea. Wall Stop 232W US32D 1 set Weatherstripping By aluminum door/frame manufacturer

HEADING 6 Door Numbers: 116 Each opening to receive:

ALL HARDWARE BY ALUMINUM SLIDING DOOR MANUFACTURER


SECTION 08700 -21

HEADING 7 Door Numbers: 129A Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 2 ea. Continuous Hinge 780-112HD CLR 2 ea. Dummy Rail Exit Device x Trim By aluminum door manufacturer 2 ea. Closer 5100 PAR HDCS ALM 2 ea. Door Sweep 750S N MIL 1 set Weatherstripping By aluminum door/frame manufacturer

HEADING 8 Door Numbers: 100B, 146B Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 1 ea. Continuous Hinge 780-112HD CLR 1 ea. Rim Exit Device 4501 RIM EO US32D 1 ea. Closer 5100 PAR HDCS ALM 1 ea. Kick Plate 194S US32D 1 ea. Threshold 412S MIL 1 set Weatherstripping 881S N MIL 1 ea. Door Sweep 750S N MIL 1 ea. Rain Guard 810S N + 4” door width MIL

HEADING 9 Door Numbers: 100A, 146A Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 3 ea. Hinges BB1168 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 ea. Passage Set 3410 WTN US26D 1 ea. Closer 5200 ALM 1 ea. Kick Plate 194S US32D 1 ea. Wall Stop 232W US32D 1 set Smoke Seal 738S CHARCOAL

HEADING 10 Door Numbers: 103, 131 Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 3 ea. Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 ea. Storeroom Lock 3480 WTN IC US26D 1 ea. IC Core 3969 US26D 1 ea. Kick Plate 194S US32D 1 ea. Wall Stop 232W US32D 1 set Smoke Seal 738S CHARCOAL


SECTION 08700 -22

HEADING 11 Door Numbers: 104C Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 1 ea. Continuous Hinge 780-112HD CLR 1 ea. Storeroom Lock 3480 WTN IC US26D 1 ea. IC Core 3969 US26D 1 ea. Closer 5200 ALM 1 ea. Kick Plate 194S US32D 1 ea. Wall Stop 232W US32D 3 ea. Silencers 307D GREY

HEADING 12 Door Numbers: 105, 115 Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 3 ea. Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 ea. Card Reader Lock Set By owner US26D 1 ea. IC Core 3969 US26D 1 ea. Closer 5200 ALM 1 ea. Kick Plate 194S US32D 1 ea. Wall Stop 232W US32D 3 ea. Silencers 307D GREY

HEADING 13 Door Numbers: 107, 109 Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 1 ea. Continuous Hinge 780-224HD CLR 1 ea. Storeroom Lock 3480 WTN IC US26D 1 ea. IC Core 3969 US26D 1 ea. Closer 5200 ALM 1 ea. Kick Plate 194S US32D 1 ea. Wall Stop 232W US32D 1 set Smoke Seal 738S CHARCOAL

HEADING 14 Door Numbers: 108, 130, 137D, 137E, 143 Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 3 ea. Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 ea. Classroom Lock 3470 WTN IC US26D 1 ea. IC Core 3969 US26D 1 ea. Overhead Friction 7015 SRF (Mk # 108, 137D, 137E) US32D 1 ea. Wall Stop 232W US32D 3 ea. Silencers 307D GREY


SECTION 08700 -23

HEADING 15

Door Numbers: 110 Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 3 ea. Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 ea. Classroom Lock 3470 WTN IC US26D 1 ea. IC Core 3969 US26D 1 ea. Closer 5200 ALM 1 ea. Overhead Stop 7016 SRF US32D 1 ea. Kick Plate 194S US32D 1 set Smoke Seal 738S CHARCOAL

HEADING 16 Door Numbers: 111, 124, 128, 132 Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 3 ea. Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 ea. Office Lock 3450 WTN IC US26D 1 ea. IC Core 3969 US26D 1 ea. Wall Stop 232W US32D 3 ea. Silencers 307D GREY

HEADING 17 Door Numbers: 112A, 112B Each opening to receive:

ALL HARDWARE BY SLIDING DOOR MANUFACTURER

HEADING 18

Door Numbers: 112C Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 3 ea. Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 ea. Classroom Lock 3470 WTN IC US26D 1 ea. IC Core 3969 US26D 1 ea. Closer 5200 PAR HDCS ALM 1 ea. Kick Plate 194S US32D 3 ea. Silencers 307D GREY


SECTION 08700 -24

HEADING 19 Door Numbers: 113 Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 3 ea. Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 ea. Storeroom Lock 3480 WTN IC US26D 1 ea. IC Core 3969 US26D 1 ea. Wall Stop 232W US32D 3 ea. Silencers 307D GREY

HEADING 20 Door Numbers: 117 Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 3 ea. Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 ea. Storeroom Lock 3480 WTN IC US26D 1 ea. IC Core 3969 US26D 1 ea. Closer 5200 ALM 1 ea. Kick Plate 194S US32D 1 ea. Wall Stop 232W US32D 3 ea. Silencers 307D GREY

HEADING 21 Door Numbers: 119, 123, 125 Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 3 ea. Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 ea. Interconnected Privacy w/Ind. 3796 WTN US26D 1 ea. Closer 5200 ALM 1 ea. Kick Plate 194S US32D 1 ea. Wall Stop 232W US32D 1 set Smoke Seal 738S CHARCOAL

HEADING 22 Door Numbers: 121A Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 6 ea. Hinges BB1168 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 ea. Coordinator 297D x 297M/N USP 1 pr. Automatic Flush Bolts 292D US26D 1 ea. Dust Proof Strike 280X US26D 1 ea. Card Reader Lock Set By owner US26D 2 ea. Closer 5200 ALM 2 ea. Kick Plate 194S US32D 2 ea. Wall Stop 232W US32D 1 set Smoke Seal 738S CHARCOAL 1 ea. Astragal By door manufacturer


SECTION 08700 -25

HEADING 23

Door Numbers: 121B Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 3 ea. Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 ea. Passage Set 3410 WTN US26D 1 ea. Wall Stop 232W US32D 3 ea. Silencers 307D GREY

HEADING 24 Door Numbers: 126, 201, 219, 238, 301, 319, 338, 401, 419, 438, 501, 519, 538 Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 3 ea. Hinges BB1168 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 ea. Card Reader Lock Set By owner US26D 1 ea. Closer 5200 ALM 1 ea. Kick Plate 194S US32D 1 ea. Wall Stop 232W US32D 1 set Smoke Seal 738S CHARCOAL

HEADING 25 Door Numbers: 135 Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 6 ea. Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 pr. Flush Bolts 282D US26D 1 ea. Dust Proof Strike 280X US26D 1 ea. Classroom Lock 3470 WTN IC US26D 1 ea. IC Core 3969 US26D 2 ea. Wall Stop 232W US32D 2 ea. Silencers 307D GREY 1 ea. Astragal By door manufacturer

HEADING 26 Door Numbers: 136 Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 3 ea. Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 ea. Privacy Set 3440 WTN US26D 1 ea. Mop Plate 194S US32D 1 ea. Wall Stop 232W US32D 3 ea. Silencers 307D GREY


SECTION 08700 -26

HEADING 27

Door Numbers: 137A, 137B Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 3 ea. Hinges BB1168 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 ea. Card Reader Exit Device By owner US26D 1 ea. Closer 5200 ALM 1 ea. Kick Plate 194S US32D 1 ea. Wall Stop 232W US32D 1 set Smoke Seal 738S CHARCOAL 2 ea. Door Viewer 1759 US26D

HEADING 28 Door Numbers: 137C Each opening to receive:

ALL HARDWARE BY FOLDING PARTITION MANUFACTURER

HEADING 29 Door Numbers: 200, 236, 300, 336, 400, 436, 500, 536 Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 3 ea. Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 ea. Rim Exit Device 4501 RIM F US32D 1 ea. Lever Trim 45BE WTN US26D 1 ea. Closer 5200 ALM 1 ea. Kick Plate 194S US32D 1 ea. Wall Stop 232W US32D 1 set Smoke Seal 738S CHARCOAL

HEADING 30 Door Numbers: A Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 3 ea. Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 ea. Card Reader Lock Set By Owner US26D 1 ea. Closer 5200 ALM 1 ea. Door Viewer 1759 US26D 1 ea. Safety Latch 227D US26D 1 ea. Wall Stop 232W US32D 1 ea. Threshold FT-2.75 AL 1 ea. Door Bottom CS36 x AMU DARK BROWN 1 ea. Smoke/Sound Seal 105 CHARCOAL Note: Add one additional door viewer at accessible rooms.


SECTION 08700 -27

HEADING 31 Door Numbers: B, G Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 1 ea. Barn Door Track WEBKIT 1000159 US32D 3 ea. Flush Cup Pull KNBC75 US26D Note: Provide Soft Close Hardware On All Barn Door Hardware

HEADING 32 Door Numbers: C Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 1 ea. Hinge BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 2 ea. Spring Hinges 1250 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 ea. Exit Latch 3525 ARC US26D 1 ea. Turn-bolt 3219 US26D 1 ea. Safety Latch 227D US26D 1 ea. Wall Stop 236W US26D 1 ea. Door Bottom CS36 x AMU DARK BROWN 1 ea. Smoke/Sound Seal 105 CHARCOAL

HEADING 33 Door Numbers: D Each opening to receive:

ALL HARDWARE BY MIRRORED SLIDING DOOR MANUFACTURER

HEADING 34 Door Numbers: E, F Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 1 ea. Barn Door Track WEBKIT 1000159 (6’6” Track) US32D 1 pr. Pulls 13L US26D 1 ea. Pull 3L US26D

HEADING 35

Door Numbers: H Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 3 ea. Hinges BB1279 4.5” x 4.5” US26D 1 ea. Privacy Set 3540 WTN US26D 1 ea. Stop 236W US32D 1 ea. Threshold Per Detail 3 ea. Silencers 307D GREY


SECTION 08700 -28

HEADING 36 Door Numbers: Miscellaneous Each opening to receive: Qty. Type Description Finish 30 ea. Construction Cores 3982 – Red 3 ea. Control Keys 2-639-7170

END OF SECTION


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 08810 - GLASS AND GLAZING

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



A. Definitions: "Glass" includes prime glass, processed glass, and fabricated glass products. "Glazing"includes glass installation and materials used to install glass.

B. Included, but not necessarily limited to, are the following:1. Plate glass2. Tempered glass3. Wire glass4. Insulating glass5. Burglar resistant glass6. Plastic glazing7. Laminated glass8. Glazing of windows, doors, transoms, side lights, and all other glazed openings as indicated.

1.03 MANUFACTURERS

A. Prime Glass Manufacturer: One of the following for each type of glass:1. ASG Industries, Inc.2. C-E Glass Division3. Pilkington Glass4. PPG Industries, Inc.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: Furnish duplicate samples, for approval, of the various types of glass specified herein. Samples shall be 12" x 12" and shall include an assembled 12" x 12" insulating glass sample. Samples of other glazing materials shall be submitted in duplicate if requested by Architect.

B. Approved samples shall become the standard for comparison for all installed work.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings and descriptive literature for all products for use. Shopdrawings shall include full scale glazing details of window wall. Shop drawings shall be submitted inaccordance with Division 1.

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS

Pre-installation: Meet with Glazier and other trades affected by glass installation, prior to beginning ofinstallation. Do not perform work under adverse weather or job conditions. Install liquid sealants whentemperatures are within lower or middle third of temperature range by manufacturer.

08810 - 1 of 6



1.06 PRODUCT WARRANTY

Warranty on Hermetic Seals: Provide insulating glass manufacturer's written warranty, agreeing to, withinspecified period, furnish FOB project site, replacement units for insulating glass units which havedefective hermetic seals (excluding that due to glass breakage); defined to include intrusion of moistureor dirt, internal condensation at temperatures above -20 degrees F (-31 degrees C), deterioration ofinternal glass coatings, and other visual evidence of seal failure or performance failure, providedmanufacturer's instructions for handling, installation, protection and maintenance have been adhered toduring warranty period.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Polished Plate Glass: All polished plate glass shall be 1/4" thick, unless otherwise indicated, glazingquality. Equal quality float glass will be acceptable. "U" factor for glass shall be 1.13 or better.

B. Tempered Plate Glass:1. Tempered plate glass shall be heat tempered of sizes indicated. Thickness shall be 1/4" unless

otherwise indicated or unless a thicker glass is recommended by manufacturer for size ofopening in which used.

2. Tempered glass shall be "Tuf-Flex" as manufactured by Pilkington Co. or equal product of PPGIndustries or ASG Industries. Glass shall conform to federal Specification DD-G-1403B. "U"factor for glass shall be 1.13 or better.

3. Provide one way tempered glass at door type G.

C. Wire Glass: (Not to be Used within two feet of any operable door)1. All wire glass shall be a safety glass minimum of 1/4" thick at its thinnest point, reinforced with

cadmium plated or chromium dipped welded wire, minimum 0.25 ASW gauge. All wire glassshall be as approved by Underwriter's Laboratory, Inc.

2. Clear wire glass shall be polished "Baroque" Mississippi Glass as manufactured by CE Glass orequal product of ASG Industries or Pilkington Glass Co. And laminated

D. Laminated Glass: Provide laminated glass with Saflex inter-layer as manufactured by SolutiaCompany or approved equal, glass shall be 1/4" thick.

E. Burglar Resistive Glass: Provide burglar resistive laminated glass with Saflex interlayer asmanufactured by Solutia Company or approved equal. Glass shall meet UL 912 and shall be 9/16"thick. Glass to be tinted green.

F. Plastic Glazing: Provide Lexan sheet or approved equal, 1/4" thickness.

G. Insulating Glass:1. Insulating glass shall be DualPane as manufactured by DualPane, Inc. or equal product of

Pilkington Glass or PPG Industries.2. Where indicated "1" insulating glass", provide the following: Units shall consist of 1/4" tinted

polished plate glass outer pane, a 1/2" air space and a 1/4" tinted polished plate glass inner pane.

08810 - 2 of 6



3. Where indicated "1" laminated insulating glass", provide the following: Units shall consist of 1/4"laminated tinted outer pane, a 1/2" air space and a 1/4" tinted [color] laminated glass inner pane.

4. Panes shall be hermetically sealed with a metal to glass bond and separated with a dehydratedair space.

5. Separators between glass panes shall be hot dipped galvanized with welded corners. Glass tobe metal shall be sealed with a primary seal of polyisobutalene and two-part polysulphide for thesecondary seal. Unit shall be bonded with a continuous metal band and sealed with a two-partpolysulphide between metal and glass. "U" factor for glass assembly shall be 0.69 or better. Shading coefficient shall be at least 0.54. Separator to be black finish.

2.02 GLAZING TYPES

A. Doors: Refer to door types on drawing for locations of all glazing types. All doors to have laminatedglass.

B. Windows: 1. All exterior windows shall be glazed with 1" insulating glass units unless indicated otherwise

under the respective sections for metal, aluminum, PVC or wood windows.2. Provide 1" laminated insulating glass units in all exterior windows and sidelights located adjacent

to each side of exterior doors.3. Provide 1" laminated insulating glass units in all exterior windows where glass is within 18" of the

floor.4. Provide 1/4" laminated glass in all interior window openings, sidelites adjacent to doors and/or

within 18" of the floor.5. Lobby:

a. Provide 1" laminated insulating glass units along entire length of lower pane area.b. Provide 1" insulating glass units above lower pane area and at clerestory windows.

6. Vestibule and Entrance Lobby:a. Provide 1" laminated insulating glass at windows located to each side of vestibule in entrance

lobby and at 50% of vestibule extending to exterior of building.b. Provide 1/4" clear laminated glass at 50% of vestibule extending to interior side of building.

7. Service Lobby: Provide 1" insulating glass.

All Glass doors and adjacent windows ar to have opaque markings identifying their location. Markingsare to occur in two locations 30"AFF, but not more than 36" and 60"AFF, but not more than 66".

2.03 GLAZING SEALANTS AND COMPONENTS

A. General: Provide color of exposed sealant/compound as selected by Architect from manufacturer'sstandard colors. Comply with manufacturer's recommendation for selection of hardness, dependingupon the location of each application, conditions at the time of installation, and performance require-ments as indicated. Select materials, and variations or modifications, carefully for compatibility withsurfaces contacted in the installation.

B. Silicone Glazing Compound: Silicone sealant 1200 as manufactured by general Electric Companyor equal product of Dow Corning shall be used to set all joints as shown on drawings. Color shall beas selected by Architect from stock.

08810 - 3 of 6



C. Elastomeric Glazing Compound:1. All channel glazing shall be with a one part, 100% liquid polymer, acrylic base sealant. Product

shall be "Mono-Lasto-Metric" as manufactured by the Tremco Manufacturing Company or equalproduct of Pecora, Inc. or Toch Brothers, and shall be used in strict conformance withmanufacturer's instructions. Color as selected by Architect.

2. Primers shall be used if and as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Elastomeric Glazing Compound:1. Elastic glazing compound shall be oleo-resinous, knife consistency sealant, for use on non-

porous surfaces under compression. It shall be non-corrosive on metal.2. Color shall be approximately the same as adjacent surfaces and shall be approved by Architect.3. This compound shall be as manufactured by Tremco Manufacturing Company, Pecora

Incorporated, or Presstite Division of Martin Marietta Corp.4. All elastic glazing compound shall be formulated from selected processed oils and pigments

which will remain plastic and resilient over a long period of time. Comply with latest revision ofthe Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

B. Glazing Tape:1. Glazing tape shall be a polyisobutylene-butyl base with an integral shim equal to Tremco 440

Shimmed Tape, as manufactured by the Tremco Manufacturing Company. Tape and elastomericsealing compound shall be by same manufacturer.

2. Verify thickness of tape required by glazing a sample window on the job. Sample shall beinspected and approved by Architect before proceeding with glazing work.

C. Spacer Shims and Setting Blocks:1. All spacer shims shall be of 40 to 50 durometer neoprene.2. All setting blocks shall be lead or 80 durometer neoprene as recommended by glass manufac-

turer based on weight of glass.3. All spacer shims and setting blocks shall be at least 1/4" thick by 3" long by width of recess.


3.01 STANDARDS AND PERFORMANCE

A. Watertight and airtight installation of each glass product is required, except as otherwise shown. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind loading, impact loading (foroperating sash and doors), without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants orgaskets to remain watertight and air tight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in thework.

B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation, and subsequent operation of glazedcomponents of the work. During installation, discard units with significant edge damage or otherimperfections.

C. Labels: Deliver all glass on the job carefully paper packed and protected, each pane bearingmanufacturer's identifying label, giving name, quality and grade of glass.

08810 - 4 of 6



D. Glazing channel dimensions as shown are intended to provide for necessary bite on glass, minimumedge clearance, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as requiredby job conditions at time of installation.

E. Comply with combined recommendations and technical reports by manufacturers of glass andglazing products as used in each glazing channel, and with recommendations of Flat Glass MarketingAssociation "Glazing Manual", except where more stringent requirements are indicated.

F. Install insulating glass units to comply with recommendations by Sealed Insulating GlassManufacturers Association, except as otherwise specifically indicated or recommended by glass andsealant manufacturers.

3.02 PREPARATION FOR GLAZING

A. Clean glazing channel and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are used.

B. Remove all coatings in glazing rebate area with a solvent that will not etch or mar surface of metal,recommended by manufacturer of glazing compound.

C. All surfaces to be glazed shall be free of moisture.

D. Avoid glazing at temperature below 40 degrees F. If glazing schedule requires work during coldperiods, warm the glass and rabbeted surfaces to avoid condensation.

E. Remove manufacturer's instruction tags from windows.

F. Cover metal surfaces liable to be damaged by smear of sealing compound with tape. Remove tapeafter glazing.

G. Prepare all glazing compounds in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Compoundsshall not be cut or thinned.

H. Apply primer or sealant to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3.03 GLAZING

A. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located 1/4th of glass width from each corner. Setblocks in thin course of heel-bead compound, if any.

B. Provide spacers inside and out, of proper size and spacing, for glass sizes larger than 50 unitedinches, except where gaskets or preshimmed tapes are used for glazing. Provide 1/8" minimum biteof spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thicknessslightly less than final compresses thickness of tape.

C. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics.

D. Voids and Filler Rods: Prevent exudation of sealant or compound by reforming voids or installing fillerrods in channel at heel of jamb and head (do not leave voids in sill channels), except as otherwiseindicated and depending on light size, thickness and type of glass, and complying with manufacturer'srecommendations.

08810 - 5 of 6



E. Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealantto glass and channel surfaces.

F. Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial "wash" away fromglass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to eliminate dirtand moisture pockets.

G. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from glass and stops or frames promptly after installation,and eliminate stains and discolorations.

H. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket onopposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not "walk" out when installationis subjected to movement. Anchor gasket to stop with matching ribs, or by proven adhesives,including embedment of gasket tail in cured heel bead.

I. Gasket Glazing: Miter cut and bond ends together at corners where gaskets are used for channelglazing, so that gaskets will no pull away from corners and result in voids or leaks in glazing system.

3.04 CURE, PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by use of crossed streamersattached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass. Removenonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. Cure sealants for high early strength and durability.

B. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other waysduring construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.

C. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than four (4) days prior to date scheduled forinspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Comply withglass product manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning.


08810 - 6 of 6

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 09255 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD & GYPSUM SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



Furnish all labor and materials to complete gypsum drywall and gypsum sheathing work indicatedon drawings and specified herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIAL

A. Materials shall be as manufactured by the U.S. Gypsum Co., National Gypsum Co., orGeorgia Pacific Co. Materials herein are those of U.S. Gypsum Co., unless otherwisestated, and shall be deemed as minimum requirements, and in no way bar equal orsuperior products of other approved manufacturers.

B. Interior Materials:1. Gypsum wallboard shall conform to Federal Spec. SS-L-30C and ASTM C36,

tapered edge. Wallboard shall be applied in thickness indicated, ½" unlessotherwise noted, in 48" widths to avoid a minimum of joints.

2. Gypsum wallboard applied to ceilings shall be 5/8" thick sag-resistant gypsumceiling board, and shall comply with ASTM C36 or as noted on drawings.

3. Gypsum wallboard applied to interior surface or exterior walls shall be ½" “DenseArmor Interior Guard” as manufactured by Georgia Pacific Company or approvedequal, and shall comply with ASTM C36 and ASTM C1177.

4. Type “X” fire shield wallboard, 5/8" thick. Provide where indicated (fire resistive). Wallboard shall bear UL label.

5. Moisture & Mold Resistant , regular type except where Type X fire-resistant typeis indicated or required to meet UL assembly types. [5/8] inch. Sheetrock®brand Mold Tough™ Firecode (Type X), Firecode® C Core or ULTRACODE®Core gypsum panels by USG

6. Shaftwall, ASTM C442, Type SLX., 1 inch thick . Equivalent to SHEETROCK®gypsum liner panels by USGa. Face boards Type X. 5/8 [½] inch, unless otherwise indicated. Equivalent

to SHEETROCK® FIRECODE® C Core and FIRECODE® Core gypsum panelsby USG.

7. Fasteners shall be 2" Type S bugle head screws.8. Metal trim for standard wallboard shall be formed from galvanized steel not lighter

than 26 gauge. Sizes to correspond to wallboard thickness.a. Casing beads for exposed edges of all wallboard and where wallboard

meets dissimilar material shall be HO.200-A metal trim.9. Joint tape shall be High Tensil, roughened surface paper fiber tape with taping

joint compound as embedding material and topping or all purpose joint compoundas finish material. Apply variable coats with sanding between coats as specifiedfor the respective product used.

09255 - 1 of 3



10. Furring members shall be narrow flange Z-furring members, hot dippedgalvanized, and be of size to accommodate rigid insulation indicated on drawings. Metal furring channels and 1-1/2" cold rolled channels for suspended ceilingareas. Hang wire shall be 8 gauge, spaced at 4'-0" o.c. and tie wire 18 gauge.

11. Ceramic tile backer for floor and wall tile shall be 5/8" Durorock (ANSI, A-1 18.9-1992 and ANSI 108.11.)

C. Exterior Material: Exterior sheathing shall be “Fiberock” with “Aqua Tough” asmanufactured by US Gypsum Company or approved equal, and applied in strictaccordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Exposed surfacesshall be free from broken corners and surface defects. All exposed edges shall befinished smooth with casing beat “J” trim.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install framing, wallboard panels, and accessories in accordance with currentmanufacturer’s directions.

B. Use power drill attachment to assure firm, positive anchorage of drywall to studs.

C. Place panels horizontally at right angles to framing position all ends over framingmembers in vertical application. Use maximum practical lengths to minimize end jointson opposite sides of partitions on different studs. Drive fasteners in field of panel first,working toward ends and edges. Space perimeter fasteners at least 3/8" from ends andedges. Drive heads home with head slightly below surface of panels to provide a uniformdimple; avoid breaking face paper.

D. Joint and Fastener Concealment: Embedding compound shall be applied in a thin,uniform layer to all joints and corners. Reinforcing tape shall be applied immediately,centering over the joint and seated into the compound. A skim coat shall immediatelyfollow tape embedment. After this treatment has dried, a second coat of embeddingcompound shall be applied to tape. Treated areas shall be sanded to eliminate ridgesand high points. A coat of finishing compound shall be applied to joints. Feather out coatof finishing compound. After thoroughly dry, sand to smooth surface taking precautionsnot to scuff the paper from adjacent wallboard.

E. Z-Furring members in exterior walls shall be positioned vertically 24" on center and besecured to walls with suitable concrete fasteners in accordance with fastenermanufacturer’s specifications. At interior corners, second channel shall be spaced nomore than 12" from corner. At exterior corners, wide flange of Z-Furring member shall besecured to wall with short flange extended beyond corner. Starting from this short flange,install a minimum 3" strip of insulation.

09255 - 2 of 3



3.02 MISCELLANEOUS

A. Provide double studs at door jambs and openings as shown on drawings.

B. Reinforce all partitions to support superimposed loads, such as toilet room accessories.

C. Where indicated on drawings, provide sound insulation blankets in walls. 3" Thermafiberinsulation blankets shall run full height of partition and to underside of deck.

- END OF SECTION -

09255 - 3 of 3


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 09310 - TILE - CERAMIC/QUARRY

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



A. Definitions: Tile includes ceramic surfacing units made from clay or other ceramic materials. Thetypes of work of this section include:1. Ceramic floor tiles2. Quarry tile, floors and base3. Exterior ceramic tile4. Ceramic wall tiles5. Special shapes as required or indicated6. Setting beds as required or indicated7. Grout and setting materials8. Shower waterproofing membranes9. Cutting and setting materials10. Cutting, drilling and fitting tile work in connection with work by others.


A. Manufacturer: Provide products by one of the following for each type of tile:1. Ceramic Tile:

a. American Olean Tile Co.b. DalTile c. Quality Marble and Tile Distributors, Inc.

2. Quarry Tile:a. American Olean Tile Co.b. Hanley Co.c. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

3. Ceramic Wall Tile:a. American Olean Tile Co.

B. Manufacturer: Provide products for each type of waterproofing, grout admixtures and ceramic tilesealants by:1. Laticrete International, Inc.

C. Tile Manufacturing Standard: TCA 137.1 Furnish tile complying with standard grade requirementsunless indicated otherwise.

D. Proprietary Materials: Handle, store, mix and apply proprietary setting and grouting materials incompliance with manufacturer's instructions.1. Provide materials obtained from one source for each type and color of tile, grout, and setting

materials.

09310 - 1 of 7



1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions for materialsrequired, except bulk materials. Include certifications and other data to show compliance with thesespecifications.

1.05 SAMPLES

A. Submit samples in duplicate for approval showing quality, color, texture, and finish for each kind oftile. Submit 12" x 12" panels of floor tile patterns and all custom patterns.

B. No work for which such samples are required shall proceed until samples have been approved by theArchitect, and all tile work shall be executed in strict accordance with the approved samples.

1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF TILE AND MATERIALS

A. All tile shall be graded, sealed and delivered in accordance with Department of Commerce SimplifiedPractice Recommendation R-61, latest issue, and this specification.

B. Deliver all tile in unbroken packages bearing the brand and manufacturer's name and store them onplatforms, properly covered to protect them from moisture.

C. Keep all containers in which tiles are packed, dry until tiles are removed. Take every precaution tosee that tiles are not stained.

D. At completion of work, turn over to the Owner (for signed receipt) a minimum of one (1) box ofunbroken tile of each color of tile used in the work for future patching purposes.

E. All grout and admixtures shall be stored in original unbroken or unopened containers, protected frommoisture. Grout and admixtures shall be stored to achieve ambient room temperature before using. Extreme high and low temperature differentials shall be avoided.

1.07 CERTIFICATION

The Contractor shall furnish a master grade certificate bearing the certification mark of the Tile Councilof America, signed by the manufacturer of the tile and the tile applicator. Certificates shall state the typeand quality of the material furnished.

1.08 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

Furnish in triplicate (3) copies of instructions for the care, cleaning, and maintenance of ceramic andquarry tile.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 KINDS OF TILE

A. All tile shall be of domestic manufacture, standard grade, meeting the requirements of recommendedstandard specification for Ceramic Tile TCA 137.1-1980. All packages shall bear quality triangle ofTile Council of America, Inc. All tile shall have a min. coefficient of friction of .6.

09310 - 2 of 7



B. All ceramic floor tile shall be dust pressed, vitreous, unglazed, ceramic porcelain. Edges shall beplain or cushion as selected.

C. All base shall be coved and match floor and/or wall tile.

D. Quarry tile shall be standard grade, scored back, ground four sides (Quarry naturals).

E. Include all special shapes required such as bullnose, cove, trim, caps, etc. These shall be of thesame kind and finish as adjacent tile.

2.02 COLOR, PATTERNS, SIZES OF TILE

A. All colors of tile shall be as selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.

B. Ceramic floor and wall tile shall be 12" x 12".

C. Quarry tile shall be 8" x 8", ½" thick with slip-resistant surface.

D. Color shall be as selected by the Architect from standard color list. No premium price colors will beselected. Quarry tile base shall be coved 5" high with bullnose top.

2.03 TERMINAL EDGES

Furnish and install bullnose tiles at terminal edges of ceramic tile.

2.04 MORTAR AND GROUTING MATERIALS

A. All cement shall be Portland cement conforming to ASTM Specifications C150, latest edition, Type1.

B. All hydrated lime shall comply with ASTM Specifications C206 and C207, Type S.

C. All sand shall be clean, sharp, durable, fine natural aggregate, free from salt, loam, clay, soluble saltsorganic impurities, conforming to ASTM C144.1. Sand for floor setting beds shall be well graded, passing #8 sieve, not over 5% passing #100

mesh screen.2. Sand for grout shall pass #30 mesh sieve, not over 5% passing #100 mesh screen.

D. Water shall be clean, free from injurious amount of oil, acid, soluble salts, organic impurities.

E. Dry-set Mortar: Conform with ANSI A118.1, and be prepared under Tile Council Formula. Packageshall bear quality triangle of Tile Council of America, Inc.

F. All grout shall be neat waterproof Portland cement. All colors of grout shall be as selected byArchitect.

G. All materials shall be measured accurately by volume thoroughly mixed and placed within areasonable time after mixing. Do not re-temper.

09310 - 3 of 7



2.05 CERAMIC TILE SHOWER ENCLOSURE

A. Materials:1. Cementitious backer units (Wonder Board): Minimum ½" thick or as shown on drawing details -

ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C1325.2. Cementitious-coated foam backer board (Easy Board).3. Fiber cement underlayment: ASTM C1288.4. 2" wide glass fiber mesh tape (polymer coated-alkali resistant).5. Dry-set mortar: ANSI A118.1.6. Latex-Portland cement mortar: ANSI A118.4.7. Polymer-fortified thin-set: Laticrete 254 Platinum with anitmicrobial product protection - ASI

A118.4 and ANSI A118.118. Grout: ANSI A118.6.9. Grout Enhancer: Laticrete 1776 Grout Enhancer with anitmicrobial product protection10. Thick Bed Mortar / Filler: Laticrete 22611. Mortar Admix: Laticrete 370112. Metal studs: ASTM C645.13. Wall Membrane: 15 lb. roofing felt or 4 mil polyethelene film, moisture resistant, not waterproof.14. Waterproofing Membrane: Laticrete 9235 with anitmicrobial product protection - ANSI A118.10

and ANSI A118.1215. Sealant: Laticrete Latasil with antimicrobial product protection - ASTM C920 and ASTM C79416. Sealant Primer: Laticrete Latasil 9118 primer.17. Threshold: 3" Marble or ceramic threshold transition with maximum rise of ½" to meet ADA

requirements for slope and bevel.


3.01 SETTING METHODS

A. All ceramic tile installation work shall be in accordance with latest recommendations of the TileCouncil of America, Inc. and as indicated on drawings and specified herein. In case of conflict, themore stringent shall apply.

B. Quarry tile and ceramic tile floors and walls shall be applied direct, using dry set mortar (thin setmethod).

C. Coordinate with concrete work for recess required at area of quarry tile.

D. Average thickness of thin-set mortar bed shall be 1/8" and shall not exceed 1/4".

E. Expansion and control joints shall be located in all tile floors where floors adjoin vertical surfaces. Provide intermediate control joint in ceramic and quarry tile floors exceeding 24'0" in any direction,unless otherwise directed by the Architect.

F. Thin Bed Installation over Masonry:1. Provide scratch and leveling coat with laticrete admix on wire lath over concrete block.2. Provide laticrete 4237 latex thinset mortar over leveling coat to set ceramic tiles.3. Follow this procedure for installation of ceramic wall tile in toilet rooms and ceramic accent tile

at exterior walls

09310 - 4 of 7



G. Preparation by Tile Contractor for Tile Shower Enclosure: Surround drain with broken pieces of tileor crushed stone to prevent mortar from blocking weep holes.

H. Preparation by Other Contractors for Tile Shower Enclosure:1. Studs: Install square and plumb.2. Provide a 1/8" spacing at horizontal and vertical joints and corners of cementitious backer units

and fill space solid with dry-set or latex-Portland cement mortar.3. Embed 2" wide glass fiber mesh tape in a skim coat of the same mortar over joints and corners.4. Install floor drain in structural sub-floor level and plumb to heights required to accommodate

finished floor elevations as shown on details.

3.02 STANDARD FOR TILE WORK

A. Except as otherwise specified, all details of tile setting and workmanship shall conform with therequirements of the "2008 Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" of the Tile Council of America, Inc.(or latest revision) and the 2008 ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 Specifications for the Installation of CeramicTile (or latest revision).

B. Shower Enclosure Installation Specifications:1. Cementitious backer units: ANSI A108.11.2. Tile: ANSI A108.5.

3.03 TILE SETTING PROCEDURE

A. A detailed inspection of all surfaces on which tile is to be placed shall be made. A report, in writing,of any defects found as a result of this inspection, shall be made to the Contractor, who shallimmediately remedy such defects before the placing of the tile.

B. All rooms or spaces in which tile floors are being laid, shall be closed to traffic or other work, and keptclosed until the floors are completed and the tile firmly set.

C. No tile shall be set on surfaces where other work is specified or shown to be embedded in the tilework until such work has been installed and approved.

D. Tile work shall be laid out so as to avoid small cuts. All cuts shall be rubbed smooth and even.

E. Replace all tile misfits with properly cut tile.

F. No tile shall be placed or allowed to set in temperatures below 40 degrees F.

G. Provide metal transition strip where tile abuts differing material, unless directed otherwise byArchitect.

3.04 SETTING FLOOR AND WALL TILE

A. Installation of the tile shall comply with standards previously specified and with ANSI 108.5.

B. Clean surface of all dust, deleterious film and non-compatible matter, moisten well with water, allowno free water to remain on surface. Do not saturate.

C. Spread specified setting mortar, screen to true plane at proper height, sloped to drains or level asindicated.

09310 - 5 of 7



D. Do not spread more setting mortar at one time than can be covered during same working period.

E. Lay all sheets to straight edge, maintain uniform joint between sheets. All joints shall align in alldirections.

F. Press sheets of tile into still plastic mortar and beat to true surface, using approved tools.G. Provide expansion joints in locations and as required by recommendations of Tile Council of America,

Inc.

H. Back mounted sheets shall have 75% minimum coverage by mortar on back of each panel whenremoved for inspection.

I. Remove paper before initial set. Avoid excess use of water.

J. All quarry tile shall be damp cured for a minimum of seven (7) days.

K. Requirements for Tile Shower Enclosure:1. Form slope for waterproof membrane with Portland cement mortar at 1/4" per foot slope.2. Slope waterproof membrane to weep holes in drain.3. Turn waterproof membrane up walls a minimum of 3" above shower curb (6" above floor in

showers without curbs).4. Furr studs with 1/4", or thicker, furring strips above the top of the waterproof membrane to allow

the top of the membrane to be flush with the face of the furring strips.

3.05 GROUTING

A. After removal of paper, grout all tile joints. Fill be screening or brushing specified grout until joints arefull, avoiding air traps or voids.

B. Tool all cushion edge joints to depth of cushion.

C. Remove all surplus grout from tile, using diagonal strokes across joints. Check for gaps or air holes,filling same.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after initial set of grout, apply a coat of non-corrosive soap to all wall tile or cover itcompletely with heavy gauge plastic sheets, properly secured and joints well taped.

B. Cover all tile floors with building paper with taped joints. Where necessary to truck over tile floors,General Contractor shall provide planking.

C. Close all rooms to traffic for ten (10) days after grouting tile.

D. Protect all finished work until the Architect authorizes the removal of protection.

09310 - 6 of 7



3.07 CLEANING

A. After grout has set, wash and rinse all tile work with sponge and clean water. Polish with dry cloth.

B. Avoid the use of acid if possible. If absolutely necessary, obtain approval of Architect and use 10%muriatic solution and rinse thoroughly with clean water.

C. All cleaning shall be done in such a manner as not to adversely affect mortar joints and finish of tile.

- END OF SECTION -

09310 - 7 of 7


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 09510 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



A. Extent of each type of acoustical ceiling is shown and scheduled on drawings. Refer to Room FinishSchedule, reflected ceiling plans, and other pertinent details as indicated on drawings.

B. Types of acoustical ceilings specified in this section include the following: Acoustical panel ceilings,exposed suspension.


A. Installer: Firm with not less than three (3) years of successful experience in installation of acousticalceilings similar to requirements for this project and which is acceptable to manufacturer of acousticalunits, as shown by current written statement from manufacturer.

B. All acoustical tile panels specified herein, shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less when testedby an independent testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM E84-70.

C. Manufacturer shall submit substantiating data as evidence of compliance.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each acousticalceiling material required, and for each suspension system, including certified laboratory test reportsand other data as required to show compliance with these specifications. Include manufacturer'srecommendations for cleaning and refinishing acoustical units, including precautions againstmaterials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and acoustical performances.

B. Samples: Set of 12" square samples for each acoustical unit required showing full range of exposedcolor and texture to be expected in completed work. Set of 12" long samples of each exposed runnerand molding.

C. Maintenance Stock: At time of completing installation, deliver stock of maintenance material toOwner. Furnish full size units matching units installed, packaged with protective covering for storage,and identified with appropriate labels. Furnish amount equal to 2.0% of acoustical units and exposedsuspension installed.

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS

Recommendations of the Acoustical Materials Association in their latest bulletin shall apply. Acousticalmaterials shall be installed under temperature and humidity conditions closely approximating those whichwill exist when the building is occupied. They should not be installed when buildings are damp and coldor dry and hot. Plastering, concrete, and flooring shall be completed and then allowed to dry before theinstallation of acoustical tiles. All windows and doors shall be in place and glazed. Heating system shouldbe installed and operating where necessary to maintain proper conditions before, during, and after theacoustical ceiling installation. Concrete should be thoroughly dry.

09510 - 1 of 3



PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 CEILING UNITS - Refer to RCP plans and coordinate with Types below.

A. Type 1, All Public areas of Hotel: Armstrong Fissured, 24" x 24" x 5/8" and 24" x 48" x 5/8" Squarelay-in Medium texture tiles as shown on drawings. NRC range .50 - .60, STC range 35 - 39.

B. Type 2, All Back of House Areas of Hotel: Armstrong Second Look/ Scored Ceiling, Fine fissured 24" x 48" x 3/4" tegular lay-in (9/16" routings create 24" x24" squares). NRC range .50 - .60, STCrange 30 - 34.

2.02 CEILING SUSPENSION MATERIALS

C. Exposed Tee Suspension System:1. System shall include all hangers, wire, carrying tees, cross tees, edge angles, clips, and all other

components to complete installation. Provide proper amount and proper type of "hold down" clipsas required to prevent "uplift" and "shifting" of tiles.

2. Suspension system for type 1 ceiling tile shall be one of the following:a. Rigid Grid Exposed Suspension System as manufactured by Flangeklamp Corp.b. Tab Lock Exposed Suspension System as manufactured by Eastern Products Corp.c. Exposed Tee Grid System as manufactured by Donn Products, Inc.

3. Suspension system for Type 2 ceiling tile shall be Armstrong Narrow 9/16" Suprafine GridSystem.

4. Main tees shall be sufficiently supported to carry load imposed, which shall include weight oflights.

5. Light fixtures in exposed grid suspension system, weighing <10 lb may be supported by thesuspension system provided proper wire supports are added to the suspension system asfollows. A minimum of four (4) hangers per light shall be used and for lights over 4'-0" long, andadditional two (2) hangers for each additional 2'-0" of length shall be used.

6. Diffusers, grilles, fans and other mechanical system related equipment shall be independentlysupported.

7. Main tees and cross tees shall be made of fully zinc coated steel of gauges as previously noted. All connections of main tees, cross tee, perimeter moldings, etc. shall be mechanicallyinterlocked. All work shall be level, square, and at proper height. Provide perimeter moldingswhere ceiling abuts walls or partitions.

8. Hanger wire shall be No. 12 annealed galvanized wire, spaced not to exceed 4" o.c.9. All ceiling suspension shall be supported from floor and roof construction above. Provide all

supplementary framing as required to adequately support the suspended ceiling.


3.01 INSPECTION

Installer must examine conditions under which acoustical ceiling work is to be performed and must notifyContractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditionshave been corrected in manner acceptable to installer.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for inserts, clips, or other supports required to be installed by othertrades for support of acoustical ceilings.

09510 - 2 of 3



B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths atopposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half width units at borders, and comply withreflected ceiling plans wherever possible.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, and to comply withgoverning regulations, fire resistance rating requirements as indicated, and industry standardsapplicable to work.

B. Installation - Lay-In Type:1. Attach to carrying channels, at right angles, the tee bars or exposed grid at spacing determined

by the tile size. Provide additional support to exposed grid carrying tees at recessed lights (lightto bear on tees). Ceiling diffusers to be supported independently by heating contractor. Providetee bar splices as required.

2. Ceiling contractor to coordinate his work with that of electrical and heating contractors to insuresatisfactory installation of lights, diffusers and ceiling and with metal deck installer to assureproper placement of strap hangers. Frame around ceiling diffusers to support ceiling tile asrequired.

3. Furnish and install all accessories and items necessary for proper suspension.4. Acoustical ceiling tile shall be placed in an approved manner as recommended by the

manufacturer.5. Lay out work to avoid small pieces at room perimeters. All damaged ceiling tile shall be replaced

before final acceptance of structure and all acoustical installations shall be made by an acousticalcontractor approved by the manufacturer of the acoustical materials as being thoroughlyexperienced in erection of acoustical materials.

6. Anchorage and fastenings shall be secure and adequate for the use intended.7. Acoustical ceilings shall be erected in a rigid and secure manner, level with tight joints, free from

wave, buckles, and sags. All acoustical tile shall be properly supported.8. Cut and fit all acoustical units neatly and accurately against beams and walls and around pipes,

electrical outlets, and equipment so that flanges will cover units where cut.9. All joints shall be kept in proper alignment and parallel to walls, unless otherwise indicated.10. All finished ceiling areas shall be flat with not tile or edges of the tile protruding or recessed in

relation to adjacent tile.11. Metal edge channels, fillers, moldings, etc. shall be in as long pieces as possible and joints shall

be neatly and as inconspicuously as possible. Trim shall be attached with approved concealedfastenings. All angles, corners, and filler shall have mitered joints.

12. Insert for support of suspended ceilings from slab above and for attachment of suspension wireshall be of type recommended by manufacturer and shall be of a type to support ceiling loadsimposed.

3.04 ADJUST AND CLEANUpon completion, all exposed surfaces of factory finished acoustical work shall be cleaned and left in acondition entirely satisfactory to the Architect. Remove all debris, equipment, and material from premises.


09510 - 3 of 3


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 09590 - RESILIENT FLOORING

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL


1.02 SCOPE

Furnish labor and materials to complete vinyl composition tile, sheet vinyl flooring tile, and vinyl basework as indicated and specified herein.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit samples of work specified herein.

B. At completion of work, turn over to the Owner (for signed receipt) a minimum of one box(each color) of unbroken tile of each color of tile used in the work for future patchingpurposes.


A. Vinyl Composition Tile: 1. 1/8" x 12" x 12", colors to be selected from manufacturer's standard hues; Armstrong

Excelon, Imperial Series; Federal Spec. SS-T-312B(1), Type IV, Comp. 1[MIL-T-18830B(3)]; MIL STD 1623D.

2. Fire Test Data: ASTM E648 Critical Radiant Flux - 0.45 watts/cm2 or more, ASTME84 flame spread - 75 or less, ASTM E662 NBS smoke - 450 or less.

3. Colors to be selected. 4. Tile shall be laid with grain in one direction.

B. Sheet Vinyl:1. 6.5 ft. wide x 72 ft., 2.5 mm, color to be selected, Armstrong Translations.2. Static Load Limit: ASTM F970, 125 psi. Floors should be protected from sharp-

pointed loads and heavy static loads.3. Fire Test Data: ASTM E648 Critical Radiant Flux - 0.45 watts/cm or more, Class2

I, ASTM E662 smoke - 450 or less.

C. Base: Vinyl 1/8" thick, ASTM F-1861 Type TV, coil stock, 4" high, "set-on" cove withpremolded smooth top and cove base premolded internal and external angles - color to beselected by Architect. Furnish 1/8", 4" high straight base with premolded angles where carpetis installed.

D. Cement: As recommended by tile manufacturer (waterproof).

E. Edging: Of approved design to protect exposed tile edges; 1/8" thick vinyl edge strip wheretile is terminated at doorways adjacent to exposed concrete floors.

09590 - 1 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 09590 - RESILIENT FLOORING

F. Underlayment: Use mastic type for floors requiring leveling, minor undulations and minorcracks.

G. Cleaner and Wax: Standard of tile manufacturer used herein.


3.01 TILE AND VINYL BASE INSTALLATION

A. Inspect subfloors before starting work. Notify Architect in writing of any defect in subfloor. Do not proceed until such defects are reported and have been corrected. Starting of workimplies acceptance by this contractor of underflooring.

B. Fill subfloor cracks, etc. Clean subfloor of grease or other dirt. Do not begin until work of

other trades, including painting, has been completed.

C. Construction Contractor: Maintain rooms and subfloors at 70 F. minimum for at least 48o

hours before, during, and 48 hours after flooring operations.

D. Use only experienced workmen. Lay tiles with even joints and with finished surfaces in trueplane, smooth. Lay tiles square and symmetrical with room axis. Cut, fit, scribe to wall.

E. Install protective edgings where flooring edges are exposed and where required to saddle

difference of finished floor elevation between ceramic tile and resilient tile.

F. Cement base firmly to walls using proper adhesive for surface to which it is to be applied. Scribe base accurately to trim.

G. Base coils must be unrolled and acclimated to room temperature 24 hours before installation.

3.02 CLEANING AND FINISHING

A. Clean and wax in accordance with tile manufacturer's recommendation for tile used herein.

B. Do not permit traffic on finished floors unless they are protected with heavy paper by theconstruction contractor.

C. Inspect and make necessary adjustments within one month of time that heat is supplied

continuously in finished areas. Replace broken, "unseated" tile.


09590 - 2 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 09685 - CARPETING

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



Furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete carpet installation specified herein. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

The carpet applicator shall submit in duplicate 24" x 24" samples of all materials specified. Theapproved samples shall become the standard for comparison for all installed work.

1.04 MANUFACTURER

Provide solid colors as manufactured by J & J Industries, Durkan, Interface or approved equal. PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 CARPETING

A. Refer to drawings, Room Finish Schedule and Interior Color Schedule for areas to becarpeted. Carpet shall be as follows:

Yarn Face Yarn 100% Commercialon Soil Hiding

Nylon Yarn Size 2.70/2cc Heatset Ply Twist 6.0 x 6.0 T.P.I.

Pile Surface Dense Cut PileYarn/Weight Tufted 30 oz./sq.yd. (1,255 gms./sq.m.)Pile Height .250 inch

Static Resistance 3.5 Kilovolts or less as tested under AATCC-134Backing Primary Polypropylene

Secondary(mill option) Jute or Synthetic

Density Gauge 1/8 (216 Pitch) Stitches per inch 13 Tufts per sq. inch 104 Density 5,328Weight Density 197,136

Width 12 ft. Total Jute 77 oz./sq.yd. (2,611 gms./sq.m.)Weight Synthetic 75 oz./sq.yd. (2,543 gms./sq.m.)

Warranty Wear 10 year limited warrantyRadiant Panel Test Class I

09685 - 1 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 09685 - CARPETING

2.02 PADDING (If called for in Room Finish Schedule)

A. All rooms where there is occupied space below, upper level corridors , first floor guestrooms and adjoining corridors are to be carpeted over padding. Padding shall be asfollows:1. Padding shall be flat rubber or urethane foam padding not to exceed 3/8" thick-

ness and with a minimum density of 16 pounds. Waffle or bubble pads will not beaccepted.

2. Padding must be compatible with Class I carpet.

2.03 TACKLESS STRIP

A. Where carpet is installed over padding an architectural tackless strip (3 rows of pins) shallbe provided and installed. The gully between the wall and the tackless strip shall beslightly less than the thickness of the carpet.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Sub floor must be fully cured. A moisture and akalinity test should be performed prior tobeginning carpet installation. This should reach level acceptable to manufacturerrecommendations.

B. Carpet shall be either direct glue down to concrete floor slab or laid over padding. See RoomFinish Schedule.

C. Surfaces to receive carpet shall be patched out where required thoroughly clean and dry, andin condition satisfactory to carpet installer.

D. All materials shall be installed by qualified carpet mechanics under proper supervision, usingthe latest proven installation methods, tools, and materials as by the carpet manufacturer.

E. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all yardage with actual job measuresafter areas are ready. It will also be the responsibility of said Contractor to check job siteconditions as to delivery, handling, and proper storage until installation. Delivery charges willbe included in Contractor's price.

F. Carpeting shall be installed smooth and level, free of tacks, scraps, carpet ripples, scallopsand puckers.

G. Accessories shall be attached to sub-floor in a firm and rigid manner free of rattles andmovement.

H. Verify compatibility of manufacturer recommended glue and all sub floor material.

3.02 CLEAN UP

After installation is complete, clean up all dirt and debris. Clean carpet of all spots with proper spotremover. Remove loose threads with sharp scissors and broom; vacuum clean as final clean-up. Owner shall view all scraps and retain any he chooses for future repairs before they are removedfrom job site.

- END OF SECTION -

09685 - 2 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 09770# - SPECIAL WALL SURFACES

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC

09770 - 1 of 6

PART I – GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

The drawings, Instruction to Bidders, Form of Proposal, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 are Included herein and govern work under this section

1.02 DESCRIPTIION OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor and materials necessary for a complete installation of wall panels composed of fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP), substrate as indicated on drawings and specified herein.

B. Furnish and install all matching, required moldings for installation of the FRP Panels as recommended by the manufacturer.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this specification section to the extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation. B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM D256 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics.

2. ASTM D570 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. 3. ASTM D638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 4. ASTM D696 Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30ºC and 30ºC with a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer. 5. ASTM D790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 6. ASTM D2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor. 7. ASTM D5420 Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact). 8. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building aterials.


A. Performance Requirements: Provide fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) panels which have been manufactured and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure.


A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity. B. Mock-Ups: [Specify requirements for mock-up.].

1. Contractor shall provide a 2’x2’ mock-up panel for each condition indicated on plans. Including, but not limited to, butt joints, splined joints, corner joints, and exposed end-of-panel terminations.




09770 - 2 of 6

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures. Indicate location and dimension of joints and fastener attachment. D. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors and textures. Submit 2 samples of each type of panel, trim and fastener. E. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. 2. Certificates: a. Submit manufacturer’s certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

b. Submit certificate of installer’s qualifications. 3. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions. Submit manufacturer’s Installation Guide #6419.

F. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operations and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Data and Operation Data) Section. Include methods for maintaining installed products and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance. 2. Warranty documents specified herein.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section. B. Lead Time: Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

1. Store panels indoors. 2. Lay panels flat. Do not stand panels on edge. 3. Protect panels from moisture. 4. Do not store panels in contact with the floor or against an outside wall. 5. Maintain optimum storage conditions of 75 degrees F (24 degrees C) at 45 - 55% relative humidity.

E. Handling: Remove foreign matter from face of panel by using a soft bristle brush, avoiding abrasive action.




09770 - 3 of 6

1.08 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Installation shall not begin until building is enclosed, permanent heating and cooling equipment is in operation and residual moisture from plaster, concrete or terrazzo work has dissipated. 2. Install panels between 60 - 75 degrees F (15 - 24 degrees C) and relative humidity below 65%, ideally at the same conditions as the room’s normal operating temperatures after building is occupied. 3. Provide ventilation to disperse fumes during application of adhesive as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.

1.09 WARRANTY A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions. B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under contract documents.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.


2.01 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS WITH HIGH PRESSURE LAMINATES

A. Manufacturer: Kemlite Company, Inc. 1. Contact: Joliet Sales Office, PO Box 2429, Joliet, IL 60434; Telephone: (800) 435-0080, (815) 467-8600; Fax: (815) 467-8666; E-mail: [email protected]; website: www.optimaxhpl.com. B. Proprietary Products/Systems: FRP panels, including the following: 1. Optimax HPL Class A Panels

a. High Pressure Laminate Color/Design: By Architect. b. Panel Size: 4 feet × 8 feet (1219 × 2438 mm) or 4 feet × 10 feet (1219 × 3048 mm)] as required by job for best fit and minimization of joints. c. Moldings: Color by Architect. d. Material Composition: High pressure laminate made of melamine-impregnated decorative surface papers combined with phenolic-treated kraft paper consolidated in a press at high pressures. FRP panels - Reinforcement made from random chopped fiberglass roving and modified polyester copolymer and inorganic fillers and pigments. Finish adhesive laminated to FRP substrate. e. Nominal Panel Thickness: 0.097 inch (2.5 mm). f. Nominal Panel Weight: 0.681 lb/ft

2 (4.8 kg/m

2).

g. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84): Class A. h. Width Tolerance: +/- 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). i. Length Tolerance: +/- 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) up to 12 feet (3.7 m). j. Squareness Tolerance: Not more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) out of square. l. Flexural Strength (ASTM D790): 11,200 psi (77 MPa). m. Flexural Modulus (ASTM D790): 388,000 psi (2675 MPa).




09770 - 4 of 6

n. Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 12,500 psi (86 MPa). o. Tensile Modulus: (ASTM D638): 1,563,000 psi (10,777 MPa). p. Barcol Hardness (ASTM D2583): 44. q. Izod Impact: (ASTM D256): 5.2 ft-lb/in (0.28 J/mm). r. Gardner Impact (ASTM D5420): 40 in-lb (4.52 J). s. Water Absorption (ASTM D570): 1.4% (24 hrs at 77 degrees F (25 degrees C)). t. Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion (ASTM D696): 1.6 × 10

-5 in/in × °F (2.9 µm/m ×

°C). u. Taber Abrasion Resistance (Testing using Taber Abrader): 0.009% max wt loss.

2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: 1. Provide panel adhesive as recommended by panel manufacturer.


3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the FRP panel manufacturer. 3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of FRP panels. 2. Examine back-up surfaces to determine that corners are plumb and straight, surfaces are smooth, uniform, clean and free from foreign matter, nails are countersunk and joints and cracks are filled flush and smooth with the adjoining surface. 3. Do not proceed with installation of FRP panels until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. General: 1. Prior to installing panels, remove packaging and allow panels to acclimate to room temperature and humidity for at least 48 hours. 2. Wall substrate must be dry and free from dirt, dust, grease and other contaminants. 3. Walls must be flat and even. Remove high spots and fill low spots with material acceptable to panel manufacturer.

4. Remove wallpaper, soluble or loose paint and other foreign matter that might interfere with proper adhesive bond.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Inspect panels for any defects immediately. Do not install panels of unacceptable quality. 2. Do not install panels directly over stud framing or furring. 3. When cutting panels, position them so that the saw blade enters the finished HPL side first to avoid chipping or damage.




09770 - 5 of 6

4. Protect decorative laminate face of panel by covering work area. 5. Follow adhesive manufacturer’s recommendations for appropriate height of adhesive bead left by trowel and do not allow adhesive to skin over. B. Joint Seam Treatment: Install panels using the following method:

1. Color matched acrylic latex caulk. 2. Aluminum moldings. 3. PVC moldings. 4. Silhouette trim.

C. Installation Using Molding: 1. Start in the corner. Mark plumb line 48 1/8 inches (1222 mm) from corner. Set first panel true with plumb line. Where several courses of panels are used on a high wall, use both vertical and horizontal lines to ensure alignment. 2. Install one piece of inside corner molding. 3. Apply adhesive directly to back of FRP panel with 100% adhesive coverage using crosshatch pattern. Extend adhesive to all edges of panel. 4. Slide panel into molding and withdraw [1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for vinyl moldings] [1/16 inch (1.6 mm) for aluminum moldings] to provide appropriate gap. Align with plumb line. 5. Apply adhesive directly to back of FRP panel with100% adhesive coverage using crosshatch pattern. Extend adhesive to all edges of panel. 6. Begin in top corner nearest molding with laminate roller, rolling down and out toward the edge without molding. 7. Continue rolling down and out working across panel away from previously installed panel or initial molding. Remove all trapped air. 8. Install one-piece division bar and caps or next molding by sliding onto panel. 9. Withdraw molding [1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for vinyl moldings] [1/16 inch (1.6 mm) for aluminum moldings] to provide proper spacing. 10. Repeat process, working in one direction around room. 11. Immediately remove all adhesive residue. To remove, clean with nonabrasive cotton cloth and warm water. If necessary, use a mild nonabrasive detergent. For cleanup with solvent based adhesives, use mineral spirits or acetone to remove residue.

D. Installation Using Caulk: 1. Plan panel layout so seams are not directly over seams of substrate. 2. Apply adhesive directly to back of FRP panel with 100% adhesive coverage using crosshatch pattern. Extend adhesive to all edges of panel. 3. Install panel. Place six-penny finishing nails at 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) spacing against the panel about 2 feet (610 mm) apart to hold panels in place while adhesive sets and provide proper spacing for color caulk. Continue installing panels using this method, leaving nails in place during installation. 4. Remove nails after adhesive sets. 5. Place a narrow piece of masking tape along panel edge from top to bottom, exactly at joint edge. Firmly apply tape to both panels. 6. Fill 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) gap between the panels with caulk, making sure gap is completely filled. a. Tilt caulk tube back from vertical so that tip of tube advances first in direction of travel.

b. Wet finger and smooth bead if necessary. 7. Remove masking tape before bead cures. Clean off excess adhesive with damp cloth. 8. Install corner moldings as described in molding instructions.




09770 - 6 of 6

E. Installation using Sillouette Trim: 1. Start in the corner. Mark plumb line 48 inches (1.2 m) from corner. Set first panel true with plumb line. 2. Apply adhesive to back of panel using a crosshatch pattern. Leave a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less gap at all edges using Silhouette Trims so that adhesive does not seep into the trims. 3. Slide inside corner molding completely onto panel. 4. If using cap at the top or bottom, slide complete onto panel. When not using cap at top and bottom, leave 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) gap/extension. 5. Install first panel. Align with plumb line. 6. Insert division bar completely onto panel edge. Silhouette Trims are engineered so that customary gap is not required. 7. Begin in top corner nearest molding with laminate roller, rolling down and out toward the edge without the molding. Continue rolling down and out, working across the panel away from the previously installed panel or initial molding to remove all trapped air. 8. Slide the next panel into the division bar. Repeat process, working in one direction around the room. 9. Remove any adhesive residue upon completion of the job. To remove, clean with nonabrasive cotton cloth and warm water. If necessary, use a mild nonabrasive detergent. For best results, change water and cleaning rags frequently. For cleanup with solvent based adhesives, use mineral spirits or acetone to remove residue.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean panel surfaces in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 1. Use a clean, damp, nonabrasive cotton cloth and a mild liquid detergent or household cleaner. 2. Rinse with clean water using a clean, nonabrasive cotton cloth. 3. Dry panels with a soft, clean nonabrasive cotton cloth. 4. Do not use cleaners containing acid, alkali or sodium hypochlorite.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site.



ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING AND FINISHING

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



A. Extent of painting work is shown on drawings and schedules, and as herein specified.

B. The work includes painting and finishing of interior exposed items and surfaces throughoutthe project, except as otherwise indicated.1. Surface preparation, priming, and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop-

priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work.

C. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions,enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime,intermediate, or finish coats.

D. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules", except wherenatural finish of material is specifically mentioned, paint same as adjacent similar materialsor areas. If color or finish is not designated, Architect will select these from colors availablefor materials systems specified.

E. Paint in accordance with Room Finish Schedule, all drywall, concrete, concrete block, andferrous metals, including galvanized and all exposed structural steel.

F. Paint all exposed surfaces that are shop or job primed under other sections of thespecifications. Touch-up all primed surfaces where prime coat has been marred ordamaged, including touch-up of structural steel.

G. Paint all exposed light iron and structural steel, and other miscellaneous brackets, hangers,angles, and clips attached hereto. Shop prime coat as specified in Division 5.

H. Paint all exposed mechanical and electrical work.

I. Paint all electrical panel covers to match room wall finishes.

J. Finish all architectural woodwork, millwork, including counters, and all other millwork itemsthat cannot be completely prefinished at the factory.

K. Paint all hollow metal doors, frames, and other hollow metal work of a ferrous material.

L. Back prime all wood trim and all plywood and millwork.

M. Paint all light iron, structural steel and light gauge metal framing in pool area.

09900 - 1 of 8



1.03 RELATED WORK

A. Following categories of work are not included as part of field-applied finish work, or areincluded in other sections of the specifications.

B. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is includedunder various sections for structural steel, miscellaneous metal, hollow metal work, andsimilar items. Also, for fabricated components such as architectural work, and similar items. Also, for fabricated or factory-built mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories.

C. Pre-Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory-finishing or installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) architecturalwoodwork and casework, finished mechanical and electrical equipment, including lightfixtures, distribution cabinets, doors, and equipment.

D. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces suchas walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas.

E. Finished Metal Surfaces: Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromiumplate, copper, bronze, and similar finished materials will not require finish painting, unlessotherwise indicated.

F. Operating Parts and Labels: Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts,such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, motor and fanshafts will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Do not paint over any code-required labels, such as UL and Factory Mutual, or anyequipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including paint label analysis andapplication instructions for each material proposed for use.

B. Samples: Submit samples for Architect's review of color and texture only. Provide a listingof material and application for each coat of each finished sample.1. On 12" x 12" hardboard, provide two samples of each color and materials, with

texture to simulate actual conditions. Resubmit samples as requested by theArchitect until acceptable sheen, color, and texture is achieved.

2. On actual wood surfaces, provide two 4" x 8" samples of natural and stained woodfinish. Label and identify each as to location and application.

1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers, bearingmanufacturer's name and label, and following information:1. Name or title of material2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacturer3. Manufacturer's name4. Contents of volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents5. Thinning instructions6. Application instructions

09900 - 2 of 8



7. Color name and number

B. Storage of Materials: 1. Store and mix all materials only in such rooms as may be assigned for this purpose.

Take all necessary precautions in storage of painting materials and implements toprevent fire.

2. Provide galvanized iron pans of suitable size in which all mixing pails must beplaced. No mixing shall be done outside of these pans. Pay for repairs for alldamage caused by mixing or spillage.

3. Remove all oily rags and waste each night after being placed in a covered metalreceptacle during the day.

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Before commencing painting, make certain that surfaces to be coated are in perfect conditionto receive the coating by being clean, dry, smooth, and at the proper temperature. Nomaterials shall be applied if and when unfavorable atmospheric conditions prevail whichcould adversely affect the drying, appearance, color, or adhesion of the materials. If surface,atmospheric, or other conditions to be improper for paint or finishing are found, report suchconditions to the Architect at once and do not proceed until the situation is corrected. Commencement of work in any given areas shall be construed to mean acceptance of suchareas by the Contractor.

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted andsurrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg. F (7 deg. C) and 95 deg. F (35 deg. C),unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.

C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85%; or dampor wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.

D. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be painted areenclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer duringapplication and drying periods.

E. Material List and Maintenance Instructions: Furnish triplicate (3) copies of a complete list ofmaterials being used, including type, brand and color used for painting and finishing eachroom and portion of building, interior and exterior. Include instructions for propermaintenance.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 COLORS AND FINISHES

A. Prior to beginning work, Architect will select colors for surfaces to be painted.1. Use representative colors and finishes when preparing samples for review.2. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the job.

B. Color Pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated.1. Lead content in pigment, if any, is limited to contain not more than 0.5% lead, as

lead metal based on the total non-volatile (dry-film) of paint by weight.

09900 - 3 of 8



C. Paint Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided toensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from othertrades, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use, to ensurecompatible prime coats are used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or removeand reprime as required. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems usingspecified coating systems with substrates primed by others.

2.02 MATERIAL QUALITY

Provide best quality grade of various types of coating as regularly manufactured by acceptable paintmaterials manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best-grade product will not be acceptable.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS

A. Use the same brand of each respective material throughout the job.

B. Primers and undercoats shall be those made by manufacturers of respective finish coats.

C. The following manufacturer's first line products are approved for use on this project:1. Sherwin-Williams Co. (SW)2. Benjamin Moore & Co. (BM)3. Pittsburgh Paint (PPG)4. Glidden Professional (GP)

D. Galvanized surface pre-treatment shall be manufactured by American Chemical PaintCompany or Nielson Chemical Company.

2.04 STANDARD MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements of latest editions of these standard specifications for the followingmaterials, whether used directly or as ingredients of factory prepared products:1. Raw Linseed Oil - ASTM A2342. Boiled Linseed Oil - ASTM D2603. Liquid Drier - Federal Spec. TT-D-6514. White Shellac - Federal Spec. TT-V-91a5. Turpentine - ASTM D136. Mineral Spirits - ASTM D2357. Interior Wood Filler - Federal Spec. TT-F-3368. Pigments-in-Oil - Federal Spec. FF-P-381

2.05 PAINTING MATERIALS

A. All basic materials entering into the compounding and manufacture of paints and otherfinishing materials specified, shall be of the best quality products of recognized manufactur-ers, subject to approval of the Architect. Reference to ASTM or Federal Spec. for thepurpose of establishing a testing basis for requirements of quality.

B. Coloring materials shall be pure tint colors, and of the highest grade of tinting strength andfineness obtainable. Coloring materials shall be composed of ingredients that will mix with

09900 - 4 of 8



the various coatings specified without impairing the ultimate result for which coatings areselected.

C. All materials shall be delivered in original unopened containers, each container bearing thebrand and maker's name, completely identifying the contents, including formula, and givendirections for its proper use.

D. All materials shall be used without thinning, unless otherwise specified or approved by theArchitect. If any material is thus thinned, use only the thinner recommended by paintmanufacturer.

2.06 TYPES OF FINISHES

A. Provide the following systems for various substrates, as indicated. Unless otherwise noted,all materials specified are the products of Sherwin-Williams Co. The specifying of theproducts of one manufacturer is intended to indicate the type of product desired and equiva-lent products of approved manufacturers listed in this section will be accepted as equal,subject to conformance with specifications.1. Interior Exposed Concrete and Concrete Block:

a. 1st Coat - SW PrepRite Block Filler B25W25b. 2 & 3 Coats - SW Promar 200 Latex Eggshell (B31-2200)nd rd

2. Exterior Exposed Concrete Block:a. 1st Coat - SW PrepRite Block Filler B25W25b. 2 & 3 Coats - SW A100 Latex Satin H&T A82 Seriesnd rd

3. Gypsum Drywall Systems:a. 1st Coat - SW PrepRite 200 Latex Primer B28W200b. 2 & 3 Coats - SW Promar 200 Latex Eggshell (B31-2200)nd rd

4. Paint all Steel and Iron as follows:a. Ferrous Metals:

(1) Prime Coat - SW DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish (B66W1)(2) Two (2) Coats - SW DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss Coating (B66-200)

b. Metal Doors and Frames: (1) One (1) Coat - SW DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish (B66W1)(2) Two (2) Coats - SW DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss Coating (B66-200)

5. Paint the backs of all Wood Trim and back of all Plywood and Millwork:a. One (1) Coat - SW PrepRite ProBlock HS Interior Alkyd Primer/Sealer

(B79W810)6. Natural Finish Woodwork:

a. One (1) Coat - Minwax 250 V.O.C. Compliant Wood Finishb. One (1) Coat - Gloss Minwax High Build Polyurethanec. One (1) Coat - Satin Minwax High Build Polyurethane

7. Concrete Floors to be Sealed:a. Son-No-Mar by Sonneborn Building Products or approved equal.

8. Interior Wood (Painted):a. One (1) Coat - SW ProBlock HS Interior Alkyd Primer/Sealer (B79W810)b. Two (2) Coats - SW Promar 200 Latex Semi-Gloss (B31-2200)

9. Pool enclosure (Painted):Gypa. One (1) Coat - SW PrepRite 200 latexb. Two (2) Coats - SW Pro Industrial Precatalyzed Epoxy

10. Pool enclosure (Painted):Steela. One (1) Coat - DTM Acrylic Primerb. Two (2) Coats - SW Pro Industrial Precatalyzed Epoxy

09900 - 5 of 8




3.01 INSPECTION

A. Applicator must examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied andnotify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manneracceptable to applicator.

B. Starting of paint work will the construed as applicator's acceptance of surfaces andconditions within any particular area.

C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwisedetrimental to formation of a durable paint film.

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: 1. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufac-

turer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition.2. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machine surfaces, plates, lighting

fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish-painted, or provide surfaceapplied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, ifnecessary, for complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Followingcompletion of paint of each space or area, reinstall removed items.

3. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Removeoil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so thecontaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly-painted surfaces.

B. Cementitious Materials: Prepare cement plaster to be painted be removing efflorescence,chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils and by roughening as required to remove glaze.

C. Wood:

1. Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil or other foreign substances withscrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth thosefinish surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry,seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knotsealer, before application of priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfectionsin finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood-filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried.

2. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job-painted immediately upon delivery tojob. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides and backsides of wood, includingcabinets, counters, cases, paneling.

3. When transparent finish is required, use spar varnish for backpriming.

D. Ferrous Metals: 1. Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, grease, dirt,

loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.2. Touch up shop-applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare, where required by

other sections of these specifications. Clean and touch up with same type shopprimer.

09900 - 6 of 8



E. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with nonpetroleum basedsolvent.

3.03 MATERIALS PREPARATION

A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in

storage, mixing, and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials andresidue.

C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as requiredduring application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary,strain material before using.

3.04 APPLICATION

A. General: 1. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and

techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.2. Apply additional coats when undercoats, strains or other conditions show through

final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Givespecial attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds,and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

3. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposedsurfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently-fixed equipment or furniture with primecoat only before final installation of equipment.

4. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat,non-specular black paint.

5. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces,unless otherwise indicated.

6. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and touch-up painted, unless otherwise indicated.

7. Apply stain on wood material to an even finish. Apply first coat of varnish, steel wool. Add second coat of varnish. Provide a smooth clean finish.

B. Scheduling Painting: 1. Apply first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise

prepared for paint as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequentsurface deterioration.

2. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do norecoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not causelifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.

C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommendedspreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as re-commended by coating manufacturer.

3.05 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION

A. Clean-Up: During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish,cans and rags at end of each work day.

09900 - 7 of 8



B. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not toscratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces.

C. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage bypainting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, andrepainting, as acceptable to Architect.

D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove temporaryprotective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion ofpainting operations.

E. At the completion of the work of other trades, touch up and restore all damaged or defacedpainted surfaces.

3.06 TOUCH-UP PAINT SUPPLY

Supply a minimum of one (1) quart of each paint or stain product used for Owner's use in touchingup. Label cans as to color name and/or number, finish (i.e., semi-gloss), and location where used.


09900 - 8 of 8

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 10155 - TOILET ROOM PARTITIONS, BAKED ENAMEL

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



A. Furnish all labor, materials necessary and required to completely install all equipmentrequired by the drawings and specified herein.

B. The contractor is cautioned that all necessary built-in anchorage and built-in fasteners orother necessary support for these accessories are part of this section and the installation ofsame are the responsibility of the contractor for this section.

PART II - PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL TOILET PARTITIONS (OVERHEAD BRACED)

A. Shall be manufactured by one of the following:1. Sanymetal Products Company2. General Partition3. Hadrian Corp.

B. Colors (baked on thermo-setting acrylic enamel) to be selected by Architect.

C. Doors shall be 1" thick with two sheets of 22 gauge galvanized bonderized steel enclosing

sound-deadening Bridgecore. All formed edges shall be welded every l8" and sealed witha surrounding oval-crown locking strip, mitered, welded and finished at the corners.

D. Panels shall be 1" thick with two sheets of 22 gauge galvanized bonderized steel enclosing

sound-deadening Bridgecore. All formed edges sealed with a surrounding oval-crown lockingstrip, mitered, welded and finished at the corners.

E. Pilasters: Pilasters shall be 1-1/4" thick with two sheets of acrylic-coated 20 gaugegalvanized-bonderized steel welded and finished as specified for baked enamel doors. Pilas-ter bases shall be attached with floor stirrups and leveling bolts for secure anchorage.

F. Accessories: 1. Each door shall have a cast alloy chrome-plated coat hook and bumper. It shall be

attached by one-way head screws. 2. Each door shall be equipped with latch with face mortised flush with edge locking

strip. 3. Latch bolts shall be stainless steel with chrome plated ferrous metal handles and

escutcheon plates. 4. One (1) stop and keeper shall be furnished for each compartment.5. Provide sufficient backing in partitions for paper holders where indicated on drawing. 6. Partitions are to be rigidly mounted in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.

10155 - 1 of 3



2.02 URINAL SCREENS

A. Urinal screens shall be type, color, and materials as designated and as manufactured by:1. Sanymetal Products Company2. General Partition3. Hadrian Corp.

B. Material:

1. Baked Enamel: Panels shall be 1" thick made of two sheets of #22 gaugegalvanized-bonderized stretcher levered steel, assembled over and cemented underpressure to a dense sound deadening Bridgecore insulation. The two face plates ofthe panel shall have formed edges sealed with a continuous oval-crown locking strip,mitered, welded and finished at corners.

2. Fittings: Partitions shall be attached to the wall with two brackets made ofheat-treated, polished and anodized, extruded aluminum alloy and each stirrupbracket shall be 3" long and provided with four holes for attachment of screws to thewall and two thru-bolts through the partition.

3. Finish: All units shall be mechanically cleaned by means of automatic vapordegreasing and finish shall consist of a prime coat and a finish color of thermo--setting acrylic enamel applied electrostatically and baked on to produce a uniform,smooth, lustrous protective finish.

C. Color: To be selected by Architect.


3.01 INSPECTION

A. Check areas to receive partitions for correct height and spacing of support structures andplumbing fixtures that may affect quality and execution of work.

B. Commence installation of toilet partitions when all checks have been made.

C. Start of work constitutes acceptance of job conditions.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware as recommended by manufacturer. B. Conceal evidence of drilling in walls on finished work.

C. Adjust pilaster shoes to fit flush with finish floor.


A. Adjust brackets to provide uniform clearances not exceeding: 1. Pilaster and wall: 1" 2. Panels and wall: 1" 3. Pilasters and panels: l/2" 4. Pilasters and doors: 3/l6"

10155 - 2 of 3



B. Adjust hardware for proper operation.

C. Set hinges to hold in-swinging doors ajar when not latched.

D. After completion of installation, clean and polish exposed compartment and screen surfacesand touch-up minor scratches.


10155 - 3 of 3

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 10 - SPECIALITIES

ARCH JOB #: 214041 SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS

PART I – GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

A. The drawings, Instructions to Bidders, Form of Proposal, General Conditions,Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 are included herein and govern workunder this Section.


A. The work covered by this Section of the specifications consists of providing allequipment, materials and labor to furnish and install where indicated on plans ordescribed in schedules drainable aluminum louvers and vents. Louvers shall befurnished with bird screen, insect screen, supports, installation hardware andfinishes as specified and as required for a complete installation.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.1. AMCA Standard 500-L-99 Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for

Rating2. AMCA Publication 501 Application Manual for Louvers

B. The Aluminum Association Incorporated1. Aluminum Standards and Data2. Specifications and Guidelines for Aluminum Structures

C. American Society of Civil Engineers1. Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

D. American Society for Testing and Materials1. ASTM B2092. ASTM B2113. ASTM B2214. ASTM E90-90

E. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association1. AAMA 800 Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants2. AAMA 605.2 Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic

Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.3. AAMA TIR Metal Curtain Wall Fasteners4. AAMA 2605-98 Superior Performing Organic Coatings on AluminumExtrusions and Panels

1.04 RELATED WORK IN OTHER DIVISIONS

A. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed in perimeter joints betweenlouver frames and adjoining construction.

B. Division 15 Section “Louvers and Dampers” for coordination with similar types andstyles being used on project.



1.05 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Manufacturer shall submit shop drawings incorporating key plans, elevations, sectionsand details showing profiles, angles and spacing of louver blades and frames; unitdimensions related to wall openings and construction; and, anchorage details andlocations. Provide samples of manufacturer’s finish and color charts showing the fullrange of colors available. For each type of product specified, submit free area, airperformance and water penetration ratings determined in accordance with AMCAStandard 500-L and licensed under the AMCA Certified Ratings Program.


A. Single subcontract responsibility: Subcontract the work to a single firm that has had notless than six years experience in the design and manufacturing of work similar to thatshown and required.

B. Performance Requirements: Provide AMCA and BSRIA test data as required to confirmthat the louvers have the specified air and water performance characteristics.

C. Acoustical Performance: Where applicable, submit test reports to confirm that the louversmeet the specified STC and Noise Reduction requirements.

D. Structural Requirements: Design all materials to withstand wind and snow loads asrequired by the applicable building code. Maximum allowable deflection for the louverstructural members to be l/180 or 0.75 inch, whichever is less. Maximum allowabledeflection for the louver blades to be l/120 or 0.50 inch across the weak axis, whichever isless.

E. Professional Engineer Requirements: Drawings and structural calculations to be signedand sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the state of New York.

F. Warranty: Provide written warranty to the owner that all products will be free of defective materials or workmanship for a period of one year from date of installation.


A. Delivery: At the time of delivery all materials shall be visually inspected for damage. Anydamaged boxes, crates, louver sections, etc. shall be noted on the receiving ticket andimmediately reported to the shipping company and the material manufacturer.

B. Storage:1. Material may be stored flat, on end or on its side.2. Material may be stored either indoors or outdoors.3. If stored outdoors the material must be raised sufficiently off the ground to

prevent it being flooded.4. If stored out doors the material must be covered with a weather proof flame

resistant sheeting or tarpaulin.

C. Handling:1. Material shall be handled in accordance with sound material handling practices

and in such a way as to minimize racking.



2. Louver sections may be hoisted by attaching straps to the jambs and lifting thesection while it is in a vertical position.

3. Louver sections should only be lifted and carried by the jambs. Heads, sills andblades are not to be used for lifting or hoisting louver sections.


2.01 MATERIALS

A. Louvers/vents shall be drainable louvers with recessed vertical mullions equal to TypeCB6744 as designed and manufactured by The Airolite Company LLC, Marietta, Ohio. Louvers shall be 4-inches deep and assembled entirely from extruded aluminumcomponents. Blades and frames shall be 0.081-inch thick extruded aluminum, alloy6063-T5. Blades shall be stationary, slanted at a 35° angle and incorporate drainablegutters, and be spaced 3-1/4-inches on center. Jamb frames shall incorporate drainablegutters to ensure resistance to water penetration.

B. Shapes, sizes and designs shall be as shown on drawings and fabricated to comply withthe intended location and style required.

C. Where a project has louvers and vents specified in another part of these specificationsas an element of a through-the-wall heating, venting and air conditioning unit (PTACs),the louvers and vents specified under this section shall match those louvers as closelyas possible in design style, finish and color.


A. Acceptable manufacturers for the louvers and vents shall be:1. Airolite Company LLC, Marietta, Ohio2. Construction Specialties, Inc., 49 Meeker Avenue, Cranford, New Jersey 070163. Airline Products Company, 17500 York Rd., Hagerstown, MD 21740

2.03 FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations andapplication recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory.Protect finishes on exposed surfaces prior to shipment. Remove scratches and blemishesfrom exposed surfaces that will be visible after completing finishing process. Provide coloras indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by architect.

B. Fluorocarbon Coating1. Louvers to be finished with an inhibitive thermo-cured primer, 0.2 mil minimum

dry film thickness, and a thermo-cured fluorocarbon coating containing "Kynar500" resin, 1.0 mil minimum dry film thickness.

2. All aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned, etched and given a chromatedconversion pretreatment before application of the Kynar/Hylar coating. Thecoating shall receive a bake cycle of 17 minutes at 4500F. All finishingprocedures shall be one continuous operation in the plant of the manufacturer.

3. Manufacturer to furnish an extended 20 limited warranty for the Kynar/Hylar coating. This limited warranty shall begin on the date of material shipment.



2.04 BIRD SCREENS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all louvers to be furnished with mill finish bird or insect screens.

B. Screens to be 5/8” (15.9mm) mesh, 0.050” (1.27mm) thick expanded and flattened aluminum bird screen secured within 0.055” (1.40mm) thick extruded aluminum frames. Frames to have mitered corners and corner locks.

2.05 BLANK OFFS

A. Furnish where indicated on the drawings blank–off panels fabricated by the louver manufacturer.B. Blank-off panels to be 0.050” (1.27mm) thick aluminum sheet. Panels to be finished with Kynar 500 minimum I mil (0.025mm) thick full strength 70% resin Fluoropolymer coating. Color to be selected by the architect.

2.06 STRUCTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Manufacturer shall design and furnish all supports required to withstand a wind force ofnot less than 25 pounds per square foot (100 mph). Louvers 120-inches wide x 84-inches high or 84-inches wide x 120-inches high will be fabricated and installed inmultiple sections. Louver blades, frames, mullions and anchorages shall bedemonstrated to withstand the specified wind design load.

2.07 PERFORMANCE RATINGS

FREEA .AREA 8.98 Square Feet (0.84 m )2

MINIMUM FREE AREA VELOCITYat Beginning Point of Water Penetration: 1,151 fpm (5.85 m/s)MINIMUM AIR VOLUME FLOW RATE

at Beginning Point of Water Penetration: 10,336 cfm (4.885 m /s)3

MAXIMUM STATIC PRESSUREat Beginning Point of Water Penetration: 0.20 in. H2O (0.040 kPa)


3.01 EXAMINATION

Examine openings to receive the work. Do not proceed until any unsatisfactory conditions havebeen corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of the work.

B. Verify dimensions of supporting structure at the site by accurate field measurements sothat the work will be accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure.

C. Anchor louvers to the building substructure as indicated on architectural drawings.

D. Erection Tolerances:



1. Maximum variation from plane or location shown on the approved shop drawings:1/8" per 12 feet of length, but not exceeding 1/2" in any total building length orportion thereof (noncumulative).

2. Maximum offset from true alignment between two members abutting end to end,edge-to -edge in line or separated by less than 3": 1/16" (shop or field joints). Thislimiting condition shall prevail under both load and no load conditions.

E. Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of the manufactureror fabricator,and in accordance with his recommendations. Restore finish completely.Remove and replace members where cutting and trimming has impaired the strength orappearance of the assembly.

F. Do not erect warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged or defaced members.Remove and replace any members damaged in the erection process as directed.

G. Set units level, plumb and true to line, with uniform joints.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed materials to prevent damage by other trades. Use materials that may be easily removed without leaving residue or permanent stains.

3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Immediately clean exposed surfaces of the louvers to remove fingerprints and dirtaccumulation during the installation process. Do not let soiling remain until the finalcleaning.

B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergentnot harmful to the material finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

C. Restore louvers and accessory components damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by the Architect, remove damaged materials and replace with new materials.

1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with a compatible air-dried coating that matches the

color and gloss of the factory applied coating.



ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 10260.1 - WALL CORNER GUARDS

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



A. The following items are specifically included without limiting the generality implied by thesespecifications and drawings: 1. Flush mounted corner guards.


Rough blocking to be provided under Carpentry. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance within the conditions of Contract and Division 1Specifications Sections.1. Product data for each type of corner guard specified.2. Shop drawings indicating mounting details with the appropriate fasteners for specific

project substrates.3. Samples for verification purposes of corner guard, 8" long, in full size profiles of each

type and color indicated. 4. Manufacturer's standard warranty against material and manufacturing defects for a

period of five (5) years from the date of acceptance.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 CORNER GUARDS

Flush mount corner guards shall be 160F Series as manufactured by IPC Door & Wall ProtectionSystems. Units shall be 2"x2"x4' & 2" x 2" x Full height as indicated on drawings.

2.02 COMPONENTS

A. Snap-on covers and tape-on corner guards shall be extruded of .080" thick from chemicaland stain resistant polyvinyl chloride, with the addition of impact modifiers. No plasticizersshall be added (plasticizers may aid in bacterial growth). Surface shall have an embossedtexture.

B. Corner guards shall be of the height as designated on contract shown on the documentsmeasured from the top of the base to the top of the corner guard.

C. Colors to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's color palette.

D. Top and bottom caps shall be made of injection molded thermoplastics of color matching thatof the corner guards.

10260.1 1 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 10260.1 - WALL CORNER GUARDS

E. Continuous aluminum retainer of .070" thickness shall be fabricated from 6063-T5 aluminum,with a mill finish.

F. All mounting systems accessories appropriate for substrates indicated on the drawings shallbe provided.

PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate corner guard as indicated on drawings, using mounting methods asindicated on approved shop drawings for the appropriate substrate, and in compliance withthe manufacturer's instructions. Install corner guard level, plumb, and at the height indicatedon drawings, with surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance.

B. Cleaning: At completion of the installation, clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.


10260.1 2 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 10300 - PREMANUFACTURED FIREPLACE UNITS DIRECT VENT GAS

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



A. Extent of premanufactured fireplace units is indicated on drawings.

B. Work includes fabrication and installation of standard premanufactured fireplace units,including all components necessary for a complete installation.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide complete packaged premanufactured fireplace unit,including all components manufactured by one manufacturer for single responsibility.

B. Catalog Standards: Manufacturer's catalog numbers may be indicated on drawings forconvenience in identifying certain components. Unless modified by notation on drawings orotherwise specified, manufacturer's current catalog description for indicated number, togetherwith indicated or specified options or accessories, constitutes requirements for each suchunit.1. Use catalog numbers, and specific requirements indicated on drawings and in

specification, are not intended to preclude use of equivalent products by other listedacceptable manufacturers, but are given for purposes of establishing a standard ofdesign and quality for materials, construction, and workmanship.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions forprefabricated fireplace units.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit one (1) sepia and two (2) copies of shop drawings for prefabricatedfireplace units showing plans, elevations, cross-sections, and details.

1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING

Protect finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and installation.

10300 - 1 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 10300 - PREMANUFACTURED FIREPLACE UNITS DIRECT VENT GAS

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide premanufactured peninsula style fireplace units as manufactured by MajesticFireplaces, Inc. or approved equal, viewable from three sides.

B. The following components are manufactured by Majestic Fireplaces, Inc. and shall be usedas a standard. Single sided or double sided fireplaces shall be selected as shown on thedrawings:1. Three Sided Fireplace: Direct Vent Gas Fireplace: Majestic, Pearl PFLDV Series

Insta-Flame series, certified to ANSI Z21.88-2005/CSA 2.33-2005, max. input38,000 BTU, min. input 26,000 BTU.

2. Zero clearance design3. Ceramic Burner System (natural gas).4. Ceramic Fibre Old Rocky Creek, Driftwood Log Set5. Tempered glass door units, contemporary glass kit.6. Flex connector with Shut-Off & EB17. Electronic ignition - Signature Command System.8. Coaxial direct vent flue vent system, 5" Direct Vent.7. DV power vent system Model #7PDVS with 1-1/4" restrictor plate orifice.8. Wall switch, coordinate location with owner, provide optional remote.9. Trim: Upper and lower, Verify finish options with owner. Provide contemporary glass

kit and porcelain liner.10. Limited lifetime warranty.


3.01 INSTALLATION

General: Install prefabricated fireplace units plumb, level, rigid, securely anchored to building, inaccordance with manufacturer's instructions.


10300 - 2 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 10350 - FLAGPOLE

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



Furnish all labor and materials necessary for the installation of a concealed halyard flagpole whereshown on drawings and as specified herein.


A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Baartol Company, Inc.2. Concord Industries, Inc.3. American Flagpole Co., Division of Kearney-National, Inc.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

Shop drawings to be submitted showing dimensions, design, and anchoring system.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum - 6063T6 alloy, seamless, single section.

B. Type of Taper:1. Cone Tapered: Uniform straight line with rate of taper, 1" in every 5'-6".

C. Classifications:1. Ground Set: Cone tapered aluminum tube flagpole.

D. Dimensions (see charts):1. Overall length = 38'-6"; exposed height = 35'-0".2. Butt diameter = 6"; top diameter = 3-1/2".3. Wall thickness = .188".

E. Finishes:1. Aluminum Flagpoles: Mechanical (AmTone) finish; chemical or applied coatings.

F. Mountings:1. Site: Ground set; refer to foundation and installation details per manufacturer,

inclusive of foundation sleeve, steel centering wedges, 6"x6"x3/16" steel supportplate welded to 3/4" steel ground spike.

10350 - 1 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 10350 - FLAGPOLE

G. Fittings:1. Finial 6" diameter 14 gauge aluminum ball.2. Truck (concealed halyard).

a. Revolving; double 2-3/8" diameter sheaves.3. Halyards and snap hooks: #10 multi-filament braided polypropylene with two bronze

snap hooks for each halyard.4. Cleats: 9" aluminum.5. Mounting Hardware:

a. Ground set: A flash collar of aluminum, standard foundation sleeve is 16gauge corrugated galvanized steel.


3.01 SHIPPING

Packaging: Flagpole to be packed in recommended fashion to assure protection during transit.

3.02 HANDLING AND STORAGE

Aluminum flagpoles, if stored in original package for extended periods, can become stained due toadverse chemical reactions between aluminum and packaging material. When poles are to be storedon site for extended periods, all wrappings material should be removed and the poles stored bare ina dry place off the ground.

3.03 INSTALLATION

Flagpole to be installed by an experienced erection crew per manufacturers instructions.


10350 - 2 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 10400 - RAILING SYSTEM

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL


1.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Railings, pre-manufactured aluminum:1. Components:

a. Materials: Extruded aluminum; alloy 6063-T6 for structural, 6063-T5 forother.

b. Castings: High strength aluminum alloy as cast.c. Fasteners: Stainless steel, Type 300 series.d. Configurations: Indicated on Drawings.e. Finish:

(1) PPG Industries, Inc.; Duracron Super 600 Thermosetting AcrylicSystem over inhibitive primer and conversion coating exceedingAAMA 603.8-85.

f. Design: Meet requirements for horizontal and vertical loading, concentratedloads, and other forces indicated in SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Article; followrequirements for OSHA and local applicable codes if more stringent.

g. Miscellaneous hardware for installation to indicated substrates and meetdesign criteria.

h. Manufacturer: Amerail Systems, Inc., 800-451-8221

1.03 FABRICATION

A. Shop Assembly:1. General:

a. Fabricate items to reviewed shop drawing requirements.b. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and

straight sharp edges.c. Use anchorage types indicated on reviewed shop drawings coordinated with

supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provideaccurate support.

d. Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize fieldsplicing ans units’ assembly at project site. Disassemble units only to extentnecessary for shipping and handling limitations. Mark units for reassemblyand coordinated installation.

e. Punch holes for through bolts and other items to eliminate filed drilling.f. Exposed surfaces throughout project: same inherent texture and color for

like locations.g. Fastenings: non-corrosive, non-staining and concealed, except as indicated

on reviewed shop drawings.h. Grind exposed welds smooth to form neat uniform fillet without weakening

bas metal. Remove slag from unexposed welds before applying shopcoating.

i. Form molded, bent or shaped members with clean, sharp arrises, withoutdents, scratches, cracks and other defects.

10400 - 1 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 10400 - RAILING SYSTEM

j. Anchors, bolts, shims and accessory items for building into and fastening toadjacent work.

PART II - EXECUTION

2. 01 GENERAL

A. Fastening to in-place construction: install anchorage devices and fasteners where necessaryfor securing items to in-place construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete inserts,toggle bolts and through bolts.

B. Cutting, fitting and placement: perform cutting, drilling and fitting for installation. Set work inlocation, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack; measure fromestablished lines and levels. Install work in accord with reviewed shop drawings.

C. Fit exposed connections together to form tight hairline joints. Field weld connections whichcannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth; touch-upshop primer coat with same type primer.

D. Leave metal fabrication items ready to receive finish, where applicable, in accord with Paintssections.

E. Loose metal fabrication items: furnish items for construction activities completion in othersections.

F. Tolerances: 1. Install free standing items to +/-1/4" of correct position.2. Maximum variation from plumb, level or designated position: 1/8" in 12'-0", not

exceeding 1/4" in total run.3. Joints between adjacent members in same assembly: hairline and square to

adjacent member.4. Variation in squaring diagonal for assemblies: 1/8".


10400 - 2 of 2


ARCH. JOB#: 214041 SECTION 10426 - SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

The drawings, Instructions to Bidders, Form of Proposal, General Conditions, SupplementaryGeneral Conditions and Division 1 are included herein and govern work under this section.

1.02 SCOPE

A. Applicable provisions of all contract documents govern work under this section.B. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary and required to completely install

and apply signage specified herein.C. This Contractor is cautioned that all necessary built-in anchorage and built-in fasteners or

their necessary support for the signage including the installation of the same is theresponsibility of the Contractor for this section.

D. Men’s Toilet Room and Women’s Toilet Room, sex symbol signage on all sex segregatedrooms.

1.03 TYPES OF SIGNAGE

Individual formed plastic letters and/or symbols applied to sign panels

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Individually formed plastic letters and/or symbols shall be as manufactured byProSignscape.1. Letters/symbols shall be standard form letters. Roman Style, symbol size 6"X6".2. Finish of letter is to be gold. Note: Do no fabricate letters until sample letter with

finish is submitted to and approved by Architect.3. Letters shall be “projected mounted”.

2.02 APPROVAL OF SIGNAGE

A. After award of contracts, the Contractor for this section shall coordinate with the Architectin determining the exact signage to be applied to the sign panel.

B. Show drawings indicating the determined signage shall be drawn at a scale of no lessthan 1" - 1'-0".

C. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor of this section to obtain approval of thesignage and permit required under this contract.

D. Before application or fabrication, the Contractor shall submit the Occupant/Ownerapproved shop drawings to the Architect for final approval.

- END OF SECTION -

10426 - 1 of 1


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 10500 - LOCKERS

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



Furnish all labor and materials necessary for the installation of 12" wide x 12" deep x 72" high lockersand benches shown on drawings and specified herein.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

Submittals: Drawings or field drawings shall show floor plan, overall dimensions for installation,details for filler, trim, and vertical sections. Include manufacturer's standard colors.

Numbering: The locker numbering sequence will be provided by the approving authority and notedon approved drawings returned to the locker contractor.

Color Charts: Provide color charts showing manufacturer’s available colors. If required by normaloffice procedures or in the event of non-standard color selection, request samples of paint on metal.


Store lockers in upright position in dry ventilated area, protect from elements, if necessary, protectfinish from dents and scratches during handling.


A. Uniformity: Provide each type of metal locker as produced by a single manufacturer, includingnecessary installation accessories, fittings and fasteners.

B. Job Conditions: Do not deliver metal lockers until building is enclosed and ready for lockerinstallation. Protect from damage during delivery, handling, storage and installation.

1.05 WARRANTY

All products shall carry a one (1) year limited warranty on parts and workmanship.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

Acceptable Manufacturers/Products: When specific manufacturer, system, or products are indicatedon Drawings or in the Specifications, it is not to imply exclusive use of said manufacturer, system, orproduct; unless otherwise noted. Products of equivalent quality, design, and function by othermanufacturers may be used, subject to compliance with requirements.

10500 - 1 of 3



2.02 METAL LOCKERS

A. Design is based on "standard locker" style, double tier height, 12"x12"x36" as manufacturedby Republic Storage Systems co., Canton, Ohio (800-477-1255).

B. Door: Doors shall be 16 gauge steel, suitably flanged with one (1) right angle bend at top andbottom, and a channel formation at the vertical flanges on the lock and hinge side. Doorsshall be hinged on the right and swing from left to right.

C. Frame: Door frame members shall be formed into channel shapes from 16 gauge furnituresteel. Corners to be tenoned and electrically welded making a solid and rigid one-piecestructure. Frames shall be punched for attachment of the body on 9" centers with noexposed bolts or rivet heads on front of frame. Center cross rails shall be 16 gauge on alldouble and triple-tier locker frames for additional rigidity. Frame design shall provide clearaccess into locker equal to door width.

D. Body: Body of locker including tops, backs, sides, ends, and shelves shall be domestic 24gauge steel. Ends shall be flanged at back and installed over the sides to give doublethickness of metal at exposed end conditions. Tops, bottoms, and shelves flanged at all four(4) sides, with channel formation at front of shelves. Provide end closure pieces at wall.

E. Ventilation: Single-star standard lockers shall have six (6) louvers at top and bottom of door.

F. Hinges: Not less than three (3) hinges. Hinges shall be 2" long, 14 gauge, five-knuckle tightpin style, securely welded to the frame and fastened to the door with two (2) bolts andlocknuts.

G. Finish - All Locker Components: All steel parts shall be thoroughly machine cleaned andchemically treated with an iron phosphate coating to protect against rust and corrosion andto insure proper bonding of the enamel finish. Lockers shall be given a heavy coat of high-quality enamel with locker fronts being sprayed by means of an electro-static spray systemto give more uniform coverage. The lockers shall be baked at 325 degrees to assure aharder finish for longer usage. Color as selected by Architect.

H. Handles, Locking Devices, and Latches:1. Standard Handle: Handle shall be stationary, of chrome-plated die cast zinc with a

minimum tensile strength of 40,000 psi. It shall contain and guide a 12 gaugecadmium-plated steel lifter. The bottom of the lifter is accessible via a finger openingthrough the fixed handle. Handle to accept padlock by others.

2. Locking Device: Shall be quiet, positive, and operated by means of a springactuated slide latch, enclosed on four sides in a steel boxed receptacle in the lockbar channel, and engaging latch hooks on the frame. The device shall be tamper-proof and pre-locking, permitting latching without manipulating door latch lifter.

3. Latches:a. The frame latch hook shall be of 13 gauge steel, projection welded to

vertical channel frames. Three (3) frame latch hooks shall be provided asdoor strikes for single-tier lockers.

b. The slide latch shall be of strength, abrasion, and corrosion resistant moldednylon material designed to minimize latching noise levels.

c. All contact between moving parts, whether by impact of linear motion, shallbe cushioned by rubber or other means to achieve maximum soundsuppression.

10500 - 2 of 3



d. Doors must close against rubber bumpers on frame latch hooks. Bumpersshall be 2" long x 3/16" thick, and offset to provide an air cushion for doorimpact and shall be riveted to the hook with no less than two (2) rivets.

e. The operation of the standard handle lifter shall be cushioned againstimpact noise by means of live rubber pads, imbedded in the stationaryhandle at the upper and lower motion limits of the latch lifter.

f. The handle shall be attached to door with four (4) points of contact toprovide maximum protection against vandalism. Handles shall be securedto door and latch lifter to locking bar channel.

I. Number Plates: Each door shall have polished aluminum number plate with black etchednumbers not less than 3/8" high. Plates shall be attached to door with pop rivets.

J. Interior Equipment: 4. Coat Hooks: 12" wide single tier lockers shall be equipped with three (3) single

prong wall hooks per opening. All hooks shall be steel zinc plated with ballpointheads. Hooks shall be attached to locker bodies with two (2) bolts.

2. Equipment: Single tier lockers over 42" high shall have one (1) top shelf 10" fromthe locker top.

3. Provide continuous slope top at all lockers.

K. Benches and Pedestals:1. Benchtops shall be made from 9-1/2" wide x 1-1/4" thick northern hard maple

finished with a deep penetrating sealer and two (2) heavy coats of hot lacquer toresist abrasion and scratches.

2. Pedestals shall be 1-3/4" steel tubing welded to 10 gauge bases, and top height shallbe 16-1/2". Pedestal shall be spaced not more than 6'-0" on center. Finish ofpedestals shall match color of lockers. Each pedestal shall be attached to top byscrews and shall be anchored to floor by two (2) anchors.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install lockers in groups as shown on drawings. Follow installation instructions to achieve aplumb, level, rigid installation.

B. Properly anchor all lockers to walls and/or floors as required.

C. Latches: Adjust by moving latch hook to insure door is engaging latch hook properly.

D. Attach number plates in sequence after lockers are securely in place.


10500 - 3 of 3


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 10520 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETSAND ACCESSORIES

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



A. Extent of fire extinguishers, cabinets, and accessories is indicated on drawings.

B. Definition: "Fire extinguishers" as used in this section refers to units which can be hand-carried as opposed to those which are equipped with wheels or to fixed fire extinguishingsystems.

C. Types of products required include:1. Fire extinguishers2. Fire extinguisher cabinets3. Mounting brackets


A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain products in this section from one manufacturer.

B. UL-Listed Products: Provide new portable fire extinguishers which are listed and bear UL"Listing Mark" for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher indicated.

C. FM Listed Products: Provide new portable fire extinguishers which are approved by FactoryMutual Research Corporation for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher indicated andcarry appropriate FM marking.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Submit product data for each type of product included in this section. For fireextinguisher cabinets include roughing-in dimensions and details showing mounting methods,relationships of box, and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials,trim style and door construction, and panel style and materials.

1.05 SAMPLES

A. Submit for verification purposes, samples of each required finish. Prepare samples on metalof same gage as used for actual production run. Where normal color variations are to beexpected, include two (2) or more units in each sample set showing limits of variation.

B. For initial selection of colors and finishes, submit manufacturer's color cards showing fullrange of standard colors available.

10520 - 1 of 4



PART II - PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirement, provide products of one of thefollowing:1. J.L. Industries2. Larsen's Manufacturing Company

2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each extinguisher cabinet and other locationsindicated, in colors and finishes selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard whichcomply with requirements of governing authorities.1. Fill and service extinguishers to comply with requirements of governing authorities

and manufacturer's requirement.2. Abbreviations indicated below to identify extinguisher types related to UL classifica-

tion and rating system and not necessarily to type and amount of extinguishingmaterial contained in extinguisher.

B. Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10 lb. nominal capacity, inenameled steel container, for Class A, Class B, and Class C fires.

2.03 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Provide manufacturer's standard brackets designed to prevent accidental dislodgement ofextinguisher, of sizes required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in manufac-turer's standard plated finish.1. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets.2. B-2 wall bracket by Larsen's to be used as a standard.

2.04 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

A. General: Provide fire extinguisher cabinets where indicated, of suitable size for housing fireextinguishers of types and capacities indicated.

B. Construction: Manufacturer's standard enameled steel box, with trim, frame, door andhardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld all joints and grindsmooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Type: Suitable for mounting conditions indicated of the following types:1. Recessed: Cabinet box (tub) semi-recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style

of trim indicated.2. Model FS C2409-5R by Larsen's to used as a standard.

D. Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded and ground smooth.

E. Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlappingsurrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).1. Square-Edge Trim: Square edges with backbend depths as follows: 1/4" to 5/16".2. Trim Metal: Enameled steel.

10520 - 2 of 4



F. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard door construction of materialindicated, coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.1. Enameled Steel: Manufacturer's standard finish, hollow steel door construction with

tubular stiles and rails.

G. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design as indicated below and on drawing.1. Vertical Duo Panel: DSA Glass with catch.

H. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door operating hardware of proper typefor cabinet type, trim style and door material, and style indicated. Provide either level handlewith cam action latch, or door pull, exposed or concealed, and friction latch. Provideconcealed or continuous type hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.

2.05 FACTORY FINISHING OF FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations andapplication recommendations except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory afterproducts are assembled. Protect cabinets with plastic or paper covering, prior to shipment.

B. Painted Finishes: Provide painted finish to comply with requirements indicated below forextent, preparation and type:1. Extent of Painted Finish: Apply painted finish to both concealed and exposed

surfaces to cabinet components except where other than a painted finish isindicated.

2. Color: Provide color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.3. Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease and loose rust or mill scale.4. Baked Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, apply cabinet

manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish system to the following surfaces:a. Interior of cabinet.b. Exterior of cabinet.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if notindicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities.1. Prepare recesses in walls for fire extinguisher cabinets as required by type and size

of cabinet, style of trim, and to comply with manufacturer's instructions.2. Securely fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets to structure, square

and plumb, to comply with manufacturer's instructions.3. Install fire extinguishers +/- 3'-6" from finish floor to top of extinguisher. The

clearance between the floor and the bottom of installed hand-held extinguishers shallnot be less than 4 inches. Extinguishers with a gross weight not exceeding 40pounds should be installed so that the top of the extinguisher is not more than 5 feetabove the floor. Extinguishers with a gross weight greater than 40 pounds, exceptwheeled types, should be installed so that the top of the extinguisher is not morethan 3 feet above the floor.

10520 - 3 of 4



3.02 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify existence of fire extinguisher in cabinet with lettering spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER"applied to door and side of cabinet by process indicated below. Provide lettering to complywith requirements indicated for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location or, if not other-wise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard arrangements.1. Application Process: Silk screen.

B. Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with red letter decals spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER"applied to wall surface. Letter size, style, and location as selected by Architect.


10520 - 4 of 4


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 10655 - OPERABLE PARTITIONS - WOOD FRAMED GLASS

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



A. The following items are specifically included without limiting the generality implied by thesespecifications and the drawings. 1. All material, labor, equipment, etc. necessary for and incidental to the folding panel

partition installation. 2. All necessary blocking, reinforcement, etc. needed in work by other trades.

3. Omni-directional timber framed partitions installed including labor, equipment, etc.necessary for and incidental to the accordion partitions installation.

4. Furnish and install operable glass partitions and suspension system. Provide alllabor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for glass operable walls inaccordance with provisions of contract documents.

1.03 RELATED WORK BY OTHERS

A. Preparation of opening will be by General Contractor. Any deviation of site conditionscontrary to approved shop drawings must be called to the attention of the architect.

B. All header, blocking, support structures, jambs, and track enclosures, as required in 1.04Quality Assurance.

C. Prepunching of support structure in accordance with approved shop drawings.

D. Paint or otherwise finishing all trim and other materials adjoining head and jamb of thepartitions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Complete shop drawings are to be provided prior to fabrication indicating construction andinstallation details. Shop drawings must be submitted within 60 days after receipt of signedcontract.


A. Preparation of the opening shall conform to the criteria set forth per ASTM E557 StandardPractice for Architectural Application and Installation of Operable Partitions.

B. Glass shall be clear tempered per ASTM C1048-97b.

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Proper storage of partitions before installation and continued protection during and afterinstallation will be the responsibility of the General Contractor.

10655 - 1 of 3



1.07 WARRANTY

A. Track, carriers, and panel frames shall be guaranteed for one year against defects in materialand workmanship. The glass is not included in this warranty.

PART II - PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIAL

A. Acceptable Manufacturers -Hufcor, Modern Fold

1. Upon compliance with all of the criteria specified in this section. Manufacturerswishing to bid products similar to the product specified must submit to the architect10 days prior to bidding complete data in support of compliance and a list of threepast installations of products similar to those listed. The submitting manufacturerguarantees the proposed substituted product complies with the product specified andas detailed on the drawings. Hufcor, Modern Fold

2. Product to be top supported, individual, Series GT1 wood-framed glass panels asmanufactured by Hufcor.a. Panels shall be nominally 3" [43mm] (min. 1 3/4") thick and up to 48" [1219]

in width.b. Top, vertical, and bottom rails shall be solid wood of three way cross grain

lamination. c. Available wood species are poplar, white pine, red oak, maple, cherry,

walnut and mahogany as selected by Architect.d. Vertical lead rails shall contain full height partially recessed rubber bulb seal.e. Horizontal top & bottom rails shall incorporate continuous contact seals of

multi-ply vinyl.f. Each panel contains a mortise footbolt which extends into a floor mounted

plate to stabilize and secure each panel in the opening.g. Glass inserts shall be 1/4" [mm] tempered glass (standard)h. Glass shall be glazed using matching solid wood stops with mitered cuts on

one side of panel.

B. Weight of the panels shall be approximately 1/4" [6] tempered glass: 7.5 lbs. per sq. ft.

C. Suspension system1. Track shall be of clear anodized architectural grade extruded aluminum alloy 6063-

T6. Track design shall provide integral support for adjoining ceiling, soffit, or plenumsound barrier. Track shall be connected to the structural support by pairs of 3/8" [10]dia. threaded steel hanger rods.a. Each panel shall be supported by two 2-wheeled counter-rotating horizontal

carriers. Wheels to be of precision ground steel ball bearings enccased withmolded polymer tires.

D. Finishes1. Aluminum track shall be clear anodized

a. Optional upgrade:i. custom anodizedii. custom powder coated

2. Solid wood frame shall be unfinished requiring field finishing.3. Multiple sweep seals shall be brown.4. Hinged closure handle shall be aluminum finish.

10655 - 2 of 3



E. Available Accessories/Options1. Floor Locks

a. Adams Rite thumb turn floor lockb. Adams Rite keyed floor lock

2. 02 OPERATION

A. Panels shall be manually moved from the storage area, positioned in the opening, and eitheredge activated or face activated floorbolts set.

B. Final partition closure to be by (select one):1. Overlapping the opening

C. Stack/Store Panels1. Retract floorbolt and move to storage area. Panels are stored on stacks in storage

area(s).


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. The complete installation of the glass wall system shall be by an authorized factory-trainedinstaller and be in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings and manufacturer'sstandard printed specifications, instructions, and recommendations.

3.02 CLEANING

A. All track and panel surfaces shall be wiped clean and free of handprints, grease, and soil perspecific instructions.

B. Optional specialty glass requires special cleaning per instructions provided.

C. Cartoning and other installation debris shall be removed to onsite waste collection area.

3.03 TRAINING

A. Installer shall demonstrate proper operation and maintenance procedures to owner'srepresentative.

B. Owners manuals shall be provided to owner's representative.


10655 - 3 of 3


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL



A. This section consists of specifications for a variety of toilet accessories which may or maynot be exclusively used on this project. The extent of each type of toilet accessory is shownon drawings.

B. Types of toilet accessories required include but are not necessarily limited to the following1. Recessed paper towel dispenser/waste receptacle2. Surface Mounted hands free paper towel dispenser3. Recessed sanitary napkin dispensers4. Recessed toilet tissue dispensers - dual5. Surface mounted toilet tissue dispensers - single6. Wall mounted soap dispensers7. Grab bars - sizes and configurations as shown on plans8. Mirrors - flat surface mounted and tilted surface mounted9. Surface mounted wood towel box holders10. Surface mounted towel shelf with bar11. Recessed facial tissue dispensers12. Robe Hooks13. Bowed shower curtain rods14. Straight shower curtain rods15. Surface mounted folding shower seat16. Surface mounted folding tub seat

C. Some types of toilet accessories are included as part of toilet partitions elsewhere in Division10.


A. Inserts and Anchorage: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concreteor built into masonry; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.

B. Accessory Locations: Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid interferenceand to assure proper operation and servicing of accessory units.

C. Products: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and forunits exposed in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.

D. Manufacturer: Provide toilet accessories as manufactured by one of the following:1. Bradley Corp. (use as a standard)2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.3. Delta 4. American Specialties, Inc.5. Franklin Brass Mfg. Co., a Liberty Hardware Manufacturing Corp.6. Johnston Tombigbee (JTB) Furniture Co., Columbus, MS

10800 - 1 of 7



1. 04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for eachtoilet accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Furnish for Architect's approval in accordance with Division 1, copies eachof brochures, schedules and other pertinent information relative to toilet room accessoriesand building accessories.

C. Maintenance Manual: Furnish a schedule of all toilet room accessories, indicating the model,finish, manufacturer, and location installed, together with descriptive brochures of all installedequipment specified herein. This information shall be included in the maintenance manualspecified in Division 1.

D. Setting Drawings: Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions forinstallation of anchorage devices in other work.

PART II - PRODUCTS - COORDINATE ALL ACCESSORIES WITH BRAND REQUIREMENTS - COORDINATE WITH ALL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS

2. 01 RECESSED PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER / WASTE RECEPTACLE - TA-13.1

A. Recessed paper towel dispenser / waste receptacles shall be Bobrick Corp. Model 3944 orapproved equal.

B. Units shall be constructed of 22 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel with exposed surfaces inarchitectural brushed chrome and burr-free edges with 1" flange and 1/4" return. Doors ofdouble panel, nonflexing construction, equipped with full length piano hinges and tumblerlocks. Rolled on towel dispenser lip. Towel capacity: Either 1100 single fold, or 800 multi-fold or 500 C-fold towels.

C. Unit shall meet ANSI A117.1-1992 requirements for use by person in a wheelchair.

2. 02 SURFACE MOUNTED PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER

A. Shall be IN-Sight LEV-R-MATIC by Kimberly-Clark Roll Towel Dispenser #09765 with smokegray 13.3" x 13.5"x9.8" brushed chrome

2. 03 SURFACE MOUNTED HANDS FREE PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER - TA-13

A. Shall be Georgia-Pacific enMotion Mfg. #59462 or approved equal. Size: 14.8" x 9.75" x16.75" brushed chrome

B. Shall be Bradley #2490 Heavy gauge steel, with plastic door or approved equal. Size: 10-1/2'"x 8.75" x 14.5"

2. 04 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSERS - RECESSED A. Sanitary napkin dispenser units shall be recessed, Model 401 as manufactured by Bradley

Corp. or approved equal. Furnish units with coin operation of denomination as selected byArchitect.

10800 - 2 of 7



B. Doors shall be 22 gauge, brushed chrome stainless steel. Provide locking device, tumbleras standard with manufacturer.

C. Cabinet shall be 20 and 26 gauge Type 304 stainless steel brushed chrome.

2. 05 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL UNITS - RECESSED - TA-14

A. Sanitary napkin disposal units shall be recessed, Model 4731-15 as manufactured by BradleyCorp. or approved equal. Furnish units with coin operation of denomination as selected byArchitect.

B. Doors shall be 22 gauge, satin finish stainless steel. Provide locking device, tumbler asstandard with manufacturer.

C. Cabinet shall be 20 and 26 gauge Type 304 stainless steel.

2. 06 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS - DOUBLE - TA-1.1, 1.3

A. Provide one (1) toilet tissue dispenser at each water closet. Units shall be Bobrick Model No.697 or approved equal. Unit shall be constructed of 22 gauge brushed chrome plated steelwith controlled delivery mechanism.

2. 07 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER - UNDER VANITY SKIRT - SINGLE - TA-1.2

A. Provide one (1) toilet tissue dispenser at each water closet. Units shall be Franklin BrassModel No. 5508B or approved equal.

B. Unit shall be constructed of 22 gauge chrome plated steel.

2. 08 FACIAL TISSUE DISPENSER - RECESSED

A. Provide one (1) toilet tissue dispenser at each water closet. Units shall be Franklin BrassModel No. 935 or approved equal.

B. Unit shall be constructed of 22 gauge brushed chrome plated steel with controlled deliverymechanism.

2. 09 SOAP DISPENSERS - WALL MOUNTED - TA-20

A. Surface mounted vertical soap dispensers shall be Bradley Model #6562 or approved equal.

B. Finish: brushed chrome

C. Capacity: 40 Ounces

2. 10 GRAB BARS - TA-4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8, 4.9

A. Grab bars at toilets shall be of configuration as indicated, as manufactured by Franklin Brass.Model 5600 Series, Bobrick 6800 Series, or approved equal.

10800 - 3 of 7



B. Grab bars shall be constructed of Type 304 stainless steel brushed chrome and shall havea minimum wall thickness of 18 gauge. Exposed surfaces shall have a satin finish. Diameter(O.D.) shall be 1-1/2". Provide 11 gauge stainless steel flanges and 13 gauge stainless steelmounting plate. Gripping area shall have knurled or textured surface to comply withapplicable Accessible Codes.

C. Grab bars shall be mounted at heights and in locations indicated on drawings.

D. Sizes: as shown on Drawings.

E. Provide all required anchoring devices to properly mount grab bars in a secure manner soas to adequately support the load to be imposed.

F. Grab bars shall meet all applicable provision of ANSI 117.1 1992.

G. Provide grab bars at all locations as indicated on drawings.

2. 11 MIRRORS - FLAT SURFACE MOUNTED - TA-18

A. Sizes shall be as indicated on drawings and shall be Bradley Corp. Model No. 781 orapproved equal.

B. Frame fabricated of 18 gauge Type 304 brushed chrome stainless steel with welded andpolished corners and no screws or seams appearing on surface. Mirror shall be No. 1 quality1/4" polished plate glass, triple silvered electro-copper plated, baked enamel backing.

C. If flat surface mounted mirror is shown on plans for use at handicapped lavatories thenmounting height shall comply with ADA requirements.

2. 12 MIRRORS - TILTED SURFACE MOUNTED

A. Sizes shall be as indicated on drawings and shall be Bradley Corp. Model No. 740 orapproved equal.

B. Frame fabricated of 18 gauge Type 304 brushed chrome stainless steel with welded andpolished corners and no screws or seams appearing on surface. Mirror shall be No. 1 quality1/4" polished plate glass, triple silvered electro-copper plated, baked enamel backing.

C. Provide tilt mirrors at all handicapped lavatories unless indicated otherwise on plans.

2. 13 WOOD TOWEL BOX HOLDERS W/ SINGLE BAR - SURFACE MOUNTED

A. Wooden box tool holders shall be either the 3 Section w/ Single Bar Model #7099-202 or the5 Section “L” Shaped w/Single Bar Model # 7099-203 as manufactured by the JTB FurnitureCo., Columbus, MS 39704 for Hampton Inn Hotels.

B. The towel box holders shall be finished as per the manufacturer’s specifications for theseparticular items and Hampton Inn standards.

C. Installation shall be as outlined in Division 6 Section 06220 Rough and Finish Carpentry.

10800 - 4 of 7



2. 14 TOWEL SHELVES - TA 21A. Three square edge floating shelves to be 1.25" to 2.5" thick and be 8" deep by 16" wide.

Each shelve to have two blind supports and be finished in white high pressure laminate.

2. 15 DOUBLE TOWEL SHELVES - SURFACE MOUNTED

A. Towel shelf and bars shall be Delta - Traditional Style # 79625- BN constructed entirely ofType 304 stainless steel with brushed chrome or approved equal. Windemere Double towelbar.

B. Support arm and flange shall be equipped with concealed 16 gauge mounting bracket whichlocks to concealed stainless steel wall plate with stainless steel set screw.

C. Shelf and towel bar shall be heavy gauge 5/16" square stainless steel tubes welded tosupport arms.

2. 16 FACIAL TISSUES DISPENSERS - RECESSED

A. Recessed facial tissue dispensers shall be Franklin Brass Model #935. Constructed of 22gauge Type 304 brushed chrome stainless steel or approved equal.

B. Install as shown on plans.

2. 17 ROBE HOOKS - TA-2

A. Robe hooks shall be Franklin Brass Model #1402 brushed chrome. An additional lower robehook is required at all handicap guest bathrooms or approved equal.

B. Hooks shall have concealed fasteners and satin finish.

2. 18 SHOWER CURTAIN RODS - BOWED -TA-3

A. Provide and install at each bathtub one (1) curved shower curtain rod, Franklin Brass Model#190-5BS or approved equal.

B. Rod length to be as required for each location.

C. Unit shall be constructed of 20 gauge type 304 stainless steel. Finish to be brushed chrome

2. 19 SHOWER CURTAIN RODS - STRAIGHT - TA-3.1

A. Provide and install at each bathtub one (1) straight shower curtain rod, Bobrick Model #297x 60 or approved equal.

B. Rod length to be as required for each location.

C. Unit shall be constructed of 20 gauge chrome plated steel. Finish to be brushed chromesteel.

10800 - 5 of 7



2. 20 FOLDING SHOWER SEATS - SURFACE MOUNTED - TA-17

A. Provide folding shower seats where shown on drawings. Seats shall be as manufactured byBobrick Model #B-5181or approved equal (Seat configuration as shown on drawings).

B. Seat to be one piece, ½" thick, solid phenolic with matte-finish, ivory colored, melaminesurfaces and black phenolic-resin core which cannot delaminate. Integral slots for waterdrainage. Secured to frame with stainless steel carriage bolts and acorn nuts. Reversiblefor left or right-hand installation in the field.

C. Frame to be 18-8 S, Type 304 stainless steel with brushed chrome. 16 gauge, 1-1/4" squaremembers and 18 gauge 1" diameter tubing.

D. Baseplate shall be 18-8 S, Type 304 heavy-gauge stainless steel.

E. Spring shall be 17-7, Type 301 24 gauge stainless steel. Spot weld to baseplate.

F. Guide Bracket shall be 18-8 S, Type 304 16 gauge stainless steel with brushed chrome.

2. 21 FOLDING TUB SEAT - SURFACE MOUNT

A. Provide folding bathtub seats where shown on drawings. Seats shall be as manufacturedby ASI Model #108-8358-1or approved equal.

B. Fold-Up Bathtub Seat is fabricated of 1" OD alloy 18-8 type 304 stainless steel tubing witha brushed chrome and ½" thick made of solid phenolic with ivory color on top and bottomsurfaces with black edges.

C. Mounting and retainer brackets are stainless steel 8 gauge and come with countersunk holesfor No 10 stainless steel screws.

D. Structural assembly is welded construction and all exposed edges and corners are roundedand smoothed. Mounting brackets are permanently attached to seat frame.

E. Rubber grip pads are permanently applied to surfaces that come into contact with tub.

F. Wall mounted retainer hook shall hold seat up when in storage position and shall be suppliedloose. The seat shall be mounted to have the surface of seat minimum 17" high to 19" highabove bathroom floor, per ADA standards 610.2

2. 22 TOWEL BAR - SURFACE MOUNTED - TA 8

A. Towel shelf and bars shall be Bobrick Model #B-674 x length, constructed entirely of Type304 stainless steel with satin finish or approved equal.

B. Support arm and flange shall be equipped with concealed 16 gauge mounting bracket whichlocks to concealed stainless steel wall plate with stainless steel set screw.

10800 - 6 of 7




3. 01 INSPECTION

Installer must examine substrates, previously installed inserts and anchorages necessary formounting of toilet accessories, and other conditions under which installation is to occur, and mustnotify Contractor in writing of condition detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do notproceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable toinstaller.

3. 02 INSTALLATION

Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using fasteners which areappropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level,firmly anchored in locations indicated. Contractor shall verify and coordinate proper vertical andhorizontal mounting heights for all handicap and ADA Compliant products.

3. 03 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly.

B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing protective coatings.


10800 - 7 of 7


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 10914 - CLOSET ACCESSORIES

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



A. Extent of each type of furnishing accessory is shown on drawings and schedules.

B. Types of accessories required include the following: Coat Racks.


A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid interference and toassure proper operation and servicing of accessory units.

B. Uniformity: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and forunits exposed in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for accessories. Include installationinstructions for accessories which are built in or connected to other work.

B. Setting Drawings: Provide setting drawings, templates, and instructions for installation ofanchorage devices in other work.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCESSORIES

A. Guest Rooms and all Public Area Closets:1. Hat and Coat Rack: Hat and coat rack as shown on drawings shall be EMCO

Custom Shelf System No. R1 as manufactured by EMCO, Inc. or approved equalproduct/manufacturer. Provide one shelf consisting of four minimum 1" rectangularaluminum tubes protected at both ends with locked plastic plugs. Black die castaluminum brackets shall utilize concealed fasteners to eliminate clamps or straps onshelf surface. Black vertical standards of 3/16" aluminum shall hold brackets to thewall and allow adjustability of the full shelf. Wall mountings and brackets shall bespaced per manufacturer's standard, but shall not exceed 40 inches.

2. Hangar System: (IR) Hangar bar shall be 1" black extruded aluminum tube cappedat each end. Hangar model No. 11 Ball captive with #B hangar receptacle shall beprovided a 3" o.c. Hangar shall be black molded plastic.

3. Finish of Shelves: Satin Anodized.

10914 - 1 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 10914 - CLOSET ACCESSORIES

B. Laundry, Employee and all Back Area Closets:1. Closet Rods: Closet rods as shown on drawings shall be as manufactured by the

Knape and Vogt Manufacturing Co. or approved equal. Closet rod shall be Model # 770-1 heavy duty chrome look finish tubing. Closet rod tubing flange shall beModel # 735 chrome look finish.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Surface-Mounted and Recessed Accessory Units: Install accessory units in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions, using fasteners which are appropriate to substrate andrecommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored inlocations indicated.

B. Freestanding Accessory Units: Install freestanding accessory units in scheduled locationsafter finishes have been completed and prior to final acceptance in each area.


Adjust necessary items for proper operation and verify that all components are in place andfunctioning smoothly. Clean and polish exposed surfaces, using materials and methods recom-mended by manufacturer of accessory item.


10914 - 2 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 10914# - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES - KNOX BOX

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



Furnish all miscellaneous work to complete installation of the Knox Box’s at each residential unit.


Manufacturer of specialty items shall have been specified for at least five (5) years.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Data: Catalog illustrations with descriptive data showing dimensions,construction, etc.

B. Shop Drawings: When required, showing installation details, provide in accordance with

Division 1.


A. Products shall be delivered to the site in manufacturer's original containers, with labels intactand showing contents and name of project.

B. Store in protected area until installed.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.01 LIST OF ITEMS

A. The following items are included under this Section: 1. Knox Box - 3200 Series Hinged Door

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

The manufacturers listed for each item below denotes the type, style, quality, and function desired. Manufacturers of equivalent quality, etc. will be considered prior to Bid date.

10914 - 1 of 2


ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 10914# - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES - KNOX BOX

2.03 KNOX BOX

A. Manufacturer: Knox Company or approved equal.

B. Model #3200 Recessed Mount to be mounted as shown on drawings.

C. Recessed Mount Flange - 7"hx7"w. UL listed, double action rotating tumblers and hardenedsteel pins accessed by a biased cut key. 1/4" Steel plate housing, ½" steel door with interiorgasket seal and stainless steel door hinge. Lock has 1/8" thick stainless steel dust cover withtamper seal mounting capability.

D. See plans for exact location and dimensions.

E. Color as selected by architect.


10914 - 2 of 2

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 11175 - LINEN CHUTE

PART I - GENERAL

1. 01 GENERAL



The work in this section includes all labor and materials for the installation of a linen chute asindicated on the drawings.

1. 03 SUBMITTALS

Submit manufacturer’s product data including installation details and instructions, UL certification, andall other pertinent information.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2. 01 MATERIALS

A. Furnish and install in accordance with the drawings, a 24" diameter linen chute asmanufactured by Wilkinson Chutes, 11A Kimball Place, Mount Vernon, New York 10550,(914) 664-8202 (Ron Roque, Area Repr.).

B. Chute Material: Chute shall be made of not lighter than 16 gauge aluminized steel orstainless steel.

C. Intakes: 21" wide x 21" high, hand-operated intake doors, self-closing, side hinged with 1-1/2hour B labeled, temp. rise-30 min. 250 deg. Max. for drywall installation.

D. Discharge: At discharge end of chute, provide a self-closing door with fusible link. Hoppertype with supporting pedestal. A top-hinged B label type hopper door.

E. Door Frame Trim: Shall be 20 ga. stainless steel molding, screw fastened to frame withstainless steel screws. Door frame trim shall be embossed with the words “SOILED LINEN”.

F. Floor frames: Standard floor frames are 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 3/16" angles and 1-1/2" x 3/16" barstock welded assembly.

G. Accessories: ½" NPT sprinkler and ½" NPT flushing heads with 3/4" orifice above top intake. Additional ½" sprinkler head at every second intake (as required by local code).

H. Chute Construction: Chute shall be fully factory assembled with all joints welded. There shallbe one (1) expansion joint per floor and a flush interior, assembled without bolts, rivets, orclips. The intake door and frames shall be adjustable and securely fastened to the intakethroats that are formed as an integral part of the tube. Chute shall be straight and plumb withno offset.

11175 - 1 of 2

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 11175 - LINEN CHUTE

I. Erection: Sheet metal contractor shall assemble the chute in place as per detail in shopdrawings and align and anchor as required. Plumbing contractor to connect all water supplylines to flushing and sprinkler heads. Electrical contractor to complete any wiring that maybe necessary. Masonry or carpenter contractor to erect surrounding wall after chute anddoors are set in place.


3. 01 INSTALLATION

Install as per manufacturer’s instructions and in strict compliance with local codes.


11175 - 2 of 2

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 13153 – INDOOR SALT WATER SWIMMING POOL & SPA

13153 - 1 of 16

PART I – GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK Work in this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, furnishing and installing the following:

A. Construction of complete swimming pool under Design/Build Agreement between the Contractor and Pool Supplier/Installer. Design shall meet all requirements of Health, Local, State and Federal Codes. Work shall include related equipment and accessories as shown, required or implied, as necessary to accomplish the complete operation of the pool in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, and as required by state and local codes and health department, whether or not all items are specifically shown or specified. Pool design, including grade beams, pool wall structure and pier foundation to be performed by a licensed Structural Engineer in the State that work is being performed. Coordination with geotechnical report for site specific requirements is required.

B. Pool & Spa Constructed of Gunite and Shotcrete System:

1. The Pool Contractor shall be responsible for design and installation of indoor pool and spa system.

C. Pool Contractor shall be responsible for submitting and securing necessary approvals and permits, including payment of fees, and expenses for the preparation of any required documentation.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 02300: Earthwork.

B. Section 09310: Ceramic Tile. C. Division 15 and 16 Specifications for the following:

1. Excavation for electrical and plumbing lines. 2. Pool deck hose bibs.

3. Cold water supply within pool equipment room.

4. Gas line for pool heaters. 5. Conduit wiring, receptacles and disconnects to the pool equipment room.

6. Pool and Spa heater flues.

7. Filter room, decks, sealing of joints between pool and deck, shall be provided as work of other sections.

8. Connection of floor & deck drains and hose bibs is specified in Division 15. 9. Connection and design of pool heater to gas source and heater vent piping in equipment room shall be performed by Contractor.

10. Connection of automatic water fill system and fill spout cold water lines from water source in equipment room is specified in Division 15.

11. Connection of all pool equipment, starters and switches: grounding of pool pool equipment, pool lights and niches, and wiring of pool lights from electrical panel in equipment room is specified in Division 16.


13153 - 2 of 16

1.04 REFERENCES A. Applicable requirements of the following Specifications and Codes apply to work of this Section:

1. National Spa and Pool Institute (NSPI): Minimum Standards for Public Swimming Pools.

2. Local building and health codes.

3. National Electrical Code (NEC). 4. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF): Seal of approval program.

5. Gunite Contractors Association (GCA): Technical Publication G-84, entitled Gunite and Shotcrete.

6. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Specifications referenced herein.

7. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Coding and Labeling.

8. Tile Council of America, Inc. "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation".


A. System shall include:

1. Provide systems of fully compatible components and construction methods required for complete and operable systems for indoor swimming pool & spa including but not limited to excavation, dewatering of construction area and removal of excess earth from site.

2. Gunite and shotcrete shell. a. Finish: Pebble-Tech or 3M aggregate finish. Color as selected by

owner.

3. Excavating, hauling, backfilling, grading and incidental earthwork in conjunction with the construction of the swimming pool.

a. Handle and dispose of excess materials, regardless of type, character, or composition.

4. Connections of water and gas to pool equipment.

5. Connection of motors, pumps, compressors, switches and timers, lights and wiring necessary for interfacing of equipment.

6. Pool Equipment. a. Filter Systems. b. Flow Meters. c. Water Treatment Systems. d. Gas Heaters – Natural Gas (300,000 Btu/hr for pool / 175,000 Btu/hr

for Spa) Sealed combustion units. e. Recirculation Pumps and Motors. f. Piping. g. Fittings, Lights and Accessories. h. Deck Drain System. i. Provide (2) 14”x14” louvers with motorized dampers and power for pool

equipment. Final sizing and location of louver should be by pool design build company and coordinated with HVAC Contractor as a part of this design build.

j. Provisions for combustion air (make-up)and exhaust. Are design build with HVAC contractor and

1.06 SUBMITTAL

A. Provide submittal information as specified below, in addition refer to Section 01330 for more specific submittal requirements.


13153 - 3 of 16

B. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer's technical literature with installation and storage institutions for each product specified.

2. Pumps: Pump performance curves indicating GPM vs, TDH maximum efficiency point, and maximum a amperage draw, together with current characteristics and service factor of motor.

C. Provide submittal information as specified below, in addition refer to Section 01330 for more specific submittal requirements.

D. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's technical literature with installation and storage institutions for

each product specified. 2. Pumps: Pump performance curves indicating GPM vs, TDH maximum

efficiency point, and maximum a amperage draw, together with current characteristics and service factor of motor.

E. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit the following Shop Drawings to the Owner's Agent for approval: a. Complete design of swimming pool, including all component parts,

attachments devices, or other work, filtration filter, size, turn-over capacity, and supporting calculations.

b. Foundation plan and details and Sections through pool shall be included.

c. Mechanical Schematic. d. Detail for ladder and pool wall interface.

2. Show all shop erection details.

3. All Shop Drawings shall be certified and sealed by a Professional Engineer, registered in the state in which the project is being submitted.

4. The pool manufacturer shall certify to the Owner that the depth and configuration of the pool is acceptable and compatible with all known safety standards for the manufacturer's designed product.

F. Samples:

1. Precast concrete pool coping deck and in spa deck, one-12 inch long section of coping, complete with stenciled depth marking (markings shall be on top of coping and side of pool – provide depth markings/and no dive symbols in both English and Metric)

2. Provide depth marking and ‘No diving’ symbols in both English and Metric.

3. Submit three (3) samples of aggregate pool finish for approval by owner’s agent.

G. Quality Control:

1. Design Data: a. Hydraulic analysis: Engineer's sealed calculations and total dynamic

head (TDH) for swimming pool system for equipment other than that specified.

H. At the completion of the work, the Pool Contractor shall furnish to the Owner three (3)

bound copies of an operation manual. Minimum content of these manuals shall be:

1. Operating Instructions.

2. Equipment Literature with Parts Listed of all Equipment.

3. Water Chemistry Procedures.


13153 - 4 of 16

4. Test Reports.

5. Sealed Engineer's Drawings.

6. Suggested safety Procedures.

7. Repainting/Refinishing Procedures. 8. Include Chemical Analysis of Source/Make-Up Water Supply.

9. Copies of Manufacturer's Warranties. 10. Certificates: From local Authorities indicating that Pool Construction Performance conforms to requirements of respective authorities.

I. At the completion of the work, the Pool Contractor shall fill the pool with water and

instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the operation of all equipment.

J. The Pool Contractor Shall test the Owner's natural water supply and furnish and supply startup chemicals as required for start-up, including salt and requirements to balance total alkalinity and calcium hardness, and shall obtain same.

K. The Pool Contractor shall provide a “Certified” start-up of the pool and all equipment.


A. All work under this Section must be performed by a Contractor experienced and regularly engaged in building, commercial swimming pools. Contractors bidding this work must have completed five (5) projects within the past ten years equal to or larger than this project.

B. Pool specifications and related pool drawings are to be considered as performance guidelines only meeting minimum requirements which may change as result of local code and health department requirements.

1. The project Drawings and Specifications supplement each other. In the event of a conflict, the Specifications shall govern. Piping locations are schematic. Precise locations of piping shall be determined by actual field condition. Fittings are not shown. The Pool Contractor shall include all fittings normally required for a complete system.

2. This contractor shall be responsible for reviewing the complete Set of Contract Documents and coordinate work with other trades.

C. All work under this Section shall be inspected and installed in accordance with all

current local and state codes and regulations. 1. The Pool Contractor shall obtain the following:

a. Board of Health Design Approvals. b. State Board of Health Inspections and Final Approvals.

c. Structural and Electrical Inspections and Final Approvals on his Portion of the Work.

D. The standards of these Plans and Specification are intended to provide the Owner with a low maintenance pool.

E. Pool Contractor to be responsible for design and installation of pools, including required.

F. Contractor's design drawings must be sealed and signed by a licensed Engineer registered in State in which project is being constructed.


13153 - 5 of 16

G. Contractor shall submit, on his letterhead, a list of all variations and deviations he finds that differ between local code requirements and bid drawings.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Coordination: Coordinate this work with the work of other Sections to avoid any delay or interference with other work.

1. Filter room, decks, sealing of joints between pool and deck, fencing and landscaping shall be provided as work by other Sections.

2. Connection of all pool equipment, starter and switches: grounding of pool, pool equipment, pool lights and niches, and wiring of pool lights shall be performed by Pool Subcontractor from electrical panel in equipment room.

3. Connection of floor drains, deck drains and hose bibs shall be provided as work of other Sections.

4. Connection of pool heater to gas source and heater vent piping in equipment room shall be provided as work of other sections.

5. Provisions for combustion air vent piping will be provided as work by other sections.

6. Connection of automatic water fill system and fill spout cold water lines from water source in equipment room shall be performed by Pool Subcontractor.

B. Lines, Grades, and Elevations:

1. The General Contractor shall establish a bench mark for elevations and control points for measurements and layouts. The Pool Contractor shall be responsible for lines, grades and measurements from these points required for the installation of the pool.

C. Utilities: 1. The Contractor shall supply the water required for construction and filling and testing of the pool from permanent accepted system.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. The Pool Contractor shall warranty his work against defects in labor and equipment, including paint, for a period of one year from Substantial Completion. Substantial Completion shall be defined as the date of acceptance by the Owner or initial usage, whichever occurs first. This warranty shall not include minor defects that do not affect the use of the pool such as scratches, minor dents, or concrete curing cracks.


2.01 MANUFACTURERS The following manufacturers are approved for as identified in the individual paragraph below:

A. Approved Manufactures: 1. A&B Brush 2. American Olean tile Co. 3. American Products 4. Anchor Industries, Inc. 5. Berkeley (Sta-Rite Water Systems) 6. Bio-Lab, Inc. 7. Blue White Industries 8. Cal-June, Inc. 9. Dal-Title Corp


13153 - 6 of 16

10. Degroot Studios 11. Federal Stone 12. Frost Co. 13. Gould Pumps 14. Grace Construction Products 15. Hydrotech Chemical Co. 16. Mameco International, Inc. a Division of Tremco, Inc 17. Mar-Max 18. Mec-O-Matic (Pulsafeeader) 19. Mortex Manufacturing. Inc. 20. PAC_FAB, Inc. (see paragon aquatics) 21. Paragon Aquatics, a Division of PAC-FAB, Inc. 22. Purex 23. Quaker Plastic Corporation 24. Rainbow 25. Raypak, Inc. 26. George Fischer Signet Scientific Co. 27. Spectrum Pool Products 28. Spiralock 29. Sta-Rite Pool/Spa Group 30. Stenner 31. Swan Manufacturing 32. Swimquip (see Sta-Rite Pool/Spa Group) 33. Taylor Devices, Inc. 34. Telodyne Laar 35. Whitten (Aquatic Development Group) 36. W.R. Meadowss, Pool Deck Const. Prod. 37. VAC PAK 38. 3M Colorquartz Premium Splash manufacturer’s rep. Bob Wagner 39. Pebble Tec

2.02 POOL STRUCTURE – GENERAL

A. Size of pool shall be as shown on Drawings.

B. Joint sealant shall be polyurethane, Mameco Vulkem No. 45.

C. Ceramic Tile: Tile used in conjunction with surface in contact with water shall be furnished and installed by pool Contractor.

2.03 POOL & SPA MATERIALS A. Concrete: 1. Definitions:

a. Gunite: Dry mix. Originally a trade name used to designate a mixture of Portland cement and sand thoroughly mixed dry, passed through a cement gun and conveyed by air through a flexible tube, hydrated at the nozzle and placed by air pressure.

b. Shotcrete: Wet-mix. Transit-mix (ready-mix) combination of Portland cement aggregates and water, pumped in a plastic state to the nowle, where air is added to place the material.

2. Materials and mixes for Gunite and Shotcrete shall conform to GCA publication G-84.


13153 - 7 of 16

3. Gunite:

a. Aggregate: ASTM C 33, washed sand; clean, hard, sharp particles, well graded in size within the following limits:

SIZE PERCENT BY WEIGHT Passing through 3.8 inch screen 100 Passing through No. 4 95 to 100 Passing through No. 8 65 to 90 Passing through No. 16 45 to 75 Passing through No. 30 30 to 50 Passing through No. 50 10 to 22 Passing through No. 100 2 to 8

b. Mix one part cement to 4 1/2 parts of sand based on dry, loose volume (minimum 3,000 psi compressive strength in 28 days).

c. Portland cement and water: specified hereinafter. 4. Shotcrete:

a. Transit mix (ready-mix) materials conforming to aggregate specified above for "Gunite" and with the additional following grading for pea gravel: Sieve Size Percent by Weight

1/2" 100 3/8" 90

b. Mix Strength: Minimum 5,000 psi compressive strength in 28 days. c. Submit design mix and certify material for weight, water content and

mixing time. d. Portland Cement and Water. As specified hereinafter.

5. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. 6. Water: Potable. 7. Forms: Exterior plywood, APA-B8 Plyform Class 1, mill-oiled. 8. Form Oil: Lacquer or resin type compatible with mill-oil. 9. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615 grade 40. 10. Gauging Wire: Piano wire, 0.027" thick.

B. Ceramic Tile:

1. "No Diving"(International Symbol) and Depth Marker Tiles: a. DeGroot Studios

2. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic tile at step Nosings: a. Approved Manufacturers:

i . Dal-Tile i i . American Olean Tile Co.

3. Provide certification by Manufacturer for use in pools. 4. 6"x 6" at water line below coping cap and at spa seating areas (refer to Interior

Finish Index). See Drawings for location of special 8"x 8" tile with 6" high silk screened depth marking in feet and inches are required by local and state public swimming pool codes. Adjacent to each depth marker, provide international symbol "No Diving" sign tile. "No Diving" tile shall be, 8"x8" for skim-line and 8" x 8" for deck (non-slip) white ceramic with black lettering and markings and a red circle with cross hatch.

5. Depth markings and no diving tiles shall be placed on the vertical pool walls as part of the 8" tile band below the coping so as to be easily readable from waterside. Depth markings and "No Diving" tiles on horizontal surface of deck, shall be within 18" of the water edge and positioned to be read while standing on the deck facing the water. Pool markings shall be placed at maximum and minimum depths, all points of slope change, and even foot of depth increment. Markers shall be spaced at no more than 25-foot intervals and arranged to be uniformly located at the ends and sides of pool.


13153 - 8 of 16

6. 2" x 2" non-slip unglazed ceramic mosaic tile in color as shown in Interior Finish Index at step nosings formed a band width to meet local codes.

7. Tile Mortar and Grout: as specified in section 09310-Ceramic Tile.

8. Refer to Interior Finish Index for colors. C. Pool Finish Plaster: 3M Colorquartz Premium Splash Pebble-Tech is accepted as an

“As Equal”. Installation per manufacturer’s recommendations. Submit color samples to owner for approval.

D. Sealant and Back-Up Material: See Section 07920 - Sealants.

E. Precast Concrete Pool and Spa Coping.

1. Precast concrete, wet pour, white, 12" wide x minimum 2' long bull nosed coping stone with raised slip resistant pattern on upper surface. Provide one- piece radius corners.

2.04 FILTER SYSTEM

A. Pressure Filters: 1. Approved Manufacturers:

a . Pac-Fab b . Sta-Rite c. Approved by Pool Designer.

2. Filter systems: Listed as approved by the National Sanitation Foundation for sand filters at flow rates of 20 GPM per square foot of filter area, and bear the National Sanitation Foundation Seal of Approval. Maximum filter flow rate shall not exceed 15 GPM per square foot of filter area.

3. Filter or Filter Battery Stainless steel of fiberglass hi-rate pressure sand filters.

4. Include with each filter top mounted influent pressure gauge, reading 0 to 60 psi, manual air release valve, multi-port diameter valve, backwash site glass and transparent dame top.

B. Filter Media: Sand, with an effective size of 0.45 to 0.55 mm with uniformly coefficient of

1.6 maximum. C. Filter Face Piping:

1. Pipe, valves and fittings shall make a complete unit or battery from inlet to outlet.

2. Arrange piping to carry out operations of filtering, backwashing and by-pass of filter for pool draining.

3. Face pipe and fittings: PVC SCH 40.

2.05 FLOW METERS

A. Flow Meter: 1. Approved Manufacturers:

a . Pac-Fab b . Sta-Rite

c . "CF-300 Series; Blue White Industries, pilot tube type.

d . Approved by Pool Designer


13153 - 9 of 16

2.06 SALT WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM System requires a power supply (control box) and a manifold assembly that contains electrolytic cells. The Power supply should be interfaced to an ORP controller. Provided a Manifold if flow rate exceeds 100 gpm; plumb it in a bypass configuration. Salt must be replenished periodically to maintain the 3000 ppm level. There should be a warning on the power supply should the Salt fall below 2500 ppm, but will continue to generate chlorine. Should it fall below 2000 ppm, it will shut down due to operating too low on Salt. The Power Supply will calculate how much Salt the pool operator needs to add, to maintain 3000 ppm. There are no issues if the salt level is increased above 3000 ppm. However, at 6000 ppm or greater, the salt concentration can be corrosive to stainless steel handrails, ladders, and light rings in the pool, and heat exchangers.

A. Chemical Feeder: 1. Approved Manufacturers: (Must be NSF50 listed) a. AquaCal AutoPilot, Inc. b. Approved by Pool Designer 2. Flow Requirements per Manifold: a. 20 gpm minimum, 40-50 gpm ideal, 100 gpm maximum i. Excessive flow rates greater than 100 gpm will require a bypass configuration (1) Bypass configuration will require isolation valves on the inlet and outlet of the manifold, and a Butterfly Valve, or other approved valve, to adjust flow to the manifold assembly. 3. Quantity: As per NYS Guidelines, the minimum pounds per day output of the

Salt Chlorinator System is based on the Design Flow Rate x 0.12 = lbs/day.

B. Chemicals 1. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Pool Salt is needed to maintain 3000 ppm of salinity. Approved salt include any Industry available salt labeled for swimming pool salt chlorine generator systems. b. Includes but not limited to: i. Aqua Salt ii. Pool Salt iii. or Approved by Pool Designer

C. Test Kit: 1. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Any current NY State approved test kits are acceptable for standard chlorine and pH testing.

b. Salt Test Meters or Strips can be used on a monthly basis, to include but not limited to AquaCheck (uantab) Strips, Lamotte Pocket Tester, MyronL Salinity Meter.

2.07 POOL HEATERS

A. Pool Heaters: 1. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Teledyne Laars

b. Raypak c. Approved Substitution.


13153 - 10 of 16

B. Heaters:

1. Size for pool as shown on the Drawings, complete. Design based on maintaining a temperature of 80 degreed F approx. 300,000 Btu/hr for Pool and 175,000 Btu/hr for Spa – Natural Gas. Units are to be sealed combustion units ducted to the outside

2. Heaters must be A.S.M.E. coded and labeled.

C. Furnish in-line thermometer with 2 degrees F intervals and a minimum range of 60- 120 degrees F.

2.08 RECIRCULATING PUMP AND MOTOR

A. Pumps: 1. Approved Manufacturers:

a . Sta-rite b . Purex

c . Pac-Fab

d . Approved Substitution.

B. Pump Motors:

1. Energy efficient, UL listed "E-plus Century"; Gould Pumps, Inc.

2. Electrical Characteristics: As shown on Drawings. 2.09 PIPING

A. Piping within filter room: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), Type 1-1220, Schedule 40 IPS, Class #135 N.S.F. approved and labeled.

B. Pool fill line: Schedule K copper. C. Filtered water supply piping to pool: Schedule 80 PVC N.S.F. approved.

D. Filter connection piping which connects the filter plant to the filter pump and to the

recirculation piping, backwash piping and other piping associated with filter system: PVC, Type 1-1220, Schedule 40 IPS, Class #135 N.S.F. approved and labeled.

E. Fittings for PVC pipe: Whenever PVC pipe is used, all fittings shall be heavy weight,

Schedule 40, of same manufacture as PVC pipe used. F. NOTE: The first 24" of piping coming from pool heater shall be copper. Where the copper connects to PVC piping, after the 24", provide a copper to PVC transition connection. G. Valves:

1. Small Valves (up to and including 2-1/2" in size): Gate valves, all brass with threaded ends for ferrous pipe, 125lb. Non-rising stem type. 2. Large Valves (larger than 2-1/2"); Rubber lined, cast iron, water type butterfly valves. Valves shall be hand operated with cadmium plated ductile iron discs, stainless steel stems and pins, and Buna-N seats and rated for 125 psi.

3. Valve extension stems and keys: Provide as required to operate th the system.

4. Pipe identification: plastic tags for valves in filter room.

G. Pipe Joints: 1. Cement and thinners: Use for making solvent welded joints. Of type compatible kind of piping used.


13153 - 11 of 16

2. Teflon tape (.003" min thickness): Use on the male threads of threaded pipe joints.

H. Fillers and levelers: Provide instrumentation sensors and valves to automatically fill and

maintain level of pool complete with wiring and controls. I. Chemical feed and heater controls: Provide instrumentation sensors and

valves to automatically feed chemicals and maintain temperature of pool complete with wiring and controls.

2.10 SCHEDULES OF POOL FITTINGS, LIGHTS AND EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MODEL # A. Pool Fittings 1. Floor Inlet Frost A-41014 2. Pool Wall Inlet Swimquip 8429 3. Auto Water Level Control Mar-Max LTC 0024S 4. Hydrostat Valve 1-1/2” Frost A-414452 5. Hydrostat Tube 1-1/2” Swimquip 7017-157 6. Skimmer 1-1/2” American Prod. 844201 7. Fill Spout 1” Frost A-41240 8. Pool Main Drain Sump Swimquip 7017-0103 9. Pool Main Drain Gate Swimquip 7010741

B. Underwater Lights 1. 100W/300W/12V Light (two) Purex PHL-301/PHL-300 2. Light Niche Purex 425.4

C. Deck Fittings:

1. Grab Rail 1-1/2” diameter With smooth grip finish Swan Mfg. DMS-100B 2. Deck Anchor Swan Mfg. IAS-100B 3. Escutcheon Plate Swan Mfg. IEP-100 4. Ladder 3 tread with Mirror finish (provide every 75’ at perimeter) Swan Mfg. LFB-24-3B

D. Maintenance Accessories: 1. Vacuum Cleaner Head Rainbow Flex-A-Vacuum

Swivel Wheel 2. Vacuum Hose Heavy Duty Spiralock 1-1/2” x 35’ 3. Vacuum Pole Rainbow 812-1 8”-16” 4. Utility Pole Frost A40177-2 5. Curved Wall Brush 18” A&B Brush 600/900 6. Algae Brush A&B Brush 512/912 7. Pole Adapter Frost A-41420 with brass bolts

and wing nuts 8. Deck Swab Halogen Supply 48” CR Rubber 9. Brush Stabilizer A&B Brush Water Foil

E. Safety Accessories

1. (2) Life Buoy (approx. 24”) Cal-June, Inc. U.S.C.G. 2. Throw Line (40’ min.) Berkley Mfg. B&W ¼” 3. Life Hook Rainbow 153 Double Arm 4. Life Hook Pole (min. 12’) Rainbow 820-16


13153 - 12 of 16

5. Life Hook Pole Adapter Frost A-14420 with brass bolts and wing nuts

6. Spine Board with ties 7. 16 Unit First Aid kit

2.11 DECK DRAIN SYSTEM

A. Deck Drain System: 1. Approved Manufacturers:

a. "Deck-O-Drain", W.R. Meadows, Pool Deck Const Prod. b. "Deck Drain A Way System II, Quaker Plastic Corp. c. "Drain Rite" Mortex Manufacturing. d. Approved Substitution.

B. Material:

1. Heavy wall, bondable, non-corrosive PVC. 2. Provide all nailing clips, couplers & fittings, end adapters, clean-out plugs and protective tape over drain surface.

C. Size: +/- 1-1/2" x 3-1/4" high x min. 8 ft. length's, Center Channel.

D. Color: As selected by Owner's Representative.

2.12 HANDICAP LIFTS (One hole for Pool and One hole for Spa to accept lift) A. Handicapped Lift:

1. Approved Manufacturers: a. "Model WC-7C2" - Whitten Corporation. b. "Model WC-HSP-3R, cast floor sleeve. c. "Model WC-HSP-5", Swimming Pool Extension Arm. d. "WC-112-D", Seat, chains, 24" swivel bar, and components.

e. Econo-Lift", Spectrum Pool Products.

f . Approved Substitution.

B. Hydraulic therapy lifter, stainless steel frame with a capacity to support 400 LB with the horizontal arm fully extended.

C. Provide lifter and all components required for a complete and operational installation.

Provide sleeves in deck at pool and at spa.

D. Must meet all health department and ADA 2010 requirements


3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas in which work is to be performed. Report in writing to Owner's Representative all prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Starting work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and this Contractor shall

then, at his expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective work encountered.


13153 - 13 of 16

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Perform earthwork and dewater excavation in compliance with Section 02300 - Earthwork. Remove excess earth from site if required and as directed by Owner's Representative.

B. Trench for system as specified in Section 02300 - Earthwork and provide system as specified in Section 02500 - Utility Services.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Formwork and Reinforcement:

1. Install form work to lines and profiles shown. Brace forms for work to prevent movement during concrete placing operations.

a. Allow other trades sufficient time for installation of equipment and materials which must be fastened to forms.

b. Clean form surfaces prior to concrete placing operations. 2. Place reinforcing steel as shown on drawings. Steel shall be free from dirt "rust" oil, paint and mill scale. 3. Securely wire-tie steel at points where bars cross. Stagger splices and laps.

4. Install gauging wires to establish thickness of finish work. 5. After placing pool reinforcing, but before placing concrete, confirm that grounding circuits have been provided by the electrical contractor to steel reinforcement, grab rails and hand rails, as required by the National Electrical Code, Article 680. No concrete shall be placed until this requirement has been complied with.

B. Concrete: 1. Placing of "Gunite" and shotcrete: Conform to the requirements of GCA publication G-84 as specified herein.

2. Gunite:

a. Mixing: Mix dry in batch mixing machine for a period of not less than 1 minute.

b. Mix and strength: as specified in Part 2. 3 . Shotecrete

a. Mixing time: Mixing for materials delivered by ready- mix trucks to job site, shall not exceed two hours or 250 revolutions of drum, whichever comes first. Additional water may be added at job site only if requested by contractor. When additional water rotate drum minimum of 30 additional revolutions.

4 . Placing Concrete: a. Place concrete against original undisturbed soil, thoroughly

compacted earth. b. Remove all loose, fine aggregate or rebound from surfaces receiving

concrete before placing succeeding layers. Whenever possible, first layer shall entirely cover reinforcing steel to secure it in proper position.

c. Where new concrete is applied against existing concrete, thoroughly clean the existing surface and drenched with water at least twice on the day before placing new concrete. Surface upon which concrete will be applied shall be sufficiently, damp to prevent excessive absorption of water content in new concrete mix but no so wet as to overcome suction.


13153 - 14 of 16

d. Concrete deposited on vertical surfaces shall be shot at right angle

to surface starting at the bottom and continuing upward. Build up in layers of a thickness that will not slump, allowing sufficient time between placing of layers for initial set to take place.

5 . Finishing: a. When thickness and planes outlined by forms and gauging wire have

been reached, rod surfaces to true lines. After rodding, remove gauging wires. Finish all exposed surfaces to straight and true lines.

Finish: Per manufacturer’s recommendations. 6. Continuously moisture cure for no less than 7 days.

C. Equipment:

1. Flow meters: install in straight run of pipe having minimum length of 10 pipe diameters. Upstream and 4 pipe diameters downstream and in position that can be easily ready by operator.

2. Chemical Feed injection: Locate Injection points downstream from all filter room equipment.

D. Deck Drain System 1. Install deck drain system in strict accordance with manufactures recommendations and written instructions.

2. Grade sub soil, slopping it toward drain location. Drive 3-1/2" short stake into ground at 30" o/c - two nailing strips per 10 ft. section. Attach nailing clips and place drain over the stakes. Use couplers to ensure a straight line. After aligning, nail firmly to stakes.

3. Insert adapter. Install Clean-out. Place concrete and trowel gradual (min 1/4"ft.) slope to drain. After concrete has set, install end plug.

4. Coordinate removal of protective tape with deck finish coating application E. Piping:

1. Cut all pipe with mechanical cutter without damage to pipe. 2. Placing and Laying: Inspect pipe for defects before installation. Clean

the interior of pipe thoroughly of foreign matter and keep clean during laying operation. Pipe shall not be laid in water or when trench conditions are unacceptable as determined by the Owner's Representative. Water shall be kept out of the trench until the pipe is installed. When work is not in progress, open ends of pipe and fittings shall be securely closed so that no trench water, earth or other substance will enter the pipes or fittings.

5. Threaded Joints: After cutting and before threading the pipe shall be reamed and shall have burrs removed. Screw joints shall be made be made with graphite or inert filter and oil or with an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Threads shall be full-cut and not more than 3 threads on pipe remain exposed. Use Teflon 11 tape on the male threads of all threaded pipe joints. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks will not be permitted. Union shall be provided where required for disconnection of exposed piping. Unions will be permitted where access is provided.

5 . Solvent welded joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and the following minimum standards:


13153 - 15 of 16

a. Fittings shall fit easily on the pipe before applying cement. The outer

surface area of pipe and inner wall of fitting shall be dry and clean. Thinner is to be applied to the outer surface of the pipe, and to the inner surface of the fitting. Cement is to be applied to the outer surface of the pipe or on the male section of fittings only. When the outside surface area of the pipe is satisfactorily covered with cement allow ten (10) seconds open time to elapse before inserting pipe end into fitting. After full insertion of pipe into fitting, turn fitting about the pipe end approximately 1/8 to 1/4 of a turn. Wipe off excess cement at the joint in a neat cove bead.

b. Joints shall remain undisturbed for a minimum of 10 minutes from time of jointing the pipe and fitting. If necessary to apply pressure to a newly made joint, limit 10% of rated pipe pressure, during the first 24 hours after the joint has been made.

c. Full working pressure shall not be applied until the joints have set for a period of 24 hours.

d. Make provisions for expansion and contraction by way of swing joints or snaking.

e. Protect plastic pipe from exposure to aromatic hydro-carbons, halogenated hydracarbons, and most of esters and ketones that attack the material. Protect all pipe from mechanical damage and long exposure to sunlight during storage.

7. Install piping without cross connections or inter-connection between distribution supply for drinking purposes and swimming pool that will permit backflow of water into potable water supply. Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Equipment and pool fittings shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury. At completion of work fittings, materials and equipment shall be thoroughly clean and adjustable for proper operation.

8. Filter Face Piping: arrange to carry out operations of filtering backwashing and filter draining.

9. Value Identification: Label all valves. 10. Testing and Flushing:

a. Pressure Piping: After the pipe is laid, the joints completed, and the trench partially backfilled leaving joints exposed for examination, subject new lines to hydrostatc pressure of not less than 50 pounds per square inch. Joints shall remain water tight under this pressure for a period of two hours.

b. Gravity Lines: A water test shall be applied to all gravity drain piping system either in their entirety or in sections. All openings shall be tightly plugged and each system filled with water and tested with at least a 10 foot head of water. Water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test's for at least 15 minutes before inspection starts. System shall be thigh at all joints.

c. Flushing: Pipelines leading to the pool shall be thoroughly flushed clean with chlorinated water before the pool is filled and placed in use.

F. Plaster Finish:

1. Finish concrete surfaces in pool with a wood float finish to a smooth consistent finish acceptable to Owner Representative.

2. Fill uneven surfaces and depressions with cement plaster brown coat.

3. Wash all pool surfaces thoroughly with dilute solution of muriatic acid and flush with fresh water to assure a clean surface free to loose materials, dust and foreign matter.


13153 - 16 of 16

4. Plaster installation: a. Do not apply plaster when rain is imminent or at room temperatures

below 60 degrees F. b. Apply in two coats using the double-back method to obtain a total

thickness of not less than 3/8" or more than 1/2". Use tile as screed. 5. Trowel to smooth, dense, impervious surface free of stains and uniform color

consistency. 6. Fill pool as finish progresses.

G. Title Installation: Where shown on Drawings, use setting materials and grout in accordance with section 09310.


B. Water Treatment: 1. Obtain a chemical analysis of the source/make-up water supply and submit to Owner's Representative. Include the following:

a. Total Alkalinity/ppm b. Calcium Hardness/ppm c. Salt / ppm d. pH e . Iron f . Copper

2. Treat and balance pool water prior to turnover of pool to Owner's Operation Division 3. Balance Water to Establish:

a. Total alkalinity: 80-100 ppm b. Calcium hardness: 20-275 ppm c. Total Available CHL (Pool): 1.5 ppm d. Free Available CHL (Pool): 1.5 ppm e. Total Available CHL (Spa): 3.0 ppm f. Free Available CHL (Spa): 3.0 ppm g. pH: 7.4-7.6 h. Iron content: 0.0 ppm i. Copper content: 0.0 ppm

j. Saturation Index: -.3 - +.3 3. Stabilization (outdoor pool) 40 ppm


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS

ARCH. JOB #:214041 SECTION 14210 - TRACTION MACHINE ROOM LESS ELEVATOR

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL



A. This section covers and includes the furnishing and installing of passenger traction elevatorequipment as hereinafter described.

B. All terms of this specification shall have their meaning defined in the American Society ofMechanical Engineers Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators A17.7 and hereinafterreferred to as the ANSI A17.7 Code, including all revisions and authorized changes to date.

1.03 RELATED WORK BY OTHERS

A. General Contractor shall provide the following in accordance with the requirements of theANSI A17.7 Code plus applicable Model Building Code. For specific rules, refer to ANSIA17.7. State or local requirements must be used if more stringent.1. Clear, plumb hoistway, with variations not to exceed ½" at any point. Minimum two

(2) hours of fire resistance rating of hatch walls.2. 75 degree bevel guards on all projections, recesses, or setbacks over 2" (4" for

A17.1 2000 areas) except for loading or unloading.3. Supports for rail brackets at pit, each floor and overhead. Maximum allowable

vertical spacing of rail supports, without backing. Divider beams between hoistwayat each floor and overhead, for guide rail bracket supports.

4. Hoist beams in the overhead.5. Light outlet for each elevator, in center of hoistway (or in the machine room) as

indicated by elevator contractor.6. Recesses, supports, and patching, as required, top accommodate hall button boxes,

signal fixtures, etc.7. All barricade outside elevator hoistways as required.8. Dry pit reinforced to sustain normal vertical forces from rails and buffers. Pit floor

to be level and free of debris.9. Convenience outlet and light fixture in put with switch located adjacent to the access

door.10. Where access to the pit is by means of the lowest hoistway entrance, vertical ladder

of non-combustible material extending 42" minimum (48" for A17.1 2000 areas)above sill of accessed door or handgrips shall be provided to the same height.

11. Enclosed and protected machine room or control room depending on equipmentconfiguration.

12. Access to the machine room or control room and machinery space as required bythe governing code or authority.

13. Lighting, convenience outlets, heating, cooling and ventilation of machine room orcontrol room, and machinery space. Machine room temperature to be maintainedbetween 55 and 90 degrees F.

14210 - 1 of 8



14. A fused disconnect switch for each elevator and light switch located per the NationalElectrical Code (NFPA No. 70), and where practical, located inside the machineroom or control room adjacent to the door.

15. Suitable copper feeder, ground and branch wiring circuits for signal system andpower operated door, included main line switch. Feeder and branch wiring circuitsfor car light and fan, including main line switch.

16. Convenience outlet and telephone outlet on control panel.17. Cutout through hoistway wall for wiring ducts and conduit. Coordinate with elevator

contractor at the building site.18. All conduit and wire runs remote from either the machine room or control room or the

hoistways.19. Heat, smoke, or products of combustion sensing devices connected to elevator

machine room or control room terminals where such devices are required. Makecontacts on the sensors should be sided for 120 volt DC.

20. Furnish and install finished flooring in elevator cab.21. Entrance walls and finished floors are not to be constructed until after door frames

and sills are in place. Consult elevator contractor for rough opening size. Whendrywall construction is used, the general contractor shall supply the drywall framingso that the wall fire resistance rating is maintained.

22. Where drywall or sheet rock construction is used for front walls, it shall be ofsufficient strength to maintain the doors in true lateral alignment. Drywall contractorto coordinate with elevator contractor.

23. Door frames are to be anchored to walls and properly grouted in place to maintainlegal fire rating (masonry construction).

24. The interface of the elevator wall with the hoistway entrance assembly shall be instrict compliance with the elevator contractor’s requirements.

25. Filling and grouting around entrances by general contractor as required. 26. For sill support by the elevator contractor, hoistway capable of accepting anchor stud

type fasteners must be provided.27. When fixtures are mounted in drywall, wall thickness may increase. The general

contractor must coordinate requirements with the elevator contractor.28. Where openings occur, all walls and sill supports must be plumb.


A. The elevator contractor is a company specializing in manufacturing and installing elevatorequipment with not less than ten (10) years successful experience.

B. All designs, clearances, construction, workmanship and material, unless specificallyexcepted, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the ANSI Code, HandicapAccessibility, Americans with Disabilities Act, and all codes having legal jurisdiction. TheANSI A17.1 Code shall govern except where codes having legal jurisdiction include morerigid requirements or conflict with the ANSI A17.1 Code.

C. The elevator shall follow design and manufacturing procedures, certified in accordance withInternational Organization for Standardization (ISO9001-2000) to meet product and servicerequirements for quality assurance for new products.

14210 - 2 of 8



1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. The elevator contractor shall, after structural and architectural drawings are furnished, submitcomplete working drawings, showing the location of all equipment, loads, and all otherinformation necessary to render a totally functional elevator to the Owner.

B. The elevator contractor shall provide finish samples upon request.

C. The elevator contractor shall provide wiring diagrams.

D. The elevator contractor shall provide Renewal Parts Catalogs and maintenance instructions.

1.06 TEMPORARY USE

Temporary use of the car shall be negotiated with the elevator contractor if required and shall be inaccordance with the terms and conditions of the elevator contractor’s temporary acceptance form.

1.07 WARRANTY

The elevator contractor shall guarantee the material and workmanship of the equipment installed byhim under these specifications and make good any defects not due to ordinary wear or to improperuse which may develop within one (1) year after the completion of the installation or acceptancethereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier.

1.08 PROPRIETARY INFORMATION

Any proprietary material, information, or data contained in the equipment, or any component orfeature thereof, remains the property of the elevator contractor. This includes, but is not limited to,tools, devices, manuals, software, source codes, access codes, object codes, passwords and remotemonitoring feature, which is deactivated if elevator contractor maintenance is discontinued.

1.09 MAINTENANCE

A. The elevator included in these specifications shall receive regular maintenance on each unitfor a period of twelve (12) months after the completion of work described herein oracceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier.

B. Trained employees shall make periodic examinations and perform work including necessaryadjusting, greasing, oiling, and replacing parts to keep the elevator in operation, except partsthat require replacement because of accidents, vandalism, misuse, or negligence by partiesother than the manufacturer.

C. The elevator contractor shall perform all work under this Agreement, except emergencyminor adjustment call-back service, during regular working hours. The elevator contractorshall provide emergency minor adjustment call back service, during regular working hours.

14210 - 3 of 8



D. Should the Owner request that examinations, cleaning, lubrication, adjustments, repairs,replacements, or emergency minor adjustment callback service (unless included above) beperformed on other than the elevator contractor’s regular working hours of his regularworking days, the elevator contractor shall absorb the straight time labor charges and theOwner shall compensate the elevator contractor for the overtime premium, travel time, andexpense at his normal billing rates.

E. The elevator control system can incorporate a built-in remote diagnostic module to relay theconstant status of the elevator and control system to 24 hours, seven days a week centralmonitoring facility. The remote monitoring device is capable of transmitting information onthe current status of the elevator, including any malfunction, system error, or shutdown.

PART II - PRODUCTS


Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: OtisElevator Company, GEN2, Gearless Machine Room Less Elevators.

2.02 SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS

A. Elevator Equipment Summary:Building Type: HotelEquipment Description: Gen2 gearless traction elevator with Machine Room Less

application.Equipment Control: Elevonic Control SystemControler Location: Machine Roomless Controllers shall be located at the front

opening of the top terminal landing in the entrance frame.Service: General Purpose PassengerQuantity of Units: Two (2)Capacity: #1-3,500 lbs., #2-2,500 lbs.Speed: 200 fpmTravel: 41'-4 3/4" - FIELD VERIFYLandings: Five (5)Front Openings: Five (5)Rear Openings: One(1) - Car #1 at First FloorOperation: Microprocessor based controllerPlatform Size: #1-3,500 lb-6'-6 3/4"x6'-1 1/8"

#2-2,500 lb-6'-6 3/4"x4'-11 1/8"Door type: Single Speed Side Slide OpeningCab Height: 8'-0"Guide Rails: 15 lb. per footHoistway Entrances: 3'-6" wide x 7'-0" highPower Supply: 208 Volts + or - 5% of normal, three Phase 60 Hz, with

separate equipment grounding conductor.Car Lighting Power Supply: 120 Volts, Single-Phase, 15amp, 60hz.

14210 - 4 of 8



Duplex Collective Operation: Using a microprocessor based controller, the operationshall be automatic by means of the car and hall buttons. Inthe absence of system activity, one car can be made topark at the pre-selected main landing. The other free carshall remain at last landing served. Only one car shallrespond to a hall call. If either car is removed from service,the other car shall immediately answer all hall calls, as wellas its own car calls.

Contract Maintenance: 12 months with emergency callback, during regular Working hours. The periodic lubrication of elevator compo-nents shall not be required, including Sheaves, Rails, Belts,Ropes, Car and CWT guides, etc. Provide system capabili-ties to enable a remote expert to create a live, interactiveconnection with the elevator system to enable remotediagnostics, remotely return an elevator to service, providereal time status updates via email, remotely changeselected elevator functions, including controlling buildingtraffic, floor access, group operation, shut down, selectpeak up and down modes, conserve energy, improvepassenger experience, door open times and releasetrapped passengers, including other manufacturer ser-vices.

B. Additional Features:Braille and Audible SignalsDispatch ProtectionDoor NudgingEmergency LightingFailed CarFalse Car CancelingFirefighter’s ServiceIndependent Service FeatureInfrared Light Curtain Door ProtectionInspection ServiceLoad Weigh BypassLocking Service Panel in Car Operating PanelRemote Monitoring CapableTelephone (ADA compliant)

2.03 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A. Stainless steel shall have #4 satin finish as specified herein. Baked enamel colors, ifspecified, shall be chosen by the Architect from elevator manufacturer’s standard colorselections.

B. Aluminum used for threshold and hoistway entrance sills shall be extruded; aluminum usedfor exposed frames in suspended ceilings shall be extruded; aluminum used for exposedframes in suspended ceilings shall b anodized.

14210 - 5 of 8



C. Plastic laminates and wood veneers used on decorative cab panels shall be general purposetype and meet flame spread ratings as required by code. Pattern shall be selected from theelevator contractor’s standard selection.

D. Machines, microprocessor controller, controls, pushbuttons, and wiring shall be UL, CSA, orCUL approved.

E. Buffers, attachment brackets, and anchors shall be designed and sized according to codewith safety factors. Polyurethane type buffers shall be used.

F. Machine shall consist of gearless permanent magnet AC motor with a synchronouspermanent magnet motor, dual solenoid service and emergency brakes, mounted at the topof the hoistway.

G. Positioning System: Consist of an encoder, reader box, and door zone vanes.

H. A manual brake release lever shall be provided attached to the control cabinet for rescue ofpassengers. A visual display shall be provided within the control cabinet, which indicates carposition, speed, and direction.

I. Machine mounting shall include isolation to minimize transmission of noise and/or vibrationto the building structure.

J. Governor Rope: Governor rope shall be steel and shall consist of at least eight strandswound about a sisal core center. The Governor shall be a tension type car mountedgovernor.

K. Coated Steel Belts: Polyurethane coated belts with high tensile grade zinc plated steel cordsand a flat profile on the running surface and the backside of the belt. All driving sheaves anddeflector sheaves should have a crowned profile to ensure center tracking of the belts. Acontinuous 24/7 monitoring system using resistance based technology has to be installed tocontinuously monitor the integrity of the coated steel belts and provide advanced notice ofbelt wear.

2.04 CAB

A. The cab shall be 8'-0" high from finished floor to underside of canopy.

B. The cab walls shall be steel, baked enamel finish with plastic laminate raised panels.C. The base, frieze, and reveals will be baked enamel.

D. The ceiling will be Black (EW5) Flush Metal Ceiling with 4 LED lights.

E. Front returns shall be of integral construction. Transoms shall run full width of cab and willbe finished in #4 stainless steel.

F. Cab doors shall be flush design both sides, rib construction, finished in #4 stainless steel.

14210 - 6 of 8



G. A one-speed exhaust fan shall be mounted in cab canopy. The fan shall be rubber mountedto prevent the transmission of structural vibration and will include a baffle to diffuse audiblenoise. A switch shall be provided in the car operating panel to control the fan.

H. A 3/8" x 2" flat in brushed aluminum handrails shall be mounted on the rear wall.

I. The threshold shall be extruded aluminum.

J. The cab finish flooring shall be furnished and installed by others.K. Emergency Car Lighting: An emergency power unit employing a 6-volt sealed rechargable

battery and totally static circuits shall be provided to illuminate the elevator car in the eventof building power failure.

2.05 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. Hoistway door and frame construction shall be UL rated, with required fire rating. Doors shallbe of rigid flush panel construction and contain sound-deadening material. Frames shall besecurely fastened at the corners to form a unit frame. Frames shall be bolted.

B. Exposed areas of the corridor frames shall be finished in baked enamel primer on all floors.

C. Doors shall be finished in baked enamel primer on all floors.

D. Sills shall be extruded aluminum on all floors.

E. Entrance Marking Plates: Entrance jambs shall be marked with a 4"x4" plates having raisedfloor markings with Braille located adjacent to the floor marking. Marking plates shall beprovided on both sides of the entrance. Black sight guards will be furnished with all doors.

2.06 CAB FIXTURES

A. The main car operating panel shall be mounted in the return and comply with handicaprequirements. Pushbuttons and LED illuminating indications shall be included for each floorserved, and emergency buttons and switches shall be provided per code. Switches for carlight and accessories shall be provided. All buttons to have raised numerals and Braillemarkings with 1/8" satin stainless steel projecting button with blue halo.

B. The following cab fixtures shall also be provided:Car Lantern(s)Digital Car Position IndicatorLocking Service Panel in Car Operating PanelTelephone (ADA compliant)

C. The Car Operating Panel shall be equipped with :1. Raised markings and Braille to the left hand side of each push button.2. Car Position Indicator at the top of and integral to the car operating panel.3. Door Open and Door Close buttons.4. Inspection Key Switch.5. Elevator Data Plate marked with elevator capacity and car number.

14210 - 7 of 8



6. Help Button - The help button shall initiate two way communicating between the carand a location inside the building, switching over to another location if the call isunanswered, where personnel are available who can take the appropriate action.Visual indicators are provided for call initiation and call acknowledgment.

D. Car frame and Safety: A car frame fabricated from formed or structural steel members shallbe provided with adequate bracing to support the platform and car enclosures. The car safetyshall be integral to the car frame and shall be Type”B”, flexible guide clamp type.

2.07 HALL FIXTURES

A. An up button and down button at intermediate floors and a single button at each terminal floorat a height to comply with handicap requirements.

B. Hall fixtures shall be finished in black lexan. Fixture cover plates shall be mounted withtamper resistant screws in the same finish as the fixture.


3.01 GENERAL

Prior to commencing elevator installation, inspect hoistways, hoistway openings, pits and machinerooms as constructed. Verify that hoistway, pit, machine rooms, or control rooms and openings areof correct size and within tolerance, and are ready for work of this section. Notify General Contractorin writing of any dimensional discrepancies or other conditions detrimental to the proper installationor performance of elevator work. Do not proceed with elevator installation until unsatisfactoryconditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. Arrange for temporaryelectrical power to be available for installation work and testing of elevator components.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELEVATOR SYSTEM

A. Coordinate elevator work with work of other trades, for proper time and sequence to avoidconstruction delays.

B. Set entrances in vertical alignment with car openings, and aligned with plumb hoistway lines.

C. Adjust for smooth acceleration and deceleration of cars so not to cause passengerdiscomfort. Adjust doors to prevent opening of doors at any landing on the corridor sideunless the car is at rest at that landing, or is in the leveling zone and stopped at that landing. Adjust automatic floor leveling feature at each floor to achieve within 1/4" of the landing.

3.03 PERMITS AND TESTSThe elevator contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary Municipal and State permits and relatingto the installation of the elevator at his expense, shall maker all tests as required by governing codesin effect at the time of the award. The elevator contractor shall be reimbursed for any permits, tests,or equipment necessitated by governing authorities after the date of the award.


14210 - 8 of 8

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 13915 - FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL

13915 - Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. Provide pipe, fittings, valves and connections for combination sprinkler and standpipe

system. System shall be complete and operational and shall meet the requirements indicated on the Drawings, Construction Standards and the following: 1. The current editions of NFPA standards #13, #14, #20 and #72. 2. Factory Mutual 2-8N. 3. Applicable Local and/or State Codes. 4. Authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited

to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Section 15210 - Automatic Sprinkler System. 3. Section 15220 - Standpipe and Hose System. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1. B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's

Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Manufacturer's specifications, catalog cuts, and other data needed to prove

compliance with the specified requirements: 2. Shop drawings and other data as required to indicate method of installing and

attaching equipment, except where such details are fully shown on the Drawings. C. Manuals and Project Record Documents: 1. Upon completion of the work of this Section, deliver to the Architect two copies of

an operation and maintenance manual compiled in accordance with the provisions of Division 1.

2. Include within each manual a copy of the Project Record Documents showing all work of this Section.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in

the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of this Section.

B. Codes and Regulations: 1. Sprinkler Systems: Perform work to NFPA 13. 2. Standpipe and Hose Systems: Perform to NFPA 14. 3. Welding Materials and Procedures: Perform to ASME Code. 4. Valves: Bear UL or FM label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and

pressure rating marked on valve body. C. Manufacturers: Companies specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this

section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1.


13915 - Page 2 of 4

B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until

installation. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE PIPING, BURIED: A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A795 Schedule 40 black.

1. Steel Fittings: \ANSI/ASME B16.9, wrought steel, buttwelded; ANSI/ASME B16.25, buttweld ends; ASTM A234, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; ANSI/ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings; ANSI/ASME B16.11, forged steel socket welded and threaded.

2. Cast Iron Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.1, flanges and fittings. 3. Joints: ANSI/AWS D1.1, welded. B. Cast Iron Pipe: ANSI/AWWA C151.

1. Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C110, standard thickness. 2. Joints: ANSI/AWWA C111, rubber gasket. 3. Mechanical grooved couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and

lock, "C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe.

2.02 SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE PIPING, ABOVE GROUND:

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A795/ Schedule 40 or 10, black. PVC piping is allows were acceptable by the local jurisdiction

1. Steel Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.9, wrought steel, buttwelded; ANSI/ASME B16.25, buttweld ends; ASTM A234, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; ANSI/ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings; ANSI/ASME B16.11, forged steel socket welded and threaded.

2. Cast Iron Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.1, flanges and fittings; ANSI/ASME B16.4, Screwed fittings.

3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3, screwed type. 4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and


B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B75, ASTM B88 or ASTM B251, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.18, cast bronze, or ANSI/ASME B16.22, wrought

copper and bronze, solder joint, pressure type. 2. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA; ANSI/WSA5.8, BCuP silver braze/. C. Cast Iron Pipe: ANSI/AWWA C151. 1. Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C110, standard thickness. 2. Joints: ANSI/AWWA C111, rubber gasket. 3. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and


2.03 VALVES FOR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS: A. Gates Valves: Class 125, comply with MSS SP-80, bronze body, screwed bonet, rising

stem, solid wedge. 3" and larger; comply with MSS SP-70, iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, OS&Y, flanged ends.


13915 - Page 3 of 4

1. 2" and smaller: a. Threaded: Red-White 208, Stockham 108, Milwaukee 148. b. Soldered: Red-White 208C, Stockham B108, Milwaukee 149. 2. 3" and larger: a. Red-White 421, Stockham G623, Milwaukee 105.

B. Butterfly Valves: Comply with MSS SP-67, lug type, cast or ductile iron body, chrome plated ductile iron disk, EPDM seat, extended neck, handwheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, built-in tamper proof switch, 200 PSI rating.

1. 3" and larger: a. Centerline (Crane) 200, Milwaukee ML332E or ML322E, Watts BF-063-

111-10 or equal.

C. Check Valves: Class 125, comply with MSS SP-80 bronze body, screwed cap. "Y" pattern swing, bronze disc. 3" and larger, comply with MSS SP-71, class 125, iron body, bronze mounted, horizontal swing, cast iron disc.

1. 2" and smaller: a. Threaded: Red and White 236, Stockham B319 Milwaukee 509. b. Soldered: Red-White 237, Stockham B309, Milwaukee 1509. 2. 3" and larger: a. Red-White 435, Stockham G931, Milwaukee F2974. 2.04 DRAIN VALVES: A. Provide bronze compression stop with hose thread nipple and cap. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION:

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems, NFPA 14 for standpipe

and hose systems, NFPA 24 for service mains. B. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain

gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other

work. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or

connected equipment. F. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to

maintain top of pipe level. G. Prepare pipe fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support

members are welded to structural building frame, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.


13915 - Page 4 of 4

H. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. I. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve

penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. J. Die cut screw joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil

or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only. K. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings

after installation. L. Provide gate or butterfly valves for shut-off or isolating service. M. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.

END OF SECTION

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 13916 - AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM

13916 - Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. Provide system design, installation and certification for an automatic Wet-pipe sprinkler

system hydraulically calculated, complete with sprinklers drain valves, test connection(s) and Fire Department connection(s).

B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily

limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Fire Protection Piping 3. Standpipe and Hose System. 4. Fire Pump 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1. B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's

Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Manufacturer's specifications, catalog cuts, and other data needed to prove

compliance with the specified requirements. Provide data on sprinkler heads, valves, and specialties.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, show hangers and supports,

components and accessories. Indicate system controls. D. Approvals: 1. Submit shop drawings and hydraulic calculations to authority having jurisdiction,

Fire Marshall and Owner's Insurance Underwriter for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect/Engineer.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Design sprinkler system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced

in design of this work and licensed in the State of New York

B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of this Section.

C. Codes and Regulations: 1. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 13 and 14. 2. In addition to complying with the specified requirements, comply with

pertinent regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. 3. In the event of conflict between or among specified requirements and

pertinent regulations, the more stringent requirement will govern when so directed by the Architect.

D. Manufacturers: Companies specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this

section with minimum five years documented experience.


13916 - Page 2 of 4

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1. B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until

installation. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: A. System to provide coverage for entire building. B. Provide system to NFPA 13 occupancy requirements. C. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from water flow test data. D. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system. E. Provide Fire Department connections as indicated. 1.06 DESIGN PARAMETERS: A. Recommended design densities: 1. Light Hazard Occupancies; .10 gpm/sq.ft. over an area of operation of 1,500 sq.

ft. 2. Ordinary Hazard Occupancies, Group 1: .15 gpm/sq. ft. over an area of

operation of 1,500 sq. ft. 3. Ordinary hazard occupancies, Group 2: .20 gpm/sq. ft. over an area of

operation of 1,500 sq. ft. 4. Dry pipe systems: increase area of operation by 30%. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SPRINKLER HEADS: A. Type "A": 1. For all acoustical tile ceilings. a. Central Model H, 1/2" orifice with white finish, two piece escutcheon or

equal. 2. All heads and escutcheons shall be chrome-plated metal. No plastic parts will be

allowed in either component. B. Type "B". 1. For gypsum board ceilings: a. Central Model H, 1/2" orifice with white finish, two piece escutcheon or

equal. C. Type "C". 1. For areas without ceilings: a. Central Model A - Brass or equal. 2. Heads shall have wire guard or dust cover as approved or directed by the

Architect. D. Other 1. Guestrooms 2. Heads shall be quick response residential style. 3. Provide extended coverage sidewall heads in guestrooms as noted on the

drawings or as required.


13916 - Page 3 of 4

2.02 STORAGE CABINET: A. One metal storage cabinet, with hinged latching door, shall be provided and located next

to the sprinkler riser. B. Cabinet shall contain an assortment of twelve extra heads representative of, and

apportioned between, the types used in that portion of the system served by the particular riser and for emergency use, a sprinkler wrench or adapter for each head type.

2.03 PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced

clapper to automatically actuate electrically and/or hydraulically operated alarms, with pressure retard chamber and variable pressure trim.

B. Dry Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced

clapper to automatically actuate electrically and/or hydraulically operated alarms, with accelerator.

C. Water Motor Alarm: Hydraulically operated impeller type alarm with aluminum alloy

chrome plated gong and motor housing, nylon bearings, and inlet strainer. Provide visual fire alarm device above fire department connection

D. Electric Alarm: Electrically operated chrome plated gong with pressure alarm switch. E. Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical, with two

contacts rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC. F. Fire Department Connection: 1. Type: Flush mounted wall type with chrome plated finish. Free standing type

with ductile iron pedestal chrome plated finish. 2. Outlets: Two way with thread size to suit Fire Department hardware, threaded

dust cap and chain of matching material and finish. 3. Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip, outside. 4. Label: "Sprinkler - Fire Department Connection". G. Test Connection: 1. Wet Pipe Systems: Provide alarm test connection, not less than 1" diameter.

Locate at the end of remote branch line. Comply with NFPA 13 requirements. 2. Dry Pipe Systems: Provide trip test connection, not less than 1" diameter.

Locate at the end of the most remote branch. Comply with NFPA 13 requirements.

2.04 AIR COMPRESSOR FOR DRY PIPE SYSTEMS:

A. Single unit, electric motor driven, ASME rated horizontal receiver tank, air pressure operated electric switch, motor, motor starter, safety valves, check valves, automatic tank drain, muffler-filter, belt guard, and controls.

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS:

A. Any materials or equipment not specified herein but necessary by virtue of design requirements, and for compliance with governing codes, rules, and regulations, for a complete and acceptable installation, shall be provided under this contract at no additional cost to the Owner.


13916 - Page 4 of 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: A. Coordinate work of this Section with other affected work. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Install buried shut-off valves in valve box. Provide post indicator. C. Provide double check back flow preventer assembly at sprinkler system water source

connection. D. Locate Fire Department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or

adjacent Siamese connectors to allow full swing of Fire Department wrench handle. E. Locate outside alarm gong on building wall as indicated. F. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. G. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. H. In new 24" x 24" acoustical panel ceilings, heads shall be centered in panels. I. In new 24" x 48" acoustical panel ceilings, heads shall be located along the lengthwise

center line within limitations shown on the Drawings so that no head is positioned closer than 6" to ceiling grid component at ends of panels.

J. Heads in gypsum board ceiling shall be symmetrically arranged within a given area. K. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinkler head cover plates do

not receive field paint finish. L. Install and connect fire pumps in accordance with NFPA 13. M. Install air compressor on vibration isolators. N. Pipe receiver tank drain to nearest floor drain. O. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. P. Hydrostatically test entire system. Q. Require test be witnessed by authority having jurisdiction and Owner's insurance

underwriter.

END OF SECTION

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 13975 - STANDPIPE SYSTEM

13975 - Page 1 of 2

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTAL DATA: A. Shop drawings and operational data shall be submitted on the following items: 1. Valves 2. Hangers and Supports 3. Fire Department Connection PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE PIPING - BURIED: A. Piping shall be scheduled 40 black steel. Pipe 4" and below shall be accordance

with ASTM specification A120. Pipe 5" and above shall be accordance with ASTM specification A53. 1. Fittings shall be cast iron in accordance with ANSI/ASME B16.1

2. Joints shall be welded in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.1. 2.02 SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE PIPING - ABOVE GRADE: A. Piping shall be scheduled 40 black steel. Pipe 4" and below shall be accordance

with ASTM specification A120. Pipe 5" and above shall be accordance with ASTM specification A53.

1. Fittings shall be cast iron in accordance with ANSI/ASME B16.1 and ANSI/ASME B16.4 for screwed fittings.

2. Joints shall be mechanical grooved couplings with malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts and washers.

2.03 FIRE PROTECTION CONNECTION: A. Flush mounted type with chrome plated finish. Siamese connection 2 1/2"X 2 1/2"X4", each connection shall include drop clapper valve, plug and

chain. Threaded connection shall meet the requirements of the local Fire Department.

B. Label: "Manual Dry Standpipe - Fire Department Connection". 2.04 FIRE HOSE AND VALVE: A. 2 1/2" angle valve with male hose threads, cap and chain with chrome plated

finish. Hose threads shall meet the requirements or the local Fire Department. 2.05 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. All horizontal suspended piping shall be supported by Clevis hangers, 10'-0" on

center or closer to prevent sagging and within 30" of each change of direction. Hangers shall be hung with properly sized galvanized all-threaded rods attached to the structure in an approved manner.

B. All vertical piping shall be supported with wrought iron pipe clamps. Secured to

structure with angle iron brackets. C. All hangers, rods, inserts, stanchions, brackets, etc., shall be dipped in zinc

chromate prior to installation all pipe hangers and supports shall be submitted to the Architect for review.

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 13975 - STANDPIPE SYSTEM

13975 - Page 2 of 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install in accordance with NFPA 14 for standpipe and hose systems. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

C. Flush entire system of foreign matter.

D. Install hose valves at the intermittent stair levels 3.02 SYSTEM TEST: A. Hydrostatically test entire system in accordance with NFPA 14. B. The required test shall be performed in the presence of the Architect, Local

Inspectors, Fire Marshall or Representatives. Test shall be arranged and scheduled by the Contractor in consultation with the Architect.

END OF SECTION

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL

ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 15010 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

15010 - Page 1 of 11

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCE

A. The provisions of the Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Supplementary

Conditions, Alternates, Addenda and Division 1 are a part of this specification.

Contractors and Subcontractors shall examine same as well as other Divisions of the

specifications which affect work under this Division.

B. The requirements of this Section shall govern all Division 15 work for this project. Bidders

are referred to in this section as "Mechanical Contractors" and all provisions apply to each

contractor and their subcontractors.


A. Mechanical, Architectural, Structural, Electrical and all other project drawings, as well as

the Specifications for all the Divisions, are a part of the Contract Documents. Work of this

section is shown on the mechanical drawings.

B. Drawings and Specifications are to be considered as supplementing each other. Work

specified but not shown, or shown but not specified, shall be performed or furnished as

though mentioned in both Specifications and Drawings. All systems shall be complete

and fully operational upon completion of the project.


A. Division 1: Temporary Water Service, Sanitary Facilities, Fire Protection and Heating

Construction.

B. Divisions 2: Site Drainage and Utilities.

C. Division 3: Poured-In-Place Concrete.

D. Division 7: Flashing of Curbed Roof Mounted Items.

E. Division 9: Finish Painting

F. Division 16: Electric Power Wiring


A. Codes and Permits:

1. Work shall be installed in full accordance with all applicable codes, rules and

regulations of public authorities and/or utilities. Included shall be N.F.P.A.,

Factory Mutual Engineering, OSHA, State and local Building Codes. Additionally,

plumbing work shall conform to Health Department Rules and Regulations. All

these Codes, Rules and Regulations are hereby incorporated into this

specification;

2. Comply with specification requirements in excess of Code requirements where no

conflicts exist;

3. Prior to starting any work, mechanical contractors shall secure all necessary

permits and inspection certificates required. All fees for permits, utility connection

charges, inspections and certificates shall be paid for by mechanical contractor;



15010 - Page 2 of 11

4. Deliver official record of approval, by governing agencies, to architect for

transmittal to owner.

B. Standards:

1. Comply with applicable provisions of code approved editions of following National

Standards:

• National Plumbing and Sanitary Code

• NFPA

• Pressure Piping and Mechanical Refrigeration Systems and Equipment

• ASHRAE Recommended Construction for Ductwork

• SMACNA Duct Construction Standards

• ASTM Standards

• American Welding Society Code

• National Pressure Vessel Code

• National Electric Code

• NFPA Life Safety Code and Standards under Appendix B of Life Safety

Code

• Underwriters Laboratory

• Factory Mutual Engineering

• American Society of Sanitary Engineers

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings for mechanical equipment, ductwork and fixtures with

adequate details and scales as necessary to clearly show construction. Indicate

the operating characteristics for each required item. Clearly identify each item on

the submittal as to mark, location and use, using same identification as provided

on design drawings;

2. Ductwork shop drawings shall be fully dimensioned based on field verified

building clearances and indicate structural, lighting and other piping at critical

locations;

3. Contractor shall review and indicate his approval of each shop drawing prior to

submittal for review. Do not start work or fabrication until shop drawings have

been reviewed by the Engineer and returned to the Contractor;

4. Submittals will be reviewed only for general compliance with the contract

documents and not for dimensions, quantities, etc. The submittal review shall not

relieve the contractor of responsibility for purchase of the item in full compliance

with the contract documents and its complete and proper installation;

5. Where submittals vary from the contract requirements, the contractor shall clearly

indicate on submittal or accompanying documents the nature and reason for

variations;

6. Refer to various sections for listing of shop drawings required on this project.

B. Record Drawings (Also see Division I - General Requirements).

1. Each Contractor or Subcontractor for Mechanical work shall keep one complete

set of the contract working drawings on the job site on which he shall record any

deviations or changes from such contract drawings made during construction.

2. These drawings shall also record the location of all concealed water and electric

service, water piping, sewers, wastes, vents, ducts, conduit and other piping, by

indication of measured dimensions to each such line from readily identifiable and

accessible walls or corners of the building. Plans also shall show invert elevation

of sewers and top of water lines.



15010 - Page 3 of 11

3. Record drawings shall be kept clean and undamaged and shall not be used for

any purpose other than recording deviations from working drawings and exact

locations of concealed work.

4. After the project is completed these sets of Drawings shall be delivered to the

Architect in good condition, as a permanent record of the installation as actually

constructed.

1.06 COORDINATION AND SUPERVISION

A. Examine work of other trades which comes in contact with or is covered by the work. Do

not attach to, cover, or finish against any defective work, or install work of this Division in

a manner which will prevent other trades from properly installing their work. Consult all

drawings, specifications and details of other Divisions of the work.

B. Proper clearances for architectural design and equipment access and service shall be

maintained for all items and components.

C. Contractors shall report any interference between their and other work or construction as

soon as discovered. If contractor proceeds without coordination, correction shall be the

responsibility of the installing contractor without cost to the owner.

D. Drawings are diagrammatic and show approximate location of ducts, piping, etc. Take all

measurements and establish exact locations in the field. Adapt to construction and work

of other trades as required for coordination of the work.

E. Each contractor shall be responsible for layout and coordination of openings and chases

required for these installations, which are provided by other trades. Contractor shall

provide dimensioned drawings and fully coordinate this work.

F. Each contractor shall provide adequate competent supervision on job during all working

hours with authority and instructions to answer questions and carry out instructions of

Architect or his representative.

1.07 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Drawings and specifications are supplemental to each other. It is intended that work

covered by these specifications and drawings include everything requisite and necessary

to make the various systems complete and operative, irrespective of whether or not every

item is specifically provided for. Any omission of direct reference herein to any essential

item shall not excuse contractor from complying with the above intent.

B. In case of error or inconsistency, specifications shall take precedence over drawings.

Figured dimensions supersede scaled ones. Contractor shall take no advantage of, and

shall promptly call Architect's attention to any error, omission or inconsistency in

specifications and drawings.

C. Special attention is directed to requirements that equipment and materials stated in

specifications and/or indicated on drawings shall be furnished, completely installed,

adjusted and left in safe and satisfactory operating condition. Accessories, appliances

and connections necessary for proper operation of equipment shall be provided.

D. Materials, apparatus or equipment specified or otherwise provided for on drawings,

addenda, or change orders issued subsequent to award of contract, shall be same brand,

type, quality and character originally specified, unless otherwise provided.



15010 - Page 4 of 11

E. Layout of equipment, accessories, specialties and suspended, concealed or exposed

piping systems are diagrammatic, unless dimensioned. In preparing shop drawings,

contractor shall check project conditions before installing work. If there are any

interferences or conflicts, they shall be called to the attention of Architect immediately for

clarifications.

F. The drawings indicate required size and points of termination of pipes and ducts and

suggest proper routes to conform to structure avoid obstructions and preserve

clearances. However, it is not intended that drawings indicate all necessary offsets and it

shall be the work of the installing contractor to make the installation in such a manner as

to conform to structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom and keep openings and

passageways clear, without further instruction or cost to the owner.

G. It is intended that the mechanical items be located symmetrical with architectural

elements and shall be installed at exact height and locations as shown on the

architectural drawings. Refer to architectural details in completing and correlating work.

Confirm all locations with Architect prior to rough-in.

1.08 PROVISIONS FOR LATER INSTALLATION

A. Become acquainted with nature and progress of construction against which this work

attaches. Review structural drawings for coordination of openings. Cut no structural

members or slabs without Architect's written instructions.

B. When this work cannot be installed concurrently with the building construction, arrange for

inserts, sleeves, access panels, etc., as necessary for installation at a later date.

1.09 LOCAL CONDITIONS

A. Visit site and become familiar with facilities and conditions affecting work. No additional

payment will be made on claims that arise from lack of knowledge of existing condition.

B. Exercise extra care when working in areas where underground services may exist. Any

costs for repair of damage to such services become responsibility of Contractor causing

damage.

1.10 PROTECTION

A. When setting up pipe shop, cutting, threading machines protect area against staining,

abrasion. Cost of correcting any such condition will be charged against the respective

Contractor.

B. Protect finish floors from chips and cutting oil by use of chip receiving pan and oil proof

cover.

C. Protect equipment and finished surfaces from welding and cutting spatters with baffles

and spatter blankets.

D. Protect from paint droppings, insulation adhesive, by use of drop cloths.

E. Contractors shall be responsible for including and maintaining adequate precautions and

safeguards related to their work during all phases of construction. Include protection,

warnings and safety devices and equipment for protection of personnel, equipment and

materials. Comply with all requirements of governing authorities, including OSHA.



15010 - Page 5 of 11

F. Provide adequate supervision and standby fire protection means during the construction

period and particularly while soldering or welding within the building. Comply fully with the

Fire Marshall’s requirement.

1.09 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Pay all costs for transportation of materials, equipment to job site.

B. Provide all scaffolding, tackle, hoists, rigging necessary for placing mechanical materials

and equipment in their proper place. Remove temporary work when no longer required.

Comply with applicable State, Federal and local regulations.

C. Contractor shall keep materials clean and protected from weather and/or damage before

and after installation until final acceptance by the owner. Protect all openings, bearings,

controls, motors, etc., from dirt and moisture.

1.12 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:

A. Provide to Owner after all equipment is in operation and at an agreeable time, competent

instructors for the purpose of training Owner's personnel in all phases of operation and

maintenance of equipment and systems. There shall be two training sessions; one for the

heating season and one for the cooling season.

1.13 DAMAGE AND EMERGENCY REPAIRS

A. Contractor shall be held responsible for damage to work caused by his work or through

the negligence of his workmen. All patching and repairing of damaged work and the cost

of same shall be paid by the contractor causing the damage. All existing facilities and

installations shall be restored to their original condition when damaged by the work of this

Division.

B. The owner reserves the right to make emergency repairs as required to keep equipment

in operation, without voiding Contractor's warranty or relieving him of responsibility during

warranty period.

1.14 WARRANTY

A. Mechanical contractors shall warrant all material, equipment, fixtures and workmanship

for a period of one year from date of final acceptance.

B. Any equipment, piping, fixture or other component part of system which fails during

warranty period and all resulting damage shall be replaced or repaired by contractor

without cost to owner.

C. Warranty on any repairs or replacements shall be extended from date of replacement or

repair of that item for one year.

D. Any additional manufacturer's warranties on equipment shall be extended to owner.

E. Refrigeration compressors and heat exchangers in air conditioning and/or heating

systems shall be warranted for a total of five years on compressors and ten years on heat

exchangers by the manufacturer. If failure occurs during warranty period, manufacturer

shall replace compressor without charge to owner. Replacement labor after the one year

project warranty period shall be the owner's responsibility.



15010 - Page 6 of 11

1.15 REQUIREMENTS FOR FINAL INSPECTION

A. All of the following items must be completed prior to final inspections. No exceptions will

be made and no final payment will be made until all items are completed.

1. Thoroughly clean all parts of the apparatus and equipment. Exposed parts which

are to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster and other

materials and all oil and grease spots shall be removed. Such surfaces shall be

carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out..

2. Exposed metal work shall be carefully brushed down with steel brushes to

remove rust and other spots and left smooth and clean.

3. Strainer elements shall be removed during cleaning and flushing period, after

which they shall be replaced and adjusted.

4. Clean systems internally before placing in operation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Provide material and labor which is neither drawn nor specified but which is obviously a

component part of and necessary to complete work and which is customarily a part of

work of similar character.

B. Provide incidental concrete, reinforcing steel, masonry, mortar, miscellaneous steel,

painting and the like required to complete mechanical installations; perform in manner

specified in applicable Division of General Trades Specification.

C. All equipment and material shall be new, free from defects, U.L. listed where applicable

and warranted by the manufacturer.

2.02 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Systems have been laid out around particular fixtures and equipment considered base

items. Manufacturer first listed is base item, other makes when named in these

specifications or on the drawings are acceptable and may be bid, provided performance,

construction, components and quality are equivalent to base item and can be properly

installed. All manufacturers other than base item manufacturer are considered

substitutions.

B. Substitutions are subject to approval of Architect and his decision shall be final. In

submitting substitutions, include make and model number and complete literature and

performance data for evaluation.

C. Contractor making a substitution shall be responsible for adaption to space, clearances

and performance of substituted item and all costs incurred in his own, other Contractor's

work, or changes in mechanical or building drawings that result from the substitution.

Notify all other contractors and suppliers affected by substitution.



15010 - Page 7 of 11

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Location of piping, equipment, ducts, etc., on the drawings are diagrammatic; indicated

positions shall be followed as closely as possible, exact locations shall be subject to

building construction and interferences with other work. In general, conceal piping,

ductwork located outside of Equipment Rooms. Difficulties preventing the installation of

any part of work as indicated shall be called to the attention of the Architect. Architect will

determine locations and changes; Contractor shall install the work accordingly. Architect

reserves right to make minor changes in location of any part of the work up to the time of

roughing-in without additional cost.

B. All materials and equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner by

competent specialists for each subtrade. The installation of any materials and equipment

not meeting these standards may require removal and reinstallation at no additional cost

to the Owner.

C. Install, connect equipment, services, and materials in accordance with best engineering

practice and in conformity with manufacturer's printed instructions.

D. Take all measurements and determine all elevations at the building.

E. Do all cutting and patching in existing construction as necessary for installation of this

work. Do not cut any structural member without specific permission from the Architect.

Have cutting done by skilled mechanics as carefully as possible, and with as little damage

as possible. Have patching done by first-class mechanics, skilled in the several trades.

3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Perform all cutting, framing and patching in completed construction as necessary for

installation of this work. Do not cut any structural member without written permission from

the architect. Have cutting done by skilled mechanics as carefully as possible, and with

as little damage as possible. Have patching done by first-class mechanics, skilled in the

several trades.

B. In new construction, lay out location and size of all openings to be provided by other

trades in advance of their work. Set sleeves, lintels, etc., for openings and provide layout

dimensioned drawings as required for coordination with other contractors. If openings

information and sleeves are not provided to other trades in advance of their work, this

contractor shall provide all required openings as required for existing construction.

C. In existing construction, contractor shall perform all cutting, patching and framing of

chases and openings required by this work. Properly sized structural lintels shall be

provided above masonry wall openings and steel angle frames around panel walls, floor

or roof openings.

D. Core drill round openings and neatly saw cut rectangular openings in floors or walls.

Sleeves shall be grouted or patched to match existing wall or floor construction. Install 1"

minimum width trim flange around rectangular exposed penetrations and escutcheon

plate around round exposed penetrations.

3.03 FIRE STOPPING



15010 - Page 8 of 11

A. Where pipes pass through floor construction, core drill opening, set steel pipe sleeve and

fill voids between sleeve and floor construction with nonshrinking grout. Pack opening

between pipe and sleeve with fire stopping ceramic fiber insulation and grout. Sleeves

shall be set two inches minimum above finished floor.

B. Where ducts pass through fire rated construction, provide U.L. listed fire damper with

steel frame at penetration and 10 gauge H.R. steel retaining angles on all four sides on

both sides of wall or as follows: All fire dampers shall be installed per SMACNA "Fire

Damper and Heat Stop Guide for Air Handling Systems" as applicable for the type wall,

floor or ceiling penetration.

3.04 ACCESS DOORS

A. Proper access for service and maintenance shall be ascertained before installation of any

item. The mechanical contractor shall furnish access doors adequately sized for servicing

concealed items furnished under this contract. Doors shall be fire rated where installed in

rated construction and shall have concealed hinge door, screw drive latch and primed

painted finish. Frames shall match the construction of adjoining surfaces.

B. Doors in new construction shall be furnished to general trades contractor for installation.

In existing construction, doors shall be installed by the mechanical contractor with

surrounding surfaces patched and painted to match existing.

C. Access doors shall be as manufactured by Milcor or approved equivalent.

3.05 PAINTING

A. Finish painting is included under Division 9 - Finishes, except where specifically called for

under this Division.

B. Certain painting specified as part of the Mechanical Trades Work is included herein and

shall comply with Division 9.

C. Materials and equipment installed under this Division shall be left free from dirt, grease

and foreign matter, ready for painting.

D. No equipment or piping shall be painted before being tested.

E. Damaged surfaces of prefinished materials and equipment shall be touch-up painted to

match existing finish by the contractor.

3.06 PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify each pipe, in Equipment Rooms, above accessible ceilings and in accessible

shafts as follows:

1. Color code ID bands or marker backgrounds to identify contents of pipe in

conformance with Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems, ANSI A13.1-1956.

2. Provide identifying band of color at least six inches wide near each valve and

fitting, on both sides of pipes passing through walls and on long runs at not over

20 foot intervals.

3. Indicate on pipe, by stenciling with 1" high letters, direction of flow and contents.

Place in location so as to be easily read from floor. Lacquer or varnish over

stencils.



15010 - Page 9 of 11

4. Manufactured labels and color bands are acceptable, provided they are applied to

clean, dust free surfaces so as not to loosen.

3.07 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify each piece of equipment and ducts as to nature of service and system number

corresponding to designation on design drawings, by stenciling with 1" high letters or

attaching two-color engraved plastic nameplates. Apply one coat lacquer or varnish over

the stencils.

Item Type Identification

Pumps Stencil

Motor Starters Nameplate

Air Handling Units Stencil

Switches, Pilot Lights (Remote) Nameplate

Air Ducts Stencil

Condensing Units Stencil

B. Name plates shall be laminated phenolic with a black surface and white core and shall be

mechanically fastened with screws to each item. Use 1/16" thick material for plates up to

2" by 4". For larger sizes use 1/8" thick material. Lettering shall be minimum 1/4" height,

spaced at four per inch.

3.08 VALVE TAGS

A. Provide a numbered two-color engraved plastic tag or stamped brass tag approximately

one (1) inch in diameter, attached to hand wheel of each valve with non-rusting "S" hook

of adequate size. Local stop and shut-off valve to an equipment item need not be tagged.

1. Engrave each tag with number and service designation of valve. Prefix numbers

with "P" for Plumbing and "H" for Heating. In color coded lines, background

plastic color shall correspond to service identification color.

2. Accurately record numbers and locations on the "Record" drawings.

3. Provide typed valve directories in framed, Plexiglas covered enclosure, identifying

each valve as to size, type, service and location. Mount where directed by

Owner.

4. Where valves occur above lay-in ceilings fasten 3/4" square plastic marker to

panel below valve. Marker shall have white background with black engraved

letters and numbers identifying valve concealed above.

3.09 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Prepare three (3) complete operating and maintenance manuals in hardback binders

describing operation of the systems and a recommended maintenance schedule. Turn all

equipment warranties over to Owner.

B. Manuals shall include:

1. Job name and names of contractor with address and telephone number for

service.

2. Manual index.

3. Identification, name, mark, number as indicated on drawings.

4. Step-by-step procedures for start-up and shut-down on each system and piece of

equipment.

5. Normal equipment operating characteristics.

6. Performance data, curves, ratings.



15010 - Page 10 of 11

7. Wiring diagrams.

8. Manufacturer's descriptive literature.

9. Automatic controls with diagrams and written description of operation.

10. Manufacturer's maintenance and service manuals.

11. Spare parts and replacement parts list for each piece of equipment.

12. Name of service agency and installer.

13. Final accepted shop drawings.

14. Maintenance and lubrication instructions.

15. Belt sizes, types and lengths.

16. Plumbing fixtures, valves parts list.

3.10 CLEANING UP

A. At all times keep premises and building in neat and orderly condition, follow explicitly any

instructions of Architect in regard to storing of materials, protective measures and

disposing of debris. All rubbish resulting from the work herein specified shall be removed

from the premises, as fast as it accumulates.

B. Upon completion of his work, each contractor shall remove and see that each of his

subcontractors removes from the site all tools, equipment, surplus materials and rubbish

pertaining to his operations. Each contractor shall pay all costs for such removal and

disposition and shall cooperate with General Contractor in final cleaning. Refer to the

General Conditions for details.

C. Replace all filters used during construction with proper system filters at completion of

work.

D. Flush and clean domestic water piping systems with approved detergent to remove

excess flux, oils, loose mill scale and other extraneous materials. Flush, sanitize and fill

domestic water system, in accordance with requirements of AWWA or authorities having

jurisdiction.

E. After flushing systems, clean filters, strainers, traps and dirt leg.

3.11 LUBRICATION, PACKING AND SUPPLIES

A. Properly lubricate all rotating, reciprocating equipment before it is started with correct

grade, type and quantity of lubricant.

B. Maintain all lubrication gaskets and packing during construction; assure that at the time of

acceptance all are in first class condition.

C. Install initial charge of refrigerant and any other supplies required to place equipment in

operation.

3.12 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. Obtain all inspections required by law, ordinances, rules, regulations of authorities having

jurisdiction, furnish certificates of such inspections. Pay all fees and provide all

equipment, power and labor necessary for inspections and tests.

B. During testing period maintain on job a competent engineer thoroughly familiar with all

phases for as long a period as required to thoroughly adjust all systems and demonstrate

that they are functioning properly.



15010 - Page 11 of 11

C. Perform all tests, including but not limited to those hereinafter specified, make necessary

adjustments to obtain specified equipment and system characteristics.

D. Do not consider work under this Specification complete until Contractor has obtained

required inspections, performed tests, made necessary adjustments and has submitted

satisfactory evidence of completion.

E. Pressure Tests:

1. All piping shall be given the following pressure test without appreciable pressure

drop. Equipment which would be damaged by the required test pressure shall be

isolated from the system during test.

Service Medium (PSI) Hrs

Heating hot water Water 125 6

Underground water Water 125 *

Domestic water Water 125 6

Gas Air 50 24

* AWWA Procedures

2. Test medium for refrigerant piping shall be oil pumped dry nitrogen. Twenty-four

hour standing time minimum. Test the low side of the system to 150 psi and the

high side to 300 psi. Tests shall conform to "Pressure Piping Systems Code"

4101:8-3 and ANSI Standard B31.5 "Refrigeration Piping".

3. Correct leaks in screwed joints by replacing thread or fitting or both. Caulking of

threaded joints is not permitted. Repair leaks in copper tubing by sweating out

joints, thoroughly cleaning both tube and fitting, and resoldering.

4. Hydrostatic and/or air tests shall be made before piping is concealed or covered.

Contractor shall be responsible for completely draining the systems after

hydrostatic tests are performed. Any damage from freezing prior to acceptance

of the completed installation shall be repaired at the sole expense of this

contractor.

END OF SECTION 15010

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS

15050 - Page 1 of 11

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCE: Requirements of Division 1 of these specifications shall apply to all work

under this section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDES

� Pipe Valves, Fittings and Accessories � Thermometers and Pressure Gauges � Pressure Gauges � Floor, Ceiling and Wall Plates � Foundations � Sleeves � Roof Flashings � Access Doors � Electrical Diagrams � Motors, Drives and Guards � Vibration Control � Excavation and Backfill


A. Division 2: Earthwork B. Division 2: Site Drainage and Utilities

C. Division 15: Mechanical General Provisions D. Division 15: Insulation E. Division 15: Plumbing F. Division 15: Heat Transfer G. Division 15: Air Distribution

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals are required for the following: 1. Pipe materials, joints and hangers; 2. Valves, cleanouts and drains; 3. Thermometers and pressure gauges; 4. Roof curbs; 5. Vibration control.

B. Refer to Section 15010.

1.05 MATERIALS: All piping, valves and appurtenances shall be continuously rated by the

manufacturer for the intended service conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. All materials utilized on this project shall meet or exceed applicable code

requirements. If the following materials do not comply with the applicable codes, notify the developer by written Qualification of Bid and bid project utilizing code approved materials.


15050 - Page 2 of 11

B. Plumbing Systems Building Interior - Materials for above and below grade plumbing systems inside the building to 5'0" outside building wall shall be as follows: 1. Gas Above Grade ½" to 2": Schedule 40 black steel, screwed, ASTM A-

120. Malleable iron screwed fittings, ASTM A-47 - A-338. 2. Gas Above Grade 2½" and over: Schedule 40 black steel, welded,

ASTM A-120. Schedule 40 black steel plain end fittings, ASTM A-120, solvent weld joints.

3. Sanitary and Storm Drains Above Grade: All shall be Schedule 40 PVC ASTM D-1785 with solvent weld joints, with PVC-DWV ASTM D-2665 fittings.

4. Sanitary and Storm Drains Below Grade: All shall be service weight cast iron ASTM A-74 with gasket joints ASTM C-564, with service weight cast iron ASTM A-74 fittings or Schedule 40 PVC ASTM D-1785 with solvent weld joints, with PVC-DWV ASTM D-2665 fittings.

NOTE: NO PVC PIPING TO PENETRATE FIRE WALLS.

5. Vent Piping: All shall be Schedule 40 PVC ASTM D-1785, solvent weld joints. Fittings shall be PVC-DWV ASTM D-2665.

6. Fire Protection: See related Specification Section 7. Indirect Drain Below Grade 1½" and Above: PVC, SDR-35, ASTM D-

3033, solvent weld joints. Fittings shall be PVC to match. 8. Indirect Drain Above Grade ½" up to 1¼": Type "L" hard drawn copper,

ASTM B-88. Fittings shall be wrought copper with solder joints, ASTM B16.22.

9. Domestic Water Above Grade ½" up to 3": a. Type "L" hard drawn copper, ASTM B-88. Fittings shall be wrought copper with solder joints, ASTM B16.22. b. PEX piping with approved fittings and joining methods

10. Domestic Water Above Grade 4" and Over: Schedule 40 galvanized steel, ASTM A-120. Fittings shall be galvanized wrought iron, screwed joints, ASTM A-74 and A-338.

11. Domestic Water Below Grade ½" up to 2": Type "K" hard drawn copper, ASTM B-88. Fittings shall be wrought copper with brazed joints.

12. Domestic Water Below Grade 3" and Above: Ductile iron, cement lined, Class 52 ANSI A21.51 with ANSI A21.11 joints. Fittings shall be ductile iron, cement lined Class 52 ANSI A21.11 with compression or mechanical joints.

C. Mechanical Systems Piping and Fittings shall be as follows.

1. Condensate Drains: All shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel or Type "L" copper or Schedule 40 PVC plastic. Fittings shall be cast iron or wrought copper or PVC plastic.

2. Refrigerant Piping: All shall be type "ACR" hard copper. Fittings shall be long radius wrought copper.

2.02 PIPE JOINTS A. Cast iron sewer pipe connections shall be as listed below. The type of pipe used

must conform to the fitting requirements for a proper, leak-tight connection. Joints must be Code approved. 1. Lead joints - Pipe in hub shall be caulked with picked oakum and then filled

in one (1) pour with pure molten pig lead. Lead shall be not less than 1½"; 2. Neoprene seal gaskets - A positive seal elastomeric compression type

neoprene gasket to be inserted in hub, inside gasket uniformly coated with seal lubricant and pipe inserted into gasket;


15050 - Page 3 of 11

3. No-hub - A no-hub coupling CISPI-310 with neoprene gasket which is placed over spigots and both spigots firmly seated to separator rings. The stainless steel shield shall be placed over gasket and tightened with adjustment screws. No-hub is permitted below grade only with heavy duty clamps. Couplings shall be as manufactured by UPC Clamp-All Series.

B. Vitrified tile sewer pipe to be assembled with premium rubber compression type

joints. C. Screwed pipe and fittings shall be assembled with sharp, clean, tapered threads

using teflon tape on the male thread only. All cut pipes shall be reamed to the full inside diameter.

D. Solder joints in copper tubing (except refrigerant piping) shall be made with flux

and non-lead, non-toxic antimony alloy solder, except underground lines below floors where all joints shall be brazed. The ends of tubing shall be cut square and the tube ends at inside of fittings burnished with emergy cloth before assembly joints shall be wiped clean of excess flux and solder after completion.

E. Silver Solder: Refrigerant piping and below-grade brazed joints. Joints shall be

prepared the same as solder joints and made with silver brazing alloy have a melting point above 1,000°F. Purge piping with inert gas during soldering operations.

F. Flange joints shall be made with matching ground surface flanges and

composition gaskets made tight with bolts and nuts. G. Weld joints shall be made with gas or electric welding with minimum of two

passes done by code certified welder. H. Solvent weld joints shall be made with solvent cement suitable for the type of

plastic specified. The ends of the pipe shall be cut square and all burrs removed. Clean pipe end and fitting jacket with pipe cleaner and apply solvent cement. Insert pipe end such that pipe bottoms against fitting pipe stop.

2.03 VALVES A. Valves shall be of the same manufacturer where possible and equal to those

manufactured by Nibco, Jenkins, Powell, Milwaukee, Keystone, DeZurik or Hammond and withstand minimum 125 pounds steam working pressure.

B. Valves for mechanical systems shall be as follows. Other valve requirements

shall be as specified in the valve section of other sections of this specification. C. Shut-Off Valves:

1. Ball Valves 2" and Smaller: Two piece construction, chrome ball, reinforced TFE seats, 150 psi swp, 600 psi wog. Screwed Nibco #T-585-70, soldered Nibco #S-585-70;

2. Gate Valves 2½" and larger: C.I. gate valves - bolted bonnet, O.S.&Y,

solid wedge, bronze mounted, 125 psi swp, 200 psi wog, flanged, Nibco #F-617-0;

3. Butterfly valves 2½" and larger: Water service only, wafer type, 150 psi

rated with EPDM liner, stainless stem, aluminum-bronze disc, handle operator with lock, 2½" through 6", type 5, flanged, Nibco #World-2000;


15050 - Page 4 of 11

4. Globe valves 2½" and smaller, Union bonnet, renewable disc, bronze

globe, 150 psi swp, 300 psi wog. Screwed Nibco #T-235, solder Nibco #S-235.

D. Check Valves:

1. Vertical 2" and smaller: Bronze spring guided check valve 125 psi swp,

250 psi wog, TFE seat. Screwed Nibco #T-480, solder Nibco #S-480; 2. Vertical 2½" and larger: Iron body spring guided renewable seat and

disc, 125 psi wog, flanged Nibco F-910; 3. Horizontal 2" and smaller: Bronze Y-pattern, renewable discs, 125 psi

swp, 200 psi wog. Screwed Nibco #T-413, solder Nibco #S-413; 4. Horizontal 2½" and larger: Iron body spring guided, renewable seat and

disc, 125 psi wog, flanged, Nibco #F-918.

E. Drain Valves: ½" and 3/4" shall be brass boiler drain with hose thread and cap, 125 psi wog. Screwed Nibco #74, solder Nibco #74-2.

F. Gas Valves:

1. ½" to 3": Screwed or flanged ends, resilient seal, eccentric valve with

lever handle, DeZurik Figure 125-1-RS24; 2. 4" and over: flanged end, resilient, seal, eccentric valve with lever

handle, DeZurik Figure 125F-6-RS25. 3. Equivalent valves as manufactured by Nibco or Crane.

2.04 STRAINERS

A. In general, install strainers ahead of all automatic water valves, pump suction lines and elsewhere as indicated on plans.

B. Strainers 2" and smaller shall be 250#, cast semi-steel body, screwed pattern

with 20 mesh stainless steel or Monel screens.

C. Strainers in copper piping to have bronze bodies.

D. Strainers to be Sarco, Crane or Mueller.

2.05 UNIONS A. Unions in steel piping 2" and smaller, malleable iron, ground joint brass to iron

seat suitable for 150 psi SWP. Galvanized or black as required. B. Unions in copper piping 2" and smaller, cast brass solder fittings with machined

and lapped seats suitable for 125 psi working pressures. C. Connections between screwed piping and tubing in hot water systems shall be

made with wrot copper adapters.


15050 - Page 5 of 11

D. Connections between ferrous and non-ferrous piping in domestic water systems shall be made with dielectric unions.

E. Connections in piping 2½" and larger shall be flanged with matching gaskets for

the service intended. 2.06 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers: Mercury in glass type with 9" Fahrenheit scale of proper range

for service indicated, glass covered case with magnified mercury column, separable well, straight or angle mounted as required.

1. Bi-metal dial type thermometers may be supplied in lieu of mercury type. 2. Thermometers located below 6'0" level: mercury type with 9" scale,

forward or straight type as required by job conditions. Thermometers serving locations above 6'0" level, to be dial type with remote bulb. Mount 4" diameter dials 5'6" above floor on bracket at appropriate location.

C. Acceptable manufacturers: Trerice, Taylor, American or Palmer. 2.07 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Install gauges in the suction and discharge of the heating pumps. Provide gauges having proper ranges as required by conditions. Gauges to have 6" diameter dials, cocks, snubbers, and siphons, as manufactured by Trerice, American Consolidated, Marsh or Ashcroft.

2.08 FLOOR, CEILING AND WALL PLATES

A. Fit all pipe passing through walls, floors or ceilings in finished rooms with steel or brass escutcheons. Where surface is to receive a paint finish make escutcheons prime painted; otherwise make escutcheons nickel or chrome plated. Where piping is insulated, fit escutcheons outside insulation.

2.09 FOUNDATIONS A. Except where otherwise noted, provide all foundations for equipment furnished

under this Division. B. Construct foundations of 3000 pound concrete complete with all necessary

foundation bolts, sleeves anchor plates, washers and nuts. Smooth all exposed portions of foundations and bevel corners.

C. Unless otherwise noted on Drawings, make all foundations a minimum of 4

inches thick. 2.10 SLEEVES A. Where pipes pass through masonry or concrete partitions, or rated fire partitions

other than masonry, set machine cut steel pipe sleeves 1" larger than outside diameter of pipe, with ends of sleeves flush with partition faces.

B. Where pipes pass through floors, set Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves

1" larger than outside diameter of pipe. Top of sleeve to be 4" above finished floor in machine rooms and wet floor locations.


15050 - Page 6 of 11

C. Where pipes are insulated, provide sleeves large enough to allow insulation to pass through sleeve. Center pipes in sleeves.

D. Set sleeves true to line, grade; position and plumb or level and so maintain

throughout construction period. E. Where concrete or masonry floors and walls are core drilled for pipe passage

steel sleeves are not required. F. Seal opening between pipe and sleeve or opening as required to maintain the

integrity of the fire rating of all walls and floors. 2.11 INSERTS, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide all inserts, hangers, anchors, guides and supports to properly support

and retain piping, ductwork and conduits; to control expansion, contraction, anchorage, drainage and prevent sway and vibration. Piping shall be so supported as not to place a strain on valves or equipment.

B. Support individual piping from hangers as manufactured by Ellen, Grinnell,

Michigan Hanger Company, Modern or Fee and Mason. 1. Uninsulated piping 2" and smaller - Grinnell Figure 97 malleable iron

adjustable nut and wrot ring. 2. Uninsulated piping 2 1/2" and larger - Grinnell Figure 260, carbon steel

adjustable wrought clevis type. 3. Copper tubing (uninsulated) - Grinnell Figure CT-97 carbon steel ring and

malleable iron adjusting nut completely copper plated. 4. Insulated piping 2" and smaller - 18 gauge galvanized steel shield over

insulation in 180 degree segments, minimum 12 inches long with Grinnell Figure 260 clevis type pipe attachment.

C. Hanger Spacing: PIPE SIZE ROD STEEL COPPER Through 3/4" 3/8" 8' 6' 1" 3/8" 8' 8' 1¼" & 1½" 3/8" 10' 10' 2" 3/8" 12' 10' 2½" & 3" 1/2" 12' 12' 4" 5/8" 16' 12' 6" 3/4" 16' -- 8" 7/8" 20' -- 10" 1" 20' -- Provide additional hanger support within two feet of each elbow and at valves,

strainers and other equipment in pipe lines. D. Cast iron soil pipe hung from building construction shall be supported at intervals

of not over five feet next to hub. Additional supports shall be provided where necessary to maintain proper alignment and grade.


15050 - Page 7 of 11

E. Plastic soil pipe hung from building construction shall be supported at intervals of not over five feet and next to each hub. Additional supports shall be provided where necessary to maintain proper alignment and grade.

F. Trapeze hangers may be used for multiple runs of piping and shall consist of a

channel with adjustable hanger rods. Hanger spacing shall be determined by the smallest pipe supported. All piping shall be free for independent movement on the trapeze hanger. Insulation protection saddles shall be as specified for individual pipe support. Hanger system shall be as manufactured by Unistrut or equivalent.

G. Do not suspend a pipe from another pipe or ductwork. Do not support ceiling

framing or lighting from piping or ductwork. H. Support ductwork with 16 gauge galvanized steel strap hangers, steel rods or

steel angle trapeze hangers per SMACNA Standards. Maximum spacing 8'0". 2.12 ROOF FLASHINGS

A. Flat roofs: 1. Flashing material shall be four pound lead with minimum thickness of 1/16"

or material as specified for flashing through EPDM membrane; 2. Provide flashing around each pipe extending through the roof. Flashing

shall extend a minimum of 12" in all directions from the pipe. Solder sleeves on vent extensions, extend to top of vent and turn down 2" inside;

3. All surfaces of the lead flashing including the edges shall be coated with the same material as used by the roofing Contractor.

B. Pitched Roofs: One piece neoprene sealed flashing shall be provided on all

pipes passing through shingled roofs with a slope greater than 2" in 12". The flashing shall be a weatherproof joint constructed of a neoprene collar with a self-adjusting pipe opening from 1½" through 4". The collar shall be die formed to a one piece aluminum base with no seams or joints. Roof curbs matching roof slope shall be provided for all ducts and exhaust fan penetrations.

2.13 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide access doors with frames in all locations where necessary for access to

concealed valves, dampers, and other equipment requiring service or inspection. Where practical group valves, dampers, etc., so as to be accessible from a single door.

B. Doors: flush type, 14 gauge steel; frames: 16 gauge steel. Supply with factory

prime coat finish. Equip doors with invisible hinges and catches. Units shall be Milcor, Newman Brothers or equal. Supply style which is compatible with the specific wall or ceiling construction. Supply in factory prime coat finish. Doors shall be sufficiently large for access to equipment, but not less than 16" x 12".

C. Access doors installed in fire rated construction shall be U.L. classified fire rated

access doors, rating one and one-half hour "B" label. 2.14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS (Starters by Electrical Contractor) A. Refer to those portions of the Electrical Drawings and Specifications which

establish characteristics of electrical service and furnish equipment to operate on


15050 - Page 8 of 11

that service. Verify all electrical service sizes, voltages and phase with electrical contractor, prior to ordering equipment.

B. Refer to electric section of specifications for starters and disconnect switches.

Starters to be provided by Division 16000 contractor. Where equipment has magnetic starters, field supplied disconnect switches or disconnect switches specified as an integral part of the equipment, this Contractor shall furnish them.

C. Provide coordinated wiring diagrams for all equipment of heating, ventilating and

temperature control system conforming to system operation specified. Provide line diagrams, power diagrams, terminal connections. Submit all such drawings as shop drawings.

2.15 MOTORS A. For each item of equipment requiring electric drive provide a motor having

starting and running characteristics consistent with the torque and speed requirements of the driven machine. Design, construction, performance characteristics to conform to applicable provisions of latest NEMA, ASA, IEEE standards for rotating electrical equipment. Unless otherwise specified, motors are to be general purpose with open type enclosures, rated for a temperature rise of 40 degrees C. Motor horsepower specified in connection with equipment drive minimum. Supply motor manufacturer's verification of motor horsepower characteristic power curves of the driven equipment. In no case shall power requirements of driven equipment exceed nominal nameplate rating of motor furnished. Do not take advantage of service factors in selecting motors.

1. Install, align all motors required. 2. Recheck alignment of motors factory coupled to equipment. 2.16 DRIVES AND GUARDS A. For each item of belt driven equipment, provide an adjustable drive sheave with

adjustable limits plus or minus 12½%, based on a service factor of 1.5 as applied to motor nameplate rating. Drives of one horsepower and over shall have at least two belts, with all multiple belt sets matched.

B. Provide substantial drive guard for each belt drive secured to the equipment.

Provide openings in skirt guards for insertion of revolution counter at drive sheave and driven sheave centers. Provide conveniently removable coupling guard for direct driven equipment.

C. Provide a typed list of belt drives, listing each item with pitch diameter, bore size

and keyway dimensions of each sheave and manufacturer's replacement belt numbers. Bind lists in Operating and Maintenance Manuals.

D. Provide all necessary changes in drive sheaves and/or belts as required to obtain

specified air deliveries.

E. Provide substantial guard screen for all rotating equipment, i.e. exhaust fans, condenser fans, etc., where exposed on project. Guards shall be removable for equipment service.

2.17 VIBRATION CONTROL


15050 - Page 9 of 11

A. Vibration or noise created in any part of the building by the operation of any equipment furnished and/or installed under this contract will be prohibited and this Contractor shall take all precautions by isolating the various items of equipment from the building structure.

B. Flexible connections shall be used between ductwork and air handling equipment

and the ductwork attached rigidly to the structure.

C. Fans shall be supported from spring isolation hangers or bases. D. Isolators shall be manufactured by Mason Industries, Consolidated Kinetics or

Amber Booth. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL PIPING A. Provide shut-off valves at all branch connections to main, at all fixture groupings,

each piece of apparatus and in mains to sectionalize the systems and elsewhere as indicated on plans.

B. Install valves with stems at or above horizontal position. C. Install all valves and equipment with unions or flanges to facilitate removal. D. Provide hose end drain valves at all low points, trapped sections and on

equipment side of all branch valves to permit draining of all parts of liquid piping systems. Install valves at high points of equipment and piping to allow venting.

E. Pipe equipment drip bases to nearest drain. F. Locate covered piping a sufficient distance from walls, other pipe, ductwork or

other obstacles, to permit application of the full thickness of insulation specified; if necessary use extra fittings and pipe.

G. Use dielectric unions where dissimilar pipe materials are joined. H. Make piping connections to equipment indicated. I. Plug open ends of pipe, ductwork or equipment at all times during installation to

keep dirt and foreign material out of system. J. Arrange and install all pipes, valves, cleanouts, access openings and equipment

so as to be accessible for service. Locate equipment to maintain clearances for tube, coil pulling, periodic servicing.

K. Make reductions in piping lines with reducing coupling.

L. No piping shall be installed at locations subject to freezing 3.02 WELDING A. Install all pressure piping systems to conform to requirements of State Piping and

Welding Codes where applicable.


15050 - Page 10 of 11

1. Welding of gas piping shall conform to Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welds and piping systems intended to operate at less than 20% of the specified minimum yield strength.

2. Any pipe welding not covered by code shall also be performed by certified welders according to code procedures.

3.03 EXPANSION A. Install all piping throughout the project with adequate allowance for expansion to

prevent damage to the building, equipment and piping. Provide anchors, loops or approved type expansion joints as required for complete control of movement. Make changes in directions with fittings.

1. Make branch connections to mains for heating risers, radiators and

domestic hot water risers with at least two 90 degree elbows. 2. Bullhead connections in ay piping service are prohibited. 3. Supplement all loops, joints, compensators, etc., with adequate guides

located as close to loops and joints as possible to preserve alignment and pitch.

4. Provide securely supported pipe anchors as required to control expansion, contraction in piping.

3.04 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Provide all excavation and backfilling necessary for installation of work. B. Trenches are to be dug to grade and depths required for proper installation of

pipe. Provide bedding and lay pipe as indicated on drawing. C. Shore or sheet pile trenches if necessary to prevent caving. Do not endanger

work of others or existing structures. Contractor will be held solely responsible for damage.

D. In the event that rock or shale is encountered or any condition such that it is not

possible to provide a flat, even grade in bottom of trench, notify A/E at once. E. Prior to commencing work, contractor shall notify Utility Protection Service and

underground utility companies and ascertain locations of all existing utilities. Verify all sewer depths, sizes and locations prior to starting work.

F. Hand dig in location of other piping, utilities or sewers so as not to damage

existing below-grade installations. G. After piping has been installed, tested and approved by Inspector, backfill as

called for in detail on drawings. Compact to 95% Proctor density in layers not to exceed twelve inches.

H. Provide and operate pumping equipment as necessary to keep trenches, other

excavations, free of water. No piping shall be installed in trenches until trenches have been pumped and bottom dried-out sufficiently to receive piping.

I. Backfill below floors with sand, paved areas or sidewalk with AASHTO No. 68

crushed stone to level to receive concrete or paving work. In other areas, backfill after initial twelve inch sand cover over top of pipe to be with clean earth, compacted as described above and to six inches above adjoining grade to allow for settling.


15050 - Page 11 of 11

J. Provide protection for open trenches with suitable barricades, bridges and night

lighting in accordance with safety regulations of governing authorities and lights at night.

K. Set sleeves in foundation walls and floor for pipe and waterproof and seal around

sleeve after pipe installations. Provide concrete thrust blocks and restraints at all changes in direction of below grade water piping.

L. Remove from site and properly dispose of all excess excavation materials.




15250 - Page 1 of 2

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCE:

Requirements of Division 1 of these specifications shall apply to all work under this section.

1.02 WORK INCLUDES:

All labor, equipment, accessories, materials, and services required to furnish and install all insulation, fittings, and finishes for piping, ducts and related mechanical equipment in the plumbing, heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems.

1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

A. Division 15: Mechanical General Provisions

B. Division 15: Basic Materials and Methods

C. Division 15: Plumbing

D. Division 15: Heat Transfer

E. Division 15: Air Distribution

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings or descriptive literature for all insulation products to be used


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIAL

A. All insulation material (insulation, jackets, adhesives, cements, mastics, sealers, coatings and finishes) shall have composite Fire and Smoke Hazard ratings as tested under procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723, not exceeding, as follows:

1. Flame Spread 25

2. Smoke Developed 50.

B. Provide the following insulation products as manufactured by Owens-Corning. Insulation products as manufactured by Armstrong, CertainTeed or Knauf are acceptable. Adhesives shall be Benjamin Foster or equal.

1. OWENS-CORNING FIBERGLASS 25: ASJ/SSL HEAVY DENSITY PIPE INSULATION (see insulation thickness schedule).

Service Thickness(in)

Domestic cold water ½”

Domestic hot water ¾”

Recirculating hot water 3/4”

Horizontal Rainwater Leaders ½”

Supplies, drain and trap beneath lavs for use by the handicapped

2. OWENS-CORNING ED-150 FRK 25: 2" THICK FACED DUCTWRAP

a.. Supply air ductwork located above the ceiling

3. OWENS-CORNING TYPE 703 Fiberglass Equipment insulation with ASJ, all service jacket, 1-1/2" thick.



15250 - Page 2 of 2

a. Hot Water Storage Tank.

Note: Pipe insulation thicknesses specified in the above schedule are based on products having a maximum "k" factor of 0.26 at a mean temperature of 75 F. These thicknesses can be reduced for products having significantly lower "k" values and shall be increased for products having higher "k" values in order to produce equivalent or greater thermal resistance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All insulation shall be installed over clean dry surfaces. Insulation must be dry and in good condition. Wet or damaged insulation will not be acceptable. No insulation shall be applied prior to pressure test completion of the respective piping systems.

B. All insulation shall be continuous through wall and ceiling openings, sleeves and pipe hanger locations.

C. Fiberglass pipe insulation shall be installed with joints butted firmly together. Jacket laps to be sealed with factory applied adhesive, butt joints to be sealed with butt strips, having factory applied adhesive. Valves and fittings shall be insulated using mitered sections of insulation, insulation cement, or premolded fitting insulation. The insulation applied to the valves and fittings shall be covered with the same type of covering as used on the pipe insulation.

D. Valve bonnets, unions, strainers will be left free of insulation except for cold piping subject to condensation (refrigerant, suction, chilled water and domestic water piping systems) where they shall be covered. All insulation ends shall be tapered and sealed regardless of service. Where vapor barrier jackets are used on cold surfaces, insulation must be applied with vapor seal integrity maintained throughout the entire system.

E. Armaflex II pipe insulation shall be applied with proper adhesive for working temperature of service, insulate all valves and fittings to match adjacent piping. All Armaflex insulation installed outside shall be protected with two coats of protective paint.

F. All insulation products shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations and this specification. The workmanship shall be first class and all joints shall be made tight.

END OF SECTION

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING

15400 - Page 1 of 6

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE: Requirements of Division 1 of these specifications shall apply to all work under this

section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDES

• All required utility connections.

• Cold water system.

• Hot water system.

• Natural gas piping.

• Sanitary drainage and vent systems.

• Rainwater leaders.

• Thermostatic mixing valves.

• Fixtures.

• Drains and cleanouts.

• Water hammer arresters.

• Hot water heaters.

• Hot water storage tank.

• Pumps.

• Connections to equipment furnished by others.

• Backflow preventer.

• Plumbing valves.

• Miscellaneous plumbing products. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Division 15 - Mechanical General Provisions. B. Division 15 - Basic Materials and Methods. C. Division 15 - Insulation.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. The following submittals are required: 1. Fixtures; 2. Water heaters; 3. Hot water storage tank; 4. Drains, cleanouts and carriers; 5. Thermostatic mixing valves; 6. Circulating pumps; 7. Miscellaneous plumbing items; 8. Valves; 9. Backflow preventer.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GAS FIRED DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATER

A. Water heaters shall be of glass-lined design and include a powered gas burner

with electronic flame safeguard, intermittent ignition, main and pilot automatic gas valves, redundant solenoid gas valve, gas pressure regulator, diaphragm air switch for proof of blower operation and flame inspection port. Maximum supply gas pressure to heater 13” WIC Heaters shall be equipped with two 4” hand hole cleanouts, shall have an ASME working pressure of 160 psi, and stamped National Board, and listed by Underwriters Laboratories.


15400 - Page 2 of 6

B. Controls shall include: 1. High temperature limit control (manual reset); 2. Upper and lower thermostats;

3. Combination temperature and pressure gauge; 4. Low water cutoff; 5. ASME rated temperature relief valve; 6. Draft regulator.

C. Control compartment door shall be hinged for easy access. The heaters shall be

equipped with multiple anodes for cathodic protection. The heaters shall be insulated with a vermin proof glass fiber insulation or equal.

D. Heaters must meet or exceed current ASHRAE 90 lb. 1990 for recovery efficiency

and standby loss. The outer jacket shall have a baked enamel finish over a bonderized undercoating. All internal surfaces of the heaters exposed to water shall be glass-lined with an alkaline borosilicate, nickelous oxide composition that has been fused to steel by firing at a temperature range of 1400 F to 1600 F.

E. Heater tanks shall have a five year limited warranty against corrosion as outlined

in the written warranty. F. Professional start-up service to be included. G. Water heaters by shall be BTH series as manufactured by the A.O. Smith

Corporation or equal by State, Lochinvar or MorFlo American. 1. Refer to schedule on drawings for additional information.

2.02 CLEANOUTS

A. Install cleanouts where required by code, at maximum of 50' intervals for 4" and smaller sewers and 100' intervals for 5" and larger sewers and where shown on the drawings.

B. Provide flush cover plates for access in finished areas.

C. Outside cleanouts occurring in paved, slag or cinder areas shall be Josam Series

No. 58860 or equal by Smith, Wade or Zurn and set in a 16"x16"x10" deep concrete collar flush with grade. Outside cleanouts occurring in other areas shall be installed with a vitreous riser and vitreous stopper flush with finished grade.

D. Cleanouts shall be as scheduled on the drawings, as manufactured by J.R. Smith

or approved equivalent by Josam, Wade or Zurn. 2.03 DRAINS

A. Drains in floors having membrane waterproofing shall be complete with a flashing clamp device to firmly secure membrane to drain body.

B. Drains shall be as scheduled on the drawings as manufactured by J.R. Smith or

approved equal by Josam, Wade or Zurn.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS PLUMBING PRODUCTS

A. Hose bibbs: 1. Polished chrome plated with hose thread end, integral vacuum breaker

and loose "T" handle key; 2. Unit shall be as scheduled on the drawings or approved equivalent by T &

S Brass or Royal Brass.


15400 - Page 3 of 6

B. Water hammer arresters: 1. Permanently air charged and maintenance free unit conforming to P.D.I.

Standard WH 201; 2. Unit shall be as noted on the drawings or approved equivalent by Sioux

Chief, Watts or Amtrol.

C. Trap primer valve: Corrosion resistant brass unit with adjustable flow rate to operate on pressure drop within system and with integral vacuum breaker. Unit to be capable of multiple discharges of up to eight drain lines. Unit shall be Precision Plumbing Products Model Oregon #1 or equal.

2.05 THERMOSTATIC MIXING STATIONS

A. Symmons 5-1000B or approved equal with 1-1/2” inlets and 2” outlet Tempcontrol thermostatic controller with swivel action check stops, removable cartridge with strainer, stainless steel piston and liquid filled thermal motor with bellows mounted out of water. Volume control shut off valve, bimetal dial thermometer (3” face, range 20 - 240), brass pipe, fittings and unions to cabinet limits. Bottom supplies, top outlet. Cabinet to be 16 gauge body, 12 gauge door, hinged left hand door with cylinder lock. Standard cabinet steel with baked white enamel finish, surface mounted.

2.06 CIRCULATING PUMP

A. Unit shall be an in-line, horizontal, all bronze and oil lubricated circulating pump suitable for 125 psi working pressure. The pump shall have a steel shaft with integral thrust collar, two horizontal sleeve bearings and mechanical ceramic water seal. The motor shall be non-overloading, open drip-proof design with built-in thermal overload.

B. Unit shall be as manufactured by Bell & Gossett or equivalent by Armstrong or

Taco. 2.07 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM

A. Furnish and install all plumbing fixtures and equipment in accordance with the provisions on these specifications and listed on the drawings. Fixtures shall be non-absorbent vitreous china, cast iron or steel coated with acid-resistant enamel or stainless steel as indicated.

B. All wall fixtures to be mounted on chair type carriers with the weight carried on the

structural floor independent of the wall construction.

C. Counter tops shall be supplied by General Contractor with the hole for sink already cut. This contractor shall set sink and connect same.

D. All fixtures shall be furnished with water flow restrictors as required by State and

local codes.

E. Fixtures and equipment and accessories shall be equal to the following: 1. Insert Fixture Schedule here based on U.S. Franchise Systems latest

Design and Construction Standards Manual.

2.08 BACKFLOW PREVENTER


15400 - Page 4 of 6

A. The reduced pressure backflow preventer shall consist of two separate spring loaded check valves and a differential relief valve. These devices shall automatically reduce the pressure in the "Zone" between the check valves. Should the differential pressure between the upstream and the downstream of the unit drop to 2 psi, the differential relief valve shall open and maintain the proper differential.

B. Both check valves and the differential relief valve shall be so constructed that

they may be serviced without removing the device from the line. These devices shall be rated to 150 psi working pressure and water temperatures of 32°F to 140°F.

C. Backflow preventers shall comply with ASSE #1013.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SANITARY DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS

A. Horizontal waste and vents shall be installed to grades specified, unless indicated otherwise on drawings. Waste piping 2" and smaller, pitch at ¼" per foot, 3" and larger piping, at 1/4" per foot, vent piping, all sizes at 1/8" per foot. Make changes in direction with "Y" branches and 1/4, 1/8 or 1/16 bends.

B. Connections to vertical wastes and vents shall be made with a sanitary "T" or

"TY" fittings, and at base of vertical stacks change to horizontal with long turn fittings.

C. All drainage fittings 2" or smaller shall be long turn pattern. Increase or reduction

in size shall be with concentric fittings.

D. Install cleanouts at base of all stacks, at maximum 50' intervals for 4" and smaller drains and at 100' intervals for 5" and larger sewers. Cleanouts shall be the size of pipe to which it is installed up to 4" in diameter. Pipe over 4" in diameter shall have a 4" cleanout.

E. Terminate vent pipes at least 12" above roof. Make each vent terminal watertight

with the roof by using sheet lead (4 psf) with base not less than 12" in all directions from center of pipe and collar full height of pipe and turned down 2" inside of pipe.

F. Lay all sanitary and drains with full length of each section resting on a solid bed.

Lay pipe starting at upgrade with spigot end of pipe pointing in direction of flow.

G. Connect to site sanitary sewer at 5'0" outside building and extend into building.

H. Extend sanitary sewer to street sewer and make connection per authority having jurisdiction.

3.02 DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS

A. Install new water service from 5'0" outside building into building.

B. Piping to be size and routed as generally indicated on drawings. Install hot and cold water distribution piping to all fixtures, equipment, hose bibbs, etc., requiring same. Connections for all fixtures and equipment in accordance with schedule on drawing or code.


15400 - Page 5 of 6

C. Pitch all piping for positive drainage, either to fixtures, fixture supply stop or low points in system. Provide drain valves at low points.

D. Install in manner to allow for expansion and contraction in piping and not to

interfere with the work of other trades. No piping shall be installed at locations subject to freezing.

E. Provide valves at branches, connections to equipment and other places that may

be indicated. All equipment and fixtures must be capable of being isolated for service and/or replacement. Include shut-off valves, check valves, unions and other accessories.

F. Install hose bibbs and wall hydrants with code approved vacuum breakers.

Extend make-up water to other water systems with approved backflow prevention devices.

G. Nipples between copper pipe and fixture supply fittings shall be red brass pipe not

galvanized steel pipe.

H. Thoroughly flush entire system, submit one representative sample of water taken from a remote location from the incoming service line to a recognized testing laboratory and submit results to the owner. Water quality shall meet EPA requirements.

I. Underground water service shall be buried with a minimum of 5' of cover and installed

per utility company's requirements. 3.03 GAS PIPING SYSTEM

A. Install new gas service 5'0" outside building into building. Underground gas service shall be buried with a minimum of 2' cover.

B. Piping to be size and routed as generally indicated on drawings. Install gas

distribution piping to all gas using equipment and appliances.

C. Connections shall include gas cock, dirt leg and union.

D. All gas piping 2½" and over shall be welded.

E. Underground gas service shall be buried with a minimum of 24" cover and installed per utility requirements. Metallic piping systems shall have cathodic protection.

3.04 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. All fixture supports to be of type permitting adjustment to fit variations in construction. All grounds or special supports necessary for setting fixtures shall be provided before plastering or other finished construction work is begun. All fixtures shall be hung at height as indicated on architectural plans.

B. Accessories, in general, are listed for each fixture. The contractor shall, however,

supply all stops, traps, escutcheons and connections as necessary to complete installation of each fixture, whether such items are listed or not.

C. After all fixtures have been set and are ready for use, thoroughly clean all fixtures

furnished, removing all stickers, rust stains and any other matter or discoloration leaving every part in good condition. Adjust all flush valves and other fixture water supplies to give proper water flow.


15400 - Page 6 of 6

D. Assemble lavatory and sink wastes and traps with slip joints and compression fittings on fixture side of trap. Sewer side connections shall be made with screwed joints. Slip joints on sewer side of traps are not acceptable.

E. Vacuum breakers shall be furnished and installed as a part of the fixture trim

wherever there is a possibility of back siphoning.

3.05 RECIRCULATING HOT WATER SYSTEM: The terminal point of the hot water mains shall be connected as directed on the plans to

re-circulating hot water mains. The re-circulating mains shall be vented through fixtures and installed so that no air binding will occur in them. Each branch return is to be valved to permit balancing of the system.

3.06 STERILIZATION

A. After the domestic water lines have been tested and approved, the piping shall be sterilized.

B. Prior to chlorination, all water mains shall be thoroughly flushed out.

C. Lines shall be in contact with sterilizing solution for a minimum of three hours

during which time no valves shall be operated.

D. Each section of line shall be treated with a solution containing a minimum of 50 ppm, chlorine.

E. If the bacteriological examination is satisfactory, the line shall be certified for use.


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 15700 - HEAT TRANSFER

15700 - Page 1 of 2

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE: Requirements of Division 1 of these specifications shall apply to all work

under this section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDES

• Through-the-wall heating and air conditioning units.

• Refrigeration accessories.

• Temperature controls and wiring.

• Filters.

• Ductless split system air conditioner. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Division 15 - Mechanical General Provisions. B. Division 15 - Basic Materials and Methods. C. Division 15 - Insulation. D. Division 15 - Air Distribution.

1.04 SUBMITTALS: Refer to Section 15010.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 THROUGH-THE-WALL PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

A. Supply and install air-cooled through-the-wall packaged terminal air conditioners.

B. Performance and manufacturer shall be as scheduled on the drawings. C. Controls shall be a wall mounted thermostat, Inncom e

4 Smart Digital Thermostat

mounted 48” above the floor. D. Compressor shall be hermetically sealed, internally isolated and mounted on

combination rubber and spring isolators. E. Evaporator and condenser coils shall be all copper tubing with rippled aluminum

sheet fins. Refrigerant control shall be by expansion valve. F. Evaporator and condenser fans shall be direct drive with permanent split

capacitor motors. Evaporator fan shall be centrifugal type and condenser fan shall be propeller type with slinger ring for condensate removal.

G. Wall sleeve shall be a special fabrication for mounting inside suite window seat.

It shall be one piece galvanized steel with electro deposition paint finish and high solids polyester overspray. Sleeve shall be shipped with rear closure panel.

H. Unit chassis shall be slide-out design, shipped with front. Unit shall feature

welded, insulated bulkhead. I. Units shall be ARI rated and U.L. listed as manufactured by Amana, AAF, Zone

Aire, Climate Control, Carrier or General Electric. J. Unit shall include sub-base and internal condensate removal kit

2.02 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 15700 - HEAT TRANSFER

15700 - Page 2 of 2

A. Ductless fan-coil units shall be ceiling suspended or high wall mounting type as indicated on the drawings. Units shall be by Carrier, Sanyo Friedrich or Mitsubishi.

B. All units shall be furnished with micro-processor controls, diagnostics to check

compressor drive and indoor fan malfunction; restart function for automatic start after a power failure; mounting bracket and template; cleanable filters; wired controls and low ambient temperature controls.

C. Ceiling suspended units shall include a built-in condensate pump.

D. Units shall be listed by U.L. or ETL. E. Condensing units shall include hermetic compressor, condenser coil and fan

arranged for horizontal air flow, high and low pressure switches and crankcase heater.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Refrigerant piping and equipment installation shall conform to the applicable requirement of the Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration (ANSI B9.1).

B. Piping and specialties shall be sized to prevent excessive pressure drop and

allow compressors and evaporators to operate together with balance points at or above the specified capacities.

C. Piping and specialties shall be arranged to return oil at all loads and prevent liquid

from "slugging" the compressor or siphoning to the evaporator. Provide double suction risers and traps as required.

D. Pitch horizontal refrigerant piping 1/2" per 10 feet in direction of flow.

E. Provide separate refrigerant circuits for multiple compressor applications.

3.02 CONTROL SYSTEMS AND WIRING

A. This contractor shall furnish all control wiring for control of mechanical equipment.

B. Line voltage wiring shall be in conduit and 24 volt wiring may be open if code allowed, where it is concealed above ceilings or in equipment rooms.

C. Provide all relays, switches and auxiliary devices required to accomplish control

of the mechanical systems. D. Control sequences shall be as follows:

1. Through-Wall Air Conditioning Units - Controlled from wall mounted thermostat

2. Split System Room Air Conditioning Units - Controlled from wall mounted thermostat. Provide wiring for defrost thermostat;

3. Room Ventilation and Combustion Air - Motorized damper on combustion air louver shall be interlocked to open on operation of hot water heaters and clothes driers.


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 15701 - MAKEUP AIR UNITS

15701 - Page 1 of 5

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes rooftop heating and cooling units.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including rated capacities of selected model clearly indicated; dimensions; required clearances; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; accessories; and installation and startup instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Commissioning Reports: Indicate results of startup and testing commissioning requirements. Submit copies of checklists.

D. Maintenance Data: Maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."

B. Energy Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The rooftop unit(s) shall be certified in accordance with UL Standard 1995 and ANSI Standard Z21.47

2. The rooftop unit(s) shall be safety certified by an accredited testing laboratory and the nameplate shall carry the label of the certification agency.


A. Deliver rooftop units as factory-assembled units with protective crating and covering as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Coordinate delivery of units in sufficient time to allow movement into building.

C. Handle rooftop units to comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation instructions for unloading and moving to final location.

1.06 COORDINATION


15701 - Page 2 of 5

A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with roof construction. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranty: A written warranty, executed by the manufacturer and signed by the Contractor, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials or workmanship, within the specified warranty period, provided manufacturer's written instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance have been followed.

1. Warranty Period, Compressors: Manufacturers standard, but not less than 5 years after date of startup but not to exceed 5 years from shipment.

2. Warranty Period, Heat Exchangers: Manufacturers non- prorated full parts replacement not less than 25 years after date of startup or 25 years from date of shipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to strict compliance with the requirements of this specification, provide products by one of the following:

1. Rooftop Units: a. AAON, Inc.

2.02 MAKE-UP AIR UNITS

A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for roof or slab installation; and consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans, refrigeration and temperature controls, gas heater, (hot water coils), (glycol coils), (chilled water coils), (steam coils), filters, and dampers.

B. Construction:

1. Unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired and shipped in one section.

2. Unit shall be specifically designed for outdoor roof top application with a fully weatherproof cabinet.

3. Cabinet shall be constructed entirely of G90 galvanized steel with the exterior constructed of 20 gauge or heavier material.

4. Paint finish shall be capable of withstanding at least 2000 hours, with no visible corrosive effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere in accordance with ASTM B 117-95 test procedure.

5. The unit roof shall be sloped or cross-broken to assure drainage. 6. Unit specific color coded wiring diagrams shall match the unit color coded wiring and will

be provided in both point-to-point and ladder form. 7. Diagrams shall also be laminated in plastic and permanently affixed inside the

control compartment. 8. Access to filters, blower, heating section, and other items needing periodic

checking or maintenance shall be through hinged access doors with quarter turn latches. Door fastening screws are not acceptable.

9. Access doors shall have stainless steel hinges and full perimeter gasketing.


15701 - Page 3 of 5

10. All openings through the base pan of the unit shall have upturned flanges of at least 1/2" in height around the opening through the base pan.

11. Air side service access doors shall have rain break overhangs. 12. All access doors shall have an internal metal liner to protect the door ½ inch thick,

1 ½ lb. density fiberglass insulation. 13. The interior air side of the cabinet shall be entirely insulated on all exterior panels

with 1 inch thick, 1 1/2 lb. density fiberglass insulation. 14. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate unit lifting and rigging, service areas and

caution areas. Installation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied with each unit.

C. Supply Fans:

1. Blower(s) shall be entirely self contained on a slide deck for service and removal from the cabinet.

2. All belt drive blower(s) shall have backward inclined airfoil blades. 3. All direct drive blower(s) shall have forward curved blades. 4. Adjustable V-belt drive shall be provided with a minimum rating of 140% of the

motor nameplate brake horsepower when the adjustable pulley is at the minimum RPM.

5. Blowers, drives and motors shall be dynamically balanced.

D. Outside Air Options:

1. Shall be 100% outside air with a motor operated outside air damper assembly constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, air foil blade with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more than 25 CFM of leakage per sq. ft. of damper area when subjected to 2 in. w.g. air pressure differential across the damper. Damper motor shall be spring return to ensure closing of outdoor air damper during periods of unit shut down or power failure. No return air connection shall be present.

E. Condenser:

1. Air Cooled Condenser Section: a. The condensing section shall be equipped with vertical discharge axial flow direct drive fans. Direct drive fans shall be directly connected to and supported by the motor shaft. b. The condenser coils shall be sloped at least 30 degrees to protect the coils from damage. c. Condenser coils shall be copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes. d. Condenser coils to be sized for a minimum of 10°F of refrigerant sub- cooling.

F. Filters: 2-inch- thick, fiberglass, throwaway with an ASHRAE efficiency of 30%

G. Evaporator Coils:

1. Evaporator coils shall be copper tube with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes.

2. Evaporator coils shall have galvanized steel end casings. 3. Evaporator coils shall have equalizing type vertical tube headers. 4. Evaporator coils shall be furnished with a thermostatic expansion valve. 5. Evaporator coils shall be furnished with a double sloped drain pan for the positive

drainage of condensate.

H. Refrigeration System:

1. Compressors shall be scroll type with internal thermal overload protection and mounted on the compressor manufacturer’s recommended rubber vibration isolators. Each compressor shall have independent refrigerant circuits.


15701 - Page 4 of 5

2. All units over 7 tons shall be multiple stages and shall have a minimum of 2 stages of capacity control.

3. Compressors shall be mounted in an isolated compartment to permit operation of the unit without affecting air flow when the door to the compartment is open.

4. Compressors shall be isolated from the base pan and supply air to avoid any transmission of noise from the compressor into the building area.

5. System shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve type refrigerant flow control.

6. System shall be equipped with automatic reset low pressure and manual reset high pressure refrigerant controls.

7. Unit shall be equipped with Schrader type service fittings on both the high side and low pressure sides of the system.

8. Unit shall be equipped with refrigerant liquid line driers. 9. Unit shall be fully factory charged with refrigerant.

Options:

a. Hot gas bypass shall be provided on the first refrigerant circuit. b. Each compressor shall be individually staged for capacity control. c. All circuits shall be equipped with liquid line sight glasses. d. Unit shall be provided with a hot gas reheat coil and modulating hot gas

reheat control valve piped to the lead refrigerant system e. Unit shall be equipped with a 5 minute anti-short cycle delay timer for each

stage. f. Unit shall be equipped with 20 second between stage delay timers for each

stage. g. First stage cooling shall be provided to allow operation to 55°F.

I. Gas Heat Section:

1. Unit shall heat using natural gas fuel. 2. Unit shall be provided with a gas heating furnace consisting of a stainless steel

heat exchanger with multiple concavities, an induced draft blower and an electric pressure switch to lockout the gas valve until the combustion chamber is purged and combustion air flow is established. Drum type heat exchangers or heat exchanger tubes with separate internal turbulators are not acceptable.

3. Unit shall be provided with a gas ignition system consisting of an electronic ignitor to a pilot system, which will be continuous when the heater is operating, but will shut off the pilot when heating is not required.

4. Unit shall have gas supply piping entrances in the unit base for through the curb gas piping and in the outside cabinet wall for across the roof gas piping.

5. Unit shall be equipped with a Stainless Steel tubular heat exchanger with a 25 year non pro-rated warranty.

6. Unit shall heat using natural gas and be equipped with a dual two stage gas valves and stainless steel tubular heat exchanger. The heat exchanger shall have a 25 year non pro-rated warranty.

J. Controls:

1. Make-Up Air Unit Controller

a. MUA programmable controller shall be internal to the rooftop unit and shall include a 7 day, 2 events per day scheduler, 14 day holiday schedule, optimal start and outputs for heating, cooling, economizer. The outside air temperature and the humidity sensors shall be factory mounted. The unit manufacturer shall provide the supply air temperature sensor for field installation by others.

K. SMOKE DETECTOR

Unit shall be provided with a supply air smoke detector.


15701 - Page 5 of 5

2.05 ROOF CURBS

A. Roof curbs shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Curbs are to be fully gasketed between the curb top and unit bottom with the curb providing full perimeter support, cross structure support and air seal for the unit.

OPTIONS: 1. Unit shall be mounted on a factory furnished acoustical style solid bottom roof curb,

fully lined with 1" of neoprene coated, fiberglass insulation and with a wood nailer strip. Curb height to be a minimum of 30” tall to accommodate a field cut opening in side of curb for horizontal air discharge.

END OF SECTION

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 15738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS

15738 - Page 1 of 4

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Split-System Air-Conditioning

2. Floor Mounted Evaporator – Fan Components

3. Air Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:

1. 70 "National Electric Code"

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Publications:

1. 90.1 “Energy Code for Commercial and High-Rise Residential Buildings”

C. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Publications:

1. 210/240 “Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections:

1. Product Data:

a. Include the following:

1) Rated capacities

2) Furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated.

3) Performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.

2. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

3. Field quality-control test reports.

4. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-system units and are based on the specific system indicated.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

D. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."


15738 - Page 2 of 4

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Coordinate the location of cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: Two set of filters for each unit.

2. Fan Belts: Two set of belts for each unit.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Carrier Corp.; Carrier Air Conditioning Division, United Technologies Corporation (800-827-7435 x 3496)

2. Lennox International Inc. (800-953-6669)

3. Trane, A Business of American Standard Companies (847-884-3296)

4. York, A Johnson Controls Company (717-771-7890)

2.2 FLOOR-MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS

A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by Architect.

1. Discharge: Ducted.

2. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber, duct liner.

3. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.

C. High Efficiency Condensing Gas Burner:

D. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal, with power-induced outside air.

E. Filters: Minimum 1-inch thick, in fiberboard frames.

F. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.


15738 - Page 3 of 4

G. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.

1. Compressor Type: Reciprocating

2. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and automatic-reset low-pressure switch.

3. Refrigerant Charge: R-22

H. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.

I. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.

J. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.

K. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 25 deg F.

L. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Section 23 09 00 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and Section 23 09 93 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls."

B. Time Delay Relay: Five-minute delay to prevent compressor cycling.

C. Adjustable Digital Thermostat: Remote with securable blank cover in public spaces (except meeting rooms) and locking ventilated cover in other locations to control the following:

1. Supply Fan

2. Condensing Unit

3. Heater

4. Plastic guards are not acceptable in Public Spaces.

D. System Selector Switch: Off/Heat/Auto/Cool.

E. Voltage and phase monitoring.

F. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure.

C. Install ground-mounting, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- thick, reinforced concrete base; 4 inches larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.

D. Install roof-mounting compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in respective Division 07 Roofing Sections. Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.

E. Install seismic restraints where required.


15738 - Page 4 of 4

F. Install floor mounted evaporator-fan unit and compressor-condenser components on restrained, rubber isolator mounts. Install suspended evaporator-fan units with restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static deflection of 1-inch.

G. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Refrigerant piping installation requirements are specified in Section 23 23 00 “Refrigerant Piping.” Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.

C. Duct Connections: Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in Section 23 33 00"Air Duct Accessories."

D. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 15751 - INDOOR POOL DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS

15751 - Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Factory-assembled and tested, refrigeration-type dehumidification units with the following operation and optional accessories and components: a. Electric post heater. b. Cooling package consisting of compressors, remote condenser coil, and evaporator

coil. c. Outside and return air dampers. d. Smoke detectors or firestats. e. Automatic controls and remote-control panel. f. Hot-gas reheat.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Publications:

1. 575 “Method of Measuring Machinery Sound Within an Equipment Space” 2. 910 “Indoor Pool Dehumidifiers”

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Publications: 1. 62.1 “Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (ANSI Approved)”

2. 90.1 “Energy Code for Commercial and High-Rise Residential Buildings”

3. 139 “Method of Testing for Rating Desiccant Dehumidifiers Utilizing Heat for the Regeneration Process (ANSI approved)”

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:


D. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Standards:

1. 268A “Standard for Smoke Detectors for Duct Application” 2. 486A “Standard For Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper

Conductors” 3. 486B “Standard for Wire Connectors for Use With Aluminum Conductors”

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories. 2. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

a. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

b. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

c. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and equipment mounting frame.

d. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

3. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that dehumidification units, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces


15751 - Page 2 of 6

defined in Section 23 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Include the following:

a. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 1) The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of

any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." b. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and

locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. c. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is

based and their installation requirements. 4. Source quality-control test reports. 5. Field quality-control test reports. 6. Startup report. 7. Operation and Maintenance Data: For dehumidification units to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. 8. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of dehumidification units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, “Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings”.

D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

E. ASHRAE 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of dehumidification units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for Evaporator Coil: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


15751 - Page 3 of 6

1. Filters: One set(s) of each type of filter specified. 2. Fan Belts: One set(s) for each belt-drive fan.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS:

1. PoolPAK Technologies Corporation 2. Dectron Internationale 3. Desert Aire Corp.

2.2 REFRIGERATION DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS

A. Water-Cooling Heat Exchanger: Coaxial, vented, double-wall construction; with three-way refrigerant control valve.

B. Energy-Recovery Heat Exchanger (Pool Heater): Cupronickel, coaxial, vented, double-wall construction for potable-water service.

C. Outside-Air Intake Dampers: Return- and outside-air intake dampers with damper operator and control package.

1. Leakage: Maximum leakage 2.5 percent at nominal airflow of 400 cfm per ton (54 L/S Per KW) with 1-inch wg (250-Pa) pressure differential.

2. Damper Operator: 24-V ac, close coupled, with gear train sealed in oil and with spring return.

D. Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric detector located in return-air plenum, to de-energize unit.

1. Operating Voltage: 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjusting after actuation to restore

them to normal operation. 3. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components mounted in

module with tamper-resistant connection to fixed base with twist-locking plug. Terminals in fixed base accept building wiring.

4. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. To indicate detector operation. 5. Sensitivity: Can be tested and adjusted in-place after installation. 6. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to the fire alarm control panel. 7. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver. 8. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot (0.008 and 0.011 percent/mm) of

smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A. 9. Integral Thermal Detector: Fixed-temperature type with 135 deg F (57 deg C) setting.

E. Electrical Convenience Outlet: 115-V ac fused, duplex straight-blade receptacles separately fused and located inside dehumidification unit casing or in roof-curb perimeter.

F. Operating Controls: Factory-installed microprocessor shall control and monitor unit and communicate to central-control processor.

1. Control Outputs: Heating, cooling, and dehumidification. 2. Discharge-air-, outdoor-air-, conditioned-space-, and control set-point-temperature LCD. 3. Outdoor enthalpy LCD. 4. Filter pressure drop LCD. 5. Status: Airflow, fans, system, unit operation, and operating mode. 6. Alarm LCD.


15751 - Page 4 of 6

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."


A. Verification of Performance: According to ASHRAE 139 and ARI 910.

B. Sound-Power-Level Ratings: According to ARI 575.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Examine roughing-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances.

B. Install dehumidification units on vibration and seismic-control devices. Vibration and seismic-control devices are specified in Section 23 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

1. Units with Internally Isolated Fans: Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to dehumidification units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.

D. Connect condensate drain pans using minimum NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) copper tubing. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan, and install clean out at changes in direction.

E. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 23 23 00 "Refrigerant Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.

F. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install ducts to termination in roof-mounting frames. Where indicated, terminate return-air

duct through roof structure and insulate the space between roof and bottom of unit.

G. Ground equipment in accordance with the National Electric Code

H. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


15751 - Page 5 of 6


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water and steam coils with water, and test coils and

connections for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until

no leaks exist. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning components and retest and reinspect as specified above.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. Perform the following final checks before startup:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify free fan

wheel rotation and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.

5. Verify lubrication of bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts. 6. Set outside- and return-air mixing dampers to minimum outside-air setting. 7. Install clean filters. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected duct systems are in fully open position.

C. Starting procedures for dehumidification units include the following: 1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan

to indicated rpm. Replace malfunctioning motors, bearings, and fan wheels. 2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage. 3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan

performance.

D. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for dehumidification unit testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Startup Report: Report findings during startup. Identify startup steps, corrective measures taken, and final results.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.


15751 - Page 6 of 6

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean dehumidification units internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheels, cabinets, and coils' entering-air face.

B. After completing system installation, testing, and startup service of dehumidification units, clean filter housings and install new filters.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain dehumidification units. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 15767 - UNIT HEATERS

15767 - Page 1 of 4

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Unit heaters

2. Wall Heaters

3. Duct heaters

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 16 Sections for electrical connections.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:


2. 90A “Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems”

B. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publications:

1. 486A “Standard For Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors”

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Product data for each type of product specified.

2. Wiring diagrams detailing power and control wiring and differentiating clearly between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.

3. Samples of cabinet finish colors for approval.

4. Field test reports from a qualified independent inspecting and testing agency indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with performance requirements of unit heaters.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing unit heaters similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS:

A. Indeeco (800-243-8162)

B. Emerson Electric Co. (314-553-2000)

C. QMark, Marley Engineered Products, An SPX Company (843-479-4006)


15767 - Page 2 of 4

D. Markel Products Company (800-682-3398)

2.2 ELECTRICAL UNIT HEATERS

A. Heating Elements: Nickel-chromium heating wire element; free from expansion noise and 60-Hz hum; embedded in magnesium oxide, insulating refractory; and sealed in high-mass steel or corrosion-resistant metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch. Element ends are enclosed in terminal box. Fin surface temperature does not exceed 550 deg F at any point during normal operation.

B. Heater Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit controls for overtemperature protection of heaters.

C. Fan and Motor: Direct-drive propeller fan and manufacturer's standard motor. Motors sized 1 hp and less include motor overload protection.

D. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.

E. Discharge Configuration: Horizontal discharge with horizontal, adjustable louvers.

F. Optional Accessories: Include the following:

1. Wall thermostat.

2. Safety-switch disconnect on cover of terminal box.

3. Mercury contactors.

4. Fan-delay relay.

2.3 ELECTRIC WALL HEATERS:

A. General: Provide electric wall heaters with architectural styling for exposed or recessed application.

B. Heater Assembly: The heater assembly which fits into the back box shall consist of a fan panel upon which is mounted all of the operational parts of the heater.

C. Heating Element: The heating elements shall be of the non-glowing design consisting of a special resistance wire enclosed in a steel sheath to which steel plate fins are copper brazed. It shall be warranted for 5 years.

D. Fan and Motor: Fan shall be five bladed aluminum. Fan motor shall be totally enclosed.

E. Fan Delay Switch: Fan control shall be of bi-metallic, snap-action type and shall activate fan after heating element reaches operating temperature. The fan shall continue to operate after the thermostat is satisfied and until the heating element is cool.

F. Thermostat: The tamper-proof thermostat shall be of the bimetallic snap-action type with enclosed contacts. It shall be completely concealed and reactive behind the front cover to become tamper proof.

G. Thermal Cutout: A thermal cutout shall be built into the system to automatically shut off the heater in the event of overheating and reactivate the heater when temperatures return to normal.

H. Disconnect Switch: A double-pole, single throw disconnect switch shall be mounted on the back box for positive disconnect of power supply. It will be completely concealed behind the front grid panel.


15767 - Page 3 of 4

I. Back Box: The back box shall be designed for duty as a recessed rough-in box in either masonry or frame installations, and is also used with the surface mounting box in surface mounted installations. The back box shall be 20 gage cold-rolled steel and shall contain knockouts through which power leads are brought.

J. Front Panel: The front panel shall be of the bar grille type and shall be constructed of 16 gage cold-rolled steel, welded into a uniform grille to direct the warmed air toward the floor. The front grille shall be surrounded by a decorative satin-finish aluminum “picture” frame.

K. Three Piece Design: The heater shall be made up of a back box, a heater assembly and a front panel.

2.4 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS

A. Furnish electric duct heaters of the size, capacity, and mounting style indicated on plans. Heaters shall be UL listed for zero clearance and shall meet all applicable requirements of the 1975 National Electrical Code.

B. Elements: Construct of 80% nickel and 20% chromium; steps shall be arranged to prevent stratification when operating at less than full capacity.

C. Coil Terminals: Stainless steel, terminal insulators, and bracket bushings shall be constructed of ceramic and securely positioned. Terminals shall be machine crimped to coil.

D. Frame: Construct of heavy gauge galvanized steel to assure structural rigidity and vertical galvanized steel supports with stiffening ribs and gussets.

E. Terminal Box: Provide with solid cover and hinge if built-in fuses or interlocking disconnect switches are provided. Heater terminal box must be totally enclosed. Provide access panel on both sides of heater.

F. Controls: Include automatic reset thermal cutout, differential pressure air flow switch, and fan interlock relays. All safety devices shall be serviceable through the terminal box without removing the heating coil from the duct. Provide multiple stages of control as indicated on the drawings.

G. Wiring: Power circuits shall have single point termination to built-in disconnect switch. Each sub-circuit shall be fused per N.E.C. and a fuse control circuit transformer shall be provided.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and supports to receive unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install heaters as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and NFPA 90A.

B. Connect heaters and components to wiring systems and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening requirements specified in UL 486A.


15767 - Page 4 of 4


A. Testing: After installing unit heaters and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units and retest.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Replace filters in each cabinet unit heater at project closeout.


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 15800 - AIR DISTRIBUTION

15800 - Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCE: Requirements of Division 1 of these specifications shall apply to all work under this section.

1.02 WORK INCLUDES

• Exterior louvers.

• Access door (ductwork and plenum casing).

• Ductwork.

• Flues.

• Exhaust fans.

• Dryer vents.

• Filters.

• Motor operated dampers.

• Fire dampers.

• Grilles and diffusers.

• Exterior louvers.


A. Division 15 - Mechanical General Provisions. B. Division 15 - Basic Materials and Methods. C. Division 15 - Insulation. D. Division 15 - Heat Transfer.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. The following submittals are required:

1. Grilles, louvers and accessories; 2. All HVAC equipment and controls; 3. Flues. 4. Fire dampers.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EXHAUST FANS

A. In general, Greenheck fans are specified equals as manufactured by Jenn-Air, Acme or Loren-Cook are acceptable.

B. Size, capacity and arrangement shall be as scheduled on the drawings.

2.02 LOW PRESSURE RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK

A. Rectangular ductwork and plenum chambers shall be constructed of the following gauges:

U.S. GAUGE LARGEST DIMENSION GALVANIZED STEEL To 12" 26 13" to 30" 24 31" to 54" 22 55" to 84" 20 Over 84" 18 Plenums 18


15800 - Page 2 of 5

B. All ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized steel.

C. Exposed ductwork shall be fabricated from "Paint Grip" galvanized steel or similar mill surface etch treatment.

2.03 ALUMINUM DRYER VENTS

A. Dryer vents shall be aluminum complying with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14.

B. Thickness, Round Ductwork: Fabricate aluminum ductwork from the following

minimum thicknesses of sheet for diameters up to the corresponding maximum dimensions indicated:

0.020" up to 13" diameter. 0.025" up to 22" diameter. 0.032" up to 36" diameter. 0.040" up to 50" diameter. 0.051" up to 60" diameter.

2.04 MOTOR OPERATED DAMPERS

A. Dampers shall be equivalent to Ruskin CD50/OB low leakage control damper, opposed blade.

B. Operator shall be factory installed two position electric motor, 120 volt.

2.05 METALBESTOS FLUES: Provide "Metalbestos" type "QC" and "RV", air insulated

double wall construction flues of size as indicated on plans. Equivalent flues by Mastervent or Metal-Fab.

2.06 GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS

A. See drawings for all grille, diffuser and accessory locations and CFM.

B. In general, Price grilles and diffusers are specified, equals as manufactured by

Krueger, Tuttle and Bailey or Anemostat-Waterloo are acceptable.

C. All grilles, registers and diffusers to have a factory applied off-white finish unless otherwise noted on plans.

D. Refer to architectural reflected ceiling plan for exact location of ceiling diffusers.

2.07 GALVANIZED STEEL FLUE CONNECTORS

A. Galvanized steel flues shall be constructed of the following gauges

DIAMETER OF U.S. GAUGE

FLUE (IN) GALVANIZED STEEL 0 - 5 24 Gauge 6 - 9 22 Gauge 10 - 16 20 Gauge Greater than 16 14 Gauge

2.08 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK

A. Flexible ducts shall be Owens-Corning INL-25 or Valuflex or approved equal as manufactured by Certain Teed, Flexaust or Wiremold.


15800 - Page 3 of 5

B. Ducts shall bear U.L. Class 1 Air Duct label as tested under U.L. 181 and required by NFPA 90A as an air duct.

2.09 EXTERIOR LOUVERS

A. Provide extruded aluminum stationary exterior wall louvers, size as indicated on plans.

B. Louvers shall be Ruskin ELF-375, 4” deep, with 1/2" square mesh aluminum

screen on interior face. Provide acrylic enamel finish. Submit color samples for approval.

C. Published louver performance data bearing the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for

Air Performance and Water Penetration must be submitted for approval prior to fabrication and must demonstrate pressure drop and later penetration equal to or less than the Ruskin model specified.

D. Equivalent louvers by Ruskin, American Warming and Construction Specialties

are acceptable.

2.10 FIRE DAMPERS: Install fire dampers where indicated on drawings. Fire dampers shall be Safe-Air Inc.

horizontal and vertical Model 150, type "XM" in low pressure ductwork, type "C" in high pressure ductwork. Dampers shall be UL classified for use in two hour fire partitions. Equivalent by Air Balance Inc. or Ruskin may be substituted.

2.11 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS: Provide flexible connections with 1" slack between

ducts and fans where shown on drawings. Flexible material shall be "Vent-glas" as manufactured by Iden Associates.

2.12 ACCESS DOORS AND HARDWARE

A. Furnish access doors for each automatic damper, fire damper, coil, fan, filter bank and where indicated.

B. Provide access doors with latches, hinges and felt gaskets as manufactured by

Young Regulator Company, Ventlock or Dura-Dyne.

2.13 DAMPERS AND DEFLECTORS

A. Provide all manual dampers with Young Regulator Company, Ventlock or Dura-Dyne operators. Use Young Regulator No. 443-B operators for balancing dampers.

B. Combustion air intakes shall be equipped with 24 volt electric motor operated

dampers, Ruskin CD36 or approved equal with end switch to close when blade is in the fully open position.

2.14 CEILING TYPE FIRE DAMPERS

A. All ceiling register and grille openings in fire rated ceilings shall be protected by appropriately UL Fire Resistance Classified ceiling fire dampers. Fire dampers with 1-1/2 or 3 hour ratings for walls or floors are not to be utilized in fire rated ceiling openings. Each ceiling diffuser opening shall be protected with appropriately UL Fire Resistance Classified Ceiling Classification(s) and shall apply to the specific ceiling system design and diffusers, grille or register construction being installed. All installations shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions.


15800 - Page 4 of 5

B. Lay in ceiling diffusers shall be a minimum of 24 gauge steel construction. Ceiling diffuser radiation shield shall consist of an appropriate ceiling fire damper protecting the diffuser neck and a thermal insulating blanket protecting the diffuser pan. The entire system shall be UL classified for use in all UL fire rated floor/ceiling and roof/ceiling systems with fire resistance ratings of three hours or less. System proposed for installation must be equivalent in all respects to Ruskin Model CFD5 ceiling diffuser radiation shield.

2.15 SMOKE/FIRE DAMPERS

A. Corridor smoke/fire dampers: Greenheck out-of-wall style or approved equal. Mount actuator in air stream

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES

A. Provide all sheet metal work as shown on the drawings in accordance with the latest edition of the ASHRAE guide and data book, SMACNA Standards and this Specification, the most demanding of which shall be the minimum standard.

B. Install ductwork and flues indicated on drawings making all necessary changes in

cross sections and offsets, whether or not specifically indicated.

C. All changes in cross section shall be made without reducing the design area of the duct.

D. Cap all open ends of ductwork until connected to grilles, diffusers, equipment to

prevent entrance of debris, dust, etc.

E. Make changes in direction of ductwork, unless otherwise specified with square elbows and double thickness turning vanes; full radius elbows having inside radius equal to width of duct measured in plane of turn; or one-third radius elbows with inside radius equal to one-third duct width and a single vane radius of two-thirds duct width.

F. No pipe or other obstructions shall pass through air ducts.

G. Install all ducts run below ceilings so as to maintain maximum headroom in all

rooms and corridors.

H. Ducts passing through exterior walls shall be provided with weatherproof flashings, ducts passing through roof shall be provided with roof curb and counter flashing. Where ducts pass exposed through interior building walls provide a sheet metal collar to conceal the gap between the wall opening and the duct.

I. Ducts shall not be hung from other ducts, pipe or conduit.

J. Fire and/or smoke dampers shall be installed in accordance with conditions of

their approval, manufacturer's instructions, requirements of NFPA 90A and UL fire resistance directory.

K. Duct dimensions are gross except for lined ducts where dimensions are for net

free area.

L. All joints and seams in ducts shall be reasonably air-tight; poorly made joints, splits, visible holes at corners, etc., shall be reworked or new pieces of ductwork installed. Where excessive pulsating of ductwork or plenum housing is found, additional stiffeners shall be added.


15800 - Page 5 of 5

M. Furnish and install all manual dampers and deflectors indicated on the drawings or where necessary to properly distribute and balance air. Provide damper in each supply duct leaving duct main and in each branch serving individual supply, return and exhaust outlets and where otherwise indicated.

N. Where dampers are concealed above suspended ceilings, other than removable

ceilings or behind walls provide access doors or provide Young Regulator Company adjustable recessed damper operators with flush prime coated covers and extended regulator number 896, 912, 914 or 927 as applicable.

O. Install additional dampers where required by the Air Balance Contractor to

properly adjust the system air volumes.

P. Dampers shall be fabricated with blades no larger than 8" wide X 48" long. Dampers over 48" in length shall have intermediate support and bearings.

3.02 FLUE

A. Provide all pipe, fittings, stack cap, ventilated roof thimble, drain section, flashing collars and stack supports required for a complete installation. Install per manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Horizontal and vertical piping shall be securely supported from building

construction by galvanized strap iron.


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 15822 - POWERED ROOF EXHAUSTERS

15822 - Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required

for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Fans and accessories, including fan curves. 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Capacity, size and arrangement, static pressure, brake horsepower, component

parts and accessories as called for and/or as necessary to obtain required results and allow for proper maintenance. Ratings based on tests made in accordance with AMCA Standard 211. Each size fan to be supplied shall be tested in the manufacturer's laboratory under simulated installation conditions. Ratings based on test, not on interpolated or extrapolated calculation. Guaranteed full capacity delivery through duct systems finally installed and under conditions listed. Guaranteed sound-power level ratings not exceeding those of design equipment, or as scheduled. Equipment statically and dynamically balanced to acceptable tolerances with weights permanently fastened.

B. Classification:

Maximum Total SP Class

Up to 3¾ in. WG-STD I

Up to 6¾ in. WG-STD II

Up to 12¾ in. WG-STD III

C. Due to the various system design characteristics and/or limited space

requirements, more than one manufacturer of equipment may be required, except that fans of same type to be of same manufacturer.

D. Motors: Furnished with fan. 1. Belt drive units on adjustable slide base. E. Drives: 1. Belt or direct drive as called for. 2. Motor pulleys: a. Adjustable type to produce 15% speed change above and below

rated speed. b. 5 hp and smaller: "A" section, 2.6 in. minimum pitch diameter. c. 7-1/2 hp to 20 hp: "B" section, 4.6 in. minimum pitch diameter. d. 25 hp and larger: "C" section, 7.0 in. minimum pitch diameter. e. Drive ratio not over 4:1.


15822 - Page 2 of 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 Powered roof exhausters shall be constructed of minimum .064" aluminum housing with

adjustable V-belt drive, aluminum backward inclined centrifugal fan, ball type fan bearings, permanently lubricated ball bearing motor, aluminum bird screen and prefabricated, insulated curb.

2.02 Powered roof exhausters shall be furnished with gravity or motorized back draft dampers

as scheduled on Drawings. Motorized dampers shall have 120 volt single phase operators.

2.03 Furnish a factory made curb for each roof exhauster, of 18 gauge galvanized steel with 1"

glass fiber insulation, cant and nailer strip. Curb not less than 12" high. Provide with Model AT sound curb where indicated on the fan schedule on the Drawings.

2.04 Furnish a factory mounted disconnect switch for each roof exhauster.

2.05 Motors shall be 1750 RPM, 60 cycle, and open drip-proof, with sealed grease lubricated

ball bearings. Voltage and phase as shown on the Drawings. Motor 1/2 HP and larger shall be high efficiency type similar to Century E-Plus meeting Energy Code and have 1.15 service factor. Motor shall be mounted on an adjustable base. Drive shall be V-belt type, designed for 125% of motor horsepower, with solid fan sheaves and adjustable motor sheaves. Furnish additional sheaves and belts as required to adjust fans to deliver specified air quantities at actual system static pressures.

2.06 Fan rating is based on standard air. Rating shall be AMCA certified and fan shall bear

AMCA seal. 2.07 Powered roof exhausters as specified in section 15007, of the same size, type and

capacity, may be furnished at the Contractor's option. 2.08 Design Product: Greenheck.

2.09 Manufacturers: Twin City, Carnes, Cook, Penn. PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Provide equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and compatible with

intent of the respective system performance requirements. 3.02 Provide vibration isolation.

3.03 Provide necessary supporting ironwork and platforms for equipment requiring same:

A. Platforms constructed of 2 in. steel grating in rectangular steel frame. B. Suspend platforms from structural members, by adequate strength rods of

sufficient length at each corner of platform. C. Braced against swaying.


15822 - Page 3 of 3

3.04 Provide roof fans with rubber gasket between fan base and roof curb. Provide for roof

openings and framing as called for. Set and secure curb to roof. Secure curb cap to roof curb with anchoring devices spaced at a maximum of 6 in. Install with automatic dampers. Provide waterproof and insulated plenum below. Provide sufficient length of electrical conduit to allow tilting of fan off curb, where applicable.

3.05 Provide guards for exposed belts, shafts or fan wheels.

3.06 Change pulley sizes to make systems deliver specified quantities of air.

3.07 Starters and wiring by the Electrical Contractor.

3.08 Roof openings and flashing for weatherproofing by the General Contractor. Setting of

curbs by the HVAC Contractor. Setting of roof exhausters by the HVAC Contractor.

End of Section

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 15950 - TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING FOR HVAC

15950 - Page 1 of 10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Balancing airflow within distribution systems, including submains, branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.

2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.

3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.

4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.

5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.

6. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.

7. Verify performance of package terminal air conditioning units.

B. Related Sections:

1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are included in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment.

2. Field quality-control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and equipment installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC)

1. "National Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing"

B. Air Movement & Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA)

1. 201, "Fans and Systems

C. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB)

1. “Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems”

D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA)

1. "HVAC Systems--Duct Design"

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to design quantities.

C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.

D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results.

E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.


15950 - Page 2 of 10

G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.

H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.

J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system.

K. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.

L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Quality-Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this Project's testing, adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article below.

2. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Contractor’s Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents Review Report as specified in Part 3 of this Section.

3. Submittals Examination Report: Prior to the start of duct or piping fabrication, submit 2 copies of the Submitted Examination Report as specified in Part 3 of this Section.

4. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.


A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either AABC or NEBB.

B. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting, and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.

2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

C. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use testing, adjusting, and balancing standard forms from AABC’s “National Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing” or NEBB’s “Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems”.

D. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer.


15950 - Page 3 of 10

E. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner’s representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of testing, adjusting, and balancing team members, equipment manufacturers’ authorized service representatives, HVAC controls Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7 days advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location. As a minimum include the following agenda items:

1. Submittal distribution requirements.

2. Contract Documents examination report.

3. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan.

4. Work schedule and Project site access requirements.

5. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.

B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Contract Documents to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment and submit “Contract Documents Examination Report”.

1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract.

2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

3. Examine Engineer’s design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems’ output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC systems and equipment controls.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment including sheet metal duct fabrication and piping shop drawings to ensure that the distribution system is reasonably complete and sufficiently designed to accurately balance the complete building. Submit “Submitting Examination Report”.


15950 - Page 4 of 10

1. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 07 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 05 and 06. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

C. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been performed.

1. Examine HVAC systems and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

2. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.

3. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

4. Examine terminal units to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

5. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for return air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.

6. Examine heat-transfer coils for clean and straight fins.

7. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

8. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

a. Dampers, and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.

b. Dampers are in the position indicated by the controller.

c. Integrity dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in variable-air-volume terminals.

d. Thermostats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls.

e. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.

f. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.

g. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.

h. Interlocked systems are operating.

i. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.

D. Examine project record documents described in Division 01 Section - “Project Record Documents”.

E. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.


15950 - Page 5 of 10

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.

2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

3. Equipment and duct access doors are properly located, sized, and securely closed.

4. Verify that smoke and fire dampers are open.

5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.

6. Access to balancing devices is provided.

7. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be met.

3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC national standards and this Section or in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section.

B. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, balancing, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

C. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project. Plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork and housings.

3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Cross check the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic single line diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts and domestic hot water distribution.

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.

D. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

H. Check for airflow blockages.

I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.


15950 - Page 6 of 10

3.5 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and exhaust-air systems.

B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan manufacturer.

1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component.

a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters.

3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions.

4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.

5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Owner’s Representative. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.

6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pilot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.

D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.

E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified tolerances of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at the air terminals.


15950 - Page 7 of 10

1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.6 MOTORS

A. Motors, ALL: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

3.7 CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans and measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures. Record compressor data.

3.8 HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Nameplate data.

2. Airflow.

3. Entering- and leaving-air temperatures at full load.

4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage.

5. Calculated kW at full load.

6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.

3.9 TEMPERATURE TESTING

A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.

B. Measure indoor and outdoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2 successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.

3.10 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION

A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.

B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions.

C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.

D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).

E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.

F. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.

G. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.


15950 - Page 8 of 10

H. Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.

I. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates on a grounded or non-grounded power supply.

J. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.

3.11 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.

3.12 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.

2. Fan curves.

3. Manufacturers' test data.

4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop Drawings and Product Data.

D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Owner’s name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.

9. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.

10. Summary of contents, including the following:

a. Design versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.

11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.

13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values.


15950 - Page 9 of 10

14. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:

a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.

c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.

d. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air distribution systems and water distribution systems. Present with single-line diagrams and include the following:

1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

3. Location of manual volume control dampers.

4. Water flow meter.

5. Balancing valve sizes/locations.

F. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data: Include the following:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Arrangement and class.

g. Sheave make, size in inches and bore.

h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data: Include the following:

a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches and bore.

f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

g. Number of belts, make, and size.

3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Total airflow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

e. Suction static pressure in inches wg

G. Air Handling Test Reports.


15950 - Page 10 of 10

H. Electric Coil Test Reports; i.e., electric baseboards, electric wall heaters, electric unit heaters, electric cabinet heaters.

I. Duct Traverse Reports.

J. Air Terminal Device Reports; i.e., diffusers/registers/grilles.

K. Pool Dehumidification Test Reports.

L. Package Terminal Air Conditioning Test Reports; including equipment leveling to ensure condensate is pitched to building exterior.

M. Pump Test Reports.

N. Instrument Calibration Reports.

3.13 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 16010 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

16010 - Page 1 of 9

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. The Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions, Addendas, Alternates; these technical specifications and all drawings, together with the Form of Proposal and Agreement, comprise the Contract Documents for the Electrical Contract.

B. The Contractor is required to read carefully the specifications for all parts of the

work so as to become familiar not only with the work covered by this Section, but also that of other Divisions and Sections, including all drawings.

C. Refer to the General Requirements, Division 15 - Mechanical, as many of the

general requirements stated therein are applicable to the electrical work and coordination of the two trades is covered.

D. The Contractor shall watch the progress of the work and report to the Architect

immediately any cases where ample space has not been provided to accommodate his work. He must not cut through any finished work until he has received permission from the Architect. No claims for extra work will be allowed because of misinterpretation of Plans and Specifications or due to conflict between trades for useable space.

E. The Contractor is invited to submit alternative methods or materials as a cost

reduction factor, however safety and integrity of the systems, must be maintained. 1.02 CONTENTS

A. Specified Herein: General requirements for electrical work.

B. Described herein are the following:

• Scope

• Work not Included

• Quality Assurance, Standards and Symbols

• Fees and Inspection Certificates

• Materials

• Submittals

• Substitutions

• Temporary Power and Light

• Electrical Drawings

• Coordination

• Equipment Identification and Marking

• Sleeves, Inserts, Fastenings, Supports, Cutting

• and Patching

• Scaffolding

• Trenching and Backfilling

• Testing, Adjusting, Cleaning

• As-Built Drawings 1.03 SCOPE

A. Any devices or materials obviously a part of the equipment and/or necessary to its satisfactory performance and/or labor necessary to accomplish the intent of the construction although not specifically mentioned herein nor shown on the drawings, shall be furnished without extra cost to the Owner.

B. The work consists of the following:


16010 - Page 2 of 9

1. [Insert size and type of service here], underground electric service from a new pad mounted transformer, including spare 4" PVC conduits. Also 1-1/2" metering conduit from switchgear to wall mounted meter socket. Electrical Contractor is to verify all requirements and connection points with the serving utility.

2. Primary service cable, conduit, transformer, metering transformers, meter socket and meter will be provided by the local electric company. All connections at the transformer will be made by them.

3. Contractor will provide trench, backfill, and concrete pad, per the electrical company specifications.

4. Branch feeders, branch wiring, receptacles, special outlets, switches, light fixtures, dimmers, contactors, starters, timers, etc., as shown on the plans or required for operation of the electrical system.

5. A complete conduit and raceway system, including rigid, thin-wall, flexible, sealtite and plastic conduits properly grounded to the building grounding system and/or water service piping.

6. Battery operated emergency and exit light fixtures. 7. All power and control wiring including starters, switches, contactors, relays,

fuses, etc., as shown on the plans or specified herein. 8. A telephone service conduit, where shown on the plans, a plywood

mounting board in the equipment room, and installation of Owner furnished cables from outlets to service backboard.

9. A television service conduit, conduit from corridor to room outlet box, and a plywood mounting board in the equipment room.

10. A fire alarm system, including all conduit and wiring, manual pull stations, audio/visual warning alarms, smoke detectors, and fire alarm panel with annunciator.

11. Smoke detectors with integral alarms and auxiliary contact in each of the rooms as shown on the plans, with additional devices in handicap and hearing impaired rooms.

12. Cutting and patching of holes required for the installation in concrete, wood, steel or masonry.

13. Repair of all damage done to the premises as a result of the installation and removal of all debris or surplus material left by those engaged in the work.

14. Complete and thorough cleaning of all equipment furnished and installed, both inside and outside, and made ready for painting by others.

15. Testing and adjusting of all equipment. 16. Provisions and installation of all bases, supports, hangers and vibration

isolators for the work outlined herein. 17. Cooperation with other crafts in putting the installation in place at any time

when space required is ready and the progress of the work so dictates. 18. All new outside building lighting and sign lighting, including wiring, timers,

photocells, switches and circuit breakers. 19. Electric infrared heat lamps and wall heating units.

C. Utility service requirements outlined above are general in nature. Consult with

local utilities for exact requirements. 1.04 WORK NOT INCLUDED

A. The following work is not included in this Division unless specifically called for in individual Sections: Painting; Temperature control wiring; Telephone equipment; TV equipment.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE, STANDARDS AND SYMBOLS


16010 - Page 3 of 9

A. For the electrical work (in addition to standards specified in individual work sections), the following standards are imposed, as applicable to the work in each instance:

• AWS Standards for Welding

• NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

• ANSI C2, National Electrical Safety Code

• Standards of National Bureau of Fire Underwriters

• State Building Code

• NECS Standards for Installation

• Local Codes and/or Ordinances

• NEMA Standards for Materials and Products

• NFPA 72A, B, C, D, E Standards for Fire Alarm System Installation

B. All wiring shall be done in accordance with the standards and requirements of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code, as issued by the National Fire Protection Association International, the National Electrical Safety Code and the Standards of the National Bureau of Fire Underwriters.

C. Symbols: Except as otherwise indicated, refer to ANSI Y32.9 "Graphic Symbols

for Electrical and Layout Diagrams Used in Architecture and Building Construction", for definitions of symbols used on the drawings to show electrical work.

D. All materials and equipment for which label service is available shall bear the

label of the Underwriters' Laboratories Inc.

E. Rules and regulations of the local Utility Companies, and the Local Fire Department, wherein they apply, shall form a part of this Specification.

F. In addition, the entire installation shall meet all the requirements of the State

Building Code, as well as the Law, Rules and Regulations of the Local Building Department and all authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Guarantee: This Contractor shall guarantee his workmanship and material

(lamps excepted) for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance and leave his work in perfect order at completion. Should defects develop within the guarantee period, this Contractor shall, upon notice of same, remedy the defects and have all damages to other work or furnishings caused by the defects or the work of correcting same repaired and/or replaced at his expense, to the condition before such damage.

1.06 FEES AND INSPECTION CERTIFICATES

A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and inspection services and certificates in conjunction with this work.

B. Upon completion of the work, Contractor shall obtain the approval of all

recognized agencies concerned with the work, along with the approval of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, such certificates of inspection and approval from said bureau and/or agencies must be submitted to the Architect.

1.07 MATERIALS

A. General: Refer to Division 1 sections for general requirements on products,

materials and equipment.


16010 - Page 4 of 9

B. All materials shall be new, the best of their respective kinds, unless otherwise specified, and shall be installed by labor thoroughly skilled in the class of work anticipated by this Contract.

C. Trade names mentioned in the Specifications shall be understood as indicative of

the grade and quality of materials required in fulfillment of the Contract. This contractor may submit equal materials by other manufacturers to the Owner's Agent for approval.

D. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other products of the

electrical work and with other work requiring interface with the electrical work, including electrical connections and control devices. For exposed electrical work, coordinate colors and finishes with other work.

E. All materials installed prior to approval will be at the Contractor's risk and

materials not acceptable must be removed from the work. 1.08 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish the Owner's Agent with complete shop drawings and associated data in accordance with General Conditions, for all major elements of the Electrical work for review, checking and approval. None of the following equipment shall be fabricated, delivered, erected or connected other than from drawings officially approved by the Architect. Coordinate with subcontractors for HVAC and Plumbing work.

• Lighting and power panels;

• Lighting fixtures with photometric and thermal test data;

• Fire alarm system and smoke detectors;

• Electric baseboards and wall heaters;

• Time clocks, contactors, safety switches, motor starters. 1.09 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS

A. The selection of materials indicated in these specifications shall be strictly adhered to and no substitutions will be permitted except by written authorization by the Architect.

B. In general, the contract drawings and specifications show and describe

arrangements suitable for the specific items of equipment either named or described. In the event that Contractor submits for approval, and receives such approval, for a device or piece of equipment which requires connections or arrangements of these services differing from those indicated or described in the contract documents, Contractor shall give timely notice and shall make suitable alterations in the work to accommodate the substitute equipment, and he shall be responsible for any and all additional costs incurred by virtue of the substitution of such equipment for the equipment named or described in the contract documents.

1.10 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING

A. Description of System: Furnish and install temporary electrical power service for construction needs throughout construction period in accordance with the special conditions as follows: 1. Provide power for miscellaneous tools and equipment, for pumping, for

temporary heating and ventilating and for temporary storage and construction buildings.


16010 - Page 5 of 9

2. Provide temporary lighting of minimum 5 foot candles for safe and adequate working conditions throughout the project, for security and for temporary office and construction buildings.

B. Materials (General)

1. Comply with Electrical - Basic Materials and Methods. 2. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for

required purposes, and must not create unsafe conditions or violate requirements of applicable codes.

3. At Contractor's option, patented specialty products may be used, if UL approved.

4. Provide required facilities, including transformers, conductors, poles, conduits, raceways, breakers, fuses, switches and lighting fixtures with lamps.

5. Provide appropriate enclosures for environment in which used, in compliance with NEMA standards.

C. Installation

1. Install work in neat and orderly manner. 2. Make structurally and electrically sound throughout. 3. Maintain to give continuous service and to provide safe working conditions. 4. Modify and extend service as work progress requires. 5. Locate so that power is available at any desired point with no more than

100' (30.00 m) extension, and with no more than 5% voltage drop at full load.

6. Provide circuit breaker protection for each outlet with ground fault interrupting capacity.

7. Provide equipment grounding continuity for entire system. 8. Removal: Completely remove temporary materials and equipment upon

completion of construction. Repair damage caused by installation, and restore to specified or original condition.

1.11 ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS

A. The drawings accompanying the specifications have been made to scale with the best knowledge of conditions, dimensions and space requirements available at the time of design. Any errors or discrepancies detected in the drawings shall be reported to the Architect immediately upon discovery and shall be corrected by the Contractor for this Section to the satisfaction of the Architect and without additional expense to the Owner. The drawings shall be carefully checked to insure that the equipment, as shown, will operate satisfactorily in the space allotted to it.

B. Conductor and conduit sizes are shown on the drawings for power and lighting

systems. In any case, minimum sizes for wire and conduit shall comply with all applicable codes. In addition, the minimum conduit size in any floor slab shall be 3/4".

C. Major equipment of the system is located on the floor plans and the

interconnection conduit and wiring is included in the riser diagrams.

D. The drawings are indicative of the work to be installed, but do not show all bends, fittings, boxes and specialties required to complete the installation.

E. All conduits, wires, outlet boxes, switches, receptacles, devices and fixtures shall

be included in the work.


16010 - Page 6 of 9

F. In all instances where a device, or part of the equipment herein referred to in the singular number (as the lighting panel), it shall be understood that such reference shall apply to as many such devices as are necessary to complete the work.

G. Where it is stated that the contractor shall "provide" a device or piece of

equipment, it shall mean that such devices or equipments are furnished and installed.

1.12 CO-ORDINATION

A. General: Refer to the Division 1 sections for general coordination requirements applicable to the entire work. It is recognized that the contract documents are diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships which must be established within the electrical work, and in its interface with other work including utilities and mechanical work, and that such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Install the wiring and equipment at such times and in such manner as will in no way retard progress or completion of the project. Arrange electrical work in a neat, well organized manner with conduit and similar services running parallel with primary lines of the building construction, and with a minimum of 7'0" overhead clearance where possible. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access and arrange entire electrical work with adequate access for operation and maintenance. Advise other trades of openings required in their work for the subsequent move-in of large units of electrical work (equipment).

B. Confer with the Heating and Plumbing Contractors where there is a likelihood of

interference due to locations, etc., of the various systems. If any interference occurs due to failure to cooperate with other Contractors, he will be required to rearrange his work at his own expense.

C. The layout of wiring on the small scale drawings shall not be considered absolute.

The design shall be subject to such revisions as may be necessary to overcome building obstructions. No changes shall be made in outlet locations without the written consent of the Architect.

D. Examine the Architectural Drawings and details for the placement of all outlets to

properly coordinate them with relation to cabinets, tables, benches, structural panels, trims, moldings, etc. Examine all other shop drawings, catalog cuts, etc., for special apparatus which may be roughed in and to which connections must be made. Outlets, apparatus and connections thereto which are improperly located through failure to follow the above instructions, shall be subject to correction and/or relocation without extra charge to the Owner.

E. Coordination Drawings: For locations where several elements of electrical (or

combined mechanical and electrical) work must be sequenced and positioned with precision in order to fit into the available space, prepare coordination drawings (shop drawings) showing the actual physical dimensions (at accurate scale) required for the installation. Prepare and submit coordination drawings prior to purchase-fabrication-coordination.

1.13 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION AND MARKING

A. Provide nameplates on all equipment of the type listed in the following schedule:

• Main Switchboard

• Sub Main Distribution Panel

• Panel boards

• Safety Switches

• Fire Alarm Panel

• Stairway Rescue Intercom


16010 - Page 7 of 9

B. Lettering shall include name of equipment, the specific unit number and any reference to "On-Off", or other instructions that are applicable.

C. Nameplates shall be laminated phenolic with a black surface and white core. Use

1/16" thick material for plates up to 2"x4". For larger sizes use 1/8" thick material.

D. Lettering shall be condensed Gothic. The space between lines shall be equal to the width of the letters. Use 1/4" minimum height letters which occupy four to the inch. Increase letter size to 3/4" on larger plates.

E. Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure or danger associated

with access to or operation of electrical facilities. Provide text of sufficient clarity and lettering of sufficient size to convey adequate information at each location; mount permanently in an appropriate and effective location. Comply with recognized industry standards for color and design.

F. Operational Tags: Where needed for proper and adequate information on

operation and maintenance of electrical systems, provide tags of plasticized card stock, either pre-printed or hand printed to convey the message; example: "DO NOT OPEN THIS SWITCH WHEN BURNER IS OPERATING".

G. Feeders, mains, branches for power and light, common and section wires for any

special signal or control systems, etc., shall be tagged and identified with standard wire markers in all panels and pull boxes in accordance with symbols and designation shown on the drawings, schedules and with the manufacturer's wiring diagram symbols for the special systems.

H. All exterior underground conduits shall be identified with a 4" plastic ribbon tape

for the full length of the underground conduit, installed 18" above the conduit. Tape shall be printed to identify electrical conduit.

1.14 SLEEVES, INSERTS, FASTENINGS, SUPPORTS, CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Furnish and install all sleeves which are required to protect equipment or which may be necessary to facilitate its installation. Sleeves used in conjunction with formed concrete shall be located where required and approved by the Architect.

B. Provide and install all inserts required for equipment. Inserts shall be cast iron or

cast steel of slotted type to receive a machine bolt head or nut, after installation. Be responsible for the proper spacing of inserts and their alignment and preservation before and during construction.

C. All fastenings, supports, clamps and anchors, etc., shall be of type made for the

purpose. For hollow tile, or lath construction, toggle or machine bolt fastenings shall be used. For structural iron, use machine screws and for solid masonry, use metallic expansion shields and machine screws. For wood or materials of similar fibrous nature lag screws or bolts shall be employed. Screws with wooden plugs or anchors will not be accepted on any of the work. Studs and fasteners implanted in solid masonry by power actuated devices will be acceptable if precautions are taken to prevent spawling.

D. The subcontractor for this Section shall give the General Contractor complete

information as to the size, position and arrangement of conduits, cabinets, boxes, etc., requiring openings in floors, walls, etc., so openings may be provided as construction progresses. Refer to General Conditions, Article "Openings, Channels, Cutting, Etc.". Cutting and channeling shall be by Electrical Contractor; patching will be done by General Contractor.


16010 - Page 8 of 9

E. All conduit and outlet installations and cutting of any kind must be done with great care so as not to leave unsightly surfaces which may not be entirely concealed by plates, escutcheons or other normal concealing construction. If such unsightly conditions occur, Contractor will be required, at his own expense, to replace the damaged construction.

F. Provide nail guards on both sides of studs to protect conduit and Type NM cable

runs. 1.15 SCAFFOLDING: Furnish and erect all scaffolding, ladders, etc., required in the

installation of wiring, equipment and fixtures. 1.16 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

A. Do all trenching and backfilling as required for underground electrical work.

B. Refer to Section 2 - Site work, and perform backfill and compaction accordingly. 1.17 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. All electrical conductors after the installation of the apparatus and wiring has been completed shall be tested to insure continuity, proper splicing, freedom from unwanted grounds and insulation values in accordance with National Electrical Code requirements. Furnish and use suitable instruments in making all tests.

B. Electrical Contractor shall provide necessary electrical personnel and testing

instruments as required to assist the Architect in testing of installation, and he shall pay all professional engineering fees required in such testing. Data on all tests shall be submitted to the Architect.

C. Upon completion of the work, all component parts, both singularly and as a

whole, shall be adjusted and left in satisfactory condition. All parts of the wiring system, including switches and other auxiliaries shall be tested and proved free from unwanted grounds or other defects. All overload devices including equipment furnished under other contracts, shall be set and adjusted to suit the load conditions, which load conditions shall be determined with suitable instruments by the Contractor. All parts of the installation, including lighting fixtures, panel boards, etc., shall be cleaned, dusted or washed and adjusted to the satisfaction of the Architect.

1.18 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. Contractor shall keep an accurate record of all deviations from contract drawings and specifications. He shall neatly and correctly enter in colored crayon any deviations on drawings affected, and shall keep drawings available for inspection. Extra set of drawings will be furnished for this purpose.

B. At the completion of the job, and before final acceptance, the Contractor shall

provide a complete set of as-built drawings. The Contractor shall show locations for all major electrical devices, including panel boards and all major runs of conduit, the circuiting of each fixture, outlet, etc., shall be shown. Certify to the accuracy of each print, by signature thereon, and deliver same to Architect. Drawings shall be reproducibles.

1.19 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Contractor shall prepare, assemble and submit five (5) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual for the electrical system as installed.


16010 - Page 9 of 9

B. Operation and Maintenance manuals shall be bound in a hard cover, three ring binder or equivalent protection, and shall contain as a minimum the following: 1. Shop drawings or catalog product literature of all material listed in

paragraph 1.08 Submittals; 2. Wiring diagrams and instructions for fire alarm system, contactors, motor

starters and time clocks; 3. Control drawings for any systems not furnished under other contracts; 4. Maintenance instructions for all equipment furnished under this contract.


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 16075 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

16075 - Page 1 of 5

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Electrical identification materials and devices required to comply with ANSI C2, NFPA 70, OSHA standards, and authorities having jurisdiction.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications:

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:


1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI C2.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and NFPA 70 for color-coding.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Brady USA, Inc. (800-541-1686)

2. Panduit corp. (800-777-3300)

3. Seton Identification Products (800-571-2596)

2.2 RACEWAY AND CABLE LABELS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

1. Color: Black letters on orange field.

2. Legend: Indicates voltage

B. Pretension, Wraparound Plastic Sleeves: Flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylic band sized to suit the diameter of the line it identifies and arranged to stay in place by pretension gripping action when placed in position.

C. Colored Adhesive Tape: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

D. Underground-Line Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape.

1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick.

2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.

3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.

4. Printed legend indicating type of underground line.


16075 - Page 2 of 5

E. Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters.

F. Aluminum, Wraparound Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014-inch thick aluminum sheet, with stamped or embossed legend, and fitted with slots or ears for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.

G. Plasticized Card-Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field-printed legends. Orange background, unless otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener.

H. Aluminum-Faced, Card-Stock Tags: Weather-resistant, 18-point minimum card stock faced on both sides with embossable aluminum sheet, 0.002 inch thick, laminated with moisture-resistant acrylic adhesive, punched for fasteners, and preprinted with legends to suit each application.

2.3 NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS

A. Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145.

B. Engraved Plastic Nameplates and Signs: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.

2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

C. Baked-Enamel Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

D. Exterior, Metal-Backed, Butyrate Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

E. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32, stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.

2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb minimum.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.

4. Color: According to color-coding.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Identification Materials and Devices: Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations with corresponding designations in the Contract Documents or with those required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

C. Sequence of Work: If identification is applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.


16075 - Page 3 of 5

E. Color Banding Raceways and Exposed Cables: Band exposed and accessible raceways of the systems listed below:

1. Bands: Pretension, wraparound plastic sleeves; colored adhesive tape; or a combination of both. Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.

2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

3. Apply the following colors to the systems listed below:

a. Fire Alarm System: Red.

b. Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow.

c. Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue.

d. Security System: Blue and yellow.

e. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue.

f. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.

F. Caution Labels for Indoor Boxes and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Install pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive labels identifying system voltage with black letters on orange background. Install on exterior of door or cover.

G. Circuit Identification Labels on Boxes: Install labels externally.

1. Exposed Boxes: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive plastic label on cover.

2. Concealed Boxes: Plasticized card-stock tags.

3. Labeling Legend: Permanent, waterproof listing of panel and circuit number or equivalent.

H. Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker located directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches overall, use a single line marker. Install line marker for underground wiring, both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

I. Secondary Service, Feeder, and Branch-Circuit Conductors: Color-code throughout the secondary electrical system.

1. Color-code 208/120-V system as follows:

a. Phase A: Black.

b. Phase B: Red.

c. Phase C: Blue.

d. Neutral: White.

e. Ground: Green.

2. Color-code 480/277-V system as follows:

a. Phase A: Yellow.

b. Phase B: Brown.

c. Phase C: Orange.

d. Neutral: White with a colored stripe or gray.

e. Ground: Green.


16075 - Page 4 of 5

3. Factory apply color the entire length of conductors, except the following field-applied, color-coding methods may be used instead of factory-coded wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG:

a. Colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-inch wide tape in colors specified. Adjust tape bands to avoid obscuring cable identification markings.

b. Colored cable ties applied in groups of three ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3 inches from the terminal and spaced 3 inches apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten to a snug fit, and cut off excess length.

J. Power-Circuit Identification: Metal tags or aluminum, wraparound marker bands for cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard rooms.

1. Legend: 1/4-inch steel letter and number stamping or embossing with legend corresponding to indicated circuit designations.

2. Tag Fasteners: Nylon cable ties.

3. Band Fasteners: Integral ears.

K. Apply identification to conductors as follows:

1. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers.

2. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor with source, voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color-coding to identify circuits' voltage and phase.

3. Multiple Control and Communication Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor by its system and circuit designation. Use a consistent system of tags, color-coding, or cable marking tape.

L. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs as follows:

1. Warnings, Cautions, and Instructions: Install to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.

2. Emergency Operation: Install engraved laminated signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8-inch high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations.

M. Equipment Identification Labels: Engraved plastic laminate. Install on each unit of equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes power, lighting, communication, signal, and alarm systems, unless units are specified with their own self-explanatory identification. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high lettering on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. Use white lettering on black field. Apply labels for each unit of the following categories of equipment using mechanical fasteners:

1. Panel boards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.

2. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.

3. Electrical switchgear and switchboards.

4. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.


16075 - Page 5 of 5

5. Disconnect switches.

6. Enclosed circuit breakers.

7. Motor starters.

8. Push-button stations.

9. Power transfer equipment.

10. Contactors.

11. Remote-controlled switches.

12. Dimmers.

13. Control devices.

14. Transformers.

15. Telephone switching equipment.

16. Fire alarm master station or control panel.

17. Security-monitoring master station or control panel.


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 16100 - BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS

16100 - Page 1 of 8

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. All work performed under the requirements of this Section shall be subject to the conditions set forth under "General Conditions" and shall comply with all requirements contained under Division 1, "General Requirements" as far as applicable to this portion of the work.

B. All work under this Section shall conform to the requirements set forth in Section

16010 "Electrical General Provisions". 1.02 CONTENTS

A. Specified Herein: Requirements for basic electrical materials, equipment and wiring methods.


• Scope

• Safety Switches

• Fuses

• Wiring Devices

• Wall Plates

• Connectors, Lugs, Taps and Splices

• Junction and Pull Boxes

• Outlet and Switch Boxes

• Conductors

• Conduit

• Arc Fault Breakers 1.03 SCOPE

A. The work under this Section shall comprise, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Provide all labor and material required to install a 120/208 volt interior

wiring system, utilization outlets, disconnect switches and fuses. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Storage Conditions: It is recognized that space at the project for storage of

materials and products may be limited. Coordinate the deliveries of electrical materials and products with the scheduling and sequencing of the work so that storage requirements at the project are minimized. In general, do not deliver individual items of electrical equipment to the project substantially ahead of the time of installation. Limit each shipment of bulk and multiple-use materials to the quantities needed for installations within three weeks of receipt.

B. Handle all electrical material carefully to prevent damage, dents or marring of the

finish.

C. Protection and Identification: Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels and similar information needed for distinct identification; adequately packaged or protected to prevent deterioration during shipment, storage and handling. Store in a dry, well ventilated, indoor space, except where prepared and protected by the manufacturer specifically for exterior storage.

D. Do not install damaged material. Remove from the project site.


16100 - Page 2 of 8

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SWITCHES, SAFETY

A. Safety switches shall be general duty, sheet steel enclosed, of the type, size and electrical characteristics indicated, surface mounted, fusible rated at 240 volts, ampere ratings as required for the application or as noted on the drawings, 60 Hertz, 3 blades, incorporating quick-make, quick-break type switches, constructed so switch blades are visible in "OFF" position with door open; equipped with operating handle which is easily recognizable, and is padlockable in the "OFF" position; with current carrying parts constructed of high-conductivity copper and silver-tungsten type switch contact; with positive pressure type reinforced fuse clips.

B. Fuses: Unless indicated on the drawings as non-fused type, provide fuses for

safety switches, as recommended by the switch manufacturer of class, type and rating needed to meet electrical requirements.

C. Switches installed in outdoor locations shall be weatherproof NEMA 3R.

D. Switches manufactured by the following will be acceptable:

Westinghouse - Type G300 Square "D" - Type D General Duty ITE - Type J General Duty Cutler Hammer - Series CH General Duty General Electric - Type TG General Duty

2.02 FUSES - 250 VOLTS AND LESS

A. Fuses shall not be shipped in the switches in electrical equipment nor shall they be shipped to the job until the equipment is ready to be energized. All fuses shall be of the same manufacture to retain selectivity as designed (Bussman - No substitution). All fuses shall be installed by an electrical contractor. 1. All fuses shall be current limiting with 200,000 amperes interrupting

capacity. 2. U.L., Inc., Class L fuses (bolt-type dimensions 601 to 6000 amps) shall

open within .015 seconds at current of 15 times rating, shall have O-ring gas seals at the end bells, and have silver short circuit links. Bussman KRP-C HI-CAP.

3. U.L., Inc., Class RK1 fuses (standard dimensions 600 amperes or less) shall be installed in all switches. Fuses 70 amp through 600 amp shall have silver short circuit strips. Bussman LPN-RK or LPS-RK LOW-PEAK Dual-Element Fuses.

4. For motor protection Dual-Element fuses shall be installed in individual circuits and be sized at 125% of motor nameplate current rating or the next higher standard fuse size. Where excessive ambient temperature, high inertia motor loads or frequent "on-off" cycling requiring larger fuses, consult the electrical engineer. Use fuse reducers where fuse gaps are larger than fuse dimensions. Bussman LPK-RK or LPS-RK LOW-PEAK Dual-Element Fuses.

2.03 WIRING DEVICES

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices, in type, color and electrical rating for the service indicated. Type and grade shall be as described in the following paragraphs.


16100 - Page 3 of 8

B. Receptacles: Comply with NEMA Standards Publication No. WD1 and as

follows: 1. Duplex: Provide duplex standard specification grade receptacles, 2-pole,

3-wire grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, ground terminals and poles internally connected to mounting yoke, 15-ampere, 125 volts, with metal plaster ears, back and side wired, NEMA configuration 5-15R, unless otherwise indicated;.

2. GFCI: Provide standard specification grade, duplex, ground fault circuit interrupter receptacles, feed-through type, capable of protecting connected downstream receptacles on single circuit, grounding type, UL rated Class A, Group 1, 15 ampere rating, 125 volts, 60 hertz; with solid state ground fault sensing and signaling; with five milli-ampere ground fault trip level; equipped with 15-ampere plug configuration, NEMA 5-15R.

C. Switches: Comply with NEMA Standards Publication No. WD1 and as follows:

1. Snap: Provide standard specification grade flush single-pole toggle switches, 15 ampere, 120/277 volts AC, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equipped with plaster ears and side-wired screw terminals;.

2. Lighted Snap: Same as above, except with lighted handle wired to light when switch is "on";

3. 3-Way Snap: Provide standard specification grade flush 3-way toggle switches, 15 ampere, 120/277 volts, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equipped with plaster ears and side-wired screw terminals;

D. In general, wiring devices shall be furnished in ivory color with ivory smooth finish

plastic plates with openings to match devices.

E. Wiring devices and plates shall be as manufactured by Harvey Hubbell, Leviton, General Electric or Bryant.

2.04 CONNECTORS, LUGS, TAPS AND SPLICES

A. All splicing shall be done in outlet boxes, junction boxes, etc. All connections between conductors sizes No. 6 AWG and larger and devices or apparatus rated over 30 amperes shall be made with solder less mechanical connectors of appropriate type and current carrying capacity. Connectors and lugs shall be of the Allen set screw type and shall be Burndy or approved equal.

B. In all other instances, including lighting fixtures, splices shall be made with

solderless connectors similar to "Scotchlocks" by 3M Company, "Wing Nuts" by Ideal Company, or "Piggy" connectors by T & B Company. Splices may also be made by soldering and taping.

C. Splices occurring in conductors No. 6 and larger, and in soldered connections of

smaller conductors shall be covered with rubber insulating tape and friction tape and air drying insulation varnish applied. No splices will be permitted in mains or feeders and taps from feeders to panel boards shall be made with solderless connectors. Insulating splicing units, as manufactured by Burndy will be accepted in lieu of splicing insulating called for above. "Scotchfill" electrical insulating putty covered with "Scotch" brand No. 33 or No. 88 plastic tapes will also be acceptable. In all cases of taping, the insulating of the splice must be equivalent to 150% of the conductor insulation value.


16100 - Page 4 of 8

2.05 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES: Furnish and install junction and pull boxes, wherever required, or otherwise necessary to

facilitate installation of the equipment. Junction boxes shall be galvanized finished sheet steel of code thickness, or ample size to properly enclose the conductors terminating in, or passing through them. Junction boxes shall not be placed in locations made inaccessible by piping, ducts or other equipment, and locations shall be as approved by the Architect.

2.06 OUTLET AND SWITCH BOXES

A. Furnish and install outlet boxes of proper type and size as required at all outlets where shown, secured firmly in place and set true and square and flush with the finished surfaces. Boxes shall be rigidly supported from the building structure independent of the conduit system. Boxes cast into masonry or concrete are considered to be rigidly supported.

B. All boxes for lighting outlets shall be provided with fixture studs of a size suitable

for the weight of the fixture to be supported, but in no case less than 3/8". The stud shall be of integral construction with the box, or of the type which is inserted from the back of the box. In no case shall the weight of the fixture be dependent upon bolts holding the stud to the box.

C. Outlet boxes for exterior lights for exposed conduit runs shall be of the cast, rust

resistant metal. Gasketed covers shall be provided where outlet is exposed to weather or moisture. Wiring device boxes for surface conduit work shall be FS Series cast type.

2.07 CONDUCTORS

A. All wire shall be in strict accordance with the applicable standards and shall be delivered on site with original factory tags attached and shall be less than one (1) year old when installed.

B. Except as specifically designated otherwise, no wire smaller than No. 12 AWG

copper shall be used. Generally, all wire and cable sizes are shown, either directly or by implication that no marking designates No. 12 size. In the event that size is not indicated for a feeder or motor run which, obviously could not be interpreted as No. 12, the wire size shall conform to the National Electrical Code sizing for the type or service indicated.

C. Single conductor 600 volt wire shall be copper and be equal to, or better than,

THHN or XHHW Specifications. Wire shall be rated for 75°C. maximum temperature in dry locations and 90°C. in wet locations. Wire shall be listed by UL, and conductor identification shall include size, voltage manufacturer's name and number, UL listing and wire type. Aluminum or copper clad aluminum smaller than #12 AWG shall not be used.

D. Wire sizes up to No. 10 AWG inclusive may be solid or stranded No. 8 AWG and

larger, stranded. E. Wires shall be color coded as follows:

Phase A - Red Phase B - Blue Phase C - Black Neutral - White Ground - Green


16100 - Page 5 of 8

F. Wire installed in areas and locations subject to temperatures unsafe for plastic insulation (167 degrees F) shall have heat resistant insulation and shall be Type FEP or FEBP, depending upon the situation encountered.

G. Wire shall be as manufactured by Anaconda Wire and Cable Company, Carol

Wire or General Cable Corporation. 2.08 CONDUIT

A. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of type, grade, size and weight (wall thickness) indicated for each service. Where type and grade are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with National Electrical Code for electrical raceways.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: Conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized or sherardized heavy

wall rigid steel conduit conforming to Federal Specification WW-C-581 and ANSI C80.1.

C. Non-Metallic Conduit: Conduit shall be plastic polyvinyl chloride schedule 40

conforming to Federal Specification WC-1094A, NEMA TC-2-1978 and UL Standard 651.

D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Conduit shall be zinc coated steel electrical

metallic tubing conforming to Federal Specification WW-C-563 and ANSI C80.3.

E. Flexible Metal Conduit: Conduit shall be manufactured of heavily zinc coated sheet metal strips interlocked to form a flexible, smooth wiring channel.

F. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit

comprised of single strip, continuous, flexible, interlocked, double-wrapped steel, galvanized inside and outside; forming smooth internal wiring channel; with liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Conduit shall be Anaconda "Sealtite" or "Electri-Flex".

2.09 CONDUIT FITTINGS

A. Conduit fittings for exposed work shall be rust-resistant. Castings shall provide ample wiring space, shall have smooth round edges and full-threaded hubs.

B. Fittings shall be as manufactured by Crouse Hinds, Appleton or Killark.

C. EMT fitting, connectors and couplings shall be steel set screw type as

manufactured by OZ/GEDNEY, T & B or EFCOR. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which electrical work is to be

installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.


16100 - Page 6 of 8

3.02 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General - Install electrical equipment for this project as indicated, in accordance with the

manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of NEC and the National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended functions.

3.03 SAFETY SWITCHES: Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances and motors and

controllers within sight of the controller position unless otherwise indicated. 3.04 PULL, JUNCTION, OUTLET AND SWITCH BOXES

A. Install electrical boxes as indicated, or in compliance with NEC requirements, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that the boxes and fittings serve the intended purposes.

B. Provide weatherproof outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to

weather or moisture exposure.

C. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed.

D. Locate boxes and conduit bodies so as to ensure accessibility of electrical wiring.

E. Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box,

which would result in a difficult and insecure connection with a locknut or bushing on the rounded surfaces.

F. Secure boxes rigidly to the substrate upon which they are being mounted, or

solidly embed boxes in concrete or masonry. 3.05 WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES

A. Unless otherwise indicated, detailed or directed, the mounting heights of outlets shall be as indicated below. Dimensions given are from center of outlet to top of finished floor unless otherwise noted:

• Duplex receptacle 18"

• Groundfault Interrupting 18”

• (GFI)Duplex Receptacles 48" (coordinate with counters)

• Switches 48"

• Fire Alarm Pull Station 48" to handle

• Telephone Outlets 18" or as indicated

• Panel boards 72" to top of panel box

• Fire Alarm Audio Visual 96" or 8" below ceiling

All mounting heights shall be subject to checking with the details shown on the architectural drawings and with the Architect, and locations shall be verified through the Architect before installing wiring, apparatus, etc. The Architect reserves the right to change the exact location of any outlet before same is fully installed without additional expense to the Owner.

B. Delay installation of devices until wiring is completed.

C. Install receptacles and switches only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from

excess building materials, debris, etc.


16100 - Page 7 of 8

D. Install plates after wall finish work is complete.

E. Upon installation of wall plates and receptacles, advise Contractor regarding

proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of Substantial Completion, replace those items which have been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs, during construction.

F. Test wiring devices to ensure electrical continuity of grounding connections, and after energizing circuitry, to demonstrate compliance with requirements.

3.06 CONDUCTORS AND CONDUIT

A. General: Except as indicated herein after or on the drawings, all wiring above

accessible ceilings, exposed over 8'0" above floor, and in stud walls shall be done with insulated conductors in electrical metallic tubing (EMT), wiring exposed on walls and in areas subject to damage shall be insulated conductors in rigid metal conduit and wiring where buried in slabs or earth shall be insulated conductors in rigid PVC Schedule 40 conduit.

B. Conduit Installation: Conduit sizes, type and length shall be furnished and

installed as required by the drawings and as specified in these Specifications. The drawings indicate generally the size and location of the conduits. Conduits not shown but obviously required shall be run where directed, of sizes as approved by the Architect. The conduit system shall connect all outlet boxes, junction boxes, panel boards, cabinets, push-button stations, motors, etc. 1. Field bends and offsets shall be uniform and symmetrical, without conduit

flattening or finish scarring. Minimum bend radii shall be as required by the NEC, but in no case less than six (6) times conduit diameter.

2. Conduit found unacceptable while on the job before installation shall be removed from the premises upon notice.

3. Approved pipe plugs or caps shall be installed in conduit before pouring of concrete. Conduit shall also be kept dry and free of water and debris by means of plugs or caps.

4. Where conduit enters through exterior concrete walls or below grade footings, the entrance hall is made watertight. Pipe sleeves shall be provided in the concrete with 1/2" minimum clearance around the conduit for an entrance seal similar to O.Z. Type FSK.

5. At all entrances to panel boards, pull boxes, or outlet boxes, conduit runs shall be secured in place with galvanized locknuts and bushings; one locknut inside and one locknut outside the box with the bushing on the inside. Bushings shall be of the insulating type.

6. Field bends shall be made with standard tools and equipment manufactured specifically for conduit bending.

7. Complete the installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables within raceways.

8. Provide flexible conduit for motor connections and for other electrical equipment connections where subjected to movement and vibration.

9. Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit for connection of motors and for other electrical equipment where subject to movement and vibration and also where subjected to one or more of the following conditions:

• Exterior location.

• Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate.

10. Where possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.


16100 - Page 8 of 8

11. Exposed conduit shall run parallel or perpendicular to members of the building structure, rigidly maintained and clamped with one-hole malleable iron conduit clamps, or conduit supports similar to those of Steel City Electric Company or Unistrut Corporation.

12. Transition from underground PVC conduit through floor slab shall be made with rigid steel conduit elbows and rigid steel conduit up through floor.

13. Where conduit enters or leaves finish grade, apply two (2) layers of 3M #33 or equal at a distance of 12" above grade to 12" below grade or to 3" beyond PVC whichever is farther. Minimum of 24". Conduits passing through concrete floors or walls and not sleeved shall have two layers 3M #33, a minimum of 12" either side of penetration.

C. Conductor Installation: Conductor sizes, type and quantity shall be furnished and

installed as required by the drawings and as specified in these specifications. 1. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with the applicable provision of

the National Electrical Code and as specified herein and shown on the drawings.

2. All branch circuit wiring involving a total length over 75' shall use the next largest wire size for the home run and/or the portion exceed 75'.

3. Pull conductors together where more than one is being installed in a raceway.

4. Use pulling compound or lubricant, when necessary; compound must not deteriorate conductor and insulation.

5. Do not use a pulling means, including fish tape, cable or rope which can damage the raceway.

6. Keep conductor splices to a minimum. 7. Wire shall be installed only after all work that may cause injury is

completed, such as the pouring of concrete. 8. Install splices and taps which have equivalent or better mechanical

strength and insulation as the conductor. 9. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with the conductor

material. 10. Wire Marking: Wires shall be identified at the following locations:

• Power and lighting branch circuits

• Feeders at fixtures

• Outlets

• Motors, etc.

• Identify to indicate originating panel and circuit number 3.07 ELECTRIC HEATING EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish and install wall heaters and infrared heaters as specified on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 1. Infrared heaters shall be wired to operate from a room thermostat furnished

by the mechanical contractor. 3.08 ARC FAULT BREAKERS A. Provide arc fault breakers for all branch circuits serving outlets in guestroom sleeping areas, living areas or similar area in accordance with Section 210.12(B) of the National Electric Code.


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 16200 - SERVICE & DISTRIBUTION

16200 - Page 1 of 5



B. All work under this Section shall conform to the requirements set forth in Section

16010 "Electrical General Provisions" and 16100 "Basic Materials and Methods". 1.02 CONTENTS

A. Specified herein: Requirements for electrical service and distribution.


• Utility Service Work and Coordination

• Main Service Switchboard

• Circuit Breaker Distribution Panelboard

• Circuit Breaker Lighting & Appliance Panelboards

• Grounding 1.03 SCOPE

A. The extent of electrical service and distribution work is indicated by drawings and in schedules, in other Division 15 and 16 requirements of this Section, and is hereby defined to include, but not necessarily limited to: 1. Trenching and backfilling for primary conduits; 2. Providing transformer pad. 3. Service conduit and wire from transformer to service entrance equipment; 4. Panelboards; 5. Grounding; 6. Metering equipment installation, including conduit from meter socket to pad

mounted transformer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MAIN DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD

A. Furnish and install the service entrance switchboard as herein specified and shown on the associated electrical drawings. The switchboard shall meet the latest requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standard #891, NEMA PB2, and the National Electrical Code. The switchboard shall be furnished with an Underwriters Laboratories label.

B. The switchboard shall be deadfront with front accessibility required. The

switchboard frame shall be of formed code gauge steel rigidly welded and bolted together to support all cover plates, bussing and component devices during shipment and installation. Steel base channels shall be bolted to the frame to rigidly support the entire shipping section for moving on rollers and floor mounting. Each switchboard section shall have an open bottom and an individually removable top plate for installation and termination of conduit. The switchboard enclosure shall be painted on all exterior and interior surfaces. The paint finish shall be a medium light gray, ANSI #49, applied by electro-deposition process over an iron phosphate pre-treatment. All front covers shall be screw-on and removable and all doors shall be hinged with removable hinge pins. Top and bottom conduit areas shall be clearly indicated on shop drawings.


16200 - Page 2 of 5

C. The switchboard bussing shall be of sufficient cross-sectional area to meet UL Standard 891 temperature rise. Through bus shall be extruded aluminum plated by the ALSTAN 70 or 80 process. The through bus shall have an ampacity of 1200 amperes and shall be rated to withstand a short circuit current rating of equal or greater than the available fault current. The through bus supports, connections and joints are to be bolted with hex-head bolts and Belleville washers to minimize maintenance requirements. This contractor shall verify with the serving utility the available short circuit current and provide equipment which exceeds this value, but not less than 100 KAIC.

D. The switchboard, as a complete unit, shall be given a single short circuit current

rating by the manufacturer. Such ratings shall be established by the actual tests by the manufacturer, in accordance with UL specifications, on equipment constructed similarly to the subject switchboard.

E. The main switch shall be of the fusible bolted pressure contact type with ratings

as shown on the associated drawings. Pressure contacts are to be made by firmly bolting blades to both top and bottom stationary contacts. The switch shall have quick-break Kineamatic-Action mechanisms, inter-phase barriers and arcing equipment. Switch shall be manually operated. In accordance with UL Standard 977, switch shall have an interrupting rating of twelve times the continuous rating. The operating mechanism shall immediately be in a condition to open the switch. The distribution section shall be as described in Paragraph 2.02.

2.02 PANELBOARDS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures and ancillary components of types, sizes and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction, in accordance with published product information; equip with number of unit panelboard devices as required for a complete installation. Where more than one type of component meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. Where types, sizes or ratings are not otherwise indicated, comply with NEC, UL and established industry standards for applications indicated. Panelboard ratings, current and voltage, fused switch or circuit breaker complement, and mounting are indicated on the drawings. Interrupting ratings shall be determined for the system by the manufacturer of the equipment supplier.

B. Circuit Breaker Distribution Panelboards: Provide dead-front safety type circuit

breaker distribution panelboards as indicated, with panelboard switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types and with arrangement shown; with anti-turn solderless pressure type main lug connectors approved for bottom of panel. Equip with copper bus bars and ground bus; provide suitable lugs on ground bus for outgoing feeders requiring ground connections. Provide main and branch circuit breakers for each circuit. Circuit breakers shall be of the quick-make quick-break type with external operating handle suitable for padlocking in the "OFF" position. An interlock shall prevent the opening of the cover when the breaker is "ON" unless the interlock release is operated. 1. Integrated equipment short circuit rating: Panelboard, as a complete unit,

shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment short circuit rating shown on the panelboard schedule or on the plans. This rating shall be established by testing with the circuit breakers mounted in the panelboard. Short circuit tests on the overcurrent devices and on the panelboard structure shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each overcurrent device with the panelboard connected to its rated voltage source. Method of short circuit testing shall be per Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The source shall be capable of supplying the specified panelboard short circuit current or greater. Testing of panelboard overcurrent devices for short


16200 - Page 3 of 5

circuit rating only while individually mounted is not acceptable. Also, testing of the bus structure by applying a fixed fault to the bus structure alone is not acceptable. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed.

2. Cabinet: Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The

rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. Wiring gutters shall be sized in accordance with UL Standard 67. Cabinets shall be equipped with a four piece front without door and have concealed, self-adjusting trim clamps. Fronts shall be of full finished steel with rust inhibiting primer and baked enamel finish.

3. UL Listing: Circuit breaker distribution and power panelboards shall be

listed by Underwriters Laboratories and shall bear the UL label. Panelboards shall be Square D "I Line" panelboards.

C. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: Provide dead-front safety type lighting and

appliance panelboards as indicated, with switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types and arrangement shown; with anti-turn solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for copper conductors; construct unit for connecting feeders at top or bottom of panel, as required; equipped with aluminum bus bars, full-sized neutral bar, with plug-in type molded case branch circuit breakers for each circuit, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Where multiple-pole breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. Provide a bare uninsulated grounding bar suitable for bolting to enclosure. Provide panelboards fabricated by same manufacturer as enclosures and which fit properly with enclosures.

D. Panelboard Enclosures: Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet type enclosures,

in sizes and NEMA types as indicated, code-gage, minimum 16-gage thickness. Construct with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters.

E. All panelboard fronts shall be equipped with interior circuit-directory frame and

card with clear plastic covering. Provide baked gray enamel finish over a rust inhibitor. Design enclosure for surface or flush mounting, as indicated on the drawings. Provide enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards and which fit properly with panelboards to be enclosed. Panelboard Accessories: Provide panelboard accessories and devices, including but not necessarily limited to, circuit breakers, ground-fault protection units, etc., as recommended by panelboard manufacturer for ratings and applications indicated.

F. Panelboards manufactured by the following shall be acceptable:

• Circuit Breaker Lighting & Appliance

• Square D "NQO" with QO-VH breakers 22,000 A/C

• ITE "NPA" with QHP breakers 22,000 A/C

• Cutler Hammer Type "PB" with "CHB" breakers 22,000 A/C

• Westinghouse "QIOP" with PHW breakers 22,000 A/C

• General Electric Type AL with THHQL breakers 22,000 A/C

2.03 FUSES

A. Provide a complete set of fuses for all fusible devices on the project.

B. Fuses shall be as specified in Section 16100 2.03. 2.04 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS, GROUNDING


16200 - Page 4 of 5

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide for each electrical grounding indicated, a complete assembly of materials, including but not necessarily limited to cable, wire, connectors, terminals (solderless lugs), grounding rods/electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, and other items and accessories needed for a complete installation. Where more than one type meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. Where material or component is not otherwise indicated, provide products complying with NEC and established industry standards.

B. Electrical Grounding Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical

grounding conductors for grounding connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC. Conductors shall be stranded bare copper, except where run with circuit conductors ground wire shall have green insulation or green identification at terminations.

C. Connectors, Terminals and Clamps: Provide electrical connectors, terminals and

clamps as recommended by the connector, terminal and clamp manufacturer for intended applications.

D. Ground Rods: Steel with copper welded exterior, 3/4" diameter by 8'.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION: Installer must examine areas and conditions under which electrical work is to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General- Install electrical equipment for this project as

indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of NEC and the National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry functions.

3.03 ELECTRICAL SERVICE

A. Provide a new electric service into the building, including trench and backfill for primary service, concrete transformer pad and secondary service conduit and feeder cable.

B. Provide trench, backfill and concrete pad. Primary service feeders, transformer

and all transformer hook up shall be by Utility Company. Install 4" PVC conduits from the transformer to the new main switchboard in Electrical Room. Pull conductors and make termination. Provide 4 spare conduits.

C. Install conduit and provide space in switchgear for utility and current transformers

where required by the serving utility. Provide interconnecting conduit between meter socket location and metering transformers in the switchgear.

D. Provide all termination’s for 120/208 Volt service conductors.

E. Ground service.

3.04 PANELBOARDS

A. Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and raceway installation work.

B. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are

permanently and mechanically secure.


16200 - Page 5 of 5

C. Provide electrical connections within enclosures.

D. Fill out panelboard's circuit directory card upon completion of the work.

E. The system of branch circuits for power and lighting shall be connected to panel

busses in such a manner as to electrically balance the connected loads as close as is practicable.

F. Touch up marred or scratched surfaces to match original finish.

3.05 DISTRIBUTION

A. Provide feeder conduits and wire from main power panel to branch panels and major mechanical equipment.

B. Conduit and wire shall be as specified in Section 16100.

C. Provide green insulated ground wire sized per Table 250-95 N.E.C. in all feeder

conduits, power conduits, PVC conduits, flex conduits and exterior circuits. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING

A. General: Install electrical grounding systems where shown, in accordance with applicable portions of National Electrical Code, with National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that electrical grounding complies with requirements and serves intended purposes.

B. Coordinate with other electrical work, as necessary to interface installation of

electrical grounding system with other work.

C. Install braided type bonding jumpers with ground clamps on water meter piping to electrically bypass water meter.

D. Install clamp-on connectors only on thoroughly cleaned metal contact surfaces, to

ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity.

E. Unless specifically noted otherwise on the drawings, grounding of the electrical system shall be by means of the metallic raceway or an insulated grounding conductor installed with circuit conductors in all non-metallic conduits. Grounding conductors in non-metallic shall be sized in accordance with NEC 250-95 and shall run from grounding bus of serving panel to ground bus of served panel, grounding screw of receptacles, lighting fixture housings, light switch outlet or metal enclosures of served equipment.

F. Green bonding jumper shall be installed in all flexible metallic conduit.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF FUSES

A. Fuses shall not be installed until equipment is ready to be energized.

B. Supply spare fuses in accordance with Section 16100 - 2.03.


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 16300 - LIGHTING

16300 - Page 1 of 3



B. All work under this Section shall conform to the requirements set forth in Section 16010

"Electrical General Provisions" and 16100 "Basic Materials and Methods". 1.02 CONTENTS

A. Specified herein: Requirements for installation of interior and exterior equipment.

B. Described herein are the following: 1. Lighting Fixtures 2. Ballasts 3. Lamps

1.03 SCOPE

A. The work shall comprise, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Interior incandescent, fluorescent and high intensity discharge lighting fixtures; 2. Exterior pole and wall mounted high intensity discharge lighting fixtures; 3. Battery operated emergency lighting and exit lights with battery backup.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES, BALLASTS AND LAMPS

A. Provide lighting fixtures as indicated on drawings, completely installed, wired and connected in place, tested and left in satisfactory operating condition.

B. Fixtures shall be complete with all necessary appurtenances, wiring, lamp holders, lamps,

reflectors, glassware, canopies, wall bases, pendants, etc., and shall be wired with Type A.F. fixture wire not less than No. 14 AWG. All pendants and canopies shall be of the type required for the specific lighting fixtures and shall be of the same manufacturer as the lighting fixture. Fixtures shall carry U.L. labels.

C. Fluorescent fixture finish shall be applied after fabrication and shall consist of a five stage

phosphate treatment followed by an application of white baked enamel or polyester finish with a reflection of 85% or better. Use of pre-painted stock will not be acceptable. Lenses shall be clear virgin acrylic prismatic type, 0.125" thick.

D. Fluorescent fixture ballasts shall be rated for 120 volt operation, sound rated "A", rapid

start, high power factor "P" type and shall be of the latest energy saving magnetic, G.E. Maxi-Miser I, Advance Mark 3 or equal. Ballasts shall be CBM/ETL tested and U.L. listed.

E. High intensity discharge ballasts shall be of the rating, type and make as recommended

by the lamp manufacturer, which properly matches the lamps to the power line by providing the appropriate voltages and impedances for which the lamps are designed. All H.I.D. ballasts shall be U.L. labeled.


16300 - Page 2 of 3

F. Self-contained emergency lighting unit shall be constructed to conform to Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Standard No. 924 and installed to conform to Article 700 of the National Electrical Code. It shall be designed to provide automatic emergency lighting for a minimum of 90 minutes upon failure of normal electric power. Emergency power source shall be a 6 volt rechargeable maintenance free (gel type) battery. Electronics shall be of solid state design. Unit shall be rated for 120/277 volts, 60 Hertz. Controls shall include a "test" switch and a pilot light assembly indicating charge rate. Lamps shall be two sealed beam type glare-free lamp housing constructed of injection molded thermoplastic.

G. Exit sign housing shall be constructed of white injection molded thermoplastic housing

with radius stresses stencils, capable of eliminating light leaks Normal illumination with no hot spots provided by two 15T6-145V extended life energy conserving AC lamps, derated to 12 watts for 120 volt operation. Snap out arrows and downlight to comply with plans. Full field flexibility shall be capable through the use of individual conversion kits.

H. Provide all lamps, plus five percent spares for each type required. All incandescent lamps

shall be inside frosted 130 volt and/or of a type designed for a specific lighting fixture. All fluorescent lamps shall be energy saving "Lite White", "GE Wattmaster II" or equal, with lamp color as specified on the Drawings. Only the number of lamps required to provide adequate lighting for work yet to be done, in each area, and acceptable temporary lighting elsewhere (both as determined by the Architect) shall be installed by this Contractor at the time lighting fixtures are installed and tested. Remaining lamps are to be installed not more than ten (10) days prior to acceptance of the project by the Owner. All lamps shall be in working order at the time of final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the Architect. This contractor shall replace all defective lamps with new lamps until the work is finally accepted.

I. Lighting fixtures shall be as cataloged on the fixture schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 1.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND WIRING

A. Install lighting fixtures to types indicated, where shown and at indicated heights, in accordance with lighting fixture manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that fixtures comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. Comply with NEMA standards and requirements of National Electrical Code pertaining to installation of interior lighting fixtures and with applicable portions of NECA's Standard of Installation".

B. Fasten fixtures securely to structural support member of building and check to ensure that

solid pendent fixtures are plumb. C. Ensure that support system for lay-in type ceilings is adequate to support the lighting

fixtures specified. D. Wiring to lay-in type fixtures shall be arranged to facilitate relocation of the fixture to the

adjacent ceiling tile in any direction. E. Clean interior lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation. F. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period.


16300 - Page 3 of 3

G. Upon completion of installation of interior lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting.

H. At date of substantial completion, replace lamps in interior lighting fixtures which are

observed to be noticeably dimmed after Contractor's use and testing, as judged by the Architect/Engineer. Furnish stock or replacement lamps amounting to 5% (but not less than one lamp in each case) of each type and size lamp used in each type fixture. Deliver replacement stock as directed to Owner's storage space.

I. Interior lighting

1. Refer to schedule in drawings.


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 16390 - GROUNDING

Page 1 of 3

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. Submit material specifications data for products specified under PART 2 - PRODUCTS. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT/MATERIAL/MANUFACTURER DESCRIPTION:

A. Bonding Jumpers: 1. Flexible tinned copper braid, sized per NFPA 70-250, unless indicated otherwise

on the drawings.

B. Buried Ground Cable: 1. Bare rope lay type copper conductor, sized as per NFPA 70-250, unless indicated

otherwise on the drawings.

C. Ground Conductors: 1. Refer to Low Voltage Conductors Section, sized per NFPA 70-250, unless

indicated otherwise on the drawings.

D. Bonding Bushings: 1. Insulated throat bushings with set screw or compression type ground conductor

terminal.

E. Bonding Lugs: 1. Bonding/grounding lug with set-screw or compression ground conductor terminal

and a hardened point bonding screw.

F. Grounding Clamps: 1. Bolt-together hardened corrosion-resistant grounding clamp of copper alloy or

bronze cast body and hardware with serrations and/or biting teeth to assure positive grip and continuity.

G. Grounding Terminal:

1. Solderless lug(s) for multiple conductors, rated for copper through 500 MCM. Mount on a wood base for wall mounting. Provide a label reading "Service Ground".

H. Welded Ground Connections:

1. Exothermic welding process (Thermoweld) conforming to the size, materials and arrangements of the connections to actually fuse the materials together.

I. Ground Rods:

1. Steel core with bonded copper-clad jacket. 3/4" diameter by 10' long.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Product Application

A. General Products - Bushings, Clamps and Lugs:

1. Utilize products for their intended application and install as directed by manufacturer and NFPA 70-250, except where indicated otherwise on the drawings.


Page 2 of 3

B. Welded Ground Connections: 1. All cable-to-cable, cable-to-structural steel, cable-to-pipe or rod connections located in soil or encased in concrete. C Grounding Terminal: 1. Provide grounding terminal, mounted on the wall adjacent to the service entrance disconnect equipment. D. Ground Rods: 1. At each service entrance, pad mounted transformer, generator,

lightning down conductor. 3.02 Installation

A. General: 1. Clean and prepare surfaces for ground connections to ensure electrical continuity.

B. Common Grounding Electrode System:

1. Bond together each of the following to each main service ground bus with a #3/0 green insulated "XHHW" copper ground conductor in a 1" PVC conduit to provide a common grounding electrode system.

a. Underground main metallic water pipe, connect ahead of the first valve, provide a bonding jumper across water meter. b. Structural steel building frame, connect to nearest vertical member originating at a footing. c. Concrete-encased electrode consisting of twenty feet (20') of #4 AWG bare copper conductor encased in a footing or foundation in direct contact with the earth. d. A made electrode consisting of three ground rods spaced twelve feet apart in the form of an equilateral triangle and bonded together to form a loop. The entire rod assembly shall be installed a minimum of 24" below finished grade and shall provide a resistance to ground of 25 ohms or less. e. Provide a certified meggar test and submit test data to Architect to assure compliance.

C. Bonding:

1. Bond the following conduits to each other, the housing can and ground bus with a #3/0 insulated copper ground wire and grounding bushings. a. All conduits entering any free standing enclosure, switchboard, switchgear, motor control center, dimmer equipment, generator, transformers, transfer switch, or other equipment. b All conduits entering each main service device. Bond together all

non-current carrying metallic parts to provide continuous grounded path for all devices, equipment and enclosures. c. And all receptacles, switches and wiring devices by providing an 8" long green insulated copper ground conductor from device grounding lug to the metallic box or the branch circuit grounding conductor.

2. Bond all items connected by flexible type conduits by providing a green insulated copper ground conductor installed in the conduit and bonded to the enclosure or ground bus at each end. Bond all items connected by conduits by providing a green insulated copper ground conductor installed in the conduit or raceway. This applies to entire distribution system.


Page 3 of 3

D. Telephone Grounding:

1. Provide a #6 AWG green insulated copper ground conductor in a 3/4" PVC conduit from each backboard to the main service ground bus and bond.


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY IVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 16400 - COMMUNICATION & FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL




"Electrical General Provisions" and 16100 "Basic Materials and Methods". 1.02 CONTENTS

A. Specified herein: Requirements for telephone system installation.


• Scope

• Raceways, Pull Boxes, Outlet Boxes

• Telephone and TV Service Conduits

• Fire Alarm System 1.03 SCOPE

A. The extent of communication system work is indicated on the drawings and by requirements of this Section. Telephone system work consists of a system of outlets, conduit and wiring from all outlets to above first floor ceiling, plywood backboards and service entrance conduit with pull wire. Television system work consists of plywood backboard, conduit and wiring from each room to TV service entrance. Fire Alarm System work includes a system of raceways, outlets, sending and sounding devices as required. Data system work consists of plywood backboard, conduit, wiring, from each room to first floor data closet.

B. Scope also includes all wiring and cabling required for a complete system. Refer to

drawings for additional information. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 RACEWAYS, PULL BOXES, OUTLET BOXES:

A. Shall be as specified in Section 16100 Electrical Basic Materials and Methods. 2.02 TELEPHONE AND TELEVISION BACKBOARDS:

A. Telephone and television backboards shall be 3/4" fire rated plywood painted gray, sized as indicated on the drawings or required by installing utility.

2.03 COMMUNICATION SERVICE CONDUITS:

A. Service conduits shall be rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) suitable for underground burial. Size of conduits shown shall be verified with serving utilities.

B. Conduits shall be UL listed, manufactured to NEMA TC-2 and WC 1094 specifications.

C. Provide all necessary couplings, spacers, fittings and adapters required for a complete

installation. D. Conduit shall be supplied on television, and telephone runs to corridor for maintenance

purpose. 2.04 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM


Page 2 of 5

A. Furnish and install a complete fully addressable fire alarm system as described herein

and shown on the drawings.

B. All equipment, devices, etc., shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories and shall meet all local and state requirements.

C. Operation: The operation of any manual or automatic alarm initiating device shall activate

all alarm indicating appliances until the alarm initiating device has been restored to normal and a reset switch manually actuated at the control panel. Operation of any alarm indicating device shall light it's associated red alarm light emitting diode (LED). Fire alarm system supplier shall provide an approved alarm verification system without using two cross-zoned detectors.

D. Control Unit: The control unit shall be modular and use solid state components. Alarm

initiating circuits shall meet the requirements of National Electrical Code 760 for power limited applications and shall function with up to 100 ohms resistance through alarm initiating device contacts and associated wiring. The control unit shall contain an internal audible trouble signal with silencing switch, system reset switch and lamp test switch along with individual system LED's for trouble, remote annunciator trouble and ground faults. A trouble signal silencing switch shall be furnished, so that faults on the alarm initiating circuits and the alarm indicating circuits can initiate trouble signals and be silenced independently of each other. When trouble signals are silenced after being sounded by faults, whether the alarm initiating circuits or the alarm indicating circuits, the trouble signal shall restore to normal automatically without manual restoration of the associated trouble signal silence switch. A common alarm and a common trouble relay shall be furnished. Each relay shall provide a dry form "C" contact wired to terminals. A trouble signal shall sound and a separately identified LED light upon ground fault between any supervised circuit and ground whether or not the ground fault causes the system to be inoperative. All field wiring connections shall be made to terminals. Each initiating circuit shall be able to be individually tested for alarm or trouble or be disabled at the control panel so protection from other circuits is not affected during maintenance or test periods. Each circuit shall be supervised for opens and shorts. A trouble LED shall be provided on each alarm indicating board. The alarm indicating circuits shall operate 24v DC polarized alarm indicating appliances. (Both audible and visual units on same circuit.) Each alarm initiating zone shall be provided with dry Form "C" contacts to provide for zone annunciation and shutting down air circulating fans and release doors within the alarm zone as indicated on drawings. The control panel shall provide for 20 zones, including spare zones as shown on the Drawings. Additional batteries shall be provided to provide if necessary for 24 hours of operation and five minutes of alarm in case of power failure. Control panel shall be flush mounted. Control unit shall be Auto Call Model MDK. Units manufactured by Simplex, Pyrotronics, Gamewell, ECI, and Notifier will be considered equal.

E. Manual Fire Boxes: Manual fire boxes shall be non-coded and shall be semi flush

mounted in finished areas and surface mounted in unfinished areas. Stations shall be double action with "LIFT TO BREAK" plastic shield. When operated, fire boxes shall remain mechanically locked until manually reset. Construction shall be of rigid metal with raised lettering and clear plastic shield with lettering "LIFT TO BREAK - PULL LEVER DOWN". Manual fire boxes shall be Auto Call double action Type 4050. Double action stations requiring external hammer to break glass to gain access to actuating lever shall not be acceptable.


Page 3 of 5

F. Automatic Detectors: The smoke detectors shall be photoelectric type interchangeable and compatible with ionization type. The light source shall be pulsed infrared LED for low power consumption under standby conditions. Internal detector circuits shall be shielded against electrical interference. It shall be resistant to transients, "noise" and RF interference. The detectors shall be furnished with a round base to enable the detector to operate on a 2 wire loop with end-of-line resistors. It shall have a built-in LED output for alarm indication. Detector shall be equal to Auto Call B401B/2451.

G. Audio/Visual Warning Alarms Standard Rooms and Corridors: The audio/visual alarms

shall provide 95 dB minimum sounds at a distance of 10’. The visual signal shall be xenon flasher with 8000 candlepower and a flash rate of 3 per second. Components shall be mounted in a back box. For flush mount installations, a trim ring shall be provided. Alarm shall be Auto Call #V45084R.

H. Audio/Visual Warning Alarms, Hearing Impaired Rooms: The audio/visual shall provide

85 dB minimum sounds at 10’, and a visual strobe rated at 100 candelas. Alarm shall be Gentex #GX-90-S.

I. Stand Alone System Detection Smoke Alarms: Furnish and install smoke alarms in each

of the guest rooms, connected to an unswitched source of 120 volt power. Detector shall be photoelectric type, direct wired, 120 volts, with power-on indicator light, test-normal switch, alarm horn 85 decibels or greater with alarm activated dry contacts for remote annunciation. Unit shall be UL approved and meet all national codes and shall be equal to ESL #320CC.

J. Stand-Alone System Detection for Handicapped Units: Furnish and install smoke alarms

in each guest room connected to an unswitched source of power-on indicator light, test normal switch, alarm horn 85 dB or greater 120 volt power. Detector shall be photoelectric type, direct wired, with and Xenon flasher rated 100 candela WMH battery backup Gentex #7910CS.

K. Door hold and release devices shall be semi-flush mounted electromagnetic holders to

match system used. When energized they shall hold the door with approximately 25 pounds of force. The doors shall be released on activation any fire alarm system initiating device. Devices shall be U.L. approved and meet all national codes and shall be equal to Auto Call Model #FM998.

L. Connect to and wire completely to flow and tamper switches furnished and installed by

others, flow and tamper to be zoned separately and wired per manufacturer's wiring diagrams.

M. Heat detectors shall be combination fixed temperature 200 F, and rate of rise. Unit shall

be Auto Call #602.

N. Duct Smoke Sensors: Complete with a keyed ceiling mounted remote test switch with alarm lamp, wall mounted not higher than 80 inches above finished floor.

a. Point addressable duct smoke sensors are to be installed at locations in supply and/or return air ducts of all air handling systems 2000 CFM or greater, or as required by local codes.

O. Carbon Monoxide Detectors: Provide carbon monoxide detectors in mechanical rooms containing gas fired water heaters and in guestrooms, public spaces, and any location with gas fired fireplaces or other gas appliances. Connect so that detectors provide Supervisory alarm at Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) and Fire Alarm Annunciator Panel. Carbon monoxide detector shall be Macurco #CM-S1.


Page 4 of 5

2.05 STAIRWAY AUDIO VISUAL RESCUE INTERCOM

A. General: The contractor shall supply and install an audio/visual rescue intercom system, to meet ADA requirements, as manufactured by Tektone Sound & Signal, Inc., Lake Park, Florida. One distributor must supply entire system and be with a reasonable area of the installation site. Supplier must be properly staffed to provide service on the equipment on a continuing basis.

B. System Operation: When a call is placed at a remote rescue location by pressing the

momentary button on the station, the following must occur: 1. The call placed light on remote station will illuminate; 2. The light on the master station annunciator will illuminate, designating the rescue

area originating the call; 3. The associated station button can be pressed at the master panel and the call

can be answered by speaking into the speaker/microphone; 4. Answering the call at the master will light a lamp on the remote station signifying

that the call has been answered; 5. The remote master station may be used by fire department or rescue squad for

communication with desk or remote stations or by late night customers to communicate with desk; a. The call can be silenced at the master; however, it must be canceled at the station placing the call.

C. Equipment:

1. Remote Station: Tektone SIR-150N, dual gang, stainless steel plate, with call button, call placed light, and call answered light and cancel switch. Call placed SCR control added to maintain call answered light;

2. Master Station: Tektone NC-150 Series. Extruded aluminum frame and panels for strength and durability. (No plastic panels permitted). Modular in design makes them easier to install and service. Lamps will be rectangular with room numbers hot stamped in the lens. (Transfer lettering not accepted.) Must have call tone silence switch and silence mode indicator. Unit shall be complete with desk mounting cabinet;

3. Annunciator Control: Tektone PK-151, rugged aluminum case housing all control and circuitry, with screw terminal connection, solid state, 16 volt, AC or 24 volt DC;

4. Power Supply: Tektone SS-106, 30 volt AC, U.L. approved transformer; 5. Back Box: Tektone OF-202 sized as necessary with OH-202N frame; 6. Remote Master Station: Tektone NC150N, four zones with properly sized

OH203N back box and OF203 frame. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TELEPHONE SYSTEM

A. Furnish and install plywood panel in electrical room and 4" PVC conduit to utility pole.

B. Furnish and install conduit system with pull wires to outlets in Lobby-Office area.

C. Prewire guest rooms by providing conduit from each room outlet to above the accessible first floor ceiling space and install cables from each room to the service backboard. Cables will be furnished by the Owner.

D. Telephones, telephone equipment, telephone jacks, and final connections will be provided

by the Owner's telephone contractor. 3.02 TELEVISION SYSTEM


Page 5 of 5

A. Furnish and install plywood panel in electrical room and 3" PVC conduit to utility pole.

B. Provide conduit to above first floor ceiling space from Guest Room outlet in each room and Lounge outlet to plywood panel.

C. TV jacks, cable and other material and connections will be provided by the Owner's TV

contractor. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

A. Provide in accordance with manufacturers instructions all wiring conduit and outlet boxes required for the installation of a complete system. A representative of the manufacturer shall supervise all final connections and completely test and adjust the system.

B. All wiring is to be installed in accordance with NFPA 72A and continuously color coded.

C. Fire alarm system shall be tested in the presence of the local Fire Marshall and all

authorities having jurisdiction and all required certification obtained.

D. System installer shall submit complete wiring diagrams for approval. Wiring shall be Class B supervised with minimum #18 AWG for initiating circuits #14 AWG for signaling circuit. Type FPL cable may be used where approved by local codes.

E. System shall be zoned for one zone for each building section divided by fire walls. Zoning

shall be in compliance with local code officials.

F. Alarm circuit shall be for general alarm.

G. Provide tie to city where required.

3.04 STAIRWAY AUDIO VISUAL RESCUE INTERCOM

A. Installation: All wiring and installation must be completed according to manufacturers’ specifications. Final inspection must be made by a factory trained and authorized technician. A complete manual, (operating-installation-service) must be left at installation site along with point drawing showing specific system installed with color code legend of wiring.

B. Warranty: All components carry a one-year warranty against workmanship. Repair of

replacement will be made at the discretion of the manufacturer. 3.05 TEST, GUARANTEE AND DRAWINGS:

A. The fire alarm system shall be pre-tested and certified by the fire alarm vendor per NFPA 72 prior to acceptance testing. A copy of the manufacturer representative's certification report shall be made available to the local code official prior to the acceptance test by the local Code Official.

B. Test completed system in the presence of the Public Authority.

C. Provide equipment necessary to perform testing.

D. Refer to Submittals Paragraph for required certifications and documents to be provided with closeout documents.


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 16455 - MOTOR & CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS

16455 - Page 1 of 2

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. Submit material specifications data for products specified under PART 2 - PRODUCTS.

B. Submit shop drawings for fabrication erection, wiring and connections not fully described by manufacturer's data. Provide scaled plan and elevation drawings of

each disconnect rated over 600 Amperes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT/MANUFACTURER DESCRIPTION:

A. Disconnect Switches: 1. Product Description: a. Labeled UL #98 (600A & less) or UL 977 (over 600A). b. NEMA KS-1 heavy duty type, load make/break rated. c. NEMA 1 enclosure for indoor protected type applications, NEMA 3R enclosure for damp or wet locations. d. Voltage, amperage rating and number of poles to match circuit characteristics; fused or non-fused as indicated. e. Amperage rating as indicated or to match fuse rating. f. Horsepower rated for motors served. g. Equipped with both isolated neutral and ground terminals. h. Underwriters Laboratories listed interrupting rating of 200,000 RMS symmetrical Amperes.

2. Designated Manufacturers: a. General Electric Company b. I.T.E. Electrical Products c. Square D Company d. Westinghouse Electric Corporation

3. Related Items: a. Provide equipment labels indicating equipment designation, Voltage, fuse rating and type. b. Provide fuses; refer to Fuses.

B. Fractional HP Manual Motor Starter/Disconnect Switches:

1. Product: a. Manually operated motor starting toggle switch. b. Quick-make and break switch operation with silver alloy contacts. c. Rated for up to 1 HP, (16 Amperes continuous), 240 Volt, 1 or 2 pole to match the applied circuit characteristics for single phase motors up to 1 HP rated. d. Rated for up to 10 HP, 30 Amperes @ 250 Volt, and 20 Amperes @ 600 Volt, 2 or 3 pole to match the applied circuit characteristics for motors up to 10 HP. e. NEMA 1 enclosure for indoor protected type applications and NEMA 3R for damp or wet locations. f. Surface mounted unless indicated as flush mounted.

2. Designated Manufacturers: a. General Electric Company - Manual Motor Starting Switches b. Square D Company - AC Manual Motor Starting Switches c. Westinghouse Electric Corporation - B100 Manual Starters d. ITE Electrical Products - Manual Motor Starting Switches

3. Related Items: a. Provide equipment labels indicating equipment designation circuit

voltage and phase and overload rating.

HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 16455 - MOTOR & CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS

16455 - Page 2 of 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PRODUCT APPLICATION:

A. Selection: 1. Provide motor and circuit disconnects at each location as indicated, sized

to match the equipment ratings and circuit characteristics. 2. Provide fuses or thermal overload protection to match actual installed equipment requirements.

3.02 INSTALLATION:

A. Coordination: 1. Verify the characteristics and protective requirements for the actual

equipment installed. 2. Coordinate mounting arrangements and clearances with the equipment of other trades.

B. Mounting:

1. Mount on wall or backboard approximately 5'-0" A.F.F. where possible. 2. Provide support channel frame for mounting when wall mounting is not available. 3. Avoid mounting directly on equipment housings. 4. Keep disconnects used as the electrical power disconnect means for

servicing within sight from the controller or equipment position.


HAMPTON INN & SUITES, SALINA, NY DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL ARCH. JOB #: 214041 SECTION 16500 - WIRING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

16500 - Page 1 of 1

PART 1 - GENERAL




"Electrical General Provisions". 1.02 CONTENTS

A. Specified Herein: Requirements for wiring mechanical equipment.

B. Described herein are the following: 1. Scope 2. Equipment, motors and appliances.

1.03 SCOPE

A. The work under this Section shall comprise, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install all power, control and interlock wiring as indicated on the plans

and herein described, including all disconnect switches, starters, controls and accessory equipment not supplied as part of the equipment furnished by others or as may be required to properly power and control the equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS: Refer to Section 16100. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FURNISH AND INSTALL WIRING TO EQUIPMENT, MOTORS AND APPLIANCES AS

FOLLOWS

A. Bathroom Exhaust Fans: Wire fan to operate with light on a common switch.

B. Through-the-Wall Air Conditioning Units: Furnish and install wire from the unit sub base receptacle to the 120/208 volt power panel indicated.

C. Hot Water Recirculator: Furnish and install a motor starting switch with thermal overload

protection and pilot light and wire complete to the 120 volt pump motor through an aquastat attached to the hot water recirculating line to operate the pump as required.

D. Telephone Equipment Panel: Furnish and install duplex receptacles at the plywood panel

for the use of the telephone company.

E. Television Equipment: Furnish and install a duplex receptacle at the plywood panel for the use of the television equipment installer. Furnish and install conduit with pull string to desk for pay cable computer interconnection.

G. Exhaust Fans: Where shown, wire fan to operate on a thermostat furnished by the

mechanical contractor.
